Gold Hill DC HOD - Building Management System

s
Smart Infrastructure-RSS
SIEMENS LIMITED.
Smart Infrastructure - RSS
#49,Ground floor, Jyothi Mahal
St.Marks Road
Bangalore-560001
Document Identification:
HANDOVER DOCUMENT – BMS SYSTEM

SL/STS/GOLD HILL DC/HOD/BMS,REV-0
Date: 25.03.2021
Page 1 of 709
HANDOVER DOCUMENT – BUILDING MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
PROJECT: GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER
CLIENT : M/s. SIEMENS TECHNOLOGY & SERVICES.
CONSULTANT : M/s. NETCON TECHNOLOGIES (I) PVT. LTD.
Page 2 of 709
INDEX
Gold Hill Excelsior Data Center, Bangalore
Package : Building Management System
Sl No Description Page Reference

1 Datasheets 04-244
2 Design Details & Calculations 245-255
3 Factory Test Certificates 256-271
4 Installation Report 272-273
5 Commissioning Report 274-306
6 Configuration Details 307-308
7 User Manual 309-661
8 Standard Operating Procedure 662-672
9 Spare List 673-674
10 Asbuilt Drawing & Schematic 675-702
11 Periodic Maintenance Schedule 703-704
12 Escalation Matrix 705-706
13 Warranty Certificate 707-709
SI RSS STS
Signature
Singh Digitally signed by Singh Abhishek
DN: cn=Singh Abhishek,
o=Siemens, email=abhishek-
Abhishek singh@siemens.com
Date: 2021.06.01 12:55:28 +05'30'
Name
Subhojeet Basu
Date
25.03.2021
Digitally signed by Dharmaraj C

DN: cn=Dharmaraj C gn=Dharmaraj C c=India
Dharmaraj C l=IN o=Netcon Technologies India Pvt Ltd
ou=Data Center e=dharmaraj@netcon.in
Reason:
Location:
Date: 2021-06-01 23:28+05:30
Page 3 of 709
Handing Over
Document
Datasheets
Page 4 of 709
SIEMENS TECHNOLOGY & SERVICES
GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SUMMARY
Sl.No Description Make Model No
1 BMS Software Siemens Desigo CC

2 Controller Siemens PXC Series
3 Modules Siemens TX-IO Modules
4 Enclosure Rittal NA
5 Hydrogen Sensor MSR MC2-D-P3440-A-0-P
6 Temperature & RH sensor Siemens QFA2020
7 Bypass Valve Siemens VVF47.100
8 Bypass Valve Actuator Siemens SBV61
9 Differential Pressure Transmitter Siemens QBE3100-D4
SITRANS FM MAG 5100
10 BTU Meter Siemens
W
11 M-bus Converter Siemens WTV531-GA5060
12 Temperature Sensor Greystone HATXAPA22CA002
13 Network Switch Cisco SG350-28
14 BMS Server Dell R540
15 Recording Server Dell R540
16 BMS & CCTV Workstation HP Z2G4
17 Monitor HP V220
18 55" LED Display Samsung QB55R
Unrestricted Page 5 of 709

Desigo CC – the next-generation
management station
A new way to manage your facility efficiently and gain optimal
building control.
Answers for infrastructure and cities.

Page 6 of 709
Desigo CC sets new management
station standards
Desigo CC™ is the latest in Siemens high-standard management stations,
representing the best of 30 years of worldwide experience. Completely new
software is based on state-of-the-art technologies. Powerful, new patented
functionalities and capabilities provide optimal control of your facility. A global
team of experts designed the user interface and workflow concepts for maxi-
mum efficiency. Desigo CC gives you a comfortable, easy and efficient way to
operate, monitor, supervise, optimize and manage your system. Desigo CC
also ensures and prepares your installed systems for future migrations. Web
client options reduce maintenance costs over the entire life cycle. With its
future-oriented and discipline-independent approaches, Desigo CC enhances
and protects your investments today and in the future.
Page 7 of 709
Personalize your
building experience
Flexible and easy to use Enhanced user experience
Highlights
Desigo CC is a flexible building manage- User experience is enhanced by state-of-
ment station that simplifies tasks and the-art operation capabilities that meet ■■ I s an intelligent system that
processes in an intelligent way. It allows today’s user needs. With leading-edge supports your daily operation
you to complete building control and drag-and-drop and copy-and-paste func- in a comfortable way
safety tasks in a fast, secure and comfort- tionalities, Desigo CC’s local and Web ■■ implifies and streamlines
S
able manner. engineering capabilities meet the needs navigation by preventing
of all types of users. Best-in-class scalable overlapped windows and
The combination of a hierarchical tree graphics adapt automatically to the user’s focuses attention on
operator’s assigned tasks
structure with a primary pane, opera- window size, for comfortable, easy and
tional pane and related items pane auto- efficient system management. ■■ an interact with multiple
C
matically links the information that is disciplines such as HVAC,
lighting, shading, power,
most important to you. It gives you a Importantly, the local and remote opera-
fire safety and security
quick overview of the system and puts tion and engineering capabilities are
focus and attention on the most relevant identical. This gives users the confidence ■■ I mplements new workflows
information. It also avoids overlapped and flexibility needed to achieve the best and user interface designed
for efficiency
windows and distraction from secondary possible operation of your facility and
actions. systems. ■■ CADA system for multiple
S
integrations
Desigo CC provides a powerful capability Open platform for easy integration
to incorporate your organization, roles Desigo CC is based on a SCADA platform,
and responsibilities into the system. Each making it fully compliant with BACnet
operator and user will see, act and react Advanced Operator Workstation (B-AWS)
only to his specific and predefined area of and enabling integration of any type of
responsibility and scope of operation. building disciplines, such as heating, ven-
tilation and air conditioning, lighting and
shading. Its extensible driver concept
allows integration through BACnet or other
protocols. As a building management sta-
tion, it is certified to fulfill the highest
possible BACnet profile B-AWS.
Page 8 of 709
Desigo CC simplifies
your business
A true open system Integration for superior control
Desigo CC is designed to meet your Desigo CC is designed for integration.
current and future building control and It interacts with multiple disciplines such
safety and security needs. Its flexible, as HVAC, lighting, shading, power, fire
open system solidly positions you for the safety and security. It is a native 64-bit
future without locking you into a closed, system that easily integrates into the
proprietary system. As a standards-based modern IT landscape with the latest
platform that works with many protocols, Microsoft OS and full VMWare virtualiza-
it is a true open system. For example, tion support.
Desigo CC supports OPC and allows
integration with third-party systems. Desigo CC addresses the multi-disciplinary
functions of building management and
Desigo CC handles complex operations eliminates many of the challenges with
while keeping it easy for users. Its intelli- traditional building management stations.
gent navigation concept presents all Now you can see in real time what is
related information and data in a simple occurring across your building from one
and focused presentation. Desigo CC also place, instead of having to access multiple
suggests the next step. systems. You can leverage synergies and
profit from a new, consolidated view of
The sophistication of Desigo CC lies in your building.
its flexibility and ease of use. The same
software is used for all disciplines, A system that grows with your needs
eliminating the need to train staff on Every building presents unique challenges.
different applications. Desigo CC also Desigo CC was designed to help you
grows with your business needs, in manage and adapt to the changing needs
project size and functionality as well as of your unique facility and organization.
disciplines. As a system based on open You can customize the interface to show
architecture, Desigo CC easily adapts to the details you need about a building
your needs today and tomorrow. system, area or piece of equipment.
Page 9 of 709
Side-by-side trend comparison
Desigo CC is highly adaptable. The be saved and modified for future use.
Highlights
management station features templates Historical information is stored in standard
and tools that help you set initial parameters SQL database format. ■■ I ncreases productivity to
for your buildings and then adapt these help you profit from proven
based on changing needs and conditions. Desigo CC operators get step-by-step usability
Data aggregation pulls information from guidance for critical and important tasks ■■ Grows with your future needs
many different sources. Historical analysis and events that may occur in the system. ■■ ffers a quick overview of
O
gives you side-by-side trend comparisons. You can be confident that all relevant the system data with direct
and important steps and tasks for any navigation to any level of
With investigative event treatment, you event in the system are treated correctly, detail required
can easily navigate the system to visualize quickly and reliably. The reaction processor ■■ elps building operators to
H
logged events. You can start with a piece for system-wide, automatically triggered securely and reliably execute
of equipment, then quickly and easily interactions minimizes the manual their tasks
access all of the information related to operation time for recurring tasks. So ■■ rovides easy Web access
P
that piece of equipment. The system the management station does the work throughout the facility
helps you drill down to the information for the operators.
■■ ffers confident operation
O
you need to address issues, solve problems
without compromise, both
and improve performance. Desigo CC provides the capability to locally and through the Web
analyze system data from different time
■■ llows simultaneous
A
Desigo CC also allows the dynamic creation frames. This patented trend-comparison
operation and engineering
of BACnet objects at runtime. With this capability is unique in the market and
mechanism, experienced users have allows new possibilities for the user.
advanced functionality at their fingertips It enhances the user’s capability to
that could not be achieved previously. elaborate and drill down to a particular
system component to find potential
Efficient support and secure operation failures and reduce errors in the system.
Desigo CC makes reporting easy. Its
powerful report engine includes a wide Desigo CC libraries are unique and help
range of standard reports and lets you to build your system quickly without
create and customize reports that can be compromising on quality. The ability to
tailored with real-time charts, graphs drag and drop your CAD drawings or
and other relevant images and pictures. bitmap images in various formats will
allow you to use them online and
It can automatically create and run operate the plant immediately.
reports based on a preset schedule or
event trigger, and the system allows
users to create report templates that can
5
Page 10 of 709
Event management
Enhance security now,

meet goals in the future
Keep your people and facilities safe Driven by your needs
A safe environment promotes comfort Desigo CC’s open platform supports most
and productivity. Desigo CC has the standards. It allows data acquisition and
capability to integrate building control propagation both to and from other IT-
with fire and life safety equipment as based systems, contributing to a modern
well as video cameras. Detailed graphics, data warehouse concept. Its advanced
giving you greater insight to make better analytical tools and templates identify
decisions. and address issues before they become
problems.
Its highly optimized and logical interface
enables you to improve event management The management station pulls together
throughout your facility. You can monitor the relevant details identified for each
fire safety systems and video cameras user based on the individual’s unique
through centralized controls, enhancing profile, role and view of the system.
your ability to intelligently respond to Its user interface allows users to make
events. Desigo CC can play a critical role personalized views. You can tap into its
in maintaining the comfort and safety of customization capabilities to create your
your building and your people. own system view that reflects your
unique needs and workflow processes.
Page 11 of 709
Desigo CC is easy to navigate, letting Given Desigo CC’s ease of use and ready
Highlights
you examine critical equipment, monitor adaptability, you can quickly benefit from
processes, reduce errors and find vital it. You can optimize the safety, comfort ■■ onitoring of your building
M
information you need when you need and performance of your building in one conditions through integrated
it most. You can access information and interface. Its many features and capabili- video cameras and centralized
controls
communicate with multiple building ties make Desigo CC a valuable investment
systems. now that you can build on for the future. ■■ igh-performance handling
H
and event management
Building operation goes Web ■■ dvanced analytical tools that
A
Desigo CC is designed to work with your identify and address issues
IT infrastructure using the latest technology before they become problems
and standard databases. Its client server ■■ esigned to work with IT
D
architecture supports both classic desktop infrastructure and standard
clients and Web clients, offering the IT protocols
same user interface and functionality. ■■ entralized controls that let
C
you optimize the comfort of
your building
Page 12 of 709
Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Infrastructure & Cities Sector
Building Technologies Division
International Headquarters
Gubelstrasse 22
6301 Zug
Switzerland
Tel +41 41 724 24 24
Siemens Building Technologies

Infrastructure & Cities Sector
Brunel House Siemens Pte Ltd
Sir William Siemens Square, Frimley Building Technologies Division
Camberley The Siemens Center
Surrey, GU16 8QD 60 MacPherson Road
United Kingdom Singapore 348615
Tel +44 1276 696000 Tel +65 6490 6000
Siemens Ltd Siemens LLC

Infrastructure & Cities Sector Building Technologies Division
Building Technologies Division The Galleries, Building 2
22/F, AIA Kowloon Tower, Landmark East Downtown Jeble Ali
100 How Ming Street PO Box 2154
Kwun Tong, Hong Kong Dubai, UAE
Tel +852 2870 7888 Tel +971 4 366 0000
The information in this document contains general descriptions of technical options available, which do not always
have to be present in individual cases. The required features should therefore be specified in each individual case at
the time of closing the contract. The document contains a general product overview. Availability can vary by country.
For detailed product information, please contact the company office or authorized partners.
© Siemens Switzerland Ltd, 2014 • Order no. 0-92331-en • 11405
Answers for infrastructure and cities.

Our world is undergoing changes that force us to think “We are the trusted technology partner for
in new ways: demographic change, urbanization, global energy-efficient, safe and secure buildings and
warming and resource shortages. Maximum efficiency infrastructure.”
has top priority – and not only where energy is concerned.
In addition, we need to increase comfort for the well-being
of users. Also, our need for safety and security is constantly
growing. For our customers, success is defined by how
well they manage these challenges. Siemens has the
answers.
www.siemens.com/desigocc
Page 13 of 709
s 9 222
9222P01
Desigo™ PX
Automation stations PXC....D

modular series PXC...-E.D
PXA40-…
• Freely programmable modular automation stations for HVAC and building
services plants.
• Communications
– BACnet/IP
– BACnet/LonTalk
• BTL label (BACnet communications is BTL tested)
• Comprehensive management and system functions (alarm management,
time schedules, trends, access protection, etc.)
• Connection of TX-I/O modules with any data point mix
• Connection of TX Open modules for the integration of third-party devices
• Integration of LONMARK®-compatible devices
• Integrated web server for generic operaion
• For stand-alone applications, or for use within a device or system network
• Scalable range of touch panels and operating devices
Validity This data sheet is valid for firmware Desigo V6.1 and higher.
For older devices / firmware see data sheet CM1N9222en_13.
CM1N9222en_15
2017-11-27 Building Technologies
Page 14 of 709
Functions
Modular, freely programmable automation stations for HVAC and building control
systems.
• Management functions (alarm management with alarm routing, schedulers,
trend functions, remote management, access protection with individually defined
user profiles and categories).
• For stand-alone applications or for use within a device or system network.
• BTL-tested BACnet communications on LonTalk, PTP or IP, compliant with
BACnet standard (Rev. 1.12 -for Desigo V6.0 and later) including B-BC profile.
• AMEV profiles AS-A and AS-B to recommendation "BACnet 2011 - Version 1.2
(for Desigo V6.0 and later)".
• Freely programmable, using the D-MAP programming language (close
resemblance to CEN standard 11312). All function blocks, available in libraries,
can be graphically connected.
• Engineering and commissioning using the Desigo Xworks Plus tool.
• Connection of field devices to a customized mix of TX-I/O modules.
• Connection of installed PTM-I/O modules – the perfect solution to migrate legacy
systems.
• Connection of TX Open modules to integrate third-party devices such as
variable speed drives, pumps or energy counters.
• Connection of detached I/O islands with integration
• Connection of LonMark® compatible devices
• Low voltage protection and start-up management to protect the devices against
fluctuating voltage.
• Scalable range of touch panels, Web solutions and operator units.
Modular automation station with connected TX-I/O modules
Overview of automation stations – modular series

Connection of TX-I/O modules, TX Open modules, PTM-I/O modules via PXX-
PBUS and LonWorks devices via PXX-L11/12.
Activation of generic Web operation with PXA40-W1
BACnet/IP PXC00-E.D PXC50-E.D PXC100-E.D PXC200-E.D

BACnet/LonTalk PXC00.D PXC50.D PXC100.D PXC200.D
Number of physical data
– 52 200 350
points TX-I/O
Number of TX Open
Modules for e.g. Modbus, – 5 5 5
M-Bus
Number of data points
– 400 600 1000
(TX-I/O and TX Open)
Number LonWorks
60 or 120 10 60 or 120 1) 60 or 120 1)
Devices via PXX-Lx
1)
In concurrent use with TX-I/O modules, the number of devices is reduced in
relation to capacity
2 / 12
Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

Building Technologies Page 15 of 709 2017-11-27
Extension capabilities of the automation stations
TXM1.. : The flexible range of TX-I/O modules for signaling, measuring,

counting, switching, and positioning. The I/O modules with local manual control
on the module housing permit the operator to control the equipment manually
directly from the cabinet.
1)
TX-I/O devices Type Data sheet
Digital input module 8 or 16 I/O points TXM1.8D, CM2N8172
TXM1.16D
Universal module without / with local TXM1.8U, CM2N8173
operation and LCD TXM1.8U-ML
Super universal mod. without / with local TXM1.8X, CM2N8174
operation and LCD TXM1.8X-ML
Relay module without / with local TXM1.6R, CM2N8175
operation TXM1.6R-M
Resistance measuring module (for Pt100 4-wire) TXM1.8P CM2N8176
Relay module bistable TXM1.6RL CM2N8177
Triac module TXM1.8T CM2N8179
Power supply module 1.2 A, Fused 10A TXS1.12F10 CM2N8183
Bus interface module, Fused 10A TXS1.EF10 CM2N8183
1)
TXM1... und TX Open modules require TXS1.12F10 power supply modules.
TX Open: Flexible platform to integrate third-party systems and devices such

as Modbus or M-Bus. Tested integrations solutions and applications based on
our large know how.
1)
TX Open devices Type Data sheet
TX Open module up to 40 data points TXI2-S.OPEN CM1N8187
TX Open module up to 160 data points TXI2.OPEN CM1N8187
1)
TXM1... und TX Open modules require TXS1.12F10 power supply modules.
PXX-L11/12.. : Extension modules allow for flexibly connecting LonWorks

devices such as room controllers and third- party devices.
PXX-.. devices 2) Type Data sheet

Integration of max. 60 devices PXX-L11 CM1N9282
(PXC50..D: max. 10 devices)
Integration of max. 120 devices PXX-L12 CM1N9282
(PXC50..D: max. 10 devices)
2)
A high number of LonWorks devices reduces the performance of the PXC for
connected TX-I/O or PTM-I/O data points respectively.
3 / 12

PXX-PBUS : The extension module allows connecting installed PTM-I/O
modules to PXC50/100/200…D automation stations, making them the perfect
solution to migrate legacy systems.
PXX-.. device Type Data sheet

PBUS extension module PXX-PBUS CM1N9283
Note: One supply module TXS1.12F10 is required as bus supply for the P-bus
for each P-bus strand. A TXS1.12F10 can supply max. 64 load units (1 LU =
12.5 mA, DC 24 V)
TXA1.IBE : Remote IO Islands with Integration

Easy to use solution via simple adapter for remote TX-I/O and TX Open. No
programming/ parameterization required.
Device Type Data sheet

Island bus expansion module TXA1.IBE CM2N8184
Device combinations with the automation stations
Desigo Control Point

Device Type Data sheet
BACnet touch panels with integrated
data management and web server
functionality:
7.0 " PXM30.E A6V10933111
10.1 ", 15.6 " PXM40.E, PXM50.E A6V10933114
BACnet/IP web server with standard PXG3.W100-1 A6V10808336
functionality
BACnet/IP web server with enhanced PXG3.W200-1
functionality
Client touch panels with data
management in the PXG3.Wx00-1
web server
7.0 " PXM30-1 A6V10933111
10.1 ", 15.6 " PXM40-1,PXM50-1 A6V10933114
Operator units for automation stations
Type Data sheet

Local operating unit PXM10 CM1N9230
Network operator unit in a PXM20-E CM1N9234
1)
BACnet/IP network
Network operator unit in a PXM20 CA1N9231
1)
BACnet/LonTalk network
Cable (3 m) between PXM10 or PXA-C1 --
PXM20 and PXC....D
1)
In the case of a PXC....D automation station, one PXM10 and one PXM20
operator unit may be connected, but not twice the same type.
Accessory
Adapter for Firmware download PXA-C2
4 / 12

Mechanical design
The compact construction enables the automation stations to be mounted on a

standard mounting rail.
PXC....D 4
8
5 5
8
5
6
3
2 7
9222z01
5 8
FW
Reset
1 Plastic housing
2 Cover to interface for extension module
3 Front cover or PXM40-... option module
4 Plug-in terminal block with screw terminals (operating voltage)
5 Interface for network, operator units, tool, etc.
6 LED display for devices and system status
7 Island bus connector (not on PXC00…)
8 Slider for mounting on DIN rail
9 Battery for real time clock (Lithim Typ CR2032): Backup during power
breakdown.
10 Battery for trend data and present parameters (Lithium Typ FR6/AA):
Backup during power breakdown.
11 Reset pin: Pressing the pin forces a restart.
12 Firmware pin: If the pin is pressed during restart (reset), the present DMAP
program is deleted from the FLASH.
13 Service pin: To identify the automation station in the IP network / LonWorks
network during commissioning.
5 / 12

LED indicators LED Color Activity Function
RUN Green Continuously ON Power OK
Continuously OFF No power
FLT Red Continuously OFF OK
Continuously ON Fault
Rapid flashing Firmware missing / corrupt
BAT Red Continuously OFF Battery OK
Continuously ON Battery empty– replace!
COM Yello Continuously ON Connection to switch OK
w Continuously OFF No connection to switch
Flashing Communication
INF Red Freely programmable
Service pin (Desigo)
SRV Red Continuously OFF OK
(Ethernet) Continuously ON No connection to switch or
DHCP Server
Flashing No IP address configured
Flashing per wink Physical identification of automation
command *) station after receipt of wink command
SRV Red Continuously OFF LONW ORKS node is configured
(LONWORKS Continuously ON Faulty LONW ORKS chip, or service pin
Bus) currently depressed
Flashing LONW ORKS node is not configured
Flashing per wink Physical identification of automation
command *) station after receipt of wink command
1)
Battery change If one of the batteries has low charge the "BAT" LED lights up ant the
automation station sends a system event.
Remaining battery life after a "Low batt" event:

• Battery for real time clock (Type CR2032): several days.
• Battery for trend data and present parameters (Type AA Lithium): approx. 15
hrs. Alkaline: several days.
• As long as there is an external power supply, the battery may be removed for
unlimited time.
STOP Caution! • To prevent hardware damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD), a wrist strap
with earth cable must be used during the battery change.
• Note the special disposal notes on Li batteries.
• Devices Series A: Do not replace an alkaline battery with a Lithium battery!
*) Wink command pattern:

21s 9222z02
5 Hz 5 Hz
2s 1s 2s 1s
6 / 12

Technical data
General device data Operating voltage AC 24 V ± 20% (SELV / PELV) or

AC 24 V class 2 (US)
Safety extra-low voltage SELV or HD 384
Extra-low voltage PELV
Operating frequency 50/60 Hz
Energy consumption Max. 24 VA (same for all types)
Internal fuse 5A
Operating data Processor Motorola Power PC MPC885

Storage 64MB SDRAM / 32MB FLASH
(96MB total)
Accuracy class 0.5
Data backup in event of Battery Backup of realtime clock Battery operation (cumulative): 10 years
power failure • Lithium type CR2032 (field replaceable)Without load: 10 years
Battery Backup of SDRAM 1x AA: Battery operation (cumulative): min. 2 weeks
(field replaceable)
• Lithium Type FR6/AA: Without load: Lithium 10 years
Devices series B and later
• Alkaline: Devices series B Without load: Alkaline 4 years
Communication interfaces PXC....D PXC...-E.D

Building Level Network LONW ORKS FTT Transceiver 10 Base-T / 100 Base-TX
(screw terminals (B)) IEEE802.3, Auto-sensing
(RJ45 (D))
Local communication • PXM20 (BACnet/LonTalk) *)
(HMI) (RJ45 (C))
Local communication • PXM10 (serial)
(HMI, Tool) (RJ45 (E)) • PXM20 (BACnet/LonTalk) *)
• FW Download Tool
Connection cable max. 3 meters
Local communication • PXM10 (serial) • PXM10 (serial)
(HMI) (RJ45 (G))
USB host interface • RS232 modem (via USB-RS232 • RS232 modem (via USB-RS232
(Modem) adapter cable PXA-C3) adapter cable PXA-C3)
USB device interface (for future applications) (for future applications)
Ethernet interface
Interface type 100BaseTX, IEEE 802.3 compatible
Bit rate 10 / 100 MBit/s, autosensing
Protocol BACnet on UDP/IP
Pin RJ45 socket, screened
LONW ORKS bus interface
Network TP/FT-10
Baud rate 78 kBit/s
Protocol BACnet
Interface chip Echelon Processor TMPN3150B1AF
Island bus interface (CD, CS )
Protection Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof
*) only ONE PXM20 per automation station
7 / 12

Plug-in screw terminal Power supply, bus, signals Solid or stranded conductors
0.25…2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Simple cable lengths, cable Connection cable Ethernet and PXM20-E Max. 100 m
types (see Installation Guide Cable type Standard at least CAT5
PX, CA110396) UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair)
or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair)
Connection cable LONWORKS bus See Installation Guide CA110396
Cable type CAT5
Connection cable PXM10 Max. 3 m
Connection cables for island bus See CM110562
Protection data Housing protection standard IP 20 to EN 60529

Protection class III to EN 60730-1
Ambient conditions Normal operation To IEC 60721-3-3

Environmental conditions Class 3K5
Temperature 0...50 °C
Humidity 5…95 % r.h. (non-condensing)
Mechanical conditions Class 3M2
Transport To IEC 60721-3-2
Temperature -25…70 °C
Standards, guidelines and Product standard EN 60730-1 Automatic electrical controls for
approvals household and similar use
Product family standard EN 50491-x General requirements for Home and
Building Electronic Systems (HBES)
and Building Automation and Control
Systems (BACS)
Electromagnetic compatibility (Applications) For use in residential, commerce,
light-industrial and industrial
environments
EU conformity (CE) CM1T9222xx *)
UL certification (US) UL916 http://database.ul.com/
FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class B
RCM-conformity (EMC) CM1T9222en_C1 *)
EAC conformity Eurasia conrformity
AMEV: Supports profiles AS-A and AS-B as BACnet 2011 en, V1.1
of AMEV guideline "BACnet in public
buildings"
Environmental compatibility Product environmental declaration (contains CM1E9222 *)

data on RoHS compliance, materials compo-
sition, packaging, environmental benefit,
disposal)
Dimensions See “Dimensions”
Weight Excluding packaging With packaging

All types 0,489 kg 0,531 kg
*) The documents can be downloaded from http://siemens.com/bt/download.
8 / 12

Connection terminals and interfaces
PXC....D
1 2 3 4 5
(A) HMI
(C)
T
24 V~
(B)
CLA
CLB
HMI / TOOL
(E)
(F)
(G)
HMI
9222Z10
PXC...-E.D
1 2 3
T (A)
24 V~
(D)
(F)
(G)
HMI
9222Z11
1, 2 24 V ~, ⊥ Operating voltage AC 24 V
Plug-in screw terminal block
3 Functional ground
(A) USB host interface (for modem via PXA-C3 adapter cable)
4,5 (B) CLA, CLB LONW ORKS bus Plug-in screw terminal blocks
(C) HMI RJ45 interface (LONW ORKS) for operator unit PXM20 (tool as well)
(D) RJ45 interface for Ethernet
(Operator unit PXM20-E can be connected to hub/switch)
(E) HMI / Tool RJ45 interface (LONW ORKS and serial) for PXM10, PXM20 and tool
(F) USB device interface (for future applications)
(G) HMI RJ45 interface (serial) for operator unit PXM10
9 / 12

Pin assignment for RJ45 plug
Plug (C) Pin description Pin description

"HMI" (LONWORKS)
1. LONW ORKS Data A (CLA) 5. Unused
2. LONW ORKS Data B (CLB) 6. Unused
3. G0 / GND 7. Unused
9222z12
8. Unused
87654321
4. G / Plus
Plug (D) RJ45 socket screened, standard connection in accordance with AT&T256
Ethernet
1. Tx+ 5. Unused
2. Tx – 6. Rx –
3. Rx + 7. Unused
9222z12
87654321
4. Unused 8. Unused
Plug (E) 1. LONW ORKS Data A (CLA) 5. Unused

"HMI / Tool" 2. LONW ORKS Data B (CLB) 6. Unused
(LONWORKS and serial) 3. GND 7. COM1 / TxD
9222z12
87654321
4. +24 V max. 300 mA 8. COM1 / RxD
(PXM20)
Plug (G) 1. unused 5. Unused

"HMI" (serial) 2. unused 6. *)
3. G0 / GND 7. COM1/TxD
9222z12
87654321
4. G / Plus 8. COM1/RxD
*) 6 Unused (PXC….D)
Connected to pin 8 (PXC…-E.D)
Connection diagrams
Connecting TX-I/O See Planning and Installation Guide TX-I/O, CM110562.

modules and field
devices
10 / 12

Dimensions
All dimensions in mm
Automation stations, system controllers PXC….D
74
4.5
(PXA40-...)
35.5
96
90
93
45
43
192 44
199 66
4 70
9222m14
81 (PXA40-...)
Disposal
The device is considered electrical and electronic equipment for disposal in

terms of the applicable European Directive and may not be disposed of as
domestic garbage.
• Dispose of the device through channels provided for this purpose.
• Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and regulations.
• Dispose of empty batteries in designated collection points.
Lithium batteries: May catch fire, explode or leak. Do not short circuit,
charge, disassemble, dispose of in fire, heat above 100 °C, or expose to
water.
Disposal: Seal battery terminals with tape.
11 / 12

Published by:
Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
Gubelstrasse 22
6301 Zug
Switzerland
Tel. +41 41-724 24 24 © Siemens Switzerland Ltd 2009
www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies Delivery and technical specifications subject to change
12 / 12

8 175
TX-I/O™
Relay modules TXM1.6R

TXM1.6R-M
• Two fully compatible versions:
– TXM1.6R: – 6 volt-free relay outputs
– Individual I/O point signaling with green I/O status LED
– TXM1.6R-M: As TXM1.6R, but with the following additional features
– Three-color I/O status LED (red, yellow or green)
– Local override (to ISO 16 484-2)
• 6 relay outputs, which can be individually configured as:
– Maintained contact or pulse, 1 … 3-stage
– Three-position control output with stroke algorithm
• Mixed voltages (AC 250 V mains voltage and SELV/PELV 24 V) as well as
mixed phases are permitted on adjacent I/O points of the module
• Compact DIN format, small footprint
• Separate terminal base and plug-in I/O module for convenient handling
– Self-establishing bus connection for maximum ease of installation
– Terminal isolation function for fast commissioning
– I/O module replaceable in seconds, without rewiring and without affecting
the full functioning of the remaining I/O modules
• Terminal strips are required to connect N and PE of the field devices
• Simple strategy for operation and display
– I/O status LED for each I/O point
– LEDs for fast diagnostics
• Double-sided labels for identification of all I/O points
CM2N8175en_10
Page 26 of 709
Functions
The modules support the following I/O functions:
Signal type (TRA) Signal type Description

BO Relay NO 250V Q250 Maintained contact relay, changeover contact
BO Relay NC 250V N/O, N/C contact
BO Pulse On-Off Q250-P On/off pulse Q250-P With self-latching and 2 channels
Q250A-P Q250A-P With dual-winding switch
BO Pulse *) Pulse
MO Steps Q-M1…M4 Multistate maintained contact, 1…6-stage

mutually exclusive electronic relay interlock
MO Pulse Q250-P1…P5 Multistate pulse, 1…5-stage

mutually exclusive electronic relay interlock
BO 3-Pos Relay Y250T Pulse, control signal, three-position output,

internal algorithm for stroke running time
*) DESIGO V4, V5: Use MO Q250-P1.
For a detailed description of these functions, please refer to document CM110561,

"TX-I/O™ functions and operation".
Notes • Q250B Use TXM1.6RL with BO Bistable NO / NC

For switched current <100mA, see CM110563, Replacement of legacy
signal types.
• QD Feedback must be implemented using separate digital inputs
e.g. with TXM1.8D, see CM110563.
Compatibility
Support of signal types and functions in different building automation and control
systems: see TX-I/O Engineering and installation manual, CM110562
Type summary
ASN Relay module TXM1.6R

Relay module TXM1.6R-M with local override
Delivery The terminal base and the plug-in I/O module are interconnected and delivered in the
same box.
Accessories The available accessories include address keys, label sheets, and spare transparent
label holders. Refer to data sheet CM2N8170.
2/10
Siemens TXM1.6R, TXM1.6R-M – Relay modules CM2N8175en_10

Technical and mechanical design
For a description of the features common to all TX-I/O™ modules, please refer to the
TX-I/O™ Engineering and installation manual, document CM110562.
Indicators and operator controls
Connection terminals (No. 1 screwdriver for slotted or

recessed-head * screws)
with test pickup (for 1.8...2 mm pins) and terminal number
Signal designation
Override status LEDs (yellow)
Address key and module status LED
I/O point numbers
Override button (TXM1.6R-M only)
I/O status LEDs (TXM1.6R: green;

TXM1.6R-M: colors can be configured, green/yellow/red)
* Combined slotted / recessed-head screws from mid-2012
I/O status LEDs • The I/O status LEDs indicate the status of the relays
• The LEDs on the TXM1.6R are green.
• In the case of the TXM1.6R-M the LEDs are three-colored. If the I/O function
supports it, the module can display Alarm = red and Service = yellow, besides
Normal = green
• The LEDs are also used for diagnostics
Module status LEDs • The module status LED illuminates the transparent address key
• The (green) LED shows the module status as a whole (as opposed to the I/O points)
• It is also used for diagnostics
Address key • The module operates only with the address key inserted
• The module address is mechanically encoded in the address key
• When replacing the plug-in I/O module, the address key must be swiveled outward. It
remains plugged into in the terminal base.
Terminals • The relay contacts of the individual I/O points are volt-free, and are not
interconnected. The switched voltage must be provided separately for each I/O point.
• Mixed voltages (AC 250 V mains voltage and SELV/PELV 24 V) as well as mixed
phases are permitted on adjacent I/O points of the module
3/10

Local override (TXM1.6R-M only)
Override button • Pressing an override button in the middle enables/disables local override
• Pressing "+" for one of the I/O points activates the relay or switches control to the
next stage up (depending on function)
Repeated or sustained pressure switches several stages until the function stops at
the highest stage.
• Pressing "–" for one of the I/O points deactivates opens the relay or switches control
to the next stage down (depending on function)
Repeated or sustained pressure switches several stages until the function stops at
the lowest stage.
Override status LED • The yellow "Override" LED indicates that local override is active
• All safety-relevant functions must be implemented with external solutions

Warning • The local override must not be used for safety shutdown operations
• In compliance with the standard (ISO 16 484-2, Section 3.110), the module
executes all local overrides directly, without safety precautions or interlocks.
 Full responsibility lies with the operator. 
Module labeling
The plug-in I/O module has a removable transparent cover (the label holder) for
insertion of a label.
1
8172z11
Disposal
The device is classified as waste electronic equipment in terms of the European Direc-
tive 2012/19/EU and should not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste.
The relevant national legal rules are to be adhered to.
Regarding disposal, use the systems setup for collecting electronic waste.
Observe all local and applicable laws.
4/10

Engineering, mounting, installation
Please refer to the following documents

Document Number
TX-I/O™ functions and operation CM110561
TX-I/O™ Engineering and installation manual CM110562
Replacement of legacy modules CM110563
Mounting
Permitted orientation The TX-I/O™ devices can be installed in any orientation:

It is important to provide adequate ventilation so that the admissible ambient
temperature (max. 50°C) is not exceeded.
Technical data
Supply Operating voltage DC 21.5 ... 26 V

(bus connector on side) Extra low voltage SELV or PELV
in accordance with HD384
Max. power consumption TXM1.6R 1.7 W
TXM1.6R-M 1.9 W
(for the sizing of power supplies, see CM110562)
Protection Bus connector on side No protection against shortcut and

incorrect wiring with AC / DC 24 V
Switching outputs Number of switching outputs 6 (changeover contact)

External fuse protection for incoming cable
• Slow blow fusible link Max. 10 A
• Circuit breaker Max. 13 A
Circuit breaker tripping characteristic Type B, C or D to EN 60898
Contact data for AC Voltage range min. AC 12 V max. AC 250 V
Current, resistive load max. 4 A
Current, inductive load (cos phi ≥ 0.6) max. 3 A
Switching current min. 1 mA at AC 250 V
min. 10 mA at AC 12 V
Current on make max. 20 A during max. 10 ms
max. 10 A during max. 1 s
For UL applications 3 FLA, 9 LRA, 1/4 HP, 4 (3) A
Contact data for DC Voltage range min. DC 12 V, max. DC 30 V
Current, resistive load max. 3 A at DC 30 V
min. 10 mA at DC 12 V
Current on make max. 3 A
Service life of contact With 0.1 A resistive 8 million switching operations
for AC 250 V With 0.5 A resistive 2 million switching operations
With 4.0 A resistive (N/O) 0.2 million switching operations
Reduction factor with inductive load 0.6 (max. 3 A inductive)
(cos phi ≥ 0.6)
Insulation resistance Reinforced insulation between relay outputs and AC 3750 V, to EN 60 730-1
system electronics
Mixed voltages (AC 250 V mains voltage and SELV/PELV 24 V) as well as
mixed phases are permitted on adjacent I/O points of the module
5/10

Connection terminals Mechanical design Cage clamp terminals
Solid conductors 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 4mm2
or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Stranded conductors without connector sleeves 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Stranded conductors with connector sleeves 1 x 0.25 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
(DIN 46228/1) or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Screwdriver No. 1 Screwdriver for slotted or
recessed-head * screws
with shaft diameter ≤ 4.5 mm
* Combined slotted / recessed-
head screws from mid-2012
Max. tightening torque 0.6 Nm
Test pickups (terminals) For pin diameter 1 x 1.8 … 2.0 mm
Local override Local override device ISO 16 484-2, Section 3.11

(TXM1.6R-M only)
Classification Mode of operation of automatic electrical controls Type 1

to EN 60730 Contamination level 2
Mechanical design Devices are suitable for use in equip-
ment with protective class I and II
Housing Protection standard to EN 65029
protection standard Front-plate components in DIN cut-out IP30
Terminal base IP20
Ambient conditions Operation To IEC 60721-3-3

Climatic conditions Class 3K5
Temperature -5...50 °C
Humidity 5…95 % rh
Transport / storage To IEC 60721-3-2
Humidity 5…95 % rh
Standards, directives and Product standard EN 60730-1 Automatic electrical controls for
Electromagnetic compatibility (Applications) For use in residential, commercial
and industrial environments
EU conformity (CE) T10870xx *)
RCM conformity (EMC) T10870en_C1 *)
UL approbation UL 916, UL 864
Environmental The product environmental declaration contains CM1E8175 *)

compatibility data on RoHS compliance, materials composition,
packaging, environmental benefit, disposal)
Color Terminal base and plug-in I/O module RAL 7035 (light gray)
Dimensions Housing to DIN 43 880, see "Dimensions"
Weight Without / with packaging TXM1.6R 231 / 252 g
TXM1.6R-M 241 / 262 g
6/10

Connection diagrams (examples)
Terminal layout TXM1.6R, TXM1.6R-M

I/O point (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Supply 3 9 15 20 26 32
N/O contact 2 8 14 21 27 33
N/C contact 4 10 16 19 25 31
For functions with several I/O points:

• Always use adjacent I/O points
• Each function must be confined to one module only
• The I/O points have a fixed sequence within the function, e.g. the first I/O point is for
switch-off.
Maintained contact U U Relay module

BO Relay NO 250V (1) (2) (3)
BO Relay NC 250V
2 4 8 10 14 16 Q1 Switched load
AC / DC 24 ... 230V
3 9 15
(N/O contact)
Q2 Switched load
(N/C contact)
K3
K3 Step switch /
8175z13_01
Q1 Q2 pulse switch /
bistable relay
On/off pulse U Q250-P Q250A-P

U Relay module
BO Pulse On-Off (1) (2) (3) (4)
• Self-latching and 2 K1 Power contactor,
channels (Q250-P) 2 4 8 10 14 16 21 19 self-latching
3 9 15 20
• Dual-winding switch K2 Dual-winding stepping
AC / DC 24 ... 230 V
AC / DC 24 ... 230 V
(Q250A-P) switch, bistable relay

Pulse on I/O point (2) = K1 ON
Pulse on I/O point (1) = K1 OFF
K1 K2
8175z14
Pulse on I/O point (4) = K2 ON

Pulse on I/O point (3) = K2 OFF
Pulse control for single- U U Relay module

stage load with control (1) (2) (3) (4)
K1 Power contactor,
from two separate
self-latching
control loops of equal 2 4 8 10 14 16 21 19
3 9 15 20
status Control circuit 1:
AC / DC 24 ... 230 V
BO Pulse On-Off Pulse on I/O point (2) = ON

Pulse on I/O point (1) = OFF
Control circuit 2:
8175z19
K1
Pulse on I/O point (4) = ON
7/10

Pulse control for single- U U Relay module
stage load with control of (1) (2)
K1 Power contactor,
equal status from two
self-latching
remote switching locations 2 4 8 10
3 9
BO Pulse On-Off Control circuit 1:
S1 Pulse on I/O point (2) = ON
S3 S2 S4
External control location A:
K1
8175z20
AC / DC 24 ... 230 V S1 OFF button
S2 ON button
External control location B:

S3 OFF button
S4 ON button
Maintained contact, U U Relay module

3-stage (1) (2) (3)
MO Steps
2 4 8 10 14 16 K1, K2, K3 Contactors for
3 9 15
Stages 1…3
I/O point (1) ON = Stage 1

K1 K2 K3 I/O point (2) ON = Stage 2
8175z15
I/O point (3) ON = Stage 3

AC / DC 24 ... 230 V
Pulse, 1-stage
DESIGO V4, V5: Use Q250-P1
DESIGO TRA Use BO Pulse
Pulse, 3-stage U U Relay module

MO Pulse (1) (2) (3) (4)
K1, K2, K3 Contactors with self-
latching feature
2 4 8 10 14 16 21 19
3 9 15 20 for Stages 1 … 3
**) Pulse on I/O point (1) = OFF
Pulse on I/O point (2) = Stage 1
Pulse on I/O point (3) = Stage 2
AC / DC 24 ... 230 V
K2 *) K1 *) K1 *) Pulse on I/O point (4) = Stage 3
K3 *) K3 *) K2 *) *) External self-latching is
optional
**) For other means of control,
8175z16
K1 K2 K3
replace bridge with external
circuit
8/10

Pulse control for a three- U1 U2
stage load with control (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4)
from two control loops of
2 4 8 10 14 16 21 19 2 4 8 10 14 16 21 19
equal status 3 9 15 20 3 9 15 20
MO Pulse
K2 *) K1 *) K1 *)
K3 *) K3 *) K2 *)
8175z21
K1 K2 K3
AC / DC 24 ... 230 V
U1, U2 Relay modules K1, K2, K3 Contactors with self-latching

feature for Stages 1 … 3
*) External self-latching is optional
Control loop 1: Control loop 2:

U1 Pulse on I/O point (1) = OFF U2 Pulse on I/O point (1) = OFF
U1 Pulse on I/O point (2) = Stage 1 U2 Pulse on I/O point (2) = Stage 1
Control signal, three- U

position output (1) (2)
BO 3-Pos Relay U Relay module
2 4 8 10
AC / DC 24 ... 230 V
3 9
Y1 Y2 Y1 Control signal OPEN

M Y2 Control signal CLOSE
8175z17
9/10

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
90
67
45
77.5
70
44
22
98
108
7.1
8172M01
64 3
Published by:
Gubelstrasse 22
6301 Zug
Switzerland
10/10

8 172
TX-I/O™
Digital input modules TXM1.8D

TXM1.16D
– TXM1.8D: 8 inputs, each with a three-color LED (green, yellow or red)
– TXM1.16D: As TXM1.8X, but 16 inputs, each with a green LED
• 8 or 16 digital inputs; individually configurable for status signals,
status pulses (with a memory function) or counter pulses (up to 10 Hz)
• All terminals are directly on the I/O modules, allowing direct connection of
field devices without additional terminal strips.
– I/O status LED for each I/O point; mode of operation (N/C or N/O) depends
on I/O function
– LEDs for fast diagnostics
CM2N8172en_06
Page 36 of 709
Functions
Function Signal type (TRA) Signal Description

type
Status indication BI NO D20 Volt-free, interrogation (maintained contact), N/O contact
BI NC D20R Volt-free, interrogation (maintained contact), N/C contact
Status pulses BI Pulse NO D20S Volt-free, interrogation (pulse)

BI Pulse NC N/O / N/C contact
Button input BI Push NO -- Button input single / dual , volt-free

BI Push NC N/O / N/C contact
Status multistate MI Switch -- Multistate input, 2...8-stage, volt-free, interrogation
Counter pulses CI Mech (10/25Hz) C Volt-free, N/O contact, interrogation (pulse, max. 10 Hz)
(TXM1.16D: I/O points1 ... 8 only)
For a detailed description of these functions, please refer to document CM1105761,

"TX-I/O™ Functions and operation".
Compatibility
Type summary
ASN Digital input module TXM1.8D

Digital input module TXM1.16D
Delivery The terminal base and the plug-in I/O module are interconnected and delivered in the
same box.
2/8
Siemens TXM1.8D, TXM1.16D – Digital input modules CM2N8172en_06


Signal designation
Address key and

module status LED
I/O point numbers

(I/O points 9 ... 16: TXM1.16D only)
I/O status LEDs

(TXM1.8D: Configurable - green/yellow/red
TXM1.16D: Green)
I/O status LEDs • The I/O status LEDs indicate the status of the inputs and outputs (peripheral
devices)
• The LEDs on the TXM1.16D are green
• In the case of the TXM1.8D the LEDs are three-colored. If the I/O function supports
it, the module can display Alarm = red and Service = yellow, besides Normal = green
• The LEDs are also used for diagnostic purposes
Module status LED • The module status LED illuminates the transparent address key
• The (green) LED shows the status of the module as a whole (as opposed to the
status of the I/O points)
• When replacing the plug-in I/O module, the address key must be swiveled outward. It
3/8

Module labeling
8172z11
Disposal
The devices are considered electronics devices for disposal in terms of European
Directive 2012/19/EU and may not be disposed of as domestic garbage.
• Dispose of the devices through channels provided for this purpose.
Document Number
TX-I/O™ Functions and operation CM110561
Mounting

4/8

Technical data
Supply Operating voltage DC 21.5 ... 26 V (SELV / PELV)

(bus connector on side) or DC 24 V class 2 (US)
Max. power consumption TXM1.8D 1.1 W
TXM1.16D 1.4 W
Protection All terminals of the modules Against shortcut and incorrect

wiring with AC / DC 24 V
Bus connector on side No protection!
Field devices
Insulation resistance The of the connected field devices against mains voltage must comply with the
requirements for safety extra-low voltage (SELV) or protection by extra-low voltage
(PELV) as per HD 384.
Measuring cables Cable material Solid or stranded copper wire
Cable cross section See manual CM110562
Permitted cable length max. 300 m
Digital inputs / Digital inputs are not electrically separated from the system electronics.
counter inputs *) Mechanical contacts must be volt-free
Electronic switches must comply with SELV / PELV standards.
Contact sensing voltage DC 21.5 ...25 V

Contact sensing current 1.6 mA (initial current 10 mA)
Contact resistance with contacts closed Max. 200Ω
Insulation resistance with contacts open Min. 50kΩ
Min. closing / Max. bounce Max. Counting

opening time [ms] time [ms] frequency
including bouncing (symmetric)
Maintained contact 80 40
Pulse contact 50 30
Counter *) 40 30 10 Hz
9
Counter memory *) 0 ... 4.3 x 10 (32 bit counter)
*) Counting function for TXM1.16D: I/O points 1 ... 8 only
Connection terminals Mechanical design Rising cage terminals

or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Stranded conductors with connector sleeves 1 x 0.25 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
(DIN 46228/1) or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Test pickups (terminals) For pin diameter 1 x 1.8 … 2.0 mm
Classification to EN 60730 Mode of operation of automatic electrical controls Type 1
5/8

Contamination level 2
Mechanical design Protection class III

Terminal base IP20
Temperature –5 ... 50 °C
Humidity 5 … 95 % rh
Temperature –25…70 °C
Electromagnetic compatibility (Applications) For use in residential,
commercial, light-industrial and
industrial environments
UL certification (US) UL 916, UL 864,
http://ul.com/database
CSA certification Class 4812 http://directories.csa-
international.org/
EAC conformity Eurasia conformity
Environmental compatibility Product environmental declaration (contains data CM2E8172 *)
on RoHS compliance, materials composition,
Weight Without / with packaging TXM1.8D 164 / 185 g
TXM1.16D 199 / 220 g
6/8

U U Digital input module

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
K1 Status contact (N/O)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 K2 Status contact (N/C)
K3 Pulse contact (N/O)
K4 Pulse contact (N/C)
S5 Electronic switch
8172z13
K1 K2 K3 K4 S5
Terminal layout
TXM1.8D, TXM1.16D TXM1.16D only

I/O point (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
1)
System neutral ⊥ (–) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
Input (+) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
1)
Terminals 1, 3, 5 etc. are system neutral terminals
– They are interconnected, not in the terminal base but in the plug-in I/O module.
This means that when the I/O module is removed, there is no connection.
– The system neutral of a digital input can be connected to any system neutral
terminal
For wiring details refer to the TX-I/O™ Engineering and installation manual, CM110562.
7/8

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
90
67
45
77.5
70
44
22
98
108
7.1
8172M01
64 3
Published by:
Gubelstrasse 22
6301 Zug
Switzerland
8/8

s 8 173
TX-I/O™
Universal modules TXM1.8U

TXM1.8U-ML
– TXM1.8U: 8 inputs/outputs with LED signal / fault indication
– TXM1.8U-ML: As TXM1.8U, but with additional local override facility
with LCD display (LO/ID to ISO 16 484-2)
• 8 universal I/O points, individually configurable as
– Digital input: maintained contact, pulse or counter
– Analog input: sensor, 0..10V
– Analog output: 0..10V
• All terminals are directly on the I/O modules, allowing direct connection of
field devices without additional terminal strips.
– I/O status LED for each I/O point; mode of operation (N/C or N/O) and
brightness depend on I/O function
– LEDs and LCD for fast diagnostics
CM2N8173en_11
Page 44 of 709
Functions
Function Signal type Signaltyp Description

Status signal BI NO D20 Volt-free, interrogation (maintained contact), N/O contact
BI NC D20R Volt-free, interrogation (maintained contact), N/C contact
Status pulses BI Pulse NO D20S Volt-free, interrogation (pulse), N/O, N/C contact
BI Pulse NC
Counter pulses Volt-free, N/O contact, interrogation (pulse)
CI El (100Hz) C Counting frequency max. 100 Hz (electronic counter)
CI Mech (10/25Hz) max. 25 Hz (mechanical counter)
Voltage, AI 0-10V U10 DC voltage 0 ... 10 V
resistance and
AI 2500 Ohm R2K5 Resistance 2500 Ω
temperature
AI Ni1000 extended Ni1K Temperature sensor LG-Ni 1000 ohms, up to 180 °C
AI Ni1000 R1K Temperature sensor LG-Ni 1000 ohms
AI PT1K375 Pt1K 375 Temperature sensor Pt 1000 (USA)
AI PT1K385 Pt1K 385 Temperature sensor Pt 1000 (Europe)
AI Pt1000 P1K Resistance Pt 1000 ohms and resistance transmitter
AI T1 (PTC) T1 Temperature sensor PTC
AI NTC10K NTC10 K Temperature sensor NTC 10 K
AI NTC100K NTC100 K Temperature sensor NTC 100 K
Proportional AO 0-10V Y10S Proportional control output, DC 0 ... 10 V, with storage of

output signal control value
For a detailed description of these functions, please refer to document CA110561,

"TX-I/O™ functions and operation".
Compatibility
Type summary
ASN Universal module TXM1.8U
Universal module TXM1.8U-ML with LCD display and local override
Delivery The terminal base and the electronic plug-in unit are interconnected and delivered in
the same box.
2/10
Siemens TXM1.8U, TXM1.8U-ML – Universal modules CM2N8173en_11


Signal designation
Override status LEDs (yellow)
Address key and module status LED
LCD panel (TXM1.8U-ML only)
I/O point numbers
Override button (TXM18U-ML only)
I/O status LEDs (green)
I/O status LEDs • The I/O status LEDs (green) indicate the status of the inputs and outputs (peripheral
devices)
• They are also used for diagnostics
Module status LED • The module status LED illuminates the transparent address key
• The LED (green) shows the module status as a whole (as opposed to the status of
the I/O points)
• When replacing the I/O module, the address key must be swiveled outward. It
3/10

Local override and LCD display (TXM1.8U-ML only)
For a detailed description, please refer to document CM110561, "TX-I/O™ Functions

and operation".
Override button • Pressing an override button in the middle enables or disables the local override
• Pressing "+" or "–" respectively increases or reduces the output value.
• Only outputs can be overwritten. Any attempt to overwrite an input results in an error
indication.
Override status LED • The yellow "Override" LED indicates that local override is active
LCD display • The following information is displayed for each I/O point:
– Configured signal type
– Symbolic display of process value
– Information for diagnostics.
• All safety-relevant functions must be implemented with external solutions
Warning • The local override must not be used for safety shutdown operations
• In compliance with the standard (ISO 16 484-2, Section 3.110), the module
executes all local overrides directly, without safety precautions or interlocks.
 Full responsibility lies with the operator. 
Module labeling
1
8172z11
Disposal
The devices are considered electronics devices for disposal in terms of European
Directive and may not be disposed of as domestic garbage.
• Dispose of the devices through channels provided for this purpose.
4/10

Document Number
TX-I/O™ functions and operation CM110561
Mounting

Technical data
Supply Operating voltage range DC 21.5 ... 26 V (SELV / PELV) or

(bus connector on side) DC 24 V class 2 (US)
Max. power consumption TXM1.8U 1.5 W
TXM1.8U-ML 1.8 W
Protection All terminals of the modules Against shortcut and incorrect

wiring with AC / DC 24 V
Bus connector on side No protection!
Field devices
Insulation resistance The of the connected field devices against mains voltage must comply with the
requirements for safety extra-low voltage (SELV) or protection by extra-low voltage
(PELV) as per HD 384.
Measuring cables Cable material Solid or stranded copper wire
Cable cross section See manual CM110562
Permitted cable length max. 300 m
AC/DC output Voltage AC / DC 12 ... 24 V

(field supply) Admissible current per module Max. 4 A
(total for all 4 terminals)
( , Terminals 7, 15, 24, 32) Fuse T 10A, in power supply
module/bus connection module
Caution! Wiring of the AC/DC 24 V supply:
Use cable cross section suited for 10 A according to local regulations.
5/10

Digital inputs / Digital inputs are not electrically separated from the system electronics.
counter inputs Mechanical contacts must be volt-free.
Electronic switches must comply with SELV / PELV standards.
Counter inputs faster than 1 Hz that are routed for more than 10 m in the same
trunking as analog inputs must be shielded.
Contact sensing voltage DC 21.5 ...25 V

Contact sensing current 1.0 mA (initial current 6 mA)
Contact resistance with contacts closed Max. 200Ω
Contact resistance with contacts open Min. 50kΩ
Min. closing / Max. Max. Counting

opening time [ms] bounce time frequency
including bouncing [ms] (symmetric)
Maintained contact 60 20
Pulse contact 30 10
Mechanical counter 20 10 25 Hz
electronic counter ..5 ..0 100 Hz
counter memory 0 ... 4.3 x 109 (32 bit counter)

Analog inputs
Correction of line resistance 1 Ω (calibrated In module)
Signal type (see page 2) Range Under / over range Resolution

Resistance Pt 1000 and P1K 0...2500 Ohm 0...2650 Ohm 100 mOhm
resistance transmitter AI Pt1000 0...2500 Ohm 0...2650 Ohm 100 mOhm
Temp. measurement AI PT1K 375 -50…180 -52.5...185.0 °C 10 mK

AI PT1K 385 1) -50...400 (600) °C 1) -52.5...610°C 20 mK
AI NI1000 extended 1) -50…150 (180) °C 1) -52.5...185.0 °C 10 mK
AI Ni1000 -50...150°C -52.5...155.0 °C 10 mK
AI T1 (PTC) 1)
-50...130 (150) °C 1) -52.5...155.0 °C 10 mK
AI NTC10K 1)
(-40...115 °C) 1) -52.5...155°C 10 mK (25°C)
AI NTC100K 1)
(-40 ...125 °C) 1) -52.5...155°C 10 mK (25°C)
1) 180 °C, 600°C, NTC: only with reduced hum injection
Voltage measurement AI 0-10V 2) 0 ... 10 V 2) -1.5...11.5 V 1 mV

2) In case of open connection: negative voltage –3.1 V, 0.05 mA (open circuit detection)
Analog outputs Signal type Range Under / over range Resolution

Output voltage AO 0-10V 0 … 10 V -0.05...10.6 V 1 mV
Output current max. 1 mA
Connection terminals Mechanical design Rising cage terminals

or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Stranded conductors with connector sleeves or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
(DIN 46228/1) 1 x 0.25 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Test pickups (test terminals) For pin diameter 1.8 … 2.0 mm
Local override Local override / indication device ISO 16 484-2, Section 3.11
(TXM1.8U-ML only)
6/10

Contamination level
Mechanical design 2
Protection class III
Terminal base IP20
Temperature –25…70 °C
Mechanical conditions
Class 2M2
Electromagnetic compatibility (Applications) For use in residential,
commercial, light-industrial and
industrial environments
UL certification (US) UL 916, UL 864,
http://ul.com/database
CSA certification Class 4812
https://www.csagroup.org/serv
ices-industries/product-listing/
Weight Without / with packaging TXM1.8U 179 / 200 g
TXM1.8U-ML 202 / 223 g
7/10

Digital inputs U
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
U Universal module
K1 Status contact (N/O)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 21 K2 Status contact (N/C)
K3 Pulse contact (N/O)
K4 Pulse contact (N/C)
S5 Electronic switch
8174z13
K1 K2 K3 K4 S5
Terminal layout TXM1.8U, TXM1.8U-ML

I/O point (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
System neutral ⊥ (–) 1) 2 6 10 14 19 23 27 31
Input (+) 4 8 12 16 21 25 29 33
STOP Counter inputs Counter inputs faster than 1 Hz that are routed for more than 10 m in the same trunking
as analog inputs must be shielded.
Analog inputs U
U Universal module
(1) (2) (3)
B1 LG-Ni 1000 temperature sensor
2 4 6 8 10 12 B2 Pt 1000 temperature sensor
R3 Resistance-type sensor
B4 Active sensor with external supply
M B External supply must NOT be earthed
(earth loop)
B5 Active sensor with AC / DC supply
B1 B2 R3
U
(1) (2)
2 4 6 8
V
7
V
V
8173z14
B4 B5

I/O point (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Measuring neutral ⊥ (–) 1) 2 6 10 14 19 23 27 31
Input (+) 4 8 12 16 21 25 29 33
2
AC / DC sensor supply voltage Selected from: 7, 15, 24, 32 2)
8/10

Analog outputs U
U Universal module
(1) (2) (3)
Y1 Actuator with input DC 0 ..10 V
2 4 6 8 10 12 Y2 General device with input
V DC 0 ..10 V, supplied by module
7
Y3 General device with input
DC 0 ..10 V, supplied externally
External supply must NOT be
V
earthed (earth loop)
8173z15
V
Y1 Y2 Y3

I/O point (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
System neutral ⊥ (–) 1) 2 6 10 14 19 23 27 31
Output (+) 4 8 12 16 21 25 29 33
2)
AC / DC operating voltage Selected from: 7, 15, 24, 32 2)
1)
All measuring / system neutral terminals are interconnected, not in the terminal base
but in the plug-in I/O module. When this unit is pulled outward (into the "parking"
position) there is no connection.
– The system neutral of a digital input can be connected to any system neutral
terminal
– With analog inputs and outputs, the measuring / system neutral must always be
connected to the terminal associated with that I/O point.
2)
All AC/DC 24V supply terminals are interconnected
(in the I/O module, not in the terminal base).
They are protected in the power supply module / bus connection module (T10A).
Caution! Wiring of the AC/DC 24 V supply (terminals 7, 15, 24, 32):
Use cable cross section suited for 10 A according to local regulations.
For wiring details refer to the TX-I/O™ Engineering and installation manual, CM110562.
9/10

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
90
67
45
77.5
70
44
22
98
108
7.1
8172M01
64 3
Published by:
Gubelstrasse 22
6301 Zug
Switzerland
10/10

s 8
183
8183p01, p02
TX-I/O™
Power supply module, TXS1.12F10

bus connection module TXS1.EF10
• Each I/O row begins with one of these devices
• TXS1.12F10 power supply module
– Up to 4 power supply modules can be operated in parallel
– AC 24 V input
– Generation / transfer of DC 24 V, 1.2A for the supply of TX-I/O modules and
field devices
– Fresh provision of AC 24 V for field device supply
– Transfer of the bus signal
• TXS1.EF10 bus connection module
– Transfer of DC 24 V for the supply of TX-I/O modules and field devices
– Fresh provision of AC / DC 12 … 24 V for field device supply
– Transfer of the bus signal
• Compact format (to DIN43 880), small footprint
• Simple installation and easy access

– Plug-in screw terminals
– Fuse is accessible with device installed
• Easy, fast diagnostics
CM2N8183en_06
Page 54 of 709
Function
Each I/O row starts with a power supply module, or a bus connection module
(or a P-Bus interface module, see data sheet CM2N8180).
These devices are connected via terminals, and they supply the I/O modules with the
following (via island bus):
TXM1.12F10 • DC 24 V for the supply of I/O modules and field devices

Power supply module (generated in an internal AC/DC converter)
• AC 24 V for the supply of field devices
• the bus signal
TXM1.EF10 • AC / DC 12 ... 24 V for the supply of field devices

Bus connection module • the bus signal
Type summary
ASN Power supply module TXM1.12F10

Bus connection module TXM1.EF10
Items supplied Module with 3 bus-connector covers

(1 for left end of I/O bar, 1 for right end and 1 spare)
Ordering
When ordering, please specify the quantity, product name and type code.
Example:
10 Power supply modules TXS1.12F10
Compatibility
TXM1.12F10 power supply modules and the TXM1.EF10 bus connection modules are
suitable for use with all TX-I/O™ devices.
2/10
Siemens TXS1.12F10, TXS1.EF10 – Power supply module, bus connection module CM2N8183en_06
Overview
3 4 5 6 Key
C
B
3
24V CS CD A Plug-in screw terminal ("1")
1 CS DC 24 V supply
24V 24V
for modules and field devices
D E
2 CD Island bus signal
G F B Plug-in screw terminal ("3")
H H
3 24V~ Supply for supply module and
Field devices (TXS1.12F10)
CS CD V Field device supply (TXS1.EF10)
1
A 4 ⊥ System neutral
1 2 5 CS DC 24 V module supply
I 6 CD Island bus signal
I C Fuse, T 10A for field supply
3 4 5 6
3
B D LED: "Field supply OK"
V CS CD
E LED "DC 24 V module supply OK"
V
F Bus connector (right) (with field device supply)
D
G Bus connector (left) (no field device supply)
G F H
H
H Bus connector cover
I Slide fitting for standard mounting rail

CS CD 10A
1
A
8183Z01
C
1 2
Mechanical characteristics
Housing • The housing complies with DIN 43880 and is 90mm wide.
• The plastic housing is provided with a large number of vents for cooling
• When mounting, allow for sufficient heat dissipation by convection
(max. ambient temperature 50°C)
3/10
Electrical characteristics
TXS1.12F10 • The supply module is supplied with AC 24 V.

supply module) The tolerance range is –10 ... +20%.
• The device generates a supply voltage of DC 24 V ("Module supply 24V=")
for the modules and field devices, designed for a current rating of 1.2 A.
• The power supply module is short-circuit proof.
• Parallel operation is permissible as follows:
− A maximum of 4 power supply modules can be operated in parallel
− However, each I/O bar can accommodate a maximum of 2 power supply
modules (see [3])
• To supply the field devices, the AC 24 V supply voltage is connected via a T 10A
fuse to the island bus ("Field supply 24V~", maximum admissible current 6 A).
Note: for AC 24 V, the bus is interrupted to the left, the supply module can only
supply the modules to the right with 24V~V.
TXS1.EF10 • To supply the field devices, an AC / DC 12 … 24 V supply voltage is connected
bus connection module) via a T 10A fuse to the island bus ("Field supply V ", maximum admissible current
6 A).
Note: for V , the bus is interrupted to the left, the bus connection module can only
supply the modules to the right with V .
Interfaces • Plug-in screw terminals for supply voltage (24V~, V , ⊥) and island bus (CS, CD)
Island bus • The I/O modules are mounted to the right of the supply module / bus connection
module on the standard mounting rail. The electrical connection is established via
the four island bus contacts on the side of the modules. The bus is created
automatically when the TX-I/O™ devices are connected one next to the other on
the rail.
• For expansion purposes, the CS and CD signals of the island bus are also routed
via terminals.
System ground • The I/O modules and all connected field devices are connected to the same
system ground (⊥).
• The system ground of the I/O island (⊥) and of the automation station (G0) are
electrically connected (in the P-Bus interface module)
Fuse • In the event of overload or short circuit, the fuse (T 10A) cuts off the AC 24 V / V
field supply voltage (but not the supply module's supply voltage)
• The fuse can be replaced without removing the device.
Protection against • All terminals are protected against shortcut and incorrect wiring with AC/DC 24 V
incorrect wiring • This is the case even for incorrect AC phase sequence
• Bus connector on side: no protection
• Voltage > AC/DC 24 V: no protection
4/10
LED indication
Fuse LED Indicator for AC 24 V supply to supply module and field supply:
for field supply • ON AC 24 V (supply voltage) input present, and Fuse OK
(TXS1.12F10 only) • OFF No AC 24 V (supply voltage) input, or Fuse blown
Fuse LED Indicator for field supply voltage V :

for field supply • ON V (field supply voltage) input present (> 22 V), and Fuse OK
(TXS1.EF10 only) Voltage <22V are not indicated!)
• OFF No V (field supply voltage) input, or Fuse blown
Module supply LED Indicates DC 24 V module supply / field supply:

• ON Module supply OK. When other supplies are in the I/O island
(CS conductor) (CS >21.5 V) and AC 24 V is OK, the LED is also ON.
• OFF Module supply voltage not OK
Reasons: no AC 24 V (supply voltage) input, or AC/DC converter faulty,
or short circuit at DC 24 V connections (CS)
Circuit principles
(TXS1.12F10 power
supply module)
3 4 5 6
24V~ CS
PTC
CS CS
PTC
PTC
24V~
T 10A
CS
8183A01_01
1 2
STOP Note! For AC 24 V, the bus is interrupted to the left, the supply module can only supply the
modules to the right with 24V~V.
5/10
Circuit principles
(TXS1.EF10 bus
connection module)
3 4 5 6
V~ CS
PTC
CS CS
PTC
PTC
V~
T 10A
CS
8183A02_01
1 2
STOP Note! For V , the bus is interrupted to the left, the bus connection module can only supply the
modules to the right with V .
Disposal
The device is considered an electronics device for disposal in terms of European

• Dispose of the device through channels provided for this purpose.
Engineering, mounting, installation and commissioning
Document Number
[1] TX-I/O™ module data sheets CM1N817...
[2] TX-I/O™ functions and operation CM110561
[3] TX-I/O™ Engineering and installation manual CM110562
[4] Replacement of legacy signal types CM110563
[5] TX-I/O™ Engineering documentation V2.35 CM110641 ff
[6] TX-I/O™ Engineering documentation V4 CM111001 ff
Engineering
The following information is required when designing the power supply for an I/O island
(see [3]):
• Number and type of modules to be supplied
(Basic consumption of I/O module)
• Type and number of data points
(Consumption per configured data point)
• Type and number of field devices to be supplied from the field device supply
6/10
Caution! • The cable insulation must always comply with the present rated voltage.
• When the supply voltage of the Devices is transited to external devices, the cable
cross section must always correspond to the rated current of the safety circuit
breaking device.
Observe local regulations in any case.
Mounting
Mounting The module is mounted on a standard 35 x 7.5 mm mounting rail

(top-hat rail type TH35-7.5 to EN60715)
Mounting sequence An I/O row always starts on the "left" side with a device for power supply (power
supply module, bus connection module, BIM, or automation station, see [3])
Replacement A power supply module or bus connection module can be removed from the row of
modules, but to do this, it is essential to remove the plug-in I/O unit from the
adjacent module to the right. There is no need to remove the terminal base of
this module.

Technical data
Operating voltage Extra low voltage SELV or PELV AC 24 V, -10 ... +20% or
(24V~, ⊥ ) in accordance with HD348 AC 24 V class 2 (US)
50 ... 60 Hz
Half-wave load Symmetrical
Power consumption – Without module and field device load 4 VA / 0.17 A
TXS1.12F10 – With maximum admissible load DC 24 V / 1.2 A 57 VA / 2.4 A
Pass-through – AC 24 V / 6 A (for details refer to [3]) 144 VA / 6 A
TXS1.12F10
Pass-through – AC / DC 24 V / 6 A (for details refer to [3]) 144 VA / 6 A
TXS1.EF10
Fusing External supply line protection (EU) Fuse slow max. 10 A
or
Circuit breaker max. 13 A
Characteristic B, C, D according to
EN 60898
or
Power source with current limitation
of max. 10 A
Protection Bus connector on side No protection against shortcut and
incorrect wiring
7/10
DC output Nominal voltage DC 24V
(CS, ⊥ ) Max. current 1.2 A
Can be connected in parallel For details refer to [3]
(regulated output voltage)
Short-circuit-proof, overload protected
Excess temperature cutout Self-resetting
Indication LED "24V="
AC output (24V~, ⊥ ) Nominal voltage AC 24 V

(TXS1.12F10 only) Max. current 6.0 A
Fuse T 10A (replaceable)
Indication LED "24V~"
AC /DC output (V , ⊥ ) Nominal voltage AC / DC 12 … 24 V

(TXS1.EF10 only) Max. current 6.0 A
Fuse T 10A (replaceable)
Indication LED "24V~"
Island bus communication (CD, CS ) Short-circuit proof

Plug-in connection Mechanical design Plug-in screw terminals
terminals Solid or stranded copper conductors with 1 x 0,6 mm∅ to 2.5 mm2
connector sleeves or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.0 mm2
Stranded copper conductors without 1 x 0,6 mm∅ to 2.5 mm2
connector sleeves or 2 x 0,6 mm∅ to 1.5 mm2
Screwdriver Slot-headed screws
Screwdriver No. 1

Contamination level 2
Mechanical design Protection class III
protection standard Front-plate components in DIN cut-out IP 30
Terminal section IP20

Temperature –25 … 70 °C
8/10
Standards, directives Product standard EN 60730-1 Automatic electrical controls for
and approbations household and similar use
Electromagnetic compatibility (Applications) For use in residential, commercial,
light-industrial and industrial
environments
UL certification (US) UL 916, http://ul.com/database
CSA certification Class 4812 http://directories.csa-
international.org/
Color Body RAL 7035 (light gray)

Weight With / without packaging TXS1.12F10 309 g / 341 g
TXS1.EF10 82 g / 102 g
Connection example
L N
AC 230 V
AC 24 V
24V~ T Key
F1
...A AC 24 V
P bus
24V~
24V~
24V~
24V~
Island bus
G0
G
Tool T Safety isolating transformer AC 230 V/AC 24 V

to EN 61 558
N1
K Terminal strip for ac 24 V distribution via star
configuration
F2
N1 Automation station
N2 Bus interface module with integral power
USB N2
supply
U1 TXS1.12F10 power supply module
X1 TXS1.EF10 bus connection module
F3 F1 Extra-low voltage fuse for max. power
consumption, AC 24 V
U1
F2 Fine-wire slow-blow 10 A fuse, factory-fitted in
bus interface module
power supply module
X1 bus connection module
8180A04
Tool TX-I/O tool for configuration, simulation and

F4 diagnostics
9/10
Dimensions
Dimensions
45
in mm
TXS1.12F10
70
77.4
44
22
90
98
3 108
8183M01
4.5 96 7.1
45
TXS1.EF10
77.4
70
44
22
90
98
108
3
8183M02
4.5 32 7.1
Published by:
Gubelstrasse 22
6301 Zug
Switzerland
10/10
s 8 170
8170p01_01
TX-I/O™
TX-I/O Assortment overview TX..1...
CM2N8170en_08
08 Mar 2012 Building Technologies
Page 64 of 709
Modules and functions
The following functions are available in the TX-IO modules:
Signal type TX-I/O Description Max. number of functions per module

(Support by
TXM1.8U-ML
TXM1.8X-ML
per function
TXM1.6R-M
Number of
different systems:
TXM1.8RB
TXM1.6RL
TXM1.16D
I/O points
TXM1.8D
TXM1.8U
TXM1.6R
TXM1.8X
TXM1.8P
TXM1.8T
see page 3ff)
Digital inputs
BI NO Status indication, volt-free maintained
1 8 16 8 8 8 8
contact, N/O contact
BI NC Status indication, volt-free maintained
1 8 16 8 8 8 8
contact, N/C contact
BI Pulse NO Status indication, 1 8 16 8 8 8 8
volt-free pulsed contact, N/O
BI Push NO Button input single / dual, N/O 1/2 8/4 16/8
BI Push NC Button input single / dual, N/C
MI Switch Multistate input 2...8 4...1 8...2
Count, volt-free pulse contact,
mechanical or electronic, normally open,
max. 10 Hz, with debouncing 1 8 8
CI Mech (10/25Hz) max. 25 Hz, with debouncing 1 8 8 8 8
CI El (100Hz) Electronic contact max. 100 Hz 1 8 8 8 8
Analog inputs
AI Pt100 4 Wire Temperature Pt100 Ω (4-wire) 1 8
AI Pt100 Resistance 250 Ω (Pt 100) 1 8
AI 250 Ohm Resistance 250 Ω 1 8
AI PT1K385 Temperature Pt 1000 1 8 8 8 8 8
AI PT1K375 Temperature Pt 1000 1 8 8 8 8 8
AI Ni1000 extended Temperature LG-Ni 1000 up to 180 °C 1 8 8 8 8 8
AI Ni1000 Temperature LG-Ni 1000 1 8 8 8 8 8
AI 2500 Ohm Resistance 2500 Ω 1 8 8 8 8 8
AI Pt1000 Resistance 2500 Ω (Pt 1000) 1 8 8 8 8 8
AI NTC10K Temperature NTC 10 K 1 8 8 8 8
AI NTC100K Temperature NTC 100 K 1 8 8 8 8
AI T1 (PTC) Temperature T1 (PTC) 1 8 8 8 8
AI 0-10V Voltage DC 0 .. 10V 1 8 8 8 8
AI 4-20mA Current DC 4 .. 20 mA 1 8 8
AI 0-20mA Current DC 0…20 mA 1 8 8
(for 25 mA see CM10563)
Digital outputs
BO Relay NO 250V Maintained contact, relay, changeover 1 6 6
BO Relay NC 250V switch, N/O, N/C contact
BO Triac NO Maintained contact, triac, output AC 24 V 1 8
BO Triac NC N/O, N/C contact
BO Bistable NO Maintained contact, single-pole, bistable, 1 6
BO Bistable NC N/O, N/C contact
BO Pulse Pulse 1 6 6
BO Pulse On-Off On/off pulse (N/O and N/C contact) 2 3 3
MO Steps Multistate-maintained contact, 2...6 stage 1…6 6…1 6…1
MO Pulse Multistate pulse, 1...5-stage 2…6 3…1 3…1
BO 3-Pos Relay Pulse, control signal, three-pos.output, 2 3 3
internal stroke algorithm (relay)
BO 3-PosTriac Pulse, control signal, three-pos.output, 2 4
internal stroke algorithm (triac, AC 24 V)
BO PWM Pulse width modulation, output AC 24 V 1 8
BO Blind Relay Maintained contact, relay, blinds control 2/4 4/2
with 2/3 end switches
Analog outputs
AO 0-10V Proportional control signal DC 0...10 V 1 8 8 8 8
AO 4-20mA Proportional control signal DC 4…20 mA 1 4 4
Indication and local override
Local override X X X
LCD display X X
Green I/O status LEDs X X X X X X X X X X
3-color I/O status LEDs (if supported by signal type) X X
Example of a read The Y250T function (control signal, three-position output) uses 2 I/O points.
operation One TXM1.6R relay module can accommodate 3 actuators.
2/6
Siemens TX-I/O Assortment overview CM2N8170en_08

Building Technologies Page 65 of 709 08 Mar 2012
Compatibility, signal type designation
Description Support by building automation and control system
Integration via P-Bus-BIM
PRV1 V6 and later

VISONIK BPS V12 and later
Integration via P-Bus-BIM

DESIGO V2.37 and later
Island bus integration

(BACnet object type)
Simatic S7 300/ 400
UNIGYR V3 and later

Primary controller
DESIGO V4, V4.1

Desigo TRA V5
PROFINET BIM
Integration via
Signaltype
Desigo V5
Digitale inputs
Status indication, volt-free maintained BI NO (BI) D20 D20 D20 BI_STATIC D20
contact, N/O, N/C contact
BI NC (BI) 2) 2) D20R BI_STATIC D20R
Status indication, volt-free pulsed contact, BI Pulse NO (BI) D20S D20S D20S BI_PULSE D20S
N/O, NC contact (with storage function) BI Pulse NC (BI) 2) 2) 2) 2)
Pushbutton input, single / dual, BI Push NO 1) (Use D20S)
N/O, NC contact (BlsIn, LgtIn) 3)
BI Push NC 1)
(BlsIn, LgtIn)
Multistate input, 2...8 stage MI Switch NO / NC 1) (MI) (Use D20)
max. 10 Hz, with debouncing CI Mech (10/25Hz) C C C CI _Limited
max. 25 Hz, with debouncing CI Mech (10/25Hz) C C C CI C
electronic contact max. 100 Hz CI El (100Hz) C C CI
Analog inputs
Temperature Pt100 Ω (4-wire) AI Pt100 4 Wire (AI) Pt100_4 Pt100_4 AI_PT100_4
AI Pt100 (AI) P100 (4- P100 P100 P100
Resistance 250 Ω (Pt 100)
Draht) (4-Draht) (4-Draht) (4-Draht)
Resistance 250 Ω AI 250 Ohm (AI) R250 R250 AI_R250
(2-Draht) (2-Draht)
Temperature Pt 1000 (Europe) AI PT1K385 (AI) Pt1K 385 Pt1K 385 AI_PT1K385
Temperature Pt 1000 (USA) AI PT1K375 (AI) Pt1K 375 Pt1K 375 AI_PT1K375
Resistance 2500 Ω (Pt 1000) AI Pt1000 (AI) P1K P1K P1K P1K
Temperature LG-Ni 1000, up to 180 °C AI Ni1000 extended (AI) Ni1K Ni1K AI_NI1K
Temperature LG-Ni 1000 AI Ni1000 (AI) R1K R1K R1K R1K
Resistance 2500 Ω AI 2500 Ohm (AI) R2K5 R2K5 AI_R2K5
Temperature NTC 10 K AI NTC10K (AI) NTC10 K NTC10 K AI_NTC10 K
Temperature NTC 100 K AI NTC100K (AI) NTC100 K NTC100 K AI_NTC100 K
Temperature T1 (PTC) AI T1 (PTC) (AI) T1 T1 T1 AI_T1 T1
Voltage DC 0 .. 10V AI 0-10V (AI) U10 U10 U10 AI_U10N U10
Current DC 4 .. 20 mA AI 4-20mA (AI) I420 I420 I420 AI_I420 I420
Current DC 0...20 mA AI 0-20mA (AI) I25 I25 I25 AI_I020 I25
Digital outputs
Maintained contact, relay, changeover BO Relay NO 250V (BO) Q250 Q250 Q250 BO_Q250 Q250
switch N/O, NC contact BO Relay NC 250V (BO)
Maintained contact, triac, output AC 24 V BO Triac NO 1) (BO) Q250_T 1)
N/O, NC contact BO Triac NC 1) (BO)
Maintained contact, bistable (for light BO Bistable NO (LgtBOut) Q250B BO_BISTABIL Q250B
applications), N/O, NC contact BO Bistable NC (LgtBOut)
Pulse BO Pulse (BO) (use MO BO_Q250_P
Q250-P1)
Pulse On-Off, N/O and NC contact BO Pulse On-Off (BO) Q250-P / Q250-P / Q250-P / Q250-P /
Q250A-P Q250A-P Q250A-P Q250A-P
Multistate maintained contact MO Steps (1...6-stage) Q-M1…M4 Q-M1…M4 Q-M3 MO(n)_STATIC Q-M3
(BO) (2 4-stufig)
Multistate pulse MO Pulse Q250- Q250- Q250-P3 MO(n)_PULSE Q250-P3
(Not supported) P1…P5 P1…P5 n = 1...4
Pulse, control signal, three-position output, BO 3-Pos Relay (AO) Y250T Y250T Y250T AO_Y250T Y250T
Pulse, control signal, three-position output, BO 3-Pos Triac 1) (AO) Y250T 1)
internal stroke algorithm (Triac, AC 24 V)
Pulse width modulation, output AC 24 V BO PWM 1) (AO) PWM 1)
Blinds control with 2 / 3 end switches BO Blind Relay 1) (BlsOut)
Analog outputs
Proportional control signal DC 0...10 V AO 0-10V (AO) Y10S Y10S Y10S AO_U10N Y10S
Proportional control signal DC 4…20 mA AO 4-20mA (AO) Y420 Y420 Y420 AO_I420N Y420
1) Signal type is only supported by modules from series D. 3) D20S for light / blinds: Consider reaction time /
2) Workaround for N/C contact: Use D20 and set "Polarity" = Indirect. performance!
3/6

Functions and modules: Desigo TRA V5
Description Max. number of functions per module
Number of I/O points

(BACnet object type)
Desigo TRA V5
per function
TXM1.8RB
TXM1.6RL
TXM1.16D
Signal type
TXM1.8D
TXM1.8U
TXM1.6R
TXM1.8T
Digitale inputs
Status indication, volt-free maintained BI NO (BI)
1 8 16 8
contact, N/O, N/C contact
BI NC (BI) 1 8 16 8
Status indication, volt-free pulsed contact, BI Pulse NO (BI) 1 8 16 8
N/O, NC contact (with storage function) BI Pulse NC (BI) 1 8 16 8
Pushbutton input, single / dual, BI Push NO 1) 1/2 8/4 16/8
N/O, NC contact (BlsIn, LgtIn)
BI Push NC 1) 1/2 8/4 16/8
(BlsIn, LgtIn)
Multistate input, 2...8 stage MI Switch NO / NC 1) (MI) 2...8 4...1 8...2
Analog inputs
Temperature Pt 1000 (Europe) AI PT1K385 (AI) 1 8
Temperature Pt 1000 (USA) AI PT1K375 (AI) 1 8
Temperature LG-Ni 1000 AI Ni1000 (AI) 1 8
Resistance 2500 Ω AI 2500 Ohm (AI) 1 8
Temperature NTC 10 K AI NTC10K (AI) 1 8
Temperature NTC 100 K AI NTC100K (AI) 1 8
Temperature T1 (PTC) AI T1 (PTC) (AI) 1 8
Voltage DC 0 .. 10V AI 0-10V (AI) 1 8
Digital outputs
Maintained contact, relay, changeover BO Relay NO 250V (BO) 1 6
switch N/O, NC contact BO Relay NC 250V (BO) 1 6
Maintained contact, triac, output AC 24 V BO Triac NO 1) (BO) 1 8
N/O, NC contact BO Triac NC 1) (BO) 1 8
Maintained contact, bistable (for light BO Bistable NO (LgtBOut) 1 6
applications), N/O, NC contact BO Bistable NC (LgtBOut) 1 6
Pulse BO Pulse (BO) 1 6
Pulse On-Off, N/O and NC contact BO Pulse On-Off (BO) 2 3
Multistate maintained contact MO Steps (1...6-stage) 1…6 6…1
(BO)
Pulse, control signal, three-position output, BO 3-Pos Relay (AO) 2 3
Pulse, control signal, three-position output, BO 3-Pos Triac 1) (AO) 2 4
Pulse width modulation, output AC 24 V BO PWM 1) (AO) 1 8
Blinds control with 2 / 3 end switches BO Blind Relay 1) (BlsOut) 2/4 4/2
Analog outputs
Proportional control signal DC 0...10 V AO 0-10V (AO) 1 8
1) Signal type is only supported by modules from series D.
4/6

Functions and modules: Desigo PX V5
Description Max. number of functions per module
Number of I/O points

Primary controller
TXM1.8U-ML
TXM1.8X-ML
per function
TXM1.6R-M
TXM1.6RL
TXM1.16D
Desigo V5
TXM1.8D
TXM1.8U
TXM1.6R
TXM1.8X
TXM1.8P
TXM1.8T
Digitale inputs
Status indication, volt-free maintained contact, D20
1 8 16 8 8 8 8
N/O, N/C contact
2) 1 8 16 8 8 8 8
Status indication, volt-free pulsed contact, D20S 2) 1 8 16 8 8 8 8
N/O, NC contact (with storage function)
Pushbutton input, single / dual, (Use D20S) 1 8 16 8 8 8 8
N/O, NC contact 3)
Multistate input (Use D20) 1 8 16 8 8 8 8
max. 10 Hz, with debouncing C 1 8 8
max. 25 Hz, with debouncing C 1 8 8 8 8
electronic contact max. 100 Hz C 1 8 8 8 8
Analog inputs
Temperature Pt100 Ω (4-wire) Pt100_4 1 8
Resistance 250 Ω (Pt 100) P100 (4-wire) 1 8
Resistance 250 Ω R250 (2-wire) 1 8
Temperature Pt 1000 (Europe) Pt1K 385 1 8 8 8 8 8
Temperature Pt 1000 (USA) Pt1K 375 1 8 8 8 8 8
Resistance 2500 Ω (Pt 1000) P1K 1 8 8 8 8 8
Temperature LG-Ni 1000, up to 180 °C Ni1K 1 8 8 8 8 8
Temperature LG-Ni 1000 R1K 1 8 8 8 8 8
Resistance 2500 Ω R2K5 1 8 8 8 8 8
Temperature NTC 10 K NTC10 K 1 8 8 8 8
Temperature NTC 100 K NTC100 K 1 8 8 8 8
Temperature T1 (PTC) T1 1 8 8 8 8
Voltage DC 0 .. 10V U10 1 8 8 8 8
Current DC 4 .. 20 mA I420 1 8 8
Current DC 0...20 mA I25 1 8 8
Digital outputs
Maintained contact, relay, changeover switch Q250 1 6 6
Maintained contact, triac, output AC 24 V Q250_T 1) 1 8
N/O contact
Maintained contact, bistable (for light applications) Q250B 1 6
Pulse (use MO Q250- 1 6 6
P1)
Pulse On-Off, N/O and NC contact Q250-P / 2 3 3
Q250A-P
Multistate maintained contact Q-M1…M4 1…6 6…1 6…1
Multistate pulse Q250-P1…P5 2…6 3…1 3…1
Pulse, control signal, three-position output, Y250T 2 3 3
Pulse, control signal, three-position output, Y250T 1) 2 4
Pulse width modulation, output AC 24 V PWM 1) 1 8
Analog outputs
Proportional control signal DC 0...10 V Y10S 1 8 8 8 8
Proportional control signal DC 4…20 mA Y420 1 4 4
1) Signal type is only supported by modules from series D.

2) Workaround for N/C contact: Use D20 and set "Polarity" = Indirect.
3) D20S for light / blinds: Consider reaction time / performance!
5/6

Type summary, documentation
Type (ASN No.) Description Document
I/O modules TXM1.8D Digital input module, 8 I/O points CM2N8172

TXM1.16D Digital input module, 16 I/O points CM2N8172
TXM1.8U Universal module CM2N8173
TXM1.8U-ML Universal module with local override facility and LCD CM2N8173
TXM1.8X Super universal module CM2N8174
TXM1.8X-ML Super universal module with local override facility and LCD CM2N8174
TXM1.8P Resistance measuring module CM2N8176
TXM1.6R Relay module CM2N8175
TXM1.6R-M Relay module with local override facility CM2N8175
TXM1.6RL Relay module bistable (for lighting applications) CM2N8177
TXM1.8RB Blinds module CM2N8178
TXM1.8T Triac module CM2N8179
I/O OPEN TXI1.OPEN TX OPEN RS232/485 module CM2N8185
Power supply TXS1.12F10 Power supply module 1.2 A, fuse 10A CM2N8183
TXS1.EF10 Bus connection module, fuse 10A CM2N8183
Bus interface TXB1.PBUS P-Bus Interface module with power supply 1.2A, fuse 10A CM2N8180
TXB1.PROFIBUS Profinet BIM CM2N8186
Island bus TXA1.IBE Island bus expansion module CM2N8184

expansion (Compatibility see CM110562)
Address keys TXA1.K12 Address keys 1 ... 12 + reset key CM110562

TXA1.K24 Address keys 1 ... 24 + 2 reset keys
TXA1.K-48 Address keys 25 ... 48 + 2 reset keys
TXA1.5K120 Address keys 5, 10, 15 … 120 + 2 reset keys
Address labels TXA1.LA4 Address label sheets A4 (100 pcs. per box) CM110562
TXA1.LLT Address label sheets Letter (100 pcs. per box)
TXA1.LH Spare transparent label holders (10 pcs. per box) CM110562
(for modules manufactured before fall 2010)
TXA1.LH2 Spare transparent label holders (10 pcs. per box) CM110562
(for modules manufactured from fall 2010)
Engineering TX-I/O™ Functions and operation CM110561

TX-I/O™ Planning and installation manual CM110562
(including an overview of the supported functions in
different building automation and control systems)
Replacement of legacy I/O modules CM110563
Dimensions L x W x H I/O modules 64 x 98 x 70 mm

Power supply module, 96 x 98 x 70 mm
I/O OPEN module
Bus connection module, 32 x 98 x 70 mm
Island bus expansion module
Bus Interface modules 128 x 98 x 70 mm
6/6  2007 - 2012 Siemens Switzerland Ltd. Subject to change

s 9 223
Desigo™ PX
System controllers PXC001.D

PXC001-E.D
PXA40-RS...
for the integration of third-party devices and systems in Desigo
• Integration platforms and system controllers for third-party devices and

systems via KNX, Modbus, M-Bus and other protocols into the automation
level via BACnet
• System controllers for the integration of Desigo RXB/RXL room controllers
• Native BACnet devices with communication via BACnet/LonTalk or
BACnet/IP
• BTL label (BACnet communications passed the BTL test)
• Comprehensive management and system functions (alarm management,
time scheduling, trends, remote management, access protection etc.)
• Supports operation via local or network-compatible operator units PXM…
CM1N9223en_09
2020-05-30 Smart Infrastructure
Page 70 of 709
Use
• The system controllers support the integration of Desigo RXB/RXL room

controllers as well as third-party devices and systems via KNX, Modbus or M-
Bus etc. in the automation level using BACnet/LonTalk or BACnet/IP
• Mapping and monitoring of third-party disciplines as HVAC, light, PLC etc.
• Functionality as freely programmable system controllers for standard or
proprietary protocol applications
Functions
• The system controllers provide the infrastructure to hold and execute the system
and application specific functions. They are freely programmable.
• Comprehensive management and system functions are available:
− Alarm management
− Time scheduling
− Trends
− Access protection
Type summary
System controllers Type

System-Controller for the integration of KNX, M-Bus, Modbus PXC001.D
or SCL over BACnet/LonTalk
System-Controller for the integration of KNX, M-Bus, Modbus PXC001-E.D
or SCL over BACnet/IP
Option modules Type
Up to 800 data points PXA40-RS1
SCL: up to 1000 data points, PXA40-RS2
M- Bus and Modbus: up to 2000 data points)
Equipment combinations
PXC001.D PXA40-RS1 PXA40-RS2

PXC001-E.D
Interfaces
KNX X -- --
Serial RS232 X -- --
Serial RS485 X -- --
Network functions
Integration KNX 2000 DP -- --
Integration M-Bus 250 DP 800 DP 2000 DP
Integration Modbus 250 DP 800 DP 2000 DP
Integration SCL 250 DP 800 DP 1000 DP
Option modules are PXA40-… option modules can be plugged and unplugged when the automation
"hot-pluggable" station is operating.
• The functionality is available immediately after inserting.
• The functionality disappears approx.1 minute after unplugging.
2 / 10
Siemens PXC001 System controllers CM1N9223en_09
Smart Infrastructure Page 71 of 709 2020-05-30
Ordering
Product number Stock number Designation

PXC001.D S55372-C113 System controllers ( BACnet/LonTalk)
PXC001-E.D S55372-C114 System controllers (BACnet/IP)
PXA40-RS1 S55372-C115 Option module RS1
PXA40-RS2 S55372-C116 Option module RS2
Mechanical design
The compact construction enables the devices to be mounted on a standard

mounting rail.
PXC001...
1 2 3 4 5
CLB
CLA
RS232/RS485 KNX
RX TX RX TX SERVICE
RUN
FAULT
LOW BATT
COMM
INFO
SERVICE
HMI/TOOL
RS485 RS232 KNX
CE +
CE -
TOOL SERVICE
6 7 8 9 10
HMI
1 Plastic housing
2a Front cover
2b PXM40-RS... option module
3 Plug-in screw terminal block (operating voltage)
4 Plug-in screw terminal block (LONWORKS bus, PXC001.D only)
5 Network interface RJ45 (BACnet / IP, PXC001-E.D only)
6 LED indicators for communication
7 LED indicators for device and system status
8 Service pin (Network identification)
9 *) RJ45 Interface for PXM10, XWP and PX KNX-Tool (RJ45, PXC001.D only)
RJ45 interface for PXM20 (PXC001.D only)
10 Plug-in screw terminal block (RS485)
11 RS232 interface
12 Plug-in screw terminal block (KNX)
13 RJ45 interface (ETS tool for service use)
14 KNX programming pin
15 *) RJ45 interface for PXM10, XWP and PX KNX-Tool (PXC001-E.D only)
RJ45 interface for PXM20 (PXC001.D only)
16 Slider for mounting on DIN rail
*) PX KNX does not support the PXM10.
PXA40-RS...
2b
9223z16
3 / 10

Terminal blocks The terminal blocks are removable for easy wiring.
LED indicators Communication

RS232/RS485: RX (Green) TX (Yellow)
KNX: RX (Green) TX (Yellow) Service (Red)
The other LEDs have the following meaning:

LED Color Activity Function
RUN Green Continuously ON Power OK
Continuously OFF No power
FAULT Red Continuously OFF OK
Continuously ON Fault
Rapid flashing Firmware missing / corrupt
LOW BATT Red Continuously OFF Battery OK
Continuously ON Battery empty– replace!
COMM Red Continuously ON Connection to switch OK
Service pin Continuously OFF No connection to switch
Flashing Communication
INFO Red Freely programmable
SERVICE Red Continuously OFF OK
(Ethernet, Continuously ON No connection to switch or
PXC001-E.D) DHCP Server
Flashing No IP address configured
Flashing per wink Physical identification of system
command *) controller after receipt of wink
command
SERVICE Red Continuously OFF LONWORKS node is configured
(LonTalk, Continuously ON Faulty LONWORKS chip, or service
PXC001.D) pin currently depressed
Flashing LONWORKS node is not configured
Flashing per wink Physical identification of system
command *) controller after receipt of wink
command
*) Wink command pattern:

9222z02
21s
5 Hz 5 Hz
2s 1s 2s 1s
Service pin Identification of the system controller in the IP network or LONWORKS network
See "Commissioning".
Engineering
Workflow See the PX open documents CM110761.
Bus terminating Depending on the bus topology, a 120 Ohm resistor must be connected.
resistor for RS485
4 / 10
Mounting
The devices can be snapped onto standardized rails.

The power supply, LonTalk, RS485 and KNX connections have plug-in screw
terminal blocks. The other interfaces are quick plug-in connections.
Instead of the front cover a PXA40-RS... option module can be fitted on the device.
Commissioning
In order to prevent equipment damage and/or personal injuries always follow local
safety regulations and the required safety standards.
Load plant operating The plant operating program is downloaded using the CFC from XWP – locally via
program the automation station's RJ45 interface or via the network (BACnet/IP or
BACnet/LonTalk).
Setting parameters and Use the PX Design tool in XWP for setting the control parameters and the
configurations configuration data. Data visible on the network may also be edited with an operator
unit PXM20 / PXM20-E (BACnet / LonTalk or BACnet / IP).
Part of the data can also be edited locally using the operator unit PXM10
(PX KNX does not support the PXM10).
Wiring test Use the Point Test Tool.
Network connection The network addresses are configured with XWP. For unique identification in the
network (BACnet/IP or BACnet/LonTalk), press the Service button with a long,
pointed object or send a wink command to the appropriate system controller
(service LED blinks).
Force Firmware • Variant via V24:

Download If the Force Firmware Download Key is pressed for approx. 10 s during a
restart (reset), the current D-MAP program is deleted from the FLASH.
The system controller waits briefly for the signal to activate the FWLoader and
then starts the system controller.
• IP variant: (for PXC001-E.D, significantly faster than via V24)
Press the Force Firmware Download key for 5 seconds (without hitting the
reset button).
Prerequisite: A node setup of the controller has been conducted and no
application is loaded or it was deleted in the CFC by clear/reset (communication
settings remain – which would not be the case when restart erasing by pressing
the reset key).
For details see the Firmware Download Tool User's guide, CM110626.
Restart Press the Reset button to force a restart
5 / 10

Position of
buttons and batteries
Lithium Lithium
Service
Note The KNX programming pin is situated next to the KNX terminal block and the KNX
tool plug
Maintenance
Battery life The real time clock is backed by a lithium battery type CR2032
• Life span without load: 10 years.
• Life span with battery operation (cumulative): 10 years.
• After the "Battery low" event the remaining life span under load is several
1)
days.
The trend data and the actual parameters stored in the SDRAM memory are
backed by a Lithium battery type FR6/AA AA.
• Life span without load: 10 years.
• Life span with battery operation (cumulative): min. 2 weeks
• After the "Battery low" event the remaining life span under load is approx.
1)
15 hrs.
1) "Battery low" event: The "LOW BATT" LED lights up when one of the batteries'
charge is low, and the automation station automatically sends a system event.
Replacing the battery To change the battery, remove the front cover. The battery can be removed
indefinitely as long as the unit has power. Insert new battery correctly (+ / –).
STOP Caution! • Note the special disposal notes on Li batteries.

• A wrist-strap and grounding cable must be used to avoid hardware
damage through electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Firmware upgrades Firmware and operating system stored in non-volatile Flash ROM. Flash ROM
memory can be easily updated on the plant, when a new firmware version is
available.
Disposal
The devices are classified as waste electronic equipment in terms of the European
Directive 2012/19/EU (WEEE) and should not be disposed of as unsorted
municipal waste.
The relevant national legal rules are to be adhered to.
Regarding disposal, use the systems setup for collecting electronic waste.
Observe all local and applicable laws.
Lithium batteries: May catch fire, explode or leak. Do not short circuit, charge,
disassemble, dispose of in fire, heat above 100°C, or expose to water.
Disposal: Seal battery terminals with tape.
6 / 10
Technical data
General device data Operating voltage AC 24 V ± 20% (SELV / PELV) or

AC 24 V class 2 (US)
Safety extra-low voltage SELV or HD 384
Extra-low voltage PELV
Operating frequency 50/60 Hz
Energy consumption Max. 3.5 VA
External supply line protection (EU) Fuse slow max. 10 A
or
Characteristic B, C, D according to
EN 60898
or
Power source with current limitation of
max. 10 A
Operating data Processor Motorola Power PC MPC885
Storage 64MB SDRAM / 32MB FLASH
(96MB total)
Data backup in event of power failure
Battery Backup of realtime clock Battery operation (cumulative): 10 years
Lithium CR2032 (field replaceable) Without load: 10 years
Battery backup for SDRAM Battery operation (cumulative): min. 2 weeks
1 x FR6/AA Lithium (field replaceable) Without load: 10 years
Interfaces, communication
PXC001.D PXC001-E.D
Building Level Network LonWorks FT5000 Transceiver BACnet on UDP/IP
Twisted Pair, 78 kBit/s IEEE802.3, Auto-sensing
(Screw terminals) 10 Base-T / 100 Base-TX
(RJ45, shielded)
Local Communication • PXM10 (RS232) --
(HMI, Tool) • PXM20 (BACnet/LonTalk, RJ45)
• FW Download Tool (RJ45)
Connection cable max. 3 m
Local Communication • PXM20 (BACnet/LonTalk) (RJ45) • PXM10 (RS232)
(HMI) Connection cable max. 3 m • FW Download Tool (RJ45)
Connection cable max. 3 m
One PXM10 operator unit and one One PXM10 on RJ45
PXM20 per system controller may be
connected. But not twice the same type.
KNX Tool-Interface RJ45 CE+, CE–
KNX bus Interface type KNX (electrically isolated)

Transceiver TP-UART
Bus current 5 mA
Baud rate 9.6 kbit/s
Bus topology, bus termination Refer to KNX manual
RS232 interface Baud rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
(depends on software)
Data bits 7 or 8 (depending on software)
Stop bits 1 or 2 (depending on software)
Parity None, even or odd
(depending on software)
Flow control Xon/Xoff, hardware or none
(depending on software)
Wiring Cable type 9-core standard screened cable
Cable length Max. 3 m
7 / 10

RS485 interface Interface type RS485, (electrically isolated)
Baud rate, data bits / stop bit(s), parity As for RS232 (depends on software)
Wiring Cable type Standard RS bus cable
Cable length Max. 1200 m
External Bus termination Depending on the bus topology, a
120 Ohm resistor must be connected
externally
Internal bus polarization 47 kOhm pull-up/pull-down resistors
Plug-in screw terminal Solid or stranded conductors
0.25…2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2
Simple cable lengths, cable Connection cable Ethernet and PXM20-E Max. 100 m
types Cable type Standard at least CAT5
UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair)
or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair)
Connection cable LONWORKS bus See Installation Guide CA110396
Cable type CAT5
Protection data Housing Protection standard IP 20 to EN 60529

Protection class III to EN 60730-1
Ambient conditions Normal operation To IEC 60721-3-3

Temperature 0...50 °C
Product family standard EN 50491-x General requirements for Home and
Building Electronic Systems (HBES)
and Building Automation and Control
Systems (BACS)
Electromagnetic compatibility (Applications) For use in residential, commerce,
light-industrial and industrial environ-
ments
UL certification (US) UL916 http://database.ul.com/
Certificate
AMEV: Supports profiles AS-A and AS-B to BACnet 2011, V1.1

AMEV directive "BACnet in public
buildings"
Environmental compatibility Product environmental declaration CM1E9223 *)
(contains data on RoHS compliance,
materials composition, packaging,
environmental benefit, disposal)
Dimensions See “Dimensions”

Weight Without / with packaging
PXC001.D, PXC001-E.D 0.635 kg / 0.731 kg
PXA40-RS1, PXA40-RS2 0.048 kg / 0.060 kg
8 / 10
Pin assignment
Supply plug Plug-in screw terminal block
1 AC 24 V (G)
4 5 1 2 3 2 Ground (G0)
CLB
CLA
3 Functional earth
LONWORKS plug Plug-in screw terminal block

(PXC001.D)
CE +
CE -
4 CLA LonWorks Data A
94 105 1 3
6 7 8
5 2CLB LonWorks Data B
CLB
CLA
Ethernet plug RJ45 socket screened, standard connection in accordance with AT&T256
CE +
CE -
(PXC001-E.D)
1. Tx+ 5. Not used
6 7 8 9
2. 10
Tx – 6. Rx –
3. Rx + 7. Not used
9222z12
87654321
4. Not used 8. Not used
"HMI" plug 1. Unoccupied 5. Not used

(PXC001-E.D) 2. Unoccupied 6. Not used
3. G0, GND 7. COM1/TxD
9215Z01
87654321
4. G/Plus 8. COM1/RxD
Plug "HMI" and 1. LONWORKS Data A (CLA) 5. Not used

"HMI/Tool" 2. LONWORKS Data B (CLB) 6. Not used
(PXC001.D) 3. G0 / GND 7. COM1 / TxD
9215Z01
87654321
4. G / Plus 8. COM1 / RxD
Tool plug (KNX) 1. KNX data (CE+) 5. Not used

2. KNX data (CE–) 6. Not used
3. Not used 7. Not used
9280Z03
87654321 4. Not used 8. Not used
RS232 plug serial 1 2 3 4 5 1 DCD Data carrier detect 6 DSR Data set ready
2 RXD Received data 7 RTS Request to send
4 5 1 2 3
9281z04
3 TXD Transmit data 8 CTS Clear to send

CLB
CLA
6 7 8 9
4 DTR Data terminal ready 9 NC Not connected
5 GND Signal ground
CE +
CE -
RS485 plug Plug-in screw terminal block

6 7 8 9 610 + B
4 5 1 2 3 7 – A
8  Screen, connected to functional earth
CLB
CLA
KNX plug
CE +
CE -
Plug-in screw terminal block

6 7 8 9 10
9 (CE–) – KNX data cable

10 (CE+) + KNX data cable
9 / 10

Dimensions
50.2 271.5
7 256
149.4
133,5
44.3
32.5
90
9223M01
38.5
50.8
58
70
46
15 143
Issued by:
Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Smart Infrastructure
Global Headquarters
Theilerstrasse 1a
CH-6300 Zug
+41 58 724-2424
www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies © Siemens Switzerland Ltd 2014
Delivery and technical specifications subject to change
10 / 10
TX-I/O™; Desigo™ Open
TX Open RS232/485 modules (TXI2.OPEN, TXI2-S.OPEN)

To integrate third-party systems and devices in Desigo (V4.1 or higher)
● Platform to integrate third-party systems and device to the Desigo building automa-
tion and control system Desigo (Version 4 or higher)
● Suitable for operation using predefined applications from Siemens or using in-house
developed applications
● TXI2.OPEN supports up to 160 data points
● TXI2-S.OPEN supports up to 40 data points
● Compact construction per DIN 43 880
● Easy installation and setup
– Plug-in screw terminal
– Power from Island bus (DC 24 V)
● Simple, fast diagnostics
● Two Ethernet ports
● Reset (power) push button
CM2N8187en_03 TXI2.OPEN, TXI2-S.OPEN TX Open RS232/485 modules Siemens

Page 80 of 709
Application
Integrates third-party systems and devices in Desigo (V4.1 or higher)
Functions
The TX Open RS232/485 module integrates third-party systems via RS232 or RS485 inter-
face to the Desigo building automation and control system.
The required applications are loaded onto the module via the USB interface.
Siemens offers finished applications for the following systems:
− Modbus Engineering instructions CM110571
− M-bus Engineering instructions CM110572
− USS (SED2, G120P) Engineering instructions CM110573
− Grundfos Engineering instructions CM110574
− G120P Engineering instructions CM110576
− Danfoss See Modbus engineering instructions CM110571
− WILO See Modbus engineering instructions CM110571
− Workflow document A6V10963119
Simple commissioning using prepared solutions:

• Solutions for G120P, Grundfos, WILO and Danfoss are supplied in the library (HQ CAS
library).
• For the protocols M-Bus and Modbus, example solutions are available in the CAS library
that are used as templates on device descriptions ((IO Open templates).
You can also develop your own applications. Contact your regional company.
The TX Open RS232/485 module is powered directly with DC 24 V from the island bus.
A webpage that may be viewed in the web browser via the Ethernet interface, displays the
interface configuration and values from the third-party system / device.
The TX Open Tool supports the download of firmware and applications as well as the con-
figuration data.
2/8
Siemens TXI2.OPEN, TXI2-S.OPEN TX Open RS232/485 modules CM2N8187en_03
Overview
A Plug-in screw terminal for RS232 and RS485 (Change-

over via software)
Terminal RS232 RS485

1 TX +
2 RX –
3 GND
(Potential equalization)
B LED "RUN" Power OK

C LED “COM” Communication (RS)
D Know to set module address
E Bus connector
F Attachment slider for standard rails
G RJ45 Ethernet connections
H Reset (power) push button
Mechanical properties
Housing • The housing complies with DIN 43880 and is 96 mm wide.
• During mounting, ensure sufficient convection
(max. ambient temperature 50°C).
Electrical properties
Power supply • The TX Open RS232/485 module is powered directly with DC 24 V from the
island bus.
No separate power required.
Interfaces • Plug-in screw terminal for serial interfaces RS232 and RS485
• Dual Ethernet for connecting TX Open Tools
Island bus • The TX Open RS232/485 module has contacts on the left and right side of the
housing for the island. The module is plugged in between existing modules or
attached at the end of a I/O row.
System neutral • The serial interfaces RS232 / RS485 are electrically isolated from the island
bus side. The connected third-party system may required grounding.
Protection against in- • All terminals are protected against short circuit and incorrect wiring us-
correct wiring ing AC/DC 24 V.
• Side bus connector: No protection
• Power greater than AC / DC 24 V: No protection
Interfaces
General • Serial interfaces are electrically isolated
• The serial interfaces use the same connection terminals.
You can use either RS232 or RS485
(changeover via software).
RS232 • The interface supports baud rates from 300 to 115200 Baud.
• The signals RXD and TXD available, but without handshake signals.
RS485 • The interface supports baud rates from 300 to 115200 Baud.
Bus termination • A bus termination (1nF, 120 Ohm in sequence) can be switched on in the TX
Open module.
3/8
2017-04-20 Page 82 of 709 Building Technologies
Ethernet interface
NOTICE We highly recommend that you do not attach cables to the Ethernet port if you
do not intend to use remote access. The devices are furnished with a default IP address and
would go to an undefined state if they are connected to the network.
Module status LED

• The module status LED (green) indicates the status of the module as a whole:
Meaning LED (green) Description
Normal ON Module OK, all functions working properly
Inactive OFF Module without power
Defective module (hardware fault)
Note/Faults Flashing (various patterns) For detailed information, see Section "Display, operation, and diagnostics" in
document "TX-I/O™ Engineering and installati
Module COM LED

• The module COM LED indicates communication on the RS side:
Meaning LED Description
COM Green Receiving data
COM Red Sending data
Address switch
• Rotary switch to set the module address
Meaning Switches Description
Address Positions 0…9 (on each switch) The module address is switched using the two address switches.
Position 0 (both switches) The factory setting is 00 (the TX Open RS232/485 module is inactive).
Corresponds to a open address key in an I/O module.
Reset (power) push button

Meaning Push button activation time Description
Power Off reset Min. 2 seconds The device restarts using the existing configuration.
Factory reset Until the red LED is continuously lit The device is reset to delivery status. Engineering steps must be repeated
(a minimum of 10 secs is needed) (password setting, load protocol application and configuration).
Types
Type Stock number Description

TXI2.OPEN S55661-J120 TX Open RS232/485 module (supporting 160 data points)
TXI2-S.OPEN S55661-J123 TX Open RS232/485 module (supporting 40 data points)
When ordering, please specify the quantity, designation, product number and stock number.
Example:
10 TX Open RS232/485 modules TXI2.OPEN, S55661-J120
The TX Open RS232/485 module is suitable for using an island-bus capable automation
station, i.e. in plants with version 4 or higher.
4/8
Product documentation
Topic/Title Document ID
[1] TX Open Modbus engineering CM110571
[2] TX Open M-bus engineering CM110572
[3] TX Open USS (SED2, G120P) engineering CM110573
[4] TX Open Grundfos engineering CM110574
[5] TX Open G120P engineering CM110576
[6] TX Open Tool online help —
[7] TX-I/O modules, datasheets CM1N817...
[8] TX-I/O engineering and installation guide CM110562
Related documents such as environmental declarations, CE declarations, etc., can be down-

loaded at the following Internet address:
http://siemens.com/bt/download
Notes
Safety
CAUTION
National safety regulations

Failure to comply with national safety regulations may result in personal injury and property
damage.
● Observe national provisions and comply with the appropriate safety regulations.
Mounting
Fixings
The device is mounted on a standard rail 35 x 7.5 mm
(tophat rails TH35-7.5 per EN60715)
Order
The device can be plugged into any position on the I/O row.
Exchange
One TX Open RS232/485 module may be removed from the row of modules.
Please note, however, that the island bus and power is interrupted for all subsequent mod-
ules.
Permissible mounting positions

TX-I/O™ devices can be mounted in any position.
You must ensure, however, that sufficient ventilation is available to maintain the permissible
ambient temperature (max. 50°C).
5/8
Disposal
The device is considered an electronics device for disposal in terms of Eu-

ropean Directive 2012/19/EU (WEEE) and may not be disposed of as do-
mestic garbage.
● Use only designated channels for disposing the devices.
● Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and regulations.
Technical data
Power supply
Operating voltage DC 24 V
Power on the island bus. No separate power required.
Power consumption 100 mA, 2.4 W
Short-circuit protection/incorrect wiring
side bus connector No protection!
RJ45 connectors No protection!
Interfaces
Ethernet Plugs: 2 x RJ45, screened
Interface type: 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.3 compatible
Bitrates: 10/100 Mbps, autosensing
Wiring connections
Plug-in screw terminal Cu wire or Cu strand with end sleeve
1 x 0.6 mm ø to 2.5 mm2 or
2 x 0.6 mm ø to 1.0 mm2
Cu wire or Cu strand without end sleeve
1 x 0.6 mm ø to 2.5 mm2 or
2 x 0.6 mm ø to 1.5 mm2
Slotted screws Size 1, with shaft ø ≤ 4.5 mm
Tightening torque: 0.6 Nm
Wiring lengths for signals RS485 1000 m (3280.1 ft)
RS232 80 m (262.5 ft)
Ambient conditions and protection classification

Classification per EN 60730
Function of automatic control devices
Degree of contamination Type 1
Design type 2
Protection class III
Degree of protection of housing to EN 60529
Front parts in DIN excerpt IP30
Terminal part IP20
Climatic ambient conditions
Transportation Class 2K3
(packaged for transportation) to EN 60721-3-2 Temperature -25...70 °C
Air humidity -25...95 %
Operation as per EN 60721-3-3 Class 3K5

Temperature: 2-5...50 °C
Air humidity: 2-5...95 % (non-condensing)
Mechanical ambient conditions
Transport as per EN 60721-3-2 Class 2M2
Operation as per EN 60721-3-3 Class 3M2
6/8
Standards, directives and approvals
Product standards EN 60730-1
Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use
Product family standard EN 50491
General requirements for Home and Building Electronic
Systems (HBES) and Building Automation and Control
Systems (BACS)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) For residential, commercial, and industrial environments
EU conformity (CE) see CM2T8185xx
RCM conformity see CM2T8185en_C1
UL approbation (US) UL916, http://database.ul.com
UL Approbation (CA) C22.2
Federal Communications Commission FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Class B
EAC compliance Eurasian conformity
Environmental compatibility See Product Environmental Declaration CM2E8187.
The product environmental declaration
CM1E8187 contains data on environmentally
compatible product design and assessments
(RoHS compliance, materials composition,
Housing
Dimensions Housing as per DIN 43880, see dimensions
Color Light gray, RAL 7035
Weight with/without packaging 161 g / 199 g
7/8
Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
Published by © Siemens Switzerland Ltd 2015

Siemens Switzerland Ltd. Delivery and technical specifications subject to change
Gubelstrasse 22
CH-6301 Zug
Tel. +41 41-724 24 24
www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies
8 /8
Document ID CM2N8187en_03
Siemens
Date 2017-04-20TXI2.OPEN, TXI2-S.OPEN TX Open RS232/485 modules CM2N8187en_03
Compact enclosures AE
System accessories Page 537 AE stainless steel Page 184 AE IP 69K Page 187 AE EMC-shielded Page 201 Hygienic Design Page 176
Material: Supply includes: Approvals:

Enclosure: Sheet steel Enclosure with hinged UL F
Door: Sheet steel, all-round door(s), of all-round solid CSA

foamed-in PU seal construction TÜV T
B
Gland plate(s) in enclosure Germanischer Lloyd
Surface finish:
base Russian Maritime Register
Enclosure and door:
For single-door enclosures, of Shipping
Dipcoat-primed, powder-
G
door hinged on right, Lloyds Register of Shipping
coated on the outside,
may be swapped to left Bureau Veritas
textured paint
H
(except with AE 1032.500 VDE
Mounting plate: Zinc-plated
and AE 1035.500)
Detailed drawings:
Colour: With cam lock or 3-point lock
Available on the Internet.
RAL 7035 system
Mounting plate
Protection category:
See tables.
Width (B) mm Packs of 200 200 300 300 300 380 380 380 Page
Height (H) mm 300 300 300 300 400 300 300 380
Depth (T) mm 120 155 155 210 210 155 210 210
Mounting plate width (F) mm 162 162 254 254 254 334 334 334
Mounting plate height (G) mm 275 275 275 275 375 275 275 355
Material thickness Enclosure 1.25 1.25 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38
mm Door 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Mounting plate thickness mm 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Cam lock 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Model No. AE 1 1032.500 1035.500 1036.500 1033.500 1034.500 1030.500 1031.500 1380.500
Weight (kg) 4.0 4.5 6.1 7.0 8.8 7.4 7.5 9.8
Protection category IP 66 to IEC 60 529, complies with NEMA 4.
Accessories
Size 1 1 – – – 3 3 3 From
Gland plate
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 704
Rails for interior installation 4 – – – 2373.210 2373.210 – 2373.210 2373.210 647
Wall mounting bracket
4 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 627
for external mounting
Baying kit 1 set 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 582
Door stay 5 – – 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 617
180° hinges 2 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 613
Sheet steel 1 – – – – – – 2501.500 2501.500 619
Rain canopies
Stainless steel 1 – 2470.000 – 2361.000 2361.000 2471.000 2472.000 2472.000 619
Earth straps see page 689
LED system light see page 682
Wiring plan pocket, plastic see page 616
Cable gland see page 709
Alternative lock systems see page 599
Page 88 of 709
Width (B) mm Packs of 380 380 400 400 500 500 500 Page
Height (H) mm 600 600 500 800 500 500 700
Depth (T) mm 210 350 210 300 210 300 250
Mounting plate width (F) mm 334 334 354 349 449 449 449
Mounting plate height (G) mm 570 570 475 770 470 470 670
Material thickness Enclosure 1.38 1.5 1.38 1.5 1.38 1.5 1.5
mm Door 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 1.75 1.75 2.0
Mounting plate thickness mm 2.5 2.5 2.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5
Cam lock 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Model No. AE 1 1038.500 1338.500 1045.500 1037.500 1050.500 1350.500 1057.500
Weight (kg) 15.6 19.4 13.0 26.2 16.8 19.6 31.2
Accessories
Size 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 From
Gland plate
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 704
Rails for interior installation 4 2373.210 2373.350 2373.210 2373.300 2373.210 2373.300 2373.250 647
4 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 627
Baying kit 1 set 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 582
Door stay 5 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 617
180° hinge 2 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 613
Door mounting bar 20 – – – – 2325.000 2325.000 2325.000 614
Sheet steel 1 2501.500 – – – – – – 619
Rain canopies
Stainless steel 1 2472.000 – – – 2362.000 – – 619
Dust guard trim see page 620
Width (B) mm Packs of 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Page
Height (H) mm 380 380 600 600 600 760 760 800 1000
Depth (T) mm 210 350 210 250 350 210 350 250 250
Mounting plate width (F) mm 549 549 549 549 549 549 549 549 539
Mounting plate height (G) mm 355 355 570 570 570 730 730 770 955
Material thickness Enclosure 1.38 1.5 1.38 1.5 1.5 1.38 1.5 1.5 1.5
mm Door 1.5 1.5 1.75 1.75 1.75 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Mounting plate thickness mm 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Cam lock 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Model No. AE 1 1039.500 1339.500 1060.500 1054.500 1360.500 1076.500 1376.500 1058.500 1090.500
Weight (kg) 15.4 20.0 22.8 24.8 28.4 32.1 36.0 33.6 50.5
Accessories
Size 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 From
Gland plate
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 704
Rails for interior installation 4 2373.210 2373.350 2373.210 2373.250 2373.350 2373.210 2373.350 2373.250 2373.250 647
4 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 627
Baying kit 1 sets 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 – 582
Door stay 5 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 617
180° hinge 2 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 613
Door mounting bar 20 2326.000 2326.000 2326.000 2326.000 2326.000 2326.000 2326.000 2326.000 2326.000 614
Sheet steel 1 2502.500 2511.500 2502.500 – 2511.500 2502.500 2511.500 – – 619
Rain canopies
Stainless steel 1 2473.000 – 2473.000 – – 2473.000 – – – 619
Page 89 of 709
Width (B) mm Packs of 600 760 760 800 800 800 Page
Height (H) mm 1200 760 760 600 1000 1200
Depth (T) mm 300 210 300 300 300 300
Mounting plate width (F) mm 540 704 704 749 739 740
Mounting plate height (G) mm 1155 730 730 570 955 1155
Material thickness Enclosure 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
mm Door 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Mounting plate thickness mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 3.0 3.0
Cam lock – 2 2 2 2 –
3-point lock system n – – – – n
Model No. AE 1 1260.500 1077.500 1073.500 1055.500 1180.500 1280.500
Weight (kg) 55.0 40.0 44.5 33.9 57.0 70.0
Accessories
Size 5 5 5 5 5 5 From
Gland plate
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 704
Rails for interior installation 4 2373.300 2373.210 2373.300 2373.300 2373.300 2373.300 647
4 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 627
Baying kit 1 set – 1199.100 1199.100 1199.100 – – 582
Door stay 5 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 617
180° hinge 2 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 613
Door mounting bar 20 2326.000 2327.000 2327.000 2328.000 2328.000 2328.000 614
Rain canopies, stainless steel 1 – – 2474.000 2475.000 2475.000 2475.000 619
Height 100 mm 1 2816.200 – – – – 2818.200 551
Base/plinth
Height 200 mm 1 2826.200 – – – – 2828.200 551
Eyebolts 4 2509.000 – – – – 2509.000 626
Width (B) mm Packs of 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Page

Height (H) mm 760 760 1000 1200 1400
Depth (T) mm 210 300 300 300 300
Mounting plate width (F) mm 944 944 939 940 940
Mounting plate height (G) mm 730 730 955 1155 1355
Material thickness Enclosure 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
mm Door 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Mounting plate thickness mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Cam lock 2 2 2 – –
3-point lock system – – – n n
Model No. AE 1 1100.500 1130.500 1110.500 1213.500 1114.500
Door(s) 2 2 2 2 2
Weight (kg) 52.0 56.0 71.0 85.0 97.0
Accessories
Size 4 4 4 4 4 From
Gland plate
Qty. 2 2 2 2 2 704
Rails for interior installation 4 2373.210 2373.300 2373.300 2373.300 2373.300 647
4 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 2508.100 627
Baying kit 1 set 1199.100 1199.100 – – – 582
Door stay 5 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 2519.000 617
180° hinge 2 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 2449.000 613
Door mounting bar 20 2325.000 2325.000 2325.000 2325.000 2325.000 614
Rain canopies, stainless steel 1 – 2363.000 2363.000 2363.000 2363.000 619
Height 100 mm 1 – 2801.200 2801.200 2801.200 2801.200 551
Base/plinth
Height 200 mm 1 – 2802.200 2802.200 2802.200 2802.200 551
Eyebolts 4 – – – 2509.000 2509.000 626
Plastic wiring plan pocket see page 616
Page 90 of 709
PERFECT SOLUTIONS FOR GAS ALARM SYSTEMS
Technical Datasheet
µGard®2
Sensor Unit MC2

for Combustible Gases
with Analog Output
DESCRIPTION
APPLICATION
FEATURES
SPECIFICATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION
WIRING CONFIGURATION
Specifications subject to change without notice.

Up-to-date data sheets and user manuals can be found in the download area of www.msr-24.com.
µGard® is a registered trademark of MSR-Electronic GmbH.
www.msr-electronic.de
MSR-Electronic GmbH | Buergermeister-Schoenbauer-Str.

Page 13 91
| D-94060
of 709Pocking
DESCRIPTION
Exchangeable sensor unit including digital value processing, temperature compensation and
self-control for the continuous monitoring of the ambient air.
The sensor unit MC2 houses a module with µController, analog output and power supply in addition to the infrared
or Pellistor sensor element including amplifier. The µController calculates a linear 4–20 mA (or 2–10 V) signal out of
the measurement signal and stores all relevant measured values and data of the sensor element.
Calibration is done either by simply replacing the sensor unit or by using the comfortable, integrated calibration
routine directly at the system.
APPLICATION
The µGard®2 Sensor MC2 is used for the detection of combustible gases in the non-Ex zone when a typical 4–20 mA
(or 2–10 V) signal is required.
FEATURES
• Digital measurement value processing incl. temperature compensation
• Internal function control with integrated hardware watchdog
• Data / measured values in µC of the sensor unit, therefore simple exchange uncalibrated <> calibrated
• High accuracy and reliability
• Long sensor lifetime
• Hardware and software according to SIL compliant development process
• Easy maintenance and calibration by exchange of the sensor unit or by comfortable on-site calibration
• 4–20 mA (or 2–10 V) analog output with selectable signal output for special mode, fault etc.
• Reverse polarity protected, overload and short-circuit proof
• IP65 version
• Housing for integration of the sensor unit (option)
• Display (option)
• Display with two open-collector outputs for horn (resettable) and warning lamp (option)
• Conformity to:
o EN 50271
o EN 50545:2017
o EN 61010-1
o ANSI/UL 61010 1
o CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1
• Duct mounting kit (accessory)
Sensor Unit MC2 MC2 for Combustible Gases

with Analog Output Page 92 of 709 2020-06 Page 2 | 6
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
Power supply 16–29 V DC, reverse-polarity protect.;
18–27 V AC (only for output signal 2–10 V)
Power consumption 75 mA, max. (1.8 VA for 24 V)
Analog output signal Proportional, overload and short-circuit proof,
load 500 Ω for current signal, ≥ 50 kΩ for voltage signal
4–20 mA or 2–10 V = measuring range
3.2–4 mA or 1.6–2 V = underrange
> 20–21.2 mA or 10–10.6 V = overrange
2 mA or 1 V = fault
> 21.8 mA or 10.9 V = fault High
SENSOR ELEMENT
Gas type Combustible gases, see Ordering Information
Sensor element Pellistor (catalytic bead) sensor Infrared
Measuring range See Ordering Information 0–100 % LEL
Accuracy ± 1 % LEL (CH4) ± 4.0 % of signal (CH4)
Display resolution 0,1 % LEL n. d.
Repeatability < 2 % of signal (CH4)
Response time t90 < 15 sec. (CH4) ≤ 70 sec. (CH4)
Zero-point variation 0,5 % (CH4) 4 % LEL
Long-term zero-point drift < 0.5 % LEL / month (CH4) n. d.
Long-term sensitivity drift < 1 % LEL / month (CH4) n. d.
Calibration interval1 6 months
Sensor lifetime > 3 years / normal ambient conditions 5 years / normal conditions
Temperature range -30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)
Humidity range 5–95 % RH not condensing
Pressure range Atmospheric ± 10 %
Storage temperature range +5 °C to +30 °C (41 °F to 86 °F)
Storage time 6 months
Poisoning Sensitivity of Pellistor sensors can be influenced by substances containing
silicon compounds and even poisoned and destroyed by them. The sensors
are susceptible to poisoning by organic solvents and silicone vapours.
PHYSICAL
Housing plastic Polycarbonate; UL 94 V2
Housing colour RAL 7032 (light grey)
Dimensions: Type P (D x H) 24 x 22 mm (0.94 x 0.87 in.)
Type L (D x H) 24 x 30 mm (0.94 x 1.18 in.)
Weight Ca. 30 g (0.066 lb)
Protection class IP65 (only if mounted in housing type A, D or N)
Mounting Screw mounting / M25
Wire connection Screw-type terminal min. 0.25 mm2, max. 1.3 mm2 ,3-pin, 24 to 16 AWG
REGULATIONS
Directives EMC directives 2014/30/EU
CE
Compliance with:
EN 50545:2017;
EN 61010-1:2010,
ANSI/UL 61010-1,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1
Warranty 1 year on sensor (not if poisoned or overloaded),
2 years on device
1
Manufacturer-recommended calibration interval for normal environmental conditions.

OPTIONS
ENCLOSURE A
Enclosure A for integration of sensor unit Polycarbonate UL 94 V2
Enclosure colour RAL 7032 (light grey)
Dimensions (B x H x T) 94 x 130 x 57 mm (3.7 x 5.1 x 2.2 in.)
Weight / package volume Ca. 0,2 kg (0.4 lb) / ca. 4,5 l
Protection class IP65
Mounting Wall mounting
Pre-embossing for cable entry / sensor unit 6 x M20 / M25
LCD-DISPLAY
LCD 2 lines, 16 characters each, monochrome
OPEN-COLLECTOR
Transistor output (2) For horn (resettable) and warning lamp
Switching capacity 24 V DC / 50 mA (+ switching)
All specifications were collected under optimal test conditions.

We confirm compliance with the minimum requirements of the applicable standard.
ORDERINGING INFORMATION
MC2- X- S4XX-X- X- L
L Sensor housing plastic long & 2nd gas inlet Sensor housing
0 Without display
1 With display for indication of readings (only in housing A or N)
2 With display for values and operation, 2x open collector for horn and
warning lamp (only housing A/N) Display
Gas type Measuring range

S400-A Methane CH4 Infrared 0–100 % LEL Gas type/
S480-A Propane C3H8 Infrared 0–100 % LEL Measuring range
0 Without housing
A Plastic housing type A, 94 x 130 x 57 mm
5 Stainless steel housing type 5, 113 x 135 x 45 mm Housing for inte-
D Plastic housing type D, 94 x 65 x 57 mm gration of the
N Plastic housing type N, 80 x 82 x 55 mm sensor unit
EXAMPLE
CH4 Methane sensor unit with infrared element, measuring range 0–100 % LEL with plastic housing type A, without
display, sensor unit in plastic housing L
Ordering number: MC2-A-S400-A-0-L
ACCESSORY
Calibration adapter
Ordering number: C2-Z6

ORDERING INFORMATION
MC2- X- X34XX- X- X
P Sensor housing plastic Sensor housing
0 Without display
1 With display for indication of readings (only in housing A or N)
2 With display for values and operation, 2x open collector for horn and
warning lamp (only housing A / N) Display
Gas type Measuring Gas density Mounting

range (air = 1) height
P3485-A Acetone, C3H6O 0–100 % LEL 2.00 Floor
P3408-A* Ammonia, NH3 0–100 % LEL 0.60 Ceiling
P3430-A Benzene, C6H6 0–100 % LEL 2.70 Floor
P3494-A Butadiene, C4H6 0–100 % LEL 1.92 Floor
P3448-A Butyl acetate, C6H12O2 0–100 % LEL 4.01 Floor
P3415-A Cyclohexane, C6H12 0–100 % LEL 2.90 Floor
P3472-A Cyclopentane, C5H10 0–100 % LEL 2.42 Floor
P3420-A Ethane, C2H6 0–100 % LEL 1.05 1.5 to 1.8 m
P3427-A Ethyl acetate, C4H8O2 0–100 % LEL 3.04 Floor
P3425-A Ethyl alcohol, C2H5OH 0–100 % LEL 1.59 Floor
P3410-A Ethylene, C2H4 0–100 % LEL 0.98 1.5 to 1.8 m
P3440-A Hydrogen, H2 0–100 % LEL 0.07 Ceiling
P3468-A Isobutyl alcohol, C4H10O 0–100 % LEL 2.56 Floor
P3482-A Isopropyl alcohol, C3H8O 0–100 % LEL 2.08 Floor
P3460-A Iso/n-Butane, C4H10 0–100 % LEL 2.11 Floor
P3475-A Iso/n-Pentane, C5H12 0–100 % LEL 2.49 Floor
P3402-A LPG 0–100 % LEL - -
P3400-A Methane, CH4 0–100 % LEL 0.55 Ceiling
P3450-A Methanol, CH3OH 0–100 % LEL 1.11 Floor
P3473-A Methyl acetate, C3H6O2 0–100 % LEL 2.56 Floor
P3458-A Methyl ethyl ketone, C4H8O 0–100 % LEL 1.15 Floor
P3491-A n-Heptane, C7H16 0–100 % LEL 3.46 Floor
P3435-A n-Hexane, C6H14 0–100 % LEL 2.98 Floor
P3495-A Nonane, C9H20 0–100 % LEL 4.43 Floor
P3470-A Octane, C8H18 0–100 % LEL 1.04 1.5 to 1.8 m
P3496-A Petrol Vapours 0–100 % LEL - -
P3480-A Propane, C3H8 0–100 % LEL 1.55 Floor
Gas type/
P3480-B Propane, C3H8 0–30 % LEL 1.55 Floor Measuring range/
P3480-C Propane, C3H8 0–5000 ppm 1.55 Floor Gas density
P3490-A Toluene, C7H8 0–100 % LEL 3.18 Floor Mounting height
0 Without housing
A Plastic housing type A, 94 x 130 x 57 mm
5 Stainless steel housing type 5, 113 x 135 x 45 mm Housing for inte-
D Plastic housing type D, 94 x 65 x 57 mm gration of the
N Plastic housing type N, 80 x 82 x 55 mm sensor unit
*On request only

EXAMPLE
CH4 Methane sensor unit with Pellistor element, measuring range 0–100 % LEL with plastic housing type A, without
display, sensor unit in plastic housing P
Ordering number: MC2-A-P3400-A-0-P
ACCESSORY
Duct mounting kit
Calibration adapter
WIRING CONFIGURATION
ooo
MC2-Display 3 2 1
Digital Output
(Option)
0 VDC
4-20mA
/ 2-10V
+24 V
X2
DO 2 1
DO 1 2
max. 30V / 50mA 3
4 Sensor Unit
MC2-X-XXXX
Note:
The installation of the sensor unit MC2 directly on the MSC2, MGC2 or MSB2 housing isn’t-possible, only external
connection with separate housing!
For 4–20 mA output signal you have to remove the resistor between pin 2 and pin 3.

1 857
1857P01
QFA20.. QFA2060D
Room sensors QFA20..

For relative humidity and temperature
· Operating voltage AC 24 V or DC 13.5…35 V

· Signal output DC 0...10 V / 4…20 m A for relative humidity
· Signal output DC 0...10 V / 4…20 mA / LG-Ni 1000 or T1 for temperature
· Accuracy of ± 3 % r.h. within comfort range
· Range of use -15…+50 °C / 0…95 % r.h. (non-condensing)
Use
In ventilating and air conditioning plants to acquire

· relative humidity and
· temperature
in rooms.
The QFA20.. is used as a
· control sensor and
· measuring sensor for building automation and control systems or indicating units.
Type summary
Type Temperature Temperature Humidity Humidity

Operating voltage
reference measuring range signal output measuring range signal output
QFA2000 None None 0...100 % active, DC 0...10 V AC 24 V or DC 13.5…35 V
QFA2001 None None 0...100 % active, 4…20 mA DC 13.5…35 V
QFA2020 0...50 °C passive, LG-Ni 1000 0...100 % active, DC 0...10 V AC 24 V or DC 13.5…35 V
QFA2040 0...50 °C passive, T1 (PTC) 0...100 % active, DC 0...10 V AC 24 V or DC 13.5…35 V
QFA2060 0...50 °C / - 35...+ 3 5 °C /
active, DC 0...10 V 0...100 % active, DC 0...10 V AC 24 V or DC 13.5…35 V
QFA2060D - 40…+70 °C
0...50 °C / - 35...+ 3 5 °C / active, 4…20 mA 0...100 % active, 4…20 mA DC 13.5…35 V
QFA2071
- 40...+ 7 0 °C
CE1N1857en
Page 97 of 709
Ordering and delivery
When ordering, please give name and type reference, e.g.:

Room sensor QFA2060D.
All systems or devices capable of acquiring and handling the sensor’s DC 0...10 V ,
4…20m A , LG-Ni 1000 or T1 output signal.
When using the sensors for minimum or maximum selection, for averaging, or to calcu-
late enthalpy, enthalpy difference, absolute humidity, and dew point, we recommend to
use the SEZ220 signal converter (see Data Sheet N5146).
Mode of operation
Relative humidity The sensor acquires the relative humidity in the room via its capacitive humidity sens-
ing element whose electrical capacitance changes as a function of the relative humidity.
The electronic measuring circuit converts the sensor’s signal to a continuous
DC 0...10 V or 4…20 mA signal, which corresponds to 0...100 % relative humidity.
Temperature The sensor acquires the temperature in the room via its sensing element whose electri-
cal resistance changes as a function of the temperature.
This change in resistance is converted to an active DC 0…10 V or 4…20 mA output
signal, corresponding to a temperature range of 0… 50 °C, –35…+35 °C, or
-40...+70 °C. The measuring range can be selected. The temperature is provided as a
simulated passive LG-Ni 1000 or T1 output signal ( 0…50 °C) as an alternative to the
active output signal.
Simulated passive The measuring current from systems/devices to acquire the electrical resistance of the
output signal passive sensor differs greatly and impacts self-heating of the temperature sensing ele-
ment at the end of the measuring tip. To compensate the impact, the passive output
signal is simulated with an electronic circuit.
Sensing elements, Characteristic LG-Ni 1000 Characteristic T1 (PTC)

simulated
Legend R Resistance value in Ohm

J Temperature in degrees Celsius
2/8
Siemens Room sensors QFA20.. CE1N1857en

Burden diagram Output signal, terminal I1 / I2
1864D03en
900
800
700 Inadmissible
Burden [Ohm]
range!
600
500
Admissible
range
400
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40
Operating voltage [DC V]
Mechanical design
The room sensors have been designed for wall mounting. They are suitable for use
with most commercially available recessed conduit boxes. The cables can be intro-
duced from the rear (concealed wiring) or from below or above (surface-run wires)
through knock-out openings.
The two-part housing comprises a casing and a baseplate. Both snap together but can
be detached again.
The measuring circuit, the sensing elements and the setting element are located on the
printed circuit board inside the casing.
The baseplate carries the connecting terminals.
Measured value display The type QFA2060D provides the measured values on its LCD display. The following
measured values are displayed alternately in intervals of 5 s:
- Temperature: in °C or °F
- Humidity: in % r.h.
Setting element
The setting elements are located in the casing. A setting element consists of 6 pins and
a jumper. It is used for selecting the required temperature measuring range and for
activating the test function. Types with LCD display have a second setting element with
4 pins and a jumper.
The different jumper positions have the following meaning:
· For the passive temperature measuring range (QFA2020, QFA2040):
Jumper in the middle position (R2) = LG-Ni 1000 or T1 (0...50 °C)
· For the active temperature measuring range:
Jumper in the upper position (R1) = - 35...+ 35 °C,
Jumper in the middle position (R2) = 0...50 °C (factory setting),
Jumper in the lower position (R3) = –40…+70 °C
3/8

· For activating the test function:
Jumper in the vertical position: The values according to the table "Test function ac-
tive" will be made available at the signal output.
· For the measured value display (QFA2060D)

- Jumper horizontal, in the upper position = °F
- Jumper horizontal, in the lower position = °C (factory setting)
Malfunction · Should the temperature sensor become faulty a voltage of 0 V (4 mA) will be applied
at signal output U2 (I2) or signal output BS-MS becomes high impedance (>1 M )
after 60 seconds, and the humidity signal at signal output U1 (I1) will reach
10 V (20 mA).
· Should the humidity sensor become faulty a voltage of 10 V (20 mA) will be applied
at signal output U1 (I1) after 60 seconds, and the temperature signal will remain ac-
tive.
Engineering notes
Room sensors with active outputs have a high power loss, which can influence temper-
ature measurement. The degree of influence depends on the operating voltage and is
compensated in the SymaroTM room sensors for an operating voltage of AC 24 V or
DC 24 V. Over- or undercompensation may occur for other operating voltages.
Furthermore, the measuring accuracy is impacted by the following factors:

- Prevailing air flow
- Wall surface (rough, smooth)
- Wall texture (wood, plaster, concrete, brick)
- Wall type (interior, exterior).
This application-specific measuring inaccuracy is constant for an installed sensor after
approx. 1 operating hour, and it can be adjusted as needed in a higher system (e.g.
controller). No correction on the local LCD.
A transformer for safety extra low-voltage (SELV) with separate windings for 100 %
duty is required to power the sensor. When sizing and protecting the transformer, the
local safety regulations must be complied with.
When sizing the transformer, the power consumption of the room sensor must be taken
into consideration.
For correct wiring of the sensor, refer to the Data Sheets of the devices with which the
sensor is used.
The permissible line lengths must be considered.
Cable routing and It must be considered for routing of cables that the longer the cables run side by side
cable selection and the smaller the distance between them, the greater the electrical interference.
Shielded cables must be used in environments with EMC problems.
Twisted pair cables are required for the secondary supply lines and the signal lines.
Note to QFA2071 Terminals G1(+) and I1(-) of the humidity output must always be connected to power,
even if only terminals G2(+) and I2(-) of the temperature output are used!
G1(+) and I1(-) are galvanically isolated towards G2(+) and I2(-).
4/8

Mounting notes
Location Inside wall (not on outside wall!) of the room to be air conditioned; not in recesses,
behind curtains, above or close to heat sources or shelves not on walls behind which a
chimney is located. The unit must not be exposed to spot lights or direct solar radiation.
The unit must not be exposed to spot lights or direct solar radiation.
Install the sensor in the occupied space about 1.5 m above the floor and at least 50 cm
from the next wall.
The end of the conduit at the sensor must be sealed to prevent false measurements
due to draughts through the conduit.
Mounting instructions Mounting instructions are printed on the inner side of the package.
Chemical vapors It is of great importance to understand that a humidity sensor is a sensitive measure
device and needs to be handled with care. Chemical vapors at high concentration in
combination with long exposure times may offset the sensor reading.
Commissioning notes
Check wiring before switching on power. The temperature measuring range must be
selected on the sensor, if required.
Wiring and the output signals can be checked by making use of the test function (refer
to "Mechanical design").
We recommend not to use voltmeters or ohmmeters directly at the sensing element. In

the case of the simulated passive output signals, measurements with commercially
available meters cannot be made (measuring current too small).
Disposal
The devices are considered electronics devices for disposal in term of European Di-
rective 2012/19/EU and may not be disposed of as domestic waste.
· Dispose of the device via the channels provided for this purpose.
· Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and regulations.
5/8

Technical data
Power supply Operating voltage AC 24 V ± 20 % or DC13,5…35 V (SELV)

or
AC/DC 24 V class 2 (US)
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz at AC 24 V
External supply line protection Fuse slow max. 10 A
or
Characteristic B, C, D
according to EN 60898
or
Power source with current limitation of
max. 10 A
Power consumption
QFA2… £0.4VA
QFA2001 £0.7W
QFA2071 £1.4W
QFA2020, QFA2040 £1VA
Cable lengths for measuring Perm. cable lengths See data sheet for the device
signal handling the signal
Functional data of Range of use 0…95 % r.h. (non-condensing)
humidity sensor Measuring range 0…100 % r.h.
Measuring accuracy (*) at 23 °C and AC/DC 24 V and at
0...95 % r.h. ± 5 % r.h.
30...70 % r.h. ± 3 % r.h.
(*) Values for output signal sensor types with
0-10 V signal: only for AC 24 V and
4…20 mA signal: only for DC 24 V
Temperature dependency £ 0.1 % r.h./ ° C
Time constant < 20 s
Output signal, linear (terminal U1) DC 0...10 V 0...100 % r.h.,
max. 1 mA
Output signal, linear (terminal I1) 4…20 mA 0...100 % r.h.
Burden refer to "Mode of operation"
Range of use - 15...+ 50 °C
Functional data of Measuring range 0...50 °C (R2 = factory setting), - 35...+ 35 °C
temperature sensor with (R1) or - 40…+70 °C (R3)
QFA2060(D), QFA2171 Sensing element NTC 10k
Measuring accuracy at AC/DC 24 V and at
23 °C ± 0.3 K
15...35 °C ± 0.7 K
- 35...+50 °C ±1 K
Time constant 8.5 min (depending on air movement and
thermal coupling to the wall)
Output signal, linear (terminal U2) DC 0...10 V 0...50 °C / - 35...+35 °C
/ – 40…+70 °C
max. 1 mA
Output signal, linear (terminal I2) 4…20 mA 0...50 °C / - 35...+35 °C
/ - 40...+70 °C
Burden refer to "Mode of operation"
6/8

Functional data of Measuring range 0...50 °C
temperature sensor with Sensing element simulated, corresponding to
QFA2020, QFA2040 QFA2020 LG-Ni 1000
QFA2040 T1 (PTC)
Measuring accuracy at AC/DC 24 V and at
15...35 °C ± 0.7 K
- 35...+50 °C ±1 K
Time constant 8.5 min (depending on air movement and
thermal coupling to the wall)
Perm. measuring current with
QFA2020 1.18…4.21 mA
QFA2040 0.53…1.89 mA
Degree of protection Protection degree of housing IP30 according to EN 60529
Protection class III according to EN 60730
2 2
Electrical connections Screw terminals for 1 ´ 2.5 mm or 2 ´ 1.5 mm
Environmental Operation to IEC 60721-3-3
conditions Climatic conditions Class 3K5
Temperature (housing with electronics) - 15...+ 50 °C
Humidity 0…95 % r. h (non-condensing)
Transport to IEC 60721-3-2
Climatic condition Class 2K3
Temperature - 25...+ 70 °C
Humidity < 95 % r.h.
Materials and colors Housing front ASA + PC, NCS S 0502-G (white) equates to
RAL9010
Bottom section of housing ASA + PC, NCS 2801-Y43R (grey)
equates to RAL7035
Base PC, NCS 2801-Y43R (grey)
equates to RAL7035
Sensor (complete assembly) Silicone-free
Packaging Corrugated cardboard
Standards, directives, and Product standard EN 60730-1
approvals Automatic electrical controls for household
and similar use
Electromagnetic compatibility (Applications) For use in residential, commerce, light-
industrial and industrial environments
*)
EU Conformity (CE) CE1T1857xx
RCM Conformity CE1T1961en_C1
EAC Conformity Eurasia Conformity
UL UL 873, http://ul.com/database
Environmental compatibility *)
The product environmental declaration CE1E1961 contains data on environmentally compatible prod-
uct design and assessments (RoHS compliance, materials composition, packaging, environmental
benefit, disposal).
Incl. packaging
Weight
Without LCD display Approx. 0.130 kg
With LCD display Approx. 0,150 kg
7/8

Internal diagram
QFA2060 QFA2060D QFA2020, QFA2040 (as of series B) QFA2000
G G
1857G03
1857G02
r.h. r.h.
G0 U1 BS MS G0 U1
QFA2001 QFA2071
G1
1864G04
(r.h.)
I1
G, G0 Operating voltage AC 24 V (SELV) or DC 13.5...35 V

G1, G2 Operating voltage DC 13.5...35 V
U1 Signal output DC 0...10 V for relative humidity 0...100 %
U2 Signal output DC 0...10 V for temperature range 0...50 °C (R2 = factory setting),
- 35...+ 35 °C (R1) or - 40…+70 °C (R3)
I1 Signal output 4…20 mA for 0...100 % r.h.
I2 Signal output 4…20 mA for temperature range 0...50 °C (R2 = factory setting),
- 35...+ 35 °C (R1) or - 40...+ 70 °C (R3)
BS, MS Signal output LG-Ni 1000 or T1 (passive, simulated) for temperature range 0…50 °C;
the wires must not be interchanged
Note on connection terminals of the QFA2071:

Terminals G1(+) and I1 (-) of the humidity output must always be connected to power, even if only
terminals G2 (+) and I2 (-) of the temperature output are used!
G1(+) and I1 (-) are galvanically isolated towards G2 (+) and I2 (-).
Dimensions
4,2
100
56
60
9,5
90 36 56
1857M01
60
Dimension in mm Drilling plan
Issued by © Siemens Switzerland Ltd, 2006

Siemens Switzerland Ltd. Technical specifications and availability subject to change without notice.
Theilerstrasse 1a
CH-6300 Zug
Tel. +41 58 724 2424
8/8

VVF47.. VXF47.. VVF42..C, VVF42..KC VXF42..C
Acvatix™
Valves
VVF47..,VXF47..,VVF42..C,VVF42..KC,VXF42..C
Basic documentation
A6V10423210_en--_a Building Technologies

2016-01-11 Control Products and Systems
Page 105 of 709

Page 106 of 709
Table of contents
1 About this document .............................................................................. 5
1.1 Navigation ................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Revision history ........................................................................................ 5
1.3 Reference documents............................................................................... 5
1.3.1 2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections ........................................... 5
1.4 Before you start ........................................................................................ 5
1.4.1 Trademarks .............................................................................................. 5
1.4.2 Copyright .................................................................................................. 6
1.4.3 Quality assurance ..................................................................................... 6
1.4.4 Document use / request to the reader ....................................................... 6
1.5 Validity of documentation .......................................................................... 6
2 Engineering............................................................................................. 7
2.1 Product description ................................................................................... 7
2.1.1 2-port valves ............................................................................................. 7
2.1.2 3-port valves ............................................................................................. 7
2.1.3 Type plate................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Use......................................................................................................... 10
2.2.1 Compatibility with medium and temperature ranges ................................ 10
2.2.2 Fields of use ........................................................................................... 10
2.3 Type summary and equipment combinations............................................ 11
2.3.1 2-port valves with flanged connections ..................................................... 11
2.3.2 3-port valves with flanged connections ..................................................... 11
2.3.3 Overview of actuators ............................................................................. 13
2.4 Ordering ................................................................................................. 14
2.5 Accessories ............................................................................................ 14
2.6 Product replacement ............................................................................... 14
2.7 Spare parts ............................................................................................. 15
2.8 Valve sizing for water .............................................................................. 15
2.8.1 Procedure for valve sizing ....................................................................... 16
2.8.2 Flow chart............................................................................................... 17
2.8.3 Impact of fluid properties on valve sizing ................................................. 18
2.8.4 Influencing factors with selected groups of fluids ..................................... 21
2.8.5 Rangeability Sv, minimum controllable output Qmin................................... 21
2.9 Calculation examples for water ............................................................... 22
2.9.1 Example for water: Heater with pressure and variable volumetric flow ..... 22
2.9.2 Example for water: Heater with low differential pressure without main pump
............................................................................................................... 23
2.10 Valve characteristics ............................................................................... 24
2.10.1 2-port valves ........................................................................................... 24
2.10.2 3-port valves ........................................................................................... 25
2.11 Operating pressure and medium temperature ......................................... 25
2.11.1 ISO 7005 and EN 1092 – a comparison .................................................. 25
2.11.2 PN 16 valves with flanged connections ................................................... 26
2.12 Cavitation ............................................................................................... 27
2.13 Medium quality and medium treatment.................................................... 29
2.13.1 Water...................................................................................................... 29
2.13.2 Deionized, demineralized water and super-clean water ........................... 30
2.14 Engineering notes................................................................................... 31
2.14.1 Strainer (dirt trap).................................................................................... 31
2.14.2 Avoiding flow noise ................................................................................. 31
2.14.3 Avoiding false circulation......................................................................... 31
2.14.4 Thermal insulation .................................................................................. 32
3 / 56
Siemens Valves VVF47..,VXF47..,VVF42..C,VVF42..KC,VXF42..C A6V10423210_en--_a

Building Technologies Table of contents Page 107 of 709 2016-01-11
2.15 Warranty..................................................................................................33
3 Handling .................................................................................................34
3.1 Mounting and installation .........................................................................34
3.1.1 Mounting positions...................................................................................34
3.1.2 Direction of flow for fluids .........................................................................34
3.1.3 Flanges ...................................................................................................35
3.1.4 Thermal insulation ...................................................................................36
3.2 Commissioning and maintenance ............................................................37
3.2.1 Commissioning ........................................................................................37
3.2.2 Maintenance ............................................................................................37
3.3 Disposal ..................................................................................................37
4 Functions and control ...........................................................................38
4.1 Selection of acting direction and valve characteristic ................................38
4.2 Calibration ...............................................................................................38
4.3 Technical and mechanical design.............................................................38
4.3.1 Plug stop .................................................................................................39
4.3.2 Valve stem, valve neck, coupling..............................................................39
4.3.3 Converting a 2-port to a 3-port valve ........................................................39
4.3.4 Converting a 3-port to a 2-port valve ........................................................39
4.3.5 Flange types ............................................................................................39
5 Technical data ........................................................................................41
6 Dimensions ............................................................................................44
7 Revision number ...................................................................................47
8 Addendum .............................................................................................48
8.1 Abbreviations...........................................................................................48
8.2 Important formulas...................................................................................49
8.3 Valve-related glossary..............................................................................49
8.4 Hydraulics-related glossary ......................................................................50
8.5 Media-related glossary.............................................................................51
8.6 Trade names ...........................................................................................51
8.7 Overview of antifreeze and brines used in the trade .................................51
4 / 56

Building Technologies About this document Page 108 of 709 2016-01-11
1 About this document
1.1 Navigation
You will find information about a specific valve throughout the document. The
structure of chapters 2 to 4 is as follows:
2 Engineering device oriented
3 Handling process oriented
3.1 Mounting and installation
3.2 Commissioning and maintenance
3.3 Disposal
4 Functions and control assembly oriented
4.1 Selection of acting direction and valve characteristic
4.2 Calibration
4.3 Technical and mechanical design
1.2 Revision history

Revision Date Changes Section Page(s)
a 2016-01-11 First version - -
1.3 Reference documents
1.3.1 2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections

VVF47.. VVF42..C, VVF42..KC
Type of document
VXF47.. VXF42..C
Data Sheet N4419 A6V10794157
Mounting Instructions M4419 A6V10794155
CE Declaration of Conformity (PED) T4419 A6V10794200
Environmental Declaration E4419 A6V10794205
1.4 Before you start
1.4.1 Trademarks
The table below lists the trademarks used in this document and their legal owners.
The use of trademarks is subject to international and domestic provisions of the
law.
Trademarks Legal owner

AcvatixTM Siemens AG
All product names listed in the table are registered (®) or not registered (™)
trademarks of the owner listed in the table. We forgo the labeling (e.g. using the
symbols ® and ™) of trademarks for the purposes of legibility based on the
reference in this section.
5 / 56

1.4.2 Copyright
This document may be duplicated and distributed only with the express permission
of Siemens, and may be passed only to authorized persons or companies with the
required technical knowledge.
1.4.3 Quality assurance

The document was prepared with great care. Please make sure that you are aware
of the latest document revision date.
· The contents of all documents are checked at regular intervals
· Any corrections necessary are included in subsequent versions
· Documents are automatically amended as a consequence of modifications and
corrections to the products described
If you find lack of clarity while using this document, or if you have any criticisms or
suggestions, please get in touch with your local contact person in the nearest
Siemens branch office. For addresses of the Siemens branch offices, please visit
www.siemens.com/acvatix.
1.4.4 Document use / request to the reader

Before using our products, it is important that you read the documents supplied
with or ordered at the same time as the products (equipment, applications, tools,
etc.) carefully and in full.
We assume that persons using our products and documents are authorized and
trained appropriately and have the technical knowledge required to use our
products as intended.
More information on the products and applications is available:
· On the intranet (Siemens employees only) at
https://workspace.sbt.siemens.com/content/00001123/default.aspx
· From the Siemens branch office near you or from your system supplier
· From the Support Team at headquarters (fieldsupport-zug.ch.sbt@siemens.com)
if there is no local point of contact
Siemens assumes no liability to the extent allowed under the law for any losses
resulting from a failure to comply with the aforementioned points or for improper
compliance of the same.
1.5 Validity of documentation

This document shall serve as a knowledge base. In addition to basic knowledge, it
provides general technical information about valves used in HVAC plants.
For project engineers, electrical HVAC planners, system integrators, and service
engineers, the document contains all information required for planning,
engineering, correct installation, commissioning, and servicing.
6 / 56

2 Engineering
2.1 Product description
The large-stroke valve line consists of 2-port and 3-port valves.
2.1.1 2-port valves

Type of valve Product number Connections
Standard valves VVF47.., VVF42..C, VVF42..KC Flanged
Page
Valve and
A actuator 39
coupling
VVF47.. B Valve stem 398
Stem sealing
C 38
gland
D Valve neck 39
E Type plate 8
VVF42..C F Flange
VVF42..KC
35
G Blank flange
2.1.2 3-port valves

Type of valve Product number Connections
Standard valves VXF47.., VXF42..C Flanged
Page
Valve and
A actuator 39
VXF47 coupling
B Valve stem 39
Stem sealing
C 38
gland
VXF42..C
D Valve neck 39
E Type plate 8
F Flange 35
7 / 56

Building Technologies Engineering Page 111 of 709 2016-01-11
2.1.3 Type plate
2-port valves
1 Product number
2 Stock number
3 Country of origin
4 Serial number
5 Nominal pressure class
6 Nominal size
7 kvs value
8 Max. temperature range
9 Valve housing material
10 Flow direction
1. Flow direction for fluids

2. Product number
3. Stock number
4. Valve housing material
5. Nominal pressure class
6. Nominal size
7. KVS value
8. Serial number
9. CE mark
1. Flow direction for fluids

2. Product number
3. Stock number
4. Valve housing material
5. Nominal pressure class
6. Nominal size
7. KVS value
8. Serial number
9. CE mark
8 / 56

3-port valves
1 Product number
2 Stock number
3 Country of origin
4 Serial number
6 Nominal size
7 kvs value
8 Max. temperature range
10 Flow direction
1 Flow direction for fluids

2 Product number
3 Stock number
6 Nominal size
7 KVS value
8 Serial number
9 CE mark
9 / 56

2.2 Use
The valves are used as control or shutoff valves in heating, ventilation and air
conditioning plants systems as a control valve.
For closed circuits only.
All 3-port valves can be used as mixing valves (preferred use) or diverting valves.
For use in closed or open hydraulic circuits, observe chapter "2.12 Cavitation",
page 27.
2.2.1 Compatibility with medium and temperature ranges

Temperature
Valve
range Note
Medium
Tmin (℃) Tmax(℃) VVF42..C VVF42..KC VXF42..C
Cold water 1 25 ▀ ▀ ▀ -
Low-temperature
1 130 ▀ ▀ ▀ -
hot water
High-temperature 130 150 ▀ ▀ ▀ -

hot water 1) 150 180 - - - -
-5 150 ▀ ▀ ▀ For medium
temperatures below
Water with -10 150 ▀ ▀ ▀ 0℃, the stem heating
antifreeze
ASZ6.6 has to be
-20 150 - - - installed.
Cooling water 2) 1 25 - ▀ - -
-5 150 ▀ ▀ ▀ For medium
temperatures below
Brines -10 150 ▀ ▀ ▀ 0℃, the stem heating
ASZ6.6 has to be
-20 150 - - - installed.
Super-clean water
(demineralized and 1 150 - - - -
deionized water)
Demineralized
water according to
1 150 ▀ ▀ ▀ -
VDI 2035 / SWKI_B
102-01
1) Differentiation due to saturated steam curve
2) Open circuits
2.2.2 Fields of use

Product number
Fields of use
3-port valves 2-port valves
VXF47.. VXF42..C VVF47.. VVF42..C VVF42..KC
Generation
Boiler plants - ■ - ■ ■
District heating plants - - - ■ ■
Chiller plants ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Cooling towers 1) - - - - ■
Distribution
Heating groups ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Air handling units ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
1)
Open circuits
10 / 56

2.3 Type summary and equipment combinations
2.3.1 2-port valves with flanged connections

Dpmax = Maximum permissible differential pressure across the valve, valid for the
entire actuating range of the motorized valve
DpS = Maximum permissible differential pressure at which the motorized valve will
close securely against the pressure (close off pressure)
Actuators Datasheet Stroke 20 mm 40 mm
Positioning force 700 N 1600 N
SBX.. N4519
PN 16
SBV.. N4519
Data sheet SBX.. SBV..

N4419 Stock number DN kvs SV Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax
3
1…95°C [m /h] [kPa]
VVF47.50 S55220-V106 50 40 300 300 - -
VVF47.65 S55220-V107 65 63 175 175 400 300
VVF47.80 S55220-V108 80 100 100 100 250 250
>50
VVF47.100 S55220-V109 100 160 400 300
VVF47.125 S55220-V110 125 250 - - 400 300
VVF47.150 S55220-V111 150 315 400 300
Stroke 20 mm 40 mm
Data
Actuators Positioning
Sheet 800 N 1000 N 2800 N 1600 N 2800 N
force
SAX.. N4501
PN 16
SAV.. N4503
SKD.. N4561
SKB.. N4564
SKC.. N4566
Data Sheet SAX..* SKD.. SKB.. SAV..* SKC..

A6V10794157 Stock DN kvs SV Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax Δps Δpmax
3
-10…150 °C number [m /h] [kPa]
VVF42.25-6.3C S55204-V148 25 6.3
1600 1600
VVF42.25-10C S55204-V149 25 10 - -
VVF42.32-16C S55204-V150 32 16 > 50 900 400 1200 1600
VVF42.40-16C S55204-V151 40 16 400
550 750 1250
VVF42.40-25C S55204-V152 40 25
400 - -
VVF42.50-31.5C S55204-V153 50 31.5 400
350 300 450 1200 750
VVF42.50-40C S55204-V154 50 40
VVF42.65-50C S55204-V155 65 50
200 150 250 200 700 450 400
VVF42.65-63C S55204-V156 65 63
VVF42.80-80C S55204-V157 80 80
125 75 175 125 450 250 225
VVF42.80-100C S55204-V158 80 100
VVF42.100-125C S55204-V159 100 125
160 125 - -
VVF42.100-160C S55204-V160 100 160
VVF42.125-200C S55204-V161 125 200 > 100 - - - - - - 125 90 - -
VVF42.125-250C S55204-V162 125 250
VVF42.150-315C S55204-V163 150 315
80 60 - -
VVF42.150-400C S55204-V164 150 400
VVF42.65KC S55204-V182 65 63
1600 1800 1600 1800 1600 1800 - - - -
VVF42.80KC S55204-V183 80 100
VVF42.100KC S55204-V184 100 160
1600
VVF42.125KC S55204-V185 125 200 - - - - - - 500 1600 1800
VVF42.150KC S55204-V186 150 315 1400
* Suitable for medium temperatures up to 130℃.
11 / 56

2.3.2 3-port valves with flanged connections
Dpmax = Maximum permissible differential pressure across the valve, valid for the entire actuating
range of the motorized valve
DpS = Maximum permissible differential pressure at which the motorized valve will close securely
against the pressure (close off pressure)
Stroke 20 mm 40 mm
Actuators Datasheet Positioning
700 N 1600 N
force
SBX.. N4519
PN 16
SBV.. N4519
Data sheet SBX.. SBV..

N4419 DN kvs SV Δpmax Δpmax
Stock number 3
1…95°C [m /h] [kPa]
VXF47.50 S55220-V100 50 40 300 -
VXF47.65 S55220-V101 65 63 175 300
VXF47.80 S55220-V102 80 100 100 250
>50
VXF47.100 S55220-V103 100 160 200
VXF47.125 S55220-V104 125 250 - 100
VXF47.150 S55220-V105 150 315 75
Stroke 20 mm 40 mm
Data
Actuators Positioning
Sheet 800 N 1000 N 2800 N 1600 N 2800 N
force
SAX.. N4501
PN 16
SAV.. N4503
SKD.. N4561
SKB.. N4564
SKC.. N4566
SAX..* SKD.. SKB.. SAV..* SKC..

Data Sheet
Stock Δpmax Δpmax Δpmax Δpmax Δpmax
A6V10794157 number DN kvs SV
3
-10…150 °C [m /h] [kPa]
VXF42.25-6.3C S55204-V165 25 6.3
VXF42.25-10C S55204-V166 25 10 - -
VXF42.32-16C S55204-V167 32 16 > 50 400
VXF42.40-16C S55204-V168 40 16 100 400 100
VXF42.40-25C S55204-V169 40 25
VXF42.50-31.5C S55204-V170 50 31.5 - - - -
300 400 100
VXF42.50-40C S55204-V171 50 40
VXF42.65-50C S55204-V172 65 50
150 200 80
VXF42.65-63C S55204-V173 65 63
50
VXF42.80-80C S55204-V174 80 80
75 125 50 225 50
VXF42.80-100C S55204-V175 80 100
> 100
VXF42.100-125C S55204-V176 100 125
125 250
VXF42.100-160C S55204-V177 100 160
VXF42.125-200C S55204-V178 125 200
- - - - - - 90 50 160 50
VXF42.125-250C S55204-V179 125 250
VXF42.150-315C S55204-V180 150 315
60 100
VXF42.150-400C S55204-V181 150 400
* Suitable for medium temperatures up to 130℃.
12 / 56

2.3.3 Overview of actuators
Spring
Positioning Operating Positioning Manual Auxiliary
Product type Stock number Stroke return Positioning time LED
force voltage signal adjuster functions
time
5)
SBX61 S55160-A100 DC 0…10 V
AC 24 V
SBX81 S55160-A101 20 mm 700 N 120 s -
3-position
SBX31 S55160-A102 AC 230V -
- - Spanner 5)
SBV61 S55160-A103 DC 0…10 V
AC 24V
SBV81 S55160-A104 40mm 1600N 180 s -
3-position
SBV31 S55160-A105 AC230V -
SAX31.00 S55150-A105 120 s
AC 230 V 3-position - 1)
SAX31.03 S55150-A106
- Press and fix
0…10 V 30 s
SAX61.03 S55150-A100 20 mm 800 N 4…20 mA P
2) 3)
AC 24 V 0…1000 Ω ,
DC 24 V
SAX81.00 S55150-A102 120 s 1)
3-position - - Press and fix
SAX81.03 S55150-A103 30 s
Opening: 30 s
SKD32.21 SKD32.21 8s
Closing: 10 s
1)
AC 230 V 3-position -
SKD32.50 SKD32.50 -
120 s
SKD32.51 SKD32.51 8s
SKD60 SKD60 -
0…10 V Turn, position
2)
SKD62 SKD62 20 mm 1000 N Opening: 30 s
4…20 mA P is maintained
SKD62U SKD62U 15 s Closing: 15 s
0…1000 Ω
4)
SKD62UA SKD62UA
AC 24 V
SKD82.50 SKD82.50
-
SKD82.50U SKD82.50U 1)
3-position 120 s -
SKD82.51 SKD82.51
8s
SKD82.51U SKD82.51U
SKB32.50 SKB32.50 - 1)
AC 230 V 3-position 120 s -
SKB32.51 SKB32.51 10 s
SKB60 SKB60 -
0…10 V 2)
SKB62 SKB62 Opening: 120 s
4…20 mA P
SKB62U SKB62U 10 s Closing: 20 s Turn, position
20 mm 2800 N 0…1000 Ω
SKB62UA is maintained 4)
SKB62UA
AC 24 V
SKB82.50 SKB82.50
-
SKB82.50U SKB82.50U 1)
3-position 120 s -
SKB82.51 SKB82.51
10 s
SKB82.51U SKB82.51U
-
SAV31.00 S55150-A112 AC 230 V 3-position -
S55150-A110 DC 0... 10V
SAV61.00 S55150-A110-A100 2)
DC 4... 20 mA P
SAV61.00U
0... 1000 Ω -
40 mm 1600 N AC 24 V 120 s Press and fix
S55150-A111 DC 24 V
SAV81.00 S55150-A111-A100 -
3-position -
SAV81.00U
SKC32.60 SKC32.60 - 1)
AC 230 V 3-position 120 s -
SKC32.61 SKC32.61 18 s
SKC60 SKC60 -
0…10 V 2)
SKC62 SKC62 Opening: 120 s
4…20 mA P
SKC62U SKC62U 20 s Closing: 20 s Turn, position
40 mm 2800 N 0…1000 Ω
SKC62UA is maintained 4)
SKC62UA
AC 24 V
SKC82.60 SKC82.60
-
SKC82.60U SKC82.60U 1)
3-position 120 s -
SKC82.61 SKC82.61
18 s
SKC82.61U SKC82.61U
1)
Auxiliary switch, potentiometer
2)
Position feedback, forced control, selection of valve characteristic
3)
Optional: Sequence control, selection of acting direction
4)
Plus sequence control, stroke limitation, and selection of acting direction
5）
4…20 mA function module
13 / 56

2.4 Ordering
Example
Product type Stock number Quantity
VXF42.65-63C S55204-V173 1
SKD32.50 BPZ:SKD32.50 1
Delivery
Valves, actuators and accessories are packed and delivered as separate items.
Counter-flanges, bolts, and gaskets must be provided on site.
2.5 Accessories
No accessories for these products.
2.6 Product replacement

The VVF42..C, VXF42..C valves replace the valves of the C/VVF31../VXF31..,
C/VVF40../VXF40.. lines that have been produced by Siemens Beijing plant.
For most types of valves operating in the field, a one-to-one replacement is

available.
Further use of actuators of the SKD32../60/62/82.., SKB32../60/62/82..,

SQX31../61../81.., and SQX32../62../82.. lines is possible.
Actuators of the SKC32../62/82.. lines require a new stem coupling since the
diameter of the new stem is only 10 mm. Stem couplings must be ordered as
Stem coupling for separate items (stock no. 4 178 5649 8).
SKC32../62/82..
(stock no. 4 178 5649 8)
If the valve to be replaced was driven by an actuator of the SKD31../61../81..,
SKB31../61../81.. or SKC31../61../81.. lines, Siemens recommends to replace the
actuator as well, the reason being the actuator’s age.
2-port valves with flanged connections Replacement

Stem Product
Type DN Adapter 1) DN
coupling type
VVF31.. kVS- 6.3, 10, 12, 16, 19, 25, 31, 40, 49, 63, 78, 100 15...80 - - VVF42..C 15...80
VVF31.. kVS- 125, 160, 200, 250, 300, 315 100...150 - 4 178 5649 8 VVF42..C 100...150
VVF40.. kVS- 6.3, 10, 12, 16, 19, 25, 31, 40, 49, 63, 78, 100 25...80 - - VVF42..C 15...80
VVF40.. kVS- 125, 160, 200, 250, 300, 315 100...150 - 4 178 5649 8 VVF42..C 100...150
VVF31.. kVS- 6.3, 10, 12, 16, 19, 25, 31, 40, 49, 63, 78, 100 15...80 - - VXF42..C 15...80
VVF31.. kVS- 125, 160, 200, 250, 300, 315 100...150 - 4 178 5649 8 VXF42..C 100...150
VVF40.. kVS- 6.3, 10, 12, 16, 19, 25, 31, 40, 49, 63, 78, 100 25...80 - - VXF42..C 15...80
VVF40.. kVS- 125, 160, 200, 250, 300, 315 100...150 - 4 178 5649 8 VXF42..C 100...150
1)
Since the new valves use uniform stem couplings, valves driven by electrohydraulic actuators SKC..
require a new stem coupling.
14 / 56

2.7 Spare parts
Stem sealing gland for DN Stock number Example
VVF47.. 50…150 1009969940 Connection pin
VXF47..
VVF42..C 25...80 BPZ: 428488060 Stem sealing gland

VVF42..KC
VXF42..C
VVF42..C 100…150 BPZ: 467956290
VVF42..KC
VXF42..C
15 / 56

2.8 Valve sizing for water
2.8.1 Procedure for valve sizing

Essential values and formulas required for valve sizing:
Sizing and selection of valves and actuators
1 Determine the basic hydraulic -
circuit
2 Determine ΔpVR or ΔpMV One of the factors that determines control stability is the valve authority P V. It is determined depending
on the type of header and the hydraulic circuit
· Header with pressure and variable · Header with pressure and constant volumetric flow,
volumetric flow or
· Header with low differential pressure and variable
volumetric flow
Continue with ΔpVR Continue with ΔpMV
3 Determine ΔpV100 D p VR
Dp V 100 ³ Dp V100 ³ DpMV
2
4 Determine the volumetric flow Determine V100 depending on the type of medium
V100 Water without antifreeze: Water with antifreeze, heat transfer oil:
& &
& Q 100 & Q 100 × 3600
V 100 = V 100 =
1.163 × DT c × r × DT
5 Determine the kvs value There are different ways to determine the kvs value:
Flow chart By way of calculation HIT sizing and Valve slide
& selection: rule
V 100
kV = www.siemens.com/hit
Dp V100
100
Determine the kvs value according to:
1)
0.85 × k V - value < k VS - value
or within the following band:
0,74 × k VS - value < k V < 1.175 × k VS - value
This procedure shows the mathematical approach. The following examples make use of the flow chart
and show the way of calculation
6 Check the resulting The resulting differential pressure ΔpV100 is used for calculating the valve authority P V:
differential pressure ΔpV100 æ V& ö
2
Dp V100 = 100 × ç 100 ÷

ç k ÷
è vs ø
7 Select a suitable line of Select the type of valve (2-port, 3-port, or 3-port valve with bypass):
valves · Type of connection (flanged, externally or internally threaded, soldered)
· PN class
· Nominal size DN
· Maximum or minimum medium temperature
· Type of medium
8 Check the valve authority P V Check PV with the resulting differential pressure ΔpV100:
(control stability) · Header with pressure and variable · Header with pressure and constant volumetric flow,
volumetric flow or
· Header with low differential pressure and variable
volumetric flow
Dp V 100 Dp V 100
PV = PV =
Dp VR Dp V 100 + Dp MV
9 Select the actuator Select the actuator according to the following criteria: · Operating voltage · Spring return function
· Positioning signal · Auxiliary functions
· Positioning time
10 Check the working ranges Differential pressure Δpmax > ΔpV0
Closing pressure Δps > H0
11 Valve and actuator Write down product and stock number of the selected valve and actuator
1)
Experience shows that the selected kvs value is usually too high. To the benefit of a higher valve
authority Siemens recommends to check sensibly whether a valve with a k vs value of approx. 85% of the
calculated kvs value is possible. If this is not possible, the second rule applies.
16 / 56

2.8.2 Flow chart
Fluids Kinematic viscosity υ < 10 mm2/s
17 / 56

2.8.3 Impact of fluid properties on valve sizing
Valves are sized based on the volumetric flow passing through them. The most
important characteristic of a valve is its kvs value. Since this value is determined
with water at a temperature of +5…30 °C and a differential pressure Δp of 100 kPa
(1 bar), additional influencing factors must be taken into consideration if the
properties of the medium passing through the valve are different.
The following properties of a medium affect valve sizing:
· The density ρ and the specific heat capacity c have a direct impact on the
volumetric flow, which transfers the required amount of heat or cooling energy
· The kinematic viscosity ν influences the flow conditions (laminar or turbulent) in
the valve and thus the differential pressure Δp at a given volumetric flow V
2.8.3.1 Density ρ
The amount of heat Q carried by a fluid depends on the available mass flow m, the
specific heat capacity c, and the temperature spread ΔT:
& =m
Q & × c × DT
In the HVAC field, calculations are usually based on the volumetric flow V, resulting
from the available mass flow m and the density ρ:
& = V& × r × c × D T
Q
Within the temperature range normally used in the HVAC field, the density ρ of
water is assumed to be about 1000 kg/m3 and the specific heat capacity c 4.19
kJ/(kg·K). This makes it possible to apply a simplified formula with a constant of
1.163 kWh/(m3·K) for calculating the volumetric flow V in m 3/h:
Q&
V& =
1 . 163 × D T
The rated capacity Q100 of a plant with the valve fully open is calculated with the
following formula:
&
Q
& 100
V 100 =
1 .163 × D T
For watery solutions, such as mixtures of water and antifreeze, or other fluids like
heat transfer oils, refer to the chapters below.
2.8.3.2 Specific heat capacity c

The amount of heat Q carried by a fluid depends on the available mass flow m, the
specific heat capacity c, and the temperature spread ΔT.
Within the temperature range normally used in the HVAC field, the specific heat
capacity c of water changes only slightly. Therefore, the approximate value used
for the specific heat capacity c is 4.19 kJ/(kg·K). This makes it possible to apply a
simplified formula with a constant of 1.163 kWh/(m3·K) for calculating the
3
volumetric flow V in m /h:
&
Q
V& =
1.163 × DT
If watery solutions, such as mixtures of water and antifreeze, or other fluids like
heat transfer oils are used for the transmission of heat, the required volumetric flow
V is to be calculated with the density ρ and the specific heat capacity c at the
operating temperature:
&
Q
V& =
r × c × DT
18 / 56

The specific heat capacity of fluids is specified in trade literature. For mixtures, the
specific heat capacity c is calculated on the basis of the mixture’s mass proportions
m1 and m2:
m1 × c 1 + m 2 × c 2
c Gemisch =
m1 + m 2
In the case of heating applications, the specific heat capacity c1 or c2 at the highest
temperature must be used, and in the case of cooling applications that at the
lowest temperature.
2.8.3.3 Kinematic viscosity ν

The kinematic viscosity ν affects the type of flow (laminar or turbulent) and thus the
friction losses inside the valve. It has a direct impact on the differential pressure at
a given volumetric flow.
The kinematic viscosity ν is specified either in mm2/s or centistokes (cSt):
1 cSt = 10-6 m2/s = 1 mm2/s.
Water at a temperature of between 5 and 30 °C is used to determine the kvs value
as a comparison value. Within this temperature range, water has a kinematic
viscosity of 1.6 to 0.8 mm2/s. The flow inside the valve is turbulent.
When sizing valves for media with other kinematic viscosities ν, a correction must
be made. Up to a kinematic viscosity ν of less than 10 mm2/s, the impact is
negligible since it is smaller than the permissible tolerance of the kvs value (+/-
10%).
In general practice, the correction is made by applying a correction factor FR, which
gives consideration to the different flow and friction conditions when calculating the
kvs value.
FR is the factor used for the impact of the valve’s Reynolds number. It must be
applied when there is nonturbulent flow in the valve, when the differential pressure
is low, for example, in the case of high-viscosity fluids, very low flow coefficients, or
combinations of them. It can be determined by way of experiment.
FR = flow coefficient for nonturbulent flow conditions divided by the flow coefficient
ascertained under the same plant conditions for turbulent flow
(EN 60534-2-1[1998])
kv value under nonturbulent flow conditions:
& 100
V 1
kV = ×
FR Dp100
100
19 / 56

20 / 56

Correction factor FR for different kinematic viscosities ν
Kinematic viscosity Kinematic viscosity
2 Correction factor FR 2 Correction factor FR
[mm /s] [mm /s]
2000 0.52 60 0.73
1500 0.53 40 0.77
1000 0.55 30 0.8
800 0.56 25 0.82
600 0.57 20 0.83
400 0.60 15 0.86
300 0.61 10 0.90
1)
250 0.62 8 (0.93)
1)
200 0.64 6 (0.94)
1)
150 0.70 4 (0.95)
1)
100 0.69 3 (0.97)
80 0.70
1) 2
Impact in the case of kinematic viscosities up to 10 mm /s is negligible
2.8.4 Influencing factors with selected groups of fluids

Media properties to be considered for a few selected groups of fluids:
Density ρ Specific heat capacity c Kinematic viscosity ν
& 100
Formula & & kV =
V
×
1
& Q 100 × 3600 & Q 100 × 3600
V 100 = V 100 = FR Dp100
c × r × DT c × r × DT
100
Group of fluids
Water No No No (FR = 1)
Water with antifreeze Yes Yes No (FR = 1)
Heat transfer oils Yes Yes Yes
Brines Yes Yes Yes
Notes on water and water with antifreeze:
The HVAC Integrated Tool (HIT) supports sizing and selection of valves for water
and water with antifreeze (www.siemens.com/hit).
2.8.5 Rangeability Sv, minimum controllable output Qmin

When sizing and selecting a valve, it must be ensured that – in the controlled
operating state – the output does not drop below the minimum controllable output
Qmin. Otherwise, the controlling element only regulates in on/off mode within the
range of the initial flow surge. On/off mode reduces the plant’s energy efficiency
and adversely affects the controlling element’s life.
The rangeability SV is an important characteristic used for assessing the
controllable range of a controlling element.
The smallest volumetric flow kvr that can be controlled is the volumetric flow
passing through the valve when it opens. Output Qmin is the smallest output of a
consumer (e.g. of a radiator) that can be controlled in modulating mode.
kvs
SV =
kvr
For more detailed information on the subject, refer to the brochure "Hydraulics in
building systems" (ordering no. 0-91917-en).
21 / 56

2.9 Calculation examples for water
2.9.1 Example for water: Heater with pressure and variable

volumetric flow
HVAC plant using a header with Air heating coil 1
pressure, header with variable
volumetric flow Flow 60 °C
Return 40 °C
Supply air 20 °C
Outside air 10 °C
Output 510 kW
∆pVR 34 kPa
∆ppiping 11 kPa
Other plant data
Pressure class PN 16
Control DC 0…10 V
Operating voltage AC 24 V
1 Determine the basic hydraulic Injection circuit with 2-port valve

circuit
2 Determine ΔpVR or ΔpMV With pressure and variable volumetric flow à ΔpVR
ΔpVR = 34 kPa
3 Determine ΔpV100 Dp VR
With pressure and variable volumetric flow à Dp
V100 ³
2
ΔpV100 = 17 kPa
4 Determine the volumetric flow Q100 510 kW
V100 V&100 = = = 21.9 m 3 / h
1.163 × DT 1.163 × (60 °C - 40 °C )
5 Determine the kvs value Flow chart
Use the flow chart to determine the kvs value:
3
1. kvs value: 40 m /h
3
By way of calculation
V&100 21.9 m 3 / h
kv = = = 53.2m 3 / h
DpV 100 17 kPa
100 100
3 3 3 3
k value ≥ 0.85 • 53.2 m /h = 45.2 /h à kvs value = 40 m /h or 63 m /h
3
3
6 Check the resulting 2 2

First kvs value: æ V& ö æ 21 .9 m 3 / h ö
differential pressure ΔpV100 D pV 100 = 100 × çç 100 ÷÷ = 100 × çç 3
÷÷ = 30 . 0 kPa
è k vs ø è 40 m / h ø
2 2
æ V& ö æ 21.5 m3 / h ö
Second kvs value: DpV 100 = 100 × çç 100 ÷÷ = 100 × çç 3
÷
÷ = 12.1kPa
è kvs ø è 63m / h ø
7 Select suitable line of valves · 2-port valve (resulting from the basic hydraulic circuit)
· Flanged (specified by the planner)
· PN class 16 (specified by the planner)
· Nominal size DN (resulting from the selected valve)
· Maximum medium temperature: 60 °C
· Type of medium: Water
st
à 1 selection: VVF47.50
nd
2 selection: VVF47.65
22 / 56

8 Check the valve authority P V Check pv using the resulting differential pressure Δpv100:
(control stability)
DpV 100 30.0 kPa
PV = = = 0.88
First kvs value:
DpVR 34 kPa
DpV 100 12.1kPa
PV = = = 0.36
Second kvs value:
DpVR 34 kPa
à Lower valve authority pv à kvs value = 63 m /h
3
9 Select the actuator Select actuator according to the following criteria:

Operating voltage
Positioning signal
Positioning time
Spring return function
Auxiliary functions
10 Check the working ranges Differential pressure Δpmax > Δpv0

11 Select valve and actuator Type of valve: VVF47.65

Type of actuator: According to the table
2.9.2 Example for water: Heater with low differential pressure

without main pump
HVAC plant using a header with Heating group 1
low differential pressure without
main pump Flow 60 °C
Return 45 °C
Output 70 kW
∆pheat meter 8 kPa
∆ppiping 3 kPa
Other plant data
Pressure class PN 16
Control 3-position
Operating voltage AC 230 V
1 Heating group 1
2 Boiler 1
1 Determine the basic hydraulic Mixing circuit

circuit
2 Determine ΔpVR or ΔpMV Header with low differential pressure and variable volumetric flow à ΔpMV
ΔpMV = Δppiping + Δpheat meter = 3 kPa + 8 kPa = 11 kPa
3 Determine ΔpV100 Header with low differential pressure and variable volumetric flow à ΔpV100 ≥ ΔpMV
ΔpV100 = 11 kPa
4 Determine the volumetric flow Q100 700 kW
V100 V&100 = = = 40 m 3 / h
1 .163 × D T 1 .163 × (60 °C - 45 °C )
5 Determine the kvs value Flow chart
Use the flow chart to determine the kvs value:
3
kvs value: 120 m /h
By way of calculation
V&100 40 m 3 / h
kv = = = 121 m 3 / h
DpV 100 11 kPa
100 100
3 3 3
kvs value ≥ 0.85 • 121 m /h = 102 m /h à kvs value = 100 m /h
23 / 56

3
kvs value: 100 m /h
6 Check the resulting 2 2

differential pressure ΔpV100 æ V&100 ö æ 40 m3 / h ö
DpV 100 = 100 × çç ÷÷ = 100 × çç 3
÷÷ = 16 kPa
è kvs ø è 100 m / h ø
7 Select suitable line of valves · 2-port valve (resulting from the basic hydraulic circuit)
· Flanged (specified by the planner)
· PN class 16 (specified by the planner)
· Nominal size DN (resulting from selected valve)
· Maximum medium temperature: 60 °C
· Type of medium: Water
à Selection: VXF47.80
8 Check the valve authority P V Check PV using the resulting differential pressure ΔpV100:
(control stability) D p V 100 16 kPa
PV = = = 0 . 59
D p V 100 + D p MV 16 kPa + 11 kPa
9 Select the actuator Select actuator according to the following criteria:

· Operating voltage
· Positioning signal
· Positioning time
· Spring return function
· Auxiliary functions
10 Check the working ranges Differential pressure Δpmax > ΔpV0
11 Select valve and actuator Type of valve: VXF47.80
Type of actuator: According to the table
2.10 Valve characteristics
2.10.1 2-port valves

For VVF47..
0…30%: Linear
VVF42.. C
30…100%: Equal-percentage
VVF42..KC
Flow rate kv / kvs
ngl = 3 as per VDI / VDE 2173

The design of the characteristic are
other than according to LGBR(SBT)
VVF47.125-250
For valve kvs-values 100 and 160m3/h &
VVF47.150-315
V.F42.150-315C, the characteristic is
VVF42.125-250C
optimized for maximum volumetric flow
VVF42.150-400C
kV100 at 80%...100%
Stroke H / H100
For :
VVF47.125-250
VVF47.150-315
Flow rate kv / kvs
VVF42.125-250C
VVF42.150-400C
0…100%: Linear
Stroke H / H100
24 / 56

2.10.2 3-port valves
Through port A-AB
For VXF47..
VXF42..C 0...30%: Linear
30...100%: Equal-percentage
Flow rate kv / kvs

other than
VXF42.125-250C ngl = 3 as per VDI / VDE 2173
VXF42.150-400C For valve kvs-values ≥ 100m3/h, the
characteristic is optimized for maximum
volumetric flow kV100 at 80%...100%
Bypass B-AB
0...100%: Linear
Stroke H / H100
For : Through port A-AB

VXF42.125-250C 0... 100%: Linear
VXF42.150-400C Bypass B-AB
Flow rate kv / kvs
0... 100%: Linear
Stroke H / H100
Mixing: Flow from port A and port B to port AB

Diverting: Flow from port AB to port A and port AB
2.11 Operating pressure and medium temperature
2.11.1 ISO 7005 and EN 1092 – a comparison

ISO 7005 and EN 1092 cover PN-classified, round flanges for pipes, valves, plain
fittings and accessories, plus their dimensions and tolerances, categorized
according to different types of materials. Both standards also contain the
assignment of pressures and medium temperatures.
The connecting dimensions, flange and face types plus descriptions conform to the
relevant ISO 7005 standards.
· ISO 7005, part 1: Steel flanges
· ISO 7005, part 2: Cast iron flanges
· ISO 7005, part 3: Flanges made of copper alloys
Since the valves covered by this document are used throughout the world, the
international standard ISO 7005 was selected as a basis. The information given
below explains the differences between ISO 7005 and EN 1092.
EN 1092: Part 2, cast iron flanges:

In terms of flanges of the same PN class, this standard refers to ISO 7005-2 and
ISO 2531. Flange types and connecting dimensions are compatible with the same
DN and PN class of ISO 7005 and ISO 2531.
· Pressure-temperature assignments: There are no differences between EN 1092-
2 and ISO 7005-2
25 / 56

2.11.2 PN 16 valves with flanged connections
Operating pressure and operating temperatures according to ISO 7005, EN 1092
and EN 12284
NOTICE
All relevant local directives must be observed.

Figures in this section: X-axis: Medium temperature (℃); Y-axis: Operating
pressure (bar)
For valves VVF47.. and VXF47...
Operating pressure [bar]
Medium temperature [°C]
For valves VVF42.. and VXF42...

- Gray Cast Iron EN-GJL-250
4330D03
16
15
14
13
12
1
0
-60 -40 -20 -10 0 20 80 100 120 140 150 160
- PN16 Nodular Cast Iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT
Operating Pressure and Medium Temperature in accordance to ISO7005-2 and

AD2000 – W3/1 and AD2000-W3/2 (available in German only) for PN16
26 / 56

2.12 Cavitation
Due to high speeds of the medium in
the narrowest section of the valve, local
underpressure occurs (p2). If this
pressure drops below the medium’s
boiling pressure, cavitation occurs
(steam bubbles), possibly leading to
material removal (abrasion). Also, when
cavitation sets in, the noise level
increases abruptly. Cavitation can be
avoided by limiting the pressure
differential across the valve as a
function of the medium temperature and
the prepressure.
Progression of speed
Progression of pressure p
Dpmax = differential pressure with valve almost fully closed at

which cavitation can largely be avoided
p1 = static pressure at valve inlet
p3 = static pressure at valve outlet
M = pump
J = water temperature
Example for low-temperature hot water

Pressure p1 at valve inlet: 500 kPa (5 bar)
Water temperature: 80 °C
From the chart above it can be seen that with the valve almost fully closed, the
maximum permissible differential pressure Dpmax is 300 kPa (3 bar).
27 / 56

Example for cold water
Spring water cooling as an example for avoiding cavitation:
Cold water = 12 °C
p1 = 500 kPa (5 bar)
p4 = 100 kPa (1 bar)
(atmospheric pressure)
Dpmax = 300 kPa (3 bar)
Dp3-3’ = 20 kPa (0.2 bar)
DpD (throttle) = 80 kPa (0.8 bar)
p3’ = pressure downstream
from the consumer in
kPa
Note:
To avoid cavitation in the case of cold water circuits, it must also be made certain
that there is sufficient static counter-pressure at the valve’s outlet. This can be
ensured by installing a throttling valve downstream from the heat exchanger, for
example. In that case, the maximum pressure drop across the valve should be
selected according to the 80 °C curve in the flow chart above on page 27.
28 / 56

2.13 Medium quality and medium treatment
All relevant local directives must be observed whenever it comes to water quality,
corrosion or contamination.
2.13.1 Water
Note:
· Water treatment as per VDI 2035 to avoid boiler scale and damage due to
corrosion on the water side
· The requirements of DIN EN 12953-10 should be observed
· Local guidelines and directives should be observed
Planning
Install a strainer (dirt trap).
Installation and commissioning

· The company making the installation is responsible for the water quality in HVAC
plants
· Before filling a hydraulic HVAC circuit with water, the installer must observe the
specifications of suppliers regarding water quality. If such specifications or
regulations are not observed, severe damage to the plant can occur
· When commissioning a plant, the company that made the installation is obliged
to write a commissioning report including information about water quality and
filling (plant volume) and, if necessary, about water treatment and the additives
used
Recommendation
Keep a plant record.
Maintenance and service

The installer should check hydraulic HVAC circuits at least once a year.
Before adding water to a hydraulic HVAC circuit, the installer must observe the
specifications of suppliers regarding water quality (water treatment as per VDI
2035). If such specifications or regulations are not observed, severe damage to the
plant can occur.
When adding water at a later stage, the company that made the installation is
obliged to write a commissioning report including information about water quality
and the filling (plant volume) and, if necessary, about water treatment and the
additives used.
Recommendation
To prevent boiler scale and damage resulting from corrosion, the water quality in
closed plants must be checked at regular intervals. The plant record must always
be kept up to date.
29 / 56

2.13.2 Deionized, demineralized water and super-clean water
Note:
These media have an impact on valve selection (material of O-rings, gaskets,
plug/seat, and valve body). Compatibility must be checked.
Deionized water Demineralized water Super-clean water
The ions of salts contained in the The minerals contained in the water Intensely treated water with a high
water have been removed have been removed specific resistance and containing no
organic substances
To avoid corrosion and to ensure a long service life of the valves, gaskets and
plugs, the following limits must be observed:
· Oxygen: < 0.02 mg/l
· pH value: 8.2…8.5
· Electric conductance: < 5 mSi
· Sum of alkaline earths: < 0.0051 mmol/l
· Hardness:< 0.03 dH
Planning
· The media must be approved by the supplier for use in HVAC plants
· Install a strainer (dirt trap)
Installation and commissioning

· The company making the installation is responsible for the quality of the
media used
· Before filling a hydraulic HVAC circuit with a medium, the installer must
observe the supplier’s specification. If such specifications or regulations
are not observed, severe damage to the plant can occur
· When commissioning a plant, the company that made the installation is
obliged to write a commissioning report including information about
medium quality and filling (plant volume) and, if necessary, about water
treatment and additives used
Recommendation
Keep a plant record.
Maintenance, service
The installer should check hydraulic HVAC circuits at least once a year.
Recommendation
The quality of the medium used in closed HVAC plants must be checked at regular
intervals. The plant record must always be kept up to date.
30 / 56

2.14 Engineering notes
2.14.1 Strainer (dirt trap)

Open and closed HVAC plants require a strainer (dirt trap). This improves the
quality of the water, ensures proper functioning of the valve, and a long service life
of the HVAC plant with its components.
2.14.2 Avoiding flow noise

Recommendation
To reduce flow noise, abrupt
reductions in pipe diameters, tight
pipe bends, sharp edges or
reductions in the vicinity of valves
should be avoided. A settling path
should be provided.
· L ≥ 10 x DN, at least 0,4 m
Also, the flow must be free from
cavitation (refer to chapter “2.12
Cavitation”, page 27).
2.14.3 Avoiding false circulation

When 3-port valves in HVAC plants are fully closed, false circulation can occur
when hot water rises or when water is pulled away near rectangular pipe
connections.
Note:
False circulation can be avoided by proper planning – with almost no extra cost –
but remedy is usually very costly in existing plants.
Measures against false circulation

· Observe guide value for the water speed: 0.5…1 m/s.
The lower the water speed, the smaller the risk that the diverted flow pulls water
from the critical piping section. If required, balancing valves can be installed to
improve flow conditions
· Observe a certain distance between bypass and collector/header or short-circuit:
H ≥ 10 x pipe dia., minimum 400 mm
or
· Installation of a check valve or gravity brake R with small spring pressure in the
critical piping section, aimed at ensuring a minimum flow in the opening range
31 / 56

· Welded elbows.
2.14.4 Thermal insulation

Recommendation
Insulated pipes and valves save
energy.
Actuators must never be insulated.

This is to make certain that heat
produced by the actuator can be
dissipated, thus preventing
overheating.
Thermal insulation of pipes and

valves conforming to EnEV 2009
32 / 56

Recommendation 1)
Minimum thickness of
# Type of pipes/valves thermal insulation
1 Inside diameter up to 22 mm 20 mm
2 Inside diameter 22…35 mm 30 mm
3 Inside diameter 35…100 mm Same as inside diameter
4 Inside diameter > 100 mm 100 mm
5 Through walls and ceilings, at pipe crossings and ½ of requirements of
connections, at central network distributors # 1…4
6 Pipes of central heating systems which, after ½ of requirements of
January 31, 2002, were installed between heated # 1…4
rooms of different users
7 Pipes according to # 6 in the floor’s structure 6 mm
8 Cooling energy distribution/cold water pipes and 6 mm
valves of room ventilation and air conditioning
systems
1)
Applies to a heat conductance of 0.035 W/(m·K)
When using materials with a heat conductance other than 0.035 W/(m·K), the
minimum thickness of the insulating layers must be appropriately adapted. For the
conversion and heat conductance of insulating material, the calculation methods
and data applied by established technical rules must be used.
2.15 Warranty
The engineering data listed in chapter "Type summary and equipment
combinations" on page 11 are ensured only when the valves are used in
connection with the specified Siemens actuators.
Note:
If the valves are used in combination with actuators supplied by thirds, proper
functioning must be ensured by the user himself and Siemens Building
Technologies will assume no liability.
33 / 56

3 Handling
3.1 Mounting and installation
Note:
The valves must be installed free from distortion.
3.1.1 Mounting positions

Mounting positions apply to both 2- and 3-port valves.
Indoors Outdoors
3.1.2 Direction of flow for fluids

For general illustration and further details, refer to chapter "4.3 Technical and
mechanical design", page 38.
2-port valves
Fluids
Closing against the pressure Closing with the pressure
VVF47.. VVF42..C VVF42..KC
For use with all actuators
34 / 56

Building Technologies Handling Page 138 of 709 2016-01-11
Note:
2-port valves do not become 3-port valves by removing the blank flange!
3-port valves
Fluids
Mixing valve (preferred use) Diverting valve
VXF47.. VXF42..C VXF42..C
3.1.3 Flanges
To ensure that flanges are correctly connected, the nominal, maximum and
minimum tightening torques must be observed. They depend on the strength and
size of the bolts and nuts, the material of the flanges, the PN class, the flange
gaskets used and the medium in the hydraulic system.
The tightening torques also depend on the specification of the gasket supplier and
must be observed, using a torque wrench.
To determine the right tightening torques, refer to the suppliers’ specifications.
According to EN 1515-1, the selection of materials for bolts and nuts is also
dependent on the PN class, the temperatures, and other operating conditions, such
as the type of medium.
Recommendation
Use a torque wrench.
Procedure
1. Clean the flanges.
2. Place the gaskets between the flanges.
3. Fit the bolts, washers and nuts and tighten
them by hand.
4. Tighten the bolts crosswise in 2 steps as
shown below (M = tightening torque):
· Step 1: 50% M
· Step 2: 100% M
35 / 56

1 to 8 = order for tightening the bolts
M = tightening torque
Notes: • Too low or too high tightening torques can cause leakage at the
flange connections or even lead to broken flanges
• Observe the following table "Guide values for tightening torques”
5. When the operating temperature is reached, retighten the bolts.
Guide values for tightening torques
Max. tightening torque [Nm]

DN 50 65 80 100 125 150
PN 16 70 70 70 120 120 200
3.1.4 Thermal insulation

Refer to chapter "Thermal insulation", page 32.
36 / 56

3.2 Commissioning and maintenance
3.2.1 Commissioning
The valve may be put into operation only if actuator and valve are correctly
assembled.
Note:
Ensure that actuator stem and valve stem are rigidly connected in all positions.
Function check
Valve Through port AàAB Bypass BàAB
Valve stem extends Closes Opens
Valve stem retracts Opens Closes
3.2.2 Maintenance
The valves are maintenance-free.
3.3 Disposal
The valve is considered an electronics device for disposal in terms of European
● Disassemble the valve into individual parts prior to disposing of it and sort the
individual parts by the various types of materials.
37 / 56

4 Functions and control
4.1 Selection of acting direction and valve
characteristic
The valve’s characteristic and acting direction (push to open, pull to open, normally
open, normally closed) can’t be selected.
4.2 Calibration
Calibration must be performed when valve and actuator are correctly assembled.
4.3 Technical and mechanical design

2-port valves
Fluids
Closing against the pressure Closing with the pressure
VVF47.. VVF42..C VVF42..KC
For use with all actuators

The illustrations below only show the valves’ basic design; constructional features,
such as the shape of plugs, may different.
The VVF42..K valves use a pressure-compensated plug. This enables the same
type of actuators to be used for the control of volumetric flow at higher differential
pressures.
Note
2-port valves do not become 3-port valves by removing the blank flange!
3-port valves
Fluids
Mixing valve (preferred use) Diverting valve

VXF47.. VXF42..C VXF42..C
38 / 56

Building Technologies Functions and control Page 142 of 709 2016-01-11
4.3.1 Plug stop
The built-in plug stop …
· supports secure guidance of the plug in all stroke positions
· prevents the head of the stem from immersing into the sealing gland, thus
avoiding damage to the seal
· prevents loss of plug as long as no actuator is fitted
4.3.2 Valve stem, valve neck, coupling
The stem coupling (1) and neck coupling

(2) ensures compatibility with Siemens
large-stroke valves VVF47.. or VXF47...
· The diameter of the valve stem is

10 mm with all types of valves
VVF42.. or VXF42...
· The same valve stem design ensures
compatibility with the actuators
1 Valve stem
2 Valve neck
3 Valve stem coupling
4 Valve neck coupling
4.3.3 Converting a 2-port to a 3-port valve

It is not possible to convert a 2-port valve to a 3-port valve.
Note: 2-port valves do not become 3-port valves by removing the blank flange!
4.3.4 Converting a 3-port to a 2-port valve

It is not possible to convert a 3-port valve to a 2-port valve.
4.3.5 Flange types

Flanges, flange dimensions and flange connections conform to ISO 7005 and
EN 1092 respectively.
Valve types
· 2-port valves VVF47.. VVF42 .. VVF42..KC
· 3-port valves VXF47.. VXF42 ..
39 / 56

Flange type
Type 21 (integral flange) as per ISO 7005 is an integral component of a pressure
device.
Type of flange and flange face

Type B
(raised face)
Type B1
The illustration shows

the transition from the
flange to the valve body
of the V..F.. valves (not
true to scale, faces only
outlined)
Gaskets
In the case of ISO 7005, the gaskets do not constitute part of the standard – in
contrast to EN 1092.
40 / 56

5 Technical data
VVF47.. VXF47..
Funtional data PN class PN 16 to ISO 7268
Working pressure To ISO 7005 within the permissible “Medium
temperature” range according to the diagram on
page 24
Flow characteristic
through-port 0…30% Linear
30…100% Equal percentage; ngl= 3 to VDI/VDE 2173
bypass 0…100% Linear
Leakage rate
through-port 0…0.1% of kvs value to DIN EN 1349
bypass 0.5…2% of kvs value
Permissible media Chilled water, low temperature hot water, high
temperature hot water, water with anti-freeze,
brine;
Recommendation: water treatment to VDI 2035
Medium temperature 1…95℃
Rangeability Sv DN 50…150: >50
Nominal stroke DN 50…80: 20mm
DN 100…150: 40mm
Materials Valve body Grey cast iron EN-GJL-250
Stem Stainless steel
Plug Bronze or stainless steel
Sealing gland O-ring: EPDM
Wiper ring: PTFE
Dimensions/Weight Refer to “Dimensions”,
page 40
Flange connections To ISO 7005
Environment Operation Class 3K5, 3Z11
Temperature -10…55℃
Rel. Humidity
5…95% r.h.
Storage Class 1K3 enhanced

Temperature -15…50%
Rel. Humidity <95% r.h.
Transport Class 2K3, 2M2
Temperature -30..+65℃
Rel. Humidity
<95% r.h.
Norms PN Class ISO 7268
Working pressure ISO 7005
Flanges ISO 7005
Length of flanged valves DIN EN 558-1, Series 1
Valve flow characteristic VDI 2035
Leakage rate Throughport, bypass according to EN 60534-4/
EN 1349
Water treatment VDI 2015
Environment Storage: IEC 60721-3-1
Transport: IEC 60721-3-2
Operation: IEC 60721-3-3
Environmental compatibility ISO 14001 (Environment)
ISO 9001 (Quality)
SN 36350 (Environmentally compatible products)
Directive 2002/95/EC(RoHS)
41 / 56

Building Technologies Technical data Page 145 of 709 2016-01-11
VVF42.. VXF42..
PN class PN 16
Connection Flange
Operating pressure See page 25
Valve characteristics 1) See page 24
Through port: 0...0.02% of kvs value
Leakage rate
Bypass: 0.5...2% of kvs value (kvs ≥ 6.3)
Functional data Permissible media See page 10
Medium temperature -10...150℃
To DN 40: > 50
Rangeability
From DN 50: >100
To DN 80: 20 mm
Nominal stroke
From DN 100: 40 mm
DN25-DN100: HT250 which equals to
GJL250
Valve body
DN125-DN150: QT400-18 which equals to
GJS 400-18
Blank flange Same as valve body
Valve stem Stainless steel
VVF42..C, VXF42..C: Machined
Seat
VVF42..KC: Stainless steel
Materials
DN25 Brass
Plug
DN32-DN150 Stainless steel
Brass
EPDM O-rings
Stem sealing gland
PTFE sleeve
silicon-free
Compensation sealing Stainless steel
(VVF42..KC only) EPDM
Class 1K3
Storage
IEC 60721-3-1
Rel. humidity 5...95% r.h.
Class 2K3, 2M2
Envirionmental Transport
Temperature -30...+65℃
conditions IEC 60721-3-2
Rel. humidity < 95% r.h.
Class 3K5, 3Z11
Operation
IEC 60721-3-3
Rel. humidity 5...95% r.h.
Pressure Equipment
PED 97/23/EC
Directive
Pressure-carrying
According to article 1, section 2.1.4
accessories
Fluid group 2 PN 16
Without CE certification as
per article 3, section 3
≤ DN 50
(sound engineering
practice)
Standards Category I, with CE
DN 65...150
certification
PN class ISO 7268
Operating pressure ISO 7005
Flanges ISO 7005
Length of flanged valves DIN EN 558-1, line 1
Valve characteristic VDI 2173
Through port, bypass according to EN
Leakage rate
60534-4 / EN 1349
Water treatment VDI 2035
42 / 56

The product environmental declaration (
A6V10794205) contains data on
environmentally compatible product design
Environmental compatibility and assessments (RoHS compliance,
materials composition, packaging,
environmental benefit, disposal).
43 / 56

6 Dimensions
VVF47..
H
DN B ØD Ø D2 Ø D4 K L1 L2 L3 H1 H2 SBX.. SBV.. Weight
mm kg
VVF47.50 50 20 165 19 (4x) 99 125 230 115 143 50 155 > 410 11.0
VVF47.65 65 20 185 19 (4x) 118 145 290 145 173 75 180 > 435 >500 16.0
VVF47.80 80 22 200 19 (8x) 132 160 310 155 185 75 180 > 435 >500 23.8
VVF47.100 100 24 220 19 (8x) 156 180 350 175 205 110 235 > 530 32.5
VVF47.125 125 26 250 19 (8x) 184 210 400 200 233 123 248 > 540 45.0
VVF47.150 150 26 285 23 (8x) 211 240 480 240 275 150 275 > 670 65.0
VXF47..
H
DN B ØD Ø D2 Ø D4 K L1 L2 L3 H1 H2 SBX.. SBV.. Weight
mm kg
VXF47.50 50 20 165 19 (4x) 99 125 230 115 115 50 155 > 410 8.7
VXF47.65 65 20 185 19 (4x) 118 145 290 145 145 75 180 > 435 >500 12.9
VXF47.80 80 22 200 19 (8x) 132 160 310 155 155 75 180 > 435 >500 19.5
VXF47.100 100 24 220 19 (8x) 156 180 350 175 175 110 235 > 530 27.7
VXF47.125 125 26 250 19 (8x) 184 210 400 200 200 123 248 > 540 38.3
VXF47.150 150 26 285 23 (8x) 211 240 480 240 240 150 275 > 570 54.1
44 / 56

Building Technologies Dimensions Page 148 of 709 2016-01-11
VVF42..C, VVF42..KC
DN B ⌀D ⌀D1 ⌀D2 L1 L2 L3 ⌀K H1 H2 H Weight
SAX.. SKD.. SKB.. SAV.. SKC.. kg
VVF42.25.. 25 1)
13 115 65 14 (4x) 160 80 101.5 85 37 133.5 479 537 612 - - 5.0
VVF42.32.. 32 1)
15 140 76 19 (4x) 180 90 116 100 38 133.5 479 537 612 - - 7.4
VVF42.40.. 40 1) 15 150 84 19 (4x) 200 100 126 110 38 133.5 479 537 612 502 - 8.9
VVF42.50.. 501) 16 165 99 19 (4x) 230 115 144 125 51.5 146.5 492 550 625 516.5 - 11.9
VVF42.65.. 65 17 185 118 19 (4x) 290 145 174 145 75 171.5 517 575 650 540 - 16.7
VVF42.80.. 80 19 200 132 19 (8x) 310 155 186 160 75 171.5 517 575 650 540 - 26.6
VVF42.100.. 100 20 220 156 19 (8x) 350 175 205 180 110 226.5 - - - 575 685 36.5
VVF42.125.. 125 15 250 184 19 (8x) 400 200 228 210 123 239.5 - - - 588 698 45.7
VVF42.150.. 150 15 284 211 23 (8x) 480 240 272.5 240 150.5 267 - - - 615.5 726 63.6
VVF42.65KC 65 17 185 118 19 (4x) 290 145 174 145 75 171.5 517 575 650 540 - 16.7
VVF42.80KC 80 19 200 132 19 (8x) 310 155 186 160 75 171.5 517 575 650 540 - 26.9
VVF42.100KC 100 20 220 156 19 (8x) 350 175 206 180 110 226.5 - - - 575 685 36.7
VVF42.125KC 125 15 250 184 19 (8x) 400 200 228 210 123 239.5 - - - 588 698 44.4
VVF42.150KC 150 15 284 211 23 (8x) 480 240 272.5 240 150.5 267 - - - 615.5 726 65.0
45 / 56

Building Technologies Dimensions 2016-01-11
Page 149 of 709
VXF42..C
DN B ⌀D ⌀D1 ⌀D2 L1 L2 L3 ⌀K H1 H2 H Weight
SAX.. SKD.. SKB.. SAV.. SKC.. kg
VXF42.25.. 25 1) 13 115 65 14 (4x) 160 80 80 85 37 133.5 479 537 612 502 - 4.1
VXF42.32.. 32 1) 15 140 76 19(4x) 180 90 90 100 38 133.5 479 537 612 503 - 6.1
VXF42.40.. 40 1) 15 150 84 19(4x) 200 100 100 110 38 133.5 479 537 612 503 - 7.1
VXF42.50.. 501) 16 165 99 19 (4x) 230 115 115 125 51.5 146.5 492 550 625 516.5 - 9.5
VXF42.65.. 65 17 185 118 19 (4x) 290 145 145 145 75 171.5 517 575 650 540 - 13.9
VXF42.80.. 80 19 200 132 19 (8x) 310 155 155 160 75 171.5 517 575 650 540 - 21.5
VXF42.100.. 100 20 220 156 19 (8x) 350 175 175 180 110 226.5 - - - 575 685 31.1
VXF42.125.. 125 15 250 184 19 (8x) 400 200 200 210 123 239.5 - - - 588 698 38.4
VXF42.150.. 150 15 284 211 23 (8x) 480 240 240 240 150.5 267 - - - 615.5 726 53.6
DN = Nominal size
H = Total actuator height plus minimum distance to the wall or the ceiling for mounting, connection, operation, maintenance etc.
H1 = Dimension from the pipe centre to install the actuator (upper edge)
H2 = Valve in the “Closed” position means that the stem is fully extended
46 / 56

Building Technologies Dimensions Page 150 of 709 2016-01-11
7 Revision number
Product type Valid from rev. number Product type Valid from rev. number
VVF47.50 ..A VXF47.50 ..A
VVF47.65 ..A VXF47.65 ..A
VVF47.80 ..A VXF47.80 ..A
VVF47.100 ..B VXF47.100 ..A
VVF47.125 ..B VXF47.125 ..A
VVF47.150 ..B VXF47.150 ..A
VVF42.25-6.3C ..A VXF42.25-6.3C ..A
VVF42.25-10C ..A VXF42.25-10C ..A
VVF42.32-16C ..A VXF42.32-16C ..A
VVF42.40-16C ..A VXF42.40-16C ..A
VVF42.40-25C ..A VXF42.40-25C ..A
VVF42.50-31.5C ..A VXF42.50-31.5C ..A
VVF42.50-40C ..A VXF42.50-40C ..A
VVF42.65-50C ..A VXF42.65-50C ..A
VVF42.65-63C ..A VXF42.65-63C ..A
VVF42.80-80C ..A VXF42.80-80C ..A
VVF42.80-100C ..A VXF42.80-100C ..A
VVF42.100-125C ..A VXF42.100-125C ..A
VVF42.100-160C ..A VXF42.100-160C ..A
VVF42.125-200C ..A VXF42.125-200C ..A
VVF42.125-250C ..A VXF42.125-250C ..A
VVF42.150-315C ..A VXF42.150-315C ..A
VVF42.150-400C ..A VXF42.150-400C ..A
VVF42.65KC ..A
VVF42.80KC ..A
VVF42.100KC ..A
VVF42.125KC ..A
VVF42.150KC ..A
47 / 56

Building Technologies Revision number 2016-01-11
Page 151 of 709
8 Addendum
8.1 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Unit Term Explanation
c [kJ/kgK] Specific heat capacity See "Specific heat capacity", page 49
DN - Nominal size Characteristic for matching parts of a piping system
FR - Correction factor Factor for impact of valve’s Reynolds number
H [mm] Stroke Travel of valve or actuator stem
H0 [m] Shutoff head Pump head when medium is supplied. The head
generated by a pump when the valve is fully closed
3
kv [m /h] Nominal flow Amount of cold water (5…30 °C) passing through
the valve at the respective stroke and at a
differential pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar)
3
kvr [m /h] - Smallest volumetric flow that can be controlled, that
is, when the valve starts to open (opening step)
3
kvs [m /h] Nominal flow Nominal flow rate of cold water (5…30 °C) through
the fully open valve (H100) at a differential pressure
of 100 kPa (1 bar)
m [kg/h] Mass flow -
Steam mass flow
PN - PN class Characteristic relating to the combination of
mechanical and dimensional properties of a
component in a piping system
Pv - Valve authority See "Valve authority Pv", page 49
Q100 [kW] Rated capacity Design capacity of plant
Qmin [kW] Smallest output of a consumer that can be
controlled in modulating mode
rp1 [kJ/kgK] Specific heat capacity of steam
Sv - Rangeability See "Rangeability SV", page 49
3
V100 [m /h], Volumetric flow Volume per unit of time through the fully open valve
[l/s] (H100)
ρ [kg/m 3] Density Mass per volume
[mm2/s],
2
υ Kinematic viscosity 1 mm /s = 1 cSt (centistoke), also refer to chapter
[cSt] “2.8.3.3 Kinematic viscosity ν”, page 19
Dp [kPa] Differential pressure Pressure difference between plant sections
Dpmax [kPa] Max. differential Maximum permissible differential pressure across
pressure the valve’s throughport (control path) for the entire
positioning range of the motorized valve
DpMV [kPa] - Differential pressure across the section with
variable flow
Dps [kPa] Closing pressure Maximum permissible differential pressure at which
the motorized valve still closes securely against the
pressure
Dpv0 [kPa] - Maximum differential pressure across the valve’s
fully closed throughport (control path)
Dpv100 [kPa] Differential pressure at Differential pressure across the fully open valve and
nominal flow rate the valve’s throughport A – AB at the volumetric flow
V100
DpVR [kPa] - Differential pressure of flow and return
DT [K] Temperature spread Temperature difference of flow and return
48 / 56

Building Technologies Addendum Page 152 of 709 2016-01-11
8.2 Important formulas
Value Formula Unit
Differential [kPa]
2
pressure ΔpV100 æ V& ö
Dp V100 = 100 × ç 100 ÷
across the fully ç k ÷
è vs ø
open valve
Rangeability SV k vs -
SV =
k vr
Valve authority PV Header with pressure, variable · Header with pressure, -
volumetric flow constant volumetric flow
Dp V100 · Header with low differential
PV =
Dp VR pressure, variable volumetric
flow
D p V100
PV =
D p V100 + Dp MV
3
Volumetric flow Water without antifreeze Water with antifreeze [m /h]
Q V100 Q × 3600
V100 &
V V100 = V& V 100 = V 100
1,163 × DT c × r × DT
8.3 Valve-related glossary

DIN EN 14597 Standard on temperature controls and temperature limiters for
use in heat generating plants. This standard also covers
actuating equipment (actuating devices) with safety function for
temperature and pressure limitation as per
DIN EN 14597
HIT The HVAC Integrated Tool (HIT) supports sizing and selection of
valves for water with antifreeze (www.siemens.com/hit)
Actuating device Combination of valve and actuator
Rangeability SV Characteristic of an actuating device, used to assess the
device’s controllable range; ratio of the nominal flow rate kvs to
the smallest controllable flow kvr
Valve authority Pv Ratio of the differential pressure across the fully open valve
(H100) to the differential pressure across the valve plus that of the
pipe section with variable volume. To ensure correct control, the
valve authority must be a minimum of 0.25
Specific heat capacity The specific heat capacity is the amount of heat required to heat
the mass of 1 kg of a substance by 1 K.
It increases as the temperature of the substance rises; in the
case of gases, also as the pressure of the substance rises.
Therefore, with gases, a distinction is made between cP, the
specific heat at a constant pressure, and cV, the specific heat at
a constant volume
49 / 56

Building Technologies Addendum 2016-01-11
Page 153 of 709
8.4 Hydraulics-related glossary
Film temperature Temperature of the valve surfaces that are in contact with the
heat transfer oil at which the oil starts to disintegrate
Cavitation Due to high speeds of the medium in the narrowest section of
the valve, local underpressure occurs. If this pressure drops
below the medium’s boiling pressure, cavitation occurs (steam
bubbles), possibly leading to material removal (abrasion). Also,
when cavitation starts, the noise level increases abruptly.
Cavitation can be avoided by limiting the pressure differential
across the valve as a function of the medium temperature and
the prepressure. For more detailed information, refer to chapter
"2.12 Cavitation", page 27
Selection of valve Certain types of Siemens actuators are equipped with DIL
characteristic switches for the selection of a linear or an equal-percentage
valve characteristic. The objective is to linearize the volumetric
flow through the consumer and the valve
Closed circuit The medium circulates in a closed hydraulic system with no
contact to the atmosphere
Open circuit The circulating medium is in contact with the atmosphere, that
is, the hydraulic system is open to atmosphere (e.g. cooling
towers with open tanks, or showers). Hence, the system can
absorb oxygen from the surrounding air, which can lead to rust;
in addition, more attention is to be paid to cavitation; for more
information, refer to chapter "2.12 Cavitation", page 27
Control stability The stability of a closed control loop depends on the degree of
difficulty S of the controlled system and the circuit amplification
V0. For more detailed information, refer to the Siemens
brochure "Control technology" (ordering no. 0-91913-en)
Return Temperature of the medium at which it returns from the
temperature TRL consumer to the heat or cooling source
Gravity circulation The density of a medium depends on its temperature. If a
medium is hot in one place and cold in another, it starts to
circulate due to different densities
Volumetric flow V Volume of a medium that passes through an opening for a
certain time
Flow temperature Temperature of a heating or cooling medium at which it leaves
TVL its source to enter a hydraulic circuit
Selection of acting Certain types of Siemens actuators are equipped with DIL
direction switches for selection of the operating action of the respective
valve (push to open, pull to open, normally open, normally
closed). The objective is to drive the valve to the fully open or
fully closed position should a power failure occur, depending on
plant requirements
Forced control If forced control is demanded, no consideration is given to any
other control command. For example, if there is risk of frost,
more heat is supplied to prevent freeze-ups
50 / 56

8.5 Media-related glossary
Enthalpy Amount of energy contained in a thermodynamic system (heat
content)
FDA Food and Drug Administration (USA)
Saturated steam Boundary between wet and superheated steam;
Wet steam: Parts of the gaseous water condensate to
become very fine droplets
Superheated steam: "Dry" steam without water droplets
Brine Solution consisting of salt and water
Heat transfer Heat transfer fluid on the basis of mineral oil, synthetic, organic, or
oil/thermal oil on the basis of silicon, uniform or mixed
Water Chemical compound consisting of oxygen (O) and hydrogen (H).
Also refer to VDI 2035 for information on avoiding damage to
drinking and domestic hot water plants
Water with The water contains antifreeze which also inhibits corrosion. For the
antifreeze types of antifreeze used in the trade, also refer to chapter "8.7
Overview of antifreeze and brine used in the trade", page 51
Glycol Glycol is added to water to lower the water’s melting point.
Examples are ethylene glycol and propylene glycol. Refer to chapter
"8.7 Overview of antifreeze and brine used in the trade", page 51
Water, deionized The ions of salts contained in the water have been removed
Water, The minerals contained in the water have been removed
demineralized
Water, super-clean Specially treated water; various processes are used to remove
water dissolved salts and other undesirable substances. It has a high
specific resistance and contains no organic substances
8.6 Trade names

Trademark Legal owner
Acvatix Siemens
Glythermin BASF
Antifrogen, Protectogen Clariant
Dowcal Dow
Zitrec, Freezium Arteco NV/SA
TYFOCOR, TYFOXIT Tyforop Chemie GmbH
GLYKOSOL, PEKASOL, PEKASOLar Glykol & Sole GmbH
Temper Temper Technology
8.7 Overview of antifreeze and brine used in the

trade
The list below is not exhaustive. It specifies manufacturer data and is not to be
regarded as an official approval for Siemens products in the indicated temperature
range. For temperature ranges of individual product lines, see chapter 2.11, page 25.
The notes given under "Medium quality and medium treatment", page 29 must also be
observed.
51 / 56

Page 155 of 709
Supplier Product number Basic medium Permissible limit Temperature range Usage
weight fractions of medium
BASF Glythermin® NF Heat transfer medium on the basis - -35…150 °C No known
of ethylene glycol and inhibitors restriction
www.basf.com Glythermin® P 44-00 Basis: Propylene glycol plus - -50…150 °C No known
anticorrosion additives restriction
Glythermin® P 44-92 Basis: Propylene glycol plus - -50…150 °C No known
Glythermin® P 82-00 Heat transfer medium for solar - -27… 170 °C No known
plants on the basis of glycol and restriction
inhibitors
Glysantin FC Basis Ethylene glycol à 60% -40°C…120°C No known
Automobile applications, engine restriction
test bed
Clariant Antifrogen SOL Basis: Propylene glycol and glycol Ready-to-use -27… 170 °C No known
with a higher boiling point plus mixture restriction
www.antifrogen.de anticorrosion additives. Ready to
use, premixed with desalinated
water (frost protection -27 °C)
Antifrogen KF Basis: Potassium formate plus 50% -50…20 °C Restricted -
anticorrosion additives compatibility must
be tested
Antifrogen N Basis: Monoethylene glycol plus 70% -35…150 °C No known
Antifrogen L Basis: Propylene glycol plus 100% -25…150 °C No known
Dow Dowcal 10 Heat transfer medium on the basis - -50…170 °C No known
of ethylene glycol and special restriction
www.dow.com/heattrans inhibitor
Dowcal 20 Heat transfer medium on the basis - -45…160 °C No known
of propylene glycol for higher restriction
temperatures than other propylene
glycol fluids
Dowcal N Heat transfer medium on the basis - -45…120 °C No known
Water with antifreeze
of propylene glycol with little acute restriction

toxicity if swallowed; widely used in
the food and beverage industry and
in other sectors to lower the
freezing point
Arteco NV/SA Zitrec MC Multipurpose heat transfer medium < 70% -55…120 °C No known
on the basis of monoethylene restriction
www.zitrec.com/ glycol, mixed with an adequate
amount of water
Zitrec LC Multipurpose heat transfer medium < 70% -55…120 °C No known
on the basis of monopropylene restriction
glycol, mixed with an adequate
amount of water
Zitrec FC Multipurpose heat transfer medium < 70% -50…120 °C No known
on the basis of monopropylene restriction
glycol, mixed with an adequate
amount of water; all substances
contained in the medium are
approved by FDA
Zitrec S Multipurpose heat transfer medium Ready-to-use -55…120 °C Restricted -
without glycol, on the basis of a mixture compatibility must
substance consisting of potassium be tested
formate and sodium propionate
Tyforop Chemie GmbH TYFOCOR® L Freezing and anticorrosion agent, - -25…140 °C Restricted -
safe with regard to health, compatibility,
www.tyfo.de/index_deuts specifically for keeping food cool especially with
ch.html and for solar plants, virtually respect to soft
odourless, hygroscopic liquid. It is solder - individual
based on propylene glycol, which case must be
poses no hazard to health and tested
which may be used as a coolant or
heat-transfer fluid in food
processing and water purification
applications.
TYFOCOR® HTL Ready-to-use heat transfer medium - ...170°C Restricted -
for solar plants with higher thermal compatibility,
loads, clear, blue-green colored especially with
liquid with a faint odour and is respect to soft
based on 1,2-propylene glycol and solder - individual
polyethylene glycol. case must be
tested
52 / 56

TYFOCOR® LS Special, ready-to-use heat transfer - -25…170 °C Restricted -
medium, evaporating without compatibility,
residue, for solar plants with high especially with
thermal loads (vacuum tube respect to soft
collectors); solder - individual
faint odour, based on case must be
physiologically unobjectionable tested
propylene glycol, and water.
TYFOCOR Clear, colorless, faint odour liquid, -50…140 °C Restricted -
based on ethylene glycol. compatibility,
especially with
respect to soft
solder - individual
case must be
tested
TYFOCOR G-LS Reversibly evaporable special …170 °C Restricted -
heat-transfer fluid based on 1,2- compatibility,
propylene glycol, for use in solar especially with
thermal systems respect to soft
solder - individual
case must be
tested
TYFO-SPEZIAL High-quality, powerful brine, -10…30 °C Restricted -
specifically for use in earth linked copper, brass and
thermal heat pump systems bronze material is
not resistant,
test sealing
material in
individual case
Glykol & Sole GmbH GLYKOSOL N Yellowish fluid on the basis of 25…40%, -50…170 °C No known
monoethylene glycol for use as a depending on the restriction
www.glykolundsole.com/ heat transfer medium with highly application
efficient anticorrosion additives and
hardness stabilizers; free from
nitrite, amine and phosphate
GLYKOSL WP Based on Ethandiol 1,2 - - Check
(ethyleneglycol) permissibility in
individual case
PEKASOL 2000 Aqueous solution of - -60…60°C Restricted -
environmentally safe alkaline earth compatibility,
formate and acetate. especially with
PEKASOL 2000 is free of amine, respect to soft
nitrite and phosphate. solder and zinc -
individual case
must be tested
PEKASOL L Yellowish fluid on the basis of 25…40%, -50…185 °C No known
propylene glycol for use as a heat depending on the restriction
transfer medium with highly application
efficient anticorrosion additives and
hardness stabilizers; free from
nitrite, amine and phosphate
PEKASOLar 100 PEKASOLar 100 and its dilutions - -50…150 °C Restricted -
PEKASOLar 50 are colorless and odorless liquids compatibility,
on basis of propylene glycol with especially with
newly developed additives respect to soft
solder - individual
New installations must be case must be
adequately cleaned before filling. tested
Recommended is a 5% pro
KÜHLSOLE PEX 130 solution.
Arteco NV/SA Freezium Salt brine on the basis of 24 ..50% -60…35 °C Restricted -
potassium formate, specially individual case
www.zitrec.com/Products developed for use in indirect must be tested
_Freezium.htm cooling systems and heat pumps.
Suitable for a temperature range
from -60 to 95 °C
Tyforop Chemie GmbH TYFOXIT®F15-F50 High-performance coolant on the - -60…100 °C Restricted
basis of potassium formate (safe permissibility,
www.tyfo.de/index_deuts with regard to food). Available as a more precise
ch.html ready-to-use mixture in 6 variants evaluations at
(F15 - F50), cooling limits from 20...80 °C
-15 to -60 °C. Excellent flow necessary
properties at low temperatures, due (test soft solder in
to low viscosity individual case)
53 / 56

Page 157 of 709
TYFOXIT® 1.25 High-performance coolant on the - -55…100 °C Restricted
basis of potassium acetate (safe permissibility,
with regard to food). Supplied as a more precise
concentrate or ready-to-fill mixture evaluations at
and suited for use at temperatures 20...80 °C
down to -55 °C necessary
(test soft solder in
individual case)
2)
Temper Technology Temper Synthetic and homogenized, glycol- Ready-to-use -55…180 °C Restricted -
free solutions on the basis of salts; mixtures check
www.temper.se/Temper_( suitable for temperatures from -10 compatibility,
eng)/Temper/Download_i to -50 °C; colorless to slightly especially with
nformation/Temper_DXNI yellowish; contain no amines or respect to
-2251_.aspx nitrites, but additives to support fiber gasket,
protection against corrosion and to PTFE (Teflon),
improve lubrication FPM (Viton), soft
solder unsuitable
Cast iron at
higher
temperatures
unsuitable
Non-ferrous metal
suited to a limited
extent, must be
tested in
individual case
1)
Supplier’s Usage Instructions must be observed
2)
Restricted usage with regard to concentration or temperature
54 / 56

Index
2-port valves Formulas ............................................................ 49
product description ............................................ 7 Function check ................................................... 37
valve characteristics ........................................ 24 Installation .......................................................... 34
with flanged connections.................................. 11 Kinematic viscosity
3-port valves flow chart ........................................................ 17
product description ............................................ 7 impact on valve sizing ..................................... 19
valve characteristics ........................................ 25 Maintenance....................................................... 37
with flanged connections.................................. 12 Medium
Abbreviations ...................................................... 48 water, deionized, demineralized, super-clean .. 30
Acting direction ................................................... 38 Medium quality .............................................. 29, 51
Actuator overview ............................................... 13 Medium temperature .......................................... 25
Antifreeze ........................................................... 51 Medium treatment .............................................. 29
Brines ................................................................. 51 Mounting ............................................................ 34
Calculation examples Mounting positions.............................................. 34
example for water ...................................... 22, 23 Operating pressure ............................................. 25
Calibration .......................................................... 38 Ordering ............................................................. 14
Cavitation ........................................................... 27 Plug stop ............................................................ 39
Circulation .......................................................... 31 Rangeability ....................................................... 21
Commissioning ................................................... 37 Spare parts......................................................... 15
Compatibility ....................................................... 10 Strainer (dirt trap) ............................................... 31
Converting .......................................................... 39 Technical data .................................................... 41
Correction factor ................................................. 21 Tightening torques .............................................. 36
Coupling ............................................................. 39 Trade names ...................................................... 51
Dimensions ......................................................... 44 Trademarks .......................................................... 5
Direction of flow .................................................. 34 Type summary..................................................... 11
Disposal.............................................................. 37 Use .................................................................... 10
Engineering notes ............................................... 31 Valve characteristic............................................. 38
Equipment combinations ..................................... 11 Valve neck.......................................................... 39
Fields of use ....................................................... 10 Valve sizing
Flanges fluids ............................................................... 16
connection ....................................................... 35 impact of fluid properties ................................. 18
faces ............................................................... 40 procedure ....................................................... 16
types ............................................................... 39 Valve stem.......................................................... 39
Flow noise .......................................................... 31 Warranty............................................................. 33
55 / 56

Page 159 of 709
Siemens Switzerland Ltd Technical specifications and availability subject to change without notice.
Gubelstrasse 22
CH-6301 Zug
+41 41-724 24 24
www.siem.com/buildingtechnologies
Document ID: A6V10423210_en--_a

Edition: 2016-01-11
Page 160 of 709
1 922
Differential Pressure QBE3000-D..

Sensor QBE3100-D..
for neutral and mildly corrosive liquids and gases
Differential pressure sensor, suitable for gases or liquids, for the measurement of
pressure differentials in HVAC systems.
· Ceramic measuring system
· Robust construction for highly reliable operation
· For neutral and mildly corrosive liquids and gases
· Supply voltage AC 24 V / DC 18...33 V or DC 11...33 V
· DC 0...10 V output signal or DC 4...20 mA
· Male-threaded G1/8" connection
· Delivery includes 2 screwed fittings for copper pipes, 6 mm diameter
Use
The differential pressure sensor is particularly suitable for use in HVAC systems for
continuous monitoring of the level or flow rate of neutral or mildly corrosive gases or
liquids.
The sensor can be used as:
· Control sensor
· Measured value transmitter for building automation and control systems
CE1N1922en
Page 161 of 709
Type summary
Type Article number Pressure range Output signal

[bar] [MPa]
QBE3000-D1 S55720-S173 0...1 0...0.10 DC 0...10 V
QBE3000-D1.6 S55720-S174 0...1.6 0...0.16 DC 0...10 V
QBE3000-D2.5 S55720-S175 0...2.5 0...0.25 DC 0...10 V
QBE3000-D4 S55720-S176 0...4 0...0.40 DC 0...10 V
QBE3000-D6 S55720-S186 0...6 0...0.60 DC 0...10 V
QBE3000-D10 S55720-S177 0...10 0...1 DC 0...10 V
QBE3000-D16 S55720-S178 0...16 0...1.6 DC 0...10 V
QBE3100-D1 S55720-S179 0...1 0...0.10 DC 4...20 mA
QBE3100-D1.6 S55720-S180 0...1.6 0...0.16 DC 4...20 mA
QBE3100-D2.5 S55720-S181 0...2.5 0...0.25 DC 4...20 mA
QBE3100-D4 S55720-S182 0...4 0...0.40 DC 4...20 mA
QBE3100-D6 S55720-S187 0...6 0...0.60 DC 4...20 mA
QBE3100-D10 S55720-S183 0...10 0...1 DC 4...20 mA
QBE3100-D16 S55720-S184 0...16 0...1.6 DC 4...20 mA
Ordering and delivery
When ordering, please specify the quantity, product name and type code.
Example: 1 differential pressure sensor QBE3000-D1
A suitable fixing bracket is supplied with the sensor.
Any accessories required must be ordered separately.
Compatibility
Differential pressure sensors can be used in conjunction with all devices or systems
capable of processing the DC 0...10 V or DC 4...20 mA output signal.
Technology
The pressure to be monitored acts on a ceramic sensor element. The ceramic element
has the following significant advantages
· Very low susceptibility to temperature
· Resistance to high temperature
· No mechanical ageing or creepage
The sensor signal is linearised, temperature-compensated and amplified by the sensor

electronics.
Mechanical design
The differential pressure sensor comprises the following:

· Sensor cover with DIN 175301-803-A connecting cable and gland
· Pressure sensor casing with ceramic element, screw connections and burglarproof
screw
· Printed circuit board
· Pressure connections G⅛“, external threaded with unscrewed fittings for
copper pipe, 6 mm diameter
· Fixing bracket, enclosed loose, with sensor
· Plug DIN 175301-803-A unattached
2/6
Siemens Differential Pressure Sensor QBE3000-D.. / QBE3100-D.. CE1N1922en

Accessories
AQB2002 Mounting kit for remote mounting with 1 m

copper capillary line, both ends prefabri-
cated ready for connection.
Thread adapters and terminal nuts made
of brass. Pressure connection with G⅛“
or G½“ outer threading.
Instructions
Mounting Mounting instructions are enclosed with the differential pressure sensor.
It can be connected directly with G1/8" screwed fittings. Special precautions must be
taken on site when mounting the sensors to ensure airtight screw connections.
Recommended Use standard T-fittings or drill and de-bur measuring holes, each 5 mm diameter, for
measures the pressure tapping points (A).
An isolating bypass (5) can be fitted, to avoid overloading the pressure sensor on one
side while making adjustments.
For inspection purposes, measuring circuits can be fitted with a measuring-T at the
sensor head.
Important note Mounting for use with liquids:

Always mount the sensor lower than the pressure measuring points
Mount on a vibration-free surface
Always evacuate the system
Supply Return
Key: A Measuring holes

1 Isolating valves
2 T-joints
3 Connection pieces (from mounting kit AQB2002)
4 Copper pipes (from mounting kit AQB2002)
5 Isolating bypass
Remote mounting For remote mounting, the sensor can be operated together with the AQB pressure
mounting kit in ambient temperatures of up to 70 °C for medium temperatures of up to
180 °C. Care must be taken in this case to ensure that the cooling efficiency of the
copper pipe is not reduced by additional heat sources or by restrictions to the air circu-
lation.
3/6

Disposal The device is considered an electronic device for disposal in accordance with the Euro-
pean Guidelines and may not be disposed of as domestic garbage.
· Dispose of the device via the channels provided for this purpose.
· Comply with all local and currently applicable laws and regulations.
Technical data
Power supply Low voltage (SELV)

Operating voltage QBE3000-D.. AC 24 V ± 15 %, 50/60 Hz or DC 18...33 V
Power consumpt. (at nom. pressure) < 5 mA at AC 24 V
Operating voltage QBE3100-D.. DC 11...33 V
Power consumpt. (at nom. pressure) <20 mA
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz at AC 24 V
External supply line protection Fuse slow max. 10 A
or
Characteristic B, C, D according to EN 60898
or
Power source with current limitation of max. 10 A
Output signal Short-circuit proof and proof polarity reversal
QBE3000-D.. DC 0...10 V
Working resistance > 10 kW
QBE3100-D.. DC 4…20 mA
Power supply – 11 V
Working resistance ≤ [Ohm]
0.02 A
Product data Differential pressure range Refer to "Type summary"

Measuring element Ceramic
Measuring accuracy Factory calibrated
Sum of linearity, hysteresis
and repeatability < ± 0.5 % FS (FS = Full Scale)
Zero point, Full scale < ± 0.4 % FS
TC zero point < ± 0.04 % FS / K
TC sensitivity < ± 0.015 % FS / K
Long-term stability DIN EN 60770 ± 0.5 % FS
Resolution 0.1 % FS
Overload on one side P1 / P2 ≤ 2 × nominal pressure
System pressure at nom. pressure range (simultaneous P1 and P2)
≤ 6 bar 25 bar
≥ 10 bar 50 bar
Bursting pressure 1.5 × system pressure
Dynamic response:
Response time < 5 ms
Load alternation < 50 Hz
Suitable media Air, mildly corrosive gases, liquids
Admissible temperature of medium - 15...85 °C
Maintenance No maintenance required
Degree of protection Protection degree of housing IP65 according to EN 60529, mounted and tightened
Protection class III according to EN 60730-1
Connections Connecting cable Plug DIN EN 175301-803-A, plug with seals and PG9
cable glands included
Pressure connections Male-threaded G1/8", With screwded fittings for
copper pipes, 6 mm diameter
4/6

Mountings Mounting bracket For mounting in ducts, on walls or ceilings, in contr.panels
Orientation Any (factory-calibrated with pressure connections at
bottom)
Environmental conditions Perm. ambient temperature
Operation - 15...85 °C
Storage / Transport - 40...85 °C
Perm. ambient humidity <90 % r. h. (non-condensing)
Directives and Standards Product standard EN-61326-1
Electrical equipment for measurement, control and la-
boratory use.
*)
EU Conformity (CE) CA1T1923xx
*)
RCM Conformity 8000078879
Environmental compatibility The product environmental declaration CE1E1922*) contains data on environmentally compatible
product design and assessments (RoHS compliance, materials composition, packaging, environmental
benefit, disposal).
Materials Pressure casing, cover Aluminium (AlMgSi1)
Parts in contact with medium Stainless steel 1.4305 / AISI 303, ceramic element,
CuZn nickel plated
Sealant FPM (fluoroelastomer)
Mounting bracket Stainless steel (1.4305)
Mounting kit AQB2002 See "Accessories"
Weight Differential Pressure Sensor 545 g
Including accessories and packaging 660 g
Connection terminals
Voltage output: Current output:
IN G Operating voltage AC 24 V or DC 18...33 V or DC 11...33 V

OUT U Output signal DC 0...10 V (reference point GND)
I Output signal DC 4...20 mA
GND G0 Ground
5/6

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
Fixing brackets
Issued by
Theilerstrasse 1a
CH-6300 Zug
Tel. +41 58-724 24 24 © Siemens Switzerland Ltd, 2011
www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies Technical specifications and availability subject to change without notice.
6/6

s
Datasheet for SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W
SITRANS FM MAG 5100 W Full-bore electromagnetic flow sensor, flanged, diameter DN 25 to DN 2000 (1" to 78"). Suitable for volume
flow measurement of liquids (conductive) , for applications in water abstraction, water & wastewater treatment, water distribu
Ordering data: 7ME65803TJ142KA2
General
Manufacturer Siemens
Supplier Siemens
Brand name SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W
Type designation SITRANS FM MAG 5100 W Full-bore electromagnetic flow sensor, flanged,
diameter DN 25 to DN 2000 (1" to 78"). Suitable for volume flow
measurement of liquids (conductive) , for applications in water abstraction,
water & wastewater treatment, water distribution networks, custody transfer
metering.
Order number 7ME65803TJ142KA2
Net weight 22.1 kg
Slogan SITRANS F M - modularity for every application
Mode of operation and application

Measuring principle electromagnetic induction
Operating conditions
Process medium
Medium temperature 0 °C...+70 °C
Pressure
Operating pressure, absolute (minimum) 0.01 bar
Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature during operation -20 °C...+60 °C
Degree of protection
IP rating IP67
NEMA Enclosure Type NEMA 4X, NEMA 6
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC
Standard for EMC 2004/108/EC
Design
Mechanical design
Design of the housing compact version, sensor integrated
Model of the measuring pipe Full-bore hole
...Process connection
Design flange
Standard ASME B16.5
Nominal size 4"
Pressure rating Class 150
Model of the sealing surface Type B
...Material
....Process connection
Material carbon steel
....Housing
Material number of the sensor according to AISI A 150
Coating of the sensor (outside) Two-component epoxy coating
Coating thickness of the sensor (minimum) 150 µm
Page 167 of 709

This is only an extract from the technical data. For more details, see the FI 01 catalog or the Industry Mall.
Creation date: 01/25/2021 Page 1 of *
s
Ordering data: 7ME65803TJ142KA2
....Sensor
Material of the measuring pipe stainless steel
Material number of measuring pipe according to DIN 1.4301
EN 10027-2
Material number of measuring pipe according to AISI 304
Material of the liner Ebonit
....Miscellaneous
Material of the electrodes nickel alloy (Hastelloy C276)
Material of the terminal box Fibre glass reinforced polyamide
...Dimensions
Installation length 250 mm
Electrical connections
Number of cable entries 2
Design of the cable entry 1/2" NPT
Certificates and approvals

Reliability (MTBF)
MTBF 472 a
Standard for MTBF SN 29500
Determination procedure number of registered failures
Applicability Measuring device
The information provided in this data sheet contains descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not
always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject
to change without notice.
Page 168 of 709

s
Ordering data: 7ME65804BJ142KA2
General
Supplier Siemens
metering.
Order number 7ME65804BJ142KA2
Net weight 22.1 kg

Process medium
Pressure
IP rating IP67

Design
Mechanical design
Design flange
Standard ASME B16.5
Nominal size 5"
...Material
....Housing
....Sensor Page 169 of 709

s
Ordering data: 7ME65804BJ142KA2

EN 10027-2
....Miscellaneous
...Dimensions

Reliability (MTBF)
MTBF 472 a
Page 170 of 709

s
Ordering data: 7ME65804HJ142KA2
General
Supplier Siemens
metering.
Order number 7ME65804HJ142KA2
Net weight 28.1 kg

Process medium
Pressure
IP rating IP67

Design
Mechanical design
Design flange
Standard ASME B16.5
Nominal size 6"
...Material
....Housing
....Sensor
Page 171 of 709
s
Ordering data: 7ME65804HJ142KA2

EN 10027-2
....Miscellaneous
...Dimensions

Reliability (MTBF)
MTBF 472 a
Page 172 of 709

s
Datasheet for SITRANS FUE950 calculator
SITRANS FUE950 Custody transfer approved energy calculator, for use with flow meters of type FUS380, FUE380, MAG 8000, FS220
and MAG 5000/6000 transmitter. Suitable for thermal energy measurement of liquids for applications in district heating and chiller
Ordering data: 7ME34802AC623DQ0
General
Supplier Siemens
Brand name SITRANS FUE950
Type designation SITRANS FUE950 Custody transfer approved energy calculator, for use
with flow meters of type FUS380, FUE380, MAG 8000, FS220 and MAG
5000/6000 transmitter. Suitable for thermal energy measurement of liquids
for applications in district heating and chiller plants.
Order number 7ME34802AC623DQ0
Net weight 1 kg
Slogan Cost-effective flow solution for heating & cooling.

Measuring principle Temperature resistance measurement
Input
Measurand Power
Digital input
Input voltage, DC (maximum) 3V
Internal resistance 2,200 kOhm
Pulse duration at pulse input (minimum) 10 ms
Signal frequency at pulse intput (maximum) 8 Hz
Measuring range
Volume flow rate (maximum) 360 m³/h
Sensor type
...Resistance thermometer
Connection technology 2-wire system, 4-wire system
Sensor according to DIN EN 60751 Pt500
Output
Current output
Signal range 4 ... 20 mA
Failure signal (minimum) 3.5 mA
Failure signal (maximum) 22.6 mA
Output voltage 10 V...30 V
Load (maximum) 800 Ohm
Digital output
...Frequency output
Pulse-pause-ratio 50 %
Signal frequency 0 Hz...100 Hz
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy, relative 0.5 %
Process temperature -20 °C...+190 °C
Page 173 of 709
s
Ambient temperature during operation 0 °C...+55 °C
Ambient temperature during storage -25 °C...+70 °C
IP rating IP54

Design
Mechanical design
Design of the housing separated version, sensor separated
...Material
....Housing
Material Polycarbonate (PC)
...Dimensions
Internal diameter of the protective tube 6 mm
Display and controls

Display with display
Power supply
Electrical
Voltage type AC
Nominal voltage, AC 24 V
Supply voltage, AC 12 V...30 V
Nominal frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Power consumption effective power 0.15 W
Power consumption apparent power 0.15 VA
Battery lifetime (typical) 16 a
Communication
Interface for communication RS 485
Protocol M-Bus
Page 174 of 709

s
General
Supplier Siemens
Brand name SITRANS FUE950
Type designation SITRANS FUE950 Custody transfer approved energy calculator, for use
with flow meters of type FUS380, FUE380, MAG 8000, FS220 and MAG
5000/6000 transmitter. Suitable for thermal energy measurement of liquids
for applications in district heating and chiller plants.
Order number 7ME34802AC353DQ0
Net weight 2.5 kg
Slogan Cost-effective flow solution for heating & cooling.

Measuring principle Temperature resistance measurement
Input
Measurand Power
Digital input
Input voltage, DC (maximum) 3V
Internal resistance 2,200 kOhm
Pulse duration at pulse input (minimum) 10 ms
Signal frequency at pulse intput (maximum) 8 Hz
Measuring range
Volume flow rate (maximum) 360 m³/h
Flow velocity (maximum) 5 m/s
Sensor type
...Resistance thermometer
Connection technology 2-wire system, 4-wire system
Sensor according to DIN EN 60751 Pt500
Output
Current output
Signal range 4 ... 20 mA
Failure signal (minimum) 3.5 mA
Failure signal (maximum) 22.6 mA
Output voltage 10 V...30 V
Load (maximum) 800 Ohm
Digital output
...Frequency output
Pulse-pause-ratio 50 %
Signal frequency 0 Hz...100 Hz
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy, relative 0.5 %
Process temperature -20 °C...+190 °C
Page 175 of 709
s
Ambient temperature during operation 0 °C...+55 °C
Ambient temperature during storage -25 °C...+70 °C
IP rating IP54

Design
Mechanical design
Design of the housing separated version, sensor separated
Nominal size G1/2"
...Material
....Housing
Material Polycarbonate (PC)
....Miscellaneous
Material of the thermowell Stainless steel
Material number of the thermowell according to DIN EN 1.4571
10027-2
Material number of the thermowell according to AISI 316Ti
...Dimensions
Outer diameter of the sensor jacket 6 mm
Outer diameter of the protective tube 11 mm
Internal diameter of the protective tube 6 mm
Length of the protective tube 120 mm
Length of the temperature-responsive part 40 mm
Length of the connection cable 5m
Display and controls

Display with display
Power supply
Electrical
Voltage type AC
Nominal voltage, AC 24 V
Supply voltage, AC 12 V...30 V
Nominal frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Power consumption effective power 0.15 W
Power consumption apparent power 0.15 VA
Battery lifetime (typical) 16 a
Communication
Interface for communication RS 485
Protocol M-Bus

Page 176 of 709
Creation date: 01/25/2021 Page 10 of 11
s
Page 177 of 709

Creation date: 01/25/2021 Page 11 of 11
Meters and Energy Cost Allocation
M-bus Level converter 60

WTV531-GA5060
The level converter WTV531-GA5060 is an interface between M-bus meters and

reader systems. PC software ACT531 reads the data locally or via the Internet
using an optional web server.
● Connect up to 60 M-bus devices (max. 60 simply M-bus loads)
● Use up to six level converters on one M-bus network with a max. of 360 simple
M-bus loads
● Local data read out with the ACT531 PC software via USB or the
RS-232 interface
● Remote read out via M-bus web server
● Local data read out via a PXC device via the RS-232 interface
● Reads a max. 1,000 logical devices on a level converter network
● Supply voltage AC/DC 24 V
A6V10844290_en--_b Smart Infrastructure

2019-10-21 Page 178 of 709
Use
The level converter is the communications interface to read up to
60 M-bus devices (simple M-bus loads).
The data is read out:
● Locally with the ACT531 PC software via USB
● Locally with the ACT531 PC software via the RS-232 interface
● Via the M-bus web server WTV534.., WTV676..
● Via Desigo CC
Up to six level converters can be connected in parallel to a M-bus web server WTV676..
(Master) on a M-bus network.
Up to 60 M-bus devices can be connected to each level converter WTV531... The level
converter can be used:
● As individual components on a M-bus network.
● To extend a M-bus network by up to six level converters connected in parallel.
You can also use the level converter at your own risk as an interface to suitable software and
devices by third-party manufacturers.
The level converter is protected against short circuits.
NOTICE
We recommend using a DC 24 V power supply to ensure a stable signal.
2
Smart Infrastructure A6V10844290_en--_b
Page 179 of 709 2019-10-21
Functions
Operating modes
The data can be read in different ways.
Local data read out with the ACT531 software via the USB connection
The level converter is used as the communication interface between M-bus devices and a
laptop using the ACT531 software. The ACT531 software can read a max. of 1,000 logical
devices.
The level converter is operated as the master. The data is read locally via the USB
connection.
A Level converter as master

B Laptop with ACT531 software
Local data read out using the ACT531 PC software via the RS-232 interface
The level converter can also be connected to a laptop via a RS-232 interface.
B
A
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
M-Bus A B C
SLAVE
WEV531-GA5060
USB Activity
TXD
RXD
M-Bus Error
M-Bus Ready
Power
M-Bus MASTER Vin

LC
VA VB
(6) (6) (6) (6) (7) (7) (7) (7) (8) (9)

B Laptop with ACT531 software
3
Page 180 of 709 2019-10-21
Remote read out via M-bus web server
The level converter is used as the communication interface between M-bus devices and a
M-bus web server.
The master level converter WTV531(A) is connected to a M-bus web server WTV676.. via
the RS-232 interface (terminals A, B, C).
The following slave level converters (B) can be connected via the M-bus slave connection.
The data can be read via the web server from anywhere on the Internet.
A maximum of 250 devices can be read via M-bus web server WTV676...
B Level converter as slave
NOTICE
The level converter is connected as a slave (B) to the web server (A) (terminals M1M2 of
the web server) if the firmware version of the web server WTV676.. is less than
SIE.WTV676_WI-2.29_FW-3.0-17-2.6.
4
Page 181 of 709 2019-10-21
Local data read out with Desigo CC via the RS-232 interface
The TX Open module integrates M-bus devices via a RS-232 interface to the Desigo CC
building management platform.
Additional information on the Desigo CC management platform is available in the
engineering guide 'Desigo TM TX Open, TX M-bus', document CM110572. See Section
"Product documentation [➙ 12]".
Desigo CC
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
M-Bus A B C
SLAVE
WEV531-GA5060
USB Activity
TXD
RXD
M-Bus Error
M-Bus Ready
Power
M-Bus MASTER Vin

LC
VA VB
TXI2.OPEN
(6) (6) (6) (6) (7) (7) (7) (7) (8) (9)
The level converter can be used in various ways.

Up to 60 M-bus devices can be connected to each level converter WTV531...
5
Page 182 of 709 2019-10-21
Level converter as individual component
The level converter can be used as an individual component on one M-bus network with up
to 60 devices.
Level converter to extend a M-bus network

The level converter extends a M-bus network with up to six level converters connected in
parallel.
It is connected with a serial connection to the master level converter and in parallel to other
level converters.
A maximum of six level converters can be integrated in parallel and connected to a M-bus
web server WTV676... A maximum of five level converters can be connected in parallel to a
master level converter WTV531.
A maximum of 360 M-bus loads or 1,000 logical devices can be read via the master level
converter.

B Level converter as slave
6
Page 183 of 709 2019-10-21
Indicators
The level converter has six LEDs on the front side for indicating the
operating state.
USB activity
The LED indicates the USB interface connection state.
● Flashes 2 x -> The device is ready to connect to a PC using a mini USB-B cable.
● Flashes 5 x -> The device is connected to a PC and correctly recognized by it.
TXD
The LED indicates the transmission state on the M-bus master (terminals 6 and 7).
● On -> Data transmitting.
● Off -> No data transmission.
RXD
The LED indicates the receive state on the M-bus master (terminals 6 and 7).
● On -> Data is being received.
● Off -> No data is being received.
M-bus error
The LED indicates the state of the M-bus power supply.
● On -> Bus overload. (short circuit or too many devices on the bus).
● Off -> No faults recognized.
M-bus ready
The LED indicates that bus power is correct and there are no anomalies.
● On -> Bus power is properly polled and sufficient for trouble-free operation.
● Off -> Bus power is insufficient for trouble-free operation.
Power
The LED indicates the state of the level converter power supply.
● On -> The device power supply is correct.
● Off -> Device power is not correct or unavailable.
7
Page 184 of 709 2019-10-21
Technical design
Topology
The M-bus permits various network topologies. The devices can be connected to the level
converter in a line, bus, star, or tree topology, or a combination thereof.
Ring topology is not permitted.
Bus cable polarity is not relevant, simplifying installation.
Line topology Bus topology
Star topology Tree topology
8
Page 185 of 709 2019-10-21
Combination of topologies
Ring topology
9
Page 186 of 709 2019-10-21
M-bus
Address
M-bus uses two types of addresses to recognize devices:
● Primary addressing: Up to 250 primary addresses can be assigned to a M-bus system.
The primary address is normally assigned during device commissioning. Pure primary
addressing is not possible if more than 250 devices are read.
● Secondary addressing: Secondary addressing consists of 8 bytes and permits the
assignment of any number. In the default setting, the secondary address for a device
normally matches the serial number issued by the device manufacturer. The assignment
prevents address conflicts on the bus.
Bus expansion
Plant type Maximum Total cable Cable cross Number of Max. transmission
distance length section devices rate
(slaves)
Small residential 350 m 1000 m 0.8 mm2 250 9600 baud
buildings
Large residential 350 m 4000 m 0.8 mm2 250 2400 baud
buildings
64 9600 baud
Small developments 1000 m 4000 m 0.8 mm2 64 2400 baud
Large developments 3000 m* 5000 m 1.5 mm2 64 2400 baud
2
Direct vicinity 5000 m* 7000 m 1.5 mm 16 300 baud
2
Point-to-point 10000 m* 10000 m 1.5 mm 1 300 baud
connection
*Shielded cabling required at a distance in excess of 1,000 m (see EN13757-2 appendix E).
Signal specification
M-bus Condition Minimum Typical Maximum Measuring unit

Number simple WTV531-GA5060 0 60
M-bus loads per
segment
Transfer rate CSegment ≤ 382 nF 300 2400 9600 baud
Bus power (Master) WTV531-GA5060 30 39 40 R
Bus current (master) WTV531-GA5060 0 90 mA
10
Page 187 of 709 2019-10-21
Connection terminals
The device as the following connection terminals / LEDs.
A Power supply AC/DC 24 V

Terminals (8) and (9)
B Connections for M-bus meters
and
Connections for following level converters, if
this one is used as the master.
C Non-isolated connections to connect to a M-
bus web server
and / or
Connections to connect the prior level
converter, if this level converter is used as a
slave.
D Non-isolated serial interface RS232 to
connect to a laptop or M-bus master
A = TX
B = RX
C = GND
Terminals (3), (4) and (5)
E Laptop connection
Mini-USB-B
F LEDs
11
Page 188 of 709 2019-10-21
Type summary
Order information
Description Order number Type

Level converter to power a S55563-F145 WTV531-GA5060
max. 60 simple M-bus loads
Product inserts
Mounting instructions for the level converter are included in the following languages:
Bulgarian, German, English, Finnish, French, Greek, Italian, Croatian, Lithuanian, Dutch,
Norwegian, Polish, Slovakian, Slovenian, Spanish, Czech, Turkish, and Hungarian.
The following products are available for reading data:
Description Order number Type

M-bus web server for remote meter data reading S55563-F144 WTV534-0B4022
M-bus web server for remote meter data reading S55563-F150 WTV676-HB6035
Read software for local data reading at the level converter --- ACT531
Product documentation
Topic Title Document ID

Device mounting, wiring, Mounting instructions, level converter WTV531.. A6V10844308
connecting peripheral devices.
Engineering, commissioning, User manual level converter WTV531.. and Web A6V10844341
operation, and troubleshooting. Server WTV534..
Engineering, commissioning, User's guide M-bus web server WTV676-HB6035, A6V11157985
operation, and troubleshooting M-bus level converter WTX631-GA0090
M-bus level converter WTV531-GA5060
RF converter WTX660-E05060
Engineering instructions Desigo TM TX Open, TX M-bus CM110572
Related documents such as environmental declarations, CE declarations, etc., can be

downloaded at the following Internet address:
http://siemens.com/bt/download
12
Page 189 of 709 2019-10-21
Notes
Safety
CAUTION
National safety regulations

Failure to comply with national safety regulations may result in personal injury and property
damage.
● Observe national provisions and comply with the appropriate safety regulations.
Disposal
The device is considered an electronic device for disposal in accordance

with the European Guidelines and may not be disposed of as domestic
garbage.
● Dispose of the device through channels provided for this purpose.
Warranty service
Technical data on specific applications are valid only together with Siemens products listed
under "Equipment combinations". Siemens rejects any and all warranties in the event that
third-party products are used.
13
Page 190 of 709 2019-10-21
Technical data
Power supply
Operating voltage AC/DC 24 V +/- 10 %
AC frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 3 W + 0.07 W for each connected M-bus device
Maximum power consumption 12 W, 12 VA
Internal fuse PTC resistance and varistor
Fusing of supply lines Fusible links Max. 10 A, slow
Circuit breaker max. 13 A, type B, C, D per EN
60898
or
Power supply with current limitation at 10 A
Pins
M-bus master Connections for M-bus meters
(terminals 6 and 7) and
Connections for following level converters, if this one is used as the
master.
M-bus slave Non-isolated connections to connect to a M-bus web server
(terminals 1 and 2) and / or
Connections to connect the prior level converter, if this level converter is
used as a slave.
Mini-USB-B To connect to a laptop with installed ACT531 software
Interface
USB (2.0) Non-isolated plug: Mini-USB-B
Data rate: 1.5 Mbps and 12 Mbps.
Max. cable length: 3 m
RS-232 Galvanically isolated connection with a laptop/data logger
Max. cable length: 3 m
● Terminal 3 [A]: TX laptop/data logger receiving line
● Terminal 4 [B]: RX laptop/data logger transmission line
● Terminal 5 [C]: GND interface reference voltage
M-bus
Reference standard EN13757-2 (physical layer)
Baud rate 300 bps…9600 bps
M-bus USB insulation 1kV AC
Max. number of M-bus devices per 60 (simple M-bus loads)
level converter
Max. number of M-bus devices per 360 simple M-bus loads or 1,000 logical M-bus meters
level converter network
Max. number of level converters per 1 master level converter and 5 slave level converters connected in parallel
network or 6 level converters connected in parallel to a M-bus web server
WTV676..
Bus power Minimum 30 V
Maximum 40 V
Bus current Maximum 90 mA
Protection against short circuits Yes
14
Page 191 of 709 2019-10-21
Directives and standards
Product standards EN 62368-1
Information Technology Equipment Safety
Electromagnetic compatibility For residential and industrial environments
EU conformity (CE) A5W00022156 *)
Environmental compatibility
The product environmental declaration A6V10922887 *) contains data on environmentally compatible product
design and assessments (RoHS compliance, materials composition, packaging, environmental benefit, disposal).
*) Documents can be downloaded at http://siemens.com/bt/download.
IP class IP20 per EN60529
Protection class III as per EN 62368-1
Ambient conditions
Operation as per EN 60721-3-3
Temperature -10…+55° C
Air humidity 5...95 % r.h.
Transportation as per EN 60721-3-2
Temperature -25..+65 °C
Air humidity 5...95 %
Storage as per EN 60721-3-1
Temperature -25..+65 °C
Air humidity 5...95 %
Materials and colors

Housing PC + ASA, RAL 9010 (white)
Dimensions
Length x Width x Height 110x71x62 mm (including terminals)
Weight
Level converter with mounting 0.166 kg
instructions
Packaging 0.055 kg
Mounting
Mounting type On 35mm DIN rails (EN60715)
15
Page 192 of 709 2019-10-21
Dimensions
H = 62 mm

Global Headquarters
Theilerstrasse 1a
CH-6300 Zug
Tel. +41 58 724 2424
16
Page 193 of 709 2019-10-21
Document ID A6V10844290_en--_b
Edition 2019-10-21
HIGH ACCURACY DUCT ALL PURPOSE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
82.5 mm
3.25" 52.0 mm
2.05"
69.8 mm
2.75"
Various Probe Lengths

See Specifications
76.2 mm 6 mm
3.00" (0.236")
304 Series S/S Probe

Foam Gasket
0.5" NPT
HATXAP SERIES
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

The HATXAP utilizes a precision sensor encapsulated
in a 6 mm (0.236”) OD, 304 series stainless steel SENSOR TYPE 1000 Ω platinum RTD
probe and is available in various lengths (see SENSOR ACCURACY RTD Class A: ±0.15°C @ 0°C
ordering chart). All probes provide excellent heat (ACCURACIES LISTED ARE APPLICABLE RTD 1/3 DIN: ±0.1°C @ 0°C
TO SENSING ELEMENT ONLY) RTD 1/10 DIN: ±0.03°C @ 0°C
transfer, fast response and resistance to moisture
PROBE SENSING RANGE -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
penetration. A transmitter that provides a high
accuracy signal with excellent long term stability, WIRE MATERIAL PVC insulated, parallel bonded, 22 AWG
low hysteresis and fast response is available with PROBE MATERIAL 304 series stainless steel
various ranges is provided. PROBE DIAMETER 6 mm (0.236”)
STANDARD LENGTHS 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, and 450 mm
TYPICAL INSTALLATION (2”, 4”, 6”, 8”, 12”, and 18”)
For complete installation and wiring details, OUTPUT SIGNAL 4-20 mA current loop, 0-5 Vdc, or 0-10 Vdc (factory configured)
please refer to the product installation TRANSMITTER ACCURACY ±0.1% of span, including linearity
instructions. OUTPUT DRIVE @ 24 VDC Current: 600 mA maximum
Voltage: 10 KΩ minimum
In duct applications the probes are installed in POWER SUPPLY 0-5 Vdc: 10-35 Vdc or 10-28 Vdc
0-10 Vdc: 15-35 Vdc or 15-28 Vdc
the side of the duct to monitor a single point 4-20 mA: 15-35 Vdc (loop-powered) or 22-28 Vdc
temperature within the duct. Select a probe length
CURRENT CONSUMPTION Current: 20 mA
that allows the probe to span the duct width. Install Voltage: 5 mA
the probe in a straight section of duct at a suitable MAXIMUM CURRENT (VOLTAGE) 5 mA nominal
distance downstream from any heating, cooling,
MAXIMUM OUTPUT (VOLTAGE) Limited to <5.5 Vdc or 0-5 Vdc, <10.5 for 0-10 Vdc
or humidification devices. The enclosure provides
INPUT VOLTAGE EFFECT Negligible over specified operating range
mounting tabs for ease of installation.
PROTECTION CIRCUITRY Reverse voltage protected and output limited
For immersion applications ensure the probe is AMBIENT OPERATING RANGE -40 to 50°C (-40 to 122°F), 5 to 95 %RH non-condensing
installed in the appropriate length thermowell for ENCLOSURE A: ABS, UL94-V0, IP65 (NEMA 4X)
the pipe size. Thermal conductive compound should E: Same as A, with thread adapter (1/2” NPT to M16), and cable gland fitting
be added inside the thermowell to provide optimum TERMINATION Screw terminal block (14 to 22 AWG)
thermal transfer. APPROVALS CE
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN Canada
For immersion applications, a T2 Series thermowell NOTE: This product is factory calibrated and any field adjustment will void the warranty.
is required. When using with a T1 series thermowell
an adapter will be required (#0201001092).
MOUNTING STYLES
(#0201001092)
DUCT MOUNTING THERMOWELL MOUNTING T1-AP THERMOWELL ADAPTER THERMOWELL PLACEMENT
GREYSTONE HAS AN ISO 9001 REGISTERED QUALITY SYSTEM Page 194 of 709
ACCESSORIES - INCLUDED WITH E ENCLOSURE OPTION
CABLE GLAND FITTING THREAD ADAPTER 1/2” NPT TO M16
WIRING INFORMATION
TERMINAL FUNCTION
PWR Power Supply

OUT Analog Output
COM Common
NEG
SEN Temperature Sensor Input
EXC
ORDERING PART NUMBER

PRODUCT HATXAP High Accuracy All Purpose Duct/Immersion Temperature Transmitter HATXAP
ENCLOSURE A ABS, with hinged and gasketed cover
E Same as A, with thread adapter and cable gland fitting
SENSOR 18 1000 Ω Platinum, 3 wire, IEC 751, 385 Alpha, thin film, Class A
48 1000 Ω Platinum, 3 wire, IEC 751, 385 Alpha, thin film, 1/3 DIN
22 1000 Ω Platinum, 3 wire, IEC 751, 385 Alpha, thin film, 1/10 DIN
PROBE LENGTH A 50mm (2”)
B 100mm (4”)
C 150mm (6”)
D 200mm (8”)
E 300mm (12”)
F 450mm (18”)
OUTPUT A 4-20 mA
D 0-5 Vdc
E 0-10 Vdc
SCALED RANGE 001 0 to 35°C (32 to 95°F)
002 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
003 0 to 100°C (32 to 212°F)
006 -50 to 50°C (-58 to 122°F)
* Additional ranges available
NOTE: Greystone Energy Systems, Inc. reserves the right to make design modifications without prior notice.
Greystone Energy Systems, Inc. Ph: +1 (506) 853-3057 Fax: +1 (506) 853-6014
150 English Drive, Moncton, North America: 1-800-561-5611
New Brunswick, Canada E1E 4G7 E-mail: mail@greystoneenergy.com
PRINTED IN CANADA
Page 195 of 709
Copyright © Greystone Energy Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved www.greystoneenergy.com PS-HATXAPXXX-02 04/20
Data sheet
Cisco public
Cisco 350 Series Managed

Switches
© 2020 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Page 196 of 709 Page 1 of 32
Contents
Cisco 350 Series Switches 3
Business applications 4
Features and benefits 4
Product specifications 9
Ordering information 29
A powerful, affordable foundation for your small business network 32
Cisco Capital 32
For more information 32

Easy-to-Use Managed Switches That Provide the Ideal Combination of Features and
Affordability
To stay ahead in a competitive marketplace, businesses need to make every dollar count. That means getting
the most value from your technology investments, but it also means making sure that employees have fast,
reliable access to the business tools and information they need. Every minute an employee waits for an
unresponsive application and every minute your network is down has an effect on your profits. The importance
of maintaining a strong and dependable business network only grows as your business adds more employees,
applications, and network complexity.
When your business needs advanced security and features but value is still a top consideration, you’re ready for
the new generation of Cisco® Small Business managed switches: the Cisco 350 Series (Figure 1).
Figure 1.
Cisco 350 Series Managed Switches
Cisco 350 Series Switches

The Cisco 350 Series, part of the Cisco Small Business line of network solutions, is a portfolio of affordable
managed switches that provides a reliable foundation for your business network. These switches deliver the
features you need to improve the availability of your critical business applications, protect your sensitive
information, and optimize your network bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively. Easy
to set up and use, the Cisco 350 Series provides the ideal combination of affordability and capabilities for small
businesses and helps you create a more efficient, better-connected workforce.
The Cisco 350 Series is a broad portfolio of fixed-configuration managed Ethernet switches. Models are
available with 8 to 48 ports of Fast Ethernet and 10 to 52 ports of Gigabit Ethernet connectivity, providing
optimal flexibility to create exactly the right network foundation for your business. However, unlike other small
business switching solutions that provide managed network capabilities only in the costliest models, all Cisco
350 Series Switches support the advanced security management capabilities and network features you need to
support business-class data, voice, security, and wireless technologies. At the same time, these switches are
simple to deploy and configure, allowing you to take advantage of the managed network services your
business needs.

Business applications
Whether you need a basic high-performance network to connect employee computers or a solution to deliver
data, voice, and video services, the Cisco 350 Series offers a solution to meet your needs. Possible deployment
scenarios include:
● Secure desktop connectivity: Cisco 350 Series Switches can simply and securely connect employees
working in small offices with each other and with all of the servers, printers, and other devices they use.
High performance and reliable connectivity help speed file transfers and data processing, improve
network uptime, and keep your employees connected and productive.
● Secure wireless connectivity: With its advanced security features, Power over Ethernet, Auto
Smartports, QoS, VLAN, and access control features, the Cisco 350 Series Switches are the perfect
foundation to add business-grade wireless to a business network.
● Unified communications: As a managed network solution, the Cisco 350 Series provides the
performance and advanced traffic-handling intelligence you need to deliver all communications and data
over a single network. Cisco offers a complete portfolio of IP telephony and other unified
communications products designed for businesses. Cisco 350 Series Switches have been rigorously
tested to help ensure easy integration and full compatibility with these and other products, providing a
complete business solution.
● Highly secure guest connectivity: Cisco 350 Series Switches let you extend highly secure network
connectivity to guests in a variety of settings, such as a hotel, an office waiting room, or any other area
open to nonemployee users. Using powerful but easy-to-configure security and traffic segmentation
capabilities, you can isolate your vital business traffic from guest services and keep guests’ network
sessions private from each other.
Features and benefits

Cisco 350 Series switches provide the advanced feature set that growing businesses require and that high-
bandwidth applications and technologies demand. These switches can improve the availability of your critical
applications, protect your business information, and optimize your network bandwidth to more effectively
deliver information and support applications. The switches provide the following benefits.
Ease of management and deployment

Cisco 350 Series switches are designed to be easy to use and manage by commercial customers or the
partners that serve them. They feature:
● Cisco Smart Network Application (SNA) is an innovative network-level monitoring and management tool
embedded in Cisco 100 to 500 Series switches. It can discover network topology, display link status,
monitor events, apply configurations, and upgrade software images across multiple switches in the
network.
● The FindIT Network Manager and Probe are designed to manage Cisco 100 to 500 Series switches,
routers, and wireless access points. The Manager lets you proactively manage the network instead of
just reacting to events. FindIT Network Management is the perfect addition to your business network. For
more information, visit https://www.cisco.com/go/findit.

● The Cisco FindIT Network Discovery Utility works through a simple toolbar on your web browser to
discover Cisco devices on the network and display basic device information, inventory, and new
firmware updates to aid in the configuration and speed the deployment of Cisco Small Business
products. For more information, visit https://www.cisco.com/go/findit.
● The USB port on the front panel of the switch enables easy image and configuration transfer for faster
deployment or upgrade.
● Simple-to-use graphical interfaces reduce the time required to deploy, troubleshoot, and manage the
network and allow you to support sophisticated capabilities without increasing IT head count.
● The switches also support Textview, a full Command-Line Interface (CLI) option for partners that
prefer it.
● Using Auto Smartports intelligence, the switch can detect a network device connected to any port and
automatically configure the optimal security, Quality of Service (QoS), and availability on that port.
● Cisco Discovery Protocol discovers Cisco devices and allows devices to share critical configuration
information, simplifying network setup and integration.
● Support for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) allows you to set up and manage your
switches and other Cisco devices remotely from a network management station, improving IT workflow
and mass configurations.
High reliability and resiliency

In a growing business where availability 24 hours a day, 7 days a week is critical, you need to assure that
employees can always access the data and resources they need. The Cisco 350 Series supports dual images,
allowing you to perform software upgrades without having to take the network offline or worry about the
network going down during the upgrade.
Strong security
Cisco 350 Series switches provide the advanced security features you need to protect your business data and
keep unauthorized users off the network:
● Embedded Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption protects management data traveling to and from the
switch.
● Extensive Access Control Lists (ACLs) restrict sensitive portions of the network to keep out unauthorized
users and guard against network attacks.
● Guest VLANs let you provide Internet connectivity to nonemployee users while isolating critical business
services from guest traffic.
● Support for advanced network security applications such as IEEE 802.1X port security tightly limits
access to specific segments of your network. Web-based authentication provides a consistent interface
to authenticate all types of host devices and operating systems, without the complexity of deploying IEEE
802.1X clients on each endpoint.
● Advanced defense mechanisms, including dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection, IP
Source Guard, and Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) snooping, detect and block deliberate
network attacks. Combinations of these protocols are also referred to as IP-MAC port binding (IPMB).

● IPv6 First Hop Security extends the advanced threat protection to IPv6. This comprehensive security
suite includes ND inspection, RA guard, DHCPv6 guard, and neighbor binding integrity check, providing
unparalleled protection against a vast range of address spoofing and man-in-the-middle attacks on IPv6
networks.
● Time-based ACLs and port operation restrict access to the network during predesignated times such as
business hours.
● Uniform MAC address-based security can be applied automatically to mobile users as they roam
between wireless access points.
● Secure Core Technology (SCT) helps ensure that the switch is able to process management traffic in the
face of a Denial-of-Service (DoS) attack.
● Private VLAN Edge (PVE) provides Layer 2 isolation between devices on the same VLAN.
● Storm control can be applied to broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast traffic.
● Protection of management sessions occurs using RADIUS, TACACS+, and local database authentication
as well as secure management sessions over SSL, SSH, and SNMPv3.
● DoS attack prevention maximizes network uptime in the presence of an attack.
Power over Ethernet

Cisco 350 Series Switches are available with up to 48 PoE ports. This capability simplifies advanced technology
deployments such as IP telephony, wireless, and IP surveillance by allowing you to connect and power network
endpoints over a single Ethernet cable. With no need to install separate power supplies for IP phones or
wireless access points, you can take advantage of advanced communications technologies more quickly and at
a lower cost. Models support 802.3af PoE, 802.3at PoE+, and 60 Watt PoE.
Multigigabit performance
Network needs are changing quickly. Thanks to evolving wireless standards and the rising number of wireless
devices, keeping up with data rates and growing traffic can be a challenge. Your traditional Ethernet
infrastructure can support speeds up to 1 Gigabit per second (Gbps), but competing today requires much more
capacity. One option is completely replacing your older cabling infrastructure and upgrading your hardware. But
wouldn’t it be better to increase network speed and traffic capacity in a way that’s quick, inexpensive, and
efficient?
Cisco’s new Multigigabit Ethernet switches offer just that: an easy-to-deploy, budget-friendly solution that
allows you to increase network speed and bandwidth using your existing cables. By partnering with other
industry leaders to form the NBASE-T Alliance, Cisco uses NBASE-T technology to help you get more out of
your existing infrastructure. Save time and money by avoiding upgrades and extending the life of your installed
cable plants. And discover the benefits of meeting consumer demand for increased bandwidth and speeds
without a large initial investment.
Multigigabit Ethernet technology uses capabilities in your existing cabling infrastructure to meet bandwidth
requirements and provide up to five times the performance. The technology enables intermediate data rates of
2.5 and 5 Gbps to ease the jump between traditional rates of 1 Gbps and 10 Gbps. These intermediate rates
run on most installed cables and preserve older UTP wiring, which is good for 802.11ac wireless LAN
applications.

The technology also supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) forms, including PoE+ and 60W PoE. Cisco
Multigigabit Ethernet switches help you avoid having to run multiple cables between switches and access points
and let your networks welcome next-generation traffic speeds and data rates.
Networkwide automatic voice deployment

Using a combination of Cisco Discovery Protocol, LLDP-MED, Auto Smartports, and Voice Services Discovery
Protocol (or VSDP, a unique Cisco protocol), customers can deploy an end-to-end voice network dynamically.
The switches in the network automatically converge around a single voice VLAN and QoS parameters and then
propagate them out to the phones on the ports, where they are discovered. For example, automated voice
VLAN capabilities let you plug any IP phone (including third-party phones) into your IP telephony network and
receive an immediate dial tone. The switch automatically configures the device with the right VLAN and QoS
parameters to prioritize voice traffic.
IPv6 support
As the IP address scheme evolves to accommodate a growing number of network devices, the Cisco 350
Series can support the transition to the next generation of networking and operating systems such as Windows
8, Vista, and Linux. These switches continue to support previous-generation IPv4, allowing you to evolve to the
new IPv6 standard at your own pace and helping ensure that your current network will continue to support your
business applications in the future. Cisco 350 Series switches have successfully completed rigorous IPv6
testing and have received the USGv6 and IPv6 Gold certification.
Advanced layer 3 traffic management

The Cisco 350 Series enables a more advanced set of traffic management capabilities to help growing
businesses organize their networks more effectively and efficiently. For example, the switches provide static
LAN Layer 3 routing, allowing you to segment your network into workgroups and communicate across VLANs
without degrading application performance.
With these capabilities, you can boost the efficiency of your network by offloading internal traffic-handling tasks
from your router and allowing it to manage primarily external traffic and security.
Power efficiency
The Cisco 350 Series integrates a variety of power-saving features across all models, providing the industry’s
most extensive energy-efficient switching portfolio. These switches are designed to conserve energy by
optimizing power use, which helps protects the environment and reduce your energy costs. They provide an
eco-friendly network solution without compromising performance. Cisco 350 Series switches feature:
● Support for the Energy Efficient Ethernet (IEEE 802.3az) standard, which reduces energy consumption by
monitoring the amount of traffic on an active link and putting the link into a sleep state during quiet
periods
● The latest Application-Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs)
● Automatic power shutoff on ports when a link is down
● LEDs that can be turned off to save power
● Embedded intelligence to adjust signal strength based on the length of the connecting cable

Expansion ports
The Cisco 350 Series provides more ports per Gigabit Ethernet switch than traditional switch models, giving you
more flexibility to connect and empower your business. Gigabit Ethernet models offer 28 to 52 ports to give you
more value, versus the 24-port or 48-port varieties with four shared ports that’s common in the market. The
Cisco 350 Series also offers small form-factor pluggable (SFP) expansion slots that give you the option to add
fiber-optic or Gigabit Ethernet uplink connectivity to the switch. With the ability to increase the connectivity
range of the switches, you have more flexibility to design your network around your unique business
environment and to easily connect switches on different floors or across the business.
Peace of mind and investment protection
Cisco 350 Series switches offer the reliable performance and peace of mind you expect from a Cisco switch.
When you invest in the Cisco 350 Series, you gain the benefits of:
● Limited lifetime warranty with Next-Business-Day (NBD) advance replacement (where available;
otherwise same day ship).
● A solution that has been rigorously tested to help ensure optimal network uptime to keep employees
connected to primary resources and productive.
● A solution designed and tested to easily and fully integrate with other Cisco voice, unified
communications, security, and networking products as part of a comprehensive technology platform for
your business.
● Complimentary software updates for bug fixes for the warranty term. To download software updates, go
to https://software.cisco.com/download/home.
● Telephone technical support at no charge for the first 12 months following the date of purchase.
● Product warranty terms and other information applicable to Cisco products are available at
https://www.cisco.com/go/warranty.
● Cisco Small Business products are supported by professionals in Cisco Small Business Support Center
locations worldwide who are specifically trained to understand your needs. The Cisco Small Business
Support Community, an online forum, enables you to collaborate with your peers and reach Cisco
technical experts for support information.
Cisco limited lifetime hardware warranty

Cisco 350 Series switches offer a limited lifetime hardware warranty with NBD advance replacement
(where available; otherwise same day ship) and a limited lifetime warranty for fans and power supplies.
In addition, Cisco offers software application updates for bug fixes for the warranty term and telephone
technical support at no charge for the first 12 months following the date of purchase. To download software
updates, go to https://software.cisco.com/download/home.
Product warranty terms and other information applicable to Cisco products are available at
https://www.cisco.com/go/warranty.

World-class service and support
Your time is valuable, especially when you have a problem affecting your business. Cisco 350 Series switches
are backed by Cisco SMARTnet® Total Care™ which provides affordable peace-of-mind coverage. Delivered by
Cisco and backed by your trusted partner, this comprehensive service includes software updates and access to
the Cisco Support Center, and it extends technical service to three years.
Cisco SMB products are supported by professionals in the Cisco Support Center, a dedicated resource for
small business customers and networks, with locations worldwide that are specifically trained to understand
your needs. You also have access to extensive technical and product information through the Cisco Support
Community, an online forum that enables you to collaborate with your peers and reach Cisco technical experts
for support information.
Product specifications
Table 1 gives the product specifications for the Cisco 350 Series Switches.
Table 1. Product specifications
Feature Description
Performance
Switching capacity and Model Name Capacity in Millions of Packets per Switching Capacity in
forwarding rate Second (mpps) (64-byte packets) Gigabits per Second (Gbps)
All switches are wire speed
and nonblocking SF350-08 1.19 1.6
SF352-08 4.17 5.6
SF352-08P 4.17 5.6
SF352-08MP 4.17 5.6
SF350-24 9.52 12.8
SF350-24P 9.52 12.8
SF350-24MP 9.52 12.8
SF350-48 13.09 17.6
SF350-48P 13.09 17.6
SF350-48MP 13.09 17.6
SG350-8PD 46.13 62.0
SG350-10 14.88 20.0
SG350-10P 14.88 20.0
SG350-10MP 14.88 20.0
SG355-10MP 14.88 20.0

Feature Description
SG350-10SFP 14.88 20.0
SG350-20 29.76 40.0
SG350-28 41.66 56.0
SG350-28P 41.66 56.0
SG350-28MP 41.66 56.0
SG350-28SFP 41.66 56.0
SG350-52 77.38 104.0
SG350-52P 77.38 104.0
SG350-52MP 77.38 104.0
Layer 2 Switching
Spanning Tree Protocol Standard 802.1d Spanning Tree support

Fast convergence using 802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree [RSTP]), enabled by default
Multiple Spanning Tree instances using 802.1s (MSTP); 8 instances are supported
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) and Rapid PVST+ (RPVST+); 126 instances are
supported
Port grouping/link Support for IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
aggregation
● Up to 8 groups
● Up to 8 ports per group with 16 candidate ports for each (dynamic) 802.3ad link aggregation
VLAN Support for up to 4,094 VLANs simultaneously

Port-based and 802.1Q tag-based VLANs; MAC-based VLAN; protocol-based VLAN; IP
subnet-based VLAN,
Management VLAN
Private VLAN with promiscuous, isolated, and community port
Private VLAN Edge (PVE), also known as protected ports, with multiple uplinks
Guest VLAN; unauthenticated VLAN
Dynamic VLAN assignment via RADIUS server along with 802.1x client authentication
CPE VLAN
Voice VLAN Voice traffic is automatically assigned to a voice-specific VLAN and treated with
appropriate levels of QoS
Auto voice capabilities deliver networkwide zero-touch deployment of voice endpoints and
call control devices
Multicast TV VLAN Multicast TV VLAN allows the single multicast VLAN to be shared in the network while
subscribers remain in separate VLANs. This feature is also known as Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR)

Feature Description
VLAN Translation Support for VLAN One-to-One Mapping. In VLAN One-to-One Mapping, on an edge
interface C-VLANs are mapped to S-VLANs and the original C-VLAN tags are replaced by
the specified S-VLAN
Q-in-Q VLANs transparently cross a service provider network while isolating traffic among
customers
Selective Q-in-Q Selective Q-in-Q is an enhancement to the basic Q-in-Q feature and provides, per edge
interface, multiple mappings of different C-VLANs to separate S-VLANs
Selective Q-in-Q also allows configuring of Ethertype (TPID) of the S-VLAN tag
Layer 2 protocol tunneling over Q-in-Q is also supported
Generic VLAN Registration Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) and Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
Protocol (GVRP)/Generic (GARP) enable automatic propagation and configuration of VLANs in a bridged domain
Attribute Registration
Protocol (GARP)
Unidirectional Link Detection UDLD monitors physical connection to detect unidirectional links caused by incorrect
(UDLD) wiring or cable/port faults to prevent forwarding loops and blackholing of traffic in
switched networks
Dynamic Host Configuration Relay of DHCP traffic to DHCP server in different VLAN; works with DHCP Option 82
Protocol (DHCP) Relay at
Layer 2
Internet Group Management IGMP limits bandwidth-intensive multicast traffic to only the requesters; supports 2K
Protocol (IGMP) versions 1, multicast groups (source-specific multicasting is also supported)
2, and 3 snooping
IGMP Querier IGMP querier is used to support a Layer 2 multicast domain of snooping switches in the
absence of a multicast router
Head-Of-Line (HOL) HOL blocking prevention

blocking
Loopback Detection Loopback detection provides protection against loops by transmitting loop protocol
packets out of ports on which loop protection has been enabled. It operates independently
of STP
Layer 3
IPv4 routing Wirespeed routing of IPv4 packets

Up to 990 static routes and up to 128 IP interfaces
IPv6 routing Wirespeed routing of IPv6 packets
Layer 3 Interface Configuration of Layer 3 interface on physical port, LAG, VLAN interface, or loopback
interface
Classless Interdomain Support for classless interdomain routing

Routing (CIDR)
Policy-Based Routing (PBR) Flexible routing control to direct packets to different next hop based on IPv4 or IPv6 ACL

Feature Description
DHCP Server Switch functions as an IPv4 DHCP server serving IP addresses for multiple DHCP
pools/scopes
Support for DHCP options
DHCP relay at Layer 3 Relay of DHCP traffic across IP domains
User Datagram Protocol Relay of broadcast information across Layer 3 domains for application discovery or
(UDP) relay relaying of bootP/DHCP packets
Security
Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol SSH is a secure replacement for Telnet traffic. SCP also uses SSH. SSH v1 and v2 are
supported
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) SSL support: Encrypts all HTTPS traffic, allowing highly secure access to the browser-
based management GUI in the switch
IEEE 802.1X 802.1X: RADIUS authentication and accounting, MD5 hash; guest VLAN; unauthenticated
(Authenticator role) VLAN, single/multiple host mode and single/multiple sessions
Supports time-based 802.1X
Dynamic VLAN assignment
Web-based authentication Web based authentication provides network admission control through web browser to any
host devices and operating systems
STP Bridge Protocol Data A security mechanism to protect the network from invalid configurations. A port enabled
Unit (BPDU) Guard for BPDU Guard is shut down if a BPDU message is received on that port
STP Root Guard This prevents edge devices not in the network administrator’s control from becoming
Spanning Tree Protocol root nodes
STP loopback guard Provides additional protection against Layer 2 forwarding loops (STP loops)
DHCP snooping Filters out DHCP messages with unregistered IP addresses and/or from unexpected or
untrusted interfaces. This prevents rogue devices from behaving as DHCP Servers
IP Source Guard (IPSG) When IP Source Guard is enabled at a port, the switch filters out IP packets received from
the port if the source IP addresses of the packets have not been statically configured or
dynamically learned from DHCP snooping. This prevents IP Address Spoofing
Dynamic ARP Inspection The switch discards ARP packets from a port if there are no static or dynamic IP/MAC
(DAI) bindings or if there is a discrepancy between the source or destination addresses in the
ARP packet. This prevents man-in-the-middle attacks
IP/MAC/Port Binding (IPMB) The preceding features (DHCP Snooping, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection)
work together to prevent DOS attacks in the network, thereby increasing network
availability
Secure Core Technology Makes sure that the switch will receive and process management and protocol traffic no
(SCT) matter how much traffic is received
Secure Sensitive Data (SSD) A mechanism to manage sensitive data (such as passwords, keys, and so on) securely on
the switch, populating this data to other devices, and secure autoconfig. Access to view
the sensitive data as plaintext or encrypted is provided according to the user-configured
access level and the access method of the user

Feature Description
Trustworthy systems Trustworthy systems provide a highly secure foundation for Cisco products
Run-time defenses (Executable Space Protection [X-Space], Address Space Layout
Randomization [ASLR], Built-In Object Size Checking [BOSC])
Private VLAN Private VLAN provides security and isolation between switch ports, which helps ensure
that users cannot snoop on other users’ traffic; supports multiple uplinks
Layer 2 isolation Private PVE (also known as protected ports) provides Layer 2 isolation between devices in the
VLAN Edge (PVE) with same VLAN, supports multiple uplinks
community VLAN
Port security Ability to lock source MAC addresses to ports and limits the number of learned MAC
addresses
RADIUS/TACACS+ Supports RADIUS and TACACS authentication. Switch functions as a client
RADIUS accounting The RADIUS accounting functions allow data to be sent at the start and end of services,
indicating the amount of resources (such as time, packets, bytes, and so on) used during
the session
Storm control Broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast
DoS prevention Denial-Of-Service (DOS) attack prevention
Multiple user privilege levels Level 1, 7, and 15 privilege levels

in CLI
ACLs Support for up to 1K rules

Drop or rate limit based on source and destination MAC, VLAN ID or IPv4 or IPv6 address,
IPv6 flow label, protocol, port, Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)/IP precedence,
TCP/UDP source and destination ports, 802.1p priority, Ethernet type, Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP) packets, IGMP packets, TCP flag; ACL can be applied on both
ingress and egress sides
Time-based ACLs supported
Quality of Service
Priority levels 8 hardware queues
Scheduling Strict priority and Weighted Round-Robin (WRR)

Queue assignment based on DSCP and class of service (802.1p/CoS)
Class of service Port based; 802.1p VLAN priority based; IPv4/v6 IP precedence/Type of Service
(ToS)/DSCP based; Differentiated Services (DiffServ); classification and remarking ACLs,
trusted QoS
Queue assignment based on DSCP and class of service (802.1p/CoS)
Rate limiting Ingress policer; egress shaping and rate control; per VLAN, per port, and flow based;
2R3C policing
Congestion avoidance A TCP congestion avoidance algorithm is required to minimize and prevent global TCP
loss synchronization

Feature Description
Standards
Standards IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet, IEEE 802.3ab
1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet, IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol, IEEE
802.3z Gigabit Ethernet, IEEE 802.3x Flow Control, IEEE 802.1D (STP, GARP, and GVRP),
IEEE 802.1Q/p VLAN, IEEE 802.1w Rapid STP, IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP, IEEE 802.1X Port
Access Authentication, IEEE 802.3af, IEEE 802.3at, IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery
Protocol, IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet, RFC 768, RFC 783, RFC 791, RFC 792,
RFC 793, RFC 813, RFC 826, RFC 879, RFC 896, RFC 854, RFC 855, RFC 856, RFC 858,
RFC 894, RFC 919, RFC 920, RFC 922, RFC 950, RFC 951, RFC 1042, RFC 1071, RFC
1123, RFC 1141, RFC 1155, RFC 1157, RFC 1213, RFC 1215, RFC 1286, RFC 1350, RFC
3412, RFC 3413, RFC 3414, RFC 3415, RFC 3416, RFC 4330
IPv6
IPv6 IPv6 host mode; IPv6 over Ethernet; Dual IPv6/IPv4 stack
IPv6 neighbor and router discovery (ND); IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration; Path
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) discovery
Duplicate Address Detection (DAD); ICMP version 6
DHCPv6 stateful client
IPv6 over IPv4 network with Intrasite Automatic Tunnel Addressing Protocol (ISATAP)
tunnel support
USGv6 and IPv6 Gold Logo certified
IPv6 QoS Prioritize IPv6 packets in hardware
IPv6 ACL Drop or rate limit IPv6 packets in hardware
IPv6 First Hop Security RA guard

ND inspection
DHCPv6 guard
Neighbor binding table (snooping and static entries)
Neighbor binding integrity check
Multicast Listener Discovery Deliver IPv6 multicast packets only to the required receivers
(MLD v1/2) snooping
IPv6 applications Web/SSL, Telnet server/SSH, ping, traceroute, Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP),
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), SNMP, RADIUS, syslog, DNS client, Telnet Client,
DHCP Client, DHCP Autoconfig, IPv6 DHCP Relay, TACACS+
IPv6 RFCs supported RFC 4443 (which obsoletes RFC2463): ICMP version 6
RFC 4291 (which obsoletes RFC 3513): IPv6 address architecture
RFC 4291: IPv6 addressing architecture
RFC 2460: IPv6 specification
RFC 4861 (which obsoletes RFC 2461): neighbor discovery for IPv6

Feature Description
RFC 4862 (which obsoletes RFC 2462): IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration
RFC 1981: path MTU discovery
RFC 4007: IPv6 scoped address architecture
RFC 3484: default address selection mechanism
RFC 5214 (which obsoletes RFC 4214): ISATAP tunneling
RFC 4293: MIB IPv6: textual conventions and general group
RFC 3595: textual conventions for IPv6 flow label
Management
Web user interface Built-in switch configuration utility for easy browser-based device configuration
(HTTP/HTTPS)
Supports simple and advanced mode, configuration, wizards, customizable dashboard,
system maintenance, monitoring, online help, and universal search
Smart Network Application Smart Network Application (SNA) is an innovative network-level monitoring and
management tool embedded in Cisco 100 to 500 Series switches. It can discover network
topology, display link status, monitor events, apply configurations, and upgrade software
images across multiple switches in the network
(Note: Management of your network using Smart Network Application requires the use of
either a 350, 350X, or 550X Series switch model as a part of your network)
SNMP SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3 with support for traps, and SNMP version 3 User-based
Security Model (USM)
Standard MIBs lldp-MIB rfc2668-MIB

lldpextdot1-MIB rfc2737-MIB
lldpextdot3-MIB rfc2925-MIB
lldpextmed-MIB rfc3621-MIB
rfc2674-MIB rfc4668-MIB
rfc2573-MIB trunk-MIB
rfc2233-MIB tunnel-MIB
rfc2013-MIB udp-MIB
rfc2012-MIB draft-ietf-bridge-8021x-MIB
rfc2011-MIB draft-ietf-bridge-rstpmib-04-MIB
RFC-1212 draft-ietf-hubmib-etherif-mib-v3-00-MIB
RFC-1215 draft-ietf-syslog-device-MIB
SNMPv2-CONF ianaaddrfamnumbers-MIB
SNMPv2-TC ianaifty-MIB
p-bridge-MIB ianaprot-MIB
q-bridge-MIB inet-address-MIB
rfc1389-MIB ip-forward-MIB
rfc1493-MIB ip-MIB

Feature Description
rfc1611-MIB RFC1155-SMI
rfc1612-MIB RFC1213-MIB
rfc1850-MIB SNMPv2-MIB
rfc1907-MIB SNMPv2-SMI
rfc2571-MIB SNMPv2-TM
rfc2572-MIB RMON-MIB
rfc2576-MIB dcb-raj-DCBX-MIB-1108-MIB
Private MIBs CISCOSB-lldp-MIB CISCOSB- CISCOSB-ip-MIB

brgmulticast-MIB CISCOSB- CISCOSB-iprouter-MIB
bridgemibobjects-MIB CISCOSB-ipv6-MIB
CISCOSB-bonjour-MIB CISCOSB-mnginf-MIB
CISCOSB-dhcpcl-MIB CISCOSB-lcli-MIB
CISCOSB-MIB CISCOSB-localization-MIB
CISCOSB-wrandomtaildrop-MIB CISCOSB-mcmngr-MIB
CISCOSB-traceroute-MIB CISCOSB-mng-MIB
CISCOSB-telnet-MIB CISCOSB-physdescription-MIB
CISCOSB-stormctrl-MIB CISCOSB-Poe-MIB
CISCOSB-ssh-MIB CISCOSB-protectedport-MIB
CISCOSB-socket-MIB CISCOSB-rmon-MIB
CISCOSB-sntp-MIB CISCOSB-rs232-MIB
CISCOSB-smon-MIB CISCOSB-SecuritySuite-MIB
CISCOSB-phy-MIB CISCOSB-snmp-MIB
CISCOSB-multisessionterminal-MIB CISCOSB-specialbpdu-MIB
CISCOSB-mri-MIB CISCOSB-banner-MIB
CISCOSB-jumboframes-MIB CISCOSB-syslog-MIB
CISCOSB-gvrp-MIB CISCOSB-TcpSession-MIB
CISCOSB-endofmib-MIB CISCOSB-traps-MIB
CISCOSB-dot1x-MIB CISCOSB-trunk-MIB
CISCOSB-deviceparams-MIB CISCOSB-tuning-MIB
CISCOSB-cli-MIB CISCOSB-tunnel-MIB
CISCOSB-cdb-MIB CISCOSB-udp-MIB
CISCOSB-brgmacswitch-MIB CISCOSB-vlan-MIB
CISCOSB-3sw2swtables-MIB CISCOSB-ipstdacl-MIB
CISCOSB-smartPorts-MIB CISCOSB-eee-MIB

Feature Description
CISCOSB-tbi-MIB CISCOSB-ssl-MIB
CISCOSB-macbaseprio-MIB CISCOSB-qosclimib-MIB
CISCOSB-policy-MIB CISCOSB-digitalkeymanage-MIB
CISCOSB-env_mib CISCOSB-tbp-MIB
CISCOSB-sensor-MIB CISCOSMB-MIB
CISCOSB-aaa-MIB CISCOSB-secsd-MIB
CISCOSB-application-MIB CISCOSB-draft-ietf-entmib-sensor-MIB
CISCOSB-bridgesecurity-MIB CISCOSB-draft-ietf-syslog-device-MIB
CISCOSB-copy-MIB CISCOSB-rfc2925-MIB
CISCOSB-CpuCounters-MIB CISCO-SMI-MIB
CISCOSB-Custom1BonjourService-MIB CISCOSB-DebugCapabilities-MIB
CISCOSB-dhcp-MIB CISCOSB-CDP-MIB
CISCOSB-dlf-MIB CISCOSB-vlanVoice-MIB
CISCOSB-dnscl-MIB CISCOSB-EVENTS-MIB
CISCOSB-embweb-MIB CISCOSB-sysmng-MIB
CISCOSB-fft-MIB CISCOSB-sct-MIB
CISCOSB-file-MIB CISCO-TC-MIB
CISCOSB-greeneth-MIB CISCO-VTP-MIB
CISCOSB-interfaces-MIB CISCO-CDP-MIB
CISCOSB-interfaces_recovery-MIB
Remote Monitoring (RMON) Embedded RMON software agent supports 4 RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms,
and events) for enhanced traffic management, monitoring, and analysis
IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack Coexistence of both protocol stacks to ease migration
Firmware upgrade ● Web browser upgrade (HTTP/HTTPS) and TFTP and upgrade over SCP running over SSH
● Upgrade can be initiated through console port as well

● Dual images for resilient firmware upgrades
Port mirroring Traffic on a port can be mirrored to another port for analysis with a network analyzer or
RMON probe. Up to 8 source ports can be mirrored to one destination port. A single
session is supported
VLAN mirroring Traffic from a VLAN can be mirrored to a port for analysis with a network analyzer or
RMON probe. Up to 8 source VLANs can be mirrored to one destination port. A single
session is supported
DHCP (options 12, 66, 67, 82, DHCP options facilitate tighter control from a central point (DHCP server) to obtain IP
129, and 150) address, autoconfiguration (with configuration file download), DHCP relay, and hostname
Secure Copy (SCP) Securely transfer files to and from the switch
Autoconfiguration with Enables secure mass deployment with protection of sensitive data
Secure Copy (SCP) file
download

Feature Description
Text-editable config files Config files can be edited with a text editor and downloaded to another switch, facilitating
easier mass deployment
Smartports Simplified configuration of QoS and security capabilities
Auto Smartports Applies the intelligence delivered through the Smartport roles and applies it automatically
to the port based on the devices discovered over Cisco Discovery Protocol or LLDP-MED.
This facilitates zero-touch deployments
Textview CLI Scriptable command-line interface. A full CLI as well as a menu-based CLI is supported.
User privilege levels 1, 7, and 15 are supported for the CLI
Cloud services Support for Cisco FindIT Network Manager and Cisco Active Advisor
Embedded Probe for FindIT Support for embedded FindIT Network Probe running on the switch. Eliminates the need
Network Manager to set up a separate hardware or virtual machine for the FindIT Network Probe on site
Cisco Network Plug and Play The Cisco Network Plug and Play solution provides a simple, secure, unified, and
(PnP) agent integrated offering to ease new branch or campus device rollouts or for provisioning
updates to an existing network. The solution provides a unified approach to provision
Cisco routers, switches, and wireless devices with a near-zero-touch deployment
experience
Supports Cisco PnP Connect
Localization Localization of GUI and documentation into multiple languages
Login banner Configurable multiple banners for web as well as CLI
Other management Traceroute; single IP management; HTTP/HTTPS; SSH; RADIUS; port mirroring; TFTP
upgrade; DHCP client; BOOTP; SNTP; Xmodem upgrade; cable diagnostics; ping; syslog;
Telnet client (SSH secure support); automatic time settings from Management Station
Time-based port operation Link up or down based on user-defined schedule (when the port is administratively up)
Time-based PoE Capability for power to be on or off based on a user-defined schedule to save energy
Power Efficiency
Energy Detect Automatically turns power off on Gigabit Ethernet and 10/100 RJ-45 port when detecting
link down. Active mode is resumed without loss of any packets when the switch detects
the link up
Cable length detection Adjusts the signal strength based on the cable length for Gigabit Ethernet models.
Reduces the power consumption for shorter cables
EEE Compliant (802.3az) Supports IEEE 802.3az on all copper Gigabit Ethernet ports
Disable port LEDs LEDs can be manually turned off to save on energy
Time-based port operation Link up or down based on user-defined schedule (when the port is administratively up)
Time-based PoE Capability for power to be on or off based on a user-defined schedule to save energy

Feature Description
General
Frame sizes up to 9K bytes. The default MTU is 2K bytes

Jumbo frames
16K addresses
MAC table
Discovery
The switch advertises itself using the Bonjour protocol

Bonjour
LLDP allows the switch to advertise its identification, configuration, and capabilities to
Link Layer Discovery
neighboring devices that store the data in a MIB. LLDP-MED is an enhancement to LLDP
Protocol (LLDP) (802.1ab)
that adds the extensions needed for IP phones
with LLDP-MED extensions
The switch advertises itself using the Cisco Discovery Protocol. It also learns the
Cisco Discovery Protocol
connected device and its characteristics via Cisco Discovery Protocol
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
The following switches support 802.3at PoE+, 802.3af PoE, and Cisco prestandard
802.3af PoE, 802.3at PoE+,
(legacy) PoE on any of the RJ45 network ports. 60W PoE is also supported on selected
or 60W PoE are delivered
RJ-45 network ports
over the RJ-45 ports within
the listed power budgets Maximum power of 60W is delivered to any of the 60W PoE ports, and maximum power of
30W is delivered to any of the other RJ45 network ports, until the PoE budget for the
switch is reached
The total power available for PoE per switch is as follows
Model Name Power Dedicated to PoE Number of Ports That Support

PoE
SF352-08P 62W 8
SF352-08MP 128W 8
SF350-24P 185W 24 (4 support 60W PoE)
SF350-24MP 375W 24 (4 support 60W PoE)
SF350-48P 382W 48 (8 support 60W PoE)
SF350-48MP 740W 48 (8 support 60W PoE)
SG350-8PD 124W 8
SG350-10P 62W 8
SG355-10P 62W 8
SG350-10MP 124W 8
SG350-28P 195W 24 (4 support 60W PoE)
SG350-28MP 382W 24 (4 support 60W PoE)
SG350-52P 375W 48 (8 support 60W PoE)
SG350-52MP 740W 48 (8 support 60W PoE)

Feature Description
PoE powered device and In addition to AC power, compact switch models can work as PoE powered devices and
PoE passthrough be powered by PoE switches connected to the uplink ports. The switch can also pass
through the power to downstream PoE end devices if required
Maximum of 60W can be drawn per uplink port if the peer PoE switch supports 60W PoE.
When multiple uplink ports are connected to PoE switches, the power drawn from these
ports is combined
When AC power is connected and functioning properly, it will have priority over the PoE
powered device function. The PoE powered device function will then act as a backup
power source to the AC power. The PoE powered device function will be the primary
power source for the switch if AC power is not connected
Model Power Option Available PoE Can Switch Be Powered

Power (W) with Uplinks?
SG350-10P 1 PoE uplink 0W Yes
2 PoE uplink 0W Yes
1 PoE+ uplink 0W Yes
1 60W PoE uplink 22W Yes
AC power 62W Yes
SG350-10MP 1 PoE uplink 0W Yes
2 PoE uplink 0W Yes
AC power 128W Yes
SG355-10P 1 PoE uplink 0W Yes
2 PoE uplink 0W Yes

Feature Description
AC power 62W Yes
Power consumption Model Green Power System Power Power Heat

(worst case) (mode) Consumption Consumption Dissipation
(with PoE) (BTU/hr)
SF350-08 Energy Detect 110V=5.6W N/A 30.0

220V=5.8W

220V=6.9W
SF352-08P Energy Detect 110V=10.4W 110V=78.7W 207.4

220V=11.2W 220V=79.3W
SF352-08MP Energy Detect 110V=10.4W 110V=157.2W 536.1

220V=11.2W 220V=156.2W
SF350-24 Energy Detect 110V=10.6W 110V=240W 43.3

220V=10.9W 220V=230W
SF350-24P Energy Detect 110V=10.6W 110V=240W 684.1

220V=10.9W 220V=230W
SF350-24MP Energy Detect 110V=29.2W 110V=238W 1333.0

220V=28.3W 220V=233W

220V=24.2W
SF350-48P Energy Detect 110V=50.8W 110V=464.3W 1584.3

220V=52.1W 220V=453.1W
SF350-48MP Energy Detect 110V=58.4W 110V=866.7W 2957.3

220V=58.5W 220V=843.5W
SG350-8PD EEE, Energy 110V=29.8W 110V=167W 569.5

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=31.3W 220V=165.2W
SG350-10 EEE, Energy 110V=9.0W N/A 33.4

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=9.8W
SG350-10P EEE, Energy 110V=13.0W 110V=84.7W 289.0

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=13.5W 220V=83.5W

Feature Description

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=12.6W 220V=83.4W
SG350-10MP EEE, Energy 110V=13.2W 110V=152.8W 521.5

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=13.5W 220V=151.6W
SG350-10SFP EEE, Energy 110V=11.1W N/A 40.6

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=11.9W

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=15.2W

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=19.9W
SG350-28P EEE, Energy 110V=35.7W 110V=263W 897.4

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=36.9W 220V=255.1W

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=42.1W 220V=451.2W
SG350-28SFP EEE, Energy 110V=32.0W N/A 117.0

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=34.3W

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=40.6.8W

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=61.8W 220V=431.0W

Detect, Short
Reach 220V=73.6W 220V=833.0W
Ports Model Name Total System Ports RJ-45 Ports Combo Ports
(RJ-45 + SFP)
SF350-08 8 Fast Ethernet 8 Fast Ethernet N/A
SF352-08 8 Fast Ethernet + 2 8 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet

Gigabit Ethernet combo
SF352-08P 8 Fast Ethernet + 2 8 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet

SF352-08MP 8 Fast Ethernet + 2 8 Fast Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet


Feature Description

Gigabit Ethernet combo + 2 SFP



2 Gigabit Ethernet

2 Gigabit Ethernet

2 Gigabit Ethernet
SG350-8PD 6 Gigabit Ethernet + 2 6 Gigabit Ethernet + 2 2 Multigigabit/SFP+

2.5G + 2 Multigigabit 2.5G combo
SG350-10 10 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet

combo
SG350-10P 10 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet

combo

combo
SG350-10MP 10 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit Ethernet 2 Gigabit Ethernet

combo
SG350-10SFP 10 Gigabit Ethernet 8 Gigabit SFP Slots 2 Gigabit Ethernet

combo

combo + 2 SFP

combo + 2 SFP

combo + 2 SFP

combo + 2 SFP
SG350-28SFP 28 Gigabit Ethernet 24 Gigabit SFP slots 2 Gigabit Ethernet

combo + 2 SFP

combo + 2 SFP

Feature Description

combo + 2 SFP

combo + 2 SFP
Console port Cisco Standard RJ45 console port
USB slot USB Type-A slot on the front panel of the switch for easy file and image management
Buttons Reset button
Cabling type Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5 or better for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX; UTP
Category 5e or better for 1000BASE-T
LEDs System, Link/Act, PoE, Speed
Flash 256 MB
CPU 800 MHz ARM
CPU memory 512 MB
Packet buffer All numbers are aggregate across all ports as the buffers are dynamically shared:
Model Name Packet Buffer
SF350-08 1.5 MB
SF352-08 1.5 MB
SF352-08P 1.5 MB
SF352-08MP 1.5 MB
SF350-24 1.5 MB
SF350-24P 1.5 MB
SF350-24MP 1.5 MB
SF350-48 3 MB
SF350-48P 3 MB
SF350-48MP 3 MB
SG350-8PD 1.5 MB
SG350-10 1.5 MB
SG350-10P 1.5 MB
SG355-10P 1.5 MB

Feature Description
SG350-10MP 1.5 MB
SG350-10SFP 1.5 MB
SG350-20 1.5 MB
SG350-28 1.5 MB
SG350-28P 1.5 MB
SG350-28MP 1.5 MB
SG350-28SFP 1.5 MB
SG350-52 3 MB
SG350-52P 3 MB
SG350-52MP 3 MB
Supported SFP modules SKU Media Speed Maximum Distance
MGBSX1 Multimode fiber 1000 Mbps 500 m
MGBLX1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 10 km
MGBLH1 Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 40 km
MGBT1 UTP cat 5e 1000 Mbps 100 m
GLC-LH-SMD Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 10 km
GLC-BX-U Single-mode fiber 1000 Mbps 10 km
Environmental
Unit dimensions (W x H x D) Model Name Unit Dimensions
SF350-08 279.4 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SF352-08 279.4 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SF352-08P 279.4 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SF352-08MP 279.4 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SF350-24 440 x 44 x 202 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 7.95 in)
SF350-24P 440 x 44 x 257 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 10.12 in)
SF350-24MP 440 x 44 x 257 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 10.12 in)
SF350-48 440 x 44 x 257 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 10.12 in)

Feature Description
SF350-48P 440 x 44 x 350 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 13.78 in)
SF350-48MP 440 x 44 x 350 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 13.78 in)
SG350-8PD 344.4 x 44 x 252.5 (13.6 x 1.73 x 9.94 in)
SG350-10 280 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SG350-10P 280 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SG355-10P 440 x 44 x 203 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 7.99 in)
SG350-10MP 280 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SG350-10SFP 279.4 x 44 x 170 mm (11.0 x 1.73 x 6.69 in)
SG350-20 440 x 44 x 203 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 7.99 in)
SG350-28 440 x 44 x 202 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 7.95 in)
SG350-28P 440 x 44 x 257 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 10.12 in)
SG350-28MP 440 x 44 x 257 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 10.12 in)
SG350-28SFP 440 x 44 x 203 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 7.99 in)
SG350-52 440 x 44 x 257 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 10.12 in)
SG350-52P 440 x 44 x 350 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 13.78 in)
SG350-52MP 440 x 44 x 350 mm (17.3 x 1.73 x 13.78 in)
Unit weight Model Name Unit Weight
SF350-08 1.18 kg (2.60 lb)
SF352-08 1.06 kg (2.34 lb)
SF352-08P 1.16 kg (2.56 lb)
SF352-08MP 1.16 kg (2.56 lb)
SF350-24 2.72 kg (6.0 lb)
SF350-24P 4.08 kg (8.99 lb)
SF350-24MP 4.12 kg (9.08 lb)
SF350-48 3.58 kg (7.89 lb)
SF350-48P 5.59 kg (12.32 lb)
SF350-48MP 5.61 kg (12.37 lb)

Feature Description
SG350-8PD 2.5 kg (5.51 lb)
SG350-10 1.09 kg (2.40 lb)
SG350-10P 1.19 kg (2.62 lb)
SG355-10P 2.36 kg (5.20 lb)
SG350-10MP 1.19 kg (2.62 lb)
SG350-10SFP 2.08 kg (4.59 lb)
SG350-20 2.12 kg (4.67 lb)
SG350-28 2.75 kg (6.06 lb)
SG350-28P 3.83 kg (8.44 lb)
SG350-28MP 3.37 kg (7.43 lb)
SG350-28SFP 2.7 kg (5.95 lb)
SG350-52 2.75 kg (6.06 lb)
SG350-52P 3.81 kg (8.40 lb)
SG350-52MP 3.83 kg (8.44 lb)
Power 100-240V 50-60 Hz, internal, universal: SF350-24, SF350-24P, SF350-24MP, SF350-48,
SF350-48P, SF350-48MP, SG350-8PD, SG355-10P, SG350-20, SG350-28, SG350-28P,
SG350-28MP, SG350-28SFP, SG350-52, SG350-52P, SG350-52MP
100-240V 50-60 Hz, external: SF350-08, SF352-08, SF352-08P, SF352-08MP, SG350-
10, SG350-10P, SG350-10MP, SG350-10SFP
Certification UL (UL 60950), CSA (CSA 22.2), CE mark, FCC Part 15 (CFR 47) Class A
Operating temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C):

SF350-08, SF352-08, SF352-08P, SF352-08MP, SF350-24, SF350-24P, SF350-24MP,
SF350-48, SF350-48P, SF350-48MP, SG350-10, SG350-10P, SG355-10P, SG350-
10MP, SG350-10SFP, SG350-20, SG350-28, SG350-28P, SG350-28MP, SG350-28SFP,
SG350-52, SG350-52P, SG350-52MP
32° to 113°F (0° to 45°C):
SG350-08PD
Storage temperature –4° to 158°F (–20° to 70°C)
Operating humidity 10% to 90%, relative, noncondensing
Storage humidity 10% to 90%, relative, noncondensing

Feature Description
Acoustic noise and MTBF Model Name FAN (Number) Acoustic Noise MTBF @40C (hr)
SF350-08 Fanless N/A 644,573
SF352-08 Fanless N/A 532,704
SF352-08P Fanless N/A 530,716
SF352-08MP Fanless N/A 478,335
SF350-24 Fanless N/A 562,313
SF350-24P 2 0°C - 25°C: 39.7dB 293,029

50°C: 52.2dB
SF350-24MP 2 0°C - 25°C: 39.7dB 272,127

50°C: 52.2dB
SF350-48 Fanless N/A 277,653
SF350-48P 3 0°C - 25°C: 42.5dB 182,270

50°C: 55.0dB
SF350-48MP 4 0°C - 25°C: 42.0dB 191,951

50°C: 54.1dB
SG350-8PD Fanless N/A 562,664
SG350-10 Fanless N/A 308,196
SG350-10P Fanless N/A 205,647
SG355-10P Fanless N/A 296,426
SG350-10MP Fanless N/A 80,093
SG350-10SFP Fanless N/A 851,827
SG350-20 Fanless N/A 1,400,007
SG350-28 Fanless N/A 367,209
SG350-28P 2 0°C - 25°C: 37.2dB 396,687

50°C: 53.7dB
SG350-28MP 2 0°C - 25°C: 37.2dB 213,373

50°C: 51.8dB
SG350-28SFP 1 0°C - 30°C: 40.3dB 101,523

50°C: 43.6dB

Feature Description
SG350-52 1 0°C - 25°C: 36.6dB 301,297

50°C: 52.6dB
SG350-52P 3 0°C - 25°C: 41.2dB 195,746

50°C: 54.2dB
SG350-52MP 4 0°C - 25°C: 43.7dB 163,704

50°C: 55.5dB
Warranty Limited lifetime with next business day advance replacement (where available)
Package Contents
● Cisco 350 Series Managed Switch

● Power Cord (Power Adapter for select SKUs)
● Mounting Kit
● Console Cable
● Quick Start Guide
Minimum Requirements
● Web browser: Chrome, Firefox, Edge, Safari

● Category 5 Ethernet network cable
● TCP/IP, network adapter, and network operating system (such as Microsoft Windows, Linux, or Mac OS X) installed on each computer
in the network
Ordering information
Table 2 provides ordering information for the Cisco 350 Series Switches. Table 3 gives region- and country-
specific information, and Table 4 provides MGE transceiver ordering information.
Table 2. Cisco 350 Series Switches ordering information
Model Name Order Product ID Number Description
Fast Ethernet
SF350-08 SF350-08-K9-xx ● 8 10/100 ports
SF352-08 SF352-08-K9-xx ● 8 10/100 ports
● 2 Gigabit copper/SFP combo
SF352-08P SF352-08P-K9-xx ● 8 10/100 PoE+ ports

● 62W PoE power budget
SF352-08MP SF352-08MP-K9-xx ● 8 10/100 PoE+ ports


SF350-24 SF350-24-K9-xx ● 24 10/100 ports

● 2 Gigabit copper/SFP combo + 2 SFP ports
SF350-24P SF350-24P-K9-xx ● 24 10/100 PoE+ ports (4 support 60W PoE)

SF350-24MP SF350-24MP-K9-xx ● 24 10/100 PoE+ ports (4 support 60W PoE)

SF350-48 SF350-48-K9-xx ● 48 10/100 ports

SF350-48P SF350-48P-K9-xx ● 48 10/100 PoE+ ports (8 support 60W PoE)

SF350-48MP SF350-48MP-K9-xx ● 48 10/100 PoE+ ports (8 support 60W PoE)

Gigabit Ethernet
SG350-10 SG350-10-K9-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 ports
SG350-10P SG350-10P-K9-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports

SG355-10P SG355-10P-K9-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports

SG350-10MP SG350-10MP-K9-xx ● 8 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports

SG350-10SFP SG350-10SFP-K9-xx ● 8 SFP Gigabit slots

SG350-20 SG350-20-K9-xx ● 16 10/100/1000 ports

SG350-28 SG350-28-K9-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 ports

SG350-28P SG350-28P-K9-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports (4 support 60W PoE)

SG350-28MP SG350-28MP-K9-xx ● 24 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports (4 support 60W PoE)


SG350-28SFP SG350-28SFP-K9-xx ● 24 SFP Gigabit slots

SG350-52 SG350-52-K9-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 ports

SG350-52P SG350-52P-K9-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports (8 support 60W PoE)

SG350-52MP SG350-52MP-K9-xx ● 48 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports (8 support 60W PoE)

Multi-Gigabit Ethernet
SG350-8PD SG350-8PD-K9-xx ● 6 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports
● 2 2.5G PoE+ ports

● 2 Multigigabit/SFP+ combo
*
Each combo port has one 10/100/1000 Ethernet port and one SFP Gigabit Ethernet slot, with one port active at a time.
The -xx in the Product Order ID Number is a country-/region-specific suffix. For example, the complete PID of SG350-28P for the United
States is SG350-28P-K9-NA. Please refer to Table 3 for the correct suffix to use for your country/region.
Table 3. Country/region suffix for product order ID number
Suffix Country/Region
-NA USA, Canada, Mexico, Colombia, Chile and rest of Latin America
-BR Brazil
-AR Argentina
-EU EU, Russia, Ukraine, Israel, United Arab Emirates, Turkey, Egypt, South Africa, Indonesia,
Philippines, Vietnam, Thailand, Korea
-UK United Kingdom, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Kuwait, Singapore, Hong Kong, Malaysia
-AU Australia, New Zealand
-CN China
-IN India
-JP Japan
-KR Korea
The products may also be available in a country/region not listed in Table 3. Not all product models are offered in all countries/regions. For
Korea, either -EU or -KR suffix will be used depending on product models. Please consult with your local Cisco sales representative or
Cisco partners for more details.

Table 4. MGE transceiver ordering information
MGE Transceivers
MGBSX1 1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver, for multimode fiber, 850 nm wavelength, support up to 500 m
MGBLX1 1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, supports up to 10 km
MGBLH1 1000BASE-LH SFP transceiver, for single-mode fiber, 1310 nm wavelength, support up to 40 km
MGBT1 1000BASE-T SFP transceiver for Category 5 copper wire, supports up to 100 m
A powerful, affordable foundation for your small business network

As you strive to make your employees as productive and effective as possible, your business applications and
information and the network that delivers them become ever more vital parts of your business. You need a
technology foundation that can meet your business’s needs today and in the future and that delivers the right
feature set at the right price. The Cisco 350 Series portfolio of managed switches provides the reliability,
performance, security, and capabilities you need to power your business.
Cisco Capital
Flexible payment solutions to help you achieve your objectives
Cisco Capital makes it easier to get the right technology to achieve your objectives, enable business
transformation and help you stay competitive. We can help you reduce the total cost of ownership, conserve
capital, and accelerate growth. In more than 100 countries, our flexible payment solutions can help you
acquire hardware, software, services and complementary third-party equipment in easy, predictable
payments. Learn more.
For more information

To find out more about the Cisco 350 Series, visit https://www.cisco.com/go/350switches.
Printed in USA C78-737359-02 04/20

R540 SPEC SHEET
POWEREDGE R540
Built for versatility
The PowerEdge R540 delivers the ideal balance of resources
and affordability to adapt to a variety of application demands.
Power your applications with the versatility of the R540

The PowerEdge R540 delivers the versatility and flexibility to power a variety of applications. With a balanced set of
resources, expandability and affordability the R540 adapts to the demands of the modern data center with the ideal value
optimized design. Automatically optimize performance with one button application tuning and scale for future demands
with up to 14 3.5” drives.
• Scale compute resources with 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon® Scalable processors, and tailor performance based
on your unique workload requirements.
• Automatically optimize application performance with one-button tuning.
• Flexible storage with up to 14 3.5” drives.
• Free up storage with boot optimized M.2 SSDs.
Intuitive systems management with intelligent automation

Dell EMC PowerEdge servers are optimized for top efficiency and uptime, with intelligent automation that decreases time
spent on the most common IT tasks. Combined with the agent-free management of the embedded iDRAC with Lifecycle
Controller, the R540 is easily and effectively managed.
• Simplify data center management with OpenManage Essentials to intelligently automate the entire server life cycle
management process – from bare-metal deployment, through configuration and updates, to ongoing maintenance.
• Use the OpenManage Mobile app to take advantage of new wireless Quick Sync 2 capabilities to efficiently perform
management procedures at-the-server, across multiple servers within the data center, or monitor server status and
respond to alerts, anytime, anywhere.
Rely on PowerEdge with built-in security

Every PowerEdge server is made with a cyber-resilient architecture, building security into all parts of a server’s life
cycle. The R540 uses these new security features so you can reliably and securely deliver the right data to where your
customers are, no matter where they are. Dell EMC considers each part of system security, from design to end of life,
to ensure trust and deliver worry-free, secure systems.
• Rely on a secure supply chain that protects servers from factory to the data center.
PowerEdge R540
• Maintain data safety with cryptographically signed firmware packages
and Secure Boot. • 2U, 2 socket server
• Prevent unauthorized or malicious change with Server Lockdown. • Up to 14 3.5” drives,
max 196TBs
• Wipe all data from storage media including hard drives, SSDs and system
memory quickly and securely with System Erase. • Internal M.2 boot drives
R540 Spec Sheet

© 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. Page 228 of 709
PowerEdge R540
Features Technical Specification

Processor Up to two 2nd Generation Intel® Xeon® Scalable processors, up to 20 cores per processor
Memory 16 DDR4 DIMM slots, Supports RDIMM /LRDIMM, speeds up to 2666MT/s, 1TB max1
Storage controllers Internal controllers: PERC H330, H730P, H740P, HBA330, Software RAID (SWRAID) S140
Boot Optimized Storage Subsystem: HWRAID 2 x M.2 SSDs 120GB, 240 GB
External PERC (RAID): H840
External HBAs (non-RAID): 12 Gbps SAS HBA
Drive bays Front drive bays: Up to 12 x 3.5” SAS/SATA HDD max 168TB
Rear drive bays: Up to 2 x 3.5 SAS/SATA HDD max 28TB
Optional DVD-ROM, DVD+RW
Power supplies Platinum 495W, 750W, 750W 240V HVDC², 1100W, 1100W 380V HVDC²
Hot plug power supplies with full redundancy option
Fans Up to six fans
Sizing Form factor: Rack (2U) Height: 86.8mm (3.41”)

Width*: 434mm (17.08”)
Depth*: 693.81mm (27.31”)
Weight: 29.68kg (65.43lbs.)
*Dimensions do not include bezel.
Bezel Optional LCD or security bezel
Embedded / At-Server iDRAC9 iDRAC REST API with Redfish

iDRAC Direct Quick Sync 2 BLE/wireless module
Consoles & Mobile OpenManage Enterprise OpenManage Mobile

OpenManage Essentials OpenManage Power Center
Integrations OpenManage integrations: Microsoft® System Center, VMware® vCenter™, BMC Truesight, Red Hat® Ansible® Modules
Connections Nagios® Core and Nagios® XI, IBM Tivoli® Netcool/OMNIbus

Micro Focus Operations Manager I
Tools Dell EMC Repository Manager iDRAC Service Module

Dell EMC Update Package OpenManage Server Administrator
Dell EMC System Update OpenManage Storage Services
Dell EMC Server Update Utility
Security TPM 1.2/2.0, TCM 2.0 optional Secure Boot

Cryptographically signed firmware System Lockdown (requires OpenManage Enterprise)
Silicon Root of Trust System Erase
I/O & Ports Network options: 2 x 1GbE LOM + (optional) LOM Riser 2 x 1GbE or 2 x 10GbE SFP+ or 2 x 10GbE BaseT
Front ports: 1 x Dedicated iDRAC Direct USB, 1 x USB 2.0, 1 x Video
Rear ports: 1 x Dedicated iDRAC network port, 1 x Serial, 2 x USB 3.0, 1 x Video
With Optional Riser: Non-rear storage config: 1xFH/FL + 1xHH/HL (2U Right riser) slots + 3 HH/HL slots
Rear storage config: 1xHH/HL (1U Left Riser) + 1xHH/HL (1U Right risers) slot or 1xHH/HL (1U Left Riser) + 1x FH/HL
(1U Right riser)
Supported operating systems Canonical® Ubuntu® Server LTS For specifications and interoperability details,
Citrix® Hypervisor see Dell.com/OSsupport.
Microsoft Windows Server® LTSC with Hyper-V
Red Hat® Enterprise Linux
SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server
VMware® ESXi
OEM-ready version available From bezel to BIOS to packaging, your servers can look and feel as if they were designed and built by you.
For more information, visit Dell.com/OEM.
Dell Financial Services Deliver results with easy financing. Explore financial options that move at the speed of business. For more information,
visit https://www.emc.com/products/how-to-buy/global-financial-services/index.htm.*
Recommended support Choose Dell ProSupport Plus for critical systems or Dell ProSupport for premium hardware and software support for your PowerEdge solution.
and services Consulting and deployment offerings are also available. Contact your Dell representative today for more information. Availability and terms of
Dell Services vary by region. For more information, visit dell.com/itlifecycleservices.
Dell Financial Services Deliver results with easy financing. Explore financial options that move at the speed of business.
For more information, visit https://www.emc.com/products/how-to-buy/global-financial-services/index.htm.*
1
768GB max memory is recommended for performance optimized configurations
2
Available in China only
Learn more at Dell.com/PowerEdge

End-to-end technology solutions
Reduce IT complexity, lower costs and eliminate inefficiencies by making IT and business solutions work harder for you. You can count on Dell EMC for end-to-end solutions to maximize your performance
and uptime. A proven leader in Servers, Storage and Networking, Dell EMC Services deliver innovation at any scale. And if you’re looking to preserve cash or increase operational efficiency, Dell Financial
Services™ has a wide range of options to make technology acquisition easy and affordable. Contact your Dell Sales Representative for more information.*
* Payment solutions provided and serviced by Dell Financial Services L.L.C. or its affiliate or designee (“DFS”) for qualified customers. Offers may not be available or
may vary in certain countries. Where available, offers may be changed without notice and are subject to product availability, credit approval, execution of documentation
provided by and acceptable to DFS, and may be subject to minimum transaction size. Offers not available for personal, family or household use. Product availability
may vary by region. Please contact your Dell EMC representative for more information. Dell and the Dell logo are trademarks of Dell Inc. Restrictions and additional
Page 229 of 709
requirements may apply to transactions with governmental or public entities.
Copyright © April 18, 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All Rights Reserved.
Datasheet
HP Z2 Tower G4 Workstation
Work faster with our most powerful entry workstation
Experience server-grade power in a

desktop with impressive
expandability. Cut through complex
BIM, rendering and visualization
projects with ultra 3D pro graphics and
the latest Intel® Core™ or Xeon®
processors.
Take next-gen processing to record speeds

HP recommends Windows 10 Pro.
Crush demanding multi-threaded workflows with pro graphics and
9th gen 8-core Intel processors. We redesigned our proprietary
motherboard to unlock an extra 8% boost, for an epic 41% total
performance increase over last gen1.
Built to expand
Need to swap graphics cards? Increase CPU power? Add specialized
PCIe cards? Go for it. Our most expandable entry workstation is an
investment that will last for years.
Safeguard your data. Protect your privacy.
Advanced security features come standard on every Z2 Tower.
System safeguards like HP Client Security Suite Gen32 and HP Sure
Start Gen43 - the industry’s first self-healing BIOS - mean your
device is locked down tight, so your data and identity are too.
Support your unique user needs with a choice of Windows 10 Pro
64 or Linux® operating systems.
Get powerful performance on single-threaded applications with
the latest generation Intel® Xeon® E processors with up to 8 cores.
Maximize your 3D workflow with support for multiple NVIDIA® and
AMD professional graphics from Entry to Ultra 3D.
With dual M.2 storage slots you can install pro-grade storage
hardware to unlock your storage-bound apps without sacrificing
standard PCIe slots.
The stunning new design features front and rear ledges, so you can
easily move your system from location to location.
Save space within your office layout with a 14% smaller system
than the previous generation.
Get multiple high-speed network connections including a second
LAN option* without needing to purchase and install an additional
network interface card (NIC).
Configure a 250W power supply for cost savings or optimize your
configuration with a 500W power supply.
With optional self-encryption drives, you have confidence knowing
that if your storage device falls into the wrong hands, your valuable
IP cannot be accessed.
Page 230 of 709
Data sheet | HP Z2 Tower G4 Workstation HP recommends Windows 10 Pro.
HP Z2 Tower G4 Workstation Specifications Table
Available Operating Systems Windows 10 Pro for Workstations 64 - HP recommends Windows 10 Pro1
Intel® Xeon® processor (E-2176G, E-2174G, E-2146G, E-2144G, E-2136, E-2126G, E-2124G, E-2104G); Intel® Pentium® Gold processor; 9th Generation Intel® Core™
Processor family2,3 i9 processor; 9th Generation Intel® Core™ i7 processor; 9th Generation Intel® Core™ i5 processor; 9th Generation Intel® Core™ i3 processor; 8th Generation Intel®
Core™ i7 processor; 8th Generation Intel® Core™ i5 processor; 8th Generation Intel® Core™ i3 processor
Intel® Xeon® E-2286G (4.0 GHz base frequency, up to 4.9 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 6 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon® E-2278G (3.4 GHz base
frequency, up to 5.0 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 16 MB cache, 8 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon® E-2276G (3.8 GHz base frequency, up to 4.9 GHz with Intel®
Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 6 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon® E-2274G (4.0 GHz base frequency, up to 4.9 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 8 MB
cache, 4 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon® E-2244G (3.8 GHz base frequency, up to 4.8 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 8 MB cache, 4 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon®
E-2236 (3.4 GHz base frequency, up to 4.8 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 6 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon® E-2226G (3.4 GHz base frequency, up
to 4.7 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 6 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon® E-2224G (3.4 GHz base frequency, up to 4.6 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost
Technology, 8 MB cache, 4 cores), vPro™; Intel® Xeon® E-2176G vPro™ (3.7 GHz base frequency, up to 4.7 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 6
cores); Intel® Xeon® E-2174G vPro™ (3.8 GHz base frequency, up to 4.7 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 8 MB cache, 4 cores); Intel® Xeon® E-2144G vPro™
(3.6 GHz base frequency, up to 4.5 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 8 MB cache, 4 cores); Intel® Xeon® E-2136 vPro™ (3.3 GHz base frequency, up to 4.5 GHz
with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 6 cores); Intel® Xeon® E-2126G vPro™ (3.3 GHz base frequency, up to 4.5 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology,
12 MB cache, 6 cores); Intel® Xeon® E-2104G vPro™ with Intel® HD Graphics P630 (3.2 GHz, 8 MB cache, 4 cores); Intel® Pentium® Gold G5400 with Intel® HD Graphics
Available Processors2,3,4,5,6,30
610 (3.7 GHz base frequency, 4 MB cache, 2 cores); Intel® Core™ i9-9900K with Intel® UHD Graphics 630 (3.6 GHz base frequency, up to 5.0 GHz with Intel® Turbo
Boost Technology, 16 MB cache, 8 cores); Intel® Core™ i9-9900 with Intel® UHD Graphics 630 (3.1 GHz base frequency, up to 5.0 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost
Technology, 16 MB cache, 8 cores); Intel® Core™ i7-9700K with Intel® UHD Graphics 630 (3.6 GHz base frequency, up to 4.9 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology,
12 MB cache, 8 cores); Intel® Core™ i7-9700 with Intel® UHD Graphics 630 (3.0 GHz base frequency, up to 4.7 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 8
cores); Intel® Core™ i7 8700 vPro™ with Intel® HD Graphics 630 (3.2 GHz base frequency, up to 4.6 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 12 MB cache, 6 cores);
Intel® Core™ i5-9600 with Intel® UHD Graphics 630 (3.1 GHz base frequency, up to 4.6 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 9 MB cache, 6 cores); Intel® Core™ i5-
9500 with Intel® UHD Graphics 630 (3.0 GHz base frequency, up to 4.4 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 9 MB cache, 6 cores); Intel® Core™ i5 8600 vPro™
with Intel® HD Graphics 630 (3.1 GHz base frequency, up to 4.3 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 9 MB cache, 6 cores); Intel® Core™ i5 8500 vPro™ with Intel®
HD Graphics 630 (3 GHz base frequency, up to 4.1 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 9 MB cache, 6 cores); Intel® Core™ i3-9100 with Intel® UHD Graphics 630
(3.6 GHz base frequency, up to 4.2 GHz with Intel® Turbo Boost Technology, 8 MB cache, 4 cores); Intel® Core™ i3-8100 with Intel® HD Graphics 630 (3.6 GHz, 6 MB
cache, 4 cores)
Chipset Intel® C246
Maximum memory 128 GB DDR4-2666 ECC SDRAM; 128 GB DDR4-2666 non-ECC SDRAM 7
Transfer rates up to 2666 MT/s.
Memory slots 4 DIMM
500 GB up to 6 TB 7200 rpm SATA8
up to 500 GB SATA SED8
256 GB up to 2 TB SATA SSD8
280 GB up to 480 GB Intel® Optane™ SSD 905P8,21
Internal storage
256 GB up to 512 GB SATA SED SSD8
up to 512 GB HP Z Turbo Drive G2 PCIe® SSD8
256 GB up to 1 TB HP Z Turbo Drive G2 PCIe® NVMe™ SSD8,31
16 GB PCIe® NVMe™ Intel® Optane™ Memory for storage acceleration38
Optical drive HP Slim Blu-ray Writer; HP Slim DVD-ROM; HP Slim DVD-Writer 9,18,19
Integrated: Intel® UHD Graphics 630; Intel® UHD Graphics P63010,11
Available Graphics Entry 3D: NVIDIA® Quadro® P400 (2 GB GDDR5 dedicated); NVIDIA® Quadro® P620 (2 GB GDDR5 dedicated); AMD Radeon™ Pro WX 3100 Graphics (4 GB GDDR5
dedicated); NVIDIA® Quadro® P1000 (4 GB GDDR5 dedicated); NVIDIA® Quadro® P2000 (5 GB GDDR5 dedicated); AMD Radeon™ Pro WX 7100 Graphics (8 GB GDDR5
dedicated); NVIDIA® Quadro® P4000 (16 GB GDDR5 dedicated); NVIDIA® Quadro® P5000 (16 GB GDDR5X dedicated)12
Audio Conexant CX20632-31Z, 1.5W internal mono speaker
Expansion slots 1 PCIe 3 x4 (x16 connector); 2 M.2 PCIe 3 x4; 1 PCIe Gen 3 x16; 2 PCIe 3 x1 (x4 open ended connector)
Front: 1 headphone/microphone combo; 2 USB 3.0 (1 charging)9
Rear: 1 audio-in; 1 audio-out; 1 RJ-45; 2 DisplayPort™ 1.2; 2 USB 2.0; 4 USB 3.0
Ports and Connectors Internal: 1 USB 3.0; 2 USB 2.0
Optional: Flex I/O
(1 USB 3.0 and 2 USB 2.0 ports available as 2 separate 2 x 6 (3.0 x 1, 2.0 x 1) and 1 x 6 (2.0 x 1) header. Supports one HP Internal USB 2.0 Port Kit and one USB 3.0
media card reader.)
Input devices HP PS/2 Business Slim Keyboard; HP USB Business Slim Keyboard; HP Wireless Business Slim Keyboard; USB Smart Card (CCID) keyboard9; 3D connexion CADMouse;
HP SpaceMouse Pro USB 3D; HP USB 1000 dpi Laser Mouse; HP USB Hardened Mouse; HP USB Optical 3-Button Mouse; HP USB Optical Mouse9;
LAN: Integrated Intel® I219-LM PCIe® GbE; Intel® I350-T2 dual-port GbE NIC 9; WLAN: Intel® Dual Band Wireless-AC 9560 802.11a/b/g/n/ (2x2) Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth®
Communications
5 Combo 13;
Drive Bays Two 5.25"; Two 3.5"; Two M.2 NVME 2280 SSD
Available Software Buy Office; CyberLink Power2Go; CyberLink PowerDVD; HP Client Security Software; HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI; HP Performance Advisor; HP Remote Graphics
Software (RGS) 7.1; PDF Complete - Corporate Edition; HP Sure Recover; HP Manageability Integration Kit Gen2 15,16,23,32
HP BIOSphere Gen4; HP Business PC Security Lock Kit; HP Client Security Suite Gen 4; HP Keyed Cable Lock Kit; HP Solenoid Hood Lock and Sensor; HP Sure Click; HP
Security management
Sure Run; HP Sure Start Gen 4; HP UltraSlim Cable Lock Kit9,22,24,25,30,31
500 W internal power adapter, up to 90% efficiency, active PFC; 250 W internal power adapter, up to 92% efficiency, active PFC; 650 W internal power adapter, up to
Power
90% efficiency, active PFC
Dimensions 35.6 x 16.9 x 43.5 cm (Standard tower orientation.)
Weight Starting at 7 kg (Exact weight depends on configuration.)
Energy efficiency compliance ENERGY STAR® certified and EPEAT® 2019 registered where applicable. EPEAT® registration varies by country. See www.epeat.net for registration status by country.17
Environmental specifications Low halogen33
Compatible displays All HP Z Displays and HP DreamColor Displays are supported. For more information see www.hp.com/go/zdisplays
3 year (3-3-3) limited warranty and service offering includes 3 years of parts, labor and on-site repair. Terms and conditions vary by country. Certain restrictions and
Warranty
exclusions apply.
Page 231 of 709

Accessories and services (not included)
Simplify scroll, click, and zoom functions and comfortably drive your CAD projects with the
3Dconnexion CADMouse. Simplify scroll, click, and zoom functions and comfortably drive your
CAD projects with the 3Dconnexion CADMouse. Bringing powerful, intelligently engineered
3Dconnexion CadMouse workstations to power users who demand IT that performs – with uncompromising graphics
and speed. HP Workstations are easy-to-buy, quick-to-deploy and simple-to-maintain
solutions that support businesses, grow with complex needs and anticipate challenges.
Product number: M5C35AA
Completely immerse yourself in the expansive elegance of the HP Z38c Curved Display. Form
meets function with crisp, panoramic views so you can stay focused on your work. Engineered
for demanding graphics and processor intensive applications. Bringing powerful, intelligently
engineered workstations to power users who demand IT that performs – with
HP Z38c 37.5-inch Curved Display uncompromising graphics and speed. HP Workstations are easy-to-buy, quick-to-deploy and
simple-to-maintain solutions that support businesses, grow with complex needs and
anticipate challenges.
Product number: Z4W65A4
Boost your productivity and work comfortably at your desk or across the room with the
elegant, redesigned, anodized aluminum-trimmed HP Wireless Premium Keyboard.
Engineered for demanding graphics and processor intensive applications. Bringing powerful,
intelligently engineered workstations to power users who demand IT that performs – with
HP Wireless Premium Keyboard uncompromising graphics and speed. HP Workstations are easy-to-buy, quick-to-deploy and
simple-to-maintain solutions that support businesses, grow with complex needs and
anticipate challenges.
Product number: Z9N41AA
HP 5 year Next Business Day Onsite Receive 5 years of next business day onsite HW Support from an HP-qualified technician for
your computing device, if the issue cannot be solved remotely.
Hardware Support for Workstations Product number: U7944E
Page 232 of 709

Messaging Footnotes
1 41% total performance increase based on Cinebench test (multi-threaded apps) comparing Intel® Core™ i9-9900K on newly designed motherboard to Intel® Core™ i7-8700K.
2 Requires Windows and Intel® or AMD 7th or 8th generation processors.
3 HP Sure Start Gen4 is available on HP Elite and HP Workstation products equipped with 8th generation Intel® or AMD processors.
3 Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is
automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.windows.com
4 Multicore is designed to improve performance of certain software products. Not all customers or software applications will necessarily benefit from use of this technology. Performance and clock frequency will vary depending on application
workload and your hardware and software configurations. Intel’s numbering, branding and/or naming is not a measurement of higher performance.
5 Sold separately or as an optional feature.
6 Sold separately or as an optional feature.
Technical Specifications Footnotes

1 Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is
automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.windows.com
2 Multicore is designed to improve performance of certain software products. Not all customers or software applications will necessarily benefit from use of this technology. Performance and clock frequency will vary depending on application
workload and your hardware and software configurations. Intel’s numbering, branding and/or naming is not a measurement of higher performance.
3 In accordance with Microsoft’s support policy, HP does not support the Windows® 8 or Windows 7 operating system on products configured with Intel and AMD 7th generation and forward processors or provide any Windows®8 or Windows 7
drivers on http://www.support.hp.com
4 Intel® Optane™ memory (cache) is sold separately. Intel® Optane™ memory system acceleration does not replace or increase the DRAM in your system and requires configuration with an Intel® Core™ i+ processor.
5 vPro. Some functionality of this technology, such as Intel Active management technology and Intel Virtualization technology, requires additional 3rd party software in order to run. Availability of future "virtual appliances" applications for Intel
vPro technology is dependent on 3rd party software providers. Compatibility future "virtual appliances" is yet to be determined.
6 Intel Turbo Boost performance varies depending on hardware, software and overall system configuration. See http://www.intel.com/technology/turboboost for more information.
8 For storage drives, GB = 1 billion bytes. TB = 1 trillion bytes. Actual formatted capacity is less. Up to 36GB of system disk (for Windows 10) is reserved for system recovery software.
9 Optional or add-on feature
10 HD content required to view HD images.
11 Intel® HD graphics 630 is configurable as a standalone graphics option; Intel® HD graphics P630 only used when NVIDIA® Optimus™ Technology is enabled.
13Wireless access point and Internet service required and sold separately. Availability of public wireless access points limited. The specifications for the 802.11ac WLAN are draft specifications and are not final. If the final specifications differ
from the draft specifications, it may affect the ability of the workstation to communicate with other 802.11ac WLAN devices.
14 3 DisplayPort 1.2 in Performance model.
15 HP Client Security requires Windows and Intel® or AMD 7th or 8th generation processors.
16 HP Performance Advisor and HP Remote Graphics Software requires internet access.
17 Based on US EPEAT® registration according to IEEE 1680.1-2018 EPEAT®. Status varies by country. Visit www.epeat.net for more information.
18 Duplication of copyrighted material is strictly prohibited. Actual speeds may vary. Double Layer media compatibility will widely vary with some home DVD players and DVD-ROM drives. Note that DVD-RAM cannot read or write to 2.6GB
Single Sided/5.2 Double Sided-Version 1.0 Media.

19 With Blu-Ray, certain disc, digital connection, compatibility and/or performance issues may arise, and do not constitute defects in the product. Flawless playback on all systems is not guaranteed. In order for some Blu-ray titles to play, they
may require a DVI or HDMI digital connection and your display may require HDCP support. HD-DVD movies cannot be played on this Desktop PC.
20 Some devices for academic use will automatically be updated to Windows 10 Pro Education with the Windows 10 Anniversary Update. Features vary; see https://aka.ms/ProEducation for Windows 10 Pro Education feature information.
22 HP BIOSphere Gen4 features may vary depending on the PC platform and configurations requires 8th Gen Intel® processors.
23 HP Manageability Integration Kit can be downloaded from http://www8.hp.com/us/en/ads/clientmanagement/overview.html
24 HP Client Security Suite Gen 4 requires Windows and Intel® or AMD 8th generation processors.
25 HP Sure Click is available on select HP platforms and supports Microsoft® Internet Explorer and Chromium™. Check http://h20195.www2.hp.com/v2/GetDocument.aspx?docname=4AA7-0922ENW for all compatible platforms as they
become available.
30 HP Sure Start Gen4 is available on HP Elite and HP Workstation products equipped with 8th generation Intel® or AMD processors.
31 HP Sure Run is available on HP Elite products equipped with 8th generation Intel® or AMD processors.
32 HP Sure Recover is available on HP Workstations with 8th generation Intel® or AMD processors and requires an open, wired network connection. Not available on platforms with multiple internal storage drives, Intel® Optane™. You must
back up important files, data, photos, videos, etc. before using HP Sure Recover to avoid loss of data.
33 External power supplies, power cords, cables and peripherals are not Low Halogen. Service parts obtained after purchase may not be Low Halogen.
38 Intel® Optane™ memory is sold separately. Intel® Optane™ memory system acceleration does not replace or increase the DRAM in your system. Available for HP commercial desktops and notebooks and for select HP workstations (HP Z240
Tower/SFF, Z2 Mini, ZBook Studio, 15 and 17 G5) and requires a SATA HDD, 7th Gen or higher Intel® Core™ processor or Intel® Xeon® processor E3-1200 V6 product family or higher, BIOS version with Intel® Optane™ supported, Windows 10
version 1703 or higher, M.2 type 2280-S1-B-M connector on a PCH Remapped PCIe Controller and Lanes in a x2 or x4 configuration with B-M keys that meet NVMe™ Spec 1.1, and an Intel® Rapid Storage Technology (Intel® RST) 15.5 driver.
Sign up for updates hp.com/go/getupdated
© Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial
errors or omissions contained herein.

Intel, Xeon, Core, Thunderbolt, and Intel vPro are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of its proprietor and used by HP Inc.
under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. DisplayPort™ and the DisplayPort™ logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics
Standards Association (VESA®) in the United States and other countries. The NVIDIA logo and Quadro are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries. Page 233 of 709
4AA7-3455, August 2019
DOC-M
Datasheet
HP V220 21.5-inch Monitor
Experience crisp detail on the

Full HD V220 21.5-inch
Monitor with a clear 1920 x
1080 resolution. The
convenient connectivity,
adaptability, and affordable
price point are ideal for
everyday business.
Stunning clarity
● Optimize your work views on an ample 21.5-inch diagonal screen with Full HD 1920 x 1080
resolution and a 5M:1 Dynamic Contrast Ratio for a sharp, quality front of screen viewing
experience.1
Organized workspace
● Balance comfort and productivity with customizable tilt adjustment, an internal power supply,
and mounting capabilities with the included 100mm VESA pattern to mount the display on a wall
or to an arm or stand.2
Convenient connectivity
● Easily connect devices with centralized DVI and VGA ports for digital access and legacy
compatibility.
Featuring
● Reduce power consumption and help lower costs with an intelligent, energy-efficient design that
is ENERGY STAR® certified and EPEAT® Silver in China. The display also includes mercury-free
backlights and arsenic-free glass.
● Rest assured that your IT investment is supported by a three-year standard limited warranty. To
extend your protection, select optional HP Care Pack Services.
● Comfortably view content day or night with the integrated Low Blue Light function. TÜV
Rheinland certified, the HP V220 lets you easily toggle the blue light option on or off at your
convenience for optimal viewing.
● Perceive sharp, fluid movements with a flicker free monitor, allowing you to focus more on your
work without a flicker.
Page 234 of 709

Datasheet | HP V220 21.5-inch Monitor
HP V220 21.5-inch Monitor Specifications Table
Display Type TN with LED backlight
Display Size (diagonal) 54.61 cm (21.5”)
Viewing Angle 65° vertical; 90° horizontal
Brightness 200 cd/m² 1
Contrast Ratio 5000000:1 dynamic; 600:1 static 1
Response Ratio 5 ms on/off 1
Product colour Jack black
Aspect Ratio 16:9
Native Resolution FHD (1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz)
Resolutions Supported 1024 x 768; 1280 x 1024; 1280 x 720; 1280 x 800; 1440 x 900; 1600 x 900; 1680 x 1050; 1920 x 1080; 640 x 480; 720 x 400; 800 x 600
Display Features Anti-glare; Language selection; LED backlights; On-screen controls; Plug and Play; User programmable
User Controls Brightness; Color control; Contrast; Exit; Image control; Information; Language; Management; Power control; Input control; Menu control
Input Signal 1 DVI-D; 1 VGA
Input Power Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC
Power Consumption 23 W (maximum), 19 W (typical), 0.3 W (standby)
Dimensions with Stand 50.5 x 17.56 x 38.1 cm

(W x D x H)
Dimensions without 50.5 x 4.55 x 31.02 cm
Stand (W x D x H)
Weight 2.89 kg
With stand.
Ergonomic Features Tilt: -5 to +20°
Physical security Security lock-ready 3

features
Environmental Operating temperature: 5 to 35°C
Operating humidity: 20 to 80% non-condensing
Energy Efficiency ENERGY STAR® certified; EPEAT® Silver registered

Compliance
Certification and Australian-New Zealand MEPS; BIS; BSMI; CB; CCC; CE; CECP; CEL; FCC; ISC Mark; ISO 9241-307; KC; KCC; Microsoft WHQL Certification (Windows 10, Windows
8.1 and Windows 7); PSB; SEPA; SmartWay Transport Partnership (NA); TUV-S; UL; VCCI; Vietnam MEPS; WEEE; Low blue light
compliance
Environmental Arsenic-free display glass; Low halogen; Mercury-free display backlights 2
Specifications
What's in the box AC power cord; Documentation; VGA cable
See important legal disclaimers on the last page
Page 235 of 709

Datasheet | HP V220 21.5-inch Monitor
Recommended Accessories and Services
HP Single Monitor Arm The HP Single Monitor Arm is the perfect desk accessory for your work life. Sleek and streamlined, the HP Single Monitor
Arm is designed to complement the way you work.
Product number: BT861AA
HP Business PC Security Lock Help prevent chassis tampering and secure your PC and display in workspaces and public areas with the HP Business PC
Security Lock v2 Kit.
v2 Kit Product number: N3R93AA
HP 5-year Next Business Day Receive 5 years of next business day onsite repair from an HP-qualified technician for your computing device, if the issue
cannot be solved remotely. For more information on Care Pack services, please visit www.hp.com/go/cpc.
Onsite Standard Monitor Product number: U7935E
Hardware Support
Messaging Footnotes
1 All specifications represent the typical specifications provided by HP's component manufacturers; actual performance may vary either higher or lower.
2 Mounting hardware sold separately. Options sold separately.
3 EPEAT® registered where applicable. EPEAT registration varies by country. See www.epeat.net for registration status by country. See HP’s 3rd party option store for solar energy accessory at www.hp.com/go/options
4 HP Care Pack Services are sold separately. Service levels and response times for HP Care Pack Services may vary depending on your geographic location. Service starts from date of hardware purchase. Restrictions and
limitations apply. See www.hp.com/go/cpc for details. HP services are governed by the applicable HP terms and conditions of service provided or indicated to Customer at the time of purchase. Customer may have additional
statutory rights according to applicable local laws, and such rights are not in any way affected by the HP terms and conditions of service or the HP Limited Warranty provided with your HP Product.
Technical Specifications Footnotes

1 All specifications represent the typical specifications provided by HP's component manufacturers, actual performance may vary either higher or lower.
2 External power supplies, power cords, cables and peripherals are not Low Halogen. Service parts obtained after purchase may not be Low Halogen.
3 Lock is sold separately.
Sign up for updates

hp.com/go/getupdated
© Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. EPEAT® registered
where applicable. EPEAT registration varies by country. See www.epeat.net for registration status by country. See HP’s 3rd party option store for solar energy accessory at www.hp.com/go/options
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR® mark are registered trademarks of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. DisplayPort™ and the DisplayPort™ logo are trademarks owned by the Video Electronics Standards
Association (VESA®) in the United States and other countries. USB Type-C™ is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum.
4AA7-3225EEAP, Oct 2018
Page 236 of 709

Samsung SMART Signage
QBR / QBT series
Display any content in ultra-high definition with incredibly rich color on slim, efficient signage.
Through intelligent UHD upscaling technology, Samsung’s QBR and QBT series performs edge restoration
and noise reduction to deliver UHD picture quality even with lower resolution content. Backed by Tizen 4.0,
the QBR and QBT series also provides reinforced capability with multiple web formats and secured protection.
Additionally, its new slim design simplifies wall mounting and ensures seamless installation.
Highlights
• Engage customers with lifelike images through ultra high-definition resolution
• Deliver UHD-level picture quality even with lower resolution content through Crystal Processor 4K
supporting innovative UHD upscaling technology
• Dynamic Crystal Display allows viewers to enjoy a wider spectrum of colors, up to one billion shades
• Symmetrical, slim design simplifies installation and complements any environment
• Secure, PC-free operation through Knox and rigid three-layer protection
Page 237 of 709

Industry trend
With visual display technology continually improving, viewers have developed an ever-growing expectation for better – and
bigger – picture quality. Users, more than ever, want to captivate customers with truly like-like images and gain a competitive
edge over their industry peers with best-in-class displays. This is reflected in the fact that UHD resolution continues to grow
in popularity, becoming an essential way for brands to impress customers amid a wider variety of stunning, aesthetical visuals
and content. This trend is coupled with demand for larger screen sizes, particularly in the 75-inch and above category, enabling
businesses to differentiate themselves and display content in a more impactful way than ever before.
Ultra-high definition is the new normal * Demand for bigger screens is on the rise **
85%
UHD digital signage portion 43%
42%
41%
40%
39%
59%
4,530 4,715
4,006 4,270
3,297
2019 2024 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024
Revenue($) 75” ↑ 75” ↓ 75” ↑(%) Revenue(M$)
*,** Source : Omdia, Public Displays Market Tracker Q1 2020, July 2020. Revenues in USD Millions. Does Not Include Consumer TVs Used as Public Displays. Not an Endorsement of Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd.
Any Reliance on these results is at the third-party’s own risk.
Why Samsung’s QBR / QBT series?

Samsung’s superior visual display technology has positioned them as the industry leader in the digital signage market for a
decade* and Samsung brand having been No.1 in sales for 11 consecutive years in the display market by Omdia**. As an expert
in picture quality in the display industry, Samsung is able to deliver best-in-class picture quality through their QBR and QBT
series. The signage provides rich and flawless colors, sleek and durable design, powerful performance through SSSP 6 and
secured protection. Samsung’s QBR and QBT series is also able to upscale the low resolution content to UHD picture quality.
For commercial displays, this technology advancement means highly visible signage with unmatched accuracy to help capture
the attention of potential customers. It also means savings both in cost and time for businesses who can produce content more
inexpensively at a lower resolution and still display it in stunning UHD quality.
* Results based on IHS Technology report “Public Displays Market Tracker”, 2009 – 2018.Information is not an endorsement of Samsung. Any reliance on these results is at the third party’s own risk.
** According to market research company “Omdia”. Ranking in terms of shipments. Results are not an endorsement of Samsung. Any reliance on these results is at the third-party’s own risk.
$
$$
Crystal Dynamic Slim & flat back

Processor 4K Crystal Display design SSSP 6
Page 238 of 709

2
Key features
FHD panel UHD panel

2M pixels 8M pixels
Incredible UHD picture quality

Samsung’s new QBR and QBT series is able to capture customer attention by providing an incredibly clear picture, showcasing lifelike images
and intricate details better than ever before thanks to ultra high-definition 4K resolution.
Conventional QBR / QBT Series Conventional QBR / QBT Series Conventional QBR / QBT Series
UHD UHD UHD
Intelligent UHD Engine Noise Reduction Edge Restoration
Crystal Processor 4K
Samsung’s global leadership in display technology and picture quality spans more than a decade. Thanks to superior semi-conductor
technology, Samsung has developed the powerful video processor available. Additionally, intelligent UHD upscaling technology is a
cutting-edge solution based on Samsung’s proprietary UHD Processor that allows content developed at a lower resolution to be elevated to
UHD-level quality. It also performs edge restoration and noise reduction to optimize on-screen text and imagery with crisp edges and fine
detail.
Samsung Dynamic
Conventional Crystal Display
HDR+
1 Billion Color Wide Color Gamut
Dynamic Crystal Display

Dynamic Crystal Display is what brings the incredible, lifelike color to Samsung displays. Using 10-bit processing, the displays are able to
showcase a wider spectrum of colors — up to a billion different shades — capturing subtle differences for flawless color expression, critical
to businesses in ensuring brand consistency across communication channels. The QBR and QBT series also features HDR+ functionality that
converts standard definition (SDR) content to HDR quality forPage
sharper contrast
239 of 709and more vivid colors.
3
Key features
Symmetric
Side power inlet for

no depth extension
Slim Depth
Narrow Bezel
Long Life Cycle
Slim and symmetrical design Clean cable management

The all-new slim and symmetrical design of the QBR and QBT series In a corporate or retail environment, the back of a display is often
significantly simplifies wall mounting the display and ensures visible to customers. With the QBR and QBT series’ new cable guide
installation is a seamless process. The display’s power inlet direction feature retailers can tuck messy cables away from view. This allows
has been redesigned to sit flush against the wall. The new design for a clean and more visually-appealing customer shopping
sets guarantees a long life cycle ensuring the QBR and QBT series experience.
will stand the test of time.
Saving TCO PC-less Enhanced

Solution Security
Any PC
Office 365
VMware Horizon Easy Development Reinforced Compatibility High Expandability Secured Protection
Samsung Workspace secured by Knox Powerful, all-in-one solution

Samsung Workspace is a powerful new feature fortified by The Samsung SMART Signage Platform (SSSP) is an open-source,
proprietary Knox security technology allowing users to create an all-in-one solution embedded in Samsung SMART signage that
enhanced virtual collaboration workspace without needing a PC in simplifies installation and maintenance. With SSSP, there is no need
the room, or any physical connection. Simply connect a keyboard and for any external devices to communicate with the server or play
mouse to the display and immediately get to work accessing a PC digital media enjoying easy development, reinforced capability with
remotely or web-based cloud services such as Microsoft Office 365 multiple web formats, and secured protection.
and VMWare Horizon.
* Samsung Workspace feature support may vary by region and market conditions.
* The scheduled availability of this feature varies by model.
EMC Class B EPEAT registered
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth built-in Industry standard certified

The QBR and QBT series features a nearly endless range of QBR displays are EMC class B compliant, providing a safe and
business use cases thanks to built-in Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Wireless healthy viewing environment by meeting strict standards of
connectivity allows for personalized and interactive services electromagnetic wave emission and assuring reliable operation
including enabling integration with beacon technology in store, even near other electronic equipment. The displays are also
while also simplifying how businesses showcase content. registered by EPEAT, the global ecolabel for IT, confirming the
* Image is for illustrative purposes only, specific application or program may have to be developed for hardware is sustainable for the full product lifecycle, from design
the depicted usage scenario.
and production to energy use and recycling.
Page 240 of 709
* QB85R and QB98T have EMC class A certification and not registered by EPEAT.
4
Specifications
Model QB43R QB50R QB55R QB65R QB75R
Class 43 50 55 65 75
Diagonal Size
Measured 42.5 50 54.6 64.5 74.5
Type Edge LED BLU Edge LED BLU Edge LED BLU Edge LED BLU Edge LED BLU
Resolution UHD (3840 x 2160) UHD (3840 x 2160) UHD (3840 x 2160) UHD (3840 x 2160) UHD (3840 x 2160)
Pixel Pitch (mm) 0.2451 x 0.2451 0.285 x 0.285 0.105 x 0.315 0.372 x 0.372 0.42975 x 0.42975
Active Display Area 941.184 (H) x 529.416 (V) 1095.84(H) x 616.41(V) 1209.6(H) x 680.4(V) 1428.48 (H) x 803.52 (V) 1650.24 (H) x 928.26 (V)
Brightness(Typ.) 350 350 350 350 350
Panel Contrast Ratio (Typ.) 4000:1 4000:1 4000:1 4000:1 4000:1
Viewing Angle(H/V) 178/178 178/178 178/178 178/178 178/178
Response Time (G to G) 8ms(Typ.) 8ms(Typ.) 8ms(Typ.) 8ms(Typ.) 8ms(Typ.)
Display Colors 16.7M(True Display) 16.7M(True Display) 16.7M(True Display) 16.7M(True Display) 16.7M(True Display)
1.07B(Ditherd 10bit) 1.07B(Ditherd 10bit) 1.07B(Ditherd 10bit) 1.07B(Ditherd 10bit) 1.07B(Ditherd 10bit)
Color Gamut 92% (DCI-P3, CIE 1976) 92% (DCI-P3, CIE 1976) 92% (DCI-P3, CIE 1976) 92% (DCI-P3, CIE 1976) 92% (DCI-P3, CIE 1976)
Operation Hour 16/7 16/7 16/7 16/7 16/7
Haze 2% 2% 2% 2% 2%
Dynamic C/R MEGA MEGA MEGA MEGA MEGA
H-Scanning Frequency 30 ~ 81kHZ 30 ~ 81kHZ 30 ~ 81kHZ 30 ~ 81kHZ 30 ~ 81kHZ
Display
V-Scanning Frequency 48 ~ 75HZ 48 ~ 75HZ 48 ~ 75HZ 48 ~ 75HZ 48 ~ 75HZ
Maximum Pixel Frequency 594MHz 594MHz 594MHz 594MHz 594MHz
Sound Speaker Type Built in Speaker(10W + 10W) Built in Speaker(10W + 10W) Built in Speaker(10W + 10W) Built in Speaker(10W + 10W) Built in Speaker(10W + 10W)
RGB DVI-D DVI-D DVI-D DVI-D DVI-D
VIDEO HDMI 2.0 (2) HDMI 2.0 (2) HDMI 2.0 (2) HDMI 2.0 (2) HDMI 2.0 (2)
INPUT HDCP HDCP 2.2 HDCP 2.2 HDCP 2.2 HDCP 2.2 HDCP 2.2
AUDIO Stereo Mini Jack, DVI/HDMI/ Stereo Mini Jack, DVI/HDMI/ Stereo Mini Jack, DVI/HDMI/ Stereo Mini Jack, DVI/HDMI/ Stereo Mini Jack, DVI/HDMI/
Audio(Common) Audio(Common) Audio(Common) Audio(Common) Audio(Common)
USB USB 2.0 x 2 USB 2.0 x 2 USB 2.0 x 2 USB 2.0 x 2 USB 2.0 x 2
RGB N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Connectivity VIDEO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
OUTPUT AUDIO Stereo Mini Jack Stereo Mini Jack Stereo Mini Jack Stereo Mini Jack Stereo Mini Jack
Power Out N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
USB N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
EXTERNAL CONTROL RS232C(in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45 RS232C(in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45 RS232C(in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45 RS232C(in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45 RS232C(in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45
EXTERNAL SENSOR IR IR IR IR IR
Tuner N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Type Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal
Power Supply AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz
Max[W/h] 110 143 143 181.5 231
Typical[W/h] 67 86 108 128 150
Power
Rating[W/h] 100 130 130 165 210
Power Consumption
BTU(Max) 375.1 487.6 487.6 618.9 787.7
Sleep mode 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Off mode N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Set 967.5 x 557.7 x 48.3 1121.4 x 643.9 x 46.3 1235.1 x 707.9 x 46.3 1453.9 x 831.0 x 46.3 1681.1 x 960.1 x 49.7
Dimension(mm)
Package 1095 x 676 x 151 1269 x 784 x 152 1402 x 858 x 163 1611 x 973 x 185 1871 x 1127 x 223
Set 10 13.4 18.1 24.9 38.3
Weight (kg)
Mechanical Package 13.3 17.6 23.6 33.3 49
Spec VESA Mount 200 X 200 200 X 200 200 X 200 400 X 400 400 X 400
Protection Glass N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Stand Type Foot Stand (Optional) Foot Stand (Optional) Foot Stand (Optional) No No
Bezel Width (Top/Side/Bot) (mm) 9.2mm(U/L/R), 11.2mm(B) 9.2mm(U/L/R), 11.2mm(B) 9.2mm(U/L/R), 11.2mm(B) 9.2mm(U/L/R), 11.2mm(B) 11.5mm(U/L/R), 12.5mm(B)
Operating Temperature 0℃~ 40℃ 0℃~ 40℃ 0℃~ 40℃ 0℃~ 40℃ 0℃~ 40℃
Operation
Humidity 10~80% 10~80% 10~80% 10~80% 10~80%
UHD Signage Display UHD Signage Display UHD Signage Display UHD Signage Display UHD Signage Display
Key Slim & Light Signage with Slim & Light Signage with Slim & Light Signage with Slim & Light Signage with Slim & Light Signage with
Built-in MagicInfo S6, SSSP 6.0 Built-in MagicInfo S6, SSSP 6.0 Built-in MagicInfo S6, SSSP 6.0 Built-in MagicInfo S6, SSSP 6.0 Built-in MagicInfo S6, SSSP 6.0
Temperature Sensor,Pivot Display, Temperature Sensor,Pivot Display, Temperature Sensor,Pivot Display, Temperature Sensor,Pivot Display, Temperature Sensor,Pivot Display,
H/W Clock Battery(168hrs Clock Keeping), Clock Battery(168hrs Clock Keeping), Clock Battery(168hrs Clock Keeping), Clock Battery(168hrs Clock Keeping), Clock Battery(168hrs Clock Keeping),
Built in Speaker(10W 2ch), IP5x Rating, Built in Speaker(10W 2ch), IP5x Rating, Built in Speaker(10W 2ch), IP5x Rating, Built in Speaker(10W 2ch), IP5x Rating, Built in Speaker(10W 2ch), IP5x Rating,
Special Wi-Fi/BT Wi-Fi/BT Wi-Fi/BT Wi-Fi/BT Wi-Fi/BT
Auto Source Switching & Recovery, Auto Source Switching & Recovery, Auto Source Switching & Recovery, Auto Source Switching & Recovery, Auto Source Switching & Recovery,
S/W LFD Home UI, Button Lock, Hot key LFD Home UI, Button Lock, Hot key LFD Home UI, Button Lock, Hot key LFD Home UI, Button Lock, Hot key LFD Home UI, Button Lock, Hot key
option, Plug&Play (Initial Setting) option, Plug&Play (Initial Setting) option, Plug&Play (Initial Setting) option, Plug&Play (Initial Setting) option, Plug&Play (Initial Setting)
Processor Coretex A72 1.7GHz Quad-Core CPU Cortex A72 1.7GHz Quad-Core CPU Coretex A72 1.7GHz Quad-Core CPU Coretex A72 1.7GHz Quad-Core CPU Coretex A72 1.7GHz Quad-Core CPU
On-Chip L1 Instruction Cache : 48KB L1 Instruction Cache : 48KB L1 Instruction Cache : 48KB L1 Instruction Cache : 48KB L1 Instruction Cache : 48KB
Cache L1 Data Cache : 32KB L1 Data Cache : 32KB L1 Data Cache : 32KB L1 Data Cache : 32KB L1 Data Cache : 32KB
Memory L2 Cache : 2MB L2 Cache : 2MB L2 Cache : 2MB L2 Cache : 2MB L2 Cache : 2MB
Clock Speed 1.7GHz 1.7GHz 1.7GHz 1.7GHz 1.7GHz
Feature
Main
Memory 2.5GB 2.5GB 2.5GB 2.5GB 2.5GB
Interface LPDDR4 1.5GHz 64bit LPDDR4 1.5GHz 64bit LPDDR4 1.5GHz 64bit LPDDR4 1.5GHz 64bit LPDDR4 1.5GHz 64bit
Graphic resolution : 1920x1080 Graphic resolution : 1920x1080 Graphic resolution : 1920x1080 Graphic resolution : 1920x1080 Graphic resolution : 1920x1080
Internal Player Graphics Output resolution : 3840x2160 (Scale Output resolution : 3840x2160 (Scale Output resolution : 3840x2160 (Scale Output resolution : 3840x2160 (Scale Output resolution : 3840x2160 (Scale
(Embedded H/W) up from graphic processing result.) up from graphic processing result.) up from graphic processing result.) up from graphic processing result.) up from graphic processing result.)
Storage 8GB (3.88GB Occupied by O/S, 8GB (3.88GB Occupied by O/S, 8GB (3.88GB Occupied by O/S, 8GB (3.88GB Occupied by O/S, 8GB (3.88GB Occupied by O/S,
(FDM) 4.12GB Available) 4.12GB Available) 4.12GB Available) 4.12GB Available) 4.12GB Available)
*Video Decoder : MPEG-1/2/4, H.263, *Video Decoder : MPEG-1/2/4, H.263, *Video Decoder : MPEG-1/2/4, H.263, *Video Decoder : MPEG-1/2/4, H.263, *Video Decoder : MPEG-1/2/4, H.263,
Multimedia H.264/AVC, UHD H.264/AVC, VC-1, H.264/AVC, UHD H.264/AVC, VC-1, H.264/AVC, UHD H.264/AVC, VC-1, H.264/AVC, UHD H.264/AVC, VC-1, H.264/AVC, UHD H.264/AVC, VC-1,
AVS+, HEVC, JPEG, PNG, VP8, VP9 AVS+, HEVC, JPEG, PNG, VP8, VP9 AVS+, HEVC, JPEG, PNG, VP8, VP9 AVS+, HEVC, JPEG, PNG, VP8, VP9 AVS+, HEVC, JPEG, PNG, VP8, VP9
*Audio Decoder : AC3 (DD), MPEG *Audio Decoder : AC3 (DD), MPEG *Audio Decoder : AC3 (DD), MPEG *Audio Decoder : AC3 (DD), MPEG *Audio Decoder : AC3 (DD), MPEG
IO Ports USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0
Operating
System Tizen 4.0 (VDLinux) Tizen 4.0 (VDLinux) Tizen 4.0 (VDLinux) Tizen 4.0 (VDLinux) Tizen 4.0 (VDLinux)
Safety 60950-1 60950-1 60950-1 60950-1 60950-1

EMC Class B Class B Class B Class B Class B
Certification Environment ENERGY STAR 8.0, Epeat ENERGY STAR 8.0, Epeat ENERGY STAR 8.0, Epeat ENERGY STAR 8.0, Epeat ENERGY STAR 8.0, Epeat
Security 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise) (‘20.1~) 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise) (‘20.1~) 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise) (‘20.1~) 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise) (‘20.1~) 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise) (‘20.1~)
: EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP : EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP : EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP : EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP : EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP
Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card, Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card, Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card, Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card, Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card,
Included Power Cord, Remote Controller, Power Cord, Remote Controller, Power Cord, Remote Controller, Power Cord, Remote Controller, Power Cord, Remote Controller,
Batteries Batteries Batteries Batteries Batteries
Stand STN-L4355F STN-L4355F STN-L4355F No No
Accessories WMN4277SE (Land Only)
Mount WMN4070SE (Land Only) WMN4070SE (Land Only) WMN4070SE (Land Only) WMN4277SE (Land Only)
Optional WMN6575SE
Specialty CML400XK CML400XK CML400XK CML450K CML450K
Media Player N/A
Page
N/A
241 of 709 N/A N/A N/A
5
Specifications
Model QB85R QB98T
Class 85 98
Diagonal Size
Measured 84.5 97.5"/247.7cm
Type Edge LED BLU Edge LED BLU
Resolution UHD (3840 x 2160) 3840x2160(16:9)
Pixel Pitch (mm) 0.4875 x 0.4875 0.562 x 0.562 (mm)
Active Display Area 1872.0(H) x 1053.01(V) 2158.848(H) x 1214.352(V)
Brightness(Typ.) 350 350nit
Panel Contrast Ratio (Typ.) 4000:1 4000:1
Viewing Angle(H/V) 178/178 178/178
Response Time (G to G) 8ms(Typ.) 8ms(Typ.)
Display Colors 16.7M(True Display) 16.7M(True Display)
1.07B(Ditherd 10bit) 1.07B(Ditherd 10bit)
Color Gamut 92% (DCI-P3, CIE 1976) 72%
Operation Hour 16/7 24/7
Haze 2% 25%
Dynamic C/R MEGA Mega
H-Scanning Frequency 30 ~ 81kHZ 30 ~ 81kHZ
Display
V-Scanning Frequency 48 ~ 75HZ 48 ~ 75HZ
Maximum Pixel Frequency 594MHz 594MHz
Sound Speaker Type Built in Speaker(10W + 10W) DVI-D, Display Port 1.2 (1)
RGB DVI-D HDMI 2.0 (2)
VIDEO HDMI 2.0 (2) HDCP2.2
INPUT HDCP HDCP 2.2 Stereo mini Jack, DVI, HDMI
AUDIO Stereo Mini Jack, DVI/HDMI/Audio(Common) USB 2.0 x 2
USB USB 2.0 x 2 HDMI 2.0 (Loop-out)
RGB N/A N/A
Connectivity VIDEO N/A Stereo mini Jack
OUTPUT AUDIO Stereo Mini Jack N/A
Power Out N/A N/A
USB N/A RS232C(in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45
EXTERNAL CONTROL RS232C(in/out) thru stereo jack, RJ45 IR
EXTERNAL SENSOR IR N/A
Tuner N/A N/A
Type Internal Internal
Power Supply AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz AC 100 - 240 V~ (+/- 10 %), 50/60 Hz
Max[W/h] 198 528
Typical[W/h] 143 372
Power
Rating[W/h] 180 480
Power Consumption
BTU(Max) 675.2 1800.5
Sleep mode 0.5 0.5
Off mode N/A N/A
Set 1897.8 x 1080.8 x 56.7 2194.2 x 1250.2 x 96.2
Dimension(mm)
Package 2090 x 1247 x 260 TBD
Set 48.4 TBD
Weight (kg)
Mechanical Package 63.7 TBD
Spec VESA Mount 600 X 400 800 x 400
Protection Glass N/A N/A
Stand Type N/A No
Bezel Width (Top/Side/Bot) (mm) 9.8mm(U/L/R), 11.8mm(B) TBD
Operating Temperature 0℃~ 40℃ 0℃~ 40℃
Operation
Humidity 10~80% 10~80%
UHD Signage Display UHD Signage Display
Key Slim & Light Signage with Slim & Light Signage with
Built-in MagicInfo S6, SSSP 6.0 Built-in MagicInfo S6, SSSP 6.0
H/W Temperature Sensor,Pivot Display, Clock Battery(168hrs Clock Keeping), Built in Speaker(10W 2ch), Temperature Sensor,Pivot Display, Clock Battery(168hrs Clock Keeping), Built in Speaker(10W 2ch),
IP5x Rating, Wi-Fi/BT Video Wall Daisy Chain(HDCP2.2:4EA,HDCP1.4:7EA), Wi-Fi/BT
Special Auto Source Switching & Recovery,
S/W Auto Source Switching & Recovery,
LFD Home UI, Button Lock, Hot key option, Plug&Play (Initial Setting), 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise)
LFD Home UI, Button Lock, Hot key option, Plug&Play (Initial Setting)
Certified
Processor Cortex A72 1.7GHz Quad-Core CPU Cortex A72 1.7GHz Quad-Core CPU
On-Chip L1 Instruction Cache : 48KB L1 Instruction Cache : 48KB
Cache L1 Data Cache : 32KB L1 Data Cache : 32KB
Memory L2 Cache : 2MB L2 Cache : 2MB
Feature Clock Speed 1.7GHz 1.7GHz
Main
Memory 2.5GB 2.5GB
Interface LPDDR4 1.5GHz 64bit LPDDR4 1.5GHz 64bit
Internal Player
(Embedded H/W) Graphics Graphic resolution : 1920x1080 Graphic resolution : 1920x1080
Output resolution : 3840x2160 (Scale up from graphic processing result.) Output resolution : 3840x2160 (Scale up from graphic processing result.)
Storage 8GB 8GB
(FDM) (3.88GB Occupied by O/S, 4.12GB Available) (3.88GB Occupied by O/S, 4.12GB Available)
Multimedia *Video Decoder : MPEG-1/2/4, H.263, H.264/AVC, UHD H.264/AVC, VC-1, AVS+, HEVC, JPEG, PNG, VP8, *Video Decoder : MPEG-1/2/4, H.263, H.264/AVC, UHD H.264/AVC, VC-1, AVS+, HEVC, JPEG, PNG, VP8,
VP9 *Audio Decoder : AC3 (DD), MPEG VP9 *Audio Decoder : AC3 (DD), MPEG
IO Ports USB 2.0 USB 2.0
Operating
System Tizen 4.0 (VDLinux) Tizen 4.0 (VDLinux)
Safety 60950-1 60950-1

EMC Class A Class A
Certification Environment N/A N/A
Security 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise) (‘20.1~) 802.1x(WPA2 Enterprise) (‘20.1~)
: EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP : EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP
Included Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card, Quick Setup Guide, Warranty Card,
Power Cord, Remote Controller, Batteries Power Cord, Remote Controller, Batteries
Stand - -
Accessories Mount WMN8200SF / WMN8200SG WMN8200SG
Optional
Specialty - -
Media Player N/A N/A
Page 242 of 709

6
Note
Page 243 of 709

About Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. inspires the world and shapes the future with transformative ideas and technologies. The company is redefining
the worlds of TVs, smartphones, wearable devices, tablets, cameras, digital appliances, medical equipment, network systems, and
semiconductor and LED solutions. For the latest news, please visit the Samsung Newsroom at news.samsung.com.
SMART Signage
For more information about Samsung SMART Signage QBR / QBT Series Displays, visit
www.samsung.com/business or www.samsung.com/displaysolutions
Copyright © 2019 Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. All rights reserved. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd.
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Non-metric weights and measurements are approximate. All data were
deemed correct at time of creation. Samsung is not liable for errors or omissions. All brand, product, service names and logos are trademarks
and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners and are hereby recognized and acknowledged.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

416, Maetan 3-dong, Yeongtong-gu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do 443-772, Korea
2019-09
Page 244 of 709

Handing Over
Document
Design Details and Calculations
Page 245 of 709

BMS IO SUMMARY - GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER, BANGALORE
Soft Cable route
SN Description Qty AI AO DI DO Required Field Devices Cable Schedule No. Of Runs Remarks
IO From To
A DDC-1 - 8th Floor BMS Room
Ceiling Suspended Units 14
1 CSU On/Off Command 14 Relay Contact to CSU Starter Panel.
4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 14 DDC Panel CSU Starter Panel
2 CSU On/Off Status 14 Potential Free Contact from CSU Starter Panel.
Battery Room Exhaust Fan 2
Exhaust Fan Starter Potential Free Contact from Exhaust Fan Starter
1 Battery Room - 1 & 2 Exhaust Fan On/Off Status 2 4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 2 DDC Panel
Panel Panel.
Main Incoming Panel 2
1 MCCB Breakers - On/Off Status 18 18
4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 18 DDC Panel Main Incoming Panel Potential Free Contact from Breaker Panel.
2 MCCB Breakers - Trip Status 18 18
UPS Output Panel - 400 kVA 2
1 MCCB Breakers - On/Off Status 24 24 UPS Output Panel -

4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 24 DDC Panel Potential Free Contact from Breaker Panel.
2 MCCB Breakers - Trip Status 24 24 400 kVA
UPS Output Panel - 100 kVA 2
1 MCCB Breakers - On/Off Status 14 14 UPS Output Panel -

4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 12 DDC Panel Potential Free Contact from Breaker Panel.
2 MCCB Breakers - Trip Status 14 14 100 kVA
Door Access Control System 16
1 Common Critical Alarm 16 16 4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 8 DDC Panel ACS AFO Module Potential Free Contact from ACS AFO Module.
2 Door Open Too Long Alarm 16 16 4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 16 DDC Panel ACS Door Controller Potential Free Contact from ACS Door Controller.
3 Emergency Evacuation 1 1
SOFTWARE INTEGRATION
Main Incoming Panel 2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel Main Incoming Panel Modbus RS-485 Communication
1 ACB Breakers - On/Off Status 8 8
2 ACB Breakers - Trip Status 8 8
3 ACB Breakers - Trip Details 8 8

UPS (20 KVA) 2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel 20KVA UPS Modbus RS-485 Communication
1 On/Off Status 2
2 A-B Input Phase Voltage 2
3 B-C Input Phase Voltage 2
4 C-A Input Phase Voltage 2
5 Input Current 6
6 Output Current 2
7 Output Phase Voltage 2
8 System Status 2
9 Battery Status 2
Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
10 Battery Level Indicator 2
11 Estimated Minutes Remaining 2
12 Battery Bank Voltage 2
13 Battery Charging Status 2
14 Input Frequency 2
15 Output Frequency 2
16 UPS Output on Bypass 2
17 Inverter On/Off State 2
18 Alarm 2
Page 246 of 709

Soft Cable route
IO From To
400KVA & 100KVA
UPS (400 KVA & 100 KVA) 4 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. 20KVA UPS Modbus RS-485 Communication
UPS
1 A-B Input Phase Voltage 4
2 B-C Input Phase Voltage 4
3 C-A Input Phase Voltage 4
4 Phase A Input Current 4
5 Phase B Input Current 4
6 Phase C Input Current 4
7 A-B Output Phase Voltage 4
8 B-C Output Phase Voltage 4
9 C-A Output Phase Voltage 4
10 Phase A Output Current 4
11 Phase B Output Current 4
12 Phase C Output Current 4
13 System Input Power Problem 4
14 System Status 4
15 Battery Status 4 Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
16 Battery Volts For Cabinet/Bus Voltage 4
17 Battery Percentage Charge 4
18 Battery Time Remaining 4
19 Battery Charging Status 2
20 Inlet Air Temperature 4
21 Equipment Over Temperature 4
22 Input Frequency 4
23 Output Frequency 4
24 UPS Output on Bypass 4
25 Output Overload 4
26 Inverter On/Off State 4
27 Output Power (KW) 4
28 System Operating Time 4
29 Average System Efficiency 4
Battery Monitoring System - 400 kVA & 100kVA Battery Monitoring
2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel Modbus RS-485 Communication
(Electrical Room-1) Panel
1 System Status 2
2 System Warning/Fault Status 2
3 System Voltage 2
4 System Current 2
5 Battery Use Status 2 Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
6 Rack Status 5
7 Rack Voltage 5
8 Module Status 48
9 Module Temperature 48
Battery Monitoring System - 400 kVA & 100kVA Battery Monitoring
2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel Modbus RS-485 Communication
(Electrical Room-2) Panel
1 System Status 2
2 System Warning/Fault Status 2
3 System Voltage 2
4 System Current 2
5 Battery Use Status 2 Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
6 Rack Status 5
7 Rack Voltage 5
8 Module Status 48
9 Module Temperature 48
Page 247 of 709

Soft Cable route
IO From To
Isolation
Isolation Transformer 2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel Modbus RS-485 Communication
Transformer
1 Voltage (Vab,Vbc,Vca) 6
2 Current(Ia,Ib,Ic) 6
3 Frequency 2
4 Total KWH 2 Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
5 Total Power Factor 2
6 PT Ratio 2
7 CT Ratio 2
TOTAL IO FOR DDC-1 - - 160 15 432

Spare IO (10%) - - 16 2 43
Total IO Including Spare - - 176 17 475
Controller Selected - PXC100-E.D 1 0 0 0 0
Power Supply Module - TXS1.12F10 2 0 0 0 0
Power Supply Module - TXS1.EF10 1 0 0 0 0
Modules Selected - TXM1.6R 3 0 0 18 0
Modules Selected - TXM1.16D 12 0 192 0 0
Modules Selected - TXI2.OPEN 3 0 0 0 480
Modules Selected - TXI2-S.OPEN 2 0 0 0 80
Total IO's Provided 0 192 18 560
Actual Spare IO Provided - 32 3 128
% Spare IO Provided - 20% 20% 30%
DDC Panel Size (1000 x 1400 x 300) 1
B DDC-2A & 2B - 8th Floor BMS Room

Room Temperature & Humidity 26
4C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened, Ni 1000 signal for temperature and 0-10V signal
1 BMS Room - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
2Cx1.0 sq. mm. screened for humidity.
2 Backup Room - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 4C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened, 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor Ni 1000 signal for temperature and 0-10V signal
3 Staging Room - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
4 Network Room - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
5 Mux Room 1 - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
6 Mux Room 2 - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
7 Store Room - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
8 Novac Room - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
9 Electrical Room 1 - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
10 Electrical Room 2 - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
11 Battery Room 1 - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
12 Battery Room 2 - Temperature & RH 1 2 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
13 Server Room - Temperature & RH 14 28 QFA2020 1,1 DDC Panel Temp. & RH sensor
Page 248 of 709

Soft Cable route
IO From To
Hydrogen Level
1 Battery Room 1 & 2 - Hydrogen Level 2 2 MC2-D-P3440-A-0-P 4C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. 2 DDC Panel Hydrogen Sensor 0-10V signal from Hydrogen Sensor.
Rodent Repellant System 3
Rodent Repellant Potential Free Contact from Rodent Repellant
1 Panel Healthy Status 3 4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 2 DDC Panel
Panel Panel.
Water Leak Detection System 3
1 WLD Panel 1 - Healthy Status 1 1
2 WLD Panel 1 - Common Alarm 1 1
3 WLD Panel 1 - Zone 1 Water Leak Alarm 1 1 4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 3 DDC Panel WLD Panel - 1 Potential Free Contact from WLD Panel.
4 WLD Panel 1 - Zone 2 Water Leak Alarm 1 1
5 WLD Panel 1 - Zone 3 Water Leak Alarm 1 1
6 WLD Panel 2 & 3 - Healthy Status 2 2
7 WLD Panel 2 & 3 - Common Alarm 2 2
8 WLD Panel 2 & 3 - Zone 1 Water Leak Alarm 2 2

4C x 1.0 sq. mm. unscreened. 6 DDC Panel WLD Panel - 2 & 3 Potential Free Contact from WLD Panel.
PAC/PAHU (Electrical Room - 1 & 2) 4 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel PAHU Unit Modbus RS-485 Communication
1 System Status 4
2 Unit Operating State 4
3 Fan Speed 4
4 Cooling Valve Position 4
5 Supply Air Temperature 4
6 Return Air Temperature 4
7 Return Humidity 4
8 System Static Pressure 4
9 Energy Consumption 4
10 High Room Temperature 4
11 Low Room Temperature 4
12 High Room Humidity 4
13 Low Room Humidity 4
14 Humidifer Issue 4 Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
15 Chilled Water Loss of Flow 4
16 High Chilled Water Temperature 4
17 Chilled Water Inlet Temperature 4
18 Chilled Water Outlet Temperature 4
19 Chilled Water Flow Rate 4
20 Loss Of Airflow 4
Page 249 of 709

Soft Cable route
IO From To
21 Master Unit Communication Lost 4
22 Unit Disabled 4
23 Humidifier Low Water 4
24 Heater - Overheated 4
25 Cond Pump - High Water 4
26 Automatic Transfer Switch - Active Power Supply 4
27 Filter Status 4
PAC/PAHU (Network Room) 2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel PAHU Unit Modbus RS-485 Communication
1 System Status 2
3 Fan Speed 2
7 Return Humidity 2
22 Unit Disabled 2
27 Filter Status 2
PAC4200 Energy
Energy Meter (PAC4200) 14 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel Modbus TCP/IP Communication
Meter
1 Voltage V12 14
2 Voltage V23 14
3 Voltage V31 14
4 Current I1 14
5 Current I2 14
6 Current I3 14 Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
7 Total KVAh 14
8 Total KWh 14
9 Total KW 14
10 Frequency 14
11 Average Power Factor 14
Page 250 of 709

Soft Cable route
IO From To
Energy Meter (7KT) - For Main Incoming Panel 2 &
13 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel 7KT Energy Meter Modbus RS-485 Communication
100 KVA UPS Output Panel 2
1 Voltage V12 13
2 Voltage V23 13
3 Voltage V31 13
4 Current I1 13
5 Current I2 13
6 Current I3 13
7 Total KWh 13
8 Total KW 13
9 Frequency 13
TOTAL IO FOR DDC-2A & 2B 54 - 20 - 446

Spare IO (10%) 5 - 2 - 45
Total IO Including Spare 59 - 22 - 491
Modules Selected - TXM1.8U 8 64 0 0 0
Actual Spare IO Provided 10 4 - 194
% Spare IO Provided 18.52% 20% - 43%
DDC Panel Size (760 x 760 x 210) 1
Remote Enclosure Size (800 x 600 x 220) 1
C DDC-3 - 8th Floor BMS Room

In-row Units 15 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel In-row units Modbus RS-485 Communication
1 System Status 15
3 Fan Speed 15
7 Return Humidity 15
Page 251 of 709

Soft Cable route
IO From To
22 Unit Disabled 15
25 Filter Status 15
Energy Meter (7KT) - For Main Incoming Panel 1 &
100 KVA UPS Output Panel 1, EMDB Panel & 16 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel 7KT Energy Meter Modbus RS-485 Communication
Heater/Humidifier Panel
1 Voltage V12 16
2 Voltage V23 16
3 Voltage V31 16
4 Current I1 16
5 Current I2 16
6 Current I3 16
7 Total KWh 16
8 Total KW 16
9 Frequency 16
Energy Meter (7KT) - For 400 KVA UPS Output
22 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. screened. DDC Panel 7KT Energy Meter Modbus RS-485 Communication
Panel 1 & 2, BBT Feed Box
1 Voltage V12 22
2 Voltage V23 22
3 Voltage V31 22
4 Current I1 22
5 Current I2 22
6 Current I3 22
7 Total KWh 22
8 Total KW 22
9 Frequency 22
TOTAL IO FOR DDC-3 - - - - 785

Spare IO (10%) - - - - 79
Total IO Including Spare - - - - 864
Controller Selected - PXC001-E.D with RS-1 1 0 0 0 800
Actual Spare IO Provided - - - 1,278
% Spare IO Provided - - - 163%
Page 252 of 709

Soft Cable route
IO From To
E SOFTWARE INTEGRATION
Directly integrated to Desigo CC via SNMP
Rack iPDU 100
Protocol.
1 On/Off Status 100
2 Alarm 100
3 Overload Status 100
4 Total kWh 100
5 Total Power 100 Subject to parameter availability from OEM.
6 Voltage (Phasewise) 300
7 Current (Phasewise) 300
8 Temperature 100
9 Humidity 100
Directly integrated to Desigo CC via Bacnet IP
Fire Alarm System 1 200
protocol.
Page 253 of 709

Soft Cable route
SN Description Qty AI AO DI DO Alarm Trend Required Field Devices Cable Schedule No. Of Runs Remarks
IO From To
A DDC-4
WATER COOLED CHILLERS - PLANT ROOM 1
VOLT FREE CONTACT TO CHILLER PLANT B CPM
1 CHILLER PLANT B ENABLE/DISABLE COMMAND 1
PANEL FROM 8TH FLOOR BMS
VOLT FREE CONTACT TO 8TH FLOOR BMS FROM
2 CHILLER PLANT B COMMON RUN STATUS 1 * 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 5 DDC Panel Chiller B CPM
CHILLER PLANT B CPM
CHILLER , PRIMARY PUMP & CONDENSER PUMP VOLT FREE CONTACT TO CHILLER PLANT B CPM
3 3 *
TRIP STATUS PANEL FROM 8TH FLOOR BMS
8TH FLOOR 1
CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER SUPPLY & Immersion Temp.
4 4 * * 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 4 DDC Panel IMMERSION TEMP SENSOR (4-20 mA).
RETURN TEMP ( CHILLER PLANT A) Sensor
CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER SUPPLY & Immersion Temp.
RETURN TEMP ( CHILLER PLANT B) Sensor
CHILLER PLANT A LINE ISOLATION VALVE
6 2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 2 DDC Panel Isolation Valve VALVE+ACTUATOR LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATOR
OPEN/CLOSE CONTROL SUPPLY & RETURN LINE
CHILLER PLANT A LINE ISOLATION VALVE
VOLT FREE CONTACT FROM ACTUATOR LIMIT
7 OPEN/CLOSE FEEDBACK CONTROL SUPPLY & 2 * 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 2 Isolation Valve DDC Panel
RETURN LINE SWITCH
CHILLER PLANT B LINE ISOLATION VALVE
8 2 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 2 DDC Panel Isolation Valve VALVE+ACTUATOR LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATOR
OPEN/CLOSE CONTROL SUPPLY & RETURN LINE
CHILLER PLANT B LINE ISOLATION VALVE
VOLT FREE CONTACT FROM ACTUATOR LIMIT
9 OPEN/CLOSE FEEDBACK CONTROL SUPPLY & 2 * 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 2 Isolation Valve DDC Panel
RETURN LINE SWITCH
EOL -CHW SUPPLY & RETURN TEMPERATURE - Immersion Temp.
CHILLER PLANT A Sensor
EOL -CHW SUPPLY & RETURN TEMPERATURE - Immersion Temp.
CHILLER PLANT B Sensor
24VAC OPERATING VOLTAGE FROM DDC .0-10
BYPASS LINE MODULATING VALVE CONTROL & VADC CONTROL SIGNAL FROM DDC TO VALVE &
12 1 1 * 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 3 DDC Panel Bypass Valve
FEEDBACK - CHILLER PLANT A 0-10VDC FEEDBACK SIGNAL FROM VALVE TO
DDC.
24VAC OPERATING VOLTAGE FROM DDC .0-10
BYPASS LINE MODULATING VALVE CONTROL & VADC CONTROL SIGNAL FROM DDC TO VALVE &
13 1 1 * 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 3 DDC Panel Bypass Valve
FEEDBACK - CHILLER PLANT B 0-10VDC FEEDBACK SIGNAL FROM VALVE TO
DDC.
CHW DIFF PRESSURE MONITORING CHILLER Differential Pressure WATER DIFF. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (4-20
14 2 * * 2C x 1.0 sq. mm. shielded. 2 DDC Panel
PLANT A & B RISER Transmitter mA).
CHW PRESSURE MONITORING SUPPLY & RETURN - Differential Pressure WATER DIFF. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (4-20
FARTHEST POINT - CHILLER PLANT A Transmitter mA).
CHW PRESSURE MONITORING SUPPLY & RETURN - Differential Pressure WATER DIFF. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (4-20
FARTHEST POINT - CHILLER PLANT B Transmitter mA).
SOFWARE INTEGRATION
17 BTU METER CHILLER PLANT A & B RISER 2 40 2C x 1.5 sq. mm. shielded. DDC Panel BTU Meter M-BUS INTEGRATION
Page 254 of 709

Soft Cable route
SN Description Qty AI AO DI DO Alarm Trend Required Field Devices Cable Schedule No. Of Runs Remarks
IO From To
TOTAL IO FOR DDC-4 20 2 8 5 40

Spare IO (10%) 2 0 1 1 4
Total IO Including Spare 22 2 9 6 44
Modules Selected - TXM1.6R 1 0 0 6 0
Modules Selected - TXM1.8X 4 32 0 0 0
Actual Spare IO Provided 10 8 1 120
% Spare IO Provided 45% 100% 20% 300%
B DDC-5A & 5B
Racks 54
1 Rack Front Door DOTL Alarm 54 54 *
AFO5100
8C x 1.0 sq. mm. unshielded 14 DDC Panel Potential Free Contact from AFO5100 Module
2 Rack Rear Door DOTL Alarm 54 54 * Module
TOTAL IO FOR DDC-5A & 5B - - 108 - -

Spare IO (10%) - - 11 - -
Total IO Including Spare - - 119 - -
Actual Spare IO Provided 0 28 - -
% Spare IO Provided - 26% - -
Remote Enclosure Size (800 x 600 x 220) 1
Page 255 of 709

Handing Over
Document
Factory Test Certificates
Page 256 of 709

Name Senthil velan.N
Department Quality Control
Telephone 0413-2267364
Mobile +91-9003550335
E-mail Senthil.n@siemens.com
Date 10.03.2021
Test Certificate No. COC/9329701835
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE
We hereby certify that the following products have been tested and have passed quality control procedures and
comply with the requirements as per our test procedures.
M/S. Siemens Technology and ICB PO. NO. 4510361238

CUSTOMER NAME Services
(SO.NO.3007069215) INV.NO. 9329701835
Date 12.02.2021
SL. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Date QTY.

NO. CODE Code / Batch Code (in NOS.)
1 106010598 DDC PREWIRED PANEL-767621-0-40 126512863 1
Certification authorized by :
Name : N.Senthil velan

Signature :
Date : 10.03.2021
Siemens Ltd. 130, Pandurang Budhkar Marg, Tel.: +91 (022) 2493 4962
Sunil Mathur Worli, Mumbai 400018 Fax: +91 (022) 2495 0540
Registered Office: 130, Pandurang Budhkar Marg, Worli, Mumbai 400 018. Telephone +91 22 3967 7000. Fax +91 22 3967 7500.
Sales Offices: Ahmedabad,Bangalore,Chandigarh,Chennai,Coimbatore, Hyderabad,Kharghar,Kolkata,Luchnow,Mumbai,Nagpur,New
Delhi,Pune, Vadodara.
Page 257 of 709
SCF 03/2021 V13.06 Page 1 of 1
Mobile +91-9003550335
Date 10.03.2021

(SO.NO.3007069215) INV.NO. 9329701836
Date 12.02.2021


Signature :
Date : 10.03.2021
Page 258 of 709
SCF 03/2021 V13.06 Page 1 of 1
Mobile +91-9003550335
Date 10.03.2021

(SO.NO.3007069215) INV.NO. 9329701875
Date 17.02.2021


Signature :
Date : 10.03.2021
Page 259 of 709
SCF 03/2021 V13.06 Page 1 of 1
10.02.2021
for PO Num : 4200830710
Page 260 of 709

Page 1 of 2
ANNEXURE
City PO Int Ref PO DATE PO LINE ITEM SAP CODE DESCRIPTION INV No INV DATE INV QTY Origin Customs Tariff
IN 4200835717 7265089 01.03.2021 10 101348302 BPZ:TXM1.16D \TXM1.16D 16 I/O digital 41680099734835 03.03.2021 9 CH 853890
Page 2 of 2
Page 261 of 709
Unrestricted
10.02.2021
for PO Num : 4200830710
Page 262 of 709

Page 1 of 2
ANNEXURE
IN 4200830710 7265089 08.02.2021 10 102945203 TXM1.16D \16I/O digital I/P mod 41680099701806 10.02.2021 1 CH 853890
Page 2 of 2
Page 263 of 709
Unrestricted
16.02.2021
for PO Num : 4200831136
Page 264 of 709

Page 1 of 2
ANNEXURE
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 10 102945717 PXC100-E.D \Automation Station 41680099705008 11.02.2021 1 CH 85371091
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 20 102945210 TXS1.12F10 \PS Module 24VDC1.2A 41680099710452 16.02.2021 1 CN 853890
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 30 102945211 TXS1.EF10 \BUS CONNECTION MODULE 41680099710452 16.02.2021 1 CN 853890
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 40 101348271 BPZ:TXM1.8D \TXM1.8D 8 I/O digital in 41680099705008 11.02.2021 1 CH 85389091
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 50 102945197 TXA1.K12 \Address Key:1-12+Reset 41680099710452 16.02.2021 1 CN 853890
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 60 104990889 S55372-C110 \PXC50-E.D Automation Sta 41680099705008 11.02.2021 1 CH 85371091
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 70 102945210 TXS1.12F10 \PS Module 24VDC1.2A 41680099710452 16.02.2021 1 CN 853890
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 90 102945208 TXM1.8X \8 I/O super univ mod 41680099710452 16.02.2021 4 CH 853890
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 100 102945204 TXM1.6R \6 I/O relay module 41680099710452 16.02.2021 1 CH 853649
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 110 106700012 S55661-J120 \TXI2.OPEN TX Open RS232/ 41680099705008 11.02.2021 1 CH 85389091
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 120 102945197 TXA1.K12 \Address Key:1-12+Reset 41680099710452 16.02.2021 1 CN 853890
IN 4200831136 7265089 10.02.2021 130 103918579 S55720-S182 \QBE3100-D4 Differential 41680099705008 11.02.2021 2 CH 90262080
Page 265 of 709

Page 2 of 2
Unrestricted
18.02.2021
for PO Num : 4200832757
Page 266 of 709

Page 1 of 2
ANNEXURE
IN 4200832757 7265089 17.02.2021 10 101348302 BPZ:TXM1.16D \TXM1.16D 16 I/O digital 41680099715008 18.02.2021 1 CH 853890
Page 2 of 2
Page 267 of 709
Unrestricted
Page 268 of 709
Dell International Services lndia Private Limited
M-4, SIPCOT Industnal Park,Sunguvarchttrm
Post- Sriperambadur kanchipuram
Dist-Tamilnadu-602106
Tel +91-44+27158000
Fax +91-44+2716223
www.Dell.com
Date: 10/03/2021
Factory Acceptance Test Report

Dear Sir/Madam,
Below mentioned unit has successfully completed the standard manufacturing tests and has passed the same.
Customer Name Model # Order # Qty Service Tag No
SIEMENS LIMITED Dell PowerEdge R540 8417132255 01 107G933
SIEMENS LIMITED Dell PowerEdge R540 8417132255 01 24MJJ13
Dell International Services India Pvt Limited
Dilesh Acharya
Senior Manager, Manufacturing Engineering
Dell International Services India Private Limited

M-4, SIPCOT Industnal Park,Sunguvarchttrm Post- Sriperambadur kanchipuram Dist-Tamilnadu-602106
Tel +91-44+27158000 Fax +91-44+2716223.
Page 269 of 709

Hewlett-Packard India Sales Pvt. Ltd.
Tower-D, 6th Floor
Global Business park
Mehrauli Gurgaon Road
Gurgaon-122002, Haryana
India.
+91 124 2566 111 Tel
+91 124 2566112 Fax
www.hp.com
TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN
Sub: Test Certificate HP Z2 G4 & Led
Dear Madam/Sir,
This is to confirm that the HP Products with below mentioned serial numbers
have tested as per standards.
Series Part No Serial No.

HP Z2G4 Workstation Tower 7LV99PA INA038SMCH
HP Z2G4 Workstation Tower 7LV99PA INA038SMFC
HP Z2G4 Workstation Tower 7LV99PA INA038SMC9
HP V220 21.5 inch Monitor 4CJ27A7 CN40170ZNP
HP V220 21.5 inch Monitor 4CJ27A7 CN40170ZQS
HP V220 21.5 inch Monitor 4CJ27A7 CN40170ZNK
Thanking you
Authorized Signatory
HP India Sales India Pvt Ltd
Name: Venugopal Dastaru

Designation Product Manager
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Hewlett Packard India Sales Pvt. Ltd, Regd. Tower-D, 6th Floor Global Business park Mehrauli Gurgaon Road Gurgaon-122002, Haryana
Page 270 of 709

SAMSUNG INDIA ELECTRONICS PVT. LTD
A-25, G.F. Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate
New Delhi-110044, INDIA
Tel. : (91-11) 43661234
Fax : (91-11) 43661229
Dated: 10th Mar 2021
Factory Test Report/Confirmation
This is to confirm that all the units listed below are tested as per standard procedures by
Samsung Electronics during production process in Internal Quality Control Laboratories and
are found to be working properly.
Sr. No Model Display Serial No

1 QB55R 082RHNFN100489
2 QB55R 082RHNFN100443
Toll Free No: 180030108282
Thanks & Regards
For: Samsung India Electronics Pvt Ltd
Authorized Signatory
Regd. Office: A-25, G.F, Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate, New Delhi-110044
Page 271 of 709

Handing Over
Document
Installation Report
Page 272 of 709

Page 273 of 709
Handing Over
Document
Commissioning Report
Page 274 of 709

Page 275 of 709
Page 276 of 709
Page 277 of 709
Page 278 of 709
Page 279 of 709
Page 280 of 709
Page 281 of 709
Page 282 of 709
Page 283 of 709
Page 284 of 709
Page 285 of 709
Page 286 of 709
Page 287 of 709
Page 288 of 709
Page 289 of 709
Page 290 of 709
Page 291 of 709
Page 292 of 709
Page 293 of 709
Page 294 of 709
Page 295 of 709
Page 296 of 709
Page 297 of 709
Page 298 of 709
Page 299 of 709
Page 300 of 709
Page 301 of 709
Page 302 of 709
Page 303 of 709
Page 304 of 709
Page 305 of 709
Page 306 of 709
Handing Over
Document
Configuration Details
Page 307 of 709

BMS CONFIGURATION DETAILS
Sl.No Parameter Description Setting
1 LT Panels Voltage High Alarm 430 V

2 LT Panels Voltage Low Alarm 400 V
3 PF Alert Main Incoming 0.95
4 Inrow & PAHU Return Temperature High Alarm 30 deg C
5 Inrow & PAHU Return Humidity Low Alarm 40 %RH
6 Inrow & PAHU Return Humidity High Alarm 60 %RH
Unrestricted Page 308 of 709

Handing Over
Document
User Manual
Page 309 of 709

Desigo™ CC
User Guide Version 4.0
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Smart Infrastructure

2019-11-01 Page 310 of 709
Copyright Notice
Copyright Notice
Notice
Document information is subject to change without notice by Siemens Switzerland
Ltd. Companies, names, and various data used in examples are fictitious unless
otherwise noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the
express written permission of Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
All software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and
may be used or copied only in accordance with license terms.
For further information, contact your nearest Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
representative.
Credits
Desigo, Desigo CC, Cerberus DMS, Cerberus PRO, and Sinteso are registered
trademarks of Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
Other product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
Edition: 2019-11-01
Document ID: A6V10415471_en_a_40
© Siemens Switzerland Ltd, 2019
2 | 352 Page 311 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Table of Contents
1 Getting Started ..................................................................................... 7

1.1 User Interface Basics.................................................................................. 7
1.1.1 Standard UI Client........................................................................ 7
1.2 Basic Procedures.......................................................................................16
1.2.1 Standard UI Client.......................................................................16
2 Operating Step-by-Step....................................................................... 22
2.1 System Manager .......................................................................................22
2.1.1 Working with System Manager ....................................................22
2.1.2 System Browser..........................................................................28
2.1.3 Textual Viewer ............................................................................30
2.1.4 Operation ....................................................................................31
2.1.5 Related Items..............................................................................32
2.2 Graphics Viewer ........................................................................................33
2.2.1 Displaying Graphics and Properties.............................................33
2.2.2 Navigating in the Graphics Viewer...............................................34
2.2.3 Selecting Objects in the Graphics Viewer ....................................35
2.2.4 Working with the Point Centered Display Mode ...........................36
2.2.5 Zooming in the Graphics Viewer..................................................37
2.2.6 Additional Graphics Viewer Procedures.......................................37
2.3 Alarms .......................................................................................................40
2.3.1 Handling Events from Event List..................................................40
2.3.2 Handling an Event with Investigative Treatment ..........................44
2.3.3 Handling Events with Assisted Treatment ....................................47
2.3.4 Handling Recurrences of an Event ..............................................56
2.3.5 Customizing the Columns in Event List........................................57
2.3.6 Filtering Event List ......................................................................58
2.3.7 Printing the Whole Event List ......................................................62
2.3.8 Changing the Sorting of Events ...................................................62
2.3.9 Handling Alarm Suppression for System Objects.........................62
2.4 Scheduling.................................................................................................65
2.4.1 Creating a BACnet Schedule.......................................................65
2.4.2 Creating a Management Station Schedule ..................................67
2.4.3 Additional Scheduling Procedures ...............................................68
2.5 Reports......................................................................................................75
2.5.1 Printing a Standard Report ..........................................................75
2.5.2 Running a Customized Report ....................................................78
2.5.3 Additional Report Procedures......................................................81
2.5.4 Examples of Reports Configurations .........................................102
2.6 Trends .....................................................................................................116
2.6.1 Creating an Online Trend ..........................................................116
2.6.2 Additional Trends Procedures ...................................................117
2.7 Log Viewer ..............................................................................................139
2.7.1 Configuring and Printing the Log View Details ...........................139
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 312 of 709 3 | 352

2.7.2 Configuring and Printing Detailed Log ....................................... 141
2.7.3 Additional Log Viewer Procedures............................................. 143
2.8 Address Book .......................................................................................... 158
2.9 Remote Notifications................................................................................ 160
2.10 Logics...................................................................................................... 163
2.10.1 Macros ..................................................................................... 163
2.11 Documents .............................................................................................. 166
2.11.1 Documents ............................................................................... 166
2.12 Other Applications ................................................................................... 166
2.12.1 Web Applications ...................................................................... 166
2.12.2 Validation .................................................................................. 169
3 Operating Reference ......................................................................... 171
3.1 System Manager ..................................................................................... 171
3.1.1 Overview of System Manager ................................................... 171
3.1.2 System Browser........................................................................ 178
3.1.3 Textual Viewer .......................................................................... 182
3.1.4 Operation.................................................................................. 184
3.1.5 Related Items ........................................................................... 189
3.2 Graphics Viewer ...................................................................................... 192
3.2.1 Graphics Viewer Overview ........................................................ 192
3.2.2 Graphics Viewer Workspace ..................................................... 199
3.3 Alarms ..................................................................................................... 205
3.3.1 Event Handling ......................................................................... 205
3.3.2 Event Lamps............................................................................. 207
3.3.3 Event List.................................................................................. 209
3.3.4 Investigative Treatment Window ............................................... 211
3.3.5 Assisted Treatment Window...................................................... 212
3.3.6 Event Descriptor ....................................................................... 215
3.3.7 Event Button ............................................................................. 219
3.3.8 Event-Handling Commands ...................................................... 221
3.3.9 Event Status and Suggested Action .......................................... 222
3.3.10 Event Sorting ............................................................................ 225
3.3.11 Recurring Events ...................................................................... 225
3.4 Scheduling .............................................................................................. 226
3.4.1 BACnet Schedules .................................................................... 227
3.4.2 Management Station Schedules................................................ 230
3.4.3 Timeline Viewer ........................................................................ 238
3.5 Reports ................................................................................................... 240
3.5.1 Overview of Reports ................................................................. 240
3.5.2 Reports Workspace .................................................................. 247
3.5.3 Reports Modes ......................................................................... 288
3.5.4 Report Workpanes .................................................................... 290
3.6 Trends ..................................................................................................... 292
3.6.1 Trends Workspace .................................................................... 293
3.6.2 Manual Correction..................................................................... 305
3.6.3 Offline Trends ........................................................................... 307
3.6.4 Online Trends ........................................................................... 309
4 | 352 Page 313 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

3.6.5 Predicted Trends.......................................................................309
3.6.6 Trend Data Storage ..................................................................309
3.7 Log Viewer ..............................................................................................311
3.7.1 Overview of Log Viewer ............................................................311
3.7.2 Log Viewer Workspace .............................................................314
3.8 Address Book ..........................................................................................326
3.8.1 Overview of Address Book ........................................................326
3.9 Remote Notifications................................................................................330
3.9.1 Overview of Remote Notifications..............................................330
3.9.2 RENO Messages ......................................................................331
3.9.3 New Remote Notification in the Secondary Pane.......................338
3.10 Documents ..............................................................................................340
3.11 Other Applications ...................................................................................340
3.11.1 Web Applications ......................................................................340
3.11.2 Validation ..................................................................................347
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 314 of 709 5 | 352

Page 315 of 709
Getting Started
User Interface Basics
1
1 Getting Started
1.1 User Interface Basics

This section provides an overview of the Desigo CC user interface. For related
procedures, see Basic Procedures [➙ 16].
1.1.1 Standard UI Client

This section provides a quick reference guide to the main elements of the Desigo
CC user interface. For procedures, see Basic Procedures.
1.1.1.1 Overview of the Standard UI Client

This section provides an overview of the main elements of the Desigo CC user
interface.
Main Screen Layout in Danger Management Profiles
1 Event bar Provides a compact view of the events in the system, where each
event displays as a button along the left-hand side.
2 Event Detail bar Present in some configurations only. Highlights the most critical
event in the system.
3 Summary bar The main point of entry to all the functions of the software. It may
be collapsed in which case you must click the down icon on the
top right to display it.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 316 of 709 7 | 352

Getting Started
1 User Interface Basics
4 Work area Large central portion of the screen below the Summary bar. The
window displayed here will vary depending on the system function
that is being used. It will typically contain the Event List or System
Manager window. It can also display the Investigative or Assisted
Treatment windows, the system help, and external documents or
applications.
Main Screen Layout in Building Automation Profiles

1
1 Summary bar The main point of entry to all the functions of the software. It may
be collapsed and you must click the down icon on the top right
to display it.
2 Work area Large central portion of the screen below the Summary bar. The
window displayed here will vary depending on what system
function is being used. It will typically contain the System Manager
window. It can also display the Event List, or Investigative or
Assisted Treatment windows, the system help and external
documents or applications.
Multi-Pane Windows
The system screen can display many windows, some of which are made up of
multiple panes, divided by splitters. A window can contain up to four panes. Each
pane houses a functional component of Desigo CC (such as a browser for
navigating and selecting system objects, a viewer for displaying site floor plans or
tools for inspecting the properties of objects).
8 | 352 Page 317 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Getting Started
1
1 2 3
1 Selection pane (vertically along the left). Also referred to as Navigation pane.
2 Primary pane (to the right of the Selection pane).
3 Secondary pane (opens when required, alongside the Primary pane).
4 Contextual pane (underneath the Primary and Secondary panes, divided into two parts).
5 Status bar (along the bottom of the window). This bar displays status/update messages
(Ready, Default loaded successfully, and so on).
Pane and Window Controls

You can arrange panes of a window in different layouts or interact with a window
and its panes in various ways. These include:
● Click the icons on the window title bar top to minimize, restore down, or
maximize the window.
● Click the icons on the window title bar to quickly switch between the available
preset layouts:
– : Selection, Primary, and Contextual panes. The Secondary pane
displays only if it is already open.
– : Selection, Primary, and Contextual panes
– : Selection and Primary panes
– : Primary, and Contextual panes. The Secondary pane displays only if it

is already open.
– : Primary pane only
● Resize the panes in a layout by dragging the splitters, or expand/collapse a

pane by clicking the button on the splitter .
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 318 of 709 9 | 352

Getting Started
● Click the icon to lock the window layout . When the layout is locked, clicking
one of the layout icons will not have any effect; this means that you cannot
change the current layout, and resize, expand, or collapse the panes of the
window.
● Normally, the Secondary pane opens on demand, when you make a selection
that requires it. When the Secondary pane opens, it takes up half the space
that would otherwise be allotted to the Primary pane.
● You can prevent the Secondary pane from opening by clicking the pushpin icon
and locking the Primary pane. When the Primary pane is locked, any
selections (such as Related Items) that would normally display in the
Secondary pane are instead redirected to the Primary pane.
Primary Selection Workflow

The following graphic shows the typical workflow for navigating the system:
8 7 6
1. Select a view (1) in System Browser, in the Selection pane, such as Application
View.
a The selected view displays in the System Browser tree.
2. Navigate the tree and select the object (2) you want to work with.
a The information about the selected object displays in the Textual Viewer
(3), in the Primary pane.
a The properties of the selected object display in the Operation tab (4), in the
Contextual pane.
a Links to additional resources associated with the selected object display in
the Related Items tab (5), in the Contextual pane.
3. Click a related item link (5), such as New Remote Notification, to open that
resource in the Secondary pane.
a The selected related item displays in the Secondary pane (6).
4. If necessary, click the icon (7) to display the navigation bar (8) with icons for
moving back and forth between the most recent screens in the Primary pane
and going back to the favorite location.
Object Association Workflow

The following graphic shows the typical workflow for manual selection and drag-
and-drop, in order to associate two objects:
10 | 352 Page 319 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Getting Started
1
1. Select a view (1) in System Browser, in the Selection pane, for example
Application View.
a The selected view displays in the System Browser tree.
2. Navigate the tree to select the object (2) you want to work with, for example
Activity Log.
3. Select Manual Navigation (3), to freeze the Primary pane, for example Reports
> Activity Log.
4. Drag and drop the selected object (4), for example Address Book, to the
reports area.
1.1.1.2 Summary Bar

The Summary bar is located along the top of the system screen, and is the main
point of entry to all the functions of Desigo CC.
By default, it displays collapsed to a slim bar, and it has a series of indicators that
provide an overview of the alarms and events in the system, grouped by category
followed by the operator menu, a system integrity indicator, and the filter icon.
When the slim bar is expanded, on the left, the Summary bar displays the event
lamps, grouped by category, while on the right, it has buttons for starting multiple
System Manager windows, opening/closing Event List, and controlling the audio
alert.
Depending on the profile it displays a specific set of event lamps, the Event Detail
bar that highlights the most critical event in the system and allows you to open or
close the Event List window and control the audio alert.
Figure 1: Collapsed (Slim) Summary Bar
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13
Figure 2: Expanded Summary Bar
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 320 of 709 11 | 352

Getting Started
1 Company logo When you move your cursor on the logo, a tooltip tells you: Click
to open the About Page. The About page displays
information about the Desigo CC software. For instructions, see
Display the About Page [➙ 20].
2 Event lamps Summarizes the events in the system, grouped by categories .

You can click an event lamp, to open Event List filtered by that
category. For background information, see the Event List [➙ 209]
and event lamps [➙ 207] reference sections.
3 Client name Indicates the computer name on a server, client, or FEP station.
NOTE: If you use a web client, the client name does not display.
4 Logged user Indicates the full name of the person logged onto the system. It
also provides a tooltip with the user’s most important information
(for example, full name, account name, language, and so on).
If the user's full name is not available, user name displays
instead.
5 Date and time ● Indicates the system date and time.

● Displays the Windows calendar when clicked.
6 System menu From here, the operator can access other functions. For
background information, see the reference [➙ 14] section.
7 System integrity Displays the status of the network connection to the server. For
indicator background information, see the reference [➙ 13] section.
8 Expand/collapse Expands or collapses the Summary bar. For instructions, see

Expand or Collapse the Summary Bar [➙ 19].
9 Event filter Lets you filter the events in Event List. For instructions, see
Filtering Event List [➙ 58].
10 Open/close Event List Shows/hides or expands/collapses the Event List window. For
instructions, see Open Event List [➙ 40].
This icon is disabled during Investigative/Assisted Treatment.
11 Start a new System Click to open multiple System Manager windows. For instructions,
Manager see Working with System Manager [➙ 22].
12 Audio Alert Click to silence/unsilence the sound emitted by the management

station to notify you of events. For instructions, see the reference
[➙ 13] section.
13 Show/hide Event Shows/hides the Event Detail bar (available only in some
Detail bar configurations). For instructions, see Show or Hide the Event
Detail Bar [➙ 19].
Depending on the Client Profile this icon may or may not be
available.
12 | 352 Page 321 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Getting Started
1
1.1.1.3 License Mode Indication in Summary Bar

When the Desigo CC client application is running normally, with a valid and
sufficient license available on the server, you will not see any special indication on
the user interface.
Otherwise, the Summary bar changes color and displays a message to indicate the
following special situations, along with the time remaining (days, hours, minutes, or
seconds) that you can continue running the Desigo CC client application.
● Demo mode (green): There is no valid license available on the server. You can
run the Desigo CC client application continuously for only 30 minutes.
● Courtesy mode (orange): The license on the server is valid but insufficient. You
can run the Desigo CC client application continuously for only 30 days.
● Engineering license (blue): The Desigo CC client is running, for a limited
duration, with a special license used by authorized technicians to set up and
configure the system.
The license mode (color and text) is also visible when the Summary bar is
collapsed.
1.1.1.4 System Integrity Indicator

The system integrity indicator, located on the Summary bar [➙ 11], indicates the
network connection and system status. Its color and animation reflect the
connection status, as follows:
Green and animated.

Network connection with the server is active and the system is healthy (that is, server
running properly).
Red and animated.

Network connection with the server is active but at least one system component is not
active on the server (that is, server not running properly).
NOTE: If a client disconnects form the server, this issue is visually indicated on the
Summary bar by pink background, and Client Disconnected text in red. An error
message informs you that the connection to the server has been lost and will be restored
when possible.
Red and not animated.

Network connection with the server is inactive.
A tooltip displays when you move your cursor over the indicator, and provides
network connection and system status information.
1.1.1.5 Audio Alert

The audio alert is the sound emitted by a client station to notify the operator of
events in Desigo CC. (If a site has multiple client stations, each one will emit its
own audio alert.)
When a new event occurs, the client station emits an audio alert that continues for
as long as that event remains unprocessed (that is, unacknowledged by the
operator). If there are multiple incoming events, the audio alert continues to sound
for as long as any of them remain unprocessed.
An icon on the Summary bar [➙ 11] indicates the status of the audio alert. You can
click this icon to temporarily silence the audio alert. Only in some profiles, you can
also completely disable the audio alert. (A tooltip displays when you move the
cursor over the icon, indicating which actions are available to you.)
The specific audio alert sound can vary depending on the type of event and is
configuration-dependent. In case of multiple events, the audio alert sound will be
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 322 of 709 13 | 352

Getting Started
the one for the most important (severe) event, irrespective of any filters or sorting
you may have applied to Event List.
For related procedures, see Temporarily Mute the Audio Alert [➙ 19] and
Permanently Silence the Audio Alert [➙ 19].
Audio Alert Resound

The audio alert ceases when the incoming events have been acknowledged and it
will resume after 24 hours if a previously-acknowledged event has still not been
fully processed (closed) by then. Depending on the Client Profile, a warning
message also displays on the Summary bar, for example, 24 hours Trouble
resound: click here to silence. The operator can click this text to silence
the audio alert.
Audio Alert Status

Active The system has detected a new event, or there are still events in
the unprocessed state. You can temporarily silence or
permanently turn off the audio alert.
Depending on the Client Profile this functionality may or may not
be available to you.
Muted You temporarily silenced the audio alert. After 24 hours the
system will automatically re-activate the sound (audio alert
reminder).
Disabled You completely disabled the audio alert. This means it is

permanently turned off, and the system will not emit any sound
when new events occur.
Depending on the Client Profile this status may or may not be
available to you.
1.1.1.6 System Menu

The Menu located on the Summary bar [➙ 11] provides several items for you to
carry out different tasks.
Help Launches online Help.
Applications Opens a new System Manager window. See Create Additional System
Manager Windows [➙ 22].
Operator Performs the following tasks:

● Switchover. See Do an Operator Switchover [➙ 18].
● Change User password. See Change Your Password [➙ 18].
NOTE: This option is not available if you are logged on as Windows user.
Also, a message prompts you if you enter an invalid password.
About Page See Display the About Page [➙ 20].
14 | 352 Page 323 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Getting Started
1
Print See Print from the System Menu [➙ 20].
Active Tasks See Switch Between Active Windows [➙ 18].
Exit Ends your work session, and shut down the system. See End Your Work
Session [➙ 17].
Logoff (Available in closed mode only.) Logs you off and automatically logs on the
GMSDefaultUser. See Exit a Closed Mode Session [➙ 18].
1.1.1.7 Printouts
In Operating mode, Desigo CC allows you to use any configured printer to print out
application data:
● From the system menu on the Summary bar [➙ 11]. For instructions, see Print
from System Menu [➙ 20].
● Directly from with system applications such as Event List, Reports, and so on.
For instructions, see, for example, Printing the Whole Event List [➙ 62].
Printouts Selection Dialog Box

The Printouts Selection dialog box displays when you print from the system menu.
It lets you select system application printouts.
Print Preview Dialog Box

The Print Preview dialog box displays when you print from the system menu, or
from an application. It lets you adjust the various printer options (margins,
orientation, scaling and so on) before launching the print job.
Print Preview Toolbar1)

Name Description
Zoom in Provides a close-up view of the printout. Keep clicking it to

continue zooming in.
Zoom out Reduces the view of the printout. Keep clicking it to continue
zooming out.
Actual size Fits the printout into the whole preview page.
Fit width Fits the printout into the preview page’s width.
One page Displays the printout one page per sheet.
Two pages Displays the printout two pages per sheet.
1) These commands affect only the print preview, and not the printout.
NOTE:
The color option depends on the selected printer. If the Color printing check box
displays dimmed and cleared, the selected printer cannot print color. If this check
box displays dimmed and selected, the selected printer can print only color. Even
when you can select to print color (or black and white), the printout may not
correspond to the color option selected because of the printer drivers.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 324 of 709 15 | 352

Getting Started
1 Basic Procedures
1.2 Basic Procedures

This section contains procedures for getting started with Desigo CC. For
background information, see User Interface Basics [➙ 7].
1.2.1 Standard UI Client

This section contains procedures for getting started with Desigo CC. For
background information, see User Interface Basics.
1.2.1.1 Starting and Exiting the System

This section provides instructions for starting and exiting Desigo CC. Select the
appropriate procedure depending on the type of client you are working on. For
background information, see System Menu [➙ 14].
Launch an Installed Client

Do this procedure to start Desigo CC on a computer where the Desigo CC
software is installed as a normal Windows application.
1. Start Desigo CC from the Windows Start button or by clicking the icon on the
desktop.
a The logon dialog box displays. You can log on to the system as a Desigo
CC user or Windows user.
2. Enter your username and password.
3. Select the domain.
4. Click Logon.
Launch a Web Client

Do this procedure to start Desigo CC as a browser-based application, on a
computer that was configured to operate as a web client.
w The authentication certificate was previously installed on the computer.
1. Launch Microsoft Internet Explorer.
2. In the address bar of the browser, enter the name of the computer where the
Desigo CC Web Server resides (for example, //ITP0990c/).
NOTE: If you do not have this information, please contact your system
administrator.
a The Desigo CC page opens in the browser, and the Desigo CC tab
contents display.
3. Click the Desigo CC tab, and select the Web Client thumbnail.
a The logon dialog box displays in the browser.
6. Click Logon.
Launch a Windows App Client

You want to start Desigo CC from a computer configured to operate as a Windows
app client, where the client software is downloaded and installed on demand from
a browser.
w The authentication certificate was previously installed on the computer.
16 | 352 Page 325 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Getting Started
Basic Procedures
1
1. Launch the Microsoft Internet Explorer.

2. In the address bar of the browser, enter the name of the computer where the
Desigo CC Web Server resides (for example, //ITP0990c/).
NOTE: If you do not have this information, contact your system administrator.
a The Desigo CC page opens in the browser, and the Desigo CC tab
contents display.
3. Click the Windows App Client thumbnail.
a The installation of Desigo CC starts. When completed, the logon dialog box
displays.
6. Click Logon.
NOTE:
Each time you launch Desigo CC as a Windows app client, a search for system
updates is performed. If a new version of the software is available on the web
server, you can choose to update it or continue using the previous version.
End Your Work Session

You want to quit the Desigo CC application.
l In the Summary bar, select Menu > Exit.
a You are logged off and Desigo CC shuts down. If you were running Desigo CC
as a browser-based web client, the logon dialog box displays on the screen.
Interrupt Auto-Logoff
You are working on a Desigo CC station and your user group was configured for
auto-logoff after a period of operator inactivity.
w The logoff message box displays the time remaining before the automatic
logoff.
l To stop the logoff, move the cursor or press any key on the keyboard.
a The auto-logoff is interrupted.
Access a Closed-Mode Client

In closed-mode stations, when the computer is powered up Desigo CC starts
automatically with the GMSDefaultUser logged on. To log on, you must log off the
GMSDefaultUser and then log on with your own credentials.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > Logoff.
a A message box informs you that Desigo CC will be closed and you will be
logged on.
2. Click OK.
a GMSDefaultUser is logged off. The initialization splash screen displays for
a few seconds. The logon dialog box displays.
5. Click Logon.
a Desigo CC restarts in closed mode with your credentials.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 326 of 709 17 | 352

Getting Started
1 Basic Procedures
Exit a Closed-Mode Session

In closed-mode stations, you cannot shut down Desigo CC. You can only log off to
end your session, after which the GMSDefaultUser is automatically logged on.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > Logoff.
a A message box informs you that Desigo CC will be closed and the
GMSDefaultUser will be logged on.
2. Click OK.
a You are logged off. Desigo CC starts in closed mode and the GMSDefaultUser
is automatically logged on.
Change Your Password

w You are logged on as Desigo CC user, and the option to change the user’s
password is available in the system menu.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > Operator > Change User Password.
a The password change window appears.
2. Enter the old password and new password.
3. Confirm password.
4. Click Change Password.
a A message informs you that the changes have been successfully saved.
Do an Operator Switchover
w You want to log onto a Desigo CC station to take over from the currently
logged-on operator.
NOTE: You can carry out this task only if the option to do the operator
switchover is available in the system menu.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > Operator > Switchover.
a The Switchover window displays.
2. Enter the current user password, your username, password, and domain.
3. Click Logon.
a The current user is logged off from Desigo CC. The system splash screen
displays, then Desigo CC restarts with your user credentials.
1.2.1.2 Working with the System Screen

This section provides instructions for interacting with the main elements of the
Desigo CC system screen that are common to all applications. For background
information, see the Standard UI Client [➙ 7] section.
Switch Between Active Windows

w You have two or more active windows (for example, System Manager and
Event List), and you want to bring a different one to the foreground on the
system screen.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > Active Tasks.
2. From the thumbnail preview of the active windows, select the one you want to
bring to the foreground.
a The selected window displays on the screen.
18 | 352 Page 327 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Getting Started
Basic Procedures
1
Expand or Collapse the Summary Bar

w The Summary bar displays collapsed.
1. In the Summary bar, click down on the top right or an event indicator.
a The Summary bar expands.
w The Summary bar displays expanded.
1. In the Summary bar, click up on the top right.

a The Summary bar collapses.
Show or Hide the Event Detail Bar

Depending on the client profile, you can show or hide the Event Detail bar.
Show the Event Detail Bar

w The Event Detail bar is not visible and the command to show it is available on
the Summary bar.
1. In the Summary bar, click down .

a The Event Detail bar displays below the Summary bar.
Hide the Event Detail Bar

w The Event Detail bar is visible, and the command to hide it is available on the
Summary bar.
1. In the Summary bar, click up .

a The Event Detail bar is hidden.
Temporarily Mute the Audio Alert

w The audio alert buzzer on a Desigo CC station is sounding, and you want to
mute it temporarily.
1. In the Summary bar, click Audio Alert .

a The icon changes to muted and the sound stops, even if there are still
unacknowledged events. Muting applies only to the pre-existing events: the
audio alert will still sound for any new events that come in.
1. To manually unmute the audio alert, click Audio Alert again.
Permanently Silence the Audio Alert

Depending on the client profile, you can permanently disable the audio alert buzzer
on a Desigo CC station, so that it does not sound even if new events come in.
1. In the Summary bar, right-click Audio Alert .
a The icon changes to disabled .
1. To manually re-enable the audio alert, right-click Audio Alert again.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 328 of 709 19 | 352

Getting Started
1 Basic Procedures
Silence the Audio Alert Resound

w The audio alert resumes after 24 hours because a previously-acknowledged
event has still not been fully processed (closed) by then.
w A message also displays on the Summary bar. For example, 24 hours
Trouble resound: click here to silence.
l Click the text of the message to silence the audio alert resound.
Display the About Page

w You want to view system information such as the Desigo CC version.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > About Page or click the company logo.
a The About dialog box displays, and shows general information about the
software.
2. (Optional) If you work on an installed client station, click System Info.
a The System Information window displays detailed information about the
client computer.
3. Click OK.
Move a System Window to a Second Monitor

When an additional monitor is available, you can move any system window, such
as, System Manager, Investigative/Assisted Treatment, Help or Event List (in some
client profiles only), from the default monitor to a second monitor. The Summary
bar cannot be moved.
w Desigo CC is running as an installed client or Windows pp client on a computer
connected to two monitors.
w You want to move a window from the default monitor to the second monitor.
For example, you want to move the System Manager window.
1. Click Restore Down in the window.

a The window restores down, you can move it to another monitor, and the
icon changes to Maximize .
2. Drag the window from the default monitor to the second monitor, and click
Maximize .
a The window displays on the second monitor. If you minimize the window that
displays on the second monitor, the corresponding icon displays in the
Windows taskbar of the default monitor. If you maximize the window again, it
displays on the monitor where you previously minimized it.
Print from the System Menu

w A printer was previously configured on the Desigo CC server.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > Print.
a The Printouts selection dialog box displays.
2. (Optional) In the Printouts selection dialog box, do the following:
– Clear the check boxes that correspond to the system application printouts
you do not want to generate.
– Click Move up or Move down to change the printout order.
3. Click Preview.
4. (Optional) In the Print Preview dialog box, do the following:
– Use the zoom icon on the toolbar to zoom in/out and check the output.
These toolbar controls only affect the preview, not the printout itself.
20 | 352 Page 329 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Getting Started
Basic Procedures
1
– Adjust Margins (default is 50 pixels).

– Select the desired Orientation (default is Landscape).
– Select the Printer and Paper size.
– Adjust Scaling (default is Fit to page) and, if available, color option.
5. Click Print and Close.
a The printout is sent to the selected printer.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 330 of 709 21 | 352

Operating Step-by-Step
2 System Manager
2 Operating Step-by-Step
2.1 System Manager

This section provides instructions for using the main panes of the System Manager
window. For background information, see the reference [➙ 171] section.
2.1.1 Working with System Manager

This section provides instructions for System Manager common tasks. For
background information, see Overview of System Manager [➙ 171].
Open System Manager

w The System Manager window is not visible.
1. In the Summary bar, select Menu > Active Tasks.
2. From the thumbnail preview of the active windows, select System Manager to
bring it to the foreground.
Create Additional System Manager Windows

You can create additional System Manager windows, for example to use on
multiple monitors, or to investigate/supervise different aspects of the building
control site.
l Do one of the following:
– From the Desigo CC system menu, select Applications > Start new System
Manager.
– From the expanded Summary bar, click System Manager to open a
new System Manager window.
a A new System Manager window, labeled System Manager (2), is created. You
can switch between it and other windows from the Windows taskbar or from
Active tasks on the system menu.
You can repeat these steps to create further System Manager windows, which
will successively be labeled System Manager (3), System Manager(4), and so
forth.
Close Additional System Manager Windows

1. From the system menu, or from the Windows taskbar, display the window that
you want to close, for example, System Manager (2).
2. Click Close in the title bar.

NOTE: You can only close additional System Manager windows in this way.
The primary System Manager window (the one labeled System Manager) can
only be minimized by clicking Minimize in its title bar.
22 | 352 Page 331 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

System Manager
2
Change the Pane Layout of System Manager

You can adjust or customize the arrangement of the panes in the System Manager
window.
1. In the System Manager window header, if the lock pane layout icon is active
(undimmed), click it so that it becomes dimmed. Otherwise the pane layout
cannot be changed.
2. To switch between the available preset layouts, click the icons in the title bar:
– : Selection, Primary, and Contextual panes. Secondary pane will open

when required.
– : Selection and Primary pane, and the left part of the Contextual pane.
– : Selection and Primary pane.
– : Primary and Contextual pane. Secondary pane will open when
required.
– : Primary pane only.
NOTE: Even if the selected layout includes the Secondary pane, the
Secondary pane only displays when you make a selection that requires it,
and provided the Primary pane is not locked. See Allow or Prevent
Opening of the Secondary Pane [➙ 23].
3. To resize the panes in the current layout, drag the splitter (the dividing line)
between them.
4. To expand/collapse a pane, click the button on the splitter. (Click the

button again to re-expand a collapsed pane).
5. To close the Secondary pane, click Close in its pane header.
6. To prevent the current layout from being changed, click the lock pane layout
icon in the title bar (so that it is undimmed). This disables the function that lets
you switch between the preset layouts so that panes can no longer be resized,
expanded, collapsed, or closed.
Allow or Prevent Opening of the Secondary Pane

Normally, the Secondary pane opens on demand, when you make a selection that
requires it. When the Secondary pane opens, it takes up half the space that would
otherwise be allotted to the Primary pane. You can prevent the Secondary pane
from opening, so that the Primary pane will always occupy its full width.
1. To prevent the Secondary pane from opening, click the pushpin icon in the
Primary pane header so that it is in the locked position .
a The Primary pane is locked to full width, and the Secondary pane will not open.
Any selections (such as Related Items) that would normally display in the
Secondary pane are instead redirected to the Primary pane.
1. To allow the Secondary pane to open again, click the pushpin icon in the
Primary pane header so that it is in the unlocked position .
a The Primary pane width is unlocked, and will resize to accommodate the
Secondary pane when a selection is made that displays in the Secondary
pane.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 332 of 709 23 | 352

2 System Manager
Set How Objects are Labeled in System Manager

You can define whether objects in System Manager are labeled with just a name,
just a description, or both. For background information, see the reference [➙ 178]
section.
1. In System Browser, click the Display Mode drop-down list.
2. Select how you want the objects to be labeled:
– Show Description: example Air Handler Unit 1
– Show Description [Name]: example Air Handler Unit 1 [AHU]
– Show Name: example AHU1
– Show Name [Description]: example AHU1 [Air Handler Unit 1]
a The objects are labeled in the selected way in the System Browser tree, and
also throughout the other panes in System Manager.
NOTE: The choice you make here persists across sessions and is specific to the
user. It also determines whether you can search for objects in the system tree by
name or by description.
Set How Selections Propagate to Other Panes

You can set whether the Primary and Contextual panes will automatically refresh
whenever you make a selection in System Browser.
l To disable automatic propagation, select the Manual navigation check box.
a The next time you click on an object in the tree, the Primary and Contextual
panes will not be automatically updated, and you will have to do this manually.
See Manually Propagate a Selection to Other Panes [➙ 24].
l To enable automatic propagation, deselect the Manual navigation check box.
a The next time you select an object in the tree, the Primary and Contextual
panes will automatically refresh to reflect the new selection.
Manually Propagate a Selection to Other Panes

w You made a selection in System Browser with Manual navigation checked, so
that the Primary and Contextual panes were not automatically refreshed. You
now want to manually propagate this selection.
l To propagate this selection to the Primary and Contextual panes, do one of the
following in System Browser:
– Click the Send button.
– Right-click on the selection in the tree, and select Send to the Primary
Pane.
– (Only for an individual object) Double-click the object.
a The Primary and Contextual panes of System Manager update with content
relevant to the selected objects.
1. To propagate this selection to the Secondary pane, do the following:

a. In the System Manager header, check that the current pane layout includes
the Secondary pane: or .
b. In the Primary pane header, check that the pushpin icon is in the unlocked
position , so that opening of the Secondary pane is allowed.
c. In System Browser, right-click on the selection in the tree, and select Send to
the Secondary Pane.
24 | 352 Page 333 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

System Manager
2
Send a Selection to the Secondary Pane

You can work with a system object in the Secondary pane so that the current
contents of the Primary and Contextual panes will not be changed.
1. In the System Manager window header, check that the current pane layout
includes the Secondary pane: or .
2. In the Primary pane header, check that the pushpin icon is in the unlocked
position , so that opening of the Secondary pane is allowed.
3. In System Browser, navigate to the object that you want to work with.
NOTE: Select the Manual navigation check box if you do not want the Primary
and Contextual panes to refresh while you are doing this.
4. Right-click the object in the tree and select Send to the Secondary Pane.
a The content pertaining to the selected object displays only in the Secondary
pane, whereas the content of the Primary and Contextual panes is not
changed.
Select an Object in System Browser

1. In System Browser, from the Views drop-down list, select the view (Application
View, Management View, or some other custom-configured view) you want to
work with.
a The System Browser tree updates to display the selected view.
2. Browse the objects in the System Browser tree as you would the folders in a
computer. An arrow icon indicates a folder or parent object that contains other
objects inside it:
– Click the side arrow icon alongside a collapsed node to expand the node
and view its children.
– Click the down arrow icon alongside an expanded node to collapse it
again and hide its children.
3. Select the object you want to work with by clicking its label in the System
Browser tree.
a The selected object displays highlighted in the tree. If the Manual
navigation check box is deselected, the Primary and Contextual panes of
System Manager are automatically updated to reflect the new selection.
4. If the Manual navigation check box is selected, do one of the following to
manually propagate the selection to the Primary and Contextual panes:
– Double-click the object.
– Right-click the selected object and select Send to the Primary Pane.
Select Multiple Objects in System Browser

1. In System Browser, select the view (Application View, Management View, or
some other custom-configured view) you want to work with.
a The System Browser tree updates to display the selected view.
2. Do one of the following to find the set of objects you want to select:
– Navigate to the desired objects in the System Browser tree. Click to

expand a collapsed node and view its children, or click to collapse an
expanded node and hide its children.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 334 of 709 25 | 352

2 System Manager
– Run a search by name/description and other criteria such as discipline,

type, and so forth. See Searching for Objects [➙ 28].
3. From the System Browser tree, or from the list of search results, select the
objects as follows:
– To select multiple non-contiguous objects, press and hold the CTRL key
while clicking the objects.
– To select multiple contiguous objects, press and hold the SHIFT key while
clicking the first and the last object in the range.
a The selected objects display highlighted in the tree. If the Manual
navigation check box is deselected, the Primary and Contextual panes of
System Manager are automatically updated to reflect the new selection.
4. If the Manual navigation check box was selected, do one of the following to
propagate the selection:
– Click the Send button or right-click the selection and select Send to the
Primary pane.
a The Primary and Contextual panes of System Manager refresh to reflect
the new selection.
– Right-click the selection and select Send to the Secondary pane.
a The Secondary pane of System Manager refreshes to reflect the new selection.
The Primary and Contextual panes remain unchanged.
Browse and Select Objects with the Navigation Bar

You can use the Navigation bar’s breadcrumb trail to move around the system tree
and select objects. This allows you to make selections even with System Manager
layouts that do not include the Selection pane. For background information, see
Navigation Bar [➙ 176].
1. If the Navigation bar is not already visible, click Open navigation bar in the
System Manager window header.
a The Navigation bar displays along the top of the System Manager window,
directly underneath the title bar. The breadcrumb trail shows the full path of
your current selection in the system tree. Whenever the current primary
selection is changed, the breadcrumb trail refreshes to reflect the new
position in the system path.
2. To begin browsing the tree, click an arrow icon alongside a path element.
a A drop-down list displays of all the items directly beneath it in the system
tree. (For example, clicking the arrow icon to the right of Applications
displays a drop-down list that includes Documents, Graphics, Address
Book, and so on.)
3. Click an item in the drop-down list (for example, Documents) to make it the new
selection.
a System Browser, the Primary pane, and the Contextual pane all update to
reflect the new selection.
NOTE: The selection made here propagates to the other panes even if you
selected Manual navigation in System Browser.
4. Continue moving around the tree in this way until you reach the object you are
interested in.
NOTE: From the breadcrumb trail, you can only make single selections that go
to the Primary and Contextual panes. To send a selection to the Secondary
pane, or to make multiple selections, you must use System Browser.
26 | 352 Page 335 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

System Manager
2
Revisit Recent Selections from the Navigation Bar

The Navigation bar provides a browser-like history of recent selections so that you
can easily revisit objects previously displayed in the Primary pane. For background
information, see Navigation Bar [➙ 176].
1. Click Open navigation bar in the System Manager header.
2. To jump to a specific, previously-visited selection:
a. Click or press CTRL+H to view the selection history. As a result, a drop-
down list of your 20 most recent Primary-pane selections (in descending order
from newest to oldest) displays. The one currently displayed in the Primary
pane is highlighted with a checkmark .
b. Click the name of the selection in the list that you want to revisit.
a The selection displays again in the Primary pane. The Contextual pane,
System Browser, and the Navigation bar also refresh accordingly.
3. To move sequentially through the history list of recent selections:
– Click the Back or Forward buttons, or use the ALT+Left or

ALT+Right keyboard shortcuts.
Set a Favorite Location in System Manager

You can bookmark a particular selection as your favorite location, so that it
displays as the initial location whenever you open System Manager and that you
can easily access by clicking Favorite location in the Navigation bar. For
background information, see Navigation Bar [➙ 176].
1. Select the object you want to set as the favorite location, so that it displays in
the Primary pane.
2. If the Navigation bar is not already visible, click Open navigation bar in the
System Manager header.
3. In the Navigation bar, click and hold Favorite location for 2 seconds.
a A status message indicates that the new favorite location is set and stored
in your user profile.
4. To jump to the favorite location at any time, click Favorite location in the
Navigation bar or press the ALT+Home keys.
a The favorite location displays in the Primary pane. The Contextual pane,
System Browser, and the Navigation bar all refresh accordingly.
Revisit Recent Selections from Recently Viewed

The Recently Viewed feature lets you return to a previously visited view in the
Primary pane. For background information, see Recently Viewed [➙ 177].
1. In the Selection pane, click the Recently Viewed tab.
a Recently Viewed displays a list of the recently visited views in the Primary
pane.
2. Do the following:
– Click the Links/Thumbnails button to switch between displaying the recent
items as snapshots or text links.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 336 of 709 27 | 352

2 System Manager
– Click the scroll icons (Newer) (Older) to move backward and

forward among the recent views.
a The selected view displays in the Primary pane, and a new recently visited
view item is created and displays in Recently Viewed.
2.1.2 System Browser

This section provides step-by-step instructions for System Browser tasks. For
2.1.2.1 Selecting Views

1. From the Views list box, click the drop-down arrow.
2. From the list of available views, select the view you want to display.
2.1.2.2 Searching for Objects

1. In the Search list box, enter the name of the object you want to search for. You
can use wildcarding when performing a search.
2. Click the Search icon.
2.1.2.3 Filtering Searches

1. You want to filter a search to limit the results that your search returns, and you
have already entered text in the Search list box.
2. Click the Filter icon .
3. In the Type field, click the drop-down arrow and select the object type and
subtypes you want to filter by.
4. In the Discipline field, click the drop-down arrow and select the discipline and
subdisciplines you want to filter by.
5. In the Other field, click the drop-down arrow and select the settings you want to
filter by.
6. In the Alias field, enter the case-sensitive alias you want to filter by.
7. If you want to limit your search to the currently selected node in the tree, select
the Search within selection check box.
8. Click Search to begin the search.
a The search results display in the tree area.
2.1.2.4 Saving Searches

w You have performed a search using the appropriate filtering criteria as needed.
1. Click Save Search .
2. In the Save Search field, type a name for your search.

3. Click Save.
a The system saves the search filtering criteria but not the location in the tree at
the time of the save.
28 | 352 Page 337 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

System Manager
2
2.1.2.5 Choosing a Display Mode

1. In System Browser, click the Display Mode drop-down list.
2. Select the mode you want for displaying objects.
a The object displays in the new mode throughout the various panes in System
Manager.
2.1.2.6 Making a Manually Selected Object the New Primary

Selection
w The Manual Navigation box is checked, with one or more objects selected.
– Right-click and select Send to the Primary Pane.
– Double-click the object.
NOTE:
Double-clicking works only when selecting a single object.
2.1.2.7 Operating Multiple Objects

Multiple objects can be commanded or engineered using multi-select.
To select a number of non-adjacent objects:
1. Select the first object using the mouse.
2. Press the CTRL key and hold it.
3. Select all other desired objects using the mouse.
To select a range of adjacent objects:
1. Select the beginning of your range of objects using the mouse.
2. Press the SHIFT key and hold it.
3. Select the end of your range of objects using the mouse.
NOTE:
Limitations for selected objects are 250 items for commanding.
Commanding Multiple Objects in the Operation Tab

w The objects must be of the same object type, such as analog input. If different
object types are selected, in the Operation tab, the message No properties
(different properties) displays.
1. In System Browser, select Management View.
2. Select the objects you want to change.
3. In the Operation tab, select the properties that you want to command.
a If the properties have different values, they are displayed with an asterisk
(*) but can be commanded.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 338 of 709 29 | 352

2 System Manager
4. (Optional) Click the icon to display detailed information about the selected data
points.
5. Do one of the following:

– Change the value and click Send or Change.
– Click a command button to execute the respective function.
a Only objects properties that have been changed will be logged in the Activity
Log database.
2.1.3 Textual Viewer

This section provides step-by-step instructions for Textual Viewer. For background
information, see the reference [➙ 182] section.
2.1.3.1 Customizing Columns

w System Manager is in Operating mode.
1. In Textual Viewer, right-click one of the following:
– Column heading
– Row
– Scroll bar within the Primary pane
2. Select Customize columns.
a The Customize Columns dialog box displays.
– To remove columns from the Visible list, select one or more headings, and
then click the active arrow to move the headings.
– To add columns to the Visible list, select one or more headings from the
Available list, and then click the active arrow to move the headings.
4. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to arrange the order of the columns.
5. Click OK.
2.1.3.2 Making a New Primary Selection

w Textual Viewer displays more than one object, and you would like to make one
of those objects the new primary selection.
30 | 352 Page 339 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

System Manager
2
l In Textual Viewer, double-click the object you want to make the new primary
selection.
a Textual Viewer sends the object to System Browser, and System Browser
changes its focus to the object, just as if you had selected the object directly
from System Browser. System Browser then refreshes the Textual Viewer,
which displays the new primary selection.
2.1.3.3 Rearranging Columns

w Textual Viewer is open, and you would like to rearrange the order of the
columns.
1. Select the column you want to move.
2. Drag-and-drop the column onto the desired location.
2.1.3.4 Sorting Objects

w You have more than one object displaying in Textual Viewer, and you would
like to sort them.
1. In the column you want to sort, click the column heading.
– If the column is arranged in alphabetical order and you want to arrange it in
reverse alphabetical order, select the column heading. When the up arrow
displays, click the column heading again.
– If the column is in reverse alphabetical order and you want to arrange it in
alphabetical order, select the column heading.
a The column sorts itself in either an ascending or descending alphabetical order,
depending on the order prior to selecting the drop-down arrow.
2.1.4 Operation
This section provides step-by-step instructions for Operation tasks. For background
2.1.4.1 Commanding Properties

w You have selected the object whose properties you want to command.
1. Click the Operation tab.
a The tab displays properties of the object, their states, and all commands
available for the properties.
2. Click the command button that displays the command you want to execute.
a If the command does not have arguments associated with it, the command
is sent and the status displays.
a If the command button has arguments associated with it, go to the next
step.
3. Complete the required fields.
4. Click Send.
a The system displays the status of the command.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 340 of 709 31 | 352

2 System Manager
2.1.4.2 Commanding Properties for Multiple Objects

w You want to simultaneously command properties for multiple objects of the
same type.
1. In System Browser, navigate to the locations containing the objects you want to
select, and then select them.
2. Click the Operation tab.
3. Click the triangular symbol in the lower-right-hand corner on the icon next to
the property you want to command.
a The table row expands to show multiple instances of the property—one for
each of the objects selected.
– In the top row of the property, enter the value for the property, and then
click Change.
– In the top row of the property, click the button that represents the action
you want to take, for example, Command, Release, Change, Out of Svc,
Enable or Ack All. If the action has additional fields, complete them, and
then click Send.
2.1.5 Related Items

This section provides step-by-step instructions for working with related items. For
2.1.5.1 Viewing a Related Item

w You have selected an object with related items.
l From Related Items, click the item you would like to view—for example, click a
New Report, a Schedule, a PDF file, or a URL.
a The management station opens the representation for the selected item in the
Secondary Pane (or in the Primary pane if the Primary pane splitting is locked).
2.1.5.2 Viewing Links

w You have selected an object with related items displayed as icons.
l From Related Items, click the Links button.
a The related items display in Links view.
2.1.5.3 Viewing Icons

w You have selected an object with Related Items displayed as links.
l From Related Items, click the Icons button.
a The related items display in the Icons view.
2.1.5.4 Grouping Items in the List

w You have selected an object with Related Items displayed in a flat list.
l From Related Items, click the Group button.
a All related items are grouped according to type—for example, Report, Graphic,
Schedule, etc.
32 | 352 Page 341 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Graphics Viewer
2
2.1.5.5 Ungrouping Items in the List

w You have selected an object with Related Items displayed in Groups view.
l From Related Items, click the Ungroup button.
a All items are ungrouped.
2.1.5.6 Creating a New Object

w You have selected an object with links displaying in Related Items.
l From Related Items, click the type of object you would like to create—for
example, New Report.
a The management station opens a new object type in the Secondary pane.
2.2 Graphics Viewer

This section provides additional step-by-step instructions for common tasks related
to viewing graphics.
For related background information, see the reference section.
2.2.1 Displaying Graphics and Properties

Select the topic related to your task:
Display and Hide a Coverage Area

w A graphic is displayed in the Graphics Viewer and you want to display the
coverage area for the cameras or any monitoring device on the graphic. The
coverage area shows the objects on your graphic that are within the viewing or
monitoring range of a camera or device.
1. In System Browser, select Application View.
2. Select Applications > Graphics.
3. Click Coverage Area .

a All configured coverage areas on the graphic display.
4. To view the data points from all the objects in the coverage area that are
monitored by the camera or device, move your cursor over the coverage area.
a The tooltip displays a list of monitored objects.
5. To hide the coverage area, click Coverage Area .
a The coverage area is toggled to hide the coverage area from displaying on the
graphic.
Display Object Properties

w You have an object in the System Browser and you want to display the
associated properties.
w You have manually displayed the Status and Commands window for an object
on a graphic.
w A graphic has an object in an off normal state and the associated Status and
Commands window has automatically displayed.
w From System Browser, you have selected the object you want to command.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 342 of 709 33 | 352

2 Graphics Viewer
1. From the Status and Commands window, navigate the property you want to
command. If there are more than four properties displayed in the window, you
may have to scroll to locate the property.
a The system displays a list of the object’s properties, their current state,
value, status, and all commands available to you for this object, based on
your system privileges and the configuration settings for the object.
2. Complete the required fields and click the associated command button that
displays the command you want to execute.
a Depending on the command type, the command is sent, updated, or
acknowledged and the status displays.
3. Observe the status of the command.
2.2.2 Navigating in the Graphics Viewer

Navigate to the Graphics Library Browser

2. Select Project > System Settings > Libraries.
3. Click any of your graphic symbol folders.
a The Graphics Library Browser displays.
Navigate to a Linked Element

If configured, an element on a graphic can be used as direct navigation to an
internal or external link.
w You have an element on a graphic that if selected links to an internal or
external element.
1. (Optional) Move your cursor over the element to display the tooltip and view the
linked path and descriptive text about the linked element.
2. Click or double-click the element.
a If the link is an internal link, the linked item becomes the primary selection.
a If the link is external, the document, website, or application displays.
Navigate to a Depth or Layer in a Graphic

w You want to view a specific depth associated with a graphic, and, optionally,
filter the view of the depth by its associated layers.
2. Select Applications > Graphics > [graphic].
3. Click DepthsNavigation View and select the depth you want to view.
a The Graphic and the Navigation View displays a list of all layers associated
with the depth.
34 | 352 Page 343 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Graphics Viewer
2
4. (Optional) Select the Discipline radial button, and from the drop-down menu
select a discipline, or select <All> to view all layers.
a The graphic updates and only displays the layers associated with the
selected discipline.
a The list of layers in the Navigation View is grayed-out, and only the layers
associated with the selected depth are check-marked.
5. (Optional) Select the Layers radial button, and from the list of layers check-
mark each layer you want to include in the graphic view, or uncheck a layer to
remove it from view. As you make your selections the graphic view is
automatically updated.
a The graphic is updated.
Drag-and-Drop an Object Property to the Graphics Editor

Referenced properties of an object or Symbol on a graphic in the Graphics Viewer
can easily be dragged over to another graphic in the Graphics Editor or any other
view or pane in that accepts a drag source.
NOTE:
To select multiple objects, nodes, or properties, click CTRL and then click each
item you want to drag over to the Graphics Editor.
w A graphic is displayed in the Graphics Viewer.

w If you are dragging an object or Symbol to the Graphics Editor, you must have
another System Manager pane open. See, Launching a New System Manager.
1. Hover over an element or symbol in the Graphics Viewer. A red border displays
around the highlighted object.
2. Click and drag.
a The cursor changes to .
3. Release the mouse button when the cursor changes to over the intended
drop target.
a The data from the object is copied to the area or field.
2.2.3 Selecting Objects in the Graphics Viewer
NOTE 1: When you select a graphics object from System Browser, the Graphics
Viewer displays the representative graphic. The selected object is considered the
primary selection. The object also displays in the Property Viewer.
NOTE 2: If you click another object in the graphic, that object becomes the
secondary selection. As a result, Property Viewer changes its display to
correspond to the new selection. System Browser, however, still displays the
original, primary selection to show your starting point.
NOTE 3: Double-clicking another object on the graphic makes that object the new
primary selection in the Graphics Viewer and System Browser, while the object
remains the secondary selection in the Property Viewer.
Select Objects from System Browser

A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 344 of 709 35 | 352

2 Graphics Viewer

2. Select Applications > Graphics > [graphic object].
a Graphics Viewer displays the graphic object.
Select Objects within Graphics Viewer

w You have a graphic open, and you would like to view the properties of an object
on the graphic.
3. Click the object. You can also select multiple objects by holding down the
CTRL key while clicking on more than one object.
a The object becomes the focus, and the object properties display in Property
Viewer.
2.2.4 Working with the Point Centered Display Mode

Enable Point Centered Display Mode

3. Select the point object.
4. Click Point Centered Display mode and select one of the following options:
– Point: Point Centered Display mode is enabled for the point object to
display in the center of the pane or canvas.
– Group – Point Centered Display mode is enabled for point objects to
display in the center of the pane or canvas.
a A checkmark displays next to the selected mode and the Point Centered
Display mode is set on the canvas.
Disable Point Centered Display Mode

w System Manager is in Engineering mode.
2. Select Application > Graphics.
3. Click Point Centered Display mode .
4. Select None.
a Point Centered Display mode is disabled.
36 | 352 Page 345 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Graphics Viewer
2
2.2.5 Zooming in the Graphics Viewer

Center and Zoom with the Aerial View

w You have a graphic open and would like to display the Aerial View.
3. Click Aerial View .

a The Aerial View displays.
– Click a specific area to adjust the view. The clicked area is the center.
– Click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the specific area of
the graphic you want to focus on.
a The graphic is resized and refocused around the area you clicked or drew.
Zoom into a Graphic using Options from the Toolbar

The zoom factor of a graphic can be changed using one of the following methods:
3. You have the following zoom options available to you:
– Click Default View 100% to display the active graphic at 100%

magnification.
– Click Scale to fit so that the entire graphic and all the objects on the
graphic are visible.
– Click Zoom In (+20) or Zoom Out (-20) to zoom in or out, accordingly,
by a factor of 20% with each click of the icon.
– Click Zoom View , and from the Zoom View pane, click and drag the
Zoom Slider to either increase or decrease magnification of the active
elements.
– Click Zoom to select from a list of pre-defined zoom factors.
– Click Zoom Real to zoom in and out, using your mouse wheel.
2.2.6 Additional Graphics Viewer Procedures

This section provides additional step-by-step instructions for common tasks related
to viewing graphics.
Command a Property in the Graphics Viewer

w You have a graphic open in Graphics Viewer, and you want to command the
properties of an object in the graphic.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 346 of 709 37 | 352

2 Graphics Viewer
1. Right-click the object, and select Status and Commands.

a The system displays a list of the object’s properties, their current state,
value, status, and all commands available to you for this object, based on
your system privileges and the configuration settings for the object.
a If you select multiple properties to command, the selected properties
display an icon with a triangular Symbol in the lower right-hand corner.
2. If you selected multiple properties in the step above, click the triangular symbol
on the icon next to the property you want to command. Otherwise, proceed to
Step 3.
a The table row of the proper expands to show multiple instances of the
property—one for each of the objects selected.
3. Click the command button that displays the command you want to execute.
a If the command does not have arguments associated with it, the command
is sent and the status displays.
4. (Optional) If the command button has arguments associated with it, proceed to
Step 5.
5. (Optional) Complete the required fields if any are associated with the
command.
6. Click Send.
Create a Graphics Sub-Folder

You want to create a Graphics sub-folder in System Browser and in your project's
Graphics folder.
w The Graphics Editor is displayed in the in the Graphics tab of the work area.
2. Select Application > Graphics or an existing sub-folder as the location for your
new graphics folder.
3. Click New and select New Folder.
4. In the Create New Folder dialog box, type a name for the new folder.
5. Click OK.
a The folder is available in System Browser.
Delete a Graphic Object

You want to delete a graphic item, a graphic or a folder, from the Graphics folder.
NOTE:
You can only delete an empty folder, not a folder that contains any graphical
objects.

w The Graphics Editor is displayed.
2. Select Applications > Graphics > [graphic or graphic folder].
38 | 352 Page 347 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Graphics Viewer
2
3. Click Delete .
a A confirmation message displays.
4. Click Yes.
a The graphic item is deleted.
Edit a Graphic
NOTICE
NOTE:
In order to complete this procedure, you must have the appropriate access rights
to for the Graphics Editor.

3. Click Edit .
a The Graphics Editor displays.
4. Make modifications to the graphic..
5. Click Save As .
6. In the Save As dialog box, do the following:

a. Select a destination folder.
b. Enter a name.
c. Click Save.
a The edited graphic is saved.
Print from the Graphics Viewer

3. Do one of the following.
– Click Print .
a. In the Print dialog box, select the printer.
b. Select Print.
– Click Page setup .
a. In the Page setup window, configure the settings as necessary
b. Click Print.
c. In the Print dialog box, select the printer.
d. Select Print.
a The graphic is printed.
Related Topics
For background information, see Graphics Editor Reference. [➙ 192]
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 348 of 709 39 | 352

2 Alarms
2.3 Alarms
This section provides instructions for common tasks related to event handling in
Desigo CC. For background information, see the reference section.
2.3.1 Handling Events from Event List

The Event List window is your main starting point for dealing with events. From
here you can get information about an event or its source, directly send event-
handling commands, and initiate investigative or assisted treatment.
Figure 3: Event List Workspace
Silence the Station Audio Alert

w An audio alert is active on your Desigo CC station.
1. On the right-hand side of the Summary bar, click .
a The audio alert is silenced .
Open Event List

w The Event List window is not visible.
1. On the right-hand side of the Summary bar, click Open Event List .
a Event List displays in the main work area of Desigo CC.
40 | 352 Page 349 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
Select an Event in the List

l Click the row of the event that you want to handle.
NOTE: In some Client Profiles, you can start sending commands directly
without clicking on the event first to select it. In that case you can skip this step.
Also, in some configurations, certain types of events autoselect when they
occur, in which case you will not have to do this step.
a The event is selected, and its event descriptor becomes highlighted:
- The In process by field updates to indicate you are currently handling this
event.
- If any other event was previously selected, it is automatically deselected
(suspended).
Select Multiple Events in the List

1. To perform a multiple selection, do one or more of the following:
– Press CTRL+A to select all the events in the list.
– Hold CTRL and click the event buttons one-by-one, to add events to the
selection.
– Hold SHIFT and click the first and last event buttons of a range to add a
contiguous set of events to the selection.
2. To remove an event from the selection, press CTRL and click its event button.
3. To deselect all the events in the selection, click the event button of any one of
the selected events.
a A group of events is selected, and their event descriptors display highlighted.

Any commands you issue will be sent to all the events for which that command
is available.
Send Event Handling Commands

From the event descriptor, use the icons in the Commands column to send any
commands as they become available. The commands you must send will vary
depending on configuration. A typical sequence may include:
1. Click to acknowledge the event.

2. After acknowledging the event, if the event caused a field panel to sound an
audible alarm in the site, click to silence the panel, or click to turn it
back.
3. If any remote notification is configured for that event, click to start remote
notifications or to stop them.
4. Click to reset the event.
5. Click to close the event.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 350 of 709 41 | 352

2 Alarms
Check the Event Status

When no further commands are available, use the Event Status and Suggested
Action columns to determine the next action you need to take. A typical sequence
may include:
1. Event Status = Waiting for condition:
– Suggested Action = Complete operating procedure. No further

commands are available because you must first complete at least the
mandatory steps of the operating procedure.
a. In the Information column, click Open related treatment to open the
assisted treatment window.
b. Complete the operating procedure [➙ 48].
– Suggested Action = Wait for condition. The event cannot be reset
until the event source is back to normal.

a. You must correct the situation that caused the event or wait for the
Source Status to return to Quiet, before you can send the remaining
commands.
2. Event Status = Closed . You finished handling this event, and the event is
ready to be cleared from the list. Click the event button again to deselect the
event. It will then be removed from Event List.
Get More Information About the Event

You can do one or more of the following to get more information about an event or
its source.
● View the inline information text:
a. In the Information column, click Show information text .

b. Any technical information available for that event displays. The text provided
in the Message text column is also repeated here.
c. Click the icon again to hide the information.
● Open the Contextual pane without leaving Event List:

a. In the Event List header, click the two-pane layout icon .
b. The Operation, Extended Operation, and Detailed Log tabs display at the
bottom of the window. From here you can:
- Inspect the properties of the point that issued the event.
- View and execute any commands/actions available for that object.
- View a detailed log of the event currently being handled.
c. When you are finished, to hide the Contextual pane, click the splitter button
, or click the single-pane layout icon .
42 | 352 Page 351 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
● Jump to the event source in System Manager:

a. In the Source column, click the name of the event source.
b. System Manager opens with the event source automatically selected in
System Browser.
c. Use Textual Viewer or Graphics Viewer to view details about the point that
issued the event.
d. Use the Operation tab to view the properties of that object, and any
commands available for it.
e. To go back to Event List, click Open Event List in the Summary bar.
Log an Event Note in the History Database

You can optionally log a note about the event in the history database.
1. In the Information column, click Log an event note .
2. In the Note Editor dialog box, enter the text of the note, and click OK.
a The note is stored in the History Database. If you selected multiple events, this
note will be logged as applying to all those events. You can generate a report
(Activity Log or Event Detail Log) to print any logged event notes.
Interrupt Handling of an Event

You can interrupt the handling of an event at any time, for example, because a
more important event has come in that you want to deal with right away.
l To interrupt handling of an event, do one of the following:
– Click the event button again.
– Select a different event in the list.
a The event is deselected and no longer appears highlighted. Its Event Status
remains as it was when you interrupted handling the event. You can resume
handling this event at any time by selecting it again.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 352 of 709 43 | 352

2 Alarms
Finish Handling an Event

When you have finished handling an event its Event Status changes to Closed.
Depending on configuration, the event may be automatically cleared from the list.
Otherwise:
l Click the event button again to deselect the event and clear it from the list.
2.3.2 Handling an Event with Investigative Treatment

The investigative treatment window lets you send event-handling commands while
using System Manager to inspect the event source.
Figure 4: Investigative Treatment Window
Start Investigative Treatment

w An event button without the icon is available in Event List, or in the Event
Detail bar.
NOTE: If the icon is present you must instead handle the event with
assisted treatment. See Handling Events with Assisted Treatment [➙ 46].
– If the event is not yet selected, depending on the Client Profile, single-click
or double-click the event button.
– If the event is already selected, in the Information column, click Opens
related treatment .
a The Investigative Treatment window opens. This is a window like System
Manager, with the event descriptor along the top, and the object that caused
the event already selected in System Browser. In Event List, the event button
44 | 352 Page 353 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
for that event is replaced by a blank placeholder to indicate it is under

investigative treatment.


back.

When no further commands are available, use the Event Status column to
determine the next action you need to take. A typical sequence may include:
1. Event Status = Waiting for condition: The event cannot be reset

until the event source is back to normal.
– You must correct the situation that caused the event or wait for the Source
Status to return to Quiet, before you can send the remaining commands.
2. Event Status = Closed. You finished handling this event, and the event is
ready to be cleared from the list.
– Click the event button again to deselect the event.
a The Investigative Treatment window closes, and the event is removed from
Event List.
Switch Between Investigative Treatment and Event List

You can switch back to check Event List, and handle other events from there,
without interrupting the investigative treatment currently in progress.
w The Investigative Treatment window displays in the foreground.
1. In the Summary bar, do one of the following:
– Click Open Event List .

– Select Menu > Active Tasks > Event List.
a Event List displays. The event that you are currently handling in
investigative treatment is indicated by a blank placeholder in place of the
event button. The Investigative Treatment window is moved to the
background but not closed.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 354 of 709 45 | 352

2 Alarms
2. (Optional) If required, you can select other events in Event List, and send
event-handling commands from there. You cannot select the event that is
currently in investigative treatment.
3. To return to investigative treatment, in the Summary bar, do one of the
following:
– Click Close Event List .

– Select Menu > Active Tasks > Investigative Treatment.
a The Investigative Treatment window returns to the foreground and you can
resume the handling of the event from there.
Interrupt Investigative Treatment of an Event

You can interrupt the investigative treatment of an event at any time, and then
either finish the handling of the event from Event List or resume investigative
treatment later.
l To interrupt investigative treatment of an event, do one of the following:
– In the Investigative Treatment window, click the event button in the event
descriptor along the top.
– In Event List or the Event Detail bar, click the blank placeholder that
displays in the position of the event button.
a The Investigative Treatment window closes. In Event List, the event is
deselected, and the event button displays again instead of the blank
placeholder. The Event Status remains as it was when you interrupted handling
the event.
NOTE:
You can only have one event in assisted or investigative treatment at any given
time. If you want to start assisted or investigative treatment of another event, this
will interrupt any assisted/investigative treatment currently in progress. However,
you can later resume the interrupted treatment from where you left off.
Finish Investigative Treatment of an Event

When you have sent all the required commands and finished handling the event,
the Event Status changes to Closed and the Suggested Action is Suspend the
event.
– In the Investigative Treatment window, click the event button in the event
a The Investigative Treatment window closes, and the event is cleared from
Event List.
46 | 352 Page 355 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
2.3.3 Handling Events with Assisted Treatment

Assisted treatment provides a guided step-by-step procedure for handling an
event. The icon on an event button indicates that an assisted treatment
procedure is available for that event.
Figure 5: Example of an Assisted Treatment Window
Figure 6: Example of Event Button with Assisted Treatment Available
Start Assisted Treatment

w An event button with the icon is available in Event List, or in the Event Detail
bar.
– If the event is not yet selected, depending on the Client Profile, single-click
or double-click the event button.
– If the event is already selected, in the Information column, click Opens
related treatment .
a The Assisted Treatment window opens. It displays the descriptor of the event
that you are handling along the top, and below it a sequence of steps you must
follow to handle that event. In Event List, the event button for that event is
replaced by a blank placeholder to indicate it is under assisted treatment.
a If assisted or investigative treatment of any other event was in progress, it is
interrupted. You can only have one event in assisted or investigative treatment
at any given time.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 356 of 709 47 | 352

2 Alarms


back.

When no further commands are available, use the Event Status and Suggested
Action columns to determine the next action you need to take. A typical sequence
may include:
1. Event Status = Waiting for condition:
– Suggested Action = Complete operating procedure. No further
commands are available because you must first complete at least the
mandatory steps of the operating procedure. See Complete the Operating
Procedure, below.
– Suggested Action = Wait for condition. The event cannot be reset
until the event source is back to normal. You must correct the situation
that caused the event or wait for the Source Status to return to Quiet,
before you can send the remaining commands.
2. Event Status = Closed. You finished handling this event, and the event is
ready to be cleared from the list.
a. Click the event button again to deselect the event.
a The Assisted Treatment window closes, and the event is removed from
Event List.
48 | 352 Page 357 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
Complete the Operating Procedure

The Steps pane on the left lists the tasks to perform to handle the event.
Mandatory steps are marked with an exclamation mark . The step currently being
executed is marked with a triangle .
1 4
Figure 7: Operating Procedure Steps
1. Click on the step you want to execute.

NOTE: When you move your mouse over a step, if the pointer turns into a hand
it means you can execute that step. If the step is not available, this is
usually because a preceding mandatory step needs to be completed first. In
this case, try another step.
a The step expands and is marked to indicate that it is being executed.
Information and tools for performing that step display in the Default tab. For
example, if you selected a document step, the document that you must
read will display.
2. Perform the tasks required for the selected step. For detailed instructions, see:
– Executing a Document Step in Assisted Treatment [➙ 51]
– Executing a Graphic Step in Assisted Treatment [➙ 52]
– Executing a Remote Notification Step in Assisted Treatment [➙ 53]
– Executing a Report Step in Assisted Treatment [➙ 54]
– Executing a Treatment Form Step in Assisted Treatment [➙ 54]
– Executing an Alarm Printout Step in Assisted Treatment [➙ 55]
a When you complete the tasks required by the step, the check box
alongside the step turns white , indicating that you can check it off. If the
check box is gray , it means you cannot check off the step because you
have not performed all the actions required to complete the step.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 358 of 709 49 | 352

2 Alarms
3. Check off the step by clicking the white check box . This marks it as
complete.
a A checkmark displays in place of the check box to indicate the step
was completed. An execution status icon underneath it indicates its
outcome: success / failure / or in progress .

NOTE: If you see a step that has been automatically checked off, this
means it was automatically executed by the system (either immediately
when the event occurred, when you initiated event handling, or depending
on configuration).
4. Repeat the preceding actions until you have completed at least all the
mandatory procedure steps. Also complete any non-mandatory steps you want
to perform.
5. Some steps are repeatable, and in that case, you can select and repeat them,
even if they are already checked off. For example, you might want to consult
the document in the document step again.
6. Once you have completed the operating procedure, send any further
commands that become available to finish handling the event. See Send Event
Handling Commands [➙ 47], above.
Open the Contextual Pane

You can use the Contextual pane to access properties and commands of an event
source without leaving the treatment window.
1. To open the Contextual pane, do one of the following:
– In the window header, click the three-pane, four-pane, or five-pane layout

icon , , .
– Click the splitter button at the bottom of the window.
a The Operation, Extended Operation, Detailed Log and Related Items tabs
display at the bottom of the window. Information, properties, and
commands of the selected event display. From here you can:
- Inspect the properties of the object that issued the event.
- View and execute any commands/actions available for that object.
- View a detailed log of the event currently being handled.
- Access related items in the Secondary pane.
2. When you are finished, to hide the Contextual pane, do one of the following:
– Click the splitter button again.

– In the window header, click the single-pane or the two-pane layout icon
.
Switch Between Assisted Treatment and Event List

You can switch back to check Event List, and handle other events from there,
without interrupting the assisted treatment currently in progress.
w The Assisted Treatment window displays in the foreground.
1. In the Summary bar, do one of the following:
– Click Open Event List .

– Select Menu > Active Tasks > Event List.
a Event List displays. The event that you are currently handling in assisted
treatment is indicated by a blank placeholder in place of the event button.
50 | 352 Page 359 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
The Assisted Treatment window is moved to the background but not

closed.
2. (Optional) If required, you can select other events in Event List, and send
event-handling commands from there. You cannot select the event that is
currently in assisted treatment.
3. To return to assisted treatment, in the Summary bar, do one of the following:
– Click Close Event List .

– Select Menu > Active Tasks > Assisted Treatment.
a The Assisted Treatment window returns to the foreground and you can
resume the procedure where you left off.
Interrupt Assisted Treatment of an Event

You can interrupt assisted treatment of an event at any time, and later resume the
operating procedure from where you left off.
l To interrupt assisted treatment of an event, do one of the following:
– In the Assisted Treatment window, click the event button in the event
a The Assisted Treatment window closes. In Event List, the event is
deselected, and the event button displays again instead of the blank
placeholder. The Event Status remains as it was when you interrupted
handling the event. When you start assisted treatment of this event again,
the procedure will resume from where you left off.
NOTE:
You can only have one event in assisted or investigative treatment at any given
time. If you want to start assisted or investigative treatment of another event, this
will interrupt any assisted/investigative treatment currently in progress. However,
you can later resume the interrupted treatment from where you left off.
Finish Assisted Treatment of an Event

When you have sent all the required event- handling commands and completed at
least the mandatory steps of the operating procedure, the Event Status changes to
Closed, and the Suggested Action is Suspend the event.
– In the Assisted Treatment window, click the event button in the event
a The Assisted Treatment window closes, and the event is cleared from Event
List.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 360 of 709 51 | 352

2 Alarms
2.3.3.1 Executing a Document Step in Assisted Treatment

w You are in the Assisted Treatment window and the operating procedure
includes a document step that you want to do.
Figure 8: Document Step
1. From the Steps list, select the [document step].

a The contents of the document display in the Default tab.
2. Read the document carefully and follow any instructions.
3. Click Backward or Forward to move through any other documents

included in this step.
NOTE: If a PDF file displays, you can also use the incorporated controls to zoom
in, zoom out, print or download the document.
2.3.3.2 Executing a Graphic Step in Assisted Treatment

includes a graphic step that you want to do. For background information about
the Desigo CC graphics feature, see the reference section.
Figure 9: Graphic Step
52 | 352 Page 361 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
l From the Steps list, select the [graphic step].

a A graphic of the facility displays in the Default tab.
2.3.3.3 Executing a Remote Notification Step in Assisted

Treatment
includes a remote notification step that you must execute manually.
Figure 10: Reno Step
1. From the Steps list, select the Remote Notification step.

a The Message Status list displays in the Default tab. For background
information see the reference [➙ 331] section.
2. Depending on the type of remote notification, the following commands may
become available in the Message Status toolbar:
– Start RENO procedure . Click to manually start the remote notification

or to re-send the remote notification.
– Stop RENO procedure . Click to abort the remote notification.
– Stop RENO procedure escalation . Click to stop the escalation of the
remote notification for the selected recipient group.
3. (Optional) Select a recipient in the Message Status area to view the text of the
message sent in the Message area.
4. Wait for the system to finish sending the notification. Depending on the
outcome, the steps status becomes one of the following:
– Successful, and the remote notification message status is

Completed. You can check off the step.
– Failed, and the remote notification message status is Aborted,

Partially failed or No Response. You can check off the step.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 362 of 709 53 | 352

2 Alarms
– Failed, and the remote notification message status is Failed. You

cannot check off the step.
2.3.3.4 Executing a Report Step in Assisted Treatment

w You are in the Assisted Treatment window, and the operating procedure
includes a report step that you must manually execute. For background
information about the Desigo CC reporting feature, see the reference section.
Figure 11: Report Step
1. From the Steps checklist, select the [report step].

a The preconfigured report displays in the Default tab. A new report is
generated each time that you select this step.
2. If the report contains form controls (for example, editable fields or drop-down
lists), specify the necessary information and click Save User Input .
3. Click Send to Output .
a The report is routed to a file, email, or printer, depending on its configured
output destination.
a When you generate an alarm printout, a report, or an event-handling form using
a virtual printer (for example, a PDF printer), the output files are saved in the
following location: C:\GMSProjects\[Customer project]\data\Reporting\Reports.
a When you complete an assisted procedure of an event, any attachment (such
as, alarm printout, report or event-handling form) is saved in the following
location: C:\GMSProjects\[Customer project]\shared\attachments. The Activity
Log report includes a link to these attachments.
2.3.3.5 Executing a Treatment Form Step in Assisted Treatment

includes a treatment form step that you must manually execute. For
background information about the Desigo CC reporting feature, see the
reference section.
54 | 352 Page 363 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
Figure 12: Treatment Form Step
1. From the Steps checklist, select the [treatment form step].

a The form that you must complete displays in the Default tab.
2. Complete the form, using the provided controls (for example, editable fields or
drop-down lists) to specify the necessary information.
3. Click Save User Input .

a The completed form is routed to a file, email, or printer, depending on its
configured output destination.
2.3.3.6 Executing an Alarm Printout Step in Assisted Treatment

includes an alarm printout step that you must manually execute. For
background information about the Desigo CC reporting feature, see the
reference section.
Figure 13: Alarm Printout Step
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 364 of 709 55 | 352

2 Alarms
1. From the Steps checklist, select the [alarm printout step].

a The preconfigured alarm report displays in the Default tab. When you
select this step for the first time, a new report is generated. On subsequent
selection, the same report is reloaded.
2. If the report contains form controls (for example, editable fields or drop-down
lists), specify the necessary information and click Save User Input .
a The report is routed to a file, email, or printer, depending on its configured
output destination.
2.3.4 Handling Recurrences of an Event

A recurring event occurs when the same event source repeatedly generates the
same condition, for example because it repeatedly switches between the Active
and Quiet states. In some Client Profiles, recurring events are grouped together
under a parent event, which acts as a container for them. The parent event has a
Counter field in its descriptor that indicates the total number of occurrences. For
Expand or Hide Recurrences of a Parent Event

w The Counter column in the event descriptor of an event contains a number,
which means it is a parent recurring event.
1. To expand the individual recurrences, in Event List, click inside the Counter
column of the parent event.
NOTE: Although the Counter column is also visible in the Event Detail bar,
Investigative Treatment, and Assisted Treatment windows, you can only
expand the individual recurrences of an event within Event List.
a All the recurrences of this event display underneath the parent event. The
recurrences have smaller event buttons than the parent event and are
sorted most recent on top.
NOTE: While the recurrences are expanded like this you cannot filter Event
List. However, you can first filter Event List and then expand the
recurrences.
2. To hide the recurrences, click inside the Counter column of the parent event
again.
Handle all Recurrences Together from a Parent Event

You can handle all the recurrences of an event at the same time by selecting the
parent event and sending event-handling commands from there. You can do this
from Event List, but also from the Event Detail bar, and from the Investigative
Treatment or Assisted Treatment windows.
w The Counter column in the event descriptor of an event contains a number,
which means it is a parent recurring event.
1. Select the parent recurring event by clicking its event button.
NOTE: You can also use the CTRL and/or SHIFT keys to select multiple
events—but such a selection can only include parent events. You cannot, for
56 | 352 Page 365 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
example, select a parent event and an individual child recurrence belonging to

a different parent event.
2. Send event-handling commands [➙ 47] from the parent descriptor in the
normal way.
a Each command you send from the parent is sent to all the child recurrences as
well. For example, if you acknowledge the parent event, all its recurrences are
acknowledged as well.
Handle Individual Recurrences Separately

You can handle one or more individual recurrences of an event separately, rather
than handling them all at the same time from the parent event.
1. In Event List, click inside the Counter column of the event you want to handle
to expand its recurrences.
a The child recurrences display under the parent event. Note that the
topmost child recurrence always corresponds to the parent event.
2. Select the child recurrence that you want to handle by clicking its event button.
You can also use the CTRL and/or SHIFT keys to select multiple child
recurrences, but they must all belong to the same parent event.
3. Send event-handling commands [➙ 47] from the child recurrence descriptor in
the normal way.
a Each command will only be sent to the selected child recurrence.
4. When you finish handling an individual child recurrence (typically, after you
send a Reset or Close command), it will be cleared from the list when you
deselect it.
NOTE: Since the topmost child recurrence corresponds to the parent event,
any commands you send to it will also affect the parent event. If the topmost
child recurrence is cleared from the list, the next most recent child recurrence
in the set becomes the topmost one, and the details of the parent event will
refresh to show its data.
2.3.5 Customizing the Columns in Event List

You can customize what columns display in Event List, change their order, or
resize them.
NOTE:
- Any changes you make to the columns in Event List will also apply to the Event
Detail bar and to the Investigative Treatment and Assisted Treatment windows.
- Changes to column settings will be automatically saved when you exit the
Desigo CC client application, and so will persist across sessions.
- Column settings are also specific to the user profile. This means that different
users can have different column settings.
- Depending on the Client Profile, there are some columns that cannot be moved,
resized, or removed.
Move or Resize a Column Directly in Event List

1. To resize a column, drag the edge of its column header in Event List to the
desired width.
2. To move a column to a different position, drag-and-drop its column header in
Event List to the desired position.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 366 of 709 57 | 352

2 Alarms
Add, Remove, or Rearrange Columns in Event List

1. Right-click the column headers in Event List and select Customize columns.
a The Customize columns dialog box displays.
2. Do one or more of the following:
– To add a column to Event List, select it in the Available columns list and
click Add .
– To remove a column from Event List, select it in the Visible columns list and
click Remove .
– To reposition a column, select it in the Visible columns list and click Move
up or Move down.
3. Click OK.
a Event List displays with the columns as you have customized them.
Restore the Default Column Settings in Event List

w You previously resized, moved, or added/removed columns in Event List and
now you want to restore the default settings.
1. Right-click a column header in Event List.
2. Select Restore column layout.
a Event List displays with the columns back to their default settings.
2.3.6 Filtering Event List

You can filter the list of events, for example, so that it only shows events belonging
to a certain category (such as Fault), or events for which a specific command (such
as Acknowledge) is available.
Filter by Category with Event Lamps

w The Summary bar contains at least one event lamp (category) for which there
are events.
1. In the Summary bar, click the event lamp whose events you want to view.
a Event List displays a filtered list containing only the events belonging to the
category of that event lamp. The event lamp you clicked changes color to
indicate a filter is active. The color of the filter icon changes to red . The
Event List header displays the currently applied filter.
2. Click the same event lamp again to remove the category filter.
58 | 352 Page 367 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
Apply a Simple Filter

w You want to filter Event List by a single criterion, for example, category,
date/time, discipline, or source status.
1. In the Summary bar, click the filter icon .
2. Select what you want to filter by (for example, Event Status), and then click the
criterion you want to apply (for example, Unprocessed).
a Event List is filtered to show only the events that match the criterion. The color
of the filter icon changes to red . The Event List header displays the
currently applied filter.
1. To remove the filter, click and select Remove Filter.

NOTE: This type of filter only applies one criterion at a time. If you repeat the
above steps to select a different criterion (for example, Source Status=Active, or
Date and Time=Last hour) the previously applied filter will be cleared. To apply
multiple criteria, see Apply Advanced Filter [➙ 59], below.
Apply an Advanced Filter

w You want to filter Event List by multiple criteria simultaneously.
1. In the Summary bar, click filter and select Advanced Filter.

a The Advanced Filter dialog box displays.
2. If you want to filter by category, discipline, event status, and/or source status:
a. Select the check box for the criterion you want to apply (for example,
Category) then select one or more values. For example, Life Safety and Fault.
b. Repeat the preceding step for any other criteria you want to apply. For
example, Discipline.
3. Use the drop-down lists to specify any other filter criteria you want to apply:
– Location/Designation: Enter some part of the System-Browser path or
designation of the event source. For example, Management
System.Clients.
– Name/Description: Enter some part of the name or description of the event
source. For example, Main Server.
– System (available only for distributed systems).
– Date and Time: Filter based on when the events occurred. For example,
yesterday or last quarter hour.
– Tag: Set whether you want to selectively show or hide tagged events.
– Maintenance: Set whether to see only Maintenance or only Genuine
events.
– Show hidden events: Set whether to show events that were hidden owing
to the internal logic of field panels.
4. Click OK.
a The list of events is filtered accordingly, and you can check what criteria
you applied in the Event List header.
5. If required, proceed to: Save an Event List Filter for Future Use [➙ 59], below.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 368 of 709 59 | 352

2 Alarms
Save an Event List Filter for Future Use

w You applied a filter to Event List and want to save it for future reuse.
1. In the Summary bar, click the filter icon and select Advanced Filter.
a The Advanced Filter dialog box opens, displaying the currently applied filter
criteria.
2. Do the following:
a. (Optional) Specify any filter criteria.
b. In the Filter name field, enter a name.
c. Click Save.
a The filter is saved. Filters that you save in this way are user-specific and
will not be visible to other users of the system.
3. To reuse the filter, proceed to Apply a Previously Saved Event List Filter
[➙ 60], below.
Apply a Previously Saved Event List Filter

w You previously saved an Event List filter for future use [➙ 59].
2. In the Advanced Filter dialog box, do the following:

a. From the Saved filters drop-down list, select the filter you want to apply.
b. Click Apply.
a Event List is filtered.
Modify or Delete a Saved Event List Filter

w You previously saved an Event List filter for future use [➙ 59].
2. In the Advanced Filter dialog box, select the filter you want to apply from the
Saved filters drop-down list.
– To modify the filter, change the filter criteria and click Update.
– To delete the filter, click Delete.
Remove All Filters from Event List

w You want to remove all the filters currently applied to Event List.
1. In the Summary bar, click the filter icon and select Remove Filter.
a Event List displays an unfiltered list, containing all the events. The color of the
filter icon changes to gray .
Autoremove Filters When a New Event Comes In

When you apply filters to Event List, it means you will not see any new incoming
events that do not match the current filter criteria. To avoid missing events, you can
configure the system to automatically remove all filters whenever a new event
comes in.
To enable autoremove:
1. Click the filter icon , and select Autoremove on New Events (if it is not
already selected: a checkmark indicates that the option is already active).
a When new events come in any applied filters will be automatically removed.
60 | 352 Page 369 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
To disable autoremove:
1. Click the filter icon and deselect Autoremove on New Events.

a Any applied filters will persist even if new events come in.
Manually Tag Events in Event List

Event List includes a column that lets you manually tag individual events. You can
then use filters to selectively show or hide events you have tagged in this way. Any
tags you apply are valid only during the current client session. When you restart
the client application, Event List defaults back to all events untagged.
w The Tag column displays in Event List. See Customizing the Columns in Event
List [➙ 57].
1. Move your cursor in the Tag column of an event.
2. Click the tag icon that displays on mouseover.
a The event is now tagged and marked with .
3. To untag the event, click again.
4. To selectively show/hide the tagged events, proceed to Apply or Remove a Tag

Filter [➙ 61].
NOTES:
● You can also use CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple events to tag or untag them
all together with a single click.
● In case of recurrent events, tagging/untagging a parent affects all its child
recurrences. You can also separately tag/untag an individual child recurrence.
● When a tagged event changes its state, it is automatically untagged.
Apply or Remove a Tag Filter

Note that applying a tag filter will not remove any other filters you have applied.
Filter by tag works in combination with the other filter criteria. For example, if you
filter by Category=Fault and then apply a tag filter to hide tagged events, you will
only see events belonging to the Fault category that are not tagged.
w You previously tagged some events in Event List, and now you want to
selectively hide or show the tagged events.
1. To apply a tag filter, do one of the following:
– Click the filter icon , select Filter by Tag, and click either Hide tagged
events or Show tagged events only. (A check mark displays next to
whichever option is currently selected).
– Click the filter icon and click Advanced Filter. In the dialog box, from the
Tag drop-down list, select either Hide tagged events or Show tagged
events only.
a The list of events is filtered accordingly. Applying a tag filter does not
remove any other filters you have applied. Filter by tag works in
combination with the other filter criteria. You can check the currently
applied filter criteria in the Event List header.
2. To remove a tag filter, do one of the following:
– Click the filter icon , select Filter by Tag, and clear both check boxes to
show both tagged and untagged events.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 370 of 709 61 | 352

2 Alarms
– Click the filter icon and click Advanced Filter. In the dialog box, from the
Tag drop-down list, select Show both tagged and untagged events.
a The list of events will no longer be filtered by tags, but any other filters you
applied will remain still active. Check the Event List header to see them.
2.3.7 Printing the Whole Event List

1. In Event List, right-click and select Print Event List.
2. (Optional) Modify the settings In the Print Preview dialog box.
3. Click Print and Close.
a The printout is sent to the selected printer. A message box informs you if the
print operation fails. For background information, see the reference [➙ 15]
section.
2.3.8 Changing the Sorting of Events

Depending on the Client Profile, you may be able to sort the events by Category,
Event Status, Date/Time, and IN/OUT. For background information, see the
reference [➙ 225] section.
1. Click the column header you want to sort by. For example, Date/Time.
a The selected sorting is applied. An up/down arrow in the column header
indicates ascending/descending order. No arrow indicates default sort
order.
– Click the same column header again to invert the sorting order.
– Click the same column header a third time to remove the sorting.
2. Click another column header to sort by a different criterion. For example, Event
Status.
2.3.9 Handling Alarm Suppression for System Objects

When alarm suppression is enabled for an object or subtree, any related events do
not display on the management station. All consequences of such events on the
management station, as for example reactions, remote notifications, and so on, are
suppressed as well. However, value and status changes of the affected objects are
still updated and logged in the history.
Figure 14: Alarm Suppression Concept
62 | 352 Page 371 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Alarms
2
NOTICE
Alarm Transmission to Fire Department
The alarm suppression feature disables the display of events concerning the
affected object or subtree. The alarm functionality (for example, the fire detection
system) is not affected. Consequently, any incoming alarms are still transmitted to
the fire department.
To block the alarm transmission to the fire department, you must exclude the fire
detection by disabling the area, zone, or fire detector on the panel as follows:
● In System Browser, select the fire object.
● In the Operation tab, next to the property Mode, click Disable.
Prerequisites:
● You are authorized to handle alarm suppression.
● One or more system objects support the alarm suppression feature.
NOTE: Due to some restrictions depending on specific countries regulations, in
some configurations the alarm suppression feature can be disabled. In such cases,
the alarm suppression indicator does not display on the Summary bar, and
executing the following procedures has no effect.
Enable Alarm Suppression for an Object

1. In System Browser, select the system object for which you want to enable
alarm suppression.
2. Click the Extended Operation tab.
3. Next to the Alarm Suppression property, click Enable.
a Alarm suppression is enabled for the selected object.
NOTE 1: If the selected object is in alarm when you enable alarm suppression
its events remain visible in the Summary bar and Event List. Alarm suppression
will activate on the next events that occur.
NOTE 2: The following error message displays if the alarm suppression feature
is not available for your configuration: Enable failed.
Enable Alarm Suppression for an Object Subtree

1. In System Browser, select the system object for which you want to enable
alarm suppression.
3. Next to the Alarm Suppression property, click Enable All.
a The alarm suppression is enabled for the selected object and the subtree to
which it belongs.
NOTE 1: If any object in the subtree is in alarm when you enable the alarm
suppression, its events remain visible in the Summary bar and Event List. The
alarm suppression will activate on the next events that occur.
NOTE 2: The following error message displays if the alarm suppression feature
is not available for your configuration: Enable failed.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 372 of 709 63 | 352

2 Alarms
Disable Alarm Suppression for an Object

1. In System Browser, select the system object with alarm suppression enabled.
3. Next to the Alarm Suppression property, click Disable.
a Alarm suppression is disabled for the selected object.
NOTE: If the object is in alarm when you disable alarm suppression its events
display in the Summary bar and Event List.
Disable Alarm Suppression for an Object Subtree

1. In System Browser, select the system object with alarm suppression enabled
also for its subtree.
3. Next to the Alarm Suppression property, click Disable All.
a Alarm suppression is disabled for the selected object and the subtree to which
it belongs.
NOTE: If any object in the subtree is in alarm when you disable alarm
suppression its events display in the Summary bar and Event List.
Retrieve the List of System Objects Affected by Alarm Suppression

You can retrieve the list of objects affected by alarm suppression using the System
Browser filter or generating a report.
Method 1: Filter Objects in System Browser

1. In System Browser, click .
2. Open the Other combo box and select Alarm Suppression.
3. Click Search.
a The results display the item found area.
64 | 352 Page 373 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Scheduling
2
Method 2: Generate a Report

2. Select Applications >Reports > Status.
3. In the Default tab, click Import .
4. In the Open dialog box, do the following:

a. Navigate and select the alarm suppression template:
Report.Status.HQ.AlarmsSuppression.xml.
b. Click Open.
5. Click OK.
6. Select Applications >Reports > Status > Alarm Suppression.
a The alarm suppression report template displays in the Default tab.
7. Click Run .
a The list of objects affected by alarm suppression displays in the report
template.
2.4 Scheduling
This section provides instructions for using the Schedules of Desigo CC. For
background information, see the reference section.
2.4.1 Creating a BACnet Schedule

Scenario: You need to create a weekly occupancy schedule in a field panel that
controls when the lights turn on and off for a school building. You also want to
create a holiday calendar that is used as an exception to the schedule, so that the
lights will stay off during the holiday break, when the building will be vacant.
Reference: For background information, see BACnet Schedules [➙ 227].
Workflow diagram:
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 374 of 709 65 | 352

2 Scheduling
Prerequisites:
● System Browser is in Application View.
Steps:
1 – Create Schedule Entries

w You have created a BACnet schedule containing a data point that you want the
weekly occupancy schedule to control. It is available in Schedules > BACnet
Schedules in the System Browser.
1. Select Applications > Schedules > BACnet Schedules > [BACnet schedule].
2. Select the Schedule Entries tab and click New to add a new entry.
3. Specify the time from when you want to start executing the schedule, for
example, 6:00:00 AM, and select the Default check box.
NOTE: Leaving an entry set to Default means the schedule will command all
objects to the Schedule Default.
4. Click New to add a second entry.
5. Specify the end time to stop the schedule execution, for example, 6:00:00 PM,
and change the Default check box to OFF.
6. Click Save .
a The system saves the schedule settings.
2 – Create a Holiday Calendar and Add Entries

1. From the Scheduler toolbar, click New .
2. Click New BACnet Calendar.

3. In the Calendar Entries section, click New.
4. In the Calendar Time Period section, select the Date range option and specify
the start and end dates for the calendar in the Start date and End Date fields.
5. Enter a name and the field device on which you want to save the calendar and
click Save .
a The system adds the calendar to the BACnet Calendars node in the Application
view.
3 – Create an Exception
1. In System Browser, select Applications > Schedules > BACnet Schedules >
[BACnet schedule].
2. Navigate to the Day/Week view, right-click the BACnet schedule and select
Add Exception.
3. In the Exception Period section, select Calendar.
4. From the Calendar drop-down list, select the HolidayBreak calendar.
5. In the Exception Times section, delete one of the two entries.
66 | 352 Page 375 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Scheduling
2
6. In the remaining entry, enter 6:00:00 AM.

7. Clear the None check box.
NOTE: Creating an entry with the default check box checked returns control to
the weekly schedule. For example, you might want to override the schedule for
one hour at 1 P.M., so you create an entry at 1 P.M. with the override value.
Then, you create an entry at 2 P.M. with None checked. Control will return to
the weekly schedule at 2 P.M.
8. Select OFF from the drop-down list.
a The system creates an exception.
2.4.2 Creating a Management Station Schedule

Scenario: You need to create a management station schedule on the Desigo CC
server and define an exception to the schedule for a specific time period.
In this scenario, we have defined an exception for a specific time period. You can
also create a calendar and set it as an exception [➙ 73] to the schedule. This
ensures that you do not have to specify the time periods for multiple schedules and
can use the same calendar for all schedules (if the time period is the same).
Reference: For background information, see Management Station Schedules

[➙ 230].
Workflow diagram:
1 2 3
Setup the Time Create Schedule Add an Exception

Period Entries with Entries
Prerequisites:
Steps:
1 – Setup the Type and Time Period of the Schedule

w You have created a Management Station schedule [➙ 72] containing a data
point that you want the management station schedule to control. It is available
in Schedules > Management Station Schedules in the System Browser.
1. Select Applications > Schedules > Management Station Schedules >
[Management Station Schedule].
2. Click the Setup tab and perform the following steps:
– In the Sub-Type drop down list, select Weekly or Daily to create a weekly
management station schedule [➙ 231] or a daily management station
schedule [➙ 234].
– From the Start date drop-down list, select the start date for the schedule.
Selecting the Any date check box defaults to the current date.
– From the End date drop-down list, select the end date for the schedule.
Selecting the Any date check box defaults to an infinite date.
– For every linked object, map values to the Schedule Active/Inactive state in
the Output values section. In case of daily schedules the Output values
section is located in the Schedule Entries section.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 376 of 709 67 | 352

2 Scheduling
a The management station schedule of the selected type is created and a time
period is assigned to the schedule.
2 – Create Schedule Entries

[Management Station Schedule]
2. Perform either of the following steps to add a new schedule entry.
– Navigate to the Day/Week view, right-click, and select Add Weekly Entry.
– Click New in the Schedule Entries tab.
NOTE: In case of weekly schedules, the Output values section is located in
the Setup tab.
3. Specify the time from when you want to start executing the schedule.
4. Click Save to save the schedule entries.

a The weekly schedule entry is created.
3 – Add an Exception with Entries

[Management Station Schedule]
2. Perform either of the following steps to add an exception.
– In the Day/Week view, right-click on the day from which you want to add an
exception and select Add Exception.
– Click New in the Exceptions tab.
3. Select the Date exception type and define the time period when the exception
shall be active.
4. In the Exception Times section, define the periods and the related schedules
states for the days in the defined period (that will override the definitions of the
weekly schedule). The exception periods are marked in red color.
5. In the Active Values section map the Exception active value to a value of the
linked Outputs.
6. Click Save .
NOTE: Before the exception block can appear in the daily or weekly view, you
must create at least one Time and Value pair, and one of the values must be
ON.
a An exception period is now defined for the management station schedule.
Next, you can configure an Organization Mode as the Output of a schedule.
2.4.3 Additional Scheduling Procedures

Select the following for additional information on BACnet schedules, Management
Station schedules, and Timeline Viewer.
2.4.3.1 BACnet Schedules

Select any of the procedures for information on BACnet Schedules, Calendars,
Commands, Weekly Schedules, and Exceptions.
For background information, see BACnet Schedules reference [➙ 227].
Prerequisites:
68 | 352 Page 377 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Scheduling
2
Create a BACnet Schedule and Associate a Data Point to it

1. Select the Manual navigation check box.
2. Select Applications > Schedules > BACnet Schedules.
3. Click New and select New BACnet Schedule.
4. Navigate to the Management View and select the field panel that contains the
data point you want the schedule to control, drag-and-drop the data point to the
Outputs tab.
NOTE: For this example, a binary output has been selected with two states
(OCC, UNOCC) to represent lighting for a building when it is occupied or
unoccupied.
5. In the Setup tab, select the default value, the text group (making sure that the
group matches labels with the expected values), the start and end dates, and
the priority. The system adds the point to the schedule.
6. Click Save .
a The BACnet schedule displays in System Browser.
Create a New Schedule from an Existing One

Perform the following steps to create a new BACnet or Management Station
schedule from an existing one.
1. Select either of the following:
BACnet Schedules – Applications > Schedules > BACnet Schedules
Management Station Schedules – Applications > Schedules > Management
Station Schedules
2. Open an existing schedule and perform the required modifications to it.
3. Click Save As .
4. In the Save Object As dialog box, specify a name for the schedule and the field
panel you want this schedule to be associated with. Click OK.
a The schedule is saved with a new name.
Delete a Schedule
Perform the following steps to delete a BACnet or Management Station schedule.
BACnet Schedules – Applications > Schedules > BACnet Schedules
Station Schedules
2. Open the schedule you want to delete and click Delete .
Create a New Calendar from an Existing One

Perform the following procedure to create a new BACnet or Management Station
calendar from an existing one.
BACnet Schedules – Applications > Schedules > BACnet Calendars
Station Calendars
2. Open the existing calendar and perform the required modifications.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 378 of 709 69 | 352

2 Scheduling
3. Click Save As .
4. In the Save Object As dialog box, specify a name and the field panel you want
this calendar associated with and click OK.
a The calendar is saved with a new name.
Delete a Calendar
Perform the following steps to delete a BACnet or Management Station calendar.
BACnet Schedules – Applications > Schedules > BACnet Calendars
Station Calendars
2. Open the calendar you want to delete and click Delete .
Modify a BACnet Calendar

1. Select Applications > Schedules > BACnet Calendars.
2. Open the calendar you want to update.
3. To modify start dates, end dates, or recurrence settings, select a calendar entry
from the Calendar Entries section, and select the settings you want.
NOTE: If you use wildcards for date ranges (the Advanced check box), make
sure to read your vendor’s field panel documentation since the implementation
of this feature is vendor-specific.
4. To delete a calendar entry, click the Delete icon associated with the entry.
NOTE: Do not click the Delete icon from the Scheduler toolbar, or you will
delete the entire calendar.
5. To add a calendar entry, click New and select the settings you want.
6. Click Save .
Add a Command
2. Select Application View > Schedules > BACnet Commands.
3. From the Text Group drop-down list, select the text group you want associated
with this command.
4. In the Command Table Action List, click New.
5. Highlight the text in the new action list, and enter a name.
6. From System Browser, drag-and-drop the desired object to the action list. The
details of the point display in the Command Table Action List.
7. Complete the resulting fields and click Save .
8. Enter a name for the command in the Name field and from the Field device
drop-down list, select the panel you want this command associated with.
9. Click OK.
Modify a Command
1. Select Applications > Schedules > BACnet Commands.
2. Open the command you want to modify.
70 | 352 Page 379 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Scheduling
2
3. Make the required updates to the Text Group and to the values displayed in the
Command Table Action List.
4. Click Save .
Create a Weekly BACnet Schedule Entry

2. Open the schedule to which you want to add a new weekly schedule entry.
3. Navigate to the Day/Week view, right click and select Add Weekly Entry.
4. Click the Schedule Entries tab and enter values into the relevant fields.
5. Click Save .
Delete a Weekly BACnet Schedule Entry

2. Open the schedule with the weekly schedule entry you want to delete.
3. In the Day/Week view, click the weekly schedule that contains the entry you
want to delete.
The details display in the Schedule Entries tab.
4. In the Schedule Entries tab, locate the entry you want to delete and click Delete
.
NOTE: You cannot delete the entry for the beginning and end of day. You can
delete default entries at other times, as long as there are still entries at
beginning and end of day. You can also replace the entry at beginning or end
of day with a non-default entry.
5. Click Save .
Modify a Weekly BACnet Schedule Entry

2. Open the schedule you want to modify.
3. Select the weekly schedule you want to modify.
NOTE: Weekly schedules are highlighted with a blue bar on the left side of the
entry.
4. In the Schedule Entries tab, modify the Time and Value fields.
5. Click Save .
Add a BACnet Exception with Entries

2. Open the schedule to which you want to add an exception.
3. Right-click inside the schedule in the Day/Week view and click Add Exception.
4. Click the Exceptions tab and enter the details for the exception.
5. Click Save .
6. To add new exception entries click the Exception Times expander and click
New.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 380 of 709 71 | 352

2 Scheduling
7. Enter values into the Time and Value fields.
8. Click Save .
Delete a BACnet Exception and Entries

2. Open the schedule whose exception is to be deleted.
a The details of the schedule display in the Day/Week view.
3. Right-click the exception you want to delete.
NOTE: Exceptions are highlighted with a red bar on the left side of the entry.
– Select Delete Exception to delete an exception.
– Select Delete Exception Entry to delete an exception entry.
5. Click Save .
Modify a BACnet Exception and Entries

2. Open the schedule whose exception is to be modified.
3. Click the exception or exception entry you want to modify.
a The details of the selected exception or its entry display in the Exceptions
tab.
4. Modify the fields in the Exceptions tab as needed.
NOTE: If you use wildcards for date ranges (the Advanced check box), refer to
your vendor’s documentation since the implementation of this feature is
vendor-specific.
5. Click Save .
2.4.3.2 Management Station Schedule

Select any of the procedures for information on Management Station Schedules,
Calendars, Schedule Entries, and Exceptions.
For background information, see Management Station Schedules reference
[➙ 230].
Prerequisites:
Create a Management Station Schedule and Link a Data Point to it

1. Select the Manual navigation check box.
2. Select Applications > Schedules > Management Station Schedules.
3. Navigate to the Management View and select the field panel that contains the
data point you want the schedule to control, drag-and-drop the data point to the
Outputs tab.
a The system adds the point to the schedule.
4. Click Save .
a The Management Station schedule displays in System Browser.
72 | 352 Page 381 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Scheduling
2
Modify a Weekly Management Station Schedule Entry

2. Open the schedule you want to modify.
3. In the Day/Week view, click the weekly schedule you want to modify.
Schedules are highlighted with a blue bar on the side of the entry.
4. In the Schedule Entries tab, modify the Time and Value fields as needed.
NOTE: You can also drag the blocks up and down in the daily and weekly
views to adjust the time. For more information, see Management Station
Schedule Workspace.
5. Click Save .
Delete a Weekly Management Station Schedule Entry

2. Open the schedule with the weekly schedule entry you want to delete.
3. In the Day/Week view, click the weekly schedule that contains the entry you
want to delete.
a The details display in the Schedule Entries tab.
4. Locate the entry you want to delete.
5. Click Delete .
NOTE: You cannot delete default values.
6. Click Save .
Create a Management Station Calendar and Add Entries

1. Select Applications > Schedules > Management Station Calendars.
2. In the Calendar Entries section, click New.
3. Enter the details of the calendar entries.
4. Click Save .
5. Enter the name and description for the calendar.

a The management station calendar is created with the entries and displays in
the System Browser. You can now set this calendar as an exception by
selecting the Calendar option in the Exceptions section and specifying its
name.
Modify a Management Station Calendar

1. Select Applications > Schedules > Management Station Calendars.
2. Open the calendar you want to update.
3. To modify start dates, end dates, or recurrence settings, select a calendar entry
from the Calendar Entries section, and select the settings you want.
4. To delete a calendar entry, click Delete .

NOTE: Do not click the Delete from the Scheduler toolbar, or you will
delete the entire calendar.
5. Click Save .
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 382 of 709 73 | 352

2 Scheduling
Delete a Management Station Exception and Entries

2. Open the schedule with the exception you want to delete.
3. Right-click the exception you want to delete.
NOTE: Exceptions are highlighted with a red bar on the left side of the entry.
– To delete the exception, select Delete Exception.
– To delete an exception entry, select Delete Exception Entry.
5. Click Save .
Modify a Management Station Exception and Entries

2. Open the schedule with the exception you want to modify.
3. Click the exception or exception entry you want to modify.
a Exceptions are highlighted with a red bar on the left side of the entry. The
details of the selected exception or its entry display in the Exceptions tab.
4. In Exceptions tab, modify the fields as required.
5. Click Save .
2.4.3.3 Timeline Viewer

Select any of the procedures for information on timeline viewer. For background
information, see timeline viewer reference [➙ 237].
Add a Schedule to the Timeline Viewer

w Timeline Viewer is open and displaying one or more schedules.
1. In System Browser, select the Manual navigation check box.
2. Navigate to the schedule you want to add.
3. Drag-and-drop the schedule into the Timeline Viewer.
a The system adds the schedule to the timeline viewer.
Bring the Current Day into View

w Using the Time Range scrollbar, you have scrolled away from the current day
and would like to return to it quickly.
1. Click Show Today .

NOTE: Clicking the Show Today icon does not affect any preset time period
you have chosen.
Change the Preset Time Span

1. Click Preset time spans .
2. Select the time span you want to display in the viewer.

a The timeline viewer displays the new selection.
74 | 352 Page 383 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
Zoom In and Zoom Out

w You want to decrease or increase the viewable span of the timeline.
1. Click Zoom In or Zoom Out .

NOTE: Each time you click the icon, the timeline decreases or increases to the
next preset time period.
2.5 Reports
This section provides instructions for using the Reports of Desigo CC. For
2.5.1 Printing a Standard Report
Scenario: You want to run a Standard report, view it as a PDF/XLS and then print
it.
Reference: For background information, see Reports reference.
Workflow diagram:
Prerequisites:
● For viewing a report in Excel, Microsoft Excel 2007 or later is installed on your
system.
● The report templates are imported in a folder within the Reports application in
System Browser.
Steps:
1 – Verify the Standard Report Templates

2. Select Application View > Applications > Reports.
3. Expand the folder where the report templates are imported.
a The standard reporting templates are available.
2 – Run a Report
You can run a report using either of the following options:
Option 1: Using Toolbar Icons Run/Run As…
w You have selected a report definition that you want to run and the report
definition displays in Edit mode.
– Click Run to run the report definition according to your login language.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 384 of 709 75 | 352

2 Reports
– Click Run As to run the report definition according to the selected

language.
a Localized data is retrieved and loaded in the cells of a table/plot in the
report.
a The report execution status displays in the Report Management section below
the report definition. On successful report execution, the generated report
displays in Run mode.
Option 2: Using The Related Items Tab
1. Select an object from System Browser. This object is set as the name filter for
the report definition you want to execute.
2. In the Related Items tab, select an icon/link for the report definition. For
example, Object Status. Do not select an icon/link for New Report as this
opens a new report definition.
a The selected report displays in the Secondary pane in Run mode. The selected
object is set as the name filter for the tables and plots present in the report. If
the selected report in the Related Items tab is a related report for the selected
System Browser object, then data is retrieved according to the name filters set
for report elements. However, if the selected report in the Related Items tab is
a Show in Related Items report, the name filter configured for all the reporting
elements in the generated report is replaced by the path of the selected object
in System Browser
After running a report definition, should you decide to change some definition
parameters, click Edit to toggle from Run mode to Edit mode in order to
make your configuration changes.
a The report execution status displays in the Report Management section. On
successful report execution, the generated report displays information related
to the selected object.
76 | 352 Page 385 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
Figure 15:
3 – View a Report
You can view a report as a PDF output or as an Excel output.
Option 1: Viewing a Report Definition as a PDF
1. For viewing a report definition as a PDF, click Create and view PDF .
a The PDF file opens in the PDF viewer. When a PDF document exceeds the
page limit of 500 pages, it splits into two documents. You can save, print, zoom
in, and zoom out of the PDF file.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 386 of 709 77 | 352

2 Reports
Option 2: Viewing a Report Definition in the Excel format

1. For viewing a report definition in the Excel format without a template, click
Create and view Excel .
a An Excel file is created and stored under the following temporary path
[Drive]:\Users\[UserID]\AppData\Local\Temp\temp\GMS. A dialog box displays,
asks you if you want to save a permanent copy of this file.
To view a report in the Excel with a template, see Viewing a Report Definition in
the Excel format with a template.
4 – Print a Report
w You are viewing a report as PDF or Excel.
1. Proceed as follows:
– For a PDF file, click Print .

– For a file that displays in Excel format, you have to print from the Microsoft
menu.
a The Print dialog box displays.
2. Select the configured printer and click Print .
a The report is printed.
2.5.2 Running a Customized Report
Scenario: You want to configure a customized report based on a Standard report

and configure the filters, output, and set it to run automatically.
Reference: For background information, see Reports reference.
Workflow diagram:
78 | 352 Page 387 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
Prerequisites:
● For configuring the report output as an email, you have configured the mail
server or have verified that it has been configured.
● Email addresses are configured in address book.
● For configuring the report output to the printer, ensure that one or more local
printers are configured.
Steps:
1 – Select a Standard Report for Configuration

2. Select Applications > Reports.
3. Select a standard report to be customized.
a The report definition displays.
2 – Configure Report Parameters

w You have selected the report which you want to customize.
1. Click the Home tab and add the following elements to your report as needed:
– Tables [➙ 85]: A table is a grouping of data in rows and columns.
– Plots [➙ 86]: A plot displays data in a graphical view.
– Labels [➙ 87]: Labels allow you to type text that can be displayed in a
report.
– Keywords [➙ 86]: Keywords are pre-defined templates added to a report
definition. They are replaced with actual data in Run mode.
– Logos [➙ 87]: A logo is a graphic or symbol that is added to a report.
– Form Controls [➙ 88]: Form Controls are controls that you can edit in Run
mode.
a The report definition is configured with the elements you added.
2. Click the Layout tab and configure the layout for your report by setting the
following parameters as needed:
– Orientation [➙ 89]
– Page Size [➙ 89]
– Margins [➙ 89]
– Headers and Footers [➙ 90]
– Auto Scaling [➙ 90]
a The report definition is configured with the specified layout options.
3. From the Layout tab, format the elements of the report for an enhanced
appearance by setting the following as needed:
– Adjusting Positions of Elements [➙ 91]
– Customizing Fonts [➙ 91]
– Applying Color [➙ 91]
4. Save the report definition by clicking Save .
a The report definition is customized as per the specified parameters.
3 – Apply Filters to Condense the Displayed Output

w You have selected and configured the report to which you want to apply filters.
1. Click the Filter tab and apply the following filters as needed:
– Name Filter [➙ 94]: Enables you to filter the data on the basis of object
names displayed in the report.
– Condition Filter [➙ 95]: Displays data that matches the specified filter
condition.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 388 of 709 79 | 352

2 Reports
– Time Filter [➙ 95]: Displays data that matches with the specified date/time
value.
– Row Filter [➙ 96]: Displays the number of rows specified.
– Graphics Filter [➙ 96]: Displays the graphics and viewports of the object
that is passed as the name filter to the report.
2. Save the report definition by clicking Save .

a The report is configured according to the specified filters.
4 – Configure Report Output

w You have a configured report that has the required elements, filters, and layout.
You now want to set a destination to route the report output.
1. Click the Settings tab and in the Report Output group box click Dialog Launcher
.
a The Report Output Definition dialog box displays.
2. Configure the destination (File [➙ 96], Email [➙ 97], or Printer [➙ 98]) to which
you want to route the report output as well as specify the file format (PDF, XLS,
CSV, or XML) in which the report output can be generated.
a The report output is configured to either a file, email, or printer.
5 – Configure Automatic Report Execution

w There is at least one report definition available under System Browser >
Reports, for which a Report Output Definition is configured.
1. (To run the report automatically from the Extended Operations tab) Select the
report definition from System Browser and from the Extended Operations tab,
click Execute.
2. (To run reports automatically from macros, reactions, or graphics) Select either
of the following options:
– Macro [➙ 99]
– Reactions [➙ 100]
– Graphics [➙ 100]
a The report executes in the background when triggered.
There is no visual indication that the report is being generated. On successful
execution, the report is routed to the destination configured in the Report
Output Definition such as email, printer, or folder.
NOTE:
If you have not configured the destination in the Report Output Definition, the
report is routed to the path specified in the Location supervised folder under
80 | 352 Page 389 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
Management System > Servers > Main Server > Report Manager > Report
Default Folder. This path must be the relative path of the project and not the full
path. For example, if the report is to be routed to
[Drive]:\GMSProjects\[Customer Project]\data\Reporting\Reports, the following
relative path must be specified in the Location field, data\Reporting\Reports.
2.5.3 Additional Report Procedures

Select any of the procedures for additional information on Reports.
2.5.3.1 Managing Report Definitions and Folders

This section provides information on organizing and working with report definitions.
Export a Report Definition

2. Select Applications > Reports > Report Definitions or the folders containing
report definitions. You can export multiple report definitions or multiple folders;
however, you cannot export a report definition and a folder at the same time.
3. Click Export .
4. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, select a destination.

5. Click OK.
a A confirmation message displays and the report definitions or folders are
exported to the selected location.
NOTE:
If the report definition has a name filter that contains a wild card in the system
name, then the system name is not removed during export. However, if the
system name does not contain a wild card character, then during export the
system name is removed from the name filter.
Import a Report Definition

w You have exported report definitions or a folder containing report definitions to
a specified location.
w You have selected a report folder for importing into System Browser.
2. Select Applications > Reports > [reports folder].
3. Click Import .
a The Open dialog box displays.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 390 of 709 81 | 352

2 Reports
4. Browse for the folder where the exported .xml files or logo files were created
and saved after exporting a report definition.
If you import a report definition with the same name that already exists under
the folder selected for import, the existing report definitions with the same
names are overwritten.
5. Select single or multiple .xml and any associated logo files (.jpeg, .gif, .png,
and so on).
– Use the CTRL key to select multiple files.
– If you import logo files, these are stored at the default logo storage location:
[drive]:\GMSProjects\[project]\data\Reporting\Logos.
– If you do not select associated logo files while importing, then the imported
report definition displays a No Parking symbol in place of a logo.
6. Click Open.
a On successful import, the selected report definitions are imported in the
selected folder in System Browser.
NOTE:
You can import pre-configured report definitions and associated logo files under
\GMSMainProject\Data\Reporting.
Create and Delete Reports Folders

Creating Reports folders in System Browser allows you to organize report
definitions.
1. In System Browser, select Applications > Reports or one of its subfolders.
a Reports displays.
– To create a new reports folder:

a. Click New .
b. Select New Folder .
c. In the New Object dialog box, enter a name and description.
d. Click OK.
a The new reports folder is saved.
– To delete a reports folder:
a. Select the folder you want to delete.
b. Click Delete .
a The reports folder is deleted.
Save a Report Definition as the Default Template

a Reports displays.
3. Click New and select New Report , or open an existing report definition.
4. (Optional) Configure or modify the report definition.
5. Click Save as default When you save an existing report definition as a

default template, a message displays informing you all elements are removed
82 | 352 Page 391 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
from the report definition; Text (Labels), Keywords, and Logos remain in the
header/footer section.
a The report definition is saved as a default template.
NOTE:
There can only be one default template. You can create a new one or use the one
provided by the system. When you create a new template, the existing default
template is overwritten.
Create a New Report Definition

2. Select Application View > Applications > Reports.
a Reports displays.
3. Click New and select New Report .
a A new report definition opens.
Create a New Report Definition from an Existing One

w You have made modifications to an existing report definition and want to save it
as a new report definition.
w The modified report definition displays.
1. Click Save As .
2. In the Save Object As dialog box, select the destination folder in which to save
the report definition.
a. Enter a name and definition.
b. Click OK to confirm.
a The report definition is saved.
Delete a Report Definition

w At least one report definition is available under System Browser > Reports.
2. Select Applications > Reports > Report Definitions > [report definition].
3. Click Delete .
4. Click OK.
a The selected report definition is deleted.
● If a report definition is deleted, but a report snapshot related to this definition
exists in the Report Management section, you can do the following:
● Display the report data by selecting this report snapshot.
● Generate PDF/Excel documents using this snapshot.
● Run this report and generate additional snapshots. You can switch back to Edit
mode, make changes in the report definition, and save and create a new report
definition at the specified location in System Browser.
● Delete the snapshot using the Delete button available in the Report
Management section.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 392 of 709 83 | 352

2 Reports
Abort a Running Report Definition

3. Click Stop .
a A report is populated with the data gathered before the report execution was
stopped.
NOTE:
You can stop creating a PDF or XLS document in the same way.
Viewing a Report Definition in the Excel format with a Template

1. Click Create and view Excel .
a An Excel file is created and stored at the following temporary location on
your machine [Drive]:\Users\[UserID]\AppData\Local\Temp\temp\GMS. A
dialog box displays asking you to save a copy of this file on your machine,
open the file from the temporary location, or cancel the procedure to open
or save the file.
2. Open the Excel file by clicking Open in the dialog box.
NOTE: If you are opening the file from the temporary location, you must first
ensure that you save a copy of this file at a different location on your machine
and proceed with the further steps on the saved copy.
3. Open the worksheet with the table information in the saved copy of the Excel
file and select a row with data.
4. From the Insert menu, select the PivotTable option.
a The Create PivotTable dialog box displays.
5. Select the Select a table or range option and specify the table details.
6. Select the New Worksheet option in the Choose where you want the
PivotTable report to be placed section and click OK.
a A new worksheet is added to the Excel document with the PivotTable
options.
7. From the PivotTable Field List, select the columns to be added to the
PivotTable.
a The selected columns are added to the worksheet.
8. (Optional) Re-organize the columns as per your requirement in the Drag fields
between areas below section in the PivotTable Field List.
a Any changes you make in this section, reflect in the worksheet.
9. Select any row from the PivotTable, right-click, and then select PivotTable
Options.
a The PivotTable Options dialog box displays.
10. Select the Data tab.
11. In the PivotTable Data section, clear the Save source data with file check box
and select the Refresh data when opening the file check box.
12. Click OK.
13. Delete all the sheets in the Excel document, except the sheet having the
PivotTable configuration.
84 | 352 Page 393 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
14. Save the Excel document.

a The saved Excel document is a template that contains the PivotTable.
15. Select the report definition you created.
16. From the Extended Operation tab, specify the path of the template in the Excel
Output Template field and click Set. By default, the Excel Output Template field
does not display in the Extended Operation tab. In order to display this field,
you must select the DL3 display level check box for the Template Path property
in the report definition Object Model.
NOTE: The template path is the path of the Server machine. A Process Monitor
User must have access to the folder in which the template file is present for the
PivotTable to display.
17. Run the report.
a The generated report displays in the Run mode.
18. Click Create and view Excel .
19. Click Open.

a The Excel document displays. The first worksheet displays information on the
PivotTable and the details of other tables in the Report display in the other
sheets.
2.5.3.2 Configuring Report Parameters

You can customize your report definition by performing the following activities:
● Adding elements such as tables, plots, keywords, and so on.
● Configuring the layout of the report by setting the orientation, page size,
margins, headers and footers.
● Formatting the report elements for an enhanced appearance by applying color,
adjusting positions of the elements, and so on.
Insert Tables
w You have selected an existing report definition in System Browser > Reports or
you have created a report definition and now want to configure it.
1. Click the Home tab.
2. Perform either of the steps to insert a table. Ensure that you are not inserting
the table in the header/footer section of the report definition:
– From the Insert group box on the Home tab, click the Table group box,
select a table, such as Objects, Active Events or Activities, and drag-and-
drop it in the report definition.
The cursor shape changes and indicates the selected table name.
– Right-click the report definition and from the Insert Table option, select the
table type.
– Drag-and-drop the desired system object from System Browser onto the
report definition. The Name filter of the inserted table is set to the dropped
system object.
a The table is added to the report definition with its default columns.
3. Right-click the table and select Select Columns to add new columns or remove
displayed columns.
a The Select Columns dialog box displays. The layout and content of this
dialog box varies according to the type of table selected.
4. Select the check box preceding each column to add it to the table. In case of a
property, you must first expand it, and then check the columns.
NOTE: For an Objects table: Select the object related to the Objects table from
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 394 of 709 85 | 352

2 Reports
the Type drop-down list. The columns related to the object type selected are
filtered and displayed in the Available Columns list.
If you select a column that belongs to a property, then the column is added in
the Property column format, such as High Limit.ActivityLog.
a The checked columns are added to the Selected Columns list.
5. Click OK.
a The columns are added to the table in order of their presence in the
Selected Columns list.
6. (Optional) You can re-order the columns by selecting a column in the Selected
Columns list and clicking Move Up or Move Down . To remove a
column, select a column and click Remove . To delete a table from the
report definition, right-click the table and press the Delete key.
a The table is added with the required columns.
Insert Plots
– From the Insert group box, click the Plot group box, and select any plot
(Trends, Graphics), and drag-and-drop it onto the selected report definition.
NOTE: The cursor changes and indicates the selected plot name.
– Right-click the report definition and select the required type of plot from the
Insert Plot option.
– Drag-and-drop the desired Trend View Definition/Graphics View Port from
System Browser onto the report definition. The Name filter of the inserted
plot is set to the dropped Trend View Definition or Graphics View Port.
a The plot placeholder is added to the report definition. By default, the plot is left-
aligned.
NOTE: In Run mode, this plot image is replaced by the actual data retrieved
from the Report service.
NOTE :
You cannot insert a plot in the header/footer section and cannot apply font types,
size, and color on a plot.
Insert Keywords
– From the Insert group box, select a keyword from the Keyword group box
and drag-and-drop it in the header/footer section or anywhere in the report
definition.
– In the report definition, place the cursor where you want to insert the
keyword, right-click and select the required keyword from the Insert
Keyword option.
– From the Insert group box, insert a blank text and then do one of the
following:
86 | 352 Page 395 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
- Select a keyword from the Keyword group box and drag-and-drop it onto
the blank text.
- Right-click the blank text and select the required keyword from the Insert
Keyword option.
a The keyword is inserted.
NOTE:
To delete a keyword, you must delete the label containing that keyword.
Insert Labels
– Click the Home tab.
– Select Insert > Text > Blank. Drag-and-drop it either in the report definition
or in the header or footer section.
– Right-click the report definition or the header or footer section where you
want to insert the text label, and select the Insert Label option.
a A blank label is inserted.
2. Type the desired text.
a The label is added with the desired text. If no text or keyword is added to a
label in Edit mode, then a blank label displays in Run mode.
Insert Logos
2. From the Insert group box, click the Logo group box and select Manage Logo.
a The Manage Logo dialog box displays.
3. Click Browse.
4. Select an image file, preferably in the format: .bmp, .jpeg, .png, or .gif. You
must ensure that the size of the image file does not exceed 1MB.
5. Click Open.
a The Select logo to upload field displays the file path. You cannot edit this
field. The image file name is saved as the logo name.
6. Click Upload.
a The image is added to the Available Logos list and.the logo file is saved
under: [drive]:\GMSProjects\[project]\data\Reporting\Logos. You can now
proceed to inserting a logo.
7. Perform either of the following steps to insert a logo.
– From the Insert group box, click the Logo group box and select a logo, and
then drag-and-drop it on the report definition where you want to insert it.
– In the report definition, place the cursor where you want to insert the logo,
right-click and select the required logo from the Insert Logo option.
a The logo is inserted in the report definition.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 396 of 709 87 | 352

2 Reports
NOTE 1:
You can change the position of the logo in the report definition by using the Move
buttons (up , down , top , bottom ) in the Placement group box of
the Layout tab, or by right-clicking a logo in the report definition, and selecting
Move.
NOTE 3:
To delete a logo, click the logo and press the Delete key. You delete a logo from
the source directory using the Manage Logo command in the Logo group box.
When a logo is deleted from the source directory, the no parking symbol displays
in the report definition (in place of the logo) with a tooltip that displays Logo is
deleted or renamed from the source directory. Any subsequent
execution of the report definition does not display anything in the PDF or XLS.
Insert Form Controls

You can add the following form controls to your report from the Home tab.
Editable Field
– From the Insert group box, click the Form Controls group box, select the
Editable Field control and drag-and-drop it in the report definition or in the
header/footer section.
– Right-click the report definition or the header/footer section, where you
want to insert the editable field, and then select the Insert Editable Field
option.
a The editable field is added.
NOTE:
To insert the editable field in the header/footer section of a report definition, delete
any existing label.
Custom Text Selection Control

– From the Insert group box on the Home tab, click the Form Controls group
box, select the Custom Text Selection control and drag-and-drop it in the
report definition or in the header/footer section.
want to insert the Custom Text Selection control, and then select Insert
Custom Text Selection.
a The Custom Text Selection control is added.
2. To add, modify, or delete the control entries, perform the following steps:
– To add new entries, enter text in the control and click Add .
– To modify existing entries, modify the text and click Update .
– To delete the entries, select the entry to be deleted and click Delete .
88 | 352 Page 397 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
Text Group Selection Control

box, select the Text Group Selection control, and drag-and-drop it in the
report definition or in the header/footer section.
want to insert the Text Group Selection control, and then select Insert Text
Group Selection.
a The Text Group Selection control is added.
2. To add a text group to the control, navigate to the Libraries node in System
Browser and drag-and-drop a text group node to the Text Group Selection
control.
a The text group is added to the Text Group Selection control. The name of the
text group displays on the control. If you want to view the complete hierarchy of
the text group, move your cursor over it. The hierarchy displays in a tool tip.
Comments table
box, select the Comments table and drag-and-drop it onto the report
definition.
– Right-click the report definition and select Insert Comments Table.
a The Comments table with a single row is added to the report definition.
Set Orientation
1. Click the Layout tab.
a The Page Setup group box displays.
2. Click the Orientation menu.
a The Portrait and Landscape submenu displays.
3. Select Landscape or Portrait. By default, Landscape is selected.
a The report’s orientation changes based on your selection.
Set Page Size

2. Click the Page Size menu.
a A submenu displays A3, A4, A5, Letter, and More Sizes.
NOTE: Selecting the More Sizes option displays the width and height (in
cm or inch – location dependent) of the selected page size. These fields
are read-only.
3. Select the page size of your choice.
a The page size of the report definition changes accordingly.
Set Page Margins

2. Click the Margin menu.
a A list of preconfigured margins display such as Normal, Narrow, Moderate,
Wide, and More Margins. You can specify the top, bottom, left and right
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 398 of 709 89 | 352

2 Reports
margins of a page as well as the header and footer margins by selecting

the More Margins option.
3. Select the margin of your choice.
a The margin of the report changes.
NOTE 1:
In the Page Setup dialog box, all fields in the Margins section accept only integer
and floating point values.
NOTE 2:
A negative value entered highlights the text field in red. Placing the cursor over
the field displays a tooltip informing you that one or more margins are set outside
the printable area of the page.
NOTE 3:
If the difference between the top margin and header margin is zero or a negative
value, then the header height is set to a default value of 5 units (mm or inch –
location dependent).
Set Headers/Footers
The header and footer are positioned at the top and bottom of the page and
provide information about the page, such as page number, page title, date/time,
and so on. You can also add logos in the header section of the report and
customize the width of the header to accommodate an image or logo of a large
size.
2. Click Dialog Launcher .
a The Page Setup dialog box opens.
3. Select the Show header or Show footer check boxes to display the header or
footer on a page. To hide the header/footer, uncheck these boxes. You can
also define the top header and bottom footer margins by changing the top
margin and bottom margin values respectively.
– To modify the width of the header/footer, select the header/footer, and
thereafter drag the separator to the desired width. Alternatively, you can
also modify the width by specifying the percentage in the Percentage Span
field in the Header/Footer group box. If you specify 100 in one of the fields,
the values in the other 2 fields will be 0.
NOTE:
By default, the Show header and Show footer check boxes are selected and the
margin from top and bottom are set to 1 unit (cm or inch – location dependent).
Set Auto Scaling

a The Scaling group box displays.
2. Select the Auto scaling check box. By default, the auto scaling mechanism is
enabled.
90 | 352 Page 399 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
Adjust Postions of Report Elements

1. Select a report element in a report definition.
a The menus in the Position group box become available.
2. You can adjust the position of the report element by doing one of the following:
– Use the Position group box.
– Click Dialog Launcher or right-click and select Position to open the
Position dialog box.
3. To set the alignment, click the required alignment type.

4. To set the indentation, enter values in the Left or Right field (for left and right
Indentation respectively). If center alignment is selected, then both these fields
are unavailable.
5. To set the spacing, type values in the Before and After fields.
6. To set the width, first select the Width check box and enter the value in the
Width field.
7. To set the height, first select the Height check box and enter the value in the
Height field. The height option is unavailable for labels.
8. Click OK.
NOTE 1:
All fields in the Position group box and Position dialog box accept only integer and
floating point values.
NOTE 2:
A negative value entered highlights the text field in red. Placing the cursor over
this field informs you that the value must be greater than or equal to 0.
NOTE 3:
For logos and plots, the width-height aspect ratio is maintained, so that if you
change one the other gets adjusted automatically as per the aspect ratio. While
inserting logos the original aspect ratio of the image is maintained.
Customize Fonts
1. Select a label or a table in a report definition.
a The Font group box displays.
3. Do one of the following to apply a font, font style, or font size.
– Click the drop-down arrow in the Font group box.
– Right-click the report element, and select Font.
a The Font dialog box displays.
4. Select the font type, font size, and font style as desired.
5. (Optional) Select the Underline check box to apply it to the label. The Underline
option is unavailable when you select a table in the report definition.
6. Click OK.
Apply Color
1. Select a label or a table in a report definition.
2. Click Color .
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 400 of 709 91 | 352

2 Reports
– Select a predefined color (in square boxes).

– Click the More Color option and select a custom color in the More Color
dialog box.
4. Click OK.
2.5.3.3 Working with Report Tables

You can perform the following operations on tables in reports.
Customize a Column Header

You can customize the column heading in tables as per your requirement using the
Select Columns dialog box. These customized headings appear in the report
definition and also in the generated report output. In case of Trends table, in
addition to customizing the column headings, you can also customize the column
header for the trended objects hierarchy from the Trended Objects tab in the Select
Columns dialog box.
Perform the following steps to customize a column header.
w You have added the table whose column headers are to be customized to the
report definition.
w You have selected the columns to be displayed in the table.
1. Select the table in the report definition.
2. Right click and select Select Columns.
a The Select Columns dialog box displays.
3. In the Selected Columns section, select the column whose header is to be
customized.
4. Double-click the column header or press F2 to enter a new column header.
a The modified column header displays in the table in the report definition.
NOTE: When you modify a column header for the first time, the same name
displays as the header in all the languages configured in your system. On
subsequent edits, the name is updated for only the default language in which
you are currently logged in.
Sort a Column
w You have added a table with multiple columns to a report definition.
– To sort a column data in ascending order, click the column header of a
table.
– To change the sort order to descending, click the same column header
again.
– To sort the data on multiple columns, press CTRL and click the column
headers.
NOTE: Remove the priority of the prioritized columns for multiple sorted
columns by single clicking any column header.
a The data is sorted, and a priority is assigned to the columns if sorting is done
on more than one column.
Work with the Comments Table in Run Mode

w The report displays in Run mode and has a comments table.
l Perform either of the following activities to add, modify, or delete entries from
the table.
– Adding a new entry: Enter the comments in the Comments column and
press ENTER. Press ALT + ENTER to add a new line. The Creation date,
92 | 352 Page 401 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
User and Management Station columns are automatically filled in with their
respective read-only values.
– Modifying an entry: Click Edit next to the row with your comments to
make it editable. Perform the required updates and press ENTER to update
the comments. You can edit only your own comments.
– Deleting an entry: Click Delete next to the row with your comments.
Select Rows in Tables

l Select a single or multiple rows in a reports table in the Run mode.
a The information of the object or objects in the selected row or rows displays in
the Extended Operation tab. Additionally, any related items of the objects also
display in the Related Items tab. In Trends tables, you can select only a one
cell and the information of the object in the selected cell displays in the
Extended Operation tab.
View Data of Deleted Objects

You can view the data related to deleted objects from the Orphans, Orphan
Activities, Orphan Events, and Orphan Trends tables.
This data relates to the activity records, event records, or trend records of deleted
objects.
To view these tables, you must enable the View Orphan Logs application right from
the Security node in the Management View.
In order to view the data of such objects, perform the following steps:
1. Create a new report definition and add the Orphans table to it.
2. Add a condition filter to this table and set the value of the Orphan Type column
to either of the following
a. Objects
b. Trends
3. Run the report definition.
a The details of all the deleted objects displays.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 402 of 709 93 | 352

2 Reports
4. Generate an Excel or PDF output by clicking Create and view Excel or

Create and view PDF .
5. Depending on the type of data (Objects or Trends) to be displayed for the

deleted objects, perform the following steps:
a. To view activity related information of deleted objects, insert the Orphan
Activities table.
b. To view the event related information of deleted objects, insert the Orphan
Events table.
c. To view the trended information of deleted objects, insert the Orphan Trends
table.
6. Navigate to the location where you have saved the Excel or PDF file, and then
copy the Object Identifier of the deleted object whose data should display.
7. Add a condition filter to either the Orphan Activities, Orphan Events, or Orphan
Trends tables and set the value of the Object Identifier column to the value you
copied from the generated Excel or PDF file.
8. Run the report definition.
a The details of the deleted objects display depending on the value of the
specified Object Identifier.
2.5.3.4 Applying Filters

You can apply the following types of filters to condense the displayed data in a
report.
Prerequisites:
● Applications > Reports is selected.
● The report to which you want to apply the filter is selected.
Name Filter
1. Select a table or plot in the report definition.
– Click Dialog Launcher in the Name Filter group box.

– Right-click the selected table or plot and select Name Filter from Filters.
– Double-click inside the Name Filter group box.
a The Name Filter dialog box displays.
3. Select the Name or Description. The default selection is Name. The selection is
the same as in the Display Mode List Box in System Browser.
4. To set the Name filter, do one of the following:
– In the Name Filter text box, type the complete path of the object for which
you want to apply the Name filter according to System Browser Name. For
example:
SystemName.Management View.Project.Field Networks.BACnet Network
1.Hardware.Simulator Device 57291.Local_IO.Analog Input 1.*
NOTE: Adding a “.*” at the end of the name or selecting the Children check
box enables the children option. For a plot, you can apply only one Name
filter and the Children check box is unavailable.
– Drag-and-drop a System Browser object onto the selected table or plot and
the Name filter is set to the hierarchy of the dropped object. You can view
and modify it using the Name filter dialog box.
NOTE: When you drag-and-drop an object for the first time onto a table, the
94 | 352 Page 403 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
default filter *:* is replaced by the hierarchy of the dragged and dropped
object.
5. Click New.
a The Name filter is added to the Name Filter list.
6. Click OK.
a The Name filter is added to the Name Filter group box.
NOTE:
You can apply multiple Name filters on all tables except for a Trends table. For
BACnet tables, applying multiple Name filters is possible, but the Children check
box is unavailable.
Condition Filter
1. Select a table in the report to which you want to apply the condition filter.
– Click Dialog Launcher in the Condition Filter group box.

– Right-click the selected table and select Condition Filter from Filters.
– Double-click inside the Condition Filter group box.
a The Condition Filter dialog box displays.
3. Select a column from the Available columns list.
NOTE: For Objects Table: A Type drop-down list displays. Select an object
from the list and click the Load button to populate the Available columns list.
a The operators and values associated with the selected column display in
the Operator and Values list.
4. Select the required Operator and Value from the respective lists. If values are
not displayed for the selected column, type in the value.
NOTE: You have to specify time related values in a 24-hour clock format. For
example, to specify the Source Time as 2.00 PM, type 14.00.
a Use AND, OR, () to form the Filter expression.
5. (Optional) For Objects table only, specify the acceptable age of the data on
which the filter is applied by selecting the Read data from field system older
than option.
a The value entered is compared with the age of the data in the cache. If the
data in the cache is older than the value entered, it is retrieved from the
field system; otherwise data from the cache is used for filtering.
6. Click Add.
a The filter expression formed displays in the Filter expression field.
7. Click OK.
a The filter expression is displayed in the Condition Filter group box.
Time Filter
1. Select a table in the report to which you want to apply the time filter.
– Click Dialog Launcher in the Time Filter group box.

– Right-click the selected table and select Time Filter from Filters.
– Double-click inside the Time Filter group box.
a The Time Filter dialog box displays.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 404 of 709 95 | 352

2 Reports
3. For Events and Event Details table only, select the column on which you want
to apply the time filter from the Select Column drop-down list.
4. Select the appropriate values for Date/Time type: Exact, Custom, or Relative.
5. Click OK.
NOTE: By default, the Unlimited option is selected.
a The Time filter is added in the Time Filter group box.
Graphics Filter
1. Select the report to which you want to apply the graphics filter.
2. Assign the name filter of the object whose graphics and view ports you want to
display in the report output.
3. Select the All Related Graphics check box from the Graphics group box in the
Filter tab.
a All the graphics and viewports related to the object display in Run mode.
Row Filter
1. Select the report to which you want to apply the row filter.
2. Click the Filter tab and thereafter select the Row filter check box.
3. Enter the desired number of rows to be displayed in the report output.
a The configured number of rows are displayed for the table in Run mode.
2.5.3.5 Configuring a Report Output

You can configure the report output to a file, email, or a printer.
Prerequisites:
Configure Report Output as a File

2. Click the Settings tab.
3. From the Report Output group box, click Dialog Launcher .

4. Select File as the destination type in the Destination types list.
5. Click Configure Folders.
a The Report Output Folders Configuration dialog box displays.
6. In the Folder Alias field, type a name for the Report Output folder.
7. Click Browse to select a destination folder.
a The selected destination path displays in the Folder Path field.
8. (Optional) In the Folder Description field, type the folder description.
9. Click New.
a The output folder is added to the List of Folders for the Report Output
section.
10. Click Close.
a The configured output folders display in the File drop-down list of the
Report Output Definition dialog box.
96 | 352 Page 405 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
11. Select the required report format (PDF, XLS, CSV, or XML) in the Report
format list.
12. Select File in the Destination types list.
13. From the File drop-down list, select the destination folder where you want to
save the file.
a The File drop-down list displays all the report output folders that you have
configured.
14. Select Enter custom file name to add the file name. The default option is Use
report name as file name.
– Select the Append date/time to file name check box to add the date and
time to the file name when saved.
NOTE: The Create new/overwrite existing file and Append data options
become unavailable when you select the Append date/time to file name
check box.
– Select the Append data option button to append data in the same folder but
creating new document with incremental number.
– Select Create new/overwrite existing file to create a new file or overwrite
the existing file with the same file name.
16. Click New.
a The selected format, destination, and file name are added to the Output
Definition list.
17. Click OK.
a Configured Report Output Definitions display in the Report Output group box.
Configure Report Output as an Email

w You have selected the required format (PDF, XLS, or CSV) in the Report
format list in the Report Output Definition dialog box. (Refer steps 1 to 5 in
Configuring Report Output as a File [➙ 96])
w You have configured contact list using the address book.
1. Select Email in the Destination types list.
2. Click Select Contacts.
a The Email Contacts dialog box displays all the configured contacts.
NOTE: If there is a change in the configured email address of a recipient in
the Address Book, it is automatically reflected in the Report Output group
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 406 of 709 97 | 352

2 Reports
box. However, if the configured email address is deleted or the recipient is

deleted in the Address Book, the entries for a report definition display in
red. For more information, see the Automatic Update of Configured Email
Addresses.
3. Select the required contacts by selecting the check box preceding each
contact.
4. Click OK.
a The selected contacts are displayed in the Destination field in the Report
Output Definition dialog box. A semicolon (;) separates multiple contacts.
5. In the Report Output Definition dialog box, do one of the following:
– Select All documents in one email.
– Select Document(s) per mail and configure the number of documents to be
sent.
The default option is one document per email.
6. Select the Enter custom file name option to add the file name. The default is
Use report name as file name.
7. Select the Append date/time to file name check box to add the date and time to
the file name when saved.
8. Click Add.
a The selected format, destination, and file name are added to the Output
Definition list.
9. Click OK.
a The configured Report Output Definitions display in the Report Output group
box.
Configure Report Output as a Printer

w You have selected the required format (PDF, XLS, or CSV) in the Report
format list in the Report Output Definition dialog box. (Refer steps 1 to 5 in
Configuring Report Output as a File [➙ 96])
w You have configured the server printer for printing reports.
1. Select PDF in the Report format list.
NOTE: The destination type printer is not available for XLS or CSV printing.
2. Select Printer in the Destination types list.
3. Select the required printer from Printer drop-down list. If server printer is not
configured the Printer drop-down list is empty.
4. Select the option to print either All or First number of pages.
NOTE 1: By default, the first 100 pages are printed. You can edit the default
and add the number of pages to be printed.
NOTE 2: Content that is printed depends on the sorting you applied on the
table.
5. Click Add.
a The selected format and destination are added to the Output Definition list.
6. Click OK.
box.
When executed, the file is sent to the configured printer for printing.
98 | 352 Page 407 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
2.5.3.6 Configuring Automatic Report Execution

You can schedule automatic report execution through macros, reactions, and
graphics.
Automatic Report Execution through a Macro

w You have configured the destination (file, email, or printer) to which you want to
route the report output.
2. Select Applications > Logics > Macros.
a The Macro tab displays.
3. Drag-and-drop the report definition from System Browser into the Macro tab.
This will cause a new row to be created.
4. In the Property field, select Last Run and select Execute in the Command field.
5. Click Save As to save the macro.

a The macro is saved and displays below the Macros node.
6. Select the saved macro from System Browser.
a The details of the macro display in the Macro tab.
7. Click the Extended Operation tab and ensure that the Operational Status
property is enabled. Thereafter, click the Execute button next to the Activity
Status property.
a The macro executes and the report is generated and routed to the configured
destination.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 408 of 709 99 | 352

2 Reports
Automatic Report Execution through Reactions

w You have configured the destination (file, email, or printer) to which you want to
route the report output.
2. Select Applications > Logics > Reactions.
a The Reaction Editor tab displays.
3. In the Reaction Editor tab, open the Output expander.
4. From the Output expander, open the Action expander.
5. Drag-and-drop the report definition from System Browser into the empty area
inside the Action expander. This will cause a new row to be created.
6. In the Property field, select Last Run and select Execute in the Command field.
7. Expand the Triggers expander and thereafter expand the Time and
Organization Mode expander.
8. Specify the date and time when you want to execute the reaction.
9. Click Save As to save the reaction.

a The reaction executes at the specified date and time and the report is
generated and routed to the configured destination.
Automatic Report Execution through Graphics

w You have configured the destination (File, Email, or Printer) to which you want
to route the report output.
100 | 352 Page 409 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2

3. Click Edit .
a The Graphics application displays in Edit mode.
4. Click New and select New Graphic.
5. Click the Options tab and select the Command option.

6. In System Browser, expand the Reports folder and drag-and-drop the report
definition to be executed to the window labeled Untitled in the Graphics editor.
7. Click Save.
a The graphic is stored below the Graphics folder.
8. Select the saved graphic.
a The graphic displays in the run mode.
9. Hover your mouse pointer over the graphic.
a The pointer changes to a hand shape and a tool tip displays with the name
of the associated report.
10. Click the graphic.
a If the execution is successful, the message "Command successful" displays in
the status bar at the bottom of the screen. The generated report output is
routed to the configured destination.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 410 of 709 101 | 352

2 Reports
Print Automatically Generated Reports


4. In the Report format list, select PDF.
5. In the Destination types list, select Printer and specify the other printer details.
6. Click Add.
7. Click OK.
a The configured Report Output Definitions display.
2.5.4 Examples of Reports Configurations

This section provides examples on configuring reports.
2.5.4.1 Configuring an Objects Report

Scenario: You want to configure an object’s report to fetch the details of BACnet
Analog Output objects having Current Priority as 16.
1. Create a new report definition with the objects table inserted.
a The Objects table is inserted with the following default set of columns—
Object Description, Object Designation, Function, Discipline, Type,
Subtype, Main Value.
2. Right-click the table and select Select Columns.
a The Select Columns dialog box displays.
102 | 352 Page 411 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
3. In the Type filter field, enter the object type description.

a The Type drop-down list displays the object types.
4. On the Type drop-down list, select the object type.
5. Click Load.
a The columns are listed in the Available columns list.
6. Select the property and/or attribute to display as columns in the table.
a The list of selected columns displays in the Selected Columns list.

NOTE: To remove columns that you do not want displayed in the table,
click .
7. Click OK.
a The Objects table displays.
8. Configure a name filter for your report by dragging-and-dropping the required
objects from System Browser to the Objects table in the report definition. In
order to get the desired results, you must assign the objects for which columns
are configured in your report.
9. (Optional) Configure a Condition filter for your report.
10. Right-click the Objects table, point to Filters and select Condition Filter.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 412 of 709 103 | 352

2 Reports
11. Perform the following steps to apply the Condition filter:

a. Enter BACnet in the Type filter field to display all BACnet related objects in
the Type drop-down list.
b. Select the BACnet Analog Output Object from the Type drop-down list.
c. Click the Load button. All the common columns and columns specific to the
selected object display in the Available columns list.
d. Select the column on which you want to add the condition filter. In this case,
select [Current_Priority].
e. Select = in the Operator list.
f. In the Values text field, enter "Priority - 16".
g. Click Add.
h. Click OK.
a The Condition filter is added to the table.
12. Run the report to view the data.
a If you have applied the condition filter, the details of all analog output
objects with Current Priority set to 16 display. If no Condition filter is
specified, then the details of all the analog output objects display.
13. Save the report definition if the configuration of columns and name filter is
sufficient.
NOTE: You can enhance the report configuration at any time in the future by
104 | 352 Page 413 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
adding/removing columns or by setting additional objects as name filter or by

removing existing objects from the name filter.
2.5.4.2 Configuring an Activities Report

Scenario: You want to create an activities report to determine the number of times
the Present Value property of an Analog Input object has exceeded 100 in the last
24 hours.
w You have set the AL attribute for the Present Value property of the Analog
Input object in the Properties expander in the Object Configurator.
w Ensure that a report with the Activities table with the following default set of
columns— Source Time, Object Description, Object Designation, Action, Log
Type, Previous Value, Value, Status, User Name, Management Station,
Message Text, and Attachment is available
1. (Optional) Add any extra columns to the table from the Select Columns dialog
box. To display this dialog box, right-click the table and select Select Columns.
2. Drag-and-drop the analog input object whose value you want monitored, to the
Activities table. This object acts as the name filter.
3. Right-click the Activities table and select Filters > Condition Filter.
4. Perform the following steps to apply the condition filter:
a. Select Value from the Available Columns list.
b. Select > from the Operators list.
c. Enter 100 in the Values text field.
d. Click Add. The expression displays in the Filter Expression field.
e. Click OK.
NOTE: When you are creating a Condition filter, the syntax of the property
values depends on the data type of the property. For more information, see
Condition Filter Syntax in Condition Filter.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 414 of 709 105 | 352

2 Reports
5. Specify the time period by adding the Time filter to the report definition.
Perform the following steps to add the Time filter.
a. Right-click the Activities table, point to Filters and select Time Filter. The
Time Filter dialog box displays.
b. Select the Relative option.
c. Select the Last or Current Period option, depending on the data requirement
for the last 24-hour period or current 24-hour period. For more information
regarding setting the time period, see Time Filter. In this example, since data is
required for the last 24-hours, you must select Last and specify 24-hours.
d. Click OK.
106 | 352 Page 415 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2

a The report displays the data for analog input object where value is greater
than 100 in the last 24-hours.
7. (Optional) Click Save.
2.5.4.3 Viewing Event Details using Assisted Treatment

Scenario: You want to create an event details report that displays the details of a
particular event using Assisted Treatment.
w A template for operating procedures is available and the Operational Status
property for the template is set to Enabled.
w An Alarm step is added to the operating procedure template and an Event
Details report is associated with the step. The step is configured as per the
required settings.
w You have configured the report output destination. For information, see
Configure Report Output.
1. Double-click the event in the Event bar.
a The Event Details report displays in Assisted Treatment. Information
related to the event time, category, cause, ID, object description and
designation displays in the report.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 416 of 709 107 | 352

2 Reports
2. Click before the event entry.

a Additional information related to the event such as Time, Action, User
Name, Management Station, Attachment, Value, and Previous Value
display as child records.
3. Perform the required steps to treat the event from the Contextual pane.

a The report is routed to the configured destination.
2.5.4.4 Viewing Event Details for Specific Events Using Reports

Scenario: You want to create an event details report that displays all events of type
Fault or Life Safety on an Analog Output object for a 24-hour period.
w Ensure that a report containing the Event Details table with the following default
set of columns — Event Time, Event Category, Event Cause, Event ID, Object
Description, and Object Designation is available.
108 | 352 Page 417 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
1. (Optional) Add any extra columns to the parent table from the Parent tab in the
Select Columns dialog box. You can add the extra columns to the child table
from the Child tab. To display this dialog box, you must right-click the table and
select Select Columns.
2. From System Browser, drag-and-drop the analog output object (For example,
Analog Output 1) whose event details are to be monitored to the Event Details
table. This object acts as the name filter.
3. Right-click the Event Details table, point to Filters and select Condition Filter.
4. Perform the following steps to apply the Condition filter:
a. From the Available Columns list, select Event Category.
b. From the Operators list, select =.
c. From the Values list, select Fault, press CTRL, and then select Life Safety.
d. Click Add. The expression displays in the Filter Expression field.
e. Click OK.

NOTE: When you are creating a Condition filter, the syntax of the property
values depends on the data type of the property.
5. Specify the time period by adding the Time filter to the report definition.
Perform the following steps to add the Time filter.
a. Right-click the Event Details table, point to Filters and select Time Filter. The
Time Filter dialog box displays.
b. Select Relative.
c. Select either the Last or Current Period option, depending on the data
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 418 of 709 109 | 352

2 Reports
requirement for the last 24 hour period or current 24 hour period. For more
information regarding setting the time period, see Time Filter. In this case, as
we want the data for the current 24-hour period, select Current Period and
specify 24 hours.
d. Click OK.

a The report displays the details of any Fault or Life Safety events that
occurred on the Analog Output 1 object in the current 24-hour period.
7. Save the report definition if the data matches your requirements.
NOTE: You can enhance the report configuration at any time in the future by
adding/removing columns or by setting additional objects as name filter,
removing existing objects from the name filter, or by modifying the Condition
filter, Time filter criteria.
2.5.4.5 Viewing Event Details using Investigative Treatment

Scenario: You want to create an event details report that displays the details of a
particular event using Investigative Treatment.
w Operating procedure templates (if present) are disabled.
w Ensure that a report containing the Event Details table is available and the
Show in Related Items check box is selected for this report or the
HQ_EventDetailsLog report is imported.
110 | 352 Page 419 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
1. Double-click the event in the Event bar.

a The event details display in the Related Items tab.
2. Perform the required steps to treat the event.

3. Select the report containing the Event Details table from the Related Items tab.
a The report executes in the Secondary pane and the information related to
the event time, category, cause, ID, object description, and designation
displays in the report.
4. Click before the event entry.

a Information related to the event treatment such as Time, Action, User
Name, Management Station, Attachment, Value, and Previous Value
display as child records.
2.5.4.6 Configuring a Trends Plot

Scenario: You want to track the change of value of an Analog Input object
graphically over a period of 10 years using a trends plot.
w You have created a Trend View Definition with the Analog Input object.
1. Create a new report definition with a Trends Plot inserted.
a A Trends Plot is inserted in the report definition.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 420 of 709 111 | 352

2 Reports
2. From System Browser, drag-and-drop the Trend View Definition to the Trends
Plot. This acts as a name filter to the plot.
3. Specify the time period by adding a Time filter to the plot. Perform the following
steps to add the Time filter:
a. Right-click the Trends Plot, point to Filters and select Time Filter.
b. In the Time Filter dialog box, select the Relative option.
c. Select the Last or Current Period option, depending on the data requirement
for the last 10 hours or current 10 hours. In this case, we will obtain the data for
the current 10 hours by selecting Current Period and specifying 10 hours.
d. Click OK.
112 | 352 Page 421 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2

a The report displays the graphical representation of the data for the current
10 hour period.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 422 of 709 113 | 352

2 Reports
5. Save the report definition.

NOTE: You can enhance the report configuration at any time, in the future, by
changing the Name and Time filters.
2.5.4.7 Configuring a Report Using In Operator

Scenario: You want to configure a report that displays the data for some objects
and you want to view the data for only those objects that are linked to a graphic.
w Ensure that you have configured an Objects report that displays the data of
some objects.
1. From the Select Columns dialog box select the Related Items Type column.
a The Objects report displays with the Related Items Type column added to
it.
2. Perform the following steps to add a Condition filter with the In operator:
a. From the Condition Filter dialog box, select Related Items Type in the
Available Columns list.
b. Select In (←) from the Operators list.
c. In the Values text field, type Graphics.
d. Click Add.
a The Condition filter is added to the table and displays in the Filter
Expression field below the Add button.
114 | 352 Page 423 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Reports
2
3. Click OK.
4. Run the report.
a The generated report displays the data for only those objects that have a
graphic linked to them.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 424 of 709 115 | 352

2 Trends
2.6 Trends
This section provides instructions for using the Trends of Desigo CC. For
2.6.1 Creating an Online Trend

Scenario: You want to view the data in a trend view definition, configure it, and
print the contents.
Reference: For background information, see the reference section.
Workflow diagram:
1 2 3
Configure the Trend Analyze the Trend Print the Trend

View Definition Data View
Steps:
1 – Configure the Trend View Definition

w You have created a trend view definition and it is present in the Trends folder in
the System Browser.
l Configure the trend view definition by performing the following activities:
– Define Chart Properties [➙ 117]
– Define the Axis Properties [➙ 118]
– Position the legend [➙ 118]
– Define the Line Properties [➙ 118]
– Display Markers [➙ 119]
– Display Measured Values [➙ 119]
– Display Quality Attributes [➙ 120]
– Position the Y-Axis [➙ 120]
– Edit background or line colors [➙ 121]
– Show or Hide Columns [➙ 121]
a The trend view definition is configured as per the specified settings.
116 | 352 Page 425 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
2 – Analyze the Trend Data

l Specify the time range for which you want to display the data displayed in the
trend view from the following:
– Select the time range from the time range scrollbar [➙ 124]
– Select the time range from a list of predefined time ranges [➙ 126]
– Select an absolute time range [➙ 124]
– Select a relative time range from the current date [➙ 126]
– Select a relative time range from the start date [➙ 125]
– Select a relative time range from the stop date [➙ 126]
a The trend data displays as per the specified time range.
3 – Print the Trend View

w You must define the Print in color setting in advance if you want to print in
color.
1. Select the time range to print using the time range scrollbar. The time range
displayed on the screen is printed.
2. Click Print .
3. Select or clear the Fit to page check box. Select the corresponding option in
the toolbar if Fit to page is not selected.
4. Define print properties for:
– Margins (top, bottom, left and right).
– Printer.
– Orientation (portrait or landscape).
– Paper size.
5. Click Print and Close to print, or click Close.
a The trend data is printed in the form of a chart or a table as displayed in the
trend view. You can also print the trend data from Reports. For more
information, see Printing Trend Data from Reports [➙ 129].
2.6.2 Additional Trends Procedures

Select any of the procedures for additional information on Trends.
2.6.2.1 Additional Trend View Definition Procedures

You can configure the Trend View Definition by performing any of the following
procedures:
Define Chart Properties

1. Click Properties .
2. Click the Chart Properties tab.

3. In the Configure group box, do the following:
– From the Grid drop-down list, select the corresponding background grid for
the Trend View.
– From the Background drop-down list, select the corresponding background
color for the trend view or click More color to define a customized color.
4. In the Titles group box, do the following:
– Complete the Name field for your Trend View.
– Complete the Title field for the left Trend View border.
– Complete the Title field for the right Trend View border.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 426 of 709 117 | 352

2 Trends
5. Click Save .
a The edited properties are saved to the Trend database.
Define the Axis Properties

2. Click the Axis Properties tab.

3. Enter a title for the Left axis property, Right axis property, and X-axis property.
4. Click Save .
a The edited properties display in the Trend View.
Position the legend

2. Click the Legend Properties tab.

3. Select the appropriate position (top, bottom, left, right) from the Legend drop-
down list.
4. Click Save .
a The legend is positioned as selected in the current Trend View.
Define the Line Properties

1. Select the series for editing from the legend for the Trend View.
3. Click the Series Properties tab.

4. Select Visible and enable it.
5. Select the appropriate type from the Series line type drop-down list.
6. Select the appropriate style from the Series line style drop-down list.
7. Select the appropriate color from the Series stroke color drop-down list.
8. Select the appropriate line thickness from the Series stroke thickness drop-
down list.
9. Click Save .
a The edited properties are saved for the particular Trend View to the Trend
database.
Line Properties
Line type Line style Stroke color Stroke Marker style Marker
thickness thickness
1-6 1-10
118 | 352 Page 427 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
NOTE:
Do not select a thick line if you want to display the Trend curve with a marker. The
marker will disappear behind a thick line.
Display Markers
Markers allow you to further emphasize the measurement time using a symbol
.
w The Show quality icons property must be selected.

4. Select the Show markers check box.
– Select the corresponding type from the Marker style drop-

down list.
– Select the appropriate size from the Marker size drop-down list.
5. Click Save .
a The edited properties are saved to the Trend database.
6. Click Stop .
a The markers display on the trend view.
NOTE:
Be careful not to select too thick a line if you want to display markers. The marker
disappears behind a thick line. You can see the markers only when you stop the
trend view.
Display Measured Values

You want to display the measured value for the data point. Measured values
display only when you stop the Trend View.
w The Show quality icons property must be selected.


4. Select the Show Values check box.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 428 of 709 119 | 352

2 Trends
5. Click Save .
a The current measured values are updated in the chart each time the
measured value of a data point changes.
6. Click Stop .
a The measured values display on the Trend View.
NOTE:
Measured values display on top of one another when the changes to the
measured values occur in quick succession or the selected time range is too
large. Since the measured values are no longer readable, select a smaller time
range or switch off the labels.
Display Quality Attributes

You want to display the quality attribute for the data point at the time of the
measured value .

4. Select the Show quality icons check box.
5. Click Save .
6. Click Stop .
a Interventions or states that are not normal display with the corresponding
quality attribute, for example, (see Quality Attributes).
NOTE:
The quality attributes are hidden when you re-click Run and the trend series is
updated. You must select Advanced display if chart stopped in the Chart
Properties tab (acts on all series) if you want to display quality attributes during
update. If there are too many symbols, the update to the Trend View can take
some time.
With the reduced display , not all quality attributes can display. In order to
display all quality attributes, limit the time period.
Position the Y-Axis

120 | 352 Page 429 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
4. In the drop-down list, select Y-axis position .

5. Click Save .
a The Y-axis displays either on the left or right side of the chart.
NOTE:
The position is set and cannot be changed for digital and multistate data types.
Edit Background or Line Colors


– Click the Chart Properties tab to change the background color.
– Click the Series Properties tab to change the line color for a series.
3. Then select the appropriate series from the legend.
4. Select the Colors drop-down list.
5. Select one or the predefined colors or click More colors.
6. Select the color:
– Click the predefined color pattern (small squares) or drag the slider (right-
click) until you reach the desired color. Click the large square for color
selection.
– Click the Color Picker and drag the cursor to the desired location on the
screen.
7. Click Save .
a The edited color properties are assumed.
Show or Hide Columns in the Legend

w The Trend View is open.
1. Right-click the legend header.
2. Perform either of the following steps:
– To hide a column select the Hide this column menu option.
– To show additional columns in the legend, position your mouse pointer over
the Visible columns menu option and select the desired column from the
list. The selected column is added to the legend view.
NOTE:
Changes to the legend view are not saved to the Trend View Definition.
Re-position Columns in the Legend

1. Click and hold down the left mouse button on the column header.
2. Move the column to the desired location and release the mouse button.
3. Point to the separator line and adapt the column width.
4. Click Save .
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 430 of 709 121 | 352

2 Trends
Create a Trend View Definition

2. Select Trends > Trend View Definitions.
a The Trend application opens.
3. Click New > New Trend .

5. Select Project > Field Networks > [network type] > Hardware > [device].
6. In System Browser, select the corresponding data point (do not click the data
point). In order to add multiple data points to the Trend View at the same time,
select the Manual navigation check box and select the points.
7. Drag-and-drop to the selected data point to the Trend application.

NOTES:
Data trending continues as long as the VL attribute for the data point is enabled
(see Object Configurator).
To display a change of value on a binary value, an additional dotted zero line is
displayed at State 1 or One.
8. Click Save .
a An online Trendlog object is created for each data point in Application View >
Trends > Online Log Objects. The Trend View Definition displays below the
Trend View Definitions folder.
Create a Trend View Definition from Online or Offline Trend Log

Objects
2. Select Applications > Trends.
3. Click New and then New Trend .
4. Select one of the following:

– An offline trend log object from the Offline Log Objects folder.
– An online trend log object from the Online Log Objects folder.
5. Drag-and-drop the object to the Trend View.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 to add more objects to the Trend View.
7. Change the Trend View properties and the properties for each series. For more
information, see Configuring Trend View Definition [➙ 117].
8. Click Save .
Create a Trend View Definition from Related Items
1. Navigate to the Related Items tab and select New Trend .

a Trend View opens a secondary view.
2. Change the Trend View properties and the properties for each series. For more
3. Click Save .
122 | 352 Page 431 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
Create and Delete Trend View Folders

1. In System Browser, select Applications > Trends.
a Trends displays.
2. Select Trend View Definitions.
– To create a new Trends folder:

a. Click New .
b. Select New Folder .
c. In the New Object dialog box, enter a name and description.
d. Click OK.
a The new Trends folder is saved. You can create additional sub-folders as
needed. However, it is recommend saving Trend Views in a structured
manner by building topology or electrical and mechanical installations.
– To delete a Trends folder:
a. Select the folder you want to delete.
b. Click Delete .
a The Trends folder is deleted.
Delete a Trend View

w A Trend View is open or a Trend View is selected via System Browser.
2. Select Applications > Trends > Trend View Definitions > [Trend View
Definition].
3. Click Delete .
a The Trend View is permanently deleted from the Trend View Definitions folder.
The Trendlog objects in the Trend View are not deleted. No recorded data is
lost.
Save a Trend View Defintion as a Default Template

A Trend View Definition normally is customized only once in a project. This ensures
that all Trend Views that are created look the same. For more information on user
defaults, see the User Default table.
2. Select Applications > Trends.
3. Click New > New Trend .

a The Trend application opens.
5. Select the Chart Properties and edit the Trend View properties. For more
NOTE: Only the grid and background properties are part of the user default.
6. Click Save as user default .

a These settings now apply to all new Trend Views. You can, however, adapt the
Trend View Definition as needed.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 432 of 709 123 | 352

2 Trends
User Default
Yes No Property
X Background color of the Trend View.
X Legend position in the Trend View.
X Show/hide columns.
X Adjust column width.
X Move columns.
X Series properties.
X Axes properties.
2.6.2.2 Analyzing Trend Data

You can analyze the date and time for which you want to display the trend data
performing the following activities:
Select the Time Range using the Time Range Scrollbar

You want to define the visible time range as well as the corresponding time window
for a Trend View.
w You are in an active Trend View.
1. In the Trend View, navigate to the left or right slider (dark grey area) of the time
range slider.
a The shape of the mouse pointer changes and the tooltip

displays.
2. Drag the Time Range slider to the left or right until you have reached the
desired time range.
a The time range change continuously displays.
a The Trend View displays the selected time range.
3. Navigate to the Time Range slider (light grey area).
4. Drag it to the desired time/data range.
a The time range is displayed with the corresponding data period in the Trend
View.
Repeat Functions
● Click the Time Range scrollbar to the left or right of the Time Range slider. The
Time Range slider moves in the corresponding direction per the time range
defined in the Time Range slider.
● Click the left or right arrow on the Time Range scrollbar. The Time Range slider
moves in the corresponding direction at a 1:10 ratio for the selected time range.
NOTE:
Data is compressed for display purposes only if you select a large time range or
very large number of measured values. All data is displayed for smaller time
ranges.
124 | 352 Page 433 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
Select Absolute Time Range

1. Right-click the Time Range bar and from the menu options select the Select
range option.
a The Select Date/Time dialog box displays.
2. From the Selection type drop-down list, select Absolute.
3. Click the displayed Start time.
a The Calendar dialog box opens.
4. Enter the desired start date in the Calendar dialog field.
– Select month and year with the symbols.

– Click the appropriate date.
5. Click the displayed time at Start time and enter the desired start time.
6. Click the displayed End time.
a The Calendar dialog box opens.
7. Click the displayed time at End time and enter the desired end data in the
Calendar dialog box.

8. Click the displayed time at End time and enter the desired stop time.
9. Click OK.
a The Select Date/Time dialog box closes and the Trend View displays the
defined time range.
Select Relative Time Range from a Start Date

1. Right-click the Time Range bar.
2. Click Select range.
a The Select Date/Time window displays.
3. Select the Relative option in the Selection type drop-down list.
4. In the Interval text field, enter a time range from 1 to X and select the
corresponding time unit in the drop-down list.
5. From the Start/end time drop-down list, select Starting.
6. Click the displayed date and enter the desired start date in the Calendar dialog
box.

7. Click the displayed time and enter the desired start time.
8. Click OK.
defined time range.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 434 of 709 125 | 352

2 Trends
Select Relative Time Range from a Stop Date

3. From the Selection type drop-down list, select Relative.
5. From the Start/end time drop-down list, select Ending.
6. Click the displayed date and enter the desired stop date in the Calendar dialog
box.
– Select Month/Year with the symbols.

– Click the appropriate Date.
7. Click the displayed time and enter the desired stop time.
8. Click OK.
defined time range.
Select Relative Time Range from a Current Date

3. From the Selection type drop-down list, select Relative.
5. Select the Ending now option in the Start/end time drop-down list.
6. Click Now.
7. Click OK.
defined time range.
Select Time Range from Predefined Time Ranges

Time range
1. Move the mouse cursor to the Time Range slider (light grey area).
2. Right-click the Time Range slider.
a Predefined time ranges display.
3. Select the desired time range.
a The time range displays with the corresponding data period in the Trend
View.
126 | 352 Page 435 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
NOTE:
The display calculation is always based on current visible date range.
Depending on the position of the current Trend View, the starting point may not
be at the start of the day.
Start/Stop Range
1. In the Trend View, point the mouse to the left or right end point (dark grey area)
for the Time Range slider.
a The mouse pointer changes shape and the tooltip displays.
2. Right-click the Time Range slider.

a Predefined time ranges display.
3. Select the desired time range.
a The time range displays with the corresponding data period in the Trend
View. The display calculation is always based on current visible date range
as displayed in the tooltip.
Switch between Automatic and Stop Mode

Automatic mode normally is used to analyze trend data (continuous scrolling of the
graphic curves). The latest data is automatically retrieved from the system. You
can change to Manual mode for a detailed analysis (scrolling off). In this case, the
data is no longer updated automatically.
1. Click Stop .
a This stops automatic data updates and suppresses the symbol to update
Trend View.
2. Define the desired date range using the slider or time bar.
3. Click Refresh when the symbol is available and you want to upload the
latest data from the History Database.
4. Click Run to update data on a continuous basis.
Use Compare View

The compare view is ideal for extended data analysis with time offset.
w You are in a Trend View and Manual mode is on.
w The Property window of the Trend View is closed.
w The time period for display is defined using the time range scrollbar (for
example, 12 hours).
1. Click Stop and then click Compare View .

a The same Trend View displays a second time.
2. Define the appropriate time/date range with the scrollbar.
3. Select time offset Forward or Backward.
– Click one of the predefined offset buttons, for example 1 hour.
– Select your own range by selecting the dark button, for example, 3 hours,
and select the time offset.
a Compare view displays with the corresponding time offset and measured
values.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 436 of 709 127 | 352

2 Trends
Use Mouse Zoom

The zoom function allows you to select a time range in the currently selected Trend
View (applies as well for the comparison view) by zooming in on the X-axis and Y-
axis.
w You are in an active Trend View and in the Stop mode.
1. Click Zoom .
2. Navigate to the left zoom starting range.

a The point changes shape and the tooltip displays the current position.
3. Drag the pointer to the right zoom end range.
a The selected zoom range displays in the Trend View.
4. Click Zoom .
a The original time range, prior to the zoom in, displays, even if you zoom
multiple times.
Select Table View

1. Click Stop .
a The automatic data update is stopped.
2. Click table view
a The table opens in default view. Click the time stamp header to sort the
rows by ascending or descending order.
3. Click to show or hide interpolated values.
a Interpolated values are displayed in light-grey.
4. Click table view again .
a The graphical Trend View re-displays.
5. Click Run to start the automatic data update.
NOTE: The priority displays in the table if a subsystem supports information on
BACnet write priority (1-16).
Highlight Data Series Temporarily

During analysis, it is helpful to temporarily bring a certain series in the Trend View
to improve the readability of the trend curve.
w Multiple trend curves display in the Trend View.
1. Drag the pointer to the trend curve you want to bring forth.
a All non-selected trend curves are reduced in their display intensity.
a The measured value, as well as time and date, are displayed in tooltip at
the pointer position.
a The quality attribute is brought forwards only when one trend curve is
visible.
2. Drag the pointer to once again view all trend curves.
Hide Data Series Temporarily

a The menu bar displays.
2. Select the series you want to hide in Legend.
3. Click Series Properties.
128 | 352 Page 437 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
4. Clear the Visible check box.

a The menu bar is hidden.
a The series is hidden in the Trend View.
a The Trend data is still recorded for this series, but is no longer displayed.
5. Click Save .
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for any additional series you want to hide.
NOTE: You can also click or on the legend to show or hide each individual
trend curve.
Remove Data Series from Trend View

1. Select the series you want to hide in Legend.
2. Clear the check box in the Remove column.
a The Remove Trend Series dialog box displays.
3. Perform either of the following steps:
– Deselect the Stop trending this object on the Management Platform check
box. In this situation, the selected series is deleted from Trend View. The
Trendlog object is still available in the Online Log Objects folder. All data
continues to be recorded (Subscribe=On).
– Select the Stop trending this object on the Management Platform check
box. In this situation, the series and the associated Trendlog object are
deleted. The Trendlog object is removed from the Online Log Objects
folder. All recorded data remains available, but no new data is recorded
(Subscribe = Off). The previously logged data is still available if you reuse
the same data point in the Trend View. However, there is a gap in the data
between delete and re-generation.
4. Click OK.
a The trend series is removed from the current Trend View.
5. Click Save .
NOTE:
When an object is deleted, no warning displays if a Trendlog object is used in
several Trend Views. All associated data is lost in the associated Trend Views.
2.6.2.3 Printing Trend Data

Perform the following procedure to print trend data from Reports.
Print Trend Data from Reports

w You have selected an existing Report Definition in System Browser > Reports
or you have created a Report Definition.
w One or more local printers are configured in the system.
– From the Insert group box, click the Plot group box, and select a Trends
plot and drag-and-drop it onto the selected Report Definition.
NOTE: The cursor changes and indicates the selected plot name.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 438 of 709 129 | 352

2 Trends
– Right-click the Report Definition and select the required type of plot from
the Insert Plot option.
– Drag-and-drop the desired Trend View Definition from System Browser on
the Report Definition. The Name filter of the inserted plot is set to the
dropped Trend View.
a The plot placeholder is added to the Report Definition. By default, the plot
is left-aligned.
NOTE: In Run mode, this plot image is replaced by the actual data
retrieved from the Report service.

5. Select PDF in the Report format list.
6. Select Printer in the Destination types list and specify the other printer details.
7. Click Add.
8. Click OK.
box and the report is printed in the PDF format on automatic execution.
2.6.2.4 Viewing and Configuring Trended Properties

You can view and configure the trended properties of trended objects that are
logged in online a well as offline trends using the Manual Correction application.
Access and View Trend Data

You can access and view the trend data from any of the following:
System Browser
2. Select Applications > Trends > Manual Correction.
3. Drag an offline trend log object or an online trend log object whose property
details are to be displayed to the Manual Correction tab.
4. From the Trended Object drop-down list, select the trended object.
5. From the Trended Properties drop-down list, select the corresponding property
whose details you want to view.
6. In the Time filter section, specify the time range for which you want to view the
details.
NOTE: By default, the time range is defined for a 24-hour time period. You can
fetch the latest data from the database by modifying the time period in the Time
filter.
7. Click Run .
a The values display in the Filtered Data section.
Related Items
1. In System Browser select the trended object whose property details are to be
displayed in the Manual Correction tab.
a A Manual Correction link displays below the Trends group in the Related
Items tab.
NOTE: If you select more than one trended object in the System Browser,
the Manual Correction link does not display in the Related Items tab.
130 | 352 Page 439 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
2. Click the Manual Correction link.

a The Manual Correction application displays in the Secondary pane and the
trended object you selected displays in the Trended Object field in the
Object filter section.
3. Select the corresponding property whose details are to be viewed from the
Trended Properties drop-down list.
4. Specify the time range for which you want to view the details by specifying the
date and time in the Time filter section. By default, the time range is defined for
a 24-hour time period. You can fetch the latest data from the database by
modifying the time period in the Time filter.
5. Click Run .
a The date/time, value, unit, and status of the selected trended property displays
in the Filtered Data section in a column pattern in a grid.
Sort Entries
l Perform any of the following steps to sort the column data:
– To sort a column data in the ascending order, click the column header.
– To change the sorting order to descending, click the column header a
second time.
a The data displays in the sorted order.
NOTE: The values in the Unit column cannot be sorted.
Apply Filters
You can apply either custom, selection, or time filter on the trend data.
Custom filter
1. Navigate to the Time or Value column to which you want to apply the custom
filter.
2. Click the inverted triangle icon and select Custom Filter from the menu options.
a The Custom Filter dialog box displays.
3. Perform any one of the following steps:
– To apply the custom filter to the Time column – Select the appropriate
operator and the date/time values. You must ensure that the value of the
custom filter is within the value range specified in the Time filter section.
– To apply the custom filter on the Value column – Select the appropriate
operator and specify the value in the text field.
4. Click OK.
a The Filtered Data section refreshes to display the information matching the
custom filter criteria.
Selection filter
You can apply the Selection filter on the Status column.
1. Navigate to the Status column on which you want to apply the selection filter
and click the inverted triangle icon.
2. From the menu options, select the value corresponding to the status on which
you want to filter the information and click OK.
NOTE: For a quick retrieval of the values in the options list, enter the text that
closely matches the required status in the text field. The options list displays
the matching value.
a The Filtered Data section displays the information.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 440 of 709 131 | 352

2 Trends
Time filter
1. Navigate to the Time column and click the inverted triangle icon.
2. On the menu, position your mouse pointer over Time Filter. A sub-menu with
the Hours and Minutes options displays.
3. Depending on the filtering criteria to be applied, perform any of the following
steps:
– To filter data on the basis of number of hours - Position your mouse pointer
over the Hours menu and select the relevant option.
– To filter data on the basis of number of hours - Position your mouse pointer
over the Hours menu and then select the relevant option.
a The Filtered Data section displays the information.
Add New Entries

1. Click Add .
NOTE: You can also add a new row by right-clicking on the row and selecting
Add Trend Entry from the options.
a The Add Trend Entry dialog box displays.
2. Complete the Date and Time, Value, and Comment fields.
3. Click OK.
4. Modify the Time filter to a range in which the date and time of the value to be
added is present.
5. Click Run .
a The Filtered Data section refreshes and a new row with the specified values is
added to the grid.
NOTE: The comments entered are logged in the activity log.
Edit Entries
1. Select the data entry row to be modified in the Filtered Data section and click
Edit .
a The Edit Trend Entry dialog box displays.
2. Modify the value and add comments.
NOTE: The comments entered are logged in the activity log.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Run .
a The Filtered Data section refreshes to display the updated value for the
selected row.
NOTE: You can also modify a row by right-clicking the row and selecting Edit
Trend Entry from the options.
Delete Entries
1. Select the entry to be deleted.
NOTE: Multi-select is allowed.
2. Press Delete .
a The Delete Trend Entry dialog box displays.
132 | 352 Page 441 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
3. Enter a comment and click OK.
4. Click Run .
a The entries are deleted.
2.6.2.5 Additional Offline Trend Logs Procedures

Perform the following procedures to work with offline trend log objects.
Upload Trend Data from the System Browser

2. Select Applications > Trend > Offline Log Objects.
3. Select one or more trend log objects or trend log multiple objects.
a The trend view displays as follows. The red curve indicates that the offline
trend data is not yet updated. The blue curve indicates the online trend
data.
a The properties of the trend log objects or trend log multiple objects display
in the Extended Operation tab.
NOTE: If you select more than one object, the properties display only if
both are of the same type, that is, either trend log objects or trend log
multiple objects.
– To upload the trend data related to all the trend log objects or trend log
multiple objects, navigate to the Log Enable property and click Collect.
– To upload the trend data related to a specific trend log object or trend log
multiple object, expand the Log Enable property and click Collect.
a The offline trend data from the trend log objects or trend log multiple objects is
uploaded to the management station. The red curve indicates the updated
Offline Trend data. The blue curve indicates the online trend data.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 442 of 709 133 | 352

2 Trends
Upload Trend Data from the Legend

w A Trend View is open. The red curve indicates that the offline trend data is not
yet updated. The blue curve indicates the online trend data.
1. In the legend, select one or more trended objects whose associated trend data
you want to upload to the management station.
2. Right-click the selected trended object and then select Display Trendlog Object
in Contextual pane.
a The properties of the associated trend log object display.
NOTE: You can only view the properties of trend log objects that are of the
same type. For example, if you have selected two Analog Input objects,
that are associated with two individual trend log objects, the properties of
the trend log objects display in the Contextual pane. However, if one
trended object is associated with a trend log object and another with a
trend log multiple object, the properties do not display.
134 | 352 Page 443 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
– To upload the trend data related to all the trend log objects or trend log
multiple objects, navigate to the Log Enable property and click Collect.
– To upload the trend data related to a specific trend log object or trend log
multiple object, expand the Log Enable property and click Collect.
a The offline trend data from the trend log objects or trend log multiple objects is
uploaded to the management station. The red curve indicates the updated
Offline Trend data. The blue curve indicates the online trend data.
Create Trend Log Objects in Bulk

w You have configure rights on the BACnet configurator.
w BACnet points to be added to the trend log objects display in Edit mode. For
more information, see Adding BACnet points to Edit mode or Trend View.
1. Select one or more points for which you want to create trend log objects.
2. Right-click and select Create Trend.
a The options to configure trend log objects display. For information on the
displayed options, see Edit Mode.
3. Expand the Trend Definitions expander and specify a unique name for the
trendlog object.
4. From the Device drop down list, select the device on which the trend log object
is to be created. To create a trend log multiple object, select the Create
Trendlog Multiple checkbox.
5. Expand the Logging Type expander and specify either of the following values
for the Logging Type.
– Default from Device: The data entry is logged according to the default
logging type of the device.
– Polled: The data entry is polled periodically.
– Triggered: The data entry is triggered when the trigger property is set to
ON.
– COV:The data entry is captured when the value of the trended property
changes.
6. In the Log Interval expander, specify the time interval when the trend samples
are to be collected.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 444 of 709 135 | 352

2 Trends
7. In the Buffer Size expander specify a size for the buffer in the Buffer Size field.
Select the Stop when full check box if you want to stop the collection of trend
values in the buffer when the buffer reaches the specified value.
8. Expand the Start/Stop expander and specify the period for which you want to
collect trend values by specifying the date and time values.
9. Click Start Creation .

a The results of the bulk operation display.
10. Click OK.
Assign or Replace a New Trendlog Reference

A new object reference can be added to available offline trendlog objects. In this
case, the collected data must first be backed up (uploaded); only then can the new
object reference be assigned. Data that is not uploaded in advance can no longer
be restored after being assigned anew. This applies to trendlog and trendlog
multiple objects.
w The display level for the Record count property is set as this property is not
visible in the Extended Operations tab for BACnet trend log objects.
w The Reset command for the Record count property is configured.
2. Select Applications > Trends > Offline Log Objects > [network name] >
Hardware > [automation station] > [offline trendlog object].
4. Navigate to the Log Enable property and click Collect.
NOTE: The current offline Trendlog data is uploaded to the management
station before you reset the collected data.
5. Click Disable to disable the Log Enable property.
6. Navigate to the Record count property and click Reset.
7. Click the BACnet Editor tab and open the Trended Properties expander.
8. In System Browser, select the Manual navigation check box, and then drag-
and-drop the required data point to the Trended Properties expander.
9. Select the property you want to record and click Send.
10. Select Applications > Trends > Offline Log Objects > [network name] >
Hardware > [automation station] > [offline trendlog object].
12. Navigate to the Log Enable property and click Enable.
a The Trendlog object is new configured and is ready to collect data.
NOTE:
An entry in the Event list displays if a trendlog object has an invalid address.
The message can be suppressed by:
Setting the Log Enable property to Disable.
Clearing the BACnet reference.
Change Trended Properties of Objects

w You have configure rights on the BACnet configurator.
w BACnet points to be added to the trend log objects display in Edit mode. For
more information, see Adding BACnet points to Edit mode or Trend View.
136 | 352 Page 445 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Trends
2
1. Select one or more BACnet points of the same type (for example, all analog
input or analog output) for which you want to create trends on the property
other than the default.
2. Right-click and select Change Property.
a The Change Property dialog displays with the list of all the properties that
can be trended.
3. Select the desired property and click OK.
a The objects reflect with the modified property.
Modify Trend Log Objects in Bulk

2. Select Applications > Trends > Offline Log Objects.
3. Perform either of the following steps to add the trend log objects to the Edit
mode:
– Select the BACnet trend log objects to be modified and click Edit Trend
.
– Select the BACnet trend log objects to be modified. Then, select New
Trend from the Related Items pane to open the Trends application in the
Secondary pane. Click Edit Trend .
4. Select the objects to be modified, right-click, and select Modify Trend.

a The properties of the selected objects display.
5. Perform the required updates to the trend log objects and click Start
Modification .
a The results of the bulk operation display in the Bulk Operation Details
window.
a Click OK.
Delete Trend Log Objects in Bulk

2. Select Applications > Trends > Offline Log Objects.
3. Perform either of the following steps to add the trend log objects to the Edit
mode:
– Select the BACnet trend log objects to be modified and click Edit Trend
.
– Select the BACnet trend log objects to be modified. Then, select the New
Trend option from the Related Items pane to open the Trends application in
the Secondary pane. Click Edit Trend .
4. Select the objects to be deleted, right-click and select Delete Trend.

5. Click OK.
a The results of the bulk operation display in the Bulk Operation Details
window.
6. Click OK.
a The trend log objects are deleted from System Browser.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 446 of 709 137 | 352

2 Trends
Add Points to Trend View or Edit mode

2. Navigate to Project > Field Networks > [network].
3. Perform either of the following steps to add the points to the Trend View or in
the Edit mode. To add points to the Edit mode, click Edit Trend .
– Select the Manual navigation check box in the System Browser. Select the
BACnet points for which you want to create trend log objects. Drag the
selected points to the Trend View or Edit mode.
– Select the points for which you want to create trend log objects. Select the
New Trend option from the Related Items pane to open the Trends
application in the Secondary pane.
a The BACnet points display in the Trend View or Edit mode.
2.6.2.6 Additional Predicted Trends Procedures

Perform the following procedures to work with predicted trends [➙ 309].
Create a Predicted Log Object

w You created a trend view definition for a device whose library supports the
RegularTimeSeries property. See Create a Trend View Definition.
2. Select Applications > Trends > Trend View Definitions > [trend definition].
a The Trend application displays.
3. In the Operation tab, locate the Time Series Status property. Then drag and
drop it to the trend viewer definition.
4. Click Save .
a For the Time Series Status property, values and time values appear in the
graph. Also, if not already present, the regular time series predicted log object
is added to System Browser under Applications > Trends > Predicted Log
Objects.
Delete Predicted Log Objects

w A trend view definition includes a device whose library supports the
RegularTimeSeries property.
2. Select Applications > Trends > Trend View Definitions > [trend definition].
a The trend view displays.
3. In the legend, locate the trended object whose trended properties is Time
Series Status and click Remove .
4. In the Remote Trend series dialog box, select the check box Stop trending this
object of the Management Platform.
5. Click OK.
a The regular time series predicted log object is removed from System Browser.
138 | 352 Page 447 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
2.7 Log Viewer

This section provides instructions for using the Log Viewer of Desigo CC. For
2.7.1 Configuring and Printing the Log View Details
Scenario: You want to configure a log view, print, and save its details.
Reference: For background information, see Log Viewer reference.
Workflow Diagram:
1 2 3 4
Customize a Log Refresh the Print Log Grid

Apply Filters
View Log View Contents
Steps:
1 – Customize a Log View

2. Select Applications > Log Viewer. Log Viewer displays with the combined data
from the Activity Log and Event Log.
3. To define the log view size proceed as follows:

a. Navigate to the View Size property in the Extended Operation tab. This
property displays the number of records in the log view.
b. In the Value field, specify a size for the log view. The maximum value is
250.000.
A large view size will slow down the process. In order to view and print a large
amount of data, you must export the log view definition to Reports.
c. Click the Set button next to the Value field and thereafter click Refresh .
4. To select columns in the log view, proceed as follows:
a. Click Select Columns : The Select Columns dialog box displays.
b. In the Available Columns list, select the check box preceding the column
names you want displayed.
c. Click OK.
5. To sort the default displayed log view data further, proceed as follows:
– To change the sort order to descending, click the column header a second
time.
– To sort the column data for multiple columns, click the column header of
the first column, press the CTRL key and click the column headers of
subsequent columns.
– To change the sorting order of a column press the Ctrl key and click the
column header. To remove the sorting order and priority of a column, select
a column on which sorting is not applied. If you hide a column having a sort
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 448 of 709 139 | 352

2 Log Viewer
priority, the priority of other sorted columns changes. Additionally, the data
in the log view is re-ordered based on the new priority. Re-selecting the
hidden column from the Select Columns dialog box does not retain its sort
order and priority.
a The data displays in the sorted order and a priority is assigned in case the
sorting is applied to more than one columns. When you save the data as a
log view definition, the sort criteria is also saved. The next time when you
load the log view definition, the data with the saved sort criteria displays.
a The log view is customized as per the specified settings.
2 – Apply Filters
2. Select Applications > Log Viewer. Log Viewer displays with the combined data
from the Activity Log and Event Log.
3. Apply the following filters according to the type of columns:
– Non-Date Time Columns [➙ 146]
– Date Time Columns [➙ 148]
4. Save the log view definition by clicking Save .
a The log view displays data according to the specified filters.
3 – Refresh the Log View

1. Perform any one of the following steps to manually refresh the data:
– Click Refresh : Any result filter on the log view is moved to the search
filter.
– Press F5 on the keyboard.
2. Save the log view definition by clicking Save .
a The result filters applied to the data set are converted to search filters.
4 – Print Log Grid Contents

2. Select Applications > Log Viewer.
3. Click Print .
4. In the Print dialog box, select the desired printer and specify the printing
configurations.
5. Click Print.
a The Log View details are printed.
NOTE:
The size of the font may vary depending on the number of columns in the log view
grid.
2.7.2
140 | 352 Page 449 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
2.7.3 Configuring and Printing Detailed Log
Scenario: You want to configure a detailed log and print its details.
Reference: For background information, see Log Viewer reference.
Workflow Diagram:
1 2 3
Configure the
Access and View Print Detailed Log
Detailed Log
Data in Detailed Log Contents
Parameters
Steps:
1 – Access and View Data in the Detailed Log

l Complete any of the sub-steps to access and view data in the Detailed Log tab
by selecting either of the following:
– (An activity or event type record from the log view) If an activity type record
is selected, the latest 100 Activities and Event logs for the selected object
display in the Detailed Log tab. If an event type record is selected, the
details of the selected event including the different state changes of the
event and the user activities performed in context of the event display in the
Detailed Log tab of Event List, Investigative Treatment, and Assisted
Treatment windows.
– (An object from the System Browser) The latest 100 activities and events
for that object display in the Detailed Log tab.
– (An object from any application that supports secondary selection such as
Graphics, Trends, Textual Viewer, Reports, or Schedules) The latest 100
Activities and Event Log records for the object display in the Detailed Log
tab.
– (An event from the Event List) The details of the selected event including
the different state changes of the event and the user activities performed in
context of the event are available in the Detailed Log tab of Event List,
Investigative Treatment, and Assisted Treatment windows.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 450 of 709 141 | 352

2 Log Viewer
2 – Configure the Detailed Log Parameters

You can configure the information displayed in the Detailed Log tab by selecting
the required columns, removing unwanted columns, sorting entries, and
condensing the displayed data by applying filters.
1. Select an activity or event type record from the log view, an object from the
System Browser or any application supporting secondary selection, or an event
from the event list.
a The data matching your selection displays in the Detailed Log tab.
2. Customize the displayed data as needed by performing the following:
– Selecting Columns [➙ 145]
– Sorting Entries [➙ 146]
– Applying Filters on DateTime [➙ 156] and Non-DateTime [➙ 154] Columns
a The Detailed Log tab refreshes and displays data as per your specified
parameters.
3 – Print Detailed Log Contents

w The Detailed Log displays the details of the activity, event or object to be
printed.
1. In the Detailed Log tab toolbar, click Print .
2. In the Print dialog box, select the desired printer and select the printing
configurations.
3. Click Print.
a The Detailed Log contents are printed.
142 | 352 Page 451 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
NOTE:
The size of the font may vary depending on the number of columns in the log view
grid.
2.7.4 Additional Log Viewer Procedures

Select any of the procedures for additional information on Log Viewer.
2.7.4.1 Managing Log View Definitions and Folders

This section provides information on organizing and working with log view
definitions.
Export a Log View Definition

2. Select Applications > Log Viewer > [log view definition].
3. Click Export .
a The Browse for Folder dialog box displays.
4. Browse for the desired location and click OK.
a A confirmation message displays. The log view definition is exported and
saved.
Import a Log View Definition

1. In System Browser, select the destination where you want to import the log
view definition.
2. Click Import. .
a The File Open dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the folder where the exported log view definitions are available.
Select the xml file to be imported and click Open.
a A confirmation message displays and the log view definition is added.
Create Log View Folders

Log View folders enable you to organize log view definitions.
a Log Viewer displays.
3. Click New Folder .
4. In the Create New Object dialog box, do the following:

a. Enter a unique name and description.
b. Click OK.
a A new folder is created.
Create a New Log View Definition from an Existing One

w You have made modifications to an existing log view definition and want to
save it as a new one.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 452 of 709 143 | 352

2 Log Viewer
1. Click Save As .
2. In the Save Object As dialog box, do the following:

a. Select the destination folder for saving the new log view definition.
b. Enter a name and description.
c. Click OK.
a The new log view definition is saved.
NOTE: You cannot save a result filter condition. In order to save the filter
condition, you must move the result filter to a search filter and save the
configuration as a log view definition.
Save a Log View Definition as a Report Definition

w Log data displays in the Log Viewer or the Detailed Log tab.
1. (Optional) Perform any required configurations such as applying search filters,
selecting columns, and applying sorting.
2. Click Save as Report Definition .
3. In the Save Object As dialog box, do the following:

a. Select the Reports folder for saving the new Report Definition.
b. Enter a name and description.
c. Click OK.
a A report definition is created and displays. This report definition contains
the All Logs table. All configurations applied on the log view definition such
as selected columns, order of columns, sorting on columns, and the search
filters are present in the All Logs table in the report definition.
Delete a Log View Definition

w At least one log view definition is available in System Browser.
2. Select Applications > Log Viewer > [log view definition].
3. Click Delete .
4. Click OK.
a The log view definition is deleted.
Create a Default Log View Template

A default log view template enables you to create a customized template with a
specific set of columns, their position, and size. The template also contains sorting
applied to the column data. Any new log view definition is always based on the
default template.
There can only be one default template. You can create a new template or use the
one provided by the system. When you create a new template, the existing default
template is overwritten. The default template in a distributed environment is system
specific. So, if there are three systems configured for a distributed environment,
each system will have its own default template.
144 | 352 Page 453 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
1. (Optional) Configure the log view by selecting, reordering, or resizing the

columns. You can also apply sorting on the displayed data.
2. Click Save as Default.
a A message box displays.
3. Click Yes.
a The log view is saved as a default template.
NOTE:
View-specific columns in the log view template display in red color, if the view is
deleted. You can get the details of the invalid columns by double-clicking the
header text. The information displays in the Log View Validation message box.
If a saved log view definition contains view specific columns from a deleted view,
the Log View Validation message box displays with details of the invalid columns
when selecting the log view definition.
2.7.4.2 Configuring Log View Parameters

You can configure a log view definition by defining the size of the log view,
specifying the columns to be displayed, applying filters on the displayed data,
sorting log entries, and so on.
Define the Log View Size

You can define a size for the log view to display a specific number of records. This
view size is system specific in a distributed environment. If there are three systems
configured for a distributed environment, each system will have its own view size.
a The number of records in the log view displays in View Size.
4. In the Value field, specify a size for the log view. The maximum value is
250.000.
5. Click the Set button next to the Value field.
6. Click Refresh .
a The log view refreshes.
NOTE: A large view size will slow down the process. In order to view and print
a large amount of data, you must export the log view definition to Reports.
Select Columns
1. Click Select Columns .
a The Select Columns dialog box displays. In the Available Columns list, the
default columns are selected. These columns also display in the Selected
Columns list of the dialog box. These columns represent the columns of the
log view definition.
2. In the Available Columns list, select the check box preceding the column
names you want displayed.
a The Selected Columns list box is updated.
3. Click OK.
a The log view definition is updated.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 454 of 709 145 | 352

2 Log Viewer
NOTE:
For each view present in the system, you can add the view-specific columns
(Object Location and Object Designation) to a log view from the Select Columns
dialog box. If you run the log view definition from the Secondary pane and
activities such as renaming a view are done in the Primary pane, the effect of
these changes reflect in the log view definition only after you click Refresh.
Sort Log Entries

w You want to sort the log data that is displaying in the log view or the Detailed
Log tab.
l Use any of the following to sort the data. By default, the displayed data is
sorted on the basis of the latest date and time.
– To change the sort order to descending, click the column header a second
time.
– To change the sort order of a column press the CTRL key and click the
column header.
– To remove the sorting order and priority of a column, select a column on
which sorting is not applied.
– To sort the column data for multiple columns, click the column header of
the first column, press the CTRL key and click the column headers of
subsequent columns.
– If you hide a column having a sort priority, the priority of other sorted
columns changes. Additionally, the data in the log view is re-ordered based
on the new priority. Re-selecting the hidden column from the Select
Columns dialog box does not retain its sort order and priority.
a The data displays in the sorted order and a priority is assigned in case the
sorting is applied to more than one columns.
Apply Filters on Non-DateTime Columns

You can apply a result filter on the data set displayed in a log view or in the
Detailed Log tab using any of the following techniques. On applying a result filter
on a column, a filter icon displays in the column header indicating that a filter is
applied on the column.
Custom Filter
1. Right-click the data value for which you want to apply the filter.
2. Select Custom Filter.
a The Custom Filter Dialog Box displays. If you are applying the filter on
columns of the detailed log tab, the Search Filter tab is not available.
146 | 352 Page 455 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
3. Click the Result Filter tab.

4. Click the Add Filter button.
a An empty row with the Operator and Value fields displays.
5. Specify the operator by selecting values from the Operator and Value drop-
drop down list.
a The filter expression displays in the Filter Expression field.
6. Click OK.
a The result filter is applied to the data set.
Quick Filter
2. Select the Filter By option.
a The last three filters applied on a column are listed as menu options.
3. Select any of the options on which you want to filter the data.
a The data is filtered according to the selected option.
Selection Filter
The Selection filter is applicable for filtering ENUM type of data. See List of ENUM
columns section in custom filter for a list of columns of type ENUM. Perform the
following steps to apply the Selection filter:
1. Click the inverted arrow on any column displaying ENUM data.
a The list of data entries for the column display as menu items.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 456 of 709 147 | 352

2 Log Viewer
2. Select the checkbox pertaining to the entry on which you want to apply the
filter.
NOTE: For faster retrieval of the data entries, you can type the value of the
entry to be retrieved in the text box above the Selection filter.
3. Click OK.
a The view displays the data filtered on the basis of the selected entry. If you
select more than one data entry, the system displays the data matching either
of the selected entries.
Drag-and-Drop
The drag-and-drop option is available only for filtering data displayed in a log view.
This option is not available when you are applying filters on the data displayed in
the Detailed Log tab.
l From System Browser, drag-and-drop an object that you want to set as a filter
to the log view. You can also drag-and-drop multiple objects from System
Browser. For this, ensure that the Manual navigation option in System Browser
is checked.
a The log view displays the entries corresponding to the object. In case of
multiple selection, the data matching either of the selected objects displays.
NOTE:
If you apply a result filter on a column with an existing result filter, the new filter
condition replaces the older condition.
Apply Filters on DateTime Columns

You can apply a result filter on the columns displaying date/time data using any of
the following techniques:
Custom Filter
1. Position your cursor over a column with date-time data, such as Date/Time.
2. Right-click and select Custom Filter.
a The Time Filter dialog box displays. If you are applying the filter on columns
of the Detailed Log tab, the Search Filter tab is not available.
148 | 352 Page 457 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2

4. Specify the appropriate date/time values in the Exact, Custom, or Relative
options.
NOTE: By default, the Unlimited option is selected in the Time Filter dialog box.
If you want to view records having NULL as the value, select the Null option.
a A preview of the date/time values you specified displays in the Preview of
Resulting Time Range section.
5. Click OK.
a The log view refreshes automatically and the data corresponding to the
specified date time values displays.
NOTE: If you specify a date in the Exact option, the data corresponding only to
the specified date displays.
Date Filters
Perform the following steps to retrieve the data for the required time period. Using
the Date Filters option, you can retrieve data for the current day, previous day,
current week, previous week, current month, previous month, current year, or
previous year.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 458 of 709 149 | 352

2 Log Viewer
1. Click the drop-down arrow on any column displaying date/time data, for
example, Date/Time. A list of menu options displays.
2. Position your mouse pointer over Date Filters. A list of options to filter the data
on the basis of the current day (Today), previous day (Yesterday), current week
(This Week), previous week (Last Week), current month (This Month), previous
month (Last Month), current year (This Year), or previous year (Last Year)
displays.
3. Select the required option.
a The view refreshes and displays the data according to the selected time option.
Quick Filter
Perform the following step to apply a quick filter:
l Right-click the data entry corresponding to the date time value for which you
want to apply the filter and select Filter By.
a The log view refreshes and displays the entries corresponding to the selected
date.
NOTE:
The last three filters applied on a column are listed as menu options that display
when you right-click a data value. You can also apply a quick filter by selecting
any of these options.
Apply Search Filters on Columns other than Date/Time

2. From the menu options, select Custom Filter.
a The Custom Filter Dialog Box displays.
3. Click the Search Filter tab.
5. Select a value from the Operator drop down list. In order to specify the value,
you must either select a value from the Value drop down list or type a value in
the field.
a The filter expression displays in the Filter expression field.
6. Click OK.
a The data matching your filter condition is retrieved from the server.
Apply Search Filters on Date/Time Columns

150 | 352 Page 459 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
4. Enter the appropriate date/time values in the Exact, Custom, or Relative

options.
5. Click OK.
6. The log view refreshes and the data corresponding to the specified date time
values displays.
Modify Search/Result Filters on Columns other than Date/Time

w You have applied a search/result filter to the log data.
1. Right-click the data value in the column of the filter to be modified and select
Custom Filter.
2. Click the Search or Result Filter tab, depending on the filter that you want to
modify.
3. Modify the filter condition.
4. Click OK.
a The view refreshes and the data matching the modified filter displays.
Modify Search/Result Filters on Date/Time Columns

w You have applied a search/result filter to a column displaying date time data.
1. Right-click the data value in the column pertaining to the filter to be modified
and select Custom Filter.
2. Click the Search or Result Filter tab, depending on the filter that you want to
modify.
3. Modify the filter condition.
4. Click OK.
a The view refreshes and the data matching the modified filter displays.
Delete Search Filters on Columns other than Date/Time

w You have applied a search filter to the log data.
1. Right-click the data value in the column pertaining to the search filter to be
deleted.
4. Select the check box preceding the Operator and Value fields corresponding to
the search filter expression to be deleted.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 460 of 709 151 | 352

2 Log Viewer
5. Click Remove Filter.

6. Click OK.
a The log view refreshes and displays all the data from the database.
Delete Search Filters on Date/Time Columns

w You have applied a search filter to a column displaying date time data.
1. Right-click the data value in the column pertaining to the filter to be modified.
4. Select Unlimited.
5. Click OK.
a The view refreshes.
Delete Result Filters

You can delete a result filter for a column displaying date/time or non date/time
values by performing any of the following:
● Click Remove All Result Filters .

● Click the drop-down arrow on the column header with a result filter applied and
click Remove Result Filter.
● Right-click the column entry on which the filter is applied, and select Remove
Result Filter from the menu options.
● Remove the selection on the checkbox for the entry on which the filter is
applied and click OK.
● For columns displaying values other than date/time: From the Custom Filter
dialog box, click Remove Filter.
NOTE: In order to make the Remove Filter button available, you must select
the check box preceding the Operator and Value fields corresponding to the
result filter expression you want to delete.
Move Result Filters to Search Filters

A search filter obtains the data matching your filter expression from the database,
whereas a result filter filters the data matching the filter expression from the data
displayed in the log view.
For example, assume you apply a result filter on the data displayed in the log view
to retrieve all records with action as primary authentication. The records with action
as primary authentication display. However, there are more records with action as
primary authentication in the database than what displays in the log view. This is
indicated by the following message Configured View Size reached!
Refine search via Search Filter. In this case, you must move your result
filter to a search filter to obtain all the matching data from the database.
w You have applied a result filter on the data displayed in the log view.
1. Perform any of the following steps to move the result filter to a search filter.
a. Click Refresh .
b. Click the Move to Search Filter button in the Custom Filter dialog box for the
column on which the result filter is applied and click OK.
a The result filter is moved to a search filter and the data matching the filter
condition is retrieved from the database.
152 | 352 Page 461 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
NOTE: When you move a result filter on a column to a search filter, any existing
search filter present on the same column is replaced.
Revert to Saved Search Filters

The Revert to Saved Search Filter function enables you to obtain the data provided
by a previously defined search filter that is now being overwritten by a newly
applied filter. For example, assume you apply a result filter on the log view to
display all records of type Activity. The filter is moved to a Search filter in order to
save it. You have now applied a new result filter to obtain data having Source
Description as Users and have moved this to a search filter. So, the existing search
filter is now replaced with the following new filter ('Record Type' = "Activity" AND
'Source Description' = "USERS') However, you want to retrieve the previously
saved search filter ('Record Type' = "Activity").
w The log data displays.
1. Apply a result filter on any column. For example, Record Type = Activity.
a The applied filter displays in the Filters area below the log view and the log
view refreshes to display all records with Record Type as Activity.
2. Move the result filter to a search filter in order to save the filter condition.
a The result filter is moved to a search filter and displays in the Filters area.
Save is enabled.
3. Save the information as a log view definition.

a The saved log view definition is reloaded and the data matching the filter
expression displays.
4. Apply a new result filter on any column. For example, Source Description is =
Users.
a The applied filter displays in the Filters area below the log view and the log
view refreshes to display all records with Source Description as Users.
5. Move the result filter to a search filter.
a The search filter is now modified and displays as follows in the Filters area.
('Record Type' = "Activity" AND 'Source Description' = "USERS'). Revert to
Saved Search Filters is now activated.
6. Click Revert to Saved Search Filters .

a The view refreshes and displays the data according to the previously defined
search filter ('Record Type' = "Activity"). The filter condition is also updated in
the Filters area.
Apply Search Filters on Columns Not Present in the Log View

1. Click Search Filter .

a The Search Filter dialog box displays.
2. Select a column from the Available Columns list.
a The operators and values associated with the selected column display in
the Operators and Values list.
3. Select the required operator and value from the respective lists. If values are
not displayed for the selected column, type in the value.
4. Click Add.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 462 of 709 153 | 352

2 Log Viewer
5. Click OK.
a The log view refreshes.
Modify Search Filters on Columns Not Present in the Log View

w You have applied a search filter to a log view definition.

a The Search Filter dialog box displays with the filter expression in the Filter
Expression field.
2. Click the filter expression.
a The column, operator, and value of the condition filter expression display in
their respective lists.
3. Modify the search filter expression as required.
4. Click Update.
a The updated filter expression displays in the Filter Expression field.
5. Click OK.
a The log view refreshes displaying the updated data according to the modified
filter expression.
NOTE:
If you want to modify the search filter in a log view definition that is configured in a
different language from your logged in language, you must change the filter
language in the Configuration dialog box. This dialog box is accessed by clicking
Configuration .
Delete Search Filters on Columns Not Present in the Log View

w You have applied a condition filter to a log view definition.

a The Search Filter dialog box displays.
2. Delete the search filter expression from the Filter Expression field.
3. Click OK.
a The log view refreshes displaying the latest data.
2.7.4.3 Applying Filters on the Detailed Log Tab

In the Detailed Log tab, you can apply filters on date time as well as non date time
columns.
Apply Filters on Non-DateTime Columns

You can apply a result filter on the data set displayed in the Detailed Log tab using
any of the following techniques. When you apply a Result Filter on a column, a
filter icon displays in the column header indicating that a filter is applied on the
column.
Custom Filter
154 | 352 Page 463 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2
a The Custom Filter Dialog Box displays.

5. Specify the operator by selecting values from the Operator and Value drop-
drop down list.
6. Click OK.
a The result filter is applied to the data set.
Quick Filter
2. Select the Filter By option.
a The last three filters applied on a column are listed as menu options that
display when you right-click a data value. You can also apply a quick filter
by selecting any of these options.
Selection Filter
The selection filter is applicable for filtering ENUM type of data. See List of ENUM
columns section in Custom Filter [➙ 317] for a list of columns of type ENUM.
Perform the following steps to apply the selection filter:
1. Click the inverted arrow on any column displaying ENUM data.
a The list of data entries for the column display as menu items.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 464 of 709 155 | 352

2 Log Viewer
2. Select the checkbox pertaining to the entry on which you want to apply the
filter.
NOTE: For faster retrieval of the data entries, you can type the value of the
entry to be retrieved in the text box above the selection filter.
3. Click OK.
a The view displays the data filtered on the basis of the selected entry.
NOTE: If you select more than one data entry, the system displays the data
matching either of the selected entries.
NOTE:
If you apply a result filter on a column with an existing result filter, the new filter
condition replaces the older condition.
Apply Filters on DateTime Columns

You can apply a result filter on the columns displaying date/time data using any of
the following techniques:
● Custom Filter
● Date Filters
● Quick Filter
Custom Filter
156 | 352 Page 465 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Log Viewer
2

4. Specify the appropriate date/time values in the Exact, Custom, or Relative
options.
5. Click OK.
a The Detailed Log refreshes automatically and the data corresponding to the
specified date time values displays.
NOTE: If you specify a date in the Exact option, the data corresponding only to
the specified date displays.
Date Filters
Using the Date Filters option, you can retrieve data for the current day, previous
day, current week, previous week, current month, previous month, current year, or
previous year. Perform the following steps to retrieve the data for the required time
period.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 466 of 709 157 | 352

2 Address Book
1. Click the drop-down arrow on any column displaying date/time data, for
example, Date/Time. A list of menu options displays.
2. Position your mouse pointer over Date Filters. A list of options to filter the data
on the basis of the current day (Today), previous day (Yesterday), current week
(This Week), previous week (Last Week), current month (This Month), previous
month (Last Month), current year (This Year), or previous year (Last Year)
displays.
3. Select the required option. The Detailed Log refreshes and displays the data
according to the selected time option.
Quick Filter
Perform the following step to apply a quick filter:
Right-click the data entry corresponding to the date time value for which you want
to apply the filter and select Filter By. The Detailed Log refreshes and displays the
entries corresponding to the selected date.
NOTE:
The last three filters applied on a column are listed as menu options that display
when you right-click a data value. You can also apply a quick filter by selecting
any of these options.
2.8 Address Book

This section provides instructions for common tasks related to the Desigo CC
address book. For background information, see the reference [➙ 326] section.
Prerequisites:
View the Address Book

1. In System Browser, select Applications > Address Book.
a The Address Book workspace displays a list of contacts.
2. To view the details of a contact, select the contact in the list.
a The Details expander displays all the information for that contact. For more
details, see Details of an Address Book Contact [➙ 328].
3. To search for a contact enter a string in the search field. For more details, see
Address Book Search Field [➙ 327].
Create a New Contact

1. In the Address Book workspace, click Add recipient .
a A new contact is added to the list.
2. Select the newly-created contact.
a The Details expander displays fields for entering the contact’s information.
3. In the General expander, enter contact’s full name in the Full Name field (for
example, John Doe). This value has to be unique.
4. (Optional) Specify the following settings:
– Short Name
– Language
– Time Offset
158 | 352 Page 467 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Address Book
2
5. Click Save .
a The contact is added to the list. You can now configure the contact to receive
reports or remote notifications, as needed.
Configure a Contact to Receive Reports

Reports are sent by email and addressed to individual contacts. To be able to
receive a report, a contact must have at least an email address configured.
1. In the Address Book workspace, select the contact in the list.
a The Details expander displays the contact’s information.
2. In the Devices expander, enter the contact’s full email address in the Email1
field.
3. (Optional) If you have other email addresses for that contact, you can enter
them in the Email2 and Email 3 fields.
NOTE: When you email a report, you will be able to choose from all the
configured email addresses for that contact.
4. Click Save .
a The contact’s email addresses are updated.
Configure a Contact to Receive Remote Notifications

Remote notifications can be sent by multiple methods, such as email and SMS,
and are addressed to groups, not to individual contacts. To be able to receive a
remote notification, a contact must be assigned to a group and have one or more
valid devices configured. You can also set a preferred and fallback method.
1. In the Address Book workspace, select the contact in the list.
a The Details expander displays the contact’s information.
2. In the Groups expander, do one of the following:
- Select the name of an existing group from the drop-down list.
- Enter the name of a new group you want to create directly into the empty
drop-down list field.
3. Click Add.
a The name of the group is added to the Groups box for this contact.
NOTE: To remove a group select it in the box and click Remove.
4. In the Devices expander, enter the methods for notifying this recipient. For
example:
– Enter the contact’s email address in the Email1 field.
– Enter the contact’s mobile phone number in the SMS1 field.
5. In the Preferred Device expander, select which method to try first, and which to
use as fallback. For example:
– In the Preferred device drop-down list, select Email1.
– In the Fallback device drop-down list, select SMS1.
NOTE: With this setting, when the system attempts to send out notifications
to the contact, it will try sending an email first. If that fails, it will try sending
an SMS.
6. Click Save .
a The contact will receive remote notifications addressed any of the listed
groups.
a Any newly created groups also become available for assigning to other
contacts.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 468 of 709 159 | 352

2 Remote Notifications
Import Outlook Contacts into the Address Book

w You have a CSV file containing the contacts exported from Microsoft Outlook,
which meets the requirements set out in Outlook Import Rules for the Address
Book [➙ 329].
1. Copy the CSV file to removable storage or to a location you can access from
the Desigo CC computer.
3. Select Applications > Address Book.
a The Address Book workspace displays.
4. Click Import address book .
5. In the Open dialog box, browse for and select the CSV contacts file that you
want to import.
6. Click Open.
a When the import procedure is complete, a message box informs you of
how many new contacts were created, how many existing ones were
updated, and how many were skipped owing to importing rules.
7. Click OK.
a The imported contacts are available in the Address Book workspace.
2.9 Remote Notifications

This section provides instructions for common tasks related to remote notifications
in Desigo CC. For background information, see the reference section.
Prerequisites:
● System Manager is in Operating mode and System Browser is in Application
View.
Send a ‘New’ (Operator-Issued) Remote Notification

You want to quickly alert all the facility operators of an event that has occurred, but
no alarm-triggered remote notification was configured for that event. In this
example you will directly send a notification to the recipients in the Operators
group.
For background information, see New Remote Notification in the Secondary Pane
[➙ 338].
w An Operators recipient group was created in the Desigo CC address book. See
Configure a Contact to Receive Remote Notifications [➙ 159].
w The communication services used by the recipients in the Operators group (in
this example, email and SMS) are configured.
w System Manager is in a layout that includes the Contextual pane, and the
Primary pane is unlocked .
1. In Related Items, click New Remote Notification (icon or link).

a The New Remote Notification workspace displays in the Secondary pane.
2. In the Address Book area, in the Filter drop-down list, select Groups.
3. Drag-and-drop the Operators group from the Address Book area to the
Recipient/Members list on the left.
a The Operators group is added to the Recipient/Members list, with the total
number of contacts in that group.
4. Compose the notification messages for email and SMS as follows:
a. In the Device drop-down list, select E-Mail. Drag-and-drop any automatic
160 | 352 Page 469 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Remote Notifications
2
tags you want to use from the Message Tags list into the Subject and Body
fields. You can also directly enter text. The subject line cannot be empty.
b. In the Device drop-down list, select SMS. Drag-and-drop any automatic tags
you want to use from the Message Tags list into the Body field. You can also
directly enter text. The maximum message length is 480 characters (divided
into three messages). Longer text messages will be cut off.
5. Click Send this message .
6. The message is sent immediately and the user interface in the Secondary pane
switches to the Message Status list, from where you can monitor the progress
of the remote notification, and see its outcome.
7. If you want to compose another notification, click Back to configuration .

8. From here you can edit the previously sent notification, or click Clear all
message data to reset all the fields and start over.
Monitor the Progress and Outcomes of Sent Notifications

You want to check the outcome of a previously-sent remote notification. The
system provides a Message Status list (see Remote Notifications Message Status
List [➙ 331]) where you can review all the remote notifications sent out (whether
alarm-triggered or operator-issued), and check on the progress, details, and
outcome of each one.
1. In System Browser, select Applications > Remote Notifications.
a The RENO Messages tab displays. The Message Status list shows a list of
all the notifications (alarm-triggered or operator-issued) that have been sent
out from Desigo CC.
NOTE: If no remote notifications have been sent out, the RENO Messages
tab does not display.
2. Each notification displays on a separate (expandable) row. The topmost row
shows a compact notification summary with the most important information
about the notification, and an indication of its overall outcome. For example,
Failed, Completed, Partially Failed, No Response.
3. Click alongside a notification to expand it and display further details about it:
– Procedure data summary (only for alarm-triggered notifications): provides
more information about the event that triggered the notification.
– Recipients summary: lists the [recipient groups] of the notification.
Alongside each group is a Status that indicates the progress/outcome of
notifying that group.
4. Expand a recipient group to see more details (how many group members have
responded so far, whether the group timeout is expired, and so on), the list of
individual contacts in that group, and its escalation list (if configured). Alongside
each contact is a Status that indicates the progress/outcome of notifying that
person.
5. Expand an individual contact to see the person’s preferred and fallback devices
(for example, an email address, or a mobile phone number).
– Select a device to see the text of the notification message sent to that
contact in the Message panel on the right.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 470 of 709 161 | 352

Re-Send a Remote Notification from the Message Status List

You want to re-send a remote notification that was previously not completed
successfully. For example, its overall outcome was Failed or Aborted. For more
details, see Remote Notifications Message Status List [➙ 331].
1. In System Browser, select Applications > Remote Notifications.
a The RENO Messages tab displays. The Message Status list shows a list of
all the notifications (alarm-triggered or operator-issued) that have been sent
out from Desigo CC.
NOTE: If no remote notifications have been sent out, the RENO Messages
tab does not display.
2. In the Message Status list, select the remote notification that you want to re-
send. (For example, test – Alarm ID:29 – Automatic).
3. Click Start RENO procedure .

a The system starts re-sending the notification. While sending is in progress,
the icon is dimmed.
Start a Remote Notification from Event List

An event has occurred that triggered an alarm-triggered remote notification. The
notification has Starting Mode = Manual, which means operator intervention is
required for the system to start sending out the preconfigured messages.
w Event List displays on the screen.
w An event has occurred for which the command to start remote notifications
is available.
1. In Event List, select the event that triggered the notification.
2. Click Start Remote Notifications for the event.
a The system starts sending the notification messages preconfigured for this
event. The command to stop remote notifications is available for the

event.
Stop a Remote Notification from Event List

Sending of a remote notification is in progress. The notification was configured with
Starting Mode = Manual and Can be stopped = Yes. You now want to interrupt
(halt) sending of the messages.
w You previously started a remote notification from Event List, and the command
to stop remote notifications is available for the event.
1. In Event List, click Stop Remote Notifications for the event.

a The system stops sending the notification messages preconfigured for this
event. The command to start remote notifications is available for the

event.
162 | 352 Page 471 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Logics
2
Stop a Remote Notification from the Message Status List

You want to interrupt sending of a remote notification that is currently in progress.
w You are displaying the Message Status list. See Remote Notifications Message
Status List [➙ 331].
1. In the Message Status list, select the remote notification that is currently being
sent (its overall outcome will display as Running).
a The Stop RENO procedure icon is enabled if the notification can be

stopped.
2. Click Stop RENO procedure .
a The system stops sending the remote notification messages. The overall
outcome of the notification becomes Aborted. The status of any pending
recipients becomes Cancelled.
Halt the Escalation of a Remote Notification

Sending of a remote notification is in progress. You want to halt its escalation, so
that the message is not sent to the escalation recipients.
w You are displaying the Message Status list. See Remote Notifications Message
Status List [➙ 331].
1. In the Message Status list, select the remote notification that is currently being
sent (its overall outcome will display as Running).
2. Click to view the details of the notification.
3. Expand Recipients to see the groups to which that notification is addressed.

4. Select the group for which you want to stop the escalation.
a The Stop RENO procedure escalation icon is enabled if the escalation

for this group has not started yet.
5. Click Stop RENO procedure escalation .
a The escalation for the selected group is now disabled. If the group does not
reach its threshold of required responses, any escalation does not start.
The status of the group and the recipients involved becomes Stop.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 above for any other recipient groups of the notification.
2.10 Logics
This section provides instructions for working with the automation logic features of
Desigo CC. For background information see the reference section.
2.10.1 Macros
This section provides instructions for common tasks related to the Desigo CC
macros.
2.10.1.1 Browsing Existing Macros in the System

2. Select Applications > Logics > Macros.
a The macros configured in the system display in the Macros folder, and may
be further organized into subfolders under it.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 472 of 709 163 | 352

2 Logics
3. To examine a particular macro, select it in System Browser.

a Properties and commands for the selected macro display in the Operation tab.
2.10.1.2 Manually Executing the Project Backup Macro

You can make a backup of the project database using the predefined system
macro provided for this purpose.
2. Select Applications > Logics > Macros > Backups > Backup Online.
3. In the Operation tab, click Execute.
a The system begins backing up the project database. The default backup
location is C:\GMSBackups.
2.10.1.3 Broadcasting the Same Command to all Devices on a

Network
Block command macros let you simultaneously send the same command to all the
devices on a specified BACnet network.
w Block commands are enabled for the network in question.
164 | 352 Page 473 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Logics
2

2. Expand Applications > Logics > Macros > Block Command Macros.
a The available block command macros display underneath. The naming
pattern is BLOCK_[COMMAND]_[network name]. For example,
BLOCK_ACK_network1.
3. Select the block command macro you want to use.

4. In the Operation tab, click Execute.
a The command is broadcast to all the devices on the network. For example,
BLOCK_ACK_network1 acknowledges all devices on network1.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 474 of 709 165 | 352

2 Documents
2.11 Documents
This section provides instructions for viewing documents, files, web links and other
resources in Desigo CC. For background information see the reference [➙ 339]
section.
2.11.1 Documents
This section provides instructions for viewing relevant documents or web links in
Desigo CC.
View all the Documents Configured in the System

2. Select Applications > Documents.
a The document objects configured in the system display under the
Documents folder. They may be further organized into subfolders.
3. To view one of the documents, select it in System Browser.
a The contents of the document display. If the document is a PDF file allows
zooming in, zooming out, and printing the document.
View a Document from Related Items

w You selected a system object, and the Related Items tab displays links to one
or more documents related to that object.
1. In the Related Items tab, click the document you want to open.
a The contents of the selected document display (by default) in the

Secondary pane. If the Primary pane pushpin is locked , the document
displays in the Primary pane instead.
2. If there are multiple documents to consult in the Related Items tab, you can
look through them using:
– Backward or Forward.
– The keyboard shortcuts ALT + P (previous related item) and ALT + N (next
related item).
2.12 Other Applications

This section provides instructions for operating the other applications in Desigo
CC. For background information see the reference [➙ 340] section.
2.12.1 Web Applications

For background information, see the reference [➙ 340] section.
2.12.1.1 Setting and Clearing Credentials

To execute (automatically or manually) and download an external web application
fixed link report you must first set the relevant fixed link to be executed with user
credentials.
Set User Credentials for Executing a Fixed Link

w You created fixed links for an external web application.
166 | 352 Page 475 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Other Applications
2

2. Select Applications > Links > [fixed link].
a The Application Viewer tab displays.
3. Click Set credentials .
4. In the Web Viewer dialog box, enter your user name and password.
5. Click OK.
Clear Credentials for a Fixed Link

w You set the execution credentials for an external web application fixed link and
now you want to restore the default settings (no user credentials).
2. Select Applications > Links > [fixed link].
a The Application Viewer tab displays.
3. Click Remove credentials .
2.12.1.2 Displaying and Opening a Web Application

Display Web Applications in the Application Viewer
w A system object was configured to display some associated external web
applications when selected.
1. In System Browser, select the system object whose external web applications
you want to display (for example, Field Networks).
a The Application Viewer tab displays. It may show the associated external
web application or the list of the external web applications available for the
selected object.
2. (Optional) If the Application Viewer tab displays the list of external web
applications assigned to the selected object, you may want to navigate through
them as follows:
– Click the name of the desired external web application.
a The corresponding external web application displays.
3. Click Show and select another application.
a The corresponding external web application displays.
Open a Web Application from Related Items

1. In System Browser, select a system object that has an external web application
associated.
a In the Related Items tab, the Web Apps section contains any display rules
of the matching external web applications for that object.
2. Click a display rule related item.
a The corresponding external web application displays (by default) in the

Secondary pane. If the Primary pane pushpin is locked , the external web
application displays in the Primary pane instead.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 476 of 709 167 | 352

2 Other Applications
2.12.1.3 Managing Fixed Links

Create a Fixed Link for a Web Application
w The Application Viewer tab displays the external web application for the system
object selected in System Browser.
w You created one or more Links subfolders.
w You want to create a favorite fixed link to quick access this external web
application.
1. Click Save As .
2. In the Save Object As dialog box, select a Links subfolder as the destination
where you want to save the new external web application fixed link.
a. Enter a name and description.
b. Click OK.
a The fixed link object is added to System Browser.
Modify the Settings of a Web Application Fixed Link

w You created a fixed link for an external web application.
2. Select Applications > Links > [Links folder] > [fixed link].
3. Select the Extended Operation tab.
4. For each of the available parameters modify the corresponding value and click
Change. For example:
– P1 Value: Corresponds to the first parameter in the Rule Editor Output
expander (for example, Report Template Value for Advanced Reporting).
– P2 Value: Corresponds to the second parameter in the Rule Editor Output
expander (for example, Format for Advanced Reporting).
– …
– P10 Value
Configure Email Settings for a Fixed Link Report

You want to create an email template for a fixed link.
w You have created a Web Rule and a fixed link for any Advanced, Energy, or
Pharma reports.
w You have set the User Credentials. See Related Topics for more information.
w You have configured SMTP for remote notification.
w You have a populated Address Book with email addresses and configured
notifications.
2. Select Applications > Links > [fixed link] for which you want to configure the
email settings.
3. From the Application Viewer toolbar, click Email Settings .

– The Email Settings dialog box displays.
4. To add the recipients’ names, in the Address Book section, do one of the
following:
168 | 352 Page 477 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Other Applications
2
– In the drop-down list, select People or Group. A list of individuals or groups

displays.
– Type the name or the group you want to add. The specified individual or
group displays.
NOTE: When you press ENTER, the query is temporarily saved in the
drop-down list.
5. From the list of individuals or groups, use the > and < arrows to add or remove
names or groups to and from the Recipients section.
6. In the Subject field, type a subject for the email, or, leave the default text.
7. In the Body field, type a message you want to appear in the body of the email,
or, leave the default text.
8. Click Save .
9. To create a program or script to send an email at a scheduled time, see the

Related Topics section.
Related Topics
For a related workflow, see Generating Email Attachments for Fixed Link Reports
2.12.2 Validation
This section provides step-by-step instructions for Validation tasks. For background
2.12.2.1 Completing the Validation Dialog When Four Eyes Is

Enabled
w Four Eyes authentication is enabled.
w You have made changes to a validated object, and the Validation Required
dialog box displays.
– For objects with a validation profile of Monitored, have a supervisor with
privileges enter his or her user name and password. Then click OK.
– For objects with a validation profile of Enabled, have a supervisor with
privileges enter his or her user name and password, and then enter or
select a comment that explains the reason for the change. Then click OK.
– For objects with a validation profile of Supervised, enter your user
password, and then have a supervisor with privileges enter his or her user
name and password. Enter or select a comment that explains the reason
for the change, and then click OK.
a The system records the changes in the Log Viewer.
2.12.2.2 Completing the Validation Dialog When Four Eyes Is Not

Enabled
w You have changed or commanded a validated object, and the Validation
Required dialog box displays.
– For objects with a validation profile of Enabled, enter or select a comment
that explains the reason for the change. Then click OK.
– For objects with a validation profile of Supervised, enter your user
password, and then enter or select a comment that explains the reason for
the change. Then click OK.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 478 of 709 169 | 352

a The system records the changes in the Log Viewer.
170 | 352 Page 479 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
3 Operating Reference
3.1 System Manager

This section provides background information relating to the System Manager
window. For related procedures, see the step-by-step [➙ 22] section.
3.1.1 Overview of System Manager

This section provides reference and background information for using the System
Manager window. For related procedures, see Working with System Manager
[➙ 22].
System Manager Workspace

System Manager is a multi-pane window for navigating, monitoring, and controlling
all the components and subsystems of your site. For example, you can inspect
properties and states of objects, send commands, browse the architecture of the
installation, consult floor plan graphics, and so on. A typical layout has a Selection
pane on the left where you can locate and select system objects from a
hierarchical tree view, and multiple working panes on the right that display object
properties, commands, and associated applications based on the current selection.
2
1 Selection pane. Typically contains System Browser, for locating and selecting system
objects in a hierarchical tree view. A drop-down menu lets you switch between different
tree views (for example, Management View, Application View, or other customizable
views). Your selection here is propagated to the Primary pane on the right, and to the
Contextual pane below it.
At the bottom of this pane, the Recently Viewed stacked tab lets you access the recent
views navigation option. This lets you return to a previously visited view in the Primary
pane.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 480 of 709 171 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
2 Primary pane. Contains one or more tabs associated with the object you selected in the
Selection pane. These tabs can include:
● Textual Viewer: Displays information about the object such as its path, status, and so
on.
● Default: If the selected object has an associated default application (for example a
graphics viewer, or a tool for reporting), it displays in this tab).
If the selected object has more than one associated application, tabs corresponding to
those applications also display (for example, the Graphics Viewer displays in the Default
tab while the remote notification tool displays in the RENO Messages tab).
If you have appropriate user rights, a button is available at the top of the pane to switch
System Manager from Operating to Engineering mode to perform configuration tasks.
3 Secondary pane. Opens by default when you click on a related item, so that you can view
it without losing the current information on the Primary and Contextual panes.
4 Contextual pane. Provides additional information, actions, and resources for the object you
most recently selected (in the Selection pane, or in one of the other panes). It is divided
into two parts:
● Operation/Extended Operation tabs (left side): Lets you inspect all the properties of
the selected object, and view and execute any commands/actions available for that
object.
● Related Items tab (middle): Provides links to additional resources, such as reports or
alarm-handling procedures that are relevant to the selected object. If you click on a
related item it opens by default in the Secondary pane. You can also opt to direct
related items to the Primary pane instead.
● Detailed Log tab (right side): Lets you view a detailed history log about the selected
object, and handle the log data.
System Manager Navigation Workflows

You can interact with System Manager to perform actions and change what
currently displays in the other panes in a variety of ways. These include:
● Click on an object in the Selection or Secondary pane to propagate its
information, properties and commands to the Primary and Contextual panes.
● Click on the secondary header of a pane to select the corresponding object in
the Selection pane.
● Right-click on an object (or group of objects) and choose whether to propagate
(send) its information to the Primary or Secondary pane.
● Click on an object in the Related Items tab to open it in the Secondary (or
Primary) pane.
● Drag-and-drop objects from the Selection or Contextual pane to perform certain
tasks.
● Click to open the Navigation bar.
Primary Navigation Workflow

The following is a typical workflow that illustrates how the different System
Manager panes work together:
1. Select an object in the Selection pane (1). See Selecting an Object in System
Browser [➙ 25].
a Information and commands for that object display in the Primary pane and
in the Contextual pane (2). You can immediately monitor and control the
selected object.
2. Click the Primary pane to select a new object (3).
a The Contextual pane updates to let you monitor and control the new
selection.
172 | 352 Page 481 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
3. Click one of the links in the Related Items list (4) to open it in the Secondary (5)
(or Primary) pane. This provides additional information or resources relevant to
the selected object.
4. Continue making selections, in both the Primary and Secondary pane, to
immediately view the associated information and commands in the Contextual
pane.
3
2
5
1
Drag-and-drop Workflow
The following is a typical workflow that illustrates how to associate two system
objects using manual selection and drag-and-drop.
1. In the Selection pane, select the desired System Browser view (1) (see
Selecting Views [➙ 28]). For example, Application View.
a The System Browser tree updates to displays the selected view.
2. Navigate the tree to select the object (2) you want to work with, for example
Activity Log.
3. Select the Manual Navigation check box (3) to freeze the Primary pane (in this
example, Reports > Activity Log).
4. Drag and drop the selected object (4) (in this example, Address Book) to the
reports area.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 482 of 709 173 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
NOTE:
System Browser supports drag-and-drop of single or multiple objects from any of
the views—including the Search Result view. You can cancel a dragging
operation by pressing the ESC key or by dragging the objects back to the original
view (or other no-drop zone) and dropping them.
Operating and Engineering Mode

When you log onto Desigo CC , System Manager starts in Operating mode. This is
the mode typically used by operators during the day-to-day running of the Desigo
CC management station. Configuring the system instead requires switching over to
Engineering mode.
Operating Mode
In Operating mode, you can monitor and control the facility, for example by
verifying site statuses, handling alarms, checking graphics, generating reports, and
so on. If you have appropriate user rights, you can also perform some limited
configuration tasks (for example, editing graphics, schedules, and so on) in
Operating mode.
174 | 352 Page 483 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
1 2 3
Figure 16: System Manager - Operating Mode
1 System Manager Operating mode is indicated by a light blue color.
2 Depending on the object selected in System Browser, the Primary pane displays only the
Textual Viewer tab or the Textual Viewer and other tabs. Each tab gives access to the
related operating application.
3 The Operating button is available only if you have access rights for Engineering mode;
otherwise, it does not display.
If available, this button lets you toggle System Manager between Operating mode and
Engineering mode.
Engineering Mode
Engineering mode is a feature of Desigo CC that enables authorized technicians to
configure a project. In Engineering mode, the Primary pane of System Manager
presents all the tools for configuring the site project, including import/export
capabilities.
If you have the appropriate permission (System Management application rights set
for your user group under Security), the Primary pane of System Manager displays
an button that you can use to switch to Engineering mode.
You can click the button to switch the system back to Operating
mode and check whether the configurations you made work correctly.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 484 of 709 175 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
Figure 17: System Manager - Engineering Mode
NOTE:
The application rights can only be changed in Engineering mode. So if you do not
have engineering rights, these can only be enabled for you by another user who
already has engineering rights. After this happens, the Operating/Engineering
button will display in System Manager.
To fully configure a site project you may also require a special Engineering Mode
License, which temporarily gives access to the whole software’s functionality.
Navigation Bar
The Navigation bar displays at the top of System Manager and allows you to
navigate the system without having to make selections in System Browser (see
Browse and Select Objects with the Navigation Bar [➙ 26]). It contains a set of
icons, and a Breadcrumbs path that shows your current location as a series of links
separated by arrows.
The Breadcrumbs path in the Navigation bar functions like a condensed version of
System Browser, without the search capabilities. The selections you make in the
Breadcrumbs area are reflected in System Browser. The opposite is also true: the
selections you make in System Browser are reflected in the Breadcrumbs area.
176 | 352 Page 485 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
Navigation Bar Icons

Name Description
Back Let you quickly return to recently-viewed selections. See Revisit

Forward Recent Selections from the Navigation Bar [➙ 27].
History Displays a list of your 20 most recently viewed selections with the
current selection highlighted with a checkmark and displayed
in the Primary pane.
Favorite location Jumps to a user-selectable view; when you set a favorite location
the system will store it and use it as the initial selection when you
first open System Manager. When switching-over to a new user,
that user's Favorite location will be used as the initial selection.
See Set a Favorite Location in System Manager [➙ 27].
Recently Viewed
Recently Viewed is a navigation aid located in the Selection pane of the System
Manager window. It lets you quickly return to a recently-visited view in the Primary
pane. For instructions, see Revisit Recent Selections from Recently Viewed [➙ 27].
To access Recently Viewed, click its stacked tab at the bottom of the Selection
pane. You will see a history of the 20 most recent views in the Primary pane,
displayed as either thumbnails (snapshots) or links (3). Click a thumbnail or link (1)
to jump back to that view in the Primary pane, or use scroll icons (Newer)
(Older) (2) to move backward and forward among the recent views.
2 3
System Manager Troubleshooting

This section provides general troubleshooting information about System Manager.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 486 of 709 177 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
System Manager Does Not Display

If System Manager is not currently visible in the main work area of the system
screen, you can display it as follows:
1. If the Help window is currently open, close it by clicking in its title bar.
(Otherwise, the Help window always stays in the foreground and prevents
others from displaying).
l If System Manager does not already display, do one of the following:

– From the Windows taskbar: Click the Desigo CC taskbar icon labeled
System Manager.
– From the Desigo CC system Menu, select Active tasks and click the
thumbnail of the System Manager window.
NOTE: If you created additional System Manager windows-–for example,
System Manager(2), System Manager(3), and so on—you can access
these in the same way.
System Browser Does Not Display

System Manager is open but System Browser does not display.
1. In the System Manager window header, select a pane layout that includes the
Selection pane: , , or .
2. In the Selection pane footer, click the System Browser stacked tab.
Cannot Resize Any of the Panes

In the System Manager window header, check the lock pane layout icon. If it is
active (undimmed), it means the layout is locked and cannot be changed.
To unlock the pane layout, click the lock pane layout icon so that it become
dimmed.
3.1.2 System Browser

System Browser displays objects in the building control system through various
views, which you can select from a drop-down list. System Browser also supports
searching and filtering of objects, displaying names and descriptions of objects,
selecting single and multiple objects, and dragging objects into Trends, Schedules,
and Reports. The System Browser hierarchy updates dynamically to reflect
changes at the system level.
For procedures and workflows, see the step-by-step [➙ 28] section.
Searching and Filtering

The Search area consists of an editable Search list box, a Search button, a drop-
down list arrow, a Filter Search icon, and a Save Search icon.
Searching helps you quickly find objects in the currently selected view. You can
perform searches on either names or descriptions but not on a combination of both
names and descriptions. To start a search, you enter a search string in the Search
list box, using wildcards if desired, and then either click Search or press
ENTER. See the Wildcards section for more information about them.
178 | 352 Page 487 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
After the search results display, you can save the search by clicking Save As ,
entering a name in the Save Search field, and then clicking Save . The system
saves the search to your own local user profile, and the search then becomes
available only to you. You access saved searches by clicking the drop-down list
arrow in the Search list box.
Filtering helps you limit the number of objects shown during a search, while also
providing an efficient way to find objects without scrolling through the entire tree or
without having to remember which node an object belongs to. You access the
filtering fields by clicking Filter Search . You can then filter the objects by
selecting individual or multiple building control disciplines, sub disciplines, types,
sub types, or an alias. Additionally, the Other drop-down list box allows you to filter
objects for out of scan, override protection, and validation profile settings.
Selecting the Search within selection check box applies your filter selections only
to the current node selection in the System Browser tree. Clicking the Search
button starts the search and displays the results of your filter selections.
Search results for both the searching and filtering features are sorted by path,
using grouping, and by the name within each group. For example, a search for
objects located in the east wing of the 92nd floor in your building could produce
results similar to the following:
Willis Tower\Floor 92\East Wing\

EastWingTemp
EastWingDailyTrend
EastWingWeeklySchedule
EastWingGraphic
Wildcards
Two wildcard characters are supported in System Browser—the asterisk (*) and
the question mark (?). Each functions differently. The asterisk wildcard serves as a
placeholder for zero or more characters. The question mark wildcard serves as a
placeholder for exactly one character only. Therefore, each wildcard serves
different purposes.
● * (asterisk): Allows you to add zero or more characters to your search criteria.
For example, "a*" matches and displays, “a”, "ab", "abc" and "abcd".
● ? (question mark): Allows you to add one character to your search. For
example, "ab?" matches and displays "abc", but does not match or display "a",
"ab" and "abcd".
Display Modes for Objects

System Browser supports four modes for displaying objects. Show Description is
the default display mode the first time you log on to the system with new
credentials. After you log on, you can select your preferred mode, which the
system saves for your next session. The mode you select affects the way the
objects appear throughout the various panes in System Manager. The following
table summarizes the four modes with display examples:
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 488 of 709 179 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
Display Modes for Objects

Display Mode Example
Show Description Air Handler Unit 1
Show Description [Name] Air Handler Unit 1 [AHU1]
Show Name AHU1
Show Name [Description] AHU1 [Air Handler Unit 1]
Views
You can select from different views of the object types in the building control
system, depending on how your system is set up. Selecting a view does not
change the physical makeup of the system. The views merely represent
convenient and different ways of looking at the system. Default views include
Application View and Management View. The currently selected view is saved from
session to session. In other words, the view that is selected when you close the
software is the view that the system restores the next time you open the control
software. Your last highlighted object selection in the System Browser tree, and the
state of the expanded and collapsed folders, are not saved and restored from
session to session.
Making Object Selections

System Browser offers you the following two methods for making objects the
primary selection in System Manager:
● Automatic Selection (default): For selecting a single-object, you click the object,
and it then automatically becomes the new primary selection in System
Manager. For selecting multiple objects, you press and hold the CTRL key or
the SHIFT key while highlighting the objects. Upon releasing either key, the
objects become the new primary selection in System Manager.
● Manual Selection: First, check the Manual Navigation box, then highlight the
objects in one of three ways: 1) Clicking the object, 2) Pressing and holding the
CTRL key while clicking multiple objects, or 3) pressing and holding the SHIFT
key while clicking the beginning and ending range of objects. To make the
highlighted objects the primary selection for System Manager, you can right-
click and choose Send to the Primary Pane, or click the Send button. When
selecting a single object, you can also double-click the object to make it the
primary selection.
Dragging-and-Dropping
System Browser supports drag-and-drop of single or multiple objects from any of
the views—including the Search Result view—to Trends, Schedules, and Reports.
You can cancel a dragging operation by pressing the ESC key or by dragging the
objects back to the original view (or another no-drop zone) and then dropping
them.
3.1.2.1 System Browser Workspace

System Browser displays objects in the building control system through various
views, and also supports searching and filtering.
180 | 352 Page 489 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
6
1
2 7
3
4 8
Figure 18:
System Browser Workspace

Name Description
1 Views List box Allows you to select the view of the system by clicking the drop-
down arrow.
2 Search List box Allows you to search for objects in the currently selected view.
You can perform searches on either names or descriptions but
not on a combination of both names and descriptions. The box
consists of an editable field where you enter search strings,
including wildcards. You can perform a search by name or
description, depending on the setting of the Display mode. You
start a search by entering text and then either pressing ENTER
or clicking the Search icon. The matching results display in the
list area. The drop-down arrow displays a list of your saved
searches.
3 Display Mode List box Provides four options to display objects: Description, Description
+ Name, Name, and Name + Description. When you choose to
display an object’s Description + Name, the description appears
first, followed by the name. When you choose to display an
object’s Name + Description, the name appears first, followed by
the description. The option you select affects the way the object
displays throughout the various panes in System Manager.
4 Manual Navigation One of two methods for making objects the primary selection in
check box System Manager. By default, automatic selection is enabled,
which means that any object you select in System Browser
automatically becomes the new primary selection for the system.
If you want to scroll through the System Browser tree and
highlight an object without making it the primary selection, check
the Manual Navigation box, and then single-click the object. If
you then decide that you want to make the highlighted selection
the new primary selection, you can do one of the following:
● Right-click and select either Send to the Primary Pane, or
Send to the Secondary Pane.
● Click the Send button (sends to Primary pane only)
● Double-click (for single-object selection only, and sends to
Primary pane only)
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 490 of 709 181 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
5 System browser tree Displays system objects in a hierarchy.

6 Filtering icon Displays the Filtering Search area, where you can limit your
search. You filter the objects by selecting individual or multiple
building control disciplines, subdisciplines, types, subtypes, and
aliases (which are case sensitive). Additionally, the Other drop-
down list box allows you to filter for out of scan, override
protection, and validation profile settings.
Clicking the X in the Alias field clears only the Alias field. Clicking
the Clear button clears the Discipline, Type, Other, and Alias
fields.
Selecting the Search within selection check box applies your filter
selections only to the current node selection in the System
Browser tree.
Clicking the Search button starts the search and displays the
results of your filter selections.
7 Save icon Allows you to save a search entry for later use. Saving a search
does not save the node location at the time of the save, only the
filtering selections. This applies even if you select the Search
within selection check box. You access saved searches by
selecting the drop-down arrow in the Search list box.
8 Send button The Send button works in conjunction with the Manual Navigation
check box. Once you select the check box and highlight an
object, click the Send button and the object becomes the new
primary selection for the system.
3.1.3 Textual Viewer

Textual Viewer displays the details for one or more objects in the building control
system. For example, after you select one or more objects from System Browser,
Textual Viewer displays their common properties in list form. Your selections can
be either implicit or explicit. An implicit selection occurs when you click a parent
object that has child objects associated with it. In this case, Textual Viewer
displays the parent object in bold, followed by the child objects beneath it. An
explicit selection occurs when you click a parent object that does not have child
objects associated with it. You can sort the information in the various columns by
selecting the column headings, and you can rearrange the order of the columns by
dragging them to the desired location. Additionally, you can use the Customize
Columns tool to hide or show columns. The tool is available by right-clicking on a
column heading, a row, or the scroll bars.
For procedures and workflows, see the step-by-step [➙ 30] section.
Making a New Primary Selection

Making a new primary selection in Textual Viewer is an efficient alternative to
manually scrolling through the System Browser tree to look for an item. It is also
quicker than performing a formal search for an object using the Search feature.
Using the Double-Click Function

The double-click function gives you the ability to investigate building control system
information in increasing detail. For example, if you select a building in System
Browser, Textual Viewer displays it, along with each of the floors of the building.
When you double-click one of the floors, Textual Viewer displays the floor, along
with the sensors that are installed on that floor. If you then double-click one of the
sensors, Textual Viewer displays the sensor. If a graphic is associated with the
sensor, a graphic displays. If not, text displays.
182 | 352 Page 491 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
3.1.3.1 Textual Viewer Workspace
Textual Viewer Workspace

Name Description
1 Object Displays a list of objects in the system. A bolded object indicates
a parent object with associated children objects.
2 Title bar Displays the name of the object with the primary selection. If you
select multiple objects, the name of the first object you selected
will display. If you select a parent object, you implicitly select the
children objects belonging to the parent as well. In this case, the
parent object displays in the title bar.
3 Path Displays the location of the object in the building control system.
4 Name Displays the name of the object.
5 Alias Displays a unique name within the system for an object.
6 Type Displays the type of object selected such as Smoke Detector,
Room, Graphic and so on.
7 Subtype Displays the subtype of object selected such as Multi-state,

Binary Input, and so on.
8 Validation Profile Displays one of three scenarios for validation: Disabled, Enabled,
or Supervised.
9 Out of Scan Displays False, which means the communications driver is
reading the object, or True, which means the communications
driver is not reading the object..
10 Value Displays the current value of the object.
11 Image Displays an image associated with the status indicator.
12 Status Displays the status of the object such as Normal, or the
consolidated status of the object such as Alarm, Fault, or
Technical Exclusion.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 492 of 709 183 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
3.1.3.2 Customize Columns Dialog Box

1 2 3
Name Description
1 Available Columns Displays a list of columns not currently shown in Textual Viewer.
2 Movement arrows Allow you to move columns to control whether they are hidden or
shown.
3 Visible Columns Displays a list of columns that will show in Textual Viewer.
4 Selection buttons Move Up/Move Down: Allow you to rearrange the order in which
columns display.
OK: Allows you to accept the changes you have made.
Cancel: Allows you to cancel changes you have made.
3.1.4 Operation
The Operation tab allows you to display and change the current state of an object’s
properties in your building control system. The Operation tab is designed for the
most common daily tasks. Access to objects is based upon the object privileges
and privilege profiles set for you by your system administrator.
For procedures or workflows, see the step-by-step [➙ 31] section.
3.1.4.1 Workspace
The Operation tab displays the name of the currently selected object(s), a list of
properties associated with the object(s), the current value of the properties, and
command buttons for initiating commands on commandable properties.
184 | 352 Page 493 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
Operation Workspace
Name Description
1 Property name Displays the name of one or more properties associated with the
selected objects.
If you select multiple objects of the same type in the system, the
icon next to the property name indicates this with a triangular
symbol in the lower right-hand corner. Clicking this symbol
expands the table row to show all of the selected objects of the
same type that share this property. You can then change all
properties for the selected objects at the same time.
2 Object name The name of the selected object. If you selected more than one
object to display, the default object name is Multi-Select.
3 Current value Displays the current value of each property.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 494 of 709 185 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
4 Command button Displays the name of a command that you can initiate. Some
commands are sent immediately after you initiate them by
releasing the command button. Others require you to enter
arguments before they can be sent. When a command requires
arguments (additional fields requiring information to continue with
the command), the property row will expand after you click the
command button. You then complete the additional fields and
click the appropriate button (Send, Command, Change, Ack, and
so on).
Some object properties support grouping of command buttons
that occupy the space of one button, with a drop-down list of your
choices. The button you choose from the drop-down list becomes
the new commandable button in the group.
5 Parameter When you initiate a command that requires additional
parameters, the system prompts you to enter one or more
parameters prior to sending the command. You must complete all
required parameters before sending the command. A parameter
field that displays a red border around it means that the value for
that property is invalid. If that is the case, you will need to enter a
valid value before commanding the property.
6 Command Feedback Displays the progress and then the result of a command once
area you execute a command. During the command, the Command
Feedback area displays Command in Progress, along with
information about how many objects have been commanded and
how many will be commanded all together. After a command
execution is complete, successful commands display Property
Name successful. Failed commands display Command
failed.
7 Send button The Send button displays only for commands that require
additional arguments. Clicking this button sends a command after
you have entered all required arguments.
3.1.4.2 Properties and Commanding

You change the current state of a property by commanding it. Once you command
a property, the status of the command displays for the selected object. If the
command fails, the reason for the failure displays so that you can take further
action.
Examples of common commands:
● Acknowledge
● Change command priority
● Coldstart
● Enable/disable
● On/Off
● In service/Out of service
● Override/Release
● Reset value for equipment operating hours
● Set a new point value
● Upload
Display of Properties
Properties display in one of two ways—automatically or manually. They display
automatically when a property goes into an off-normal state, and they display
manually when you select an object in the system.
Why Command a Property?

You command a property to change its current state. For example, you might
command to initiate an action, enable or disable a property, acknowledge or reset
the status of a property, or override or release an override of a control program.
186 | 352 Page 495 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
Commanding a property is also useful under these conditions:

● User action is required to manage an emergency
● When an alarm indicates a malfunctioning device
● When performing preventive maintenance
● To save energy
● When managing operating hours totalization
Example of Commanding
At your facility, you want to change the temperature from 68 to 73°F (20 to
22.78°C) in a conference room on your floor. Using your building control software,
you send a command to change the Present Value of the Temperature Setpoint
object of the room to override the normal system control.
3.1.4.3 Command Priorities and Priority Arrays

Some objects in your building control system use specialized command priorities to
determine whether an operator or a particular control program is in control.
Command Priority
The Present Values of six object types in your building control system are based
on a command priority and established in a hierarchy that ranks from highest (1 –
Manual Life Safety) to lowest (16 - Available). The six object types are Analog
Output, Analog Value, Binary Output, Binary Value, Multi-State Output, and Multi-
State Value. The hierarchy helps determine which source has priority over another
to change the value of an object. To command one of these object types, you—or
an application—must have a command priority equal to or greater than the current
command priority of the object.
Command Priority Array

The Command Priority Array displays commands that have been issued at various
priority levels. Users and applications can set or relinquish (release) commands for
a commandable object. If the Present Value of an object has a Command Priority
Array, the appropriate priority level is commanded or relinquished when you
execute a command. If the Present Value of an object does not have a Command
Priority Array, the system overwrites the present value with the newly commanded
value. You can command or relinquish any priority level that you have access to,
based on your user privileges.
The following table shows the Command Priority Array:
Priority Level Priority Name

1 Manual Life Safety
2 Automatic Life Safety
3 Available
4 Available
5 Critical Equipment Control
6 Minimum On/Off
7 Available
8 Manual Operator
9 Available
10 Available
11 Available
12 Available
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 496 of 709 187 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
13 Available
14 Available
15 Available
16 Available
3.1.4.4 Summary Status

In order to simplify the system display and highlight the most important information,
the system sometimes combines properties into a single Summary Status property.
The Summary Status property displays the highest priority status that is currently
active for an object. For example, if an object has an active Fire Alarm and Fire
Fault, the Fire Alarm would be displayed in the Summary Status.
3.1.4.5 Multiple-Object Commanding

With multiple-object commanding, you are not really commanding objects at all.
Instead, you are commanding one property type, Present Value for instance, for
more than one object of the same type.
If you select multiple objects of the same type, for example, Analog Output, the
icon next to the property name indicates this with a triangular symbol in the lower-
right-hand corner. Clicking this symbol expands the table row to show all of the
selected objects of the same type that share this property. You can then change
(command) all Present Value properties for the selected objects at the same time.
You can command a maximum of 250 objects.
In the following graphic, the system indicates that you have selected multiple
objects by displaying a triangular symbol in the lower right-hand corner of the
Present Value icon.
The following graphic shows that you have clicked the triangular icon. The system
now displays two additional rows, which represent two selected objects of the
same type.
3.1.4.6 Propagation
Propagation means relaying Common Status information up the building control
system's hierarchical tree. Information that is relayed up the hierarchy as a result of
a change in the Common Status of an object is called status propagation.
Propagation is based on the parent-child-grandchild model. Each object in the
system can have one or more parent objects and one or more child objects. Each
child in the system can simultaneously propagate multiple active Common Status
properties to a parent, such as alarm, fault, or technical exclusion.
The following table shows propagation from two different viewpoints.
Logical View of the System Physical View of the System
Building (parent) A building node (parent)
Floor in the building (child) Field panel (child)
Room on the floor (grandchild) Point (grandchild)
Temperature sensor in the room (great- -

grandchild)
188 | 352 Page 497 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
3.1.5 Related Items

This section provides reference and background information for objects that are
related to system objects. For procedures or workflows, see the step-by-step
[➙ 32] section.
3.1.5.1 Overview of Related Items

The Related Items tab displays objects related to the currently selected object.
Each related item is assigned a group name that represents the type of the
object—for example, graphics, trends, reports, or schedules.
Navigation
You can navigate to a view of each related item by clicking on the item. For
instance, if you click a management station object, such as a graphic, Graphics
Viewer displays the referenced graphic object. If you click an external item, such as
a PDF file, Adobe Reader opens with the referenced file displayed. Other items
that you can access include point types, Word documents, Excel documents, and
URLs.
Display of Items
The Related Items tab displays the items used for most daily operations. Related
Items contains two sets of buttons. You can toggle the first set of buttons, Links
and Icons, which allows you to switch between text views or small images of the
items in the list. The Links view is more compact than the Icons view, so more
related items can be displayed with this view than with the Icons view. The display
mode that is currently selected in System Browser determines how text displays.
For example, text might be displayed as description, name, description plus name,
or name plus description.
The second set of buttons, Group and Ungroup, allows you to switch between
categories or flat-list views of the items in the list. The Group view shows items
arranged by object type (analog input, digital output, schedules, graphics, reports,
PDFs, Word files, web links, etc.) and is expanded by default, but which you can
collapse as well. When the Group view is collapsed, the Links and Icons views are
disabled. The Ungroup view displays all related items without displaying their
corresponding group names.
If you select one object from System Browser, Related Items displays all links
associated with that object. If you select two or more objects from System Browser,
Related Items displays only those links that all selected objects have in common.
For example, you select three objects in System Browser with the following links:
Object Links
EastWingLabTemp Monthly Energy Consumption Report

Third Floor Heating/Cooling Schedule
Third Floor Temperature Trend
WestWingOfficeTemp Monthly Energy Consumption Report

Third Floor Temperature Trend
NorthWingOfficeTemp Monthly Energy Consumption Report

The result of this selection is that Related Items displays only the Monthly Energy
Consumption Report and the Third Floor Heating/Cooling Schedule links because
they are common to all three objects. The Third Floor Temperature Trend link does
not display because it is not common to all three selected objects. To view the
Third Floor Temperature Trend link in this example, you would need to select either
the EastWingLabTemp object or the WestWingLabTemp object.
The Related Items tab displays objects related to the currently selected object.
Each related item is assigned a group name that represents the object's type—for
example, graphics, reports, or schedules.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 498 of 709 189 | 352

Operating Reference
3 System Manager
Navigation
You can navigate to a view of each related item by clicking on the item. For
instance, if you click a management station object, such as a graphic, Graphics
Viewer displays the referenced graphic object. If you click an external item, such as
a PDF file, Adobe Reader opens with the referenced file displayed. Other items
that you can access include point types, Word documents, Excel documents, and
URLs.
Display of Items
The Related Items tab displays the items used for most daily operations. Related
Items contains two sets of buttons. You can toggle the first set of buttons, Links
and Icons, which allows you to switch between text views or small images of the
items in the list. The Links view is more compact than the Icons view, so more
related items can be displayed with this view than with the Icons view. The display
mode that is currently selected in System Browser determines how text displays.
For example, text might be displayed as description, name, description plus name,
or name plus description.
The second set of buttons, Group and Ungroup, allows you to switch between
categories or flat-list views of the items in the list. The Group view shows items
arranged by object type (analog input, digital output, schedules, graphics, reports,
PDFs, Word files, web links, etc.) and is expanded by default, but which you can
collapse as well. When the Group view is collapsed, the Links and Icons views are
disabled. The Ungroup view displays all related items without displaying their
corresponding group names.
If you select one object from System Browser, Related Items displays all links
associated with that object. If you select two or more objects from System Browser,
Related Items displays only those links that all selected objects have in common.
For example, you select three objects in System Browser with the following links:
Object Links
EastWingLab Monthly Energy Consumption Report

WestWingOffice Monthly Energy Consumption Report

NorthWingOffice Monthly Energy Consumption Report

The result of this selection is that Related Items displays only the Monthly Energy
Consumption Report and the Third Floor Heating/Cooling Schedule links because
they are common to all three objects.
Maintenance of User Preferences

Related Items stores the settings of the Group and Ungroup views and the Links
and Icons views for each object that you interact with so that you do not need to
continually adjust your settings as you navigate from one object to the next.
Deleting and Re-adding Points

Be careful about deleting and then re-adding points in your system since this can
break the links in Related Items.
For example, you select a point on a graphic, and the graphic itself displays as one
of the links for that point in Related Items. If you delete the point from the field
panel, and then re-add it (re-import it using the Auto Discovery feature), the graphic
will display the point, but the related items for the point will be lost. If you select the
re-added point in System Browser, the graphic will not display.
In the case of graphics, you can restore the broken links using the Graphics
Consistency Checker diagnostic tool.
If you delete points relating to camera devices, External Documents, and
Management Station Schedules, your links will be permanently lost.
190 | 352 Page 499 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
System Manager
3
3.1.5.2 Related Items Workspace

Related Items allows you to switch between small images and text views of the
items in the list, or between categories and flat-list views.
Related Items Items Workspace

Name Description
1 Links/Icons buttons Clicking the Links button displays items as text links. The display
mode that is currently selected in System Browser determines
how text displays. For example, text will be displayed as
description, name, description plus name, or name plus
description.
Clicking the Icons button displays items as icon links.
2 Group/Ungroup buttons If text links are displayed, clicking the Group button displays text
links by categories such as analog inputs, analog outputs,
schedules, reports, PDFs, Word files, and Web links.
If icons are displayed, clicking the Group button displays icon
links by categories.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 500 of 709 191 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Graphics Viewer
3.2 Graphics Viewer
This section provides background information for displaying, view, and command
graphics in your facility. For related procedures or workflows, see the step-by-step
section.
3.2.1 Graphics Viewer Overview

The Graphics Viewer is the component of the Graphics application that allows you
to view the graphics representing your facility or equipment. It is where you can
change the current state of an object’s properties from a graphic, by using the
floating Status and Commands windows. You can filter your view of a graphic by
discipline, section, or you can zoom in and out for greater detail or for a birds-eye
overview.
For specific reference information, select from the topics below as needed:
Coverage Area Overview

Desigo CC allows you to manually associate objects to one-another. For example,
you can associate a fire detector (or any other object type) to a video camera or to
a document. Then, whenever the fire detector is selected in the System Browser
tree, the related video camera or document displays in the Related Items tab. The
Coverage Area feature provides a graphical way to achieve the same result.
Desigo CC graphics can contain cameras or monitoring devices to which objects,
such as fire sensors, ceiling sprinklers, temperature sensors, etc. are associated.
For example, you have a graphic of an office space that includes a camera that is
monitoring the fire sensors in that room. In this example, the fire sensors monitored
by the camera, are in the coverage area of the device.
The coverage area contains the monitored objects. When you move your cursor
over the coverage area, a tooltip displays the coverage area's object reference with
the total number of monitored objects. If you move your cursor over an object in the
coverage area, a tooltip displays the object’s name or description. The background
color of the coverage area varies depending on the configuration of the project.
When you initially load a graphic, the coverage area of a camera is not visible in
the Graphics Viewer. You must toggle the Coverage Area icon from the Graphics
Viewer toolbar to view the coverage area of any monitoring devices on the graphic.
The Operation and Extended Operation tabs display the device properties when
the coverage area is visible. The Related Items tab lists any coverage areas that
are associated with the graphic under the heading that is named after the type of
192 | 352 Page 501 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Graphics Viewer
3
the monitoring object. For example, if the monitoring object is a camera, the
heading displays Camera in the Related Items tab.
Graphics Related Folders

Graphics related folders are displayed in the Application View and Management
View of the System Browser. Existing graphics associated with your project are
listed and viewed from the Application View tree, under the Graphics application.
There are three types of graphic folders: Graphic, Symbols, and Graphic
Templates.
● Application View > Graphics: Displays all project graphics (*.CCG) files.
● Management View > Project* > System Settings > Libraries > [Appropriate
Sub-Library] > Symbols: Displays all the related Symbols (.CCS) files
associated with the selected library.
● Management View > Project* > System Settings > Libraries > [Appropriate
Sub-Library] > Graphic Templates – Displays all the related symbols (*.CCT)
files associated with the selected library.
*If your System Browser display mode is set to Show Name, you will see
Management View instead of Project.
Objects and Navigation in Graphics

The Graphics Viewer allows you to display dynamic graphics of your building
control system. Within System Manager, you navigate the various views of System
Browser to select the objects you want to display in the Graphics Viewer. System
Browser displays only the objects in the system that you have access to, based on
your user profile and privileges.
Primary and Secondary Selections

When you select a graphics object from System Browser, the Graphics Viewer
displays the representative graphic. The selected object is considered the primary
selection. The object properties also display in the Operation or Extended
Operation tab. The graphic that has the primary selection displays the name of the
graphic and the object name according to your Display selection in the System
Browser.
Additionally, the properties of the primary selection display in the Operation or
Extended Operation, and the Detailed Log tabs. The Related Items tab displays
objects related to the currently selected object. Each related item is assigned a
group name that represents the object's type, for example, graphics, trends,
reports, or schedules.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 502 of 709 193 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Graphics Viewer
If you click a Symbol on a graphic or, the referenced object of the Symbol becomes
the secondary selection, while the primary selection remains the same in System
Browser. The following figure illustrates the primary selection in System Browser,
Analog Output 1.
In the Graphics Viewer, the Operation tab changes its display to correspond to the
new, secondary selection. System Browser displays the original, primary selection,
to show your starting point.
194 | 352 Page 503 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Graphics Viewer
3
When you select an object from System Browser that is associated with a graphic,
the Graphics Viewer displays the representative graphic and the object’s
associated Symbol on the graphic is selected. As a result, the Operation tab
displays the object properties to correspond to the selection.
Double-clicking a Symbol on a graphic makes the referenced object associated
with the Symbol the primary selection in System Browser and all workflows update
accordingly.
Operating and Engineering Modes in the Graphics Viewer

Graphics Viewer: Operating and Engineering Mode
Graphics Viewer window mode Graphics Viewer application behavior
Operating ● The Graphics Viewer displays:

– In the Default tab.
– The Textual Viewer tab displays.
● Can create, open, and edit graphic files.
Engineering ● The Graphics Viewer displays:

– In the Graphics tab.
– The Object Configurator tab displays.
● Can create, open, and edit graphic files.
NOTE: You must have the appropriate access rights to work in the
Graphics Editor.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 504 of 709 195 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Graphics Viewer
Point Centered Display Mode

Point Centered Display mode ensures that a selected data point or group of data
points will always be centered in the Graphics Viewer.
For example, you might be required to put a data point in this mode if you are
monitoring a fire system in a chemical manufacturing facility with key sensors that
must always be viewed. Enabling Point Centered Display mode in such a scenario
ensures that the data point does not blend in with and become lost among
surrounding graphics. Or, you might be required to put the Graphics Viewer in this
mode, if, for example, you are monitoring a fire system in a pharmaceutical
manufacturing facility with key areas that must always be viewed. You can also
enable the Group Center mode, to ensure that the parent and all children of the
selected point are always selected; therefore, the group of points does not blend in
with and become lost among any surrounding graphics. In Group mode, siblings
are all data points with the same parent as the selected data point. Those siblings
are retrieved from the currently selected view when the selection in the System
Browser changes. This mean that selecting the same data point in different views,
such as Logical or Management View, could return different siblings.
To implement the feature, you select a data point object in System Browser. The
System Manager application then opens the Graphics Viewer and displays the
point’s default graphic view, depth, and graphic associated with it. You then select
the Point Centered Display mode button from the Graphics Viewer toolbar to center
the point in the viewport. The feature is disabled by selecting the button again.
While in Point Centered Display mode, you cannot pan the object. However, you
can select any zoom factor without affecting centering in the viewport or you can
select another symbol to shift the focus to another object or Symbol.
Scopes and Graphic Objects

Scope is a grouping of system objects, or nodes with specific scope definitions
used for the purpose of assigning access rights. You can create scopes and assign
access rights to any of the graphic nodes in the Graphics system tree. For more
information, see Scopes.
You can apply scopes to the following graphic nodes:
● Graphics
● Symbols
● Templates
● Manual and Automatic Pages
Data Point Access Privileges

Data points are integrated into a graphic by associating them with elements. These
data points and elements can be evaluated by creating expressions that result in a
graphic that allows you to view dynamic values of a facility, building, or piece of
equipment. Data points therefore always display using the elements they are
associated with.
Depending on your access rights which are set in the System Manager certain data
points can be inaccessible. In this case, if one or more data points associated with
an element is inaccessible, then the associated element will not display in the
graphic while in Runtime mode or in the Graphics Viewer. However, the parent of
an element, such as a symbol instance or a group, and any other associated
children (elements), are not affected and will display on the graphic. This is
considered the Hide-Rule for data points in a graphic.
The Hide-Rule does not apply to Object References and Link References since
there are no COV subscriptions involved in these scenarios.
When a data point with an existing address is subscribed for COV’s, the data
point’s status and value are updated automatically in the Value Simulator. If the
status for the data point displays General Access Denied, the data point is
inaccessible and therefore not readable for COV subscriptions.
196 | 352 Page 505 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Graphics Viewer
3
Security and the Graphics Viewer

Access levels are the security rights users are granted to access applications and
objects in the Desigo CC software. The access levels for the Graphics Viewer,
Graphics Editor, and Graphics Library Browser are as follows:
Graphics Viewer
The access rights for the Graphics Viewer application define the user’s ability to
display a graphic or a symbol in the Graphics Viewer and in the Graphics Editor
Runtime mode.
Graphics Viewer: Security

Access If Enabled
Show You can display a graphic in the Graphics Viewer and in the Graphics Editor
Runtime mode.
Status and Commands Overview

The Status and Commands window displays on a graphic, and allows you to
display and change the current state of an object’s properties in your building
control system. Access to objects is based upon the object privileges and privilege
profiles set by the system administrator.
Display of Properties on a Graphic

Properties display on a graphic in one of two ways—automatically or manually.
● They display automatically when a property goes into an off-normal state. The
Status and Commands window displays the icons associated with the
properties in an off-normal state on the graphic. You expand the icon view to
display the detailed property information and the command options.
● The Status and Commands window displays manually when you right-click an
object in a graphic that has data points associated with it. You can display
multiple Status and Commands windows in Graphics.
When a Status and Command window displays on the graphic, a connection line
displays between the window and its associated objects on the canvas. The
connection line between the Status and Commands window and the objects
remains intact, even when the window is moved around on the canvas.
Properties and commands also display in the Operation and Extended Operation
tabs for the selected object.
For more information on commanding properties and priority arrays, see Command
Priorities and Priority Arrays.
Summary Status
In order to simplify the system display and highlight the most important information,
the system sometimes combines properties into a Summary Status property. The
Summary Status displays the highest priority status that is currently active for an
object. For example, if an object has an active Fire Alarm and Fire Fault, the Fire
Alarm displays in the Summary Status.
More About the Status and Commands Window

The Status and Commands window is a floating view that displays over an object
on the canvas, and can be moved around in the Graphics Viewer. The Status and
Commands window displays a connection line to its associated objects on the
canvas. The connection point of the connection line, anchors itself in the following
manner:
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 506 of 709 197 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Graphics Viewer
● Non-engineered elements: The connection point aligns itself to the center of

the element.
● Symbols: The connection point aligns itself to the center of the first element in
the symbol, according to the element tree.
● Customized Connection Point: You can create a connection point location by
drawing an ellipse where you want to anchor the connection point for the
symbol. In the Ellipse Descriptor field, you can enter text stating it is an Anchor
for the Connection Point. To hide the ellipse from view, either cover it up by
another element (preferred method) or disable the Visible property for the
element in the Property tree. In both cases, make sure that the ellipse is the
first element in the Symbols element tree in the Element view.
For graphics and graphic templates only, you can specify the maximum number of
connection lines to display. The default value of 65535 is used when the property
Graphics > Max Connection Lines is left blank, in which case under normal
circumstances all lines display with the Status and Commands window. If the
actual number of connection lines associated with a Status and Commands
window exceeds the number of connection lines specified in this property, then
none of the lines display.
Drag-and-Drop
The Status and Commands window is a drag source for data point properties.
When the Status and Commands window is expanded, you can drag a data point
or one of its properties from the window to any of the drop targets in the Graphics
Editor or other applications. You cannot drag-and-drop virtual data point properties,
such as those properties that display No Properties or Not Available.
● Evaluation Editor: When you drop a data point property in the Expression field
of the Graphics Editor’s Evaluation Editor, the current value of the property
displays in the Result field for the element’s property.
● Ribbon: When you drop a data point property onto the ribbon, all the graphics
associated with that data point display as tabbed graphics in the work area.
● Graphic Canvas: When you drop a data point property onto the canvas, the
associated data point symbol displays on the graphic.
For a list of the drop sources in the Graphics Editor, see the Table of Graphics
Drop Targets.
Tooltips
Tooltips are customizable properties that display as a yellow text box when you
mouse-over an element or object on the active graphic. The text box for a tooltip
contains descriptive text, the current value of the graphic object, and the names of
the associated objects based on the view selected in System Browser. When you
move your cursor over an object or element on the active graphic, an associated
tooltip displays.
Tooltips
Name Description
1 Static tooltip Descriptive text entered into the tooltip property field that is
associated with the general category in the Property Viewer.
2 Dynamic tooltip Current tooltip text based on a tooltip evaluation, and the current
field values. Evaluations are created in the Evaluation Editor.
3 Static link reference and The name and description of the file linked to the element as
link description entered in the Link Reference and Link Description fields from
the Commands category in the Property Viewer.
4 Dynamic link reference The name and description of the associated link resulting from
and link description any evaluations on the Link Reference and Link Description
fields. The text displayed depends on the current field values.
Evaluations are created in the Evaluation Editor.
5 Data point references The names of the objects and the System Browser view the
name is based on. One line entry per object.
198 | 352 Page 507 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Graphics Viewer
3
Zooming and Panning

The Graphics Viewer supports zooming and panning within the active graphic.
Zooming allows you to magnify or reduce the graphic image, and panning allows
you to move the graphic around on the canvas.
In Zooming mode, you can click and drag a rubber band rectangle around any area
of the graphic. The rectangle represents the area that will be zoomed to full view
once you release the mouse button. Pressing the ESC key cancels the rubber
band rectangle function.
3.2.2 Graphics Viewer Workspace

The components that make up the Graphics Viewer consist of a toolbar, two views
for navigating the active graphic, keyboard and mouse shortcuts, and tooltips.
Review the following topics as needed:
Graphics Viewer Toolbar

The Graphics Viewer toolbar allows you to navigate to and work with graphic
pages displayed in the Graphics Viewer. Use your cursor to select a toolbar button.
Graphics Viewer Toolbar Operating Mode

Name Description
Edit Allows you to toggle between the Graphics Viewer and the
Graphics Editor.
NOTE: Only displays if a Graphics Editor license is detected.
Next Related Item Allows you to scroll to and display the next graphical related item
associated with the selected data point in System Browser.
Only enabled if the data point has more than one related
graphical item.
Previous Related Item Allows you to scroll to and display the previous graphical related
item associated with the selected data point in System Browser.
Only enabled if the data point has more than one related
graphical item.
Zoom In (+20%) Allows you to zoom in by + 20% on the active graphic with each
mouse click.
Zoom Out (-20%) Allows you to zoom out by - 20% on the active graphic with each
mouse click.
100% Displays the active graphic at 100% magnification.
Home Returns the view of the displayed graphic to the state when the
primary selection changed.
For example, if the Next/Previous buttons have been used,
selecting Home loads the first graphical related item.
Zoom View Displays the Zoom view and allows you to zoom in on the active
graphic by adjusting the slider.
Aerial View Switches between Aerial View being visible or hidden in the
Graphics Viewer area.
Zoom Real Allows you to zoom in on the active graphic. To activate, click the
icon. To de-activate, left- click anywhere on the graphic.
Scale to fit Scales the graphic to fit in the viewing area. Once selected, the
graphic resizes itself according to window size.
Selecting the button, changing the Zoom selection, or loading
another graphic, disables the feature.
Point Centered display Moves the selected point to the center of the graphic.
mode
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 508 of 709 199 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Graphics Viewer
Fit to Secondary Allows you to calculate the depth and the viewport from the
Selection current selection.
Depths Navigation View Switches between Depths Navigation view being visible or
hidden in the Graphics Viewer area.
This view allows you to view a graphic content by depth, and by
layer, or by discipline associated with a layer.
Show Status and Allows you to enable or disable the Status and Commands
Commands pane window from displaying.
Coverage Area mode When this icon is enabled, it allows you to view the coverage
areas on the graphic.
When disabled, no coverage areas display on the graphic.
Page setup Displays the Page setup view for the current graphic.
Print Displays the Print dialog box to print the current graphic.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Below is a list of available keyboard shortcuts you can apply to the active graphic
or one of its children. A graphic is made active by clicking on the graphic.
You can use a set of keyboard shortcuts to view the active graphic in the Graphics
Viewer. Before applying any of the shortcuts, make sure the appropriate graphic is
active by clicking on it.
Press... To …
CTRL+A Select all elements
HOME Scroll to the left
END Scroll to the right
CTRL+HOME Scroll to the top
CTRL+END Scroll to the bottom
PAGE UP Scroll up
PAGE DOWN Scroll down
UP, LEFT, DOWN, RIGHT ARROWS If not in Panning mode: Move selected elements
by 1 pixel.
If in Panning mode: Pan the view by 1 pixel.
If modifying a line/polyline node: Move the node
by 1 pixel.
CTRL+UP, CTRL+LEFT, CTRL+DOWN, If not in Panning mode: Move selected elements

CTRL+RIGHT ARROWS by the grid pixels.
If in Panning mode: Pan the view by the grid
pixels.
If modifying a line/polyline node: Move the node
by the grid pixels.
CTRL+0 Zoom = 100%
SPACEBAR Activate Quick Panning mode. The previous tool

mode is restored when the key is released.
MINUS SIGN Zoom out (-20%)
200 | 352 Page 509 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Graphics Viewer
3
PLUS SIGN Zoom In (+20%)
Z-key Activates Quick Zoom mode. Cursor changes to
the magnifying glass and allows you to draw

a viewport directly on the active graphic. The
previous tool mode is restored when the key is
released.
F5 Refresh. All views are refreshed. All open

graphics are reloaded.
F12 Toggle the Aerial View on/off
Mouse Functions
The following mouse functions are available in the active graphic once you have
activated Zoom mode, either by clicking one of the zoom buttons on the toolbar or
by pressing the Z-Key. You can use mouse button-wheel shortcuts to view the
active graphic in the Graphics Viewer. Before applying any of the shortcuts, make
sure the appropriate graphic is active by clicking on it.
Click... To …
CTRL +MOUSE WHEEL Zoom in and out (+ or - 20%)
LEFT MOUSE BUTTON Zoom in (+20%)
RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON Zoom out (-20%)
Status and Commands Window
The Status and Commands window displays the following information about an
object, its properties, and its status.
Name Description
1 Icon Displays the icon associated with the property type.
2 Object path and object The path and the name of the object.
name
3 Property name Displays the name of one or more properties associated with the
object the selected objects.
If you select multiple objects of the same type in the system, the
icon next to the property name indicates this with a triangular
symbol in the lower right-hand corner. Clicking this symbol
expands the table row to show all of the selected objects of the
same type that share this property. You can then change all
properties for the selected objects at the same time.
4 Current value Displays the current value of each property.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 510 of 709 201 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Graphics Viewer
5 Argument area and When you initiate a command that requires additional arguments,
Progress/Result area the required argument fields display for you to enter one or more
arguments prior to sending the command. You must complete all
required arguments before sending the command.
An argument field that displays a red border around it means that
the value for that property is invalid. You will need to enter a valid
value before commanding the property.
Displays the progress and then the result of a command, once
you execute a command. During the command, the
Progress/Result field displays Command in Progress, along
with information about how many objects have been commanded
and how many will be commanded all together. After a command
execution is complete, successful commands display Success.
Failed commands display the reason the command failed and, if
you executed multiple commands, the number of failed
commands.
202 | 352 Page 511 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Graphics Viewer
3
6 Command area Displays the name of a command that you can initiate. If a
command button has a triangle in the lower right-hand corner, the
command has multiple buttons or options, and clicking on the
triangle displays the options. Some commands are sent
immediately after you initiate them by clicking on the Command
button. Others require you to enter arguments before they can be
sent. When a command requires arguments (additional fields
requiring information to continue with the command), the property
row will expand after you click the command button. You then
complete the additional fields and click the appropriate button
(Send, Command, etc.).
Some object properties support grouping of command buttons
under a single command button with a drop-down list of your
choices. The button you choose from the drop-down list becomes
the new commandable button in the group.
The Send button displays only for commands that require
additional arguments. Clicking the Send button sends a
command after you have entered all required arguments.
Command Types:
Multiple Option Selection:
Visual display of associated properties. Each slot represents a

property option. If a property is selected, it is shaded. Moving
your cursor over the slot allows you to view the property option;
clicking on the slot allows
you to select the option.
7 Expand/Collapse button Allows you to expand, collapse, or close the window :
● Expands the Status and Commands window when icons
display off-normal properties.
● Minimizes a Status and Commands window so that only the
icons of the off-normal properties display.
Closes a Status and Commands window completely, if there are
no properties in an off-normal state.
8 Scroll-view indicator Indicates whether more buttons are available, yet not visible, and
where the buttons are displayed.
When you move the mouse over the scroll-view indicator, East-
West cursor displays, and allows you to scroll through the
commands.
More command buttons are to the right of the last displayed

button.
More buttons are to the left of the first displayed button.
There are more buttons on either side of the visible buttons.
9 Scrollbar Displays when the window has run out of space, and allows you
to scroll through the active properties.
Status and Commands Connection Lines

Visibility of the connection line and its connection point are controlled as follows:
● A connection line and its connection point are only visible if the element is
visible.
● An element is only visible when the layer is visible that contains the element.
● A layer is only visible if a depth is visible that contains that particular layer.
● A Status and Commands window is only displayed when there is at least one
connection to an element.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 512 of 709 203 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Graphics Viewer
Views
The Graphics Viewer provides you with two floating views, the Aerial View and the
Graphic Navigation View, to help you navigate the active graphic. Both views can
be resized and toggled to display or not, using the Graphics Viewer toolbar.
Aerial View
The Aerial View provides you with a bird’s-eye view of the active graphic at all
times. The viewport rectangle, a rectangular shaped border within the Aerial View,
provides a visual representation of the region that has the current focus. You can
also draw a viewport rectangle in the area you would like to zoom in on, or click
and drag the viewport to move to another location on the graphic.
Aerial View
Name Description
1 Viewport Rectangle Allows you to view graphics in part or as a whole.
Navigation View
The Graphic Navigation View allows you to customize and navigate through views
of the active graphic by selecting a depth and then filtering, by discipline or by
layer, which of the associated layers to display. If you choose to filter the layers by
discipline, only the layers designated with that discipline display in the graphic
view. Otherwise, if you filter on layers only, all the layers of the selected depth
display in the Graphic Navigation View, and you can manually choose which layers
will be visible in the current view of the graphic.
2
4
204 | 352 Page 513 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
Navigation View
Name Description
1 Selected Depth Displays the active depth. Use the drop-down menu to select
from a list of available depths.
2 Filtering Allows you to select how to filter the layers associated with the
selected depth. You can filter the layers by Discipline or by
Layers.
3 Discipline Selection Displays the discipline used to filter the associated layers with.
Use the drop-down menu to choose from a list of available
disciplines. The active graphic will only display layers designated
with the selected discipline.
This section is only active if you have selected to filter the depth
by Discipline.
4 Layer Selection Displays the list of available layers associated with the selected
depth. If a layer is checked, the associated layer displays in the
current graphic view. If unchecked, the layer does not display.
This section is only active if you have selected to filter the
selected depth of the graphic by Layer.
3.3 Alarms
This section provides reference and background information for handling events in
Desigo CC. For instructions, see the step-by-step section.
3.3.1 Event Handling

How Operators are Alerted to Alarms
Desigo CC displays all the detected alarms/events in Event List, with each one on
a separate row. This is your main starting point for dealing with events. In addition:
● The Summary bar along the top of the screen provides an overview of the
events in the system grouped by category. This lets you keep an eye on events
even when in some Client Profiles Event List is collapsed to an event bar. A
blinking indication signals when there are unprocessed events.
● An audible alert is sounded by the Desigo CC station when there are
unprocessed events.
● In some Client Profiles, the highest category event is also displayed in an
Event Detail bar underneath the Summary bar.
For details about these user-interface elements, see Overview of the Standard UI
Client [➙ 7].
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 514 of 709 205 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
Methods of Handling an Event

● Fast treatment. You can view information about events and send event-
handling commands from directly inside Event List. This is the most
straightforward method of handling an event. You can also send commands in
the same way from the Event Detail bar, where available.
For instructions, see Handling Events from Event List [➙ 40].
● Investigative treatment. To handle an event as you would in System Manager,
you can open a dedicated window, with the event descriptor that displays along
the top, and the object that caused the event already selected in System
Browser. This feature enables you to:
– Investigate the source of the event, check or command its properties, and
so forth, using all the tools normally available in System Manager.
– At the same time, you can send event-handling commands from the event
descriptor at the top of the window, just as you would from inside Event
List.
For instructions, see Handling an Event with Investigative Treatment
[➙ 44].
● Assisted treatment. If an operating procedure was configured for a specific
event, the icon in the event button indicates that you can open a dedicated
window, with the event descriptor displayed along the top, that provides a step-
by-step checklist of actions you must complete for handling that situation. For
example, these might include printing out a report, completing a form, reading a
document, and so on. At the same time, you can send event-handling
commands from the event descriptor at the top of the window, just as you
would from inside Event List.
For instructions, see Handling Events with Assisted Treatment [➙ 46].
Simultaneous Handling of Events by Different Operators

A Desigo CC installation can have one or more client stations from which operators
monitor and respond to events.
● At any given time, you can see which operators and stations are handling an
event. This information is available in the event button tooltip and in the In
Process by column of the event descriptor.
● Even if an event is being handled by another operator/station, you can still also
handle the same event from your own station, using any of the available
methods. The only limitation is that:
– If another operator/station is handling an event using assisted treatment,
you cannot also initiate assisted treatment for that event.
– However, you can still start investigative treatment, or send event-handling
commands from within Event List.
The system continually updates the list of users who are handling the same event
and removes any users who are disconnected for any reason.
Visibility of Events in the System

Your user visibility rights affect the specific events that the Summary bar and the
Event List, Investigative Treatment, and Assisted Treatment windows display. If an
event is generated by a point not visible to you in System Browser, it does not
display on your Desigo CC station.
Validation for Event Handling

Validation might be required for commanding events. This means when an event
occurs, to be able to send event-handling commands, the operator will be asked to
provide a comment (Validation Profile = Enabled) or a comment and a password
(Validation Profile = Supervised).
206 | 352 Page 515 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
The event-handling comment that explains the reason for the action is recorded
and stored in the Detail Log tab.
Auto-Event Handling
Desigo CC can be configured to automatically start the handling of certain events
when specified conditions occur on the site. In this case, certain actions such as
opening Event List or selecting the event might happen automatically, so you will
not need to do them manually.
Activity Log and Event Log

During event treatment, entries are recorded in the History Database for the
following:
● Operator’s activities relating to event handling (for example,
initiating/suspending event handling, acknowledging/resetting an event, and so
on). This log data is available when you generate an Activity Log report.
● Evolution of the events in the system (for example, a new event occurs in the
system, an event is acknowledged/reset and so on), and progression through
the operating procedure steps in assisted treatment (for example, an operating
procedure is initiated or closed and so on). This log data is available when you
generate an Event Log report.
For background information about Desigo CC activities and events historical data,
see Log Viewer.
Alarm Suppression
If the alarm suppression feature is enabled on specific system objects, any events
coming from those objects are suppressed in the management station. This means
that any events relating to those objects will not be visible in the Summary bar and
Event List, will not be available in the Event Log, and any event-based procedures
(such as, event-handling procedures, reactions, or remote notifications) will not be
activated. Anyway, unlike the out-of-scan feature, the objects properties are always
updated even when alarm suppression is enabled.
When this feature is enabled for a specific object/subtree, it will suppress the next
events that occur in the field panel. Any events detected prior to enabling this
feature will remain visible in the Summary bar and Event List. When this feature is
disabled for a specific object/subtree, any detected events relevant to that
object/subtree display immediately in the Summary bar and Event List.
You can check whether the alarm suppression is active for an object in the Alarm
Suppression column (Enabled or Disabled) of the Textual Viewer. You can also
filter the System Browser tree to display those system objects or generate a report
of system objects affected by alarm suppression. For instructions, see Handling
Alarm Suppression for System Objects [➙ 62].
When alarm suppression is present for at least a system object, the management
station generates an event. Also, if alarm suppression is available for your
configuration, this icon displays on the Summary bar with a tooltip that tells
you the number of objects affected by alarm suppression.
3.3.2 Event Lamps

The events that occur in the building-control system are grouped into categories,
which are color-coded by severity. Each category typically corresponds to an event
lamp that displays in the Summary bar [➙ 11]. The number of lamps and their
corresponding categories depends on the event schema.
Each event lamp shows the total number of events for that category, and how
many of those are unprocessed (not yet acknowledged by the operator). An event
lamp will also flash if there are any unprocessed events in its category.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 516 of 709 207 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
When the Summary bar is collapsed to a slim bar, event information appears in a
reduced format (event category abbreviation and the total number of events for that
category), including also icons for any event timers or applied filters.
Figure 19: Event Lamp in Collapsed (Slim) Summary Bar
3
Figure 20: Event Lamp in Expanded Summary Bar
1 Background color Indicates the category color of the event. The specific category
colors employed are dependent on the event schema.
2 Event counter Shows the total number of events for that category present in
Event List (second number), and how many of those are
unprocessed (first number).
3 Event category Descriptive name of the category. The specific category names
employed are dependent on the event schema.
Event Lamp Display

Graphical Display Background Color and Behavior Status
Solid gray. No events for that category.
Flashes from gray to the category New events for that category have
color. occurred in the system, and are still
unprocessed.
Flashes from gray to the dark Filter by category activated. New

category color. events for that category have occurred
in the system and are still
unprocessed.
208 | 352 Page 517 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
Solid category color and not There are no unprocessed events for
flashing. that category.
NOTE: In Client Profiles where
recurring events [➙ 225] are grouped
under a parent container, the event
lamp stops flashing when there are no
unprocessed events in the event
container.
Solid dark category color and not Filter by category activated. There are
flashing. no unprocessed events for that
category.
When you move the cursor over an event lamp, a tooltip provides the following
information:
● Total number of events for this category
● Number of unprocessed (unacknowledged) events for this category
● Number of events for this category that have been acknowledged
3.3.3 Event List

The Event List window displays all the detected events with each one on a
separate row. This window is your main starting point for dealing with events. For
instructions, see the step-by-step section.
When opened, Event List displays in the main work area of the user interface
[➙ 7]. When it is closed, depending on the Client Profile Event List may be either
entirely hidden or collapsed to a vertical bar down the left side of the screen.
The display of Event List is limited to 10000 event lines; if such limit is exceeded,
the status bar of Event List will indicate the display limit and the total number of
events detected (for example, 10000 of 50000).
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 518 of 709 209 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
Event List Workspace
4
5
1 Summary bar Contains a set of event lamps that provide an overview of the
events in the system. For more details, see Event Lamps [➙ 207]
and Summary Bar [➙ 11].
2 Event Detail bar In some configurations, prominently displays an event that

requires immediate attention across the top of the screen.
3 Title bar Depending on what you select, the title bar of the Event List
window shows:
● Event List, if no event is selected in the list.
● Event location, if a single event is selected in the list.
● Number of events being processed, if multiple events are
selected in the list.
● Details of the applied filter, if a filter is applied to the events,
and no event is being processed.
It also contains some icons to open/close the Contextual pane (6),
and depending on the Client Profile, lock the layout and restore
down the window.
4 Event button Graphic indicator of an event in the system. For more details, see
the reference [➙ 219] section.
5 Event descriptor Contains the event button, event details and event-handling
commands for the event currently being processed. For more
details, see the reference [➙ 215] section.
210 | 352 Page 519 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
6 Contextual pane Hidden by default. When open, it provides additional information,

actions, and resources about the object that issued the event. The
following tabs are available:
● Operation/Extended Operation: Lets you inspect all the
properties of the event source, and view and execute any
commands/actions available for that object. If you selected
multiple events, these tabs display only the properties
common to all the events, properties having different values
are marked with an asterisk.
● Detailed Log tab: Lets you view a detailed log of the currently
selected event.
A contextual menu becomes available when you right-click the Event List column
headers and provides you with options to customize the columns that display in
Event List, and to print out the whole list of events.
Events in Distributed Systems

In distributed systems, to view the total number of events for an individual system,
check—in the Extended Operation tab—the Event Count property of its Main
Server.
3.3.4 Investigative Treatment Window

Investigative Treatment Workspace

A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 520 of 709 211 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
3 Title bar Shows the name of the Investigative Treatment window. It also
contains some icons to open/close the Contextual pane (7), lock
the layout and, restore down the window.
details, see the reference [➙ 215] section. The background color
reflects the event category color, but in a darker shade.
5 Selection pane Contains System Browser which displays the highlighted event
source.
6 Primary pane Contains the system application (for example, Graphics Viewer)
associated with the event source currently highlighted in System
Browser.
7 Contextual pane Displays by default and provides additional information, actions,

and resources about the object that issued the event. The
commands/actions available for that object.
● Detailed Log: Lets you view a detailed log of the currently
selected event.
● Related Items: Provides links to additional resources (for
example, reports or event-handling procedures) that are
relevant to the event source. If you click a related item, it
opens by default in the Secondary pane.
3.3.5 Assisted Treatment Window

Assisted Treatment Workspace
6
5
212 | 352 Page 521 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3

3 Title bar Shows the name of the Assisted Treatment window. It also
contains some icons to open/close the Contextual pane (7), lock
the layout and, restore down the window.
details, see the reference [➙ 215] section. The background color
reflects the event category color, but in a darker shade. The
icon in the event button indicates that the event is being
processed by assisted treatment.
5 Selection pane Contains the list of operating procedure steps you must perform to
process the event.
6 Primary pane The Default tab contains the system application associated with
the currently selected step in the procedure.
7 Contextual pane Hidden by default. When open, it provides additional information,

actions, and resources about the object that issued the event. The
commands/actions available for that object.
● Detailed Log: Lets you view a detailed log of the currently
selected event.
● Related Items: Provides links to additional resources (for
example, reports or event-handling procedures) that are
relevant to the event source. If you click a related item, it
opens by default in the Secondary pane.
Operating Procedures Steps Workspace

When you open the Assisted Treatment window, the Selection pane on the left lists
the steps of the guided procedure you must follow to handle the event. This list
helps you select and carry out the steps in the correct sequence, which depends
on how a procedure was configured. Additionally, depending on configuration, a
step can be:
● Automatic or manual
● Mandatory or optional
● Repeatable or not repeatable
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 522 of 709 213 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
1 4
1 Symbol that indicates a mandatory step.
2 Step identifier. This number may or may not correspond to the execution order.
3 Briefly describes the step type.
4 Depending on the step's configuration, you will see a white or gray check box:
● A tooltip tells you that you cannot check off the step because you have not done
all the actions required to complete the step (for example, complete a remote
notification procedure or fill out and save an event treatment report).
● A tooltip tells you that you that you can check off the step to mark it as
completed.
Once you check off a step as executed, a checkmark icon displays in the place of the
check box, to indicate that the step has been completed.
5 Graphically indicates the step's execution status as follows:
● in progress
● successfully executed
● failed
6 Graphically indicates that the step is selected and the relevant application for performing
that step is available in the Default tab of the Primary pane.
● Each step has the same color as the event's category. When you select a step,
it expands and changes to a darker color to indicate that it is being executed.
Once you complete a step, a graphic icon indicates the execution outcome of
that step (successful or failed).
● You must execute the first mandatory step before the following mandatory
steps can be selected and executed.
214 | 352 Page 523 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
● Whether the steps must be executed sequentially, or may instead be freely

executed in any order, depends on how the assisted-procedure was
configured.
● When you move your cursor over a step during the execution of an assisted
procedure:
– If it turns into hand, this means that you can execute the step.
– If it turns into arrow, this means that you cannot execute the step because
it is locked. This may happen if a preceding mandatory step has not been
executed yet, or during the execution of sequential steps.
● Once you have completed all the actions required by a step, the gray check
box turns white and you can mark that step as completed.
The system provides the following details of a step in a tooltip: name, execution
type (mandatory or optional), type (automatic or manual), state (unknown,
successful, or failed ), and notes (error message, if any). Also, once a step is
executed, the name of the operator who executed the step displays in the tooltip. If
a step fails, an error message displays in the tooltip or in the window status bar.
Assisted Treatment License and Access Rights

Assisted treatment is covered by a license. If assisted treatment is not available,
you can use the other event-handling methods provided by the system (fast
treatment and investigative treatment). If the license is installed but later expires or
is lost for any reason, assisted treatment is available only for those events that
were already undergoing assisted treatment, and that have an associated
operating procedure. If a new event occurs, fast treatment and investigative
treatment will remain available.
In addition to the license, the availability of assisted treatment depends:
● On your user group rights. If you have no appropriate access permission, you
cannot initiate assisted treatment.
● On the system configuration (that is, on whether an assisted procedure has
been configured for handling a specific type of event. If there is no such
procedure configured, investigative treatment is available instead.
3.3.6 Event Descriptor

The event descriptor is the individual row in Event List, that contains all the details
about an event (for example, its cause, path, source, date and time, category,
discipline, event status, source status, suggested action, available command, and
so on). Each event descriptor also has an event button on the left-hand side that
graphically summarizes some of the most important information about that event.
The event descriptor is your starting point for handling an event. You can send
event-handling commands from directly inside the event descriptor by clicking the
available command icon.
The exact appearance of the event descriptor depends on the Client Profile.
Also, what columns display in the event descriptor and their order may vary
depending on column customization. For instructions, see Customizing the
Columns in Event List [➙ 57].
Note that:
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 524 of 709 215 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
● Any changes you make to the columns in Event List will also apply to the Event
Detail bar and to the Investigative Treatment and Assisted Treatment windows.
● Changes to column settings will be automatically saved when you exit the
Desigo CC client application, and so will persist across sessions. Note that
column settings are specific to the user profile. This means that different users
can have different column settings.
The following describes the columns of the event descriptor.
Event Button
Situated on the leftmost end of each event descriptor. Graphically summarizes that
specific event. For more details, see the reference [➙ 219] section.
You cannot move, resize, or remove the Event button column.
Cause
Description of the event followed by the condition (either numeric value or
descriptive text) that caused the event. For example, Temperature too high
(39°C), Fault (INACTIVE), and so on. This description changes when the
event source passes from the Active to the Quiet state.
Path
Indicates the entire System Browser path of the object that issued the event. The
path is expressed using names or descriptions, depending on the Display mode as
well as the view selected in the System Browser drop-down list.
For BACnet Event Enrollment (EE) events, it displays the [name of the field
networks] + [name of the network] to which the EE event belongs.
The following optional columns may also be available, for indicating the object’s
path in other ways:
● Location Concatenation of descriptions relating to the event source. (It follows
the view selected in System Browser.)
● Designation Concatenation of names relating to the event source. (It follows
the view selected in System Browser.)
● Path [View] Indicates the full path of the object in alarm in a specified System
Browser view as follows:
– Path [Management View]
– Path [Application View]
– Path [Logical View]
– Path [Physical View]
– Path [user view]
Depending on the System Browser views that are configured, multiple such
columns may be available. How the path is expressed depends on the Display
mode.
Message text
Text that consists of one of the following:
● For driver alarms, the most recent message that has come from the field panel
at any alarm transitions.
● For workstation alarms, blank or the event cause.
The same data also displays in the Information column.
216 | 352 Page 525 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
Source
Indicates the object that issued the event. Whether the source name or description
displays depends on the current display mode. For instructions, see Setting How
Objects are Labeled in System Manager.
For workstation-based alarms, [object name].[property name] displays in
this column. How driver-based alarms display - [object name] or [object
name].[property name]) - depends on the specific driver.
For BACnet Event Enrollment (EE) events, the source text includes the EE
instance that generated the event followed by the original source in parentheses.
The following optional columns may also be available, for indicating the event
source in other ways:
● Source Alias Indicates a customer-assigned name used to identify the technical
equipment within the building/facility.
● Source Name Indicates the event-source object using its name.
● Source Description Indicates the event-source object using its description.
– Source Description [view] Indicates the event-source object using its
description in a specified System Browser view. Depending on the System
Browser views that are configured, multiple such columns may be
available:
– Source [Management View]
– Source [Application View]
– Source [Logical View]
– Source [Physical View]
– Source [user view]
In any type of Source column, you can click the [source] text to jump to the
event source in System Manager. For instructions, see Get More Information About
the Event [➙ 42].
Counter
Counter for recurring events [➙ 225]. This column does not appear in the
Investigative Treatment and Assisted Treatment windows.
Commands
Available commands for handling this event [➙ 221]. You can directly click the
command icon/button to send the corresponding command.
You cannot remove or resize the Commands column.
Event Text
Displays information to operators or intervention forces relevant to the object that
issued the event. Specifically, this is a custom text configured for normal and off-
normal conditions.
Information
The following become visible only when the event descriptor is selected:
● : Displays the History Database dialog box for that Event ID, where you can
add a note for the event. For instructions, see Log an Event Note [➙ 43].
● : Displays the information text, which indicates technical information

(instructions for operators or intervention forces) about a field point. It also
displays the same information shown in the Message Text column. The
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 526 of 709 217 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
intervention text may or may not be available to you. For instructions, see Get
More Information About the Event [➙ 42].
● (start investigative treatment) or (start assisted treatment). For
instructions, see Start Investigative Treatment [➙ 44] and Start Assisted
Treatment [➙ 47].
You cannot resize Information column.
Event Status
Describes the status of the event [➙ 222]. For example: Unprocessed, Ready
to be reset, and so on.
Source Status
Describes the status of the event source: Active (event source is in an off-normal
condition) or Quiet (event source is back to normal).
Date/Time
Date and time when the event occurred. Typically, event time displays with
resolution hh:mm:ss. However, in special cases, it will display with resolution
hh:mm:ss:ms.
ID
Unique number that identifies the event. This number has an upper limit. The
numbering restarts when this limit is reached.
In Process by
Indicates which user is processing an event. Depending on the type of Desigo CC
client you are working on, one of the following may display:
● Installed client: [computer name]/[full name of the logged-on
user]
If the computer/user data was not specified in the configuration,
[localhost]+[user’s short name] displays instead.
● Web client or web app client: Web Client/[Operator’s full name].
Furthermore, for recurrences [➙ 225] of the same event, this column displays the
entire list of computer/users that are processing that event. Depending on the
Client Profile, recurring events may not be available.
Suggested action
Describes the next action [➙ 222] the operator should take for handling the event.
Category
Describes the event category.
The events that occur in the building control system are grouped into categories,
which are color-coded by severity. The specific category names and colors
employed are dependent on the event schema.
218 | 352 Page 527 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
Discipline
Describes the discipline to which the event belongs.
Icon Discipline
Building Automation
Building Infrastructure
Energy Management
Fire
Management System
Notification
Security
Tag
Lets you to tag/untag events [➙ 61], so that you can selectively show/hide them in
Event List. This button will be visible but inactive in the Event Detail bar, and the
Tag column will not appear in investigative/assisted treatment.
3.3.7 Event Button

An event button is a graphic indicator that displays on the left side of an event
descriptor [➙ 215]. It graphically summarizes some of the most important
information about that event.
An event button flashes until you acknowledge its associated event.
In some Client Profiles, when Event List is closed the event buttons remain still
visible (as an Event bar) on the left-hand side of the screen.
2 3
1 4
1 Discipline icon Discipline [➙ 218] of the event source.
2 Main background Event category.

color of the button The events that occur in the building control system are grouped
into categories, which are color-coded by severity. The specific
category colors employed are dependent on the event schema.
3 Assisted treatment This icon is available for an event that can be handled in assisted
icon treatment. For instructions, see Handling Events with Assisted
Treatment [➙ 46].
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 528 of 709 219 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
4 Bar along the right- The background color indicates the source status, whether the
hand side of the event source is:
button ● Active (bar matches the background color).
● Quiet (bar is gray).
5 Suggested action Next action to be taken. For more details, see Event Status and
icon1) Suggested Action [➙ 222].
Event Button and What it Tells You

Button Event Status Source Status Suggested Action Additional Information
Unprocessed Active Acknowledge The event is unselected

event and not yet acknowledged,
or you already selected the
event, but you must still
acknowledge it.
The event button is
flashing. The event lamp in
the Summary bar
corresponding to this
category will also flash.
Unprocessed Quiet Acknowledge The event source is back to

event normal.
Waiting for Active Wait for You acknowledged the

condition condition event, but no further action
or is yet possible, and the
Reset command is not
Complete available.
Operating
Procedure
Ready to be Active Reset event You already selected the

Closed event, and the Reset
command is available.
Ready to be Quiet Reset event The event source is back to

Closed normal.
The Reset command is
available.
Closed Quiet Suspend the The event was closed but

event is still selected.
When you deselect the
event, it disappears from
Event List.
One of the Active One of the previous The event source is in

previous event or suggested actions maintenance.
statuses Quiet
220 | 352 Page 529 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
3.3.8 Event-Handling Commands

Command Description Notes
Acknowledge the event Available when event status = Unprocessed and

suggested action = Acknowledge event.
Reset the event In fast/investigative treatment: available when event status

= Ready to be closed and suggested action = Close
event.
In assisted treatment: available when event status = Ready
to be reset and suggested action = Reset event.
Close the event Only for assisted treatment. Available when event status =
Ready to be closed and suggested action = Close
event.
Start Remote Notifications Available only if a remote notification that can be

sent/stopped by the operator was configured for the event.
Operator must have application rights to start/stop remote
Stop Remote Notifications notifications. For instructions see Start a Remote
Notification from Event List [➙ 162] and Stop a Remote
Notification from Event List [➙ 162].
Silence the field panel Available only where these commands have been
configured for the field panel and event status is one of the
following: Unprocessed, Waiting for condition, or
Unsilence the field panel Ready to be closed.
Visibility of Events and Commands

● You cannot handle events generated by field points for which you do not have
proper user privileges. Event though such events are visible to you, the related
commands will not be available in Event List.
● While handling events, your ability to acknowledge, reset and/or
silence/unsilence an individual field point/panel (sending an individual
command) or all the panels belonging to the same network (sending block
commands) depends on configuration.
● To execute the event-handling commands, (acknowledge, reset, or
silence/unsilence), you must have proper user privileges, or the client station
you work on must be the owner of the field panel.
● If you try to send block commands while an event filter is active, a message
displays asking you to remove the filter. Deactivate the filter and send the
(block) command.
Security Rights on Event Category Commands

The specific commands available to you for handling events belonging to different
categories depend on the rights at users group or workstation level. This means
that, for events belonging to the different event categories, Event List, Investigative
Treatment, and Assisted Treatment windows display only the commands that you
are allowed to send. For a specific event category, if you do not have rights to send
one or more commands, these commands do not display on Event List,
Investigative Treatment, and Assisted Treatment windows of your Desigo CC
management station.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 530 of 709 221 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms
3.3.9 Event Status and Suggested Action

Event Status Suggested Action Icon in event Fast / Investigative Assisted
button Treatment Treatment
Unprocessed Acknowledge The event is new and still unprocessed.

event This means that you either did not yet
select the event, or that you selected it
but did not acknowledge it yet.
Ready to be Reset event Not applicable In assisted

reset
treatment, you
selected an event
and the source
status is back in
normal condition.
The Reset
command is
available.
Ready to be Reset event You selected an You reset an

closed
event and the event, and all the
Reset command mandatory steps
of the assisted
is available. procedure were
executed. The
Close command
is available.
Waiting for Wait for You acknowledged -

condition condition the event but
cannot reset it yet.
Complete - You acknowledged

Operating the event but
Procedure cannot reset it yet
because you must
first complete all
the mandatory
steps of the
assisted
procedure.
Closed Suspend the - You reset the You closed the

event event, and the event and now you
source status is can clear it.
back in normal
condition. You can
clear the event.
3.3.9.1 Acknowledgment Models for Station-based Events

The following acknowledgment models are for station-based events:
● ACK and Reset required
● No Reset (ACK only required)
● No ACK, No Reset
● Optional ACK, No Reset
222 | 352 Page 531 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3
Fast/Investigative Treatment Workflow

Acknowledgment Model Scenario Event Status
ACK and Reset required ● Event handling started (and at least Unprocessed
one event-handling command sent) Waiting for
● Event source back to Quiet condition
Ready to be closed
Closed
● Event handling not started yet (no Unprocessed

event-handling command sent yet) Ready to be closed
● Event source back to Quiet Closed
No Reset (ACK only required) ● Event handling started (and at least Unprocessed
or not started yet (no command condition
sent yet)
Closed
● Event source back to Quiet
No ACK, No Reset ● Event handling started (and at least Waiting for

one event-handling command sent) condition
or not started yet (no command Closed
sent yet)
Optional ACK, No Reset ● Event handling started (and at least Unprocessed

or not started yet (no command condition
sent yet)
Closed
Assisted Treatment (with Mandatory Steps) Workflow

Ready to be reset
Waiting for
condition (due to
mandatory steps)
Ready to be closed
Closed
● Event handling not started yet (and Unprocessed

no event-handling command sent Ready to be reset
yet)
Waiting for
● Event source back to Quiet condition (due to
mandatory steps)
Ready to be closed
Closed
Waiting for
condition (due to
mandatory steps)
Ready to be closed
Closed
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 532 of 709 223 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Alarms

no event-handling command sent Waiting for
yet) condition (due to
● Event source back to Quiet mandatory steps)
Ready to be closed
Closed

● Event source back to Quiet Waiting for
condition (due to
mandatory steps)
Ready to be closed
Closed
● Event handling not started yet (and Waiting for

no event-handling command sent condition (due to
yet) mandatory steps)
● Event source back to Quiet Ready to be closed
Closed

Waiting for
condition (due to
mandatory steps)
Ready to be closed
Closed

no event-handling command sent Waiting for
yet) condition (due to
● Event source back to Quiet mandatory steps)
Ready to be closed
Closed
Assisted Treatment (Without Mandatory Steps) Workflow

Ready to be reset
Ready to be closed
Closed

no event-handling command sent Ready to be reset
yet)
Ready to be closed
Closed
Ready to be closed
Closed

no event-handling command sent Ready to be closed
yet)
Closed
224 | 352 Page 533 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Alarms
3

or not started yet (and no command Ready to be closed
sent yet)
Closed

Ready to be closed
Closed

no event-handling command sent Ready to be closed
yet)
Closed
3.3.10 Event Sorting

● If there are no arrows in any of the column headers, it means the default Event
List sorting is applied.
● In some Client Profiles:
– A small up or down arrow in one of the column headers in Event List
indicates that a non-default sorting order was applied. For instructions, see
Changing the Sorting of Events [➙ 62].
– In the case of recurring events [➙ 225], the sorting only applies to the
parent event. Any individual recurrences of an event are always sorted by
date and time in ascending order, under the parent, and you cannot change
this order.
3.3.11 Recurring Events

A recurring event occurs when the same event source repeatedly generates the
same condition. More specifically, this happens when the same property of a field
point continuously switches between the active and quiet states. For instructions,
see Handling Recurrences of an Event [➙ 56].
If allowed by the Client Profile, in Event List, recurring events are grouped together
under a parent event, which acts as a container for them. The parent event has a
Counter field in its event descriptor that indicates the total number of occurrences.
This counter automatically increments whenever the same event recurs.
Information Contained in the Parent Recurrent Event

The parent event descriptor always displays the most recent recurrence of the
event, (which also corresponds with the topmost recurrence of the set), along with
the following summary information:
● Event Status of the most important recurrence (priority order is Unprocessed,
Waiting for condition, then Ready to be closed)
● Source Status of the most recent recurrence
● ID of the event identified by [...] indicating the range between the first and the
last recurrence (for example, 3201…3245)
● Counter indicating the total number of times this event has recurred.
Children of a Recurring Event

You can expand a recurring event by clicking its Counter field. The children of a
recurring event display under the parent event. The children are always sorted by
date and time in ascending order, irrespective of what sorting [➙ 225] is applied to
Event List.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 534 of 709 225 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Scheduling
Tags and Filters Applied to Recurring Events

When you apply tags or filters to Event List:
● Tagging/untagging a parent event affects all its child recurrences.
● You can also separately tag/untag an individual child recurrence.
● If you tag a recurring event (parent plus all its children) and apply a Hide
tagged events filter, a new recurrence of that event will cause only the parent
event to display again, along with the new recurrence. (The other recurrences
will remain hidden).
● The Counter field in the parent event always shows the total number of
recurrences, irrespective of whether they are tagged, untagged, or filtered.
● When filtering recurring events, the filter applies only to the parent event,
except for the Filter by Tag that also applies to any child recurrences.
Assisted or Investigative Treatment of Recurring Events

You can start investigative/assisted treatment of a recurring event in the same way
that you would for a non-recurring event. For instructions see Handling an Event
with Investigative Treatment [➙ 44] and Handling Events with Assisted Treatment
[➙ 46].
In the case of assisted treatment, depending on configuration you may be able to
follow an assisted procedure for each child recurrence separately, or there may be
a single assisted procedure that applies to the entire set of recurrences.
3.4 Scheduling
The Schedules component of the management platform enables you to:

● Set up schedules to automate the operation of the building control site:
Schedules are defined on a weekly and daily basis. You can specify a different
hourly timetable for each day of the week. For example, you could schedule a
heating system to work from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m. on Mondays and Fridays and
from 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. on Tuesdays, Wednesdays, and Thursdays.
● Set up exception calendars, which can be associated to schedules: Calendars
define dates (or date ranges) during which a schedule does not apply. For
example, you could create a holiday calendar that overrides the regular heating
schedule to reduce energy costs. When you create a calendar, you can choose
specific dates (January 15), a date range (August 1 – 31), or a week and a day
you want the exception to run (third week of the month, on Wednesday). Then
you can associate one or more schedules with the calendar.
You can configure schedules and calendars to execute centrally, on the
management platform as well as locally, directly on the BACnet field panel. You
can set up multiple schedules and exception calendars to run at the same time.
226 | 352 Page 535 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Scheduling
3
This section provides background information on Schedules of Desigo CC. For

related procedures, see the step-by-step section.
3.4.1 BACnet Schedules

You use BACnet scheduling to automatically command points at prescribed time
intervals. You can create daily or weekly schedules for BACnet field panels. Each
BACnet panel stores its own calendar and schedule objects, and a BACnet panel
can store and run multiple calendars or schedules at the same time. Because
BACnet schedules reside in and are executed by field panels, they run even if the
management station they are associated with is not running. BACnet schedules
handle only BACnet objects (management station schedules can handle both
BACnet and non-BACnet object types).
You can also configure commands to control BACnet objects related to your
schedules. For example, you want to create a command that turns lights on and
maintains room temperature at 72°F (22.22°C) when the room is occupied. When
the room is unoccupied, the command would turn lights off and maintain the room
temperature at 65°F (18.33°C). In this scenario, you could create a command with
an entry for Occupied/Unoccupied, save it, and then drag it from System Browser
to a schedule of your choice. The schedule will determine what time the command
executes, the start and end dates, and the frequency of repetition.
BACnet calendars allow you to override a scheduled event. In this sense, you can
consider them as exception schedules, consisting of dates only. When you create
a calendar, you can choose specific dates (January 15), a date range (August 1 –
31), or a week and a day you want the exception to run (third week of the month,
on Wednesday). All calendars are associated with a schedule. If you want to
reduce energy costs in your building during company holidays, for example, you
could create a holiday calendar. On these days, your calendar might command the
system to reduce the output of heating or cooling systems when the building is
unoccupied.
Values are displayed as per value scaled units (if configured). For more
information, see Value Scale Units.
BACnet Schedule Workspace

This section provides an overview of the BACnet Schedule workspace.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 536 of 709 227 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Scheduling
Name Description
1 Schedule Name Displays the name of the schedule.
2 Scheduler Toolbar Includes the following icons:
New: Opens a New BACnet Schedule, New Management Station
Schedule, New BACnet Calendar, New Management Station
Calendar, or New BACnet Command Table.
Save: Saves the schedule to the system.
Save As: Allows you to save another instance of the schedule
with a different name and description.
Delete: Deletes the schedule from the system.
3 Tabs Displays four tabs: Schedule Entries, Outputs, Exceptions, and
Setup.
Schedule Entries: Displays a list of entries for the selected date.
Outputs: Outputs are objects associated with the schedule. You
can drag-and-drop objects to any tab to add them to the
schedule. Dropping them on a tab other than the Outputs tab
makes the Outputs tab active. Selecting an object in this section
sends data about the object to the Operation and Extended
Operation tabs, where you can view additional information about
the object and make changes to it. Double-clicking an output
makes it the new primary selection.
Exceptions: Displays a list of exceptions for the selected date
and allows you to set the precedence of the exception, the
exception period, and detailed settings for day, month, year, and
the recurrence pattern. For calendar exceptions, you can choose
a calendar object from a drop-down list. Adding an exception
makes the Exceptions tab active. You can create an exception by
right-clicking the schedule or by clicking the New button in the
Exceptions tab.
Setup: Displays common schedule information such as the
Present Value of an object, the type of object, the default value
for the object, a Release (NULL) check box, and the data type of
the schedule outputs for this schedule
By default, the system automatically creates weekly schedule
entries for the default state, which you can modify. The Release
(NULL) check box allows you to bypass the established priority
and return an object to its default value. For example, to return
control to lower priority commands, check the Release (NULL)
check box for the schedule default, and then create a schedule
entry with the Default check box checked. This will write BACnet
null to the priority slot for the schedule, returning control to the
system.
Within this tab, you can also select the command priority. The
Present Value of some object types is based on a command
priority and established in a hierarchy that ranks from highest (1 –
Manual Life Safety) to lowest (16 - Available). The hierarchy
determines which source has priority over another to change the
value of an object. To command one of these object types, you—
or an application—must have a command priority equal to or
greater than the current command priority of the object. Typically,
PPCL is set to priority 16, and schedules are set to priority 15.
The schedule range displays a predetermined range for an object
type. The first object dropped in the Schedule Output section for
that type determines the range that is displayed. For example, for
an analog output such as a room temperature set point, you
might see a range of 69 – 75 degrees Fahrenheit
(20.56 – 23.89 degrees Celsius).
4 Calendar Allows you to select a day to view or create schedule entries.
When first displayed or refreshed, the current day is selected by
default.
By default, every new schedule begins with the current date and
never ends. Once a new schedule is opened, you can choose the
start and end date for the schedule.
228 | 352 Page 537 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Scheduling
3
5 Schedule When first displayed or refreshed, the current day is selected by

default.
Day tab: Displays a schedule for the day selected in the Date
Picker. Selecting the Detail check box reveals calendar entries,
weekly schedule entries, and exception schedule entries. The
Day tab also displays a horizontal time bar indicating the current
time.
Week tab: Displays the weekly schedule. You can click any day
of the week to view details. This tab also displays a horizontal
time bar indicating the current time.
NOTE: You can schedule entries from the weekly view, however,
the weekly view shows only the resulting schedule and not the
details of the schedule. For more flexibility in visualizing and
creating schedule entries, you can use the detail column of the
daily view.
6 Current Time Indicator Displays a light-blue bar indicating the time of day.
BACnet Calendar Workspace

This section provides an overview of the BACnet Calendar workspace.
Name Description
1 New Button Opens a new calendar entry.
2 Applied Schedules Displays a list of schedules referencing the calendar. Clicking a
schedule in this section sends data about the object to either the
Operation or Extended Operations tabs.

New: Opens a new BACnet Schedule, new Management Station
Schedule, new BACnet Calendar, new Management Station
Calendar or new BACnet Command Table.
Save: Saves the calendar to the system.
Save As: Saves another instance of the calendar with a different
name and description.
Delete: Deletes the calendar from the system.
4 Calendar Name Displays the name of the calendar.
5 Date Picker Displays a monthly calendar with entry dates highlighted. When
first displayed or refreshed, the current day is selected by default.
6 Calendar Entries Displays a list of entries representing a specific date, date range,
or days of the week. The Advanced check box provides detailed
settings for day, month, year, and the recurrence pattern.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 538 of 709 229 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Scheduling
BACnet Command Workspace

This section provides an overview of the BACnet Command workspace.
Name Description
1 New Button Opens a new command table.
Calendar, New BACnet Command Table, or New Management
Station trigger.
Save: Saves the command object to the system.
Save As: Allows you to save another instance of the command
object with a different name and description.
Delete: Deletes the command object from the system.
3 Command Name Displays the name of the command.
4 Command Attributes Displays the command object attribute, the panel it is associated
with, the text group associated with the object, and the schedules
controlling the command.
5 Command Table Action Displays command tables with additional detail when you select
List an entry row. The Move Up and Move Down arrows allow you to
re-order entries within a command table. Further detail can be
displayed by clicking the Advanced button.
NOTE:
This section provides the general reference information on BACnet schedules. To

get started with workflows and procedures, navigate to the step by step [➙ 68]
section.
3.4.2 Management Station Schedules

You can create daily or weekly schedules for your management stations, and a
management station can run multiple calendars or schedules at the same time.
Management station schedules and calendars run only if the management station
is running.
Management station schedules have only one binary output (value active or
inactive). You can assign several objects to that output. For each assigned object,
you can select the mode of action for the output value. Additionally, management
230 | 352 Page 539 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Scheduling
3
station schedules can process both BACnet and non-BACnet object types (BACnet
schedules process only BACnet object types).
You can also create exceptions to schedules. When a management station
exception is ON, it overrides the weekly schedule. When the exception is OFF,
control returns to the weekly schedule.
This section provides the general reference information on management station
schedules. To get started with procedures, navigate to the step by step section for
management station schedules.
Weekly Management Station Schedule

In the case of a weekly schedule, specify the Active or Inactive values only once.
These values are applicable for the entire week and for the complete duration of
the schedule. You create a weekly schedule from the Sub-Type drop down list in
the Setup tab. In this case, the schedule will not trigger an Inactive value at mid
night as an Active entry is added at 12.00 a.m from the Schedule Entries tab. The
last state of the day will be retained post mid night until the next day schedule entry
is triggered.
Example 1: Active Value: 50, Inactive Value: 60:

Time period for the schedule (Active : 12:00 a.m., Inactive : 9:00 a.m., Active : 6:00
p.m.)
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 540 of 709 231 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Scheduling
In this example, the Active status of the schedule set at 6 p.m. continues till 9 a.m.
the next day. There is no change of value at midnight because the active status
continues as it finds the same active entry at 12.00 a.m. midnight.
Example 2: Active Value: 50, Inactive Value: 60:

Time period for the schedule (Active: 9:00 a.m., Inactive: 6:00 p.m.)
232 | 352 Page 541 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Scheduling
3
In this example, the Inactive status of the schedule set at 6 p.m. continues till 9
a.m. the next day. There is no change of value at midnight. This is because the
Inactive status continues as it does not find an Active entry at 12.00 a.m. midnight.
If there is no entry post mid night, then it is by default considered as an Inactive
state. However, if the Inactive state is to be discontinued then an Active entry is to
be added at midnight.
In case of night shifts, it is recommended that you create a weekly schedule.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 542 of 709 233 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Scheduling
Daily Management Station Schedule

You can create a daily schedule from the Sub-Type drop down list in the Setup tab
and specify either similar active or inactive values for all days of the week or
different values for individual days from the Schedule Entries tab.
The daily schedules are treated as single day schedules that are valid till 11.59
PM. Post mid-night the next day's daily schedule is functional. For example, the
daily schedule for Monday, will be functional from 12.00 AM to 11.59 PM.
The daily schedule will trigger an Inactive value at mid night. The last state of the
day will not be retained post mid night until the next day schedule entry is
triggered.
Consider a schedule with the time periods, Active : 12:00 a.m., In-Active : 9:00
a.m., Active : 6:00 p.m. In this case, even though the value is set to active at 6
p.m., there is a switchover from Active to Inactive at around 11:59 p.m. Post
midnight at 12.00 a.m., this value changes back to Active.
Management Station Schedule Workspace

This section provides an overview of the Management Station Schedule
Workspace.
234 | 352 Page 543 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Scheduling
3
4 5 6
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 544 of 709 235 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Scheduling
Name Description
1 Schedule Name Displays the name of the schedule.
Save: Saves the schedule to the system.
Save As: Allows you to save another instance of the schedule
Delete: Deletes the schedule from the system.
3 Tabs Displays four tabs: Schedule Entries, Outputs, Exceptions, and
Setup.
Schedule Entries: Displays a list of entries for the selected date
and Output values. The Output values indicate the ON and OFF
values for Daily schedules only. For weekly schedules the Ouput
values are present in the Setup tab.
Outputs: Outputs are objects associated with the schedule. You
can drag-and-drop objects to any tab to add them to the
schedule. Dropping them on a tab other than the Outputs tab
makes the Outputs tab active. Selecting an object in this section
sends data about the object to the Operation/Extended Operation
tabs, where you can view additional information about the object
and make changes to it. Double-clicking an output makes it the
new primary selection.
Exceptions: Displays a list of exceptions for the selected date
and allows you to set the exception period, including a
recurrence pattern. For calendar exceptions, you can choose a
calendar object from a drop-down list. This tab also displays
schedule entries and ON and OFF values. Adding an exception
makes the Exceptions tab active. You can create an exception by
right-clicking the schedule or by clicking the New button in the
Exceptions tab.
Setup: Allows you to specify the type of schedule (Weekly or
Daily) that you want to create. You can specify the type of
schedule by selecting either Weekly or Daily from the Sub-Type
drop down list. You can also specify the start date and end date
for the schedule from the Setup tab. The Any date check box
next to the Start date defaults to the current date, whereas the
Any date check box next to End date, defaults to an infinite date.
4 Date Picker Allows you to select a day to view or create schedule entries.
When first displayed or refreshed, the current day is selected by
default.
By default, every new schedule begins with the current date and
never ends. Once a new schedule is opened, you can choose the
start and end date for the schedule.
5 Schedule When first displayed or refreshed, the current day is selected by
default.
Day Tab: Shows a schedule for the day selected in the Date
Picker. Selecting the Detail check box reveals calendar entries,
weekly schedule entries, and exception schedule entries. The
Day tab also displays a horizontal time bar indicating the current
time.
Week Tab: Displays the weekly schedule. You can click any day
of the week to view details. The Week tab also displays a
horizontal time bar indicating the current time.
NOTE: You can schedule entries from the weekly view, however,
the weekly view shows only the resulting schedule and not the
details of the schedule. For more flexibility in visualizing and
creating schedule entries, you can use the Schedule Entries tab.
6 Current Time Indicator Displays a light-blue bar corresponding to the time of day.
236 | 352 Page 545 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Scheduling
3
Management Station Calendar Workspace

This section provides an overview of the Management Station Calendar
Workspace.
Calendars allow you to override scheduled switch commands. In this sense, you
can consider calendars as exception schedules, consisting of dates only. When
you create a calendar, you can choose specific dates (January 15), a date range
(August 1 – 31), or a week and a day you want the exception to run (third week of
the month, on Wednesday). All calendars are associated with a schedule. For
example, if you want to reduce energy costs in your building during company
holidays, you can create a schedule with a calendar reference exception that
commands equipment into holiday mode.
Name Description
1 New Button Opens a new calendar entry.
2 Applied Schedules Displays a list of schedules referencing the calendar.
Save: Saves the calendar to the system.
Save As: Allows you to save another instance of the calendar
Delete: Deletes the calendar from the system.
4 Calendar Name Displays the name of the calendar.
5 Date Picker Displays a monthly calendar with entry dates highlighted. When
first displayed or refreshed, the current day is selected by default.
6 Calendar Entries Displays a list of entries representing start and end dates and
recurrence patterns.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 546 of 709 237 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Scheduling
3.4.3 Timeline Viewer

Timeline Viewer allows you to view the details of multiple management station and
field panel schedules simultaneously, spanning a range of time. To do this, System
Manager must be in Operating mode.
Timeline Viewer Workspace

This section provides an overview of the Timeline Viewer Workspace.
Name Description
1 Time Range Scrollbar Allows you to control the date range of schedules.
2 Schedule Name Displays the name of the schedule with schedule details
appearing on the row below it.
3 Schedule Details Hovering on an interval displays a tool tip with schedule details.
Intervals also use color coding and hatch marks to provide basic
information at a glance. Schedule details are view only.
4 Timeline Toolbar Includes the following time-adjustment controls:

Show Today: Allows you to return to today’s date and does not
affect any preset time period you have chosen.
Preset Time Periods: Allows you to choose one of six viewing
options: 12 hours, 1 day, 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.
Zoom In: Allows you to decrease the viewable span of the
timeline (decrease the preset time periods).
Zoom Out: Allows you to increase the viewable span of the
timeline (increase the preset time periods).
5 Date Displays the date you are currently viewing. The date changes
when you use either the Preset Time Spans or the Time Range
scrollbar.
Time Range Scrollbar

The Time Range scrollbar offers another way to control the displayed time span of
schedules. The shorter the time span—one day, for instance—the more detail you
can view. The longer the time span—one month, for instance—the less detail you
can view.
The Time Range scrollbar contains a repeat function to make working with time
ranges easier. Clicking to the left or right of the slider on the scrollbar moves it in
the selected direction for the corresponding time range.
238 | 352 Page 547 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Scheduling
3
Preset Time Periods

You can click the Zoom to Preset Time Period icon on the Timeline Viewer toolbar
to select how much of the timeline is visible at once. The choices are 12 hours, 1
day, 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.
The Timeline Viewer accepts a maximum of 50 schedules. The fewer schedules
you view, the more options you have with the preset time periods. The more
schedules you view, the fewer options you have with the preset time periods.
View Details in the Timeline Viewer

By moving your cursor over an entry in the Timeline Viewer, you can view schedule
details, but you cannot edit them. Double-clicking a schedule’s details, however,
sends the selection to the Default tab where you can edit the schedule.
Color Indicators
A gray interval indicates that nothing has been scheduled for that period, and the
schedule is in its default mode of operation. Other colors in the intervals indicate
that something has been scheduled.
● If colors are assigned to the schedule from the text table, they will appear in the
Timeline Viewer.
● If colors are not assigned to the schedule from the text table, they will default to
blue.
Interval Types
Intervals are classified as one of four types:
● Default—not scheduled intervals (gray)
● Normal—scheduled intervals (solid colors)
● Exception—scheduled overrides to the normal schedule intervals (color-coded
hatch marks)
● Inactive—not active interval (gray hatch marks)
This section provides the general reference information on timeline viewer. To get
started with procedures, navigate to the step by step [➙ 74] section for timeline
viewer.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 548 of 709 239 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
3.5 Reports
The main function of the reports application in Desigo CC is to collect data from the
runtime system and allow you to present this data in a customized manner.
This section provides background information on Reports of Desigo CC . For
related procedures, see the step-by-step section.
3.5.1 Overview of Reports

A report is a formatted and organized presentation of data. The reports application
lets you configure and produce a variety of reports on the functioning of the
management platform. In order to view the reports application, you must have the
Show privilege.
You can use reports as a reference or as a troubleshooting mechanism. Reports
are helpful during system operation. For example, you can:
● View a mixed report containing:
– A table displaying details of all active events for a floor of a building
– A table displaying a history report of events
– A trends plot displaying the temperature variations gathered from
temperature sensors
● Export trend data for statistical analysis to:
– An XLS file
– A CSV file (according to the EMC requirement)
● Schedule production of a report using macros and reactions
● Send a report to someone using email, to a printer as a .pdf, or to a folder as a
file
● Export and import report definitions and logos.
Following are the important reports that you can configure using the Reports
application.
Objects Report
An Objects report contains an Objects table that displays the run time property
values of system objects. To know the property values of any object, such as
present value, high limit, low limit and so on, you must configure an Objects report.
Each object has a corresponding object model associated with it. An object model
specifies the properties applicable to the object type, configuration attributes of
properties, and additional settings like data type of the property, text group
configured for the property, commands defined for the property and so on. Each
property value has configuration attributes like property name, property descriptor,
unit, resolution, minimum and maximum value, and so on. For example, the
Present Value property has attributes such as Unit, Resolution, Type, Descriptor
and so on. The Objects report also provides information on these attributes.
240 | 352 Page 549 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
The properties applicable to an object type can be displayed as columns in the

Objects table by setting the appropriate display levels in the Properties expander in
the Models and Functions tab. In the following screenshot, the AlarmFault and
Alarm.OffNormal properties cannot display as table columns since their display
levels are not set.
If a property has array attributes assigned to it, then the text entries in the text
group associated with the array attributes of the property can be set as the attribute
columns in the Objects table. For example, the Event_Time_Stamps property of the
BACnet Analog Input object type has the TxG_BACnetEventTransitionBits Text
group associated with its array attributes. You can set the text entries of the text
group (To Off Normal, To Fault, To Normal) to display as columns in the Objects
table.
Activities Report
The Activities report provides information on system activities over a period of time.
For example, you can generate an Activities report to get the treatment-related
information logged in the database for activities.
You can create and configure an Activities report if you want to determine the
number of times the present value property of an Analog Input object has
exceeded 100 in the last 24 hours. In order to monitor the change of value of any
property in the activities report, you must ensure that the AL attribute for the
property is selected for the respective Analog Input object. For this you must
navigate to the Properties expander in Object Configurator.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 550 of 709 241 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Constraints
The following constraints apply to the Activities report.
● You cannot sort or apply Condition filters for the following columns:
No Sorting No Condition Filter
Discipline Error
Subdiscipline DPE Name 1
Type DPE Name 2
Subtype Associated Object Description
Object Description Associated Object Name
Object Name Associated Object Designation
Object Property Associated Object Location
Quality Associated Object Name (Internal)
Previous Quality
Object Designation[Application View]
Object Designation[Current View]
Object Designation[Management View]
Object Identifier [Internal]
Object Location
Object Location[Application View]
Object Location[Current View]
Object Location[Management View]
Error
Associated Object Description
Associated Object Name
Associated Object Designation
Associated Object Location
Associated Object Name (Internal)
Alias [Associated Object]
Alias [Object]
Unit
242 | 352 Page 551 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
● When you add a Condition filter to the Activities table, you cannot apply the OR
operator between two filter expressions that are located on two different
columns.
● You can apply the OR operator between two filter expressions set on the same
column.
● You cannot apply the NOT operator in the Condition filter for an Activities table.
For example, NOT 'Action' = "Add Camera" is invalid.
Event Details Report

The Event Details report provides information related to events and their treatment.
When you run the report, the preliminary details of the event such as Event Time,
Event Category, Event Cause, Event ID, Object Description, and Object
Designation display as parent records. Additional information related to the
treatment of the event such as Time, Action taken, Message text, User Name,
Management Station, Attachment, Value, and Previous Value display as child
records. The child records display only in the Run mode. The total number of
available children can be read from the Row No column.
The number of records that display in the child table depends on the following:
● If a Name filter with wild card characters is applied to the report or a default
Name filter is applied, then the latest 1000 records display.
● If a single Name filter without any wild card characters is applied, then all
records display. In this case, the Row Number column is empty.
● If multiple Name filters are applied, then the child table is restricted to the latest
1000 records.
You can configure an Event Details report for the following:
● Viewing event details of a particular event using Investigative Treatment.
● Viewing event details of a particular event using Assisted Treatment.
● Viewing event details for specific events using Reports. For example, you can
configure an event details report to display all events of type Fault or Life
Safety on an Analog Output object for a 24-hour period.
Constraints
The following constraints apply to the Event Details report.
● You cannot sort or apply Condition filters for the following columns:
Discipline DPE Observer
Subdiscipline Event Source
Type Observer Description
Subtype Observer Name
Object Description Observer Designation
Object Name Observer Location
Object Property Observer Identifier (Internal)
Object Designation Event Went
Object Designation[Application View]
Object Designation[Current View]
Object Designation[Management View]
Object Location
Object Location[Application View]
Object Location[Current View]
Object Location[Management View]
Observer Description
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 552 of 709 243 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Observer Name
Observer Designation
Observer Location
Observer Identifier (Internal)
Alias [Object]
Alias [Observer]
● When you add a Condition filter to the Event Details table, you cannot apply the
OR operator between two filter expressions located on two different columns.
column To apply the OR operator on the same column, select the column and
the operator, press SHIFT or CTRL, depending on whether you want to select
values listed next to each other or away from each other, and then click Add.
● You cannot apply the NOT operator in the Condition filter for an Event Details
table.
Events Report
The Events table provides information related to events. It provides information
such as Event Time, Event State, Event Category, Event Cause, Event ID, Object
Description, and Object Designation.
Constraints
The following constraints apply to the Events report.
● You cannot sort or apply Condition filters on the following columns:
Discipline DPE Observer
DPE Observer Event Source
Event Source Observer Description
Subdiscipline Observer Name
Type Observer Designation
Subtype Observer Location
Object Description Observer Identifier (Internal)
Object Name
Object Designation
Object Designation [Application View]
Object Designation [Current View]
Object Designation [Management View]
Object Location
Object Location [Application View]
Object Location [Current View]
Object Location [Management View]
Object Property
Observer Description
Observer Name
Observer Designation
Observer Location
244 | 352 Page 553 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Observer Identifier (Internal)
Alias [Object]
Alias [Observer]
Unit
● When you add a Condition filter to the Event Details table, you cannot apply the
OR operator between two filter expressions set on two different columns.
column. To apply the OR operator on the same column, select the column and
values listed next to each other or away from each other and then click Add.
● You cannot apply the NOT operator in the Condition filter for an Events table.
Trends Plot
The Trends plot provides a graphical representation of the change of value of an
object over a period of time.
In order to view the change of value graphically, you must assign a Trend View
Definition as a Name filter to the Plot. You cannot add a Condition filter to the
Trends Plot.
For example, you can create a Trends Plot if you want to track the change of value
of an Analog Input object graphically over a period of 10 hours.
All Logs Report

The All Logs table provides information on system activities and events.
Constraints
The following constraints apply to the All Logs report.
● You cannot apply sorting on the following columns:
No Sorting
Discipline
Subdiscipline
Type
Subtype
Source Description
Source Name
Source Designation
Source Location
Source Designation [Application View]
Source Designation [Current View]
Source Designation [Management View]
Source Location [Application View]
Source Location [Current View]
Source Location [Management View]
Source Identifier [Internal]
Property
Quality
Previous Quality
Alias [Observer]
Alias [Source]
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 554 of 709 245 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
● When you add a Condition filter to the All Logs table, you cannot apply the OR
operator between two filter expressions set on two different columns.
column. To apply the OR operator on the same column, select the column and
values listed next to each other or away from each other, and then click Add.
● You cannot apply the NOT operator in the Condition filter for a Log View table.
● You can only apply the Equal to (=) operator to the following columns in the
Condition Filter dialog box.
– Discipline
– Subdiscipline
– Type
– Subtype
– Source Description
– Source Name
– Source Designation
– Source Location
– Source Designation [Application View]
– Source Designation [Current View]
– Source Designation [Management View]
– Source Location [Application View]
– Source Location [Current View]
– Source Location [Management View]
– Source Identifier [Internal]
Reports for Operating Procedures

Reports configured in operating procedure steps allow you to view and enter Event
Treatment related information when executed for a selected event from Assisted
Treatment. In addition to the existing reporting elements, you can add form controls
to these reports. You create and configure a report for operating procedure steps in
the same way as you would create and configure any report. When executed in the
context of the selected event, the report displays the event treatment related
information and allows you to enter information in the form controls.
NOTE:
You cannot use trend plots and trend tables in reports for operating procedures
as these elements do not display any data when the report is executed from
Assisted Treatment.
You can enter information in the following scenarios:

● The event is treated for the first time; the operating procedure step is
configured as repeatable and is in progress.
● You re-select the same event, for a repeatable step that is not yet complete.
If you re-select the same event with a non-repeatable step that is complete, you
cannot perform activities such as editing information, sorting entries in tables, or
resizing columns. You can only view and route the information to a file, email, or
printer as configured in the report definition.
Information entered in the form controls can be viewed by users on different client
computers for the same step in the same event. However it can be edited only if
the step is configured to be repeatable.
You may need to contact the system administrator, if you face either of these
issues when working with reports for operating procedures:
● The report is not executed.
● The report does not display the configured table in the Run mode.
● The report is not getting routed to the specified folder.
246 | 352 Page 555 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
3.5.2 Reports Workspace

This section gives an overview of the Reports workspace.
2 3
Reports Workspace
Name Description
1 System Browser Displays all the saved Report Definitions in Application View > Applications
> Reports.
2 Reports Toolbar Contains icons for performing various actions in Reports.
[➙ 247] Reports toolbar for operating procedures - Displays only when the report is
executed for a selected event from Assisted Treatment. Contains icons for
saving user input and routing information.
3 Reports Ribbon Contains several tabs and group boxes to help you define a Report
Definition. The tabs available on the ribbon are:
Home [➙ 249], Filter [➙ 265], Layout [➙ 273], Data [➙ 275], and Settings
[➙ 276].
NOTE: The Reports ribbon is only visible when you create a new Report
Definition or select an existing one.
4 Report Definition Displays the following:

Edit mode [➙ 288]: Workspace where you configure a Report Definition.
Run mode [➙ 289]: Workspace where you view an executed report.
5 Report Displays a report snapshot and documents for the executed reports.
Management NOTE: This section does not display when the report is executed for a
Section [➙ 286] selected event from Assisted Treatment.
6 Extended Displays the properties of the selected Report Definition. The Execute
Operation Tab button allows you to run a Report Definition.
[➙ 291] NOTE: You must configure a Report Output Definition for the selected
Report Definition.
7 Related Items Tab Displays the following:

[➙ 287] New Report: Opens a new Report Definition for configuration.
Related Report: Displays the names of the reports related to the selected
System Browser object.
Show-in-Related Items Report: Displays the name of the reports that has the
Show In Related Items check box selected.
3.5.2.1 Reports Toolbar

The Reports toolbar contains icons that help you perform reporting operations
quickly. This toolbar is present in both Edit mode and Run mode.
Reports Toolbar
Icon Name Description
New Opens a sub-menu where you can select: New Report

and New Folder.
Delete Removes the current Report Definition or Report folder

and deletes its entire configuration from System
Browser.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 556 of 709 247 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Save Saves the configuration of the currently selected Report

Definition or saves a newly created and configured
Report Definition.
NOTE: This command is dimmed until you modify the
current Report Definition.
Save As Saves the configuration of the currently selected Report

Definition as a new Report Definition, or saves a newly
created and configured Report Definition.
Save as Default Saves the selected Report Definition as the default

report template.
Properties Shows or hides the Reports ribbon in Edit mode.
Run Auto-closes Edit mode and executes the current Report

Definition in Run mode.
NOTE: You can run up to five reports simultaneously;
an error message displays for any subsequent clicks of
the Run or Run As icon.
Run As Opens a sub-menu where you can select a language

from a list of languages supported in Desigo CC.
Languages currently supported for report execution are:
en-US, fr-CA.
Stop Stops report execution of the selected Report.

This command is available only while the report is
running.
NOTE: You can also stop the report execution using the
Stop button that becomes available in the Report
Management section while the report is running.
Edit Opens the Report Definition in Edit mode. In this mode

you can design the layout of a report.
This command is available only in Run mode.
Create and view PDF Starts creating PDF document for the current Report
snapshot. The maximum number of pages in one PDF
document is 500. When the number of pages exceeds
500, the PDF document splits into two. This process
goes on until all the data in that specific report snapshot
is moved to the document.
The PDF creation progress for all the split PDF
documents displays under the same Report snapshot in
the Report Management section. When successfully
created, the PDF displays in Adobe Reader in Reports.
Create and view Starts creating Excel document for the current Report
Excel snapshot. The maximum number of rows in an Excel
document is 1,048,575 (Excel limit). When the number
of rows exceeds this limit, the Excel document splits
into two.
The process of the Excel creation for all the split Excel
documents displays under the same Report snapshot in
the Report Management section. When successfully
created, the Excel document displays in MS Excel in
Reports.
Report Management Shows or hides the Report Management section.
Export Exports the Report Definitions as an .xml file to a

selected location.
248 | 352 Page 557 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Import Imports the Report Definitions and logos.

The Import icon is enabled only when the Report folder
is selected in System Browser.
Reports Toolbar For Operating Procedures
Save User Input Saves the Event Treatment-related information you
entered in the report for operating procedures, when it
is executed for a selected event from Assisted
Treatment. You can view the saved information if you
re-select the same step in the same event. Additionally,
users on other client computers can also view this
information for the same step in the same event. If you
move to another step or event or exit the current step
without saving the information, a save confirmation
message displays.
NOTE: This command is available only if the report
contains form controls and you have the Show privilege
for Reporting. If you do not have the Show privilege,
contact your System Administrator.
Send to Output Routes the report for operating procedures to a file,

email, or printer according to the Report Output
configuration settings.
NOTE: If you have not specified the report output
configuration settings, the information is routed to the
path specified in the location supervised folder in
System Browser: Management View > Management
System > Servers > Main Server > Report Manager >
Report Default Folder.
NOTE: This command may not be available if you do
not have the Show privilege for Reporting. In this case,
contact your System Administrator.
3.5.2.2 Home Tab

The Home tab is the main tab in Reports.
Insert Group Box

The Insert Group Box provides the following UI components that can be added to a
report:
Table Group Box

This box lists the tables such as Objects, Activities, Events, and so on that you can
add to the report. It is recommended that you have a maximum of ten tables in a
single report. If you need more than ten tables, then you must create multiple
reports. Tables in a Report Definition can contain a huge number of records which
cannot be viewed at the same time. Reporting incorporates a paging mechanism
that optimizes the number of records that display in a table. The configured height
of a table in the Layout tab determines the number of records that display.
Following is a list of tables that you can add to the report.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 558 of 709 249 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Table Summary
Table Type Default Columns Additional Columns Support/Limitations
Objects Table ● Default columns ● Supports the following ● Does not support the
and its displayed are: additional columns Time filter
extensions: - Object - Alias ● For more information on
Schedule and Description - Default Property the Objects table and its
Related Items - Object - Object Designation configurations, see
Designation [Application View] Objects Report.
- Function - Object Designation
● The values of filters
- Discipline [Current View]
applied on the Alias
- Subdiscipline - Object Designation
- Type [Management View] column are case
sensitive.
- Subtype - Object Identifier
- Main Value [Internal] ● Values are displayed as
- Object Location per value scaled units (if
● Columns specific
- Object Location configured). For more
to scheduling
objects are: [Application View] information, see Value
- Object Location Scale Units.
- Weekly
schedule [Current View]
- Exceptions - Object Location
- Commanded [Management View]
objects - Object Model
- Effective Period - Object Name
- Off Normal Text
● Columns specific
- Out of Scan
to Related Items
- Normal Text
objects are: - Referenced Objects
- Related Items
- Trended Objects
- Related Items
- System Name
Type
- Validation Profile
- Object Version
● In addition to these
columns, the Objects
table also supports
columns related to
Object properties. For
more information see
Objects Report.
250 | 352 Page 559 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Active Events ● Category ● Supports the following ● Does not support the
● Cause additional columns Time filter
- Alias ● The values of filters
● State
- Available Commands applied on the Alias
● Object - Customer Text column are case
Designation - Event ID sensitive.
● Object - Event Status Text
● Values are displayed as
Description - In process by
per value scaled units (if
- Intervention Text
● Discipline configured). For more
- Is Maintenance
● Subdiscipline information, see Value
- Location
Scale Units.
● Creation Date - Name
Time - Object Designation
● Object Property [Application View]
- Object Designation
● Source Status [Current View]
[Management View]
- Object Identifier
[Internal
- Object Location
- Object Location
[Application View]
- Object Location
[Current View]
- Object Location
[Management View]
- Object Name
- Observer Source ID
- Source ID
- Suggested Action
- System Name
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 560 of 709 251 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Activities ● Source Time ● Supports the following ● Supports: Name,

● Object additional columns Condition, Time, and
Description - Alias [Associated Row filter.
Object] ● For more information on
● Object
- Alias [Object] the Activities table, its
Designation
- Associated Object constraints, and
● Action Description configurations, see
● Log Type - Associated Object Activities Report.
Designation
● Previous Value ● Values are displayed as
- Associated Object
● Value per value scaled units (if
Location
configured). For more
● Status - Associated Object
Name information, see Value
● User Name Scale Units.
- Associated Object
● Management Name [Internal]
Station - Discipline
● Message Text - DPEName 1
● Attachment - DPEName 2
- Error
[Application View]
[Current View]
[Management View]
- Object Identifier
[Internal
- Object Location
- Object Location
[Application View]
- Object Location
[Current View]
- Object Location
[Management View]
- Object Name
- Object Property
- Previous Quality
- Quality
- Subdiscipline
- Subtype
- Supervisor
- Type
- Unit
- System Name
- Audit Trail
- Object Version
- Comment
- Reference Time
252 | 352 Page 561 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Events ● Event Time ● Supports the following ● Supports: Name,

● Event State additional columns Condition, Time, and
- Alias [Object] Row filter.
● Event Category
- Alias [Observer] ● For more information on
● Event Cause - Discipline the Events table and its
● Event ID - DPEObserver constraints, see Events
- Event Message Text Report.
● Object
- Event Mode
Description ● The values of filters
- Event Source
● Object - Event Value applied on the Alias
Designation [Object] column are case
- Event Went
sensitive.
● User Name - Event Details
- Category Priority ● Values are displayed as
- Object Designation per value scaled units (if
[Application View] configured). For more
- Object Designation information, see Value
[Current View] Scale Units.
[Management View]
- Object Identifier
[Internal
- Object Location
- Object Location
[Application View]
- Object Location
[Current View]
- Object Location
[Management View]
- Object Name
- Object Property
- Observer Description
- Observer Designation
- Observer Location
- Observer Name
- Observer Identifier
[Internal]
- Subdiscipline
- Subtype
- Transition Time
- Type
- Unit
- Went Text
- System Name
- Object Version
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 562 of 709 253 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Event Details ● Default columns ● Supports the following ● Supports: Name,

displayed in the additional columns Condition, Time, and
Parent table are: - Alias [Object] Row filter.
- Event Time - Alias [Observer] ● Values are displayed as
- Event Category - Discipline per value scaled units (if
- Event Cause - DPEObserver configured). For more
- Event ID - Event Message Text information, see Value
- Object - Event Mode Scale Units.
Description - Event Source
- Object - Event Value ● Supports child records.
Designation Child rows show data of
- Event Went
the system related to the
- Event Details
- Category Priority event. These are:
- State transitions of the
corresponding event.
[Application View]
- Object Designation - Activity Log data
related to the point which
[Current View]
caused the event.
[Management View] ● The following are the
- Object Identifier columns of a child
[Internal (nested) table:
- Object Location Time
- Object Location Value
[Application View] Previous Value
- Object Location User Name
[Current View] Management Station
- Object Location Action
[Management View] Attachment
- Object Name Object Property
- Object Property Unit
- Observer Description Validation Profile
- Observer Designation Audit Trail
- Observer Location Object Version
- Observer Name Comment
- Observer Identifier Reference Time
[Internal] Event Details
- Subdiscipline Category Priority
- Subtype Supervisor
- Type NOTE: These columns
- System Name are added to the table in
- Validation Profile Run mode. In Edit mode,
- Object Version they are not visible, but
can be selected or
removed by clicking the
Child tab in the Select
Column dialog box.
● The values of filters
applied on the Alias
[Object]column are case
sensitive.
● For more information on
the Event Details table,
its constraints, and
configurations, see Event
Details Report.
254 | 352 Page 563 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
BACnet Event ● Event Stamp ● Supports the following ● Supports only the Name
Information Fault additional columns and Row filter.
● Event Enable - Alias [Device]
- Device Designation
● Acked Transitions
● Device [Application View]
Description - Device Designation
● Event Stamp Off- [Current View]
Normal - Device Designation
[Management View]
● Event Stamp
- Device Identifier
Normal
[Internal]
● Event Priority Off- - Device Location
Normal - Device Location
● Notify Type [Application View]
● Alarm State - Device Location
[Current View]
● Object Id - Device Location
● Event Priority [Management View]
Normal - Device Name
● Event Priority - System Name
Fault
BACnet Alam ● Acked Transitions ● Supports the following ● Supports only the Name
Summary ● Device additional columns (on devices only) and
Description - Alias [Device] Row filter.
● Alarm State
● Object ID [Application View]
[Current View]
[Management View]
- Device Identifier
[Internal]
- Device Location
- Device Location
[Application View]
- Device Location
[Current View]
- Device Location
[Management View]
- Device Name
- System Name
BACnet ● Notification Class ● Supports the following ● Supports only the Name
Enrollment ● Object Id additional columns (on devices only) and
Summary - Alias [Device] Row filter.
● Device
Description
● Notification Class [Application View]
Present - Device Designation
● Event Type [Current View]
● Alarm State
[Management View]
● Priority - Device Identifier
[Internal]
- Device Location
- Device Location
[Application View]
- Device Location
[Current View]
- Device Location
[Management View]
- Device Name
- System Name
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 564 of 709 255 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Trends ● DateTime ● Supports the following ● Supports the Name filter,

● Value additional columns Condition filter, Time
- Validation Profile filter, and Row filter.
● Unit
- Object Version However, the Condition
● Quality filter is not supported on
the Object Version and
Validation Profile
columns.
● Does not support
multiple Name filters.
● Sorting is possible only
on the DateTime column.
● The information on the
alias of an object (if
present) displays above
the column headings
(Present Value, Unit, and
Quality) and appears
next to the object
hierarchy.
● Values are displayed as
per value scaled units (if
configured). For more
information, see Value
Scale Units.
256 | 352 Page 565 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
All Logs ● Event Category ● Supports the following ● Supports the Name filter,
● Log Type additional columns Condition, Time filter,
- Action Details and Row filter.
● Event ID
- Action Result ● For more information on
● Event Time - Alert ID the All Logs table and its
● Previous Value - Alias [Observer] constraints, see All Logs
- Alias [Source] Report.
● Event Message
- Attachment
Text ● The values of filters
- Discipline
● Quality - Event Mode applied on the Alias
[Source] column are
● Date/Time - Event Details
case sensitive.
● Record Type - Category Priority
- Management Station ● Values are displayed as
● Event Cause - Observer Description per value scaled units (if
● Event State - Observer Designation configured). For more
● Previous Quality - Observer Location information, see Value
- Observer Name Scale Units.
● Source
- Observer Identifier
Description
[Internal]
● Action - Observer Property
● Source Property - Source Designation
- Source Designation
● Value
[Application View]
● Unit - Source Designation
[Current View]
- Source Designation
[Management View]
- Source Identifier
[Internal]
- Source Location
- Source Location
[Application View]
- Source Location
[Current View]
- Source Location
[Management View]
- Source Name
- Subdiscipline
- Subtype
- Type
- User
- System Name
- Audit Trail
- Object Version
- Comment
- Reference Time
- Supervisor
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 566 of 709 257 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Orphans ● Orphan Type ● Supports the following ● Condition filter on the

● Object Identifier additional columns Orphan Type column is
- Object Designation mandatory. You will not
● Object Location
- System Name be able to retrieve data,
● Object Property if you do not apply the
condition filter.
● This table displays only if
you have enabled the
View Orphan Logs
application right from the
Security node in the
Management View
Orphan ● Source Time ● Supports the following ● Supports: Condition,

Activities ● Object Identifier additional columns Time, and Row filter.
- Attachment ● Condition filter on the
● Object
- Audit Trail Object Identifier column
Designation
- Comment is mandatory.
● Object Property - Error
● Log Type - Object Location
- Object Version
● Action View Orphan Logs
- Previous Quality
● Status application right from the
- Quality
● Previous Value - Reference Time
Management View.
Text - System Name
- Supervisor
● Value Text
● User Name
● Management
Station
● Message Text
Orphan ● Event Time ● Supports the following ● Supports: Condition,

Events ● Object Identifier additional columns Time, and Row filter.
- Category Priority ● Condition filter on the
● Event State
- Event Details Object Identifier column
● Event Category - Event Message Text is mandatory.
● Event Cause - Event Mode
- Event Source ● This table displays only if
● Event ID you have enabled the
- Event Value
● Object View Orphan Logs
- Event Went
Designation - Object Location application right from the
● Object Property - System Name
Management View.
● User Name - Transition Time
- Went Text
Orphan ● DateTime ● Supports the following ● Supports: Condition,

Trends ● Value additional columns Time, and Row filter.
- Object Designation ● Condition filter on the
● Object Identifier
- System Name Object Identifier column
● Quality
is mandatory to fetch
● Object Location records of deleted trend
log objects and trend log
multiple objects.
View Orphan Logs
application right from the
Management View.
258 | 352 Page 567 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Select Columns Dialog Box

When you add a table to a report, you can add, remove, or delete columns from
the Select Columns dialog box.
Select Columns Dialog Box Components

Description
Parent tab Allows you to add, remove, or reorder Parent columns in the table.
Object Type (Displays only for a Point table) Lists the object collection. When an object is
selected in the Object Type drop-down list, all the associated properties are
listed in the Available Columns list.
Type filter (Displays only for an Objects table) Allows you to enter the object type
description on which you want to filter the object types to be displayed in the
Type drop-down list. For example, if you want the Type drop-down list to
display all BACnet object types, enter BACnet as the type filter.
Type (Displays only for an Objects table) Displays the list of object types available
in the system. You must select the object type whose columns are to be
displayed in the Available columns field.
NOTE: In case of a distributed system, the Type drop down list displays the
Object Models of only the current system on which the report is configured.
Load (Displays only for an Objects table) Click this button to populate the
Available columns list with the columns corresponding to the selected object
type in the Type list.
Available columns Displays the following information:

● Common columns applicable to any type of object. These are listed at
the top of the list. For example, Discipline, Object Name, Object
Description, and so on.
● Columns referring to properties supported by the selected object type.
These are listed after the common columns and have a tree structure.
When you click any such column, the tree expands and displays the
attributes of the property. For example, if you click the expander of the
Current_Priority property, its attributes such as Archive, Activity Log,
Min, Max, Default, and so on display.
NOTE: View-specific columns such as Source Location and Source
Designation are dynamically added to the Available columns list when
you create a new view.
Selected Columns Displays the mandatory columns of a selected table. You can add columns
to the selected columns list by selecting the check box associated with each
column in the Available Columns list.
Select Default Selects the default columns in the Available Columns list.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 568 of 709 259 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Clear All Unchecks all columns except mandatory columns. The Selected Columns
list displays only mandatory columns.
Moves the selected column one step up in the Selected Columns list. The
Move Up Move Up button is unavailable if you select the column on the top.
Moves the selected column one step down in the Selected Columns list. The
Move Down Move Down button is unavailable if you select the column at bottom.
Removes the selected column from the Selected Columns list.

Remove
Sorting Data in Tables

Sorting allows you to arrange data in a table in the ascending or descending order.
Sorting priority depends on the order in which the column headers are clicked. You
can sort the table columns in Edit mode as well as in Run mode. If you sort the
table columns in Edit mode, then the sorted data displays in Run mode according
to the sort criteria specified in Edit mode. When sorting is applied on an executed
report, data in the current snapshot is sorted.
In Activities, Events and Event Details tables, you cannot sort columns such as
type, sub-type, discipline, object name, object description or object location. In
Trends tables, you can only sort the Date column. By default, whenever you insert
a Trends table there is an ascending sort on the Date column.
NOTE:
You cannot perform sorting during report execution. You can continue sorting
after report execution is complete or is stopped.
Plot Group Box

A plot displays data in a graphical view. The Plot group box contains different
graphic elements from different data sources such as Trends and Graphics.
Graphics Plot
You can drag-and-drop any graphics definition or manual view port from System
Browser onto a Report Definition to insert a graphics plot. This inserts a
placeholder graphics plot and sets the Name filter to the dragged and dropped
object.
When you execute a report containing a graphics plot, it displays the graphic image
associated with the dragged and dropped object. If the object is not present in any
of the graphics definitions, then an error message displays in the report
management section.
Trends Plot
You can drag-and-drop a Trend View Definition from System Browser onto a
Report Definition to insert a trends plot. The system behaves the same way as
when inserting a graphics plot. For more information on the Trends Plot and its
configuration, see Configuring a Trends Plot [➙ 111].
Textgroup Box
Displays a label that you can add to a Report Definition. You can insert labels
(Blank, Page, and Report) in the header/footer section or anywhere in the Report
Definition.
Using labels, you can type text to be displayed in the Report Definition or insert
keywords. By default the labels display all the languages configured in the system.
260 | 352 Page 569 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Keyword Group Box

Keywords are pre-defined templates that can be added anywhere in a Report
Definition. They are replaced with actual data in Run mode and when the report
document (PDF, XLS) is created.
There are two types of keywords:
● Content-specific, which can be inserted only above tables/plots. For example,
content-specific keywords, such as Content Type, Name filter or Record Count,
cannot be inserted in the header/footer section of a Report Definition.
● Generic, which can be inserted anywhere including the header and footer of
the Report Definition
For example, you can add the Date keyword in the Report Definition header to
display the date on which the report is executed.
A default report template may contain generic and content-specific keywords.
Creating a new Report Definition displays generic keywords, but not the content-
specific keywords. The applicable content-specific keywords are automatically
inserted above an inserted table and/or plot; however certain keywords are not
applicable for certain types of tables/plots. For example, if the default template
contains the content-specific keyword Time Range and you insert the Active
Events table in the Report Definition, the Time Range keyword will not be inserted
above the Active Events table in the Report Definition as the Time filter is not
applicable for the Active Events table.
The following keywords are supported by Reports:
Content-specific Keyword List

Content-specific Description
Keyword
CONTENT TYPE Displays the name of the content provider – Alarm, Log, Reference, Objects, and
Graphics.
NAME FILTER Displays the Name filters set for the content provider.
CONDITION Displays the Condition filter expression set for a table. In case of Plot content, this
FILTER keyword remains empty.
TIME RANGE Displays the Time filter set for the content provider.
CONTENT Displays the Date and Time when execution started for the content provider.
START
CONTENT STOP Displays the Date and Time when execution completed or stopped for the content
provider.
CONTENT Displays the time difference between Content Start and Content Stop.
DURATION
CONTENT STATE Succeeded – Displays if content provider’s execution succeeds.

Cancelled – Displays if content provider’s execution stops or fails.
CONTENT Provides additional information about Content execution. It is independent of the

ERRORSTATE Content state. The following states are possible:
OK - Succeeded
Errors - Errors occurred
Failures - Severe errors occurred
CONTENT Displays the error description of Content ErrorState.

ERRORSTATE
MESSAGE
CONTENT Displays the detailed information about the Content creation activity.
ACTIVITY
CONTENT Displays the Content execution progress from 0% to 100%.

PROGRESS
RECORD COUNT Displays the number of records in the table.
SYSTEM NAME Displays the name of the system on which the current report is present.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 570 of 709 261 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Generic Keyword List

Generic Keywords Description
DATE Displays the Date (format is location-dependent)
TIME Displays the Time (format is location-dependent)
PAGE Displays the page number when the report document (PDF) is created.
PAGES Displays the total number of pages when the report document (PDF) is
created.
NOTE: Keywords Page and Pages are replaced by page numbers and total
number of pages respectively only when inserted in Header or Footer of the
Report Definition.
USER Displays the name of the logged-in user.
Desigo CC NAME Displays the name of the management station that created the report.
REPORT NAME Displays the name of the Report Definition.
REPORT Displays the description typed for the Report Definition.

DESCRIPTION
REPORT START Displays the Date and Time when report execution started.
REPORT STOP Displays the Date and time when report execution completed or stopped.
REPORT DURATION Displays the time difference between Report Start and Report Stop.
REPORT STATE Succeeded - Displays if the report execution succeeds.

Cancelled - Displays if the report execution stops or fails.
REPORT Provides additional information about report execution. It is independent of

ERRORSTATE the report state.
REPORT Displays the error description of report ErrorState.

ERRORSTATE
MESSAGE
REPORT ACTIVITY Displays detailed information about report creation activity.
REPORT PROGRESS Displays the report execution progress:

If continuous progress is possible, a number between 0 and 100 displays
If no continuous progress is possible, In progress displays.
REPORT SUMMARY Displays the summary.
EVENT Displays information related to an event only when the report with this
INFORMATION keyword is executed in the context of an event, for example, in Investigative
Treatment or Assisted Treatment.
Logo Group Box

You can insert logos into a Report Definition using the Logo group box. For
example, you can add your company’s logo to a report.
You can define, and change the size, position, and indentation of a logo. To insert
a logo to a Report Definition, you must upload it using the Manage Logo dialog
box.
262 | 352 Page 571 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Components of Manage Logo Dialog Box

Description
Select logo to upload Displays selected image file path.
Browse Opens the Windows Open dialog box.
Upload Adds a new Logo to the Available Logos list.

NOTE: The Upload button remains unavailable until a valid path and file
name is selected.
Thumbnail Displays the thumbnail view of an image.
Logo name Saves as Logo name. The Logo name must be unique.
Delete Deletes selected logos.

NOTE: The Delete button remains unavailable until a logo is selected.
Close Closes the Manage Logo dialog box.
Form Controls Group Box

Form controls are controls that you can edit in Run mode. There are four form
controls - Editable Field, Custom Text Selection, Text Group Selection, and
Comments Table. These controls are accessed from the Form Controls group box
within the Insert group box in the Home tab of Reports.
The Editable Field control displays a watermark text that enables you to perform
the required action. You can change this text if you want the control to display a
different text when the report is executed. These controls can also be used to
provide event treatment related information in reports for operating procedures.
Following is an overview of the form controls:
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 572 of 709 263 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Editable Field
Use the Editable Field control, to enter text in Run mode. This field does not
support keywords.
Custom Text Selection

The Custom Text Selection control provides a drop-down list that enables you to
add, modify, and delete text entries in Edit mode and select entries in Run mode.
Components of the Custom Text Selection Control

Add Adds the text entered to the control.

NOTE: Available only when some text is entered.
Update Modifies an existing entry.

NOTE: Available only when you change an existing entry.
Flag Allows you to enter text for all languages configured in the
system.
You can add text in any of the languages configured in the system. In Run mode,
this control displays text using the logged-in language of the user.
Text Group Selection

The Text Group Selection control provides a drop-down list with entries from a text
group in Run mode. You can drag-and-drop a text group to this control in Edit
mode and the values display in Run mode. However, you can add only one text
group to the control. If more than one text group is added, the existing group is
over written with the new group. If you add new entries, modify or delete existing
entries from the associated text group, the control displays the updated values
every time you run the report. If the text group is deleted, a message indicating that
the group is no longer available displays.
Text Group Selection Control - Edit Mode
Text Group Selection Control - Run Mode
Comments Table
The Comments table allows you to add, modify, and delete comments in Run
mode. You can modify and delete your own comments by clicking Edit and
Delete that are available in Run mode.
Comments Table
Column Description
Creation date Displays the date and time stamp when comment is added
User Displays the ID of the user who entered the comment
Management Station Displays the workstation from where comment is added
Comment Allows you to enter comments
Creation date, User, and Management Station are read only. These are populated
with information after you enter the comments and press ENTER. To add a new
line to the comments, press ALT+ENTER.
264 | 352 Page 573 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Unlike other tables, the columns in this table are fixed and you cannot perform
column operations like adding, deleting, reordering, and sorting. Also, this table
does not support filtering.
Figure 21:
View Group Box

The View group box provides the following options that determine the visibility of a
report on the screen.
● Page Width
Adjusts the width of a report page to use all the available width of the Reports
workspace.
● Full Page
Displays a full page to maximize the space available in the Reports workspace.
● Original Size
Displays the width of a report page in normal size.
Options Group Box

The Options group box provides additional options available in the Home tab:
● Show in Related Items check box
While creating a Report Definition, enable this check box to create a standard
report. When you select an object from System Browser, this standard report
displays as a link in the Related Items.
● Date/time in UTC format check box
Selecting this check box, the date and time you type is represented in UTC
format. The following elements in Reports display date/time values:
– Keywords (Date, Time, Report Start, Report Stop, Content Start, Content
Stop)
– Columns of the tables
- Source Time column (Activities)
- Alert time and Transition time (Events)
- Creation date time (Active Events)
- Date
- Alert time and Alert went (for parent record of Event Details
- Time (for child record of Event Details)
- Event Stamp Fault, Event Stamp Off-Normal and Event Stamp Normal
(BACnet Event Information)
– Time filter dialog box
– Condition filter dialog box (Data in the reports can be filtered based on data
time values)
● Fixed Locale check box
Selecting this check box and a locale from the corresponding list, displays the
date/time and decimal separator according to the format set for the locale on
the server. For example, if you select English-US as the locale, the date/time
and decimal separator set for English-US on the server displays in the report.
● Show DateTime with milliseconds check box
Selecting this check box displays the date and time values till milliseconds.
When you save a report definition as a default template and select this check
box, any new report definition that is created based on this template displays
the date and time values till milliseconds. By default, this check box is not
selected.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 574 of 709 265 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
3.5.2.3 Filter Tab

The Filter tab allows you to define and apply different filters for data retrieval.
Name Filter
The Name filter allows you to filter data based on the Name or Description of
System Browser objects. You can apply a Name filter to a table or plot.
When an Activities, Events, Active Events, BACnet Alarm Summary, BACnet
Enrollment Summary, BACnet Event Information, and/or Objects table is inserted
in the Report Definition, a valid Name filter “CurrentSystemName.*:*” is added by
default, where CurrentSystemName is the name of the system in which report
definition is created or opened. This default Name filter can be replaced with a * to
fetch the data from all the views of all the configured systems in a distributed
environment. You can add Name filters from the Name Filter dialog box.
Name Filter Dialog Box
Use the Name Filter dialog box to add, edit and delete Name filter conditions. The
added Name filter is also added to the Name Filter group box when the dialog box
is closed.
Name Filter Dialog Box Components

Field Description
Name Creates a Name filter according to the object name displayed in System
Browser.
Description Creates a Name filter according to the object description displayed in the
System Browser. A message in red displays below the Name Filter list if the
filter is invalid.
Name Filter List Lists all the Name filters and displays whether the applied filter is valid or
not. The Name filter list contains four columns.
Total no. of filters: Displays the total number of filters in the column header
and displays the sequential number before each Name filter.
Valid: Shows if the applied filter is valid or not (OK or question mark symbol
(?) respectively).
Children: Disabling this check box excludes the child nodes of the System
Browser object from the Report Definition.
Name filter: Displays the hierarchical path of the System Browser object.
266 | 352 Page 575 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Name Filter Displays the filter that is currently selected in the Name Filter list. You can
type a name into this field. The valid format for entering a Name filter is
SystemName.ViewName:Hierarchy.*, where.* is for displaying the child
nodes of the selected object. For example, System1.Application
View.Site.Building.Floor1.*
NOTE: For a plot, you can set only one Name filter at a time.
Validate Checks whether the applied filter is valid or not.

NOTE: Displays only for Trends Table, Trends Plot, and Graphics Plot.
Accept Accepts the change made to a Name filter. This button is unavailable until a
change is made to an existing Name filter.
New Adds a new Name filter to the Name Filter list. This button is unavailable
until a Name filter is typed in the Name field or if any existing Name filters
are selected in a Name Filter list.
NOTE: When you add the Name filter for the very first time, the default
Name filter CurrentSystemName.*:* is replaced.
Delete Deletes an existing Name filter. This button is unavailable until one or more
Name filters is selected in the Name Filter list.
NOTE: When all the Name filters are deleted the default Name filter
CurrentSystemName.*:* is restored.
NOTE 1:
For Trends table, Trends plot, and Graphics plot no default Name filter is added.
You can apply only single Name filter.
NOTE 2:
For Trends table, you can drag-and-drop Offline, Online Trend Logs, and Trend
View Definitions.
Wildcard Characters in Name Filters (For Single Systems):

You can use wildcard characters (* and ?) in a Name filter. The following examples
will help you in using these characters:
● To display the details of only Analog Output objects of a device, Dev 1 in a
report, specify the Name filter as
"System1.ManagementView:ManagementView.FieldNetworks.BAC1.Hardware
.Dev1.Local_IO.AO*". When you run the report, the details of all the Analog
Output objects belonging to the Dev 1 device will display.
● To display the details of only Analog Output objects of all system devices
present in System 1 in a report, specify the Name filter as
.Dev*.Local_IO.AO*". When you run the report, the details of all Analog Output
objects belonging to all devices in the system with names starting with Dev will
display.
● To display the details of Analog Output objects with names starting from
Analog Output 11 through Analog Output 19 of device Dev 1 in a report, specify
the Name filter as
.Dev1.Local_IO.AO_1?". When you run the report, the details of Analog Output
objects with names starting from AO_11 through AO_19 belonging to device
Dev 1 will display. The assumption here is that there is a device Dev1 in your
system that has Analog Output objects with names starting from AO_11
through AO_19.
● If you want to display the details of Analog Output objects with names starting
from Analog Output 11 through Analog Output 19 of all devices with names in
the range of 21 through 29 in a report, specify the Name filter as
.Dev2?.Local_IO.AO_1?". When you run the report, the details of all analog
output devices with names starting from AO_11 through AO_19 that are
present in devices Dev21 through Dev29 will display. The assumption here is
that there are devices in your system having names Dev 21 through Dev 29
and there are Analog Output objects having names AO_11 through AO_19 in
those devices.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 576 of 709 267 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Wildcard Characters in Name Filters (For Distributed Systems)

● To display the details of all the Analog Output objects of all system devices
present in all the configured systems in a distributed environment, specify the
following Name filter in the report definition,
“*.ManagementView:ManagementView.FieldNetworks.*.AO*”. When you run
the report, the details of all the Analog Output objects belonging to all the
devices in all the systems configured in a distributed environment will display.
However, when you apply wild cards to a Name filter, the report execution may be
slower. Therefore, if you are processing an operating procedure form, report steps,
or Log Viewer on a system, reports executed on this system must have more
specific Name filters to achieve optimum performance.
Condition Filter
A Condition filter defines a filter expression that is composed of one or more filter
expressions.
Condition Filter Condition
A Condition filter condition is composed of:
● Column name (Condition Name)
● Operators
● Condition value
Examples of Condition Filter Expressions
The following list contains some valid Condition filter expressions:
● Status = “Alarm”
● Status = {“Alarm”; “Alarm Acked”; “Alarm Unacked”}
● Alarm Value = {12; “Text”}
● Time of last Change = “Current day”
NOTE:
You cannot apply the Condition filter to Plots.
The Condition filter also allows you to create complex filters and conditions using
mathematical and logical operators, and wildcard characters. The following
operators are supported:
● Mathematical Operators: Equal to (=), Not Equal to (<>), Greater than (>), Less
than (<), Greater than Equal to (>=), Less than Equal to (<=), and (←) In
operator
● Logical Operators: AND, OR, NOT
● Wildcard Character: Asterisk (*)
NOTE: The In operator (←) is used to filter data in a column that supports
display of multiple values in a single cell. Following is an example of columns
having the possibility to display multiple values in a single cell.
Table Name Columns with possibility to display multiple values

in a single cell
Objects Related Items Type

Related Items
Activities Value
Previous Value
Quality
Previous Quality
Active Events Available Commands
268 | 352 Page 577 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Condition Filter Syntax

When you are creating a Condition filter, you must know the data type of the
property for which you want to apply the filter. Following are some examples which
will help you create Condition filters without syntax errors.
1. If property displays text data, for example string or enumeration, then the value
must be enclosed within double quotes.
– ‘[Current_Priority]’ = “Priority - 16”
– ‘Object Description’ = “Analog Output 1”
– ‘[Event_State]’ = “Normal”
– '[Present_Value]' = "INACTIVE"
NOTE: The values of some properties such as [Current_Priority] are
referenced in text groups. Therefore, whenever you are assigning values
for such properties, you must refer to the respective text groups. In order to
refer to the text groups in the Management View, you must have an
Engineering license. In the absence of an Engineering license, you will
have to run the report to find out the appropriate values for such properties.
2. If property displays values in the date time format, then the value must be in
date time format configured in Windows on the server. Date must be in the
short date format, time in the long time format (24 hours).
– ‘Main Value’ = 3/13/2014 16:04:25 (assuming that the date format on the
server is M/d/yyyy)
3. If property displays Boolean data, for example. TRUE, FALSE, then the value
must be enclosed in double quotes
– '[Stop_When_Full]' = "True"
– ‘[Log_Enable]’ = “False”
4. If property displays numeric data, for example,. 54.11, 25, -20, then the values
must be specified as follows:
– '[Present_Value]' = 54.11
– '[Present_Value]' >= 25
NOTE: The decimal separator will be according to your Windows Regional
and Language settings.
5. If property displays bit string, then the value must be enclosed by double
quotes
– '[Status_Flags]' <- "Fault"
– ‘[Event_Enable]’ <- “To Fault”
– ‘[Limit_Enable]’ <- “Low Limit Enable”
The Condition filter is applicable only to Objects, Active Events, Activities, Events,
Event Details, and Trends tables.
When you select any of these tables, you can display the Condition Filter dialog
box.
For the Objects table, you can add a conditional filter that specifies the acceptable
age of the data on which the filter is applied. For example, if you specify 0 as the
acceptable age, the filter is always applied on the latest data from the field system.
If you specify 2 weeks, the age of the data with the cache is checked. If the data is
older than 2 weeks it is obtained from the field system, else the data from the
cache is used for filtering. This setting helps in the faster report generation.
Condition Filter Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to specify the condition to filter the report data. You can
apply the Condition filter on all columns except columns of type date/time.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 578 of 709 269 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Condition Filter Dialog Box Components

Field Description
Type filter Displays only when an Objects table is selected in the Report Definition.
Allows you to enter the object type description on which you want to filter the
object types to be displayed in the Type drop-down list. For example, if you
want the Type drop-down list to display all BACnet object types, enter
BACnet as the type filter.
Type Displays only when an Objects table is selected in the Report Definition. It
lists all the object types available in the system. You must select the object
type whose columns are to be displayed in the Available Columns list.
NOTE: In case of a distributed system, the Type drop down list displays the
Object Models of only the current system on which the report is configured.
Load Click this button to populate the Available columns list with the columns
corresponding to the selected object type in the Type list.
270 | 352 Page 579 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Available columns 1) Lists all the available columns of a selected table.

For an Objects table, the columns corresponding to the object type selected
in Type are listed.
In case of the Objects table, displays the following information:
● Common columns applicable to any type of object. These are listed at
the top of the list. For example, Discipline, Object Name, Object
Description, and so on.
● Columns referring to properties supported by the selected object type.
These are listed after the common columns and have a tree structure.
When you click any such column, the tree expands and displays the
attributes of the property. For example, if you click the expander of the
Current_Priority property, its attributes such as Archive, Activity Log,
Min, Max, Default, and so on display.
Operators List1) Lists all the operators associated with a specific column selected in the
Available Columns list.
Values List1) Lists all the values associated with a specific column selected in the
Available Columns list. Moreover, you can select multiple values by pressing
CTRL or SHIFT and selecting different values.
NOTE: Multiple values can be typed within braces {} and are separated by a
semicolon (;).
Filter expression field Displays the filter expression. You can edit a filter expression in this field.
NOTE: An invalid filter expression is highlighted in red.
Read all data from field Displays only when an Objects table is selected in the Report Definition. If
system this option is selected the objects data for filtering is always read from the
field system.
Read all data from Displays only when an Objects table is selected in the Report Definition. If
process image you select this option, the objects data is always read from the cache.
Read data from field Displays only when an Objects table is selected in the Report Definition. It
system older than allows you to specify the acceptable age of the data on which the filter is
applied. If you select this option, the value entered is compared with the age
of the data in the cache. If the data in the cache is older than the value
entered, it is obtained from the field system; otherwise data from the cache is
used for filtering.
New/Update Allows you to add or update a filter expression. Update is enabled only when
a valid filter expression is added or modified in the filter expression field.
AND/OR These are logical operators that allow you to combine filter expressions and
create complex filters. This button is unavailable until a filter expression is
added to the filter expression field.
"( ) " Allows you to group filter conditions, which define the order of their
evaluation. These brackets are unavailable until a filter expression is added
to the filter expression field.
1) The selected item displays below the list.
Time Filter
The Time Filter group box and the dialog box launcher icon is enabled only when
you select a table or plot in a Report Definition for which the Time filter is
applicable.
The Time filter allows you to specify time as a filter for retrieving records.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 580 of 709 271 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Time Filter Dialog Box Components

Field Description
Date time specification Shows LOCAL, when the Date/Time in UTC format check box on the Home
tab is not selected.
Select Column Displays only when an Events, All Logs, or Activities table is selected in the
Report Definition. The entries in the drop-down list depend on table selected
and allow you to filter information accordingly.
Events:
Event Time - Time when the event occurred
Event Went - Time when the event state changed
Transition Time - Time when the event was closed
All Logs:
Date/Time – Date/Time when the activity is performed or state change of the
event occurred.
Event Time - Time when the event occurred
Source Time -
Reference Time –
Activities:
Source Time -
Reference Time -
Exact Allows you to filter data based on the exact date specified.
272 | 352 Page 581 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Custom The Custom option allows you to set the date and time as per your
requirement. Selecting the Custom option enables the From/To field. The To
date should always be greater than From date. If the To date is less than the
From date, then the To field is highlighted in red and an error message
displays on mouse-over.
The From and To date should be same as the date already set in Short date
on your management station.
The Short Date is to be found under Short date: (Start > Control Panel >
Regional and Language Options > Regional Options)
Relative Relative has two options: Last and Current Period.

The Last option allows you to filter data for the last 'x' period that you specify.
For example, last 'x' hours, last 'x' months, last 'x' years, last 'x' weeks, last 'x'
days, or last 'x' minutes.
The Current Period option allows you to filter data for the current 'x' period
that you specify. For example, current 'x' hours, current 'x' months, current 'x'
years, current 'x' weeks, current 'x' days, or current 'x' minutes.
For example, if the current date and time on your computer is 10/07/2014
10.35 AM and you specify any of the following:
1 Hour in the Last option - The data for the 9:00 to 10:00 AM period is
retrieved
1 Hour in the Current Period option - The data for the 10:00 to 11:00 AM
period is retrieved
1 Month in the Last option - The data for the period June 01,2014 to July 01,
2014 is retrieved.
1 Month in the Current Period option - The data for the period July 01, 2014
to August 01, 2014 is retrieved.
1 Year in the Last option - The data for the period January 01, 2013 to
January 01, 2014 is retrieved.
1 Year in the Current Period option - The data for the period January 01,
2014 to January 01, 2015 is retrieved
NOTE: The Last and the Current Period field accepts only integer values up
to 3 digits.
Unlimited Default selection. Allows you to retrieve all records.
Defined By Source This option only displays for Trend objects. It sets the date and time to what
you have defined for the selected Trend View Definition.
Null Allows you to retrieve records with Null value.
Preview of Resulting Displays the resulting time range for the options selected in the Time filter
Time range dialog box. For example, if the present time is 02/06/2012 4:37 PM, then for
the selection current 24 hrs the Preview of Resulting Time Range displays
absolute time range for this selection as follows:
From: Sunday, February 05,2012 5:00:00 PM
To: Monday, February 06,2012 5:00:00 PM.
Row Filter
Allows you to set the maximum number of rows of a table to be displayed at
runtime.
Languages Filter
Allows you to set the language for a Report Definition. You can configure filters
(Condition and Name) in the selected language.
3.5.2.4 Layout Tab

The Layout tab allows you define the format of layout elements of a Report
Definition. It contains the following group boxes:
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 582 of 709 273 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Page Setup Group Box

The Page Setup group box allows you to set the orientation, page size, and margin
of the Report Definition.
Orientation
The Orientation menu contains two submenus:
● Portrait: long vertical edge
● Landscape: long horizontal edge (default)
Page Size
The Page Size menu contains several pre-configured sizes including: A3, A4, A5,
Letter, and so on. The default page size is A4.
Margins
The Margins menu has four preconfigured margins with values displayed for quick
selection:
● Normal (default)
● Narrow
● Moderate
● Wide
Header/Footer Group Box

The Header/Footer group box allows you to customize the width of the
header/footer sections of the report. The text of the group box and values change
depending on the header/footer selected in the report definition. For example, on
selecting the header, the title displays as Header and vice versa.
The group box contains 3 fields in which you can specify the width of the
header/footer section. The values are specified in percentage and the sum of the
values in all the 3 fields is 100%. If you specify 100 in any of the fields, then the
values in the other 2 fields is automatically updated to 0.
Placement Group Box

Using the Placement group box you can rearrange the position of the report
elements in a Report Definition by selecting an element and using the icons: Move
up. , Move down , Move to top , and Move to bottom .
When there is only one element present or if there are multiple elements but none
is selected, then all four icons are unavailable.
Position Group Box

The Position group box allows you to adjust the position of the layout elements of a
Report Definition.
274 | 352 Page 583 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Figure 22:
Position Group Box

Alignment Refers to the placement of objects or layout elements on the report page. The
different alignments are: Left, Center, and Right.
Indentation Allows you to set the distance between the report page margin and the actual
placement of the element.
Spacing Allows you to set the space before and after the layout elements.
Width Allows you to adjust the width of a layout element (logo and plot only).
Height Allows you to adjust the height of a table/plot (logo and plot only).
Font Group Box

The Font group box allows you to apply a font type, size, style and/or color to the
layout elements such as a label or a table.
The Font group box becomes enabled only when you have inserted a label or a
table in a Report Definition template while configuring a Report Definition.
Auto-scaling Group Box

Selecting the Auto-scaling check box adjusts the column width automatically in
PDF documents that are generated when you execute a report.
If the Auto-scaling check box is not selected, then the PDF may not display all
table columns.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 584 of 709 275 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
3.5.2.5 Data Tab

The Data tab allows you to specify the location from which the data is to be
retrieved when you run the report. It also provides the option to define the Graphics
filter.
If you have selected any of the options from the Table group box, the same option
is also selected in the Condition Filter dialog box. Any change in selection reflects
in the Condition Filter dialog box as well. However, if you change your selection in
the Condition Filter dialog box, it does not reflect in the Table group box options of
the Data tab.
Data Tab
Read all data from… Description
Field system The objects data is always read from the field system which ensures
that you always get the latest data.
Process image The objects data is always read from the cache which helps generating
reports more quickly.
Field system older than… The age of the data entered is compared to the age of the data in the
cache. If the data in the cache is older than the value entered, it is
obtained from the field system; otherwise the data from the cache
displays.
Graphics Group Box

When All Related Graphics is selected, the related graphics and view ports of an
object display in Run mode. To view the graphics and view ports, you must assign
the object as a Name filter to the graphics plot.
3.5.2.6 Settings Tab

The Settings tab allows you to configure the output format and destination for a
Report Definition.
Report Output Group Box

The Report Output group box displays the configured entries for a Report
Definition.
Clicking the Dialog Launcher displays the Report Output Definition dialog box
that allows you to configure the report output settings. The configured report output
definitions are executed when the report definition runs automatically.
276 | 352 Page 585 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 586 of 709 277 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Report Output Definition Dialog Box Components

Field Description
Report format Lists the following supported file formats.

PDF [➙ 279]
Excel [➙ 279]
CSV
XML – This format is available only if you have the relevant license.
NOTE 1: According to the EMC requirement, the CSV report format is
supported to export a Trends report in the CSV format. The EMC proxies
have plug-ins that support converting data from CVS formats for import into
EMC. To have Desigo CC trend data compatible with the EMC trend data
import plug-in, the CSV columns (for trends table only) are modified: Date;
Data Source; Value (separated by semicolon).
NOTE 2: The CSV does not support logos or plots; also Report header/footer
is not present.
NOTE 3: The CSV format applies only to exporting the Trends table.
Destination types Lists all the various destination types: File [➙ 281], Email [➙ 282] and Printer
[➙ 285].
The Destination types displayed in the list depend on the type of format
selected in Report format.
NOTE: When you select the Destination Type as File or Email, you can
specify the name of the file that will be generated upon automatic report
execution using either of the following options:
● Use report name as file name
● Enter custom file name
Destination Depending on the Destination types settings, you can configure the
destination in one of the following ways:
● File: Configured folder name displays in the File drop-down list.
● Email: Email text field is populated with the pre-configured email
contacts.
● Printer: Available printers display in the Printer drop-down list.
Use report name as file Default option. Becomes available only when you select the destination type
name as File or E-mail. In this case, the File Name field is populated with the
selected report name and is unavailable.
Enter custom file name When selected, allows you to type in the desired file name in the File Name
text box.
File name If the file name contains special characters such as, / \ : * ? < > | “, then it is
highlighted with a red border and a tool-tip displays the error message.
Append date/time to Becomes available only when you select the destination type as File or
file name Email. When checked, adds the date and time to the file name.
Create new/overwrite Default option. Allows you to configure a new file to the configured
existing file destination when routing reports. If the file does not exist, a new file is
created, existing files are overwritten.
Append data Adds the currently executing report data to the existing file with the same file
name and file type present at the destination. If there is no such file, a new
file will be created.
NOTE 1: This option only applies to PDFs.
NOTE 2: In case of an existing split PDF document, if the Append data check
box is selected, the number of available pages in the previous split document
is ignored and, a new split document is created in the same folder with an
incremental number.
Change Allows you to modify an existing Report Output Definition entry.
Add Adds a Report Output definition entry to the Output Definition list.
NOTE: This button is unavailable if the Destinations drop-down list is empty.
Output Definition List Displays the existing Report Output Definition entries.
Delete Deletes the selected Report Output Definition.
278 | 352 Page 587 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
PDF Report Format

After executing a Report Definition manually or automatically, you can view and
save the report as a PDF document. A PDF document contains all the report
elements of the Report Definition with output data and sorting applied. It also
displays the special formatting applied to Report Definition elements (such as
tables, plots, keywords, and so on). The PDF document can have a maximum of
500 pages, however if the number of pages exceeds 500 the document splits into
two. You can add digital signatures or watermark text on the generated pdf reports
using the Adobe Acrobat DC software (not included).
You can either view the PDF document or the split documents in the Report
Management section under the Report snapshot when you generate the report
manually or you can locate them in the folder configured in the Report Output
Definition dialog box when you generate the report automatically.
Reports do not support TrueType collections for PDF generation. To generate a
PDF document for Asian languages, you must select TrueType fonts which support
Asian characters in the Report Definition, for example, Arial Unicode MS.
If the PDF document generated for operating procedure does not display any data,
ensure the following:
● Check the applied filters and make corrections (if required)
● A graphics containing the object in the event is available
Excel Report Format

After executing a Report Definition manually or automatically, you can view and
save the report as an Excel (XLSX) document. This enables you to perform any
calculations (if required) on the Excel document by applying Excel formulas. You
can either view the Excel document in the Report Management section under the
Report snapshot when you generate the report manually or you can locate them in
the folder configured in the Report Output Definition dialog box when you generate
the report automatically. If the size of the document exceeds the Excel maximum of
1000 worksheets or 1,048,575 rows, a new Excel file is created for the next set of
records.
An Excel document contains all of the reporting elements of the Report Definition
with output data and user-defined configuration. Form Controls in the report
definition are not present in the Excel document. Any special formatting applied to
the Report Definition elements are not retained in the Excel document.
If you have multiple tables or plots in a report definition, the generated Excel
document displays the details of each table or plot in a separate worksheet. Each
worksheet also displays information on other reporting elements such as keywords
and logos in the report definition. Each column in the worksheet has a combo box
that corresponds to a table column that enables you to perform analysis on the
table data. In case of an Event Details table the generated Excel document does
not have any combo boxes as the data displays parent and child records.
However, if you remove the child columns from the Select Columns dialog box, run
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 588 of 709 279 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
the report, and then generate the Excel document, only the parent records display
and the columns display a combo box that enables you to perform data analysis.
In order to perform analysis on a specific set of columns in a table, you can add a
PivotTable or chart to the generated Excel document and set this document as a
template to the report definition having this table. When you run the report and
generate the Excel document, information related to the columns you added to the
PivotTable or chart displays in a separate worksheet.
The PivotTable or chart in the template must have columns of only those tables
that are present in the report definition. For example, if you have a report definition
with an All Logs table, the PivotTable or chart in the Excel document that is set as
a template to this definition must have columns specific to the All Logs table only.
In case of an Event Details table, you must remove all the child columns for the
PivotTable to be displayed.
280 | 352 Page 589 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
In case of a distributed system, the process of generating the PDF or XLS

documents will stop if you switch over to a different system. During this process, if
the document is likely to be split into multiple documents, then the pending
documents will not be available. You can decide whether you want to proceed with
the document generation process by confirming to the dialog box options that
display when you switch over to a different system.
File Destination Type

Before you save a file at a specific location in your local management station, you
must configure the output folder paths in the Report Output Folders Configuration
dialog box. You can launch this dialog box from the Report Output Definition dialog
box.
After configuration, you can view and select these output folder paths in the Report
Output Definition dialog box.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 590 of 709 281 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Report Output Folders Configuration Components

Field Description
Folder Alias Displays the name of the destination folder. When you select File in the
Destination Type field, this name will be displayed in the File drop-down list
of the Destination list of the Report Output Definition dialog box.
Folder Path Displays the folder path that you have selected using the Browse button. You
can configure a maximum of 100 folder paths. An error message displays if
the number of folder path exceeds 100.
Browse Helps you to locate the destination folder. You can also create a new folder
at a desired location.
NOTE: If you do not have the required permission on the selected folder, an
error message displays.
Folder Description (Optional) Describes the contents of a folder.

Add Adds the Folder Alias, Folder Path, and Folder Description in the List of
folders for Report Output. This button is unavailable until all the mandatory
fields are filled.
List of Folders for Displays list of configured output folders. On selecting a configured output
Report Output folder, the Folder Alias, Folder Path, and Folder Description fields are
populated.
Change Modifies an existing output folder configuration in the list.
Delete Deletes a selected entry from the list. This button remains unavailable until
an output folder is selected in the List of Folders for Report Output. If you try
to delete an entry which is used in any other Report Definition, a confirmation
message displays.
Clear Clears all the fields that are populated when you select an output folder entry
in the List of Folders for Report Output.
282 | 352 Page 591 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Destination Type - Email

The Report Output Definition dialog box allows you to send a report via email. You
can send all documents in one mail or configure the number of documents to be
sent per email. The default is one document per email.
Before sending an email you must configure the mail server.
The Email Contacts dialog box displays when you select the destination type as
Email and then click the Select Contacts button. This dialog box allows you to
choose and filter from the list of all recipients having email addresses configured in
the Contacts selection list.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 592 of 709 283 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
Email Contacts Dialog Box Components

Field Description
Contacts selection Shows the names of the configured contacts in the Address Book followed by
their email address in brackets. This list is sorted alphabetically.
NOTE: A recipient may have up to three different email addresses
configured.
Filter List Entries Allows you to type in a filter. For example, if you type the letter “A”, the
recipient list displays all the contacts starting with the letter A.
Automatic Update of Configured Email Addresses

The Output Definition list in the Report Output Definition dialog box and Contacts
selection list in the Email Contacts dialog box updates automatically, if you change
or delete the email address of a particular recipient in Address Book.
284 | 352 Page 593 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Action Result
A recipient email address is changed in The new email address reflects in the Output Definition list in
the Address Book the Report Output Definition dialog box and Contacts section
list in the Email Contacts dialog box.
A listed email address of the configured The list of email addresses in the Output Definition list in the
contact is deleted in the Address Book Report Output Definition dialog box displays in red. On
moving your mouse pointer over the text, the following
tooltip message displays. One or more email
addresses are invalid. Select the correct
email address. Report will not be sent to
the invalid email addresses. On selecting the
report output definition, the email addresses configured in
the definition display in the Destination field. The deleted
email address displays as Unknown object. In order to
remove the unknown object from the list, you must select a
valid email address from the Select contacts dialog box.
The report is run by clicking the Report is routed to the valid email addresses configured in
Execute button in the Extended the report output definition.
Operation tab
A recipient is deleted from the Address The list of email addresses in the Output Definition list in the
Book Report Output Definition dialog box displays in red. On
moving your mouse pointer over the text, the following
tooltip message displays One or more email
addresses are invalid. Select the correct
email address. Report will not be sent to
the invalid email addresses. On selecting the
report output definition, the email addresses configured in
the definition display in the Destination field as Unknown
objects.
Listed email address of the configured contact Recipient deleted from the Address Book
deleted in Address Book
Destination Type – Printer

The Report Output Definition dialog box allows you to send a Report Output
Definition to a printer.
You can print all or the first 100 (default) pages. You can edit the default and enter
the number of pages to be printed. Currently only PDF report format is supported
for printing. To print a PDF report format on a printer, you must configure a server
printer.
The document to be printed depends on the sorting you applied to the columns of a
table.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 594 of 709 285 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
3.5.2.7 Report Management Section

The Report Management section displays the Report execution status, such as
PDF/XLS document creation status, during Report execution. The Report
execution/generation mode is called Run mode. It also provides quick and easy
navigation to different Report snapshots. When you select a snapshot in the Report
Management section, it displays in Reports.
If you have executed a report and both, a PDF and Excel document are generated
from it, you can quickly switch between the two using the Report Management
section.
The Reports toolbar has a toggle icon called Report Management, which shows or
hides the Report Management section. This section is visible at the bottom of the
Reports window.
The Report snapshot of an executed Report Definition in the Report Management
section is available until the user logs out. The snapshots in the Report
Management section are displayed in a hierarchical manner. For example, if you
execute a Report and then view it as a PDF or Excel (XLS) document, then in the
Report Management section, the first entry is of Report execution and the second
entry is the PDF/XLS creation as displayed in the following image.
286 | 352 Page 595 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
You can also monitor the PDF/XLS document creation progress and stop it by
using the Stop button. However, if you stop the PDF/XLS document creation when
it is in progress, the consecutive split document creation will also be stopped.
You can delete the split document by using the Delete button or all the documents
by deleting the Report snapshot entry.
The entry of each split document in a Report Management section is a child of the
entry for the Report snapshot. Selecting any document entry, displays the
document linked to that entry in Reports.
NOTE:
This section does not display when the report is executed for a selected event
from Assisted Treatment.
Report Management Section Components

Field Description
Header Displays the name of the reporting object currently executing. For example,
the Report Definition name when executing a report.
State Displays the execution state of a Report, PDF, XLS. For example, Pending,
Succeeded, Failed, and so on.
Activity Displays the description of the task being performed.
Execution Start Displays the execution start date and time.
Action Displays the Stop button when the execution of a reporting object starts.
When the execution is finished, the Stop button changes to the Delete
button.
Progress Displays the Progress information in a progress bar to indicate the execution
progress.
Summary Displays the execution summary.

For example, if a BACnet device is unavailable or available but offline, then
the summary will be Report snapshot created successfully. At
least one error reported: BACnet error: Device has
operational problem.
3.5.2.8 Related Items Tab

The Related Items tab displays New Report, Related Report, and Show-in Related
Items Report as a link or icon on selection of a System Browser object.
New Report
This report is always available for quick access to a new Report Definition (as a link
or icon) in the Related Items tab upon selection of a System Browser object. On
clicking the New Report link/icon, a new Report Definition opens in the Secondary
pane (if the Primary pane is unlocked – pushpin horizontal). This Report Definition,
by default, contains the Objects table with the Name filter set to the selected object
in System Browser. If you select a Trend View Definition/Graphic Definition in
System Browser and click the New Report link/icon, then the Report Definition
contains a trend plot/graphics plot with the Name filter set to the selected Trend
View Definition/Graphic Definition. If multiple objects are selected in System
Browser, such as Graphics Definitions, Trend Definitions or BACnet devices/points
and you click the New Report link/icon in the Related Items tab, all the selected
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 596 of 709 287 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
objects are set as Name filters for the Objects table (no graphics plot, trends plot).
You can then configure and run this report as usual.
Related Report
If the selected System Browser object is defined as a Name filter in a report, then
this report becomes a related report for that object and displays as a link/icon in the
Related Items tab. On clicking this link/icon, the related report runs. During the
related report execution, the data is retrieved according to the Name filter set for
the report element in the Report Definition. The Name filter set in the report
element is not replaced by the selected System Browser object. For example, if an
Event Details report is present in the Related Items tab, it can be run for the
selected event in the Event List.
NOTE:
Ensure that in a Report Definition, you have set the complete path of the system
object as the Name filter (without any wild cards). If a wild card (? or *) is used in
the Name filter, then this Report Definition is not set as a related report and does
not display in the Related Items tab.
Show in Related Items Report

When you select a System Browser object, the reports having Show In Related
Items check box selected are displayed (as a link/icon) in the Related Items tab.
On clicking the link/icon, the report executes. During the report execution, the
Name filter is set to the path of the selected object in System Browser. If a Name
filter was configured in the report, it is replaced with the path of the selected object.
3.5.3 Reports Modes

Reports operates in two modes:
Edit Mode
When you create a new Report Definition, it opens in Edit mode (default mode).
Edit mode allows you to design the layout of a report, delete a report, and so on.
You can also display/hide the Reports ribbon using the Properties icon .
NOTE:
You can switch to Run mode by clicking the Run icon or Run As icon in
the Reports toolbar.
288 | 352 Page 597 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Run Mode
The Run mode executes a Report Definition and displays the data retrieved from
Reports and other services. Following are the characteristics of the Run mode:
● The ribbon disappears.
● Keywords are replaced by actual data.
● No element can be added or deleted in this mode.
● The layout elements are populated with data.
● You can perform the following activities:
– Sorting (ascending or descending) or changing column width.
– Selecting rows in tables.
– Entering text in the Editable Field control.
– Selecting text entries from the Custom Text Selection control or values of a
text group from the Text Group Selection control.
– Adding, modifying, and deleting comments from the Comments table.
● The Stop icon or the Stop button in the Report Management

section stops the execution of a Report Definition.
● In Run mode, when you move the cursor over a table/plot, a tooltip displays the
applicable filter and the number of records (only for tables). The number of
records tooltip is helpful in deciding the destination type, for example, Printer.
● You can toggle to Edit mode by clicking Edit on the Reports toolbar. If you
perform sorting in Run mode and then switch to Edit mode, the Select Edit
Option dialog box displays asking whether you want to save or discard the
changes you made in the Run mode, or to create a new Report Definition
based on the changes.
NOTE:
When you select Control Panel > Region and Language > Additional Settings,
you can configure local settings for the following fields:
- numeric (including decimal symbol, no. of digits after decimal)
- short date
- short time
The report workspace specifications, such as page size/margin or table
width/height, also change according to the local settings.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 598 of 709 289 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Reports
3.5.4 Report Workpanes

You can work with reports in the the following panes:
Primary Pane
In the Primary pane, you can view and work with all types of reports and perform
activities including, but not limited, to the following:
● Create and configure a Report Definition by:
– Adding various report elements
– Configuring filters
– Applying formatting
● Locate and Modify a Report Definition
● Run a selected Report Definition
● View report execution status, document creation status, and so on during
report execution
● Display generated report in Run mode
● View a report as a PDF or XLS
● Export/Import a Report Definition
● Route a report to:
– Folders as files (PDF/XLS)
– Email recipients as a file attachment (PDF/XLS)
– Local printers (PDF only)
2 3
Name Description
1 Report Defintion Location of Report Definition and Report folders in the Application View of
Selection System Browser.
2 Report Execution Reports toolbar containing Report Definition execution command icons: Run
or Run As .
3 Executed Report Location of executed Report Definition.

Display NOTE: This displays in Run mode.
4 Report Status details of the executed or currently running Report Definition.
Management
5 Report Definition Properties (Last Run, Summary Status, and Show in Related Items)
Properties displayed in the Extended Operation tab.
290 | 352 Page 599 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Reports
3
Secondary Pane
If the Primary pane is unlocked (horizontal pushpin icon ), then you can work
with the following three additional report types in the Secondary pane:
● New Report: Opens a new Report Definition for configuration.
● Related Report: Opens the report related to the selected System Browser
object.
● Show in Related Items Report: Opens a report with the Show in Related Items
check box selected.
2
Name Description
1 Point Selection Location of Point in the Application View or Management View of System
Browser.
2 Report Definition Report Definition selected in the Related Items tab.

Selection
3 Executed Report Location of selected Report Definition—before and after execution—with
Display command toolbar to execute the Report Definition located on the left side of
the Secondary pane.
NOTE: Executed Report Definitions display in Run Mode.
4 Report Status details of the executed or currently running Report Definition.
Management
Properties displayed in the Extended Operation tab.
Contextual Pane – Extended Operation Tab

You can generate a selected report automatically by clicking Execute in the
Extended Operations tab of the Contextual pane.
2
3
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 600 of 709 291 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Name Description
1 Report Defintion Location of Report Definitions and Report folders in the Application View of
Selection System Browser.
2 Automatic report Runs a Report Definition in the background.
execution
Properties displayed in the Extended Operations tab.
3.6 Trends
The Trends application allows you to work with trends that are recurring samples of
data. These data samples can be taken at regular time intervals or whenever there
is a change in a value of an object by a prescribed amount. Some examples of
data samples in trending include the following:
● Collecting the room temperature after every 10 minutes.
● Sensitivity reading of smoke detectors once per week.
Trends are of two types, online and offline. Online trends [➙ 309] record real-time
values from your plant and display them graphically in a Trend View. Offline trend
[➙ 307] data is used for the longer-term storage and retrieval of historical data for
the analysis of entire plants or single processes.
You can add, modify, and delete values of trended properties of trended objects
that are logged in online as well as offline trends through the Manual Correction
application.
You can use Trend Views in two ways in the management station:
● During operation, trend data recorded in real-time and saved to the trend
database (management station is online).
● Trend data is recorded in the automation station (management station is
offline) and periodically loaded to the management station trend database.
● You can display the trend data in the Trend Viewer any time, even if the
management station is not connected to the site (no real-time data available).
The Trends application is covered by a license. In order to access the Trends
application, you must ensure that the Trends license is available in your system.
Record Trend Data

You can record trend data using either of the following methods:
● Change-of-value (COV)
The change-of-value method allows you to record new data when the data
point value changes. No value is recorded or transmitted if the value does not
change over an extended period of time. Database acquisition of several data
points in a Trend View is asynchronous.
● Interval-based
The interval-based method is applicable to record offline trend data. It allows
you to record current data as soon as the timestamp is reached. The data
values are recorded without impacting a defined COV property.
292 | 352 Page 601 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
Time 1 2 3 4
interval 70.8°F 70.3°F 70.8°F 72.5°F
based
Interval
73.0°F
Room temperature
72.0°F
71.0°F
70.0°F
COV
based 1 2 3 4 5 6
= 1.0 70.0°F 71.0°F 72.0°F 71.0°F 72.0°F 71.0°F
● Triggered
Refers to the BACnet reference names of the selected trigger from reaction,
scheduler or the BACnet reference.
Trends in Distributed System

When working with trends in a distributed environment, you must understand the
details of the following applicable conditions:
● System Name column - A column named System Name has been added as an
additional column to the Trends application. It displays the name of the system
to which the source object belongs. You can select this column by right-clicking
the column header on the legend and selecting System Name from the menu
options.
● A Trend log multiple object cannot have objects from multiple systems.
● A Trend log or Trend log multiple object can be created only on that system
where the selected trended object belongs.
● You can create a Trend View Definition with objects from multiple systems.
This section provides background information on Trends of Desigo CC. For related
procedures, see the step-by-step section.
3.6.1 Trends Workspace

Trends are divided into the following main elements:
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 602 of 709 293 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
1 2 3 4 5
Trends Workspace
Name Description
1 System Browser Displays available Trendlog objects, as well as created Trend Views.
2 Configuration Displays buttons for commonly used commands (New, Save, Print, zoom).
toolbar
3 Compare view Allows you to compare measured values from the same Trend View.
4 Trend View The range which can be displayed and processed for online and offline trend
data in chart form. These Trend Views are saved independently of the trend
data.
5 Key Displays information on data points that are displayed graphically in the
Trend View.
System Browser
The following nodes display in the Trends folder in the System Browser:
Manual Correction: Link that opens the Manual Correction application.
Offline Trend Log Objects: Lists all the offline Trendlog objects available in the
automation station for a project.
Online Trend Objects: Lists all available online Trendlog objects. An online
Trendlog object is created when you define a series and save it in a Trend View
definition. However, this Trendlog object is available only on the management
station. No Trendlog object is created in the automation station.
Trend View Definitions: Lists all the Trend View definitions. A Trend View definition
includes all the properties required for a graphical display of the Trend View and
series. A Trend View definition does not contain process values, but only one
reference to the corresponding series (Trendlog objects).
294 | 352 Page 603 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
Trends Toolbar
The Trends toolbar allows you to perform the following operations:
Function Description
Edit Trend Toggles between the Edit Trend mode and the View Trend
mode.
Start Creation Starts creating the trend logs depending on the configuration
specified in the Edit Trend mode.
New Trend Opens a new Trend View.

New Folder Creates a new folder.
Delete Deletes the current Trend View.
Save Saves the current Trend View.

NOTE: This command is not available until you modify the
current Trend View.
Save As Saves the Trend View under a new name.
Save as user default Saves the Trend View definition as a new user default.
Properties Opens the properties dialog box for chart, axes, legends, and
series.
Stop Stops trend logging.
Run Starts trend logging.
Refresh Refreshes the Trend View.
Compare view Opens the same Trend View a second time.

NOTE: In order to enable this button, you must hide the Trend
View properties and stop the Trend View.
Zoom Allows you select a time range in the currently selected Trend
View by effectively zooming in on the X-axis and Y-axis.
Time bar Shows/hides the time bar.
Table view Switches from graphical Trend View to a table view.

NOTE: In order to enable this button, you must stop the Trend
View.
Export Exports the Trend View Definition and saves it in a CSV file
format.
When you use Export in the table view, the exported data range
depends on the time setting in the graphical view.
Interpolated values are not exported to an export file
Print Prints the Trend View.
Show legend / Hide Shows/Hides the legend. This button is disabled when you
legend display the trend in the table view.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 604 of 709 295 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Chart Properties
Menu Description
Grid Hides/shows the grid for the Trend View or displays it with horizontal or vertical
lines.
Background Hides/shows the background color as well as pattern for Trend View. Allows you to
define or select the background from a predefined set of colors.
Titles A descriptive name required for each Trend View. The name entered displays on
the Trend View. You can also add your own title to the left and right axis of the
Trend View.
Maximum Specifies how many values are displayed in a Trend series during the defined
displayed Trend View period. This setting directly determines if Trend View displays the
samples per values in a reduced view (For more information, see Data Point Key, Reduced
series values).
NOTE: A maximum of 2000 values can be displayed in a Trend series during the
defined Trend View period.
Advanced Displays quality attributes, markers, and values, even for cleared check boxes, if
display if chart the open Trend View is updates continuously. This means that updating the values
stopped takes longer.
Axis Properties
Allows you to specify the settings for the X and Y axis.
Each chart can display a left and right Y-axis independent of each other. Series
can be selectively assigned and scaled to either axis, by default or manually.
Scaling is set to automatic by default. This means that the range is defined by the
highest amplitude of all displayed series, with analog data types attached to the left
axis and digital data types to the right axis. When a single Trend View contains
several digital data types, these are shown one above the other with an offset.
When a single Trend View contains several digital data types, these are shown one
above the other with an offset.
Axis Properties Workspace

Menu Description
Title Y Left Displays the title on the left side of the Trend View.
Auto Scale: A minimum and maximum range must be defined if auto scale is
disabled.
Title X Displays the title below the Trend View.
Title Y Right Displays the title on the right side of the Trend View.
Auto Scale: A minimum and maximum range must be defined if auto scale is
disabled.
296 | 352 Page 605 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
NOTE:
Automatic/manual scaling properties act on both main and comparative view.
Automatic scaling is temporarily disabled when switching to Zoom mode.
Legend Properties
Menu Description
Legend The position can be left, right, above, or below the Trend View. Under a
comparison view, the legend always displays on the right.
Series Properties
Series properties allow you to define the individual series for the corresponding
properties in Trend View.
Menu Description
Line Properties Defines the appropriate property type, form and color, as well as the
property for the series.
Visible Displays the trend curve if this check box is selected.
Show Markers Defines the corresponding property type, and size, as well as the
corresponding property for the series. The markers are only displayed
in the trend curve if this check box is selected.
The X-axis is always the time axis. The diagram display is calculated to
correspond to the selected time line.
Show Values Displays numerically each measured value for the read value if this
check box is selected. Values may overlap (unreadable) in the Trend
View for intensive measured recorded values or a time range that is too
large. In this case, select a smaller time range or switch to display
values.
Show Quality Icons The Trend View can display a number of state attributes, referred to as
quality attributes, along with the trend data. These enable you to
identify problems with the data point being recorded, and assist with the
diagnosis of plant conditions.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 606 of 709 297 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Line Properties
Line type Line style Stroke color Stroke Marker style Marker
thickness thickness
1-6 1-10
Colors:
You can assign a color to the Trend View (background color) or to each individual
series (line). You can choose between:
● Predefined set of colors.
● Custom colors.
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9
Colors Workspace
Description
1 Select from predefined colors.
2 Select with mouse.
3 Directly enter each color code.
4 Selected color.
5 Enter a color code.
6 Select pattern.
7 Select an existing color pattern on the screen.
8 Confirm changes.
9 Discard changes.
Time Bar Scrollbar

The Time bar consists of a vertical bar and a time/date field. The time bar can be
dragged anywhere on the time axis. The data legend below the Trend View shows
the value for a point. The most recent value with information related to the point,
date/time, quality displays at the intersection of the time bar and the graph
representing the point.
298 | 352 Page 607 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
Compare View
The Compare View allows you to compare and analyze the data of trended objects
over a period of time. The Trend View below the first view is the current Trend View
that serves as the basis for the first view which is the compare view. Any changes
to the time range in the current Trend View are reflected in the comparative Trend
View. You can link the same or another Trend View for data analysis that applies
the same X-axis for the time range to both Trend Views. Using the pre-defined time
ranges present in the comparative Trend View, you can select the time range for
which you want to display the data in the comparative view.
In order to view the trend data in a compare view, you must stop the Trend View
and hide its properties.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description
1 Current Trend View
2 Compare View
3 Time bar with time displayed in the compare view
4 No offset
5 Predefined offset buttons
6 Freely definable offset range (range, unit)
7 1x forward or 1x back for the selected offset range
8 Freely definable offset range in hours, days, weeks, years
9 Data Point Key
Same Trend View

This type of comparison is especially useful when analyzing the data for individual
components, such as a room temperature for a room. The time offset allows you to
easily check how the corresponding measured value behaves at the same time of
day.
NOTE 1:
The legend displays the last left measured value in the time bar.
NOTE 2:
In the legend, the displayed value is not displayed based on the intersection of
the time bar and trend curve. Instead, the time/date display is based on the time
bar position.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 608 of 709 299 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Trend View
The Trend View consists of a chart area where series are viewed and manipulated.
All the main elements such as the axes, scaling, titles and colors can be configured
in Trend View properties (by taking over defaults or changing the current Trend
View).
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Trend View
Description
1 Displays the title of the current Trend View.
2, 11 Displays and highlights the selected trend curve in Trend View.
NOTE: To display a change of value on a binary value, an additional dotted zero line
displays at State 1 or One.
3, 12 Displays unselected trend curves as collapsed curves.
4 Displays the time bar. The time bar can be dragged anywhere on the time axis. The data
legend at the bottom of the Trend View displays the value or state valid at the point where
the bar intersects with the series. When the time bar is hidden, the legend displays the last
correct value for the Trend View.
5 Displays the present measured value for the series at the cursor. The current measured
value in a graphic curve is displayed by moving the mouse pointer to the desired position.
The precise measured points can be better displayed by enabling the marker for the series.
6 Displays the Y-axis with the appropriate scaling. Each chart can display a left and right Y-
axis independent of each other. Data series can be selectively assigned and scaled to
either axis (by default or manually).
7 Legend header.
8 Online: Current value from the automation station.
Offline Trend: The values are displayed as a function of the time bar [3].
9 Displays time or date range display across the entire selected display range.
10 Displays time range scrollbar.
13 Displays time and/or date display for the grid.
14 Displays time range display between grid sections.
Legend
The legend for the series contains information on the given data point in the Trend
View. When you launch the Trends application, the legend displays at the bottom
by default.
You can resize the legend using the horizontal splitter. The option to resize is
available only if the legend is positioned at the top or bottom. On selecting a new
Trend View, the legend retains its size depending on the last resize.
300 | 352 Page 609 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
Data Point Key

Column Description
Series source. Indicates if the displayed data is recorded by the management station
data (online ) or a field device (offline ).
Trended Displays the object names for the Trendlog object.

Object
Trended Displays the trended property name for the object.

Property
Alias Displays the alias name for the object.
Unit Physical unit for the data point.
Value Displays the last displayed current value (unless the time bar is in use. In this case,
the value is displayed at the intersection).
Time Displays the time for the most recent value (unless the time bar is used; in this case,
Date Displays the date for the most recent value (unless the time bar is used; in this case,
Reduced
When this symbol displays, not all values for this series are displayed in the Trend
View (dependent on the displayed time period).
Y-axis Indicates the Y-axis where the point is scaled.
Remove Removes the selected trend value from the Trend View.
Show/hide Temporarily shows/hides the trend curve in the Trend View.
System Name Displays the system name of the trended object. The system name enables you to
identify the origin of the trended objects in a distributed environment.
Reduced Display :
Displays a maximum of two values per interval. The interval is calculated based on
the set sample rate for the Trend View (Trend Chart Properties).
● 1 interval = Max. displayed samples per series/2.
– Example 1: 100/2 = 50 intervals
– Example 2: 400/2 = 200 intervals
A reduced display can also occur with just a few values, for example, when the
values are recorded within a short interval. With the reduced display, minimum and
maximum values always display.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 610 of 709 301 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Quality Attributes
The Trend View can display a number of state attributes, referred to as quality
attributes, along with the trend data. These enable you to identify problems with the
data point being recorded, and assist with the diagnosis of plant conditions. With
the reduced display, not all quality attributes can be displayed. In order to display
all quality attributes, limit the time period. Only the highest priority displays in the
Trend View if several states are active. The priority sequence in the previous
quality attributes table is read in descending order (highest to lowest priority). The
following table describes these quality attributes:
Quality Attributes
Symbol BACnet Status Description
DRIVER_FAILED No connection Indicates that no connection exists to the
(Bit=1) logged data point.
DRIVER_FAILED Connected Indicates that the connection exists to the
(Bit=0) data point.
ERROR_IN_LOG Error Indicates an error in the Trendlog object.
T_LOG_ENABLE Trend disabled Indicates that the Trendlog object is

(Bit=0) disabled. Text display for the last known
value.
T_LOG_ENABLE Trend enabled Indicates that the Trendlog object is
(Bit=1) enabled.
T_PURGED Buffer deleted Indicates that the buffer in the Trendlog
object is deleted.
T_ROLLOVER Buffer full Indicates that the Trendlog buffer is full.
T_TIME_SHIFT Time change Indicates that the time in the automation

station was changed (displayed in table
only).
LOG_INTERRUPTED Power fail Indicates that the automation station has

been set to state Log_interrupted in the
trend buffer (for example: in the event of a
power outage, application program stop,
change of data point log type). This may
cause trend data from not being logged.
OUT_OF_SERVICE Out of Service Indicates that the Out of Service property is

(Bit=1) switched on switched on.
OUT_OF_SERVICE Out of Service is Indicates that the Out of Service property is
(Bit=0) normal switched off.
FAULT Trendlog object Indicates that a data point error exists in the
(Bit=1) error Trendlog object (values may not be usable
for follow-on evaluation).
FAULT Return from Indicates that the data point error returns to
(Bit=0) Trendlog error the normal state.
ALARM In alarm state Indicates that the data point is in the alarm
(Bit=1) state.
ALARM Return from the Indicates that the data point has returned
(Bit=0) alarm state from the alarm state.
OVERRIDDEN Into override Indicates that the data point on a module is
(Bit=1) (module) overridden.
OVERRIDDEN Return from Indicates that the data point's override on
(Bit=0) overridden the module is removed.
(module)
302 | 352 Page 611 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
NOTE:
Quality attributes can only be evaluated if this function supports the
corresponding subsystem. An alarm setup on the management station does not
possess quality attributes. Therefore, an alarm cannot display an alarm bell in the
Trend View.
Table View
The table view offers a view that differs from the standard view where curves are
displayed as series. Each series displays as a column in the data grid. The first
column (right) shows the time stamp. The column displays by merging all time
stamps for all values in each series. It is displayed at an accuracy of 1 second. In
order to view the trend data in a table view, you must stop the Trend View.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Description
1 Timestamp for measurement.
2 Sorts values by ascending or descending timestamp.
3 Displays the trended object along with the property and alias of the object. It also displays the
corresponding color of the trended object in the graphical view.
4 Displays the values in a reduced manner and with a red background if a long time frame is
selected in the Trend View.
5 Displays the quality attribute with measured value, except Normal.
6 Displays interpolated values when this function is active.
NOTE: The priority is displayed in the table if a subsystem supports information on BACnet
write priority (1‒16).
7 Shows/hides the interpolated values.
There are two display types in table view:

● Normal view: The corresponding cell has a value or is empty.
● Interpolated view: The corresponding cell is empty and shows a linear
interpolated value based on previous current and subsequent current selection.
NOTE:
The table view only shows values as per the graphical time range. These values
are exported during data export.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 612 of 709 303 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Edit Trend Mode

The Edit Trend mode provides options to operate on multiple BACnet trend log
objects in a single click. If you have to create, modify, or delete multiple BACnet
trend log objects, then performing this procedure on individual objects requires a
huge engineering effort. Therefore, in order to overcome this difficulty, there are
options provided in the Edit Trend mode that enable you to create, modify, and
delete the multiple BACnet trend log objects in a single click. In this mode, you can
only work with BACnet points and BACnet trend log objects.
You must have the Configure application right on the Trends application and
BACnet Configurator to be able to work with the Edit Trend mode.
When you are in the Edit Trend mode, only the Edit Trend and New
buttons are available.
The Edit Trend mode allows you to perform the following tasks:
Item Description
Create Trend [➙ 135] Allows you to create multiple BACnet trend log objects in a single click. This
menu option is available depending on the following:
● The selected BACnet points belong to the same system and subsystem.
● The selected BACnet points are not BACnet trend log objects or BACnet
trend log multiple objects.
Modify Trend [➙ 137] Allows you to modify the multiple BACnet trend log objects or multiple
BACnet trend log multiple objects in a single click. This menu option is
available depending on the following:
● The selected objects are either BACnet trend log objects or BACnet
trend log multiple objects that belong to the same system and
subsystem.
● The selected objects are not BACnet points.
Delete Trend [➙ 137] Allows you to delete the multiple BACnet trend log objects or BACnet trend
log multiple objects. This menu option is available depending on the
following:
● The selected objects are BACnet trend log objects belonging to any
system or subsystem.
Change Property Allows you to change the default property of the selected BACnet points.
[➙ 136] This menu option is available depending on the following:
● The selected BACnet points are of the same type and belong to the
same system and subsystem.
● The selected objects are not trend log objects or trend log multiple
objects.
304 | 352 Page 613 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
Trend Definitions
Name Description
Trendlog Name Specify a unique name for the trend log object.
Device The device on which the trend log object is to be created.

While selecting the device, you must ensure the following:
1. The device belongs to the same subsystem as that of the BACnet
point selected for the trend log creation.
2. The device belongs to the same network and the same driver as that
of the BACnet point selected for the trend log creation
Create Trend Log Multiple Check this box if you want to create trend log multiple object for all the
selected points.
Logging Type
Name Description
Default from Device The data entry is logged according to the default logging type of the
device.
Polled The data entry is polled periodically.
Triggered The data entry is triggered when the trigger property is set to ON.
COV The data entry is captured when the value of the trended property
changes.
Log Interval
Name Description
Log Interval This setting will be available only when the Logging Type is set to Polled.
Specify the time interval when the trend samples are to be collected. You
can either select any one of the specified interval values or can specify a
custom value for the log interval.
Buffer Size
Name Description
Buffer Size Specify the maximum number of records that can be stored in the buffer.
Stop when full Indicates whether or not the logging of records in the buffer should stop
when the buffer is full. If this box is checked, the logging of records in the
buffer will stop when the number of records in the buffer reaches the
buffer size.
Start/Stop
Name Description
Start/Stop Specify the start and end date/time when you want to start and end the
recording of trend values.
3.6.2 Manual Correction

The Manual Correction application allows you to add, modify, and delete values of
trended properties of trended objects that are logged in online as well as offline
trends. The trend information such as date/time, value, status, and unit information
pertaining to only a single trended property displays in a tabular form in the Filtered
Data section. By default, the data is displayed for a time period of one day.
However, you can select the desired time range to fetch the latest data. You can
apply further sorting and filtering on the displayed data to get a more precise data
set.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 614 of 709 305 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Manual Correction Workspace

3 4
1
2
Name Description
1 Manual Correction Contains buttons for performing various actions on the Manual
toolbar Correction application.
2 Trended Object Displays the object whose property details are to be modified..
3 Trended Properties Displays the trended properties of the trended object. If the object
has multiple trended properties and is referenced in online as
well as offline trends, then the multiple properties along with the
names of the offline trends in which the object is referenced
display.
4 Time Filter Allows you to specify the time series for which you want to
display the data.
5 Filtered Data Displays information of the selected trended property of the
object.
Manual Correction Toolbar

The Manual Correction toolbar allows you to perform the following operations:
Run Displays the data for the selected trended object property.
Add Displays the Add Trend Entry dialog box to add new entries to
the Filtered Data section. This button is disabled when you select
multiple entries in the Filtered Data structure.
Edit Displays the Edit Trend Entry dialog box with the details of the
selected entry to be modified.
Delete Displays the Delete Trend Entry dialog box for deleting the
selected entry or entries from the Filtered Data section.
Filtered Data
The Filtered Data section displays the information on the trended data in a
columnar pattern in a tabular structure.
306 | 352 Page 615 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
Description
Time Date/Time of the property value of the object.
Value Value of the trended property of the object.
Unit Unit of the trended property
Status Displays either of the following values:

Good – Value of displayed data is good.
Bad – Value of displayed data is bad as per IOWA standards.
Added – Displayed value is added by user.
Corrected – Displayed value is modified by user.
3.6.3 Offline Trends

Offline trend data is used for the long-term storage and retrieval of historical data
for the analysis of entire plants or single processes. With offline trends, data is
recorded directly in the automation station. You can retrieve the data as needed or
automation stations can automatically upload the data. Offline trend data can be
recorded and saved by Trendlog objects within the automation and control system
even when the management station is not connected. The recorded data can then
be saved in the trend database. Offline trend data can be retrieved and displayed
in the trends.
You can create an offline trend to assign the outside temperature to the Trendlog
object in the automation station if you want to calculate energy consumption and
need the outside air temperature series for measured values. You can then
manually or automatically (periodically) upload the recorded temperature data to
store in the management station.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 616 of 709 307 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Phase 1: Record Offline Trend Data
Trend data is saved locally to the

Trendlog object in the automation
station.
64°F
64°F
Automation Station
Trend Log Object
Phase 2: Upload Offline Trend Data
Trend data is uploaded if:

Trend DB 64°F
● The maximum buffer size is
64°F reached.
Automation
64°F
Management
● The number of defined
Station Platform entries is reached.
● Manually triggered by the
64°F management station.
Trend Log Object
You can create and delete BACnet objects without engineering tools from the
applicable manufacturer. The corresponding BACnet function must be supported
by the automation station from the given manufacturer.
Command issued from the Management

Platform to the device
Upload of field data from the device to the

Management Platform
Device
Management
Platform Create object Tool
Trendlog
Trendlog
Delete object Created

Upload data manually
Field data upload
Macro
Reaction
Upload data automatically
NOTE:
Trendlog or Trendlog multiple objects that are created permanently with the
engineering tool cannot be deleted from the Management Platform. In the image
above, the Trendlog within the solid black box represents the Trendlog created
with the engineering tool.
The Trendlog within the blue dashed box represents the Trendlog created on the
Management Platform and which can be deleted.
308 | 352 Page 617 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Trends
3
NOTICE
Validated Projects
Specific critical environments (for example, pharmaceutical installations and
processed) require a high degree of safety and traceability of all operational
workflows and user activities. A validated plant can lose its validity or must be
revalidated by adding or losing BACnet objects. Therefore, do not use this
function, or do not enable it in the application rights.
3.6.4 Online Trends

Online trends record real-time values from your plant and display them graphically
in a Trend View. The data values are sent to the trend application upon each
change of value. The measured values are temporary and can be stored for later
queries continuously in the Trend database using online Trend log objects. Online
trends can be used for real-time visualization of one or more process variables,
usually for analysis or diagnosis.
You can create an online trend in situations where the room temperature is too low
and record the temperature data for a specific time period. You can further analyze
the measured values in a trend curve directly on the management station.
Record Online Trend Data
Trend data are uploaded

64°F
Trend DB continuously to the management
station and are not saved in the
64°F automation station.
64°F Management Station
Automation
Station
NOTE:
An uninterrupted site connection with the management station is required.
Measured values may be irretrievably lost when the site is interrupted during data
recording. Therefore, online trend is not well suited for long-term secure data
recording.
3.6.5 Predicted Trends

Desigo CC can use time series to predict future values. For example, predicting
weather for the upcoming days by reading weather forecast data from a weather
service. Predicted future values display in a graph using the Trends application.
Many predicted trends can be combined with other trended objects/properties.
Also, forecast data can be combined with the values of the same parameter saved
in the history database, as well as, can be compared with real-time data. For
instructions, see Additional Predicted Trends Procedures [➙ 138].
3.6.6 Trend Data Storage

Recorded trend data can be stored in three different locations:
● Offline Trendlog Objects: Offline trend data is saved in the automation station.
● Online Trendlog Objects: Contains the online trend data recorded and saved in
the management station.
● Archived Trend Database (not in version 2.0): Contains all recorded trend data
moved previously to the archive database.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 618 of 709 309 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Trends
Offline Trendlog Objects

Offline trend data can be recorded and saved by Trendlog objects within the
automation and control system even when the management station is not
connected. The recorded data can then be saved in the trend database. Offline
trend data can be retrieved and displayed in the trends.
Online Trendlog Objects

Data recorded by online trending and saved to the trend database (for example,
using save continuously) can be retrieved and displayed in the trends. Online
Trendlog objects record data also when the Trend View is closed.
Database Storage Capacity

In the database, 10 GB is saved for the SQL Server Express and 250 GB of
historical data for SQL-Server. Once 90% of the database size is reached, 10% of
the oldest data entries are deleted. This 10% of data always refers to the entire
time axis for the collected data. Therefore, it cannot be exactly determined how
many entries or the database size that is actually deleted. Additional incoming
entries are rejected if the 10% of data entries cannot be deleted before reaching
98% of the database size.
7
10
0 GB
90% of DB 10 GB
Time # =10%
98% of DB
The data amount is comprised of the following:

● System activities
● Alarm messages
● Trend data
Change to Daylight Savings Time
● Date and time data is saved in UTC format. Entries are in double for one hour
when setting back to normal time. In this case, the curve displays using both
values. When switching to daylight savings time, no value displays in this hour
and the displayed line is straight between the two measured values.
● A system message Anomaly is generated when changing times that must be
acknowledged.
310 | 352 Page 619 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
3.7 Log Viewer
The main function of the Log Viewer is to present you the historical data of all
system activities and events without having to create and configure a report from
the reports application.
This section provides background information on Log Viewer. For related
procedures, see the step-by-step section.
3.7.1 Overview of Log Viewer

The Log Viewer application allows you to view the historical data related to system
activities and events directly without creating and configuring a report from the
Reports application.
The information related to all the system activities and events displays in a tablular
format. You can create a subset of this information by applying the necessary
configurations such as filters, identifying the columns to display, specifying the
number of records to display, and other settings, such as resizing the column width
or re-ordering the columns.
Once configured, this information can be saved as a log view definition that can be
used later. When you access the log view definition at a later date, the latest data,
according to the configurations that you have applied to the definition, displays.
When you save the data as a log view definition that has sorting applied, the sort
criteria is also saved. The next time when you load the log view definition, the data
with the saved sort criteria displays.
In a distributed system, the data from all the systems displays in the log view grid.
You can view log data using any of the following procedures:
● Selecting the Log Viewer root node, a log view folder, or a saved log view
definition from the System Browser.
● Selecting an object from System Browser: This displays the Activity and Event
Log records for the selected object in the Detailed Log tab.
● Selecting an object from any application such as Graphics, Trends, Textual
Viewer, or Reports: This displays the latest 100 Activity and Event Log records
for the object in the Detailed Log tab.
● Selecting an Activity type or Event type record in the log view: When you select
an Activity type record from a log view, the latest 100 Activity and Event Logs
for the selected object display in the Detailed Log tab. However, if an Event
type record is selected, the details of the selected event including the different
state changes of the event and the user activities performed in context of the
event are displayed in the Detailed Log tab.
● Selecting an event from Event List: Displays information about the object
involved in the event in the Detailed Log tab.
However, if you have selected more than one object, the Detailed Log tab does not
display any information.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 620 of 709 311 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Log Viewer
NOTE:
When you select the Log Viewer root node, a log view folder, or a saved log view
definition from System Browser, you may see the following message above the
log view table: Configured View Size reached! Refine search via
Search Filter. This means that there are more records in the database than
can be displayed in the defined view size. In order to view such records you must
either specify filters or modify existing filters.
Default Columns in a Log View

The following table lists the default columns that display in the Log Viewer. In
addition to these columns, you can add other columns from the Select Columns
dialog box.
Default Columns in the Log View

Name Description Name Description
System Name Displays the name of the system Event ID ID associated with the event.
to which the source object
belongs. This is particularly
helpful when working with a
distributed environment, where
you have data displaying from
multiple systems.
Date/Time Date/Time when the activity is Log Type The Desigo CC application
performed or state change of where the activity, such as event
event occurred. printing or commanding is
performed.
Source Description of the source object Action Nature of the activity performed
Description associated with the activity or by the source object. For
event. example, for a Users object type,
the value of the Action field could
be Login, Primary Authentication
and so on.
Record Type Type of information displayed. Value New value of the Source
This information can be of type Property when an activity is
Activity or Event. performed.
Source Name of the property associated Quality Quality of the new value.
Property with the source object on
change of which the activity or
event occurred.
Event Event message text associated Previous Value Previous value of the Source
Message Text with the source object. Property when an activity is
performed.
Event Category of the event. Previous Quality Quality of previous value.

Category
Event Time Date/Time of the occurrence of Unit Unit of measurement of value of

the event. source property.
Event State State of the event.
Event Cause Reason that triggered the event.
NOTE:
Values are displayed as per value scaled units (if configured). See Value Scale
Units.
312 | 352 Page 621 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
Additional Columns in a Log View

Additional Columns
Name Description
Action Details Additional descriptive information of the activity performed.
Action Result Status of a user activity. Possible values are Succeeded,

Partially Succeeded, Failed, Unknown.
Attachment Displays the link to the report output document that is

created when performing the Operating Procedure Steps
such as alarm printout, report, or treatment form.
Event mode Mode in which the event is generated. Possible values are
Normal and Maintenance.
Management Station Displays the host name of the Desigo CC client from where
the activity is performed.
Alias [Observer] Alias of the event enrollment object that monitors any
BACnet object.
Alias [Source] Alias of the source object.
Source Designation Default hierarchy of the source object composed using the
names of the nodes present in the hierarchy.
Source Designation [Application View] Hierarchy of the source object from Application View
composed using the names of the nodes present in the
hierarchy.
Source Designation [Current View] Hierarchy of the source object from the currently selected
view in the System Browser composed using the names of
the nodes present in the hierarchy.
Source Designation [Management View] Hierarchy of the source object from Management View
composed using the names of the nodes present in the
hierarchy.
Source Identifier [Internal] Internal ID associated with the source object.
Source Location Default hierarchy of the source object composed using the
description of the nodes present in the hierarchy.
Source Location [Application View] Hierarchy of the source object from the Application View
composed using the description of the nodes present in the
hierarchy.
Source Location [Current View] Hierarchy of the source object from the currently selected
view in the System Browser composed using the
description of the nodes present in the hierarchy.
Source Location [Management View] Hierarchy of the source object from Management View
composed using the description of the nodes present in the
hierarchy.
Source Name Name of the source object.
Observer Description Description of the event enrollment object that monitors the
source BACnet object.
Observer Property Name of the property associated with the event enrollment
object on change of which the activity or event occurred.
Observer Designation Default hierarchy of the event enrollment object composed

using the names of the nodes present in the hierarchy.
Observer Location Default hierarchy of the event enrollment object composed

using the description of the nodes present in the hierarchy.
Observer Name Name of the Event Enrollment Object that monitors the
Observer Identifier [Internal] Internal Id for the Event Enrollment Object that monitors the
Discipline Discipline of the source object (for example, Building

Automation).
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 622 of 709 313 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Log Viewer
Subdiscipline Subdiscipline of the source object (for example,

Communication for management platform discipline).
Type Type of the source object (for example, network).
Subtype Subtype of the source object (for example, BACnet for type
Network).
Alert ID Internal unique ID associated with an event.
User Name of the user performing the activity or treating the

event.
Validation Profile Validation profile associated with the source object.
Audit Trail Displays Audit Trail if the validated object creates an

activity log. However, if an activity log is created by a non
validated object, then this column displays Activity.
Object Version Displays the version number of the validated object. The
version number is incremented each time you perform an
activity on the validated object. In case of a non validated
object the Object Version column does not display any
value.
Comment Validation comment entered.
Reference Time Displays the original time stamp of the record that is added,
modified, or deleted using the Manual Correction snap-in.
Event Details Message text associated with the event.
Category Priority Priority associated with the event.
Supervisor Name/ID of the supervisor who is designated as the

second approver to approve the "Regulated" and
"Monitored" validation states before the command or
configuration change is executed on the selected object.
3.7.2 Log Viewer Workspace

The Log Viewer workspace provides information on the user interface elements of
the Log Viewer application.
314 | 352 Page 623 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
Log Viewer Workspace

Name Description
1 System Browser Displays all the saved Log View definitions in Application View >
Applications > Log Viewer.
2 Log Viewer Contains buttons for performing various actions in Log Viewer.
toolbar [➙ 315]
3 Log View Displays the combined data from the Activity Log and Event Log. By clicking
the drop-down arrow, a menu with the following options displays:
Hide Column - Hides the column.
Select Column - Displays the Select Columns dialog box
Remove Filters - Removes any online filters (if applied) on the column.
Custom Filter - Displays the Custom Filter dialog box.
Selection Filter - Applies only if the column displays ENUM data. Displays a
list of data entries for the column. See the List of ENUM columns section in
Custom Filter [➙ 317] for a list of columns of type ENUM.
Date Filters - Applies only if the column displays date/time data. Allows you
to filter data on the basis of date and time.
4 Detailed Log tab Displays information related to system activities and events.
[➙ 324]
Log Viewer Toolbar

The Log Viewer toolbar allows you to perform the following operations:
Name Description
New Folder [➙ 143] Creates a new folder below the Log Viewer root node.
Save Saves a newly created and configured log view definition or

changes in the configuration of the currently selected log view
definition.
NOTE: This command is available only after you perform some
operation on the displayed log view data.
This command is not available if a result filter is applied to the log
view. In order to enable this button, you must move the result
filter to a search filter.
Save as Saves the configuration of the currently selected log view

definition as a new log view definition.
Save as Default Saves the log view as a default template.
Save as Report Saves the configuration of a log view definition such as search
Definition [➙ 144] filters, column selection, sorting as a report definition.
Delete [➙ 144] Deletes the currently selected log view definition or a folder
below the Log Viewer root node. Deleting the folder also removes
its contents.
Refresh Refreshes the data displayed in a log view definition, Log Viewer
root node, or a log view folder.
Export [➙ 143] Exports the log view definition and saves it in an xml file format.
Import [➙ 143] Imports a log view definition.
Select Columns [➙ 145] Displays the Select Columns dialog box that allows you to select
the columns to display in the log view.
Search Filter [➙ 153] Displays the Search Filter dialog box that allows you to view a
search filter condition and specify a filter condition on the
columns that are not present in the log view.
Remove all Result Removes all the result filters applied on the log data.
Filters
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 624 of 709 315 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Log Viewer
Revert to Saved Search Returns to the previously applied search filter.

Filters [➙ 153]
Stop Execution Stops the execution of a log view.
Configuration Displays the Configuration dialog box that allows you to perform
the following:
● Display the date and time values in the log view till
milliseconds by selecting the Show DateTime with
milliseconds check box.
● Specify the filter language for modifying a search filter. This
is essential when you are accessing a log view definition
that is configured in a different language.
Print Displays the Print dialog box that allows you to print the log data.
Select Columns Dialog Box

The Select Columns dialog box allows you to add, remove, or reorder columns in a
log view. You can access this dialog box using any of the following methods:
● Clicking the Select Column icon.
● Clicking the Select Column icon in the Detailed Log tab.
● Clicking the drop-down arrow on a column header and selecting the Select
Column menu option.
● Right-clicking a column entry and selecting Select Column menu option.
Select Columns Dialog Box Components

Name Description
Parent tab Allows you to add, remove, or reorder parent columns in the log view.
Available Columns Displays all the columns associated with the log view.
NOTE: View specific columns such as Source Location and Source
Designation are dynamically added to the Available Columns list when you
create a new view.
Selected Columns Displays the default columns of a log view. You can add columns to the
selected columns list by selecting the check box associated with each
column in the Available Columns list.
316 | 352 Page 625 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
Select Default Selects the default columns in the Available Columns list.
Select All Selects all the columns in the Available Columns list.
Clear All Clears all the columns in the Available Columns list.
Moves the selected column one step up in the Selected Columns list. The
Move Up Move Up button is unavailable if you select the column on the top.
Moves the selected column one step down in the Selected Columns list. The
Move Down Move Down button is unavailable if you select the column at bottom.
Removes the selected column from the Selected Columns list.

Remove
Custom Filter
A custom filter allows you to define a filter expression from which you can filter data
according to your specific requirements.
Custom Filter Condition
A custom filter condition is composed of:
● Column name (Condition Name)
● Operators
● Condition value
Examples of Custom Filter Expressions
The following list contains some valid custom filter expressions:
Event Category = "Life Safety"
Event Category = {“Status”; “Life Safety”; “Supervisory”}
The custom filter also allows you to create complex filters and conditions using
mathematical and logical operators, and wildcard characters. The following
operators are supported:
Mathematical Operators
Enum Columns Equal to (=), Not Equal to (<>)
NOTE: For columns such as Discipline, Subdiscipline, Type, and Subtype only the
(=) operator is supported.
Numeric Equal to (=), Not Equal to (<>),Less than (<),Greater than (>),Less than Equal to
Columns (<=),Greater than Equal to (>=)
Text Columns Equal to (=), Not Equal to (<>), IN (←)
Variant Columns Equal to (=), Not Equal to (<>),Less than (<),Greater than (>),Less than Equal to
(<=),Greater than Equal to (>=),IN (←)
CNS Columns Equal to (=)
View Specific Equal to (=)

Columns
Object Name,
Object
Description,
Object Location
(All Views),
Object
Designation (All
Views)
Logical Operators
AND Applying the custom filter expression on multiple columns. For example, 'Discipline'
= "Building Automation" AND 'Subdiscipline' = "Access Control"
OR Applying the custom filter expression on the same column. For example,
'Discipline' = {"Building Automation";"Energy Management"}
● Wildcard Character: Asterisk (*)
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 626 of 709 317 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Log Viewer
List of ENUM columns

● Subtype
● Type
● Subdiscipline
● Discipline
● Record Type
● Action Result
● Event Mode
● Event Category
● Event State
● Log Type
● Action
● Quality
● Previous Quality
Custom Filter Syntax
To create a custom filter, you must know the data type of the column for which you
want to apply the filter. The following examples should help you create custom
filters without syntax errors.
1. If column displays text data, for example string or enumeration, then the value
must be enclosed within double quotes.
– ‘Source Description’ = “Analog Output 1”
– ‘Event Mode’ = “Normal”
– 'Value' = "True"
– 'Previous Quality' = "#COM"
2. If column displays date time value, then the value must be in date time format
configured in Windows on the server. Date must be in the short date format,
time in the long time format (24 hours).
– ‘Date/Time’ = 3/13/2014 16:04:25 (assuming that the date format on the
server is M/D/YYYY)
– 'Value' = 07/24/2014 11:52:00
3. If column displays boolean data, such as TRUE or FALSE, the value must be
enclosed in double quotes.
– 'Previous Value' = "True"
– ‘Value’ = “False”
4. If column displays numeric data, for example, 54.11, 25, -20, and so on, then
the values must be specified as follows:
– 'Value' = 54.11
NOTE: The decimal separator must be according to your Windows
Regional and Language settings.
5. If column displays bit string, then the value must be enclosed in double quotes.
– ‘Quality’ = “Out of service”
6. Specify time values in a 24-hour clock format. For example, to specify the
Source Time as 2.00 PM, type 14.00.
Types of Custom Filters
There are two types of custom filters that are applied to the log data:
Result filter: The result filter enables you to filter data from the displayed data set in
the log view. You cannot save a result filter condition. In order to save the filter
condition, you must move the result filter to a search filter and then save the
configuration as a log view definition. You can apply a result filter from the Custom
Filter dialog box, Quick filter, Selection filter, and using drag-and-drop.
Search filter: The search filter enables you to obtain the data matching the filter
expression from the database. Any modification or addition to the search filter,
refreshes the log view automatically, so that all the data matching the search filter
is obtained from the database. To preserve the search filters, you must save the
318 | 352 Page 627 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
settings as a log view definition. Using the search filter, you can filter the data for
the columns that are present in the log view.
You can also apply a search filter if you need to filter the data for a column that is
not present in the log view. The combined search filter is always available in the
Search Filter dialog box.
For example, you can apply a result filter on the log data to retrieve all records with
Source Description as "Analog Input 1". However, in order to save the filter
condition, you must move the result filter to a search filter.
Custom Filter Dialog Box - For columns other than date/time
The Custom Filter dialog box allows you to define result and search filter
expressions on a particular column. You can access this dialog box by either:
● Clicking the dropdown arrow on a column heading displaying non date/time
values and selecting Custom Filter.
● Right-clicking a log view entry displaying non date/time data and selecting
Custom Filter.
Custom Filter Dialog Box Components

Name Description
Result Filter Allows you to specify a result filter.
Search Filter Allows you to specify a search filter.

NOTE: The Search Filter tab does not display when the Custom Filter dialog
box is accessed from the Detailed Log tab in the Contextual Pane.
Operator Lists the mathematical operators. The list of operators displayed in this box
depends on the column type.
Value Allows you to specify values. Depending on the column type, you can either
select a value from the drop-down list or enter a value in the text field.
Add Filter Adds a new filter expression row with the Operator and Value fields to the
Custom Filter dialog box.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 628 of 709 319 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Log Viewer
Remove Filter Removes the filter set on the particular column.

NOTE: In order to enable the Remove Filter button, you must select the
check box preceding the Operator and Value fields corresponding to the
result filter expression to be deleted.
AND This is a logical operator that allows you to combine filter expressions and
create complex filters. This button is available only when you add a new filter
expression row and select the check boxes preceding the Operator drop
down list in the filter expression rows.
OR This is a logical operator that allows you to combine filter expressions and
create complex filters. This button is available only when you add a new filter
expression row and select the check boxes preceding the Operator drop-
down list in the filter expression rows.
Move to Search Filter Displays only when the Result Filter tab is selected. Allows you to move the
result filter to a search filter.
Filter expression field Displays the filter expression. In case of multiple filter expressions, the OR
operator is applied by default.
Time Filter Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define result and search filter expressions on a
particular date/time column. You can access this dialog box using any of the
following methods:
● Clicking the drop-down arrow on a column heading displaying date/time values,
positioning your cursor over Date Filters and then selecting Custom Filter.
● Right-clicking a log view entry displaying date/time data and selecting Custom
Filter.
320 | 352 Page 629 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
Time Filter Dialog Box Components

Name Description
Result Filter Allows you to specify a result filter.
Search Filter Allows you to specify a search filter.

NOTE: The Search Filter tab does not display when the Time Filter dialog
box is accessed from the Detailed Log tab in the Contextual Pane.
Exact Allows you to filter data based on the exact date specified.
Custom This option allows you to set the date and time as per your requirement.
Selecting the Custom option enables the From and To fields. The To date
should always be greater than From date. If the To date is less than the From
date, then the To field is highlighted in red color and an error message
displays when you move your cursor over the field.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 630 of 709 321 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Log Viewer
Relative Relative has two options: Last and Current Period.

The Last option allows you to filter data for the last 'x' (where x stands for a
number) period that you specified. Valid periods are hours, months, years,
weeks, days, or minutes.
The Current Period option allows you to filter data for the current x period.
Valid periods are current x hours, months, years, weeks, days, or minutes.
For example, if the current date and time on your computer is 10/07/2014
10.35 AM and you specify any of the following:
1 Hour in Last - The data for the 9:00 to 10:00 AM period is retrieved.
1 Hour in Current Period - The data for the 10:00 to 11:00 AM period is
retrieved.
1 Month in Last - The data for the period June 01,2017 to July 01, 2017 is
retrieved.
1 Month in Current Period - The data for the period July 01, 2017 to August
01, 2014 is retrieved.
1 Year in Last - The data for the period January 01, 2016 to January 01,
2017 is retrieved.
1 Year in Current Period - The data for the period January 01, 2017 to
January 01, 2018 is retrieved.
NOTE: The Last and the Current Period fields accept only integer values up
to three digits.
Unlimited Default selection. Allows you to retrieve all records.
Null Allows you to retrieve records with Null value.
Move to Search Filter Displays only when the Result Filter tab is selected. Allows you to move the
result filter to a search filter.
Preview of Resulting Displays the resulting time range for the options selected in the Time Filter
Time range dialog box. For example, if the present time is 08/07/2014 10.35 AM, then for
the current 1 hour selection, the Preview of Resulting Time Range displays
the following:
From: Tuesday, July 08, 2014 10:00:00 AM
To: Tuesday, July 08, 2014 11:00:00 AM
Search Filter Dialog Box

The Search Filter dialog box allows you to view a search filter condition and specify
a filter condition on the columns that are not present in the log view. It also allows
you to view, modify, and delete a combined search filter expression. You can apply
the search filter on all columns except columns of type date and time.
322 | 352 Page 631 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
Search Filter Dialog Box Components

Description
Available Columns1 Lists all the available columns from the Activities and Events Log.
Operators1 Lists all the operators associated with a specific column selected in Available
Columns.
Values1 Lists all the values associated with a specific column selected in the
Available Columns list. You can also select multiple values by pressing CTRL
or SHIFT and selecting multiple values.
NOTE: Multiple values can be typed within braces {} and separated by a
semicolon (;).
Filter expression field Displays the filter expression. You can edit a filter expression in this field.
NOTE: An invalid filter expression displays in red.
Add/Update Allows you to add or update a filter expression. Update is enabled only when
a valid filter expression is added or modified in the Filter expression field.
And This is a logical operator that allows you to combine filter expressions and
create complex filters. This button is unavailable until a filter expression is
added to the Filter expression field.
"( ) " Allows you to group filter conditions, which define the order of their
evaluation. These brackets are unavailable until a filter expression is added
to the Filter expression field.
1) The selected item displays below the list
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 632 of 709 323 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Log Viewer
Detailed Log Tab
You can view information related to system activities and events through the
Detailed Log tab.
The information displayed in the Detailed Log tab is related to the following:
● An object selected from System Browser: When you select an object from the
System Browser, the Detailed Log tab displays the latest 100 activities for that
object.
● An object is selected from any application, such as Graphics, Trends, Textual
Viewer, or Reports: If you select an object from any application, the Detailed
Log tab displays the latest 100 activities and event log records for the object.
● An activity or event type record is selected from the log view: When you select
an activity type record from a log view, the latest 100 activities and event logs
for the selected object display in the Detailed Log tab. However, if an event
type record is selected, the details of the selected event including the different
state changes of the event and the user activities performed in context of the
event are displayed in the Detailed Log tab of Event List, Investigative
Treatment, and Assisted Treatment windows.
● Event handling: When you select an event from the Event List, the details of
the selected event including the different state changes of the event and the
user activities performed in context of the event are available in the Detailed
Log tab of Event List, Investigative Treatment, and Assisted Treatment
windows.
The Detailed Log tab however, does not display any information if you have
selected more than one object.
You can customize the information displayed in the Detailed Log tab by
● Applying result filters on columns other than Date/Time
● Applying result filters on Date/Time columns
● Selecting columns to be displayed
● Hiding columns
● Sorting log entries
● Reordering and resizing Columns
By default, the following information displays for activity and event type data in the
Detailed Log tab.
NOTE:
324 | 352 Page 633 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Log Viewer
3
Record Type - Activity Record Type - Event
Date/Time Date/Time
Source Property RecordType
LogType Source Property
Action Details Event Message
Action Event Category
Value Event Time
Previous Value Event Cause
Quality Event ID
Previous Quality Value
Unit Unit
Action Result User
User Validation Profile
Validation Profile Object Version
Audit Trail Event Details
Object Version Category Priority
Comment
Reference Time
Supervisor
You can also save the settings in the Detailed Log tab as default template. For
example, you can create individual customized templates for displaying activity and
event information by specifying the respective columns, their order and size, and
by applying sorting on the data displayed. Filters applied are not retained in the
default template.
In a Distributed System, the Detailed Log tab displays the default template of the
system that is associated with the currently selected object.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 634 of 709 325 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Address Book
Name Description
SaveAsDefault Saves the selected columns in the Detailed Log tab as a default
template.
Refresh Refreshes the data displayed in the Detailed Log tab.
Stop Execution Stops the execution of the log view in the Detailed Log tab.
Select Columns Displays the Select Columns dialog box that allows you to select
the columns to display in the Detailed Log tab.
Remove all Result Removes all the result filters applied to the log data in the
Filters Detailed Log tab.
Configuration Displays the Configuration dialog box that allows you to display
the date and time values in the Detailed Log tab till milliseconds.
Print Displays the Print dialog box that allows you to print the log data
displayed in the Detailed Log tab.
3.8 Address Book

This section provides reference and background information relevant to the Desigo
CC address book. For related procedures, see the step-by-step section.
3.8.1 Overview of Address Book

The Desigo CC address book stores a list of contacts (called recipients) which the
system can use for sending out remote notifications or for emailing reports.
The contacts you add to the address book do not have to be Desigo CC users.
This is an entirely separate list.
You can view and edit the address book in both Operating and Engineering mode.
For instructions, see the step-by-step section.
Address Book Workspace

The address book is accessed in the Application View of System Browser, at the
path Applications > Address Book.
The left panel shows the list of contacts already configured in the address book.
The Details expanders on the right displays the details of the currently selected
contact. for more information about these fields, see Details of an Address Book
Contact [➙ 328], below.
326 | 352 Page 635 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Address Book
3
Address Book Toolbar Controls

Name Description
Save Recipient Save any changes made to the details of the currently
selected contact.
Add Recipient Add a new contact to the address book.
Remove Recipient Delete the currently selected contact.
Remove All Recipients Clear the entire address book.
Import Address Book Import a CSV contacts file exported from Microsoft
Outlook.
Search in the address book To search for contacts in the address book, type some
characters in the search field For more details, see
Address Book Search Field [➙ 327].
NOTE:
If you accidentally delete a contact or clear the address book, you can recover by
exiting the Address Book workspace without saving the changes made. To do
this, select a different node in System Browser, and when prompted Unsaved
data. Do you want to save the data before leaving this page?
Click No.
Address Book Search Field

When the address book contains many entries, you can use the search feature to
help you find a specific contact.
● To run a new search, in the Search field at the top, start typing in some
letters/characters contained in the following fields: contact’s Full Name,
Groups, or Preferred/Fallback Device.
– As you type, the contact list is filtered to show only the contacts that match
the entered characters.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 636 of 709 327 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Address Book
● To repeat a recent search, or to quickly filter by groups, click the Search-field

drop-down list to display a list of your Recent Searches, along with a list of the
configured Groups (under Saved Searches).
– Click a search in the list to repeat it.
– Click x alongside a search to remove it from the list.
● To clear a search, click alongside the search field to remove the filter and
display the full contact list again.
Details of an Address Book Contact

When you select a contact in the Address Book, the Details expanders displays all
the information about that individual.
General Expander
● Full Name: For example, John Doe. This value must be unique.
● Short Name: Optional nickname or initials for the contact.
● Language: Default is English (U.S.).
● Time Offset: User’s time offset with respect to Desigo CC server time. Default
is 0 (no time offset). This settings will also be reflected in the remote notification
message tailoring time tag values.
Groups Expander
Here you can optionally assign a contact to one or more Groups (for example,
Operator, Administrator, and so on).
NOTE: Groups are required for remote notifications, which are addressed to
recipient groups, not to individuals. You do not need groups for reports, which can
instead be emailed to individual contacts.
The Groups expander shows any groups to which the selected contact is already
assigned.
● To assign a contact to an existing group, you must select the group name from
the drop-down list and click Add. (The drop-down list shows only the groups to
which the contact does not already belong.)
● To remove a contact from a group, you must select the group name in the field
and click Remove. If all contacts are removed from a group (the group
becomes empty) the group itself is eliminated, and no longer displays in the
drop-down list.
● To create a new group and assign it to the contact, you must type a new group
name directly into the empty drop-down list field, click Add, and click Save .
This group will then become available in the drop-down list for other contacts
as well.
● To rename a group, select the group from the Groups expander, you must type
its name in the drop-down list field, click Update, and click Save . The
group will be renamed for all the contacts that use it.
Devices Expander
Here you can specify one or more devices, that is, methods which can be used for
contacting that person, such as email addresses, mobile phone numbers for SMS
messages, and/or a pager number:
● Email: you can specify up to three email addresses.
● SMS: you can specify up to two mobile phone numbers for SMS messages.
● Number/Provider: Depending on the pager service configured, you must
specify a pager number only or a pager number and provider.
328 | 352 Page 637 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Address Book
3
NOTE:
Reports can be sent by email. Remote notifications can be sent by email, SMS,
and/or pager. For each of these communication methods to work, the
corresponding service (email, SMS or pager) needs to be configured on the
Desigo CC server station.
Preferred Device Expander

● Preferred Device: This is the first method of contacting the person to be tried.
By default, it is set to the first email address that you configured in the Devices
expander. You can select a different preferred device from the drop-down list.
● Fallback Device: This is the method that will be used if sending a message to
the preferred device fails. It has to use a different service from the preferred
device. For example, if the preferred device is an email address, the fallback
cannot be a different email address. It has to be an SMS number or a pager
number.
NOTE:
The preferred and fallback device settings are used only by remote notifications.
When you email a report you can choose from all the email addresses entered for
each contact.
Outlook Import Rules for the Address Book

The Desigo CC address book can import CSV contacts files exported from
Microsoft Outlook 2003 and 2007 but only in English language.
If a CSV file is not already available, you can export contacts from Microsoft
Outlook into a CSV file as follows:
● If your language is not English, change this setting to English in Microsoft
Outlook before proceeding to export the contacts. See also:
Microsoft Office 2007 and other versions: http://office.microsoft.com/en-

us/support/change-the-default-language-for-office-programs-
HA010356057.aspx
● In Microsoft Outlook, select File > Import and Export > Export to a File >
Comma-Separated Values and then choose a location on disk and a name for
the file (for example, myContacts.csv).
– The CSV file is created in the specified location.
Once you have obtained an exported CSV file, you can check it by opening it in a
text editor. You should see:
● A multi-line text file where each line contains values separated by commas.
● The first row contains the field headers, while the succeeding rows contain the
data, one contact per row.
The fields in the Address Book workspace are populated with data from the CSV
file as follows:
● Preferred Device. The contact’s first valid email address in the CSV file is set
as the preferred device. If there is no valid email address, a mobile phone
number or pager is taken as the preferred device. If there is no valid email,
SMS number, or pager number, then the contact is skipped (not added to the
address book).
● SMS. Phone numbers in the CSV file can contain the following special
characters:
– A plus sign (+) as a prefix to the number; during import this character is
replaced by two zeros (00).
– An empty space, a hyphen (-), or a comma (,) between digits; during import
these characters are removed.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 638 of 709 329 | 352

Operating Reference
● Full Name. The contact’s first name, middle name and last name (with space
as a separator) in the CSV file are used to populate the Full Name field in the
address book. It is limited to 50 alphanumeric characters.
● Email. Email addresses are limited to 50 alphanumeric characters. If the email
address in the CSV file exceeds this limit, the field in the address book is left
empty.
The following rules apply when re-importing a CSV file (for example, an updated
version of a previously-imported Outlook contacts file):
● Any duplicated contacts (for which all the fields are unchanged) are skipped.
● If the preferred device field is changed (for example, a different email address),
a new entry for the same contact is created.
● If any other data is changed (for example, name or other phone number) the
existing contact entry in the address book is updated.
3.9 Remote Notifications

This section provides background information for remote notifications in Desigo
CC.For related procedures see the step-by-step section.
3.9.1 Overview of Remote Notifications

Desigo CC has the capability to send out remote notification (RENO) messages—
delivered, for example, using email, SMS or pagers—to one or more groups of
contacts (recipients).
Remote notifications can be of two types:
● Alarm-triggered notifications: Messages preconfigured in the system to be sent
out when certain alarms occur in the building control site. These alarm-
triggered notifications are set up in Engineering mode. Also, they can be
configured to be sent out by the system either with (manual sending) or without
(automatic sending) operator intervention.
● New (operator issued) notifications: Messages composed and sent on the
initiative of the operator. These operator-issued notifications are instead always
sent with operator intervention (manual sending). They are not tied to any
triggering event, and can be sent out at any time in Operating mode.
Operators can interact with remote notifications in the following ways:
● Start, Stop, or Resend a Remote Notification (Alarm-Triggered or Operator-
Issued)
● Monitor the Progress and Outcome of Sent Notifications (Alarm-Triggered or
Operator-Issued)
● Enable or Disable an Alarm-Triggered Remote Notification
Location of Remote Notifications

Alarm-triggered remote notification objects are located under Applications >
Remote Notifications in the Application View of System Browser.
Recipients of a Remote Notification

Remote Notifications (whether alarm-triggered or operator-issued) can be
addressed to one or more recipient groups (for example, supervisors, operators)
selected from the Desigo CC Overview of Address Book [➙ 326]. These recipients
do not necessarily have to be Desigo CC users.
330 | 352 Page 639 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
3
● For each individual contact, the address book stores a preferred device (email
address, mobile phone number, or pager number) that can be used to contact
that person, and optionally also a fallback device.
● Desigo CC will attempt to send the notification to all the members of each
recipient group, using the preferred and (if available) fallback devices
configured in the address book. (It will try the preferred device first and, if that
fails, it will try the fallback device).
● For sending to succeed it is necessary for the corresponding system services
(for email, sms, or pager communication) to be configured.
Replies from Recipients and Escalation Rules

Depending on how a remote notification is configured, it may or may not require a
response from the recipients of the message.
How Recipients can Reply to a Remote Notification

When the recipients receive a remote notification message (via email, SMS, or
pager) they can acknowledge the notification by replying to the message in the
following ways.
● Email: reply to the email message without adding any additional text.
● SMS: reply to the SMS in one of the following ways:
– Paste and send back the received text message, including the numeric
code at the end of the received text message.
– Send a text message that contains the numeric code included at the end of
the received text message.
● Pager: notification acknowledge is not supported.
NOTE:
Replying to a remote notification message only acknowledges the notification. It is
not the same thing as acknowledging the event, which is instead done by sending
an Acknowledge command from Event List (see Send Alarm Handling
Commands [➙ 41]).
Remote Notification Event Log

When working with remote notifications, entries are recorded in the History
Database tracking the progress of remote notifications (such as, remote notification
devices status error, remote notification creation/deletion or start/stop, and so on).
3.9.2 RENO Messages

In Operating mode, when you work with remote notifications, the RENO Messages
tab displays.
Remote Notifications Message Status List

The system provides a Message Status list where operators can review all the
remote notifications sent out (whether alarm-triggered or operator-issued), and
check on the progress, details, and outcome of each one. From here, it is also
possible to resend notifications, and if desired abort or halt the escalation of
ongoing ones.
Accessing the Message Status List

In some cases the message status list displays automatically, for example, after
you send an operator-issued notification. You can also access it manually in a
variety of ways.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 640 of 709 331 | 352

Operating Reference
Cases where the Message Status list opens automatically:

● After sending an operator-issued remote notification the Message Status list
displays in the Secondary pane.
● When executing the RENO step in an assisted treatment procedure the
Message Status list displays in the Assisted Treatment window.
Ways to manually access the Message Status list (System Manager must be in
Operating mode):
● View all remote notification sent:
– In System Browser, select Application View.
– Select Applications > Remote Notifications.
● View all operator-issued (new) remote notifications sent:
– In System Browser, select Management View.
– Select Project > System Settings > Related Items Templates > New
Remote Notification.
● View the remote notifications triggered by a point currently in alarm:
– Select the point in alarm in System Browser. (You can do this by double-
clicking the event source in the event descriptor of the alarm that triggered
the notification.)
Figure 23: Message Status List in the Primary Pane
332 | 352 Page 641 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
3
Figure 24: Message Status List in the Primary Pane
Figure 25: Message Status List in the Secondary Pane
Information Provided in the Message Status List

In the Message Status list, each notification displays on a separate (expandable)
row. The topmost row shows a compact notification summary with the most
important information about the notification. See the tables below for a detailed key
to the information provided in the Message Status panel.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 642 of 709 333 | 352

Operating Reference
Compact Notification Summary

(information in unexpanded/topmost row)
For new (operator-issued) notifications:
[type of sending (always manual)] – [date and time] – [overall RENO outcome ]
For alarm-triggered notifications:
[Name] – [Alarm ID] – [type of sending (automatic/manual)] - [overall RENO outcome]
Type of sending For alarm-triggered notifications, can be automatic or manual depending

on configuration.
For operator-issued notifications is always manual.
Date and time Full date and time when the notification was sent.
Name Name assigned to the alarm-triggered notification in the System

Browser tree.
Alarm ID Event ID of the alarm that triggered the notification.
Overall RENO outcome Initialized. The system is preparing to send the remote notification
messages.
Running. The remote notification is in progress. The system has
started sending messages to recipients.
Completed. The remote notification was successful. Depending on
configuration, this may mean only that the messages were successfully
sent, or also that the required responses from recipients were received.
Partially failed. The remote notification was successfully sent,
but at least one recipient group failed to meet its response threshold.
No response. The remote notification messages were sent, but none
of the recipient groups met its response threshold.
Failed. The system was unable to send the notification messages.
Aborted. The operator stopped the remote notification, or halted its
escalation.
Procedure Data Summary

(displays for alarm-triggered remote notifications only)
Type Type of message sending (Manual/Automatic).
Starting in For automatic notifications, the time left before the remote notification
message is sent (delay).
Trigger Details about the condition that triggered the notification:

Trigger: Type of trigger (for example, Alarm)
Category: Event category
Date: Date the alarm occurred
Time: time the alarm occurred
Alarm ID: Event identifier (for example, Alarm ID 44)
Point state: Point state that triggered the notification (Genuine, or All, or
Maintenance).
Source Details about the source of the event that triggered the notification:
Source: Field object in alarm
Location: Path of the field object in the System Browser tree)
Discipline: Event discipline
Sub-discipline
Type
Sub-type
334 | 352 Page 643 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
3
Recipients Summary
The first level of the recipients’ summary shows a list of the recipient groups configured for the remote
notification. You can expand each recipient group to see further details about that group and its
members.
Information shown for each recipient group:

[group name] – [group threshold/replies/timeout] - [group status] - [list of group members] – [escalation
summary]
Group name Name of the recipient group (for example, supervisors or administrators),
selected from system address book, to which the notification was
addressed.
Group replies How many group members have replied so far to the notification.
Group threshold The minimum required number of replies required for this group. For
example, Replies: 1/2 means that at least one of the two recipients
belonging to the group must reply for this message to be considered
acknowledged.
Group timeout The time limit for receiving the required number of replies from this group.
(Processing displays in the interval of time before the timeout expires.)
NOTE: When many clients and many remote notification messages are
involved, the system ensures that all the timers are aligned.
Group Status Notification status of the group as a whole (see Status [➙ 336], below, for
a key to the possible values).
List of group members List of the individual contacts in the group. You can expand each
individual contact to display that person‘s:
● Name
● Preferred (PR) and fallback (FB) devices
● Individual notification status (see Status [➙ 336], below, for a key to
possible values)
Cancelled is the status that displays when you stop the escalation.
Escalation An additional summary that displays only if the group has escalation
rules. See below for details.
Escalation Summary
The escalation summary under a group displays only if the group has escalation rules configured.
Information shown for the group’s escalation:
[escalation threshold/replies] – [escalation status] - [list of escalation recipients]
Escalation replies How many escalation recipients have replied within their individual
timeout.
Escalation threshold The minimum required number of replies required from escalation
recipients.
Escalation Status Outcome of the escalation as a whole (see Status [➙ 336], below, for a
key to possible values).
List of escalation List of the individual contacts configured as escalation recipients for this
recipients group. You can expand each contact to see that person’s:
● Name
● Preferred (PR) and fallback (FB) devices
● Timeout for replying. (Pending is indicated in the interval of time
before timeout expires.)
● Individual notification status (see Status [➙ 336], below, for a key to
possible values)
Click a PR or FB device to see the actual message sent in the panel on
the right.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 644 of 709 335 | 352

Operating Reference
Status
Applies to group status, escalation status, and notification status of an individual contact.
Empty The remote notification has not started yet.
Running The remote notification is in progress.
Pending The message has been sent to the designated recipients and the system
is awaiting a reply (the timeout for a response has not yet elapsed).
Acknowledged The designated recipients replied within the timeout. In the case of a
group it mean that the group reached its response threshold within the
timeout.
Not reachable The system failed to send the message to both the preferred and fallback
device.
Timed out The system did not receive the replies at all. In particular:
● For an individual contact: the person did not reply within the timeout.
● For a group: the group failed to reach its response threshold within
the timeout.
Cancelled The operator stopped the remote notification.
Stop The operator halted the escalation of the remote notification.
RENO Messages Toolbar Controls

In Operating mode, when you work with remote notifications, the RENO Messages
toolbar is available. It allows you to start, stop, and clear remote notifications.
Alarm-based notifications New notifications
Start RENO Start sending or re-sending the Start re-sending the new (operator-
currently selected remote notification. issued) notification.
procedure The icon is dimmed while sending is in
progress.
Stop RENO Stop the remote notification that is Stop monitoring the message status of
currently in progress. If successful, the new (operator-issued) notification.
procedure remote notification overall outcome
becomes Aborted; the status of
pending recipients becomes
Cancelled.
Notifications can only be stopped if
they are configured to be stopped.
Remote notifications with manual
sending can be stopped while they are
in progress. Notifications with
automatic sending can only be stopped
during the time delay before they start.
Stop RENO Stop the escalation for the currently selected recipient group: If the group does
not reach its threshold of required responses, any escalation does not start. The
procedure status of the groups and recipients involved becomes Stop.
escalation If there is more than one recipient group with an escalation list, to stop all
escalations you must select each group in turn and repeat this step to disable its
escalation.
This command is not available if an escalation has already started.
Clear manual n.a. Only available for new (operator-issued)

remote notifications in the Secondary
procedure pane. Remove the selected notification
from the list.
Back to n.a Only available for new (operator-issued).

Go back and compose another
configuration message.
336 | 352 Page 645 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
3
Message Status Summary

Situation Status
Remote notification Groups Recipients
outcome
The remote notification is Initialized — —

initialized, but has not yet
started.
The remote notification is Aborted Cancelled Cancelled

automatic and time-delayed,
and the operator stops it before
it starts.
The remote notification has Running Pending Acknowledged

started (regardless of whether it Pending
is automatic or manual).
Some recipients have replied
and other replies are pending
(the system is still waiting for
them to reply because they
have not yet timed out).
No group has yet reached its
response threshold.
No group timeout has yet
expired.
The system is evaluating the Running Processing Pending

final outcome of the notification.
No escalation for a group is
pending.
Some recipients have replied Running Acknowledged Acknowledged

and other replies are pending. Pending
An escalation threshold (either
first or second level) for a group
has been reached within the
timeout.
Other escalation groups are still
pending.
Some recipients have replied, Running Timed out Acknowledged

some are still pending, and Timed out
others have timed out.
Pending
The groups' thresholds have not
been reached.
The groups' timeouts are
expired.
Some second-level recipients
did not reply and it is no longer
possible to reach the groups
thresholds.
Other escalation groups are still
pending.
No replies are required for a Running Sent Sent

group and its recipients.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 646 of 709 337 | 352

Operating Reference
The operator has stopped the Aborted Cancelled Acknowledged

manual remote notification. Timed out
The status of the recipients that Cancelled
replied does not change.
The status of the recipients that
did not reply within the timeout
does not change.
The status of the recipients that
replied after the remote
notification is aborted changes
to Acknowledged.
No replies are required for a Completed Acknowledged Acknowledged

group and the related Sent Timed out
recipients.
Sent
Some recipients have replied;
other recipients have timed out,
and others still need to reply.
All the groups have reached
their response thresholds.
Some recipients have replied, Partially failed Acknowledged Acknowledged

other recipients have timed out, Timed out Timed out
and others need to reply.
Sent Pending
At least one group did not reach
its threshold within the timeout.
No escalation group is pending.
No replies are required for a
group and its recipients.
The system successfully sent at No Response Timed out Timed out

least one message to the mail Acknowledged
server but none of the recipient
groups reached their reply
threshold (different from 0).
No escalation group is pending.
For any reason, the system fails Failed Not Reachable Not Reachable
in sending all the messages to
the mail server.
One or more recipients have Completed Acknowledged Acknowledged

replied after the timeout. Partially failed Timed out after timeout
Failed Sent
3.9.3 New Remote Notification in the Secondary Pane

You can open RENO Message in the Secondary pane, and can switch to the New
Remote Notification workspace. Here you can compose a message, define the
recipients, and send an operator-issued remote notification, that is, one that is not
triggered by an alarm.
338 | 352 Page 647 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
3
Figure 26: New Remote Notification – Edit Mode
New Remote Notification Toolbar Controls
Send this message Send a new operator-issued remote notification.
Clear all message Clear all fields for the current new operator-issued remote notification
data
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 648 of 709 339 | 352

Operating Reference
3 Documents
3.10 Documents
This section provides background information on viewing documents, files, web
links or other resources in Desigo CC. For related procedures see the step-by-step
[➙ 165] section.
3.11 Other Applications

This section provides background information for operating the other applications
in Desigo CC. For related procedures, see the step-by-step [➙ 166] section.
3.11.1 Web Applications

The management workstation can be configured to host and integrate external web
applications so that when certain objects are selected in System Browser, the
associated applications display according to specific rules.
For procedures or workflows, see the Engineering step-by-step and the Operations
step-by-step [➙ 166] section.
Display Rules
Display rules can be configured for a management workstation project as well as in
exportable libraries.
● In a project, display rules are located under Project > System Settings > Client
Settings > Web Applications in the Management View of System Browser.
They may be further organized into subfolders under the main Web
Applications folder.
● In libraries, display rules are located under Project > System Settings >
Libraries > [L1-Headquarter or L2-Region or L3-Country or L4-Project >
[Library] > [Web Applications] folder in the Management View of System
Browser.
Related Items for Web Applications

When you select a system object in System Browser, the external web application
displays corresponding to the first rule configured for that object. However, you can
select any of its fixed links in the Related Items tab. This causes the corresponding
external web application to display in the Secondary pane.
When you select an external web application from the Related Items tab:
● If that external web application is not already displayed, it will display in the
Secondary pane with the parameters of the associated object.
● If that external web application is already displayed, this action will be
considered only a change of state of the external web.
● If that application is currently displayed. This means that the same external
web application will display in the Secondary pane but with the parameters of
the associated object.
Other system objects can also be configured as related items of external web
applications fixed links: for example, if you associate an external web application
fixed link to a graphic, selecting that fixed link in System Browser, the Related
Items tab will include the link to that graphic.
Fixed Links
In the Application Viewer tab, when an external web application displays, you can
click Save As and save a favorite link. Later you can quickly access this
external web application that matches a frequently used display rule.
These fixed links to external web applications are located under Applications >
Links > [links folder] in the System Browser Application View. They must be
organized into subfolders under the main Links folder.
340 | 352 Page 649 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Other Applications
3
When you select an external web application fixed link:

● The corresponding external web application displays the current data (including
event information of the associated point).
Regardless of the number of parameters included in the XML configuration file, the
Extended Operation tab only displays a maximum of ten parameters that you can
modify. An error informs you if the data you modified is invalid.
For procedures and workflows, see Generating Email Attachments for Fixed Link
Reports.
Generating and Emailing Fixed Link Reports

You can generate and email an external web application fixed link report:
● Manually, from the Operation tab. The Application Name property lets you set
the parameters to execute the external web application fixed link report.
● Automatically, as the output of a reaction. You can then schedule a download
or email of a Web Application Fixed Link report. You will set an external web
application fixed link as the target object of the output of a reaction and specify
any Time & Organization Mode conditions that will trigger the report execution.
● When a specific script is started.
Before an external Web Application Fixed Link report can be executed
(automatically or manually), you must set the user credentials for that fixed link.
After the report is executed, the corresponding file (PDF, XLSX, or DOCX) can be
downloaded and saved in the specified directory on the local client machine. Also,
if configured, an email can be sent immediately or at a scheduled time to a list of
established recipients.
Default Email without Email Subject and Body
Below is a sample of an email using the default settings. Otherwise, a subject and
text can be added to the body of the email.
Library References
In Engineering mode, when authorized experts (with appropriate access rights)
select an existing Web Applications library folder or start configuring a new one the
Rule Editor displays and lets you configure display rules at library level. Only one
library folder of this type can be created per library.
NOTE:
Only Headquarter experts and Customer Support are authorized to modify the
external web application display rules library at L1-Headquarter level.
The customization of L1-Headquarter to a lower level is not supported by external
web application display rules libraries.
Depending on the allowed customization level, authorized experts can create and
modify external web applications libraries at L2-Region, L3-Country, or L4-Project
level.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 650 of 709 341 | 352

Operating Reference
Web Links Library Block

Web Links is the library block that serves as a support library for setting the XML
configuration file for an external web application. You can create multiple library
blocks of this type per library.
NOTE:
Only Headquarter experts and Customer Support are authorized to modify the
web links at L1-Headquarter level.
The customization of L1-Headquarter to a lower level is not supported by web
links.
Depending on the allowed customization level, authorized experts can create and
modify web links at L2-Region, L3-Country, or L4-Project level.
You can set the external web application XML configuration file from the Extended
Operation tab.
3.11.1.1 Application Viewer

For procedures or workflows, see the step-by-step [➙ 166] section.
Overview of Application Viewer

To interact with discipline-specific systems, external web applications that are
integrated in the software can display in the Application Viewer tab, depending on
the display rules that have been configured. Both Internet Explorer TM 11 and
Essential Objects WebBrower based on Google Chrome TM are supported viewers.
How Web Applications Display

If only one rule matches the selection in System Browser, the Application Viewer
tab will display the corresponding external web application.
If multiple rules match the selection in System Browser, the Application Viewer tab
will display a list of all the available applications from which you can select the one
to display.
Applications display in alphabetical order. Each application is identified by a name.
When you click Show you can select the external web application to display. The
menu shows a maximum of 10 items in the list. By clicking See more..., you return
to the Application Viewer tab which again presents the complete list of applications.
You cannot change the order of the applications in the list.
If you change your selection in System Browser and the reference objects have the
same external web application, the Application Viewer tab will refresh and display
the corresponding application, but with the parameter values of the second object
selected.
If an external web application supports the single sign-on feature, logon is not
required when you select it.
342 | 352 Page 651 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Other Applications
3
Application Viewer Workspace
Application Viewer Toolbar

The Application Viewer toolbar allows you to work with fixed web application links.
Show all Select external web application

to display. The menu displays a
maximum of 10 items in the list.
Set Execution Credentials Set the execution policy for a

script.
Clear Execution Credentials Clear the execution credentials.
Email Settings Configure the email template

settings to send a fixed link
report.
Reset Zoom Sets the dashboard aspect zoom

to 100 percent.
3.11.1.2 Rule Editor

For procedures or workflows, see the step-by-step section.
Overview of Rule Editor

The Rule Editor allows you to configure the settings for the selected display rule in
System Browser. The Rule Editor tab displays in Engineering mode, when you
select one of the following:
● Rule Root Library Block
● Existing display rule in a library
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 652 of 709 343 | 352

Operating Reference
Rule Editor Workspace

The Rule Editor workspace consists of the Rule Editor pane and the Rule Editor
toolbar.
General Settings
When you configure a display rule for an external web application, the General
Settings expander lets you modify the description of the purpose of this rule. In
Operating mode, this information will help the user to choose which external web
application to work with in case of rules multiple matching.
Triggers
When you configure a display rule for an external web application, the Triggers
expander lets you set the combination of conditions that will trigger the display rule.
● Each condition occupies one row.

● You add a new condition (row), by clicking Add. This creates a new row with
the fields set to All.
● You drag-and-drop (link) one or more nodes from System Browser to the Path
field. This creates a new row with the Path field automatically set based on the
linked objects.
● To remove a row, select it and click Delete.
● Within each row, you can define what criteria an external web application must
match to make that condition true.
● All the criteria you specify on a row must be met for that condition to be true
(AND logic between columns). These criteria are described in detail below.
Path. This field specifies the target objects affected by the external web
application. The row will be true for external web applications affecting the
specified target objects that also match any other criteria specified in the row.
● To set or change the Path field of a row, drag-and drop (link) one or more
nodes from System Browser. If the Path field is already populated, a popup
menu displays where you can select one of the following:
– Add new elements: The linked objects are added to the Path field. Any new
objects will be appended to the existing ones.
– Add new elements and subtrees: The linked objects and their subtrees are
added to the Path field. Any new object subtrees will be appended to the
existing ones.
344 | 352 Page 653 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Other Applications
3
– Replace Existing Filter: The linked objects will replace the existing ones in
the Path field.
– Add New Filter: Creates a new row with the linked objects added to the
Path field of the new row, and all the other fields set to All.
– Cancel Operation: Operation is canceled.
● In the Path field you can also:
– Click the drop-down list to view all the linked objects.
– Click the x next to an object to remove it.
– Use the search box to filter the objects in the drop-down list. Note that the
search box does not accept wildcards.
– Move your cursor over an object, and an asterisk (*) in the tooltip will
indicate that the object includes subtrees.
Managed Type. This field defines the application that will display when the target
object is selected in System Browser. You can filter by one of the available values
that are inherited from the object model configuration.
Discipline/Subdiscipline, and Type/Subtype. You can use the equals (=) or not
equals (≠) operators to filter by:
● The Discipline/Subdiscipline of the target object.
● The Type/Subtype of the target object.
The row will be true for external web applications affecting the specified target
objects that also match any further criteria (managed type, discipline/subdiscipline,
type/subtype, function) specified here.
Function. This field specifies any functions associated to the target objects. You
can filter by one of the available values that are inherited from the object
configuration.
The following reference table describes how function settings affect triggers:
Function setting in the Triggers Function for the selected system Result
expander object
All No function. The trigger is valid.
All For example, Area The trigger is valid.
For example, Area No function. The trigger is invalid.
For example, Area For example, Area The trigger is valid.
For example, Area For example, Buzzer The trigger is invalid.
Output
This section allows you to configure the display rules for an external web
application.
The select the Application used to launch
When you configure a display rule for an external web application the Output
expander lets you define the application that will be affected by the rule.
Select application, based on application the parameters display.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 654 of 709 345 | 352

Operating Reference
Advanced Settings
Item Description
Application Select an application associated with the URL.
Label
Report Template
Advanced Settings
This section allows you to enter a fully qualified URL that is not dependent on an
XML file. A fully qualified URL contains the http:// or https:/ protocol. This setting
overrides an XML file.
Advanced Settings
Item Description
Application URL Enter the URL address.
User name Enter the user name to store it in an encrypted format to avoid a manual log
on.
Password Enter the password for the above user.
Confirm Password Re-enter the password.
Rule Editor Toolbar

In Engineering mode, when you select a display rule or folder, the Rule Editor
toolbar is available in the Primary pane. This allows you to create, save, and delete
display rules and folders.
Selection in System Browser

[Engineering mode]
Rule object Rule folder or subfolder
n.a. Create a new subfolder under the
New
currently selected one.
Save the changes made to the current n.a.

Save
rule.
Save the currently selected rule with a Create a new rule.

Save As
different name. You can use this to
create a new rule from an existing one.
Delete the currently selected rule. Delete the currently selected rule
Delete
subfolder and any rules contained inside
it. (You cannot delete the main Web
Applications folder).
346 | 352 Page 655 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Other Applications
3
3.11.2 Validation
The Validation feature is designed for projects in critical environments and helps
protect against inadvertent changes that might damage system functions. For
procedures or workflows, see the step-by-step [➙ 169] section.
When you change or command a validated object in the management station, the
Validation Required dialog box might display, depending on several factors such as
the configured validation profile, the configuration of Four Eyes, and the
requirement of a comment. See the following table for more detail.
Validation Profile Required User Action

Four Eyes Not Enabled Four Eyes Enabled
Disabled No input No input
Monitored No input Supervisor name and password
Enabled Comment Supervisor name and password +

Comment
Supervised User password User password +

Comment Supervisor name and password +
Comment
Additional Information for Four Eyes Authentication

● Approval must occur on the same client machine on which the change or
command was initiated.
● Supervisors are limited to those designated as a supervisor by an administrator
in the user or user group configuration.
● Supervisor approval can be initiated by any designated approver as long as the
approver also has access to command that object.
● Supervisor must be a different user.
Log Viewer
Once you accept the entries to the Validation Required dialog box, the system
records the changes, which you can review in the Log Viewer. The log serves as
an audit trail record to achieve regulatory compliance for validation.
Object Version
The object version number will increment (increase) if a validated object is modified
or commanded, depending on the scenario. Modifications or commanding of
configuration attributes or properties will increment the object version.
Modifications or commanding of status attributes or properties will not increment
the object version.
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 656 of 709 347 | 352

Operating Reference
Examples
The object version will change when modifying or commanding a configuration
property like the High Alarm Limit or Discipline.
The object version will not change when commanding the Present Value property.
Validation Indicator
When you select a validated object in the system, a visual indicator displays next to
the object name in the Operation and Extended Operation tabs.
Four Eyes Not Enabled – Examples of Validation Required Dialog

Boxes
This section and the next section show two dialog boxes for each validation profile.
The first dialog box requires a user-entered comment. The second dialog box
requires a selection from a predefined list of comments. The actual dialog box that
displays when you change or command a validated object depends on how
validation is configured for the object. If predefined comments were not configured,
you will see the first dialog box. If predefined comments were configured, you will
see something similar to the second dialog box.
Enabled Validation Profile
Supervised Validation Profile
348 | 352 Page 657 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Other Applications
3
Four Eyes Enabled – Examples of Validation Required Dialog Boxes

Monitored Validation Profile
Enabled Validation Profile
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 658 of 709 349 | 352

Operating Reference
Supervised Validation Profile
350 | 352 Page 659 of 709 A6V10415471_en_a_40

Operating Reference
Other Applications
3
A6V10415471_en_a_40 Page 660 of 709 351 | 352

Global Headquarters
Theilerstrasse 1a
CH-6300 Zug
+41 58 724 2424
Page 661 of 709
A6V10415471_en_a_40
Handing Over
Document
Standard Operating Procedure
Page 662 of 709

CLIENT: SIEMENS TECHNOLOGY & SERVICES
CONSULTANT: NETCON TECHNOLOGIES (I) PVT. LTD.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ENGINEERING DOCUMENT: SL/STS/GOLD HILL DC/BMS/SOP REV: 0 SHEET: 1
Page 663 of 709

Table of Contents
1.0 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR DESIGO CC ........................... 3
1.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE........................................................................................................... 4
1.3 LAUNCHING DESIGO CC ........................................................................................................... 4
1.4 NAVIGATION ........................................................................................................................... 5
1.5 NAVIGATION WORKFLOW ....................................................................................................... 6
1.6 EVENT LIST ............................................................................................................................... 7
1.7 GRAPHICS ................................................................................................................................ 7
1.8 TRENDS.................................................................................................................................... 8
1.9 REPORTS .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.0 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 9
2.1 FAILED TO LAUNCH DESIGO CC ................................................................................................ 9
2.2 FAILED TO CONNECT DDC TO SERVER ...................................................................................... 9
2.3 SENSOR IS OFFLINE ................................................................................................................ 10
3.0 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................. 10
Page 664 of 709

1.0 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR DESIGO CC
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Building Management System in eighth floor DC consists of a main server and recording
server along with two workstations located in the BMS room.
BAS system has integrated following respective building system through Hard Points &
Soft Point (Modbus-RS485, BACnet over IP)
 Chilled Water System

 Ceiling Suspended Units
 Electrical Breakers
 UPS
 Isolation Transformer
 Energy Meters
 iPDU
 PAHU
 In-row Units
 Rodent Repellant System
 Water Leak Detection System
 T & Rh sensors
 Rack Readers
Page 665 of 709

1.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The below schematic provides an overview of the architecture implemented in this
project.
1.3 LAUNCHING DESIGO CC
To operate Desigo CC from a computer where the client software is installed:
a. Start Desigo CC from the Windows Start button or by clicking the icon on the
desktop. The initialization splash screen displays for a few seconds. Then the
logon dialog box displays.
b. Enter your username and password.
c. Select the domain.
d. Click Logon.
Page 666 of 709

1.4 NAVIGATION
The system screen can display many windows, some of which are made up of multiple
panes, divided by splitters. A window can contain up to four panes. Each pane houses a
functional component of the Desigo CC system (for example, a browser for navigating and
selecting system objects, a viewer for displaying site floor plans, tools for inspecting the
properties of objects, and so on).
1 2 3
4 5
Item Description
1 Selection pane (vertically along the left). Also referred to as Navigation pane.
2 Primary pane (to the right of the Selection pane)
3 Secondary pane (opens when required, alongside the Primary pane)
4 Contextual pane (underneath the Primary and Secondary panes, divided into two
parts)
5 Status bar. Along the bottom of the window, this bar displays status/update
messages (Ready, Default loaded successfully, and so on).
Page 667 of 709

1.5 NAVIGATION WORKFLOW
The following shows the typical workflow for navigating the system.
1. Select a view in System Browser (1), in the Selection pane (for example, Application
View).
 The selected view displays in the System Browser tree.
2. Navigate the tree and select the object (2) you want to work with.
 The information about the selected object displays in the Textual Viewer (3),
in the Primary pane.
 The properties of the selected object display in the Operation tab (4), in the
Contextual pane.
 Links to additional resources associated with the selected object display in the
Related Items tab (5), in the Contextual pane.
3. Click a related item link (5) (for example, New Remote Notification) to open that
resource in the Secondary pane.
 The selected related item displays in the Secondary pane (6)
4. If necessary, click the icon (7) to display the navigation bar (8) with icons for moving
back and forth between the most recent screens in the Primary pane and going back
to the favorite location.
1 2 8 7 6
4 3 5
Page 668 of 709

1.6 EVENT LIST
To open the event list, please follow the below steps.
 On the right-hand side of the Summary bar, click Open Event List . The
Event List displays in the main work area of the system screen.
 Select the event to view, acknowledge, reset.
1.7 GRAPHICS
The Graphics application is located by selecting the below path.
 System Browser > Application View > Applications tree.
Project graphics are listed in the root of the Graphics tree.
Commanding Off-Normal Properties
1. Navigate to the Status and Commands window associated with the object you want
to command.
2. Click the expander to display the list of property information for the object. The
system displays a list of the object’s properties, their current state, and all commands
available for this object.
3. Click the command button that displays the command you want to execute. If the
command does not have arguments associated with it, the command is sent and the
status displays.
4. (Optional) If the command button has arguments associated with it, proceed to Step
5.
5. (Optional) Complete the required fields.
6. Click Send. The system displays the status of the command.
Page 669 of 709

Printing from Graphics Viewer:

3. Do one of the following.
– Click Print . a. In the Print dialog box, select the printer. b. Select Print.
– Click Page setup . a. In the Page setup window, configure the settings as necessary.
For more information, see Page Setup View. b. Click Print. c. In the Print dialog box,
select the printer. d. Select Print.
The graphic is printed.
1.8 TRENDS
To view trends, below steps should be followed.

2. Select Applications > Trends > TrendViewDefinitions.
3. Double click on the trend definition that you want to view.
The corresponding trend view will be displayed.
Page 670 of 709

1.9 REPORTS
To view reports, below steps should be followed.

2. Select Applications > Reports .
3. Double click on the report that you want to view.
The corresponding report will be displayed.
To print a report, follow the below steps.

2. Select Applications > Reports .
3. Click Create and View PDF.
4. Click Print.
2.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 FAILED TO LAUNCH DESIGO CC
If Desigo CC fails to launch. Please follow the below steps.
 Check the server address.
 Check the username and password. Verify that you have typed your username
correctly, then re-type your password to ensure it does not contain errors.
2.2 FAILED TO CONNECT DDC TO SERVER

If a particular DDC is disconnected from the server, below steps should be followed:
 Check the ping connection from the workstation to the DDC controller.
 If ping is unsuccessful, go to the field to check the physical connection between
controller & switch. Inspect the CAT-6 cable for any damage.
 If the issue still occurs, contact system administrator.
Page 671 of 709

2.3 SENSOR IS OFFLINE

If a particular field sensor is offline and is not providing real time values, below steps
should be followed:
 Check the wiring of the sensor and make sure connections are secure.
 Inspect the sensor cable for any physical damage.
 If the issue still occurs, system administrator.
3.0 MAINTENANCE
Windows Updates
Check for Windows updates and ensure latest patches are installed.
Access Rights
During maintenance, please review the access rights of the system. If a person is no
longer associated with the site, remove the access rights from the system.
Visual Inspection
Check the components for any defect/damage. All components should be properly fixed
and there is no evidence of tampering.
Event Report
Check event report for any controller or sensors that might need attention.
Page 672 of 709

Handing Over
Document
Spare List
Page 673 of 709

BMS SPARE LIST
SL NO. Description Model No. Qty Unit
1 PXC100-E.D Automation Station PXC100-E.D 1 No
2 PXC50-E.D Automation Station PXC50-E.D 1 No
3 Integration Controller PXC001-E.D 1 No
4 TXM1.16D 16 I/O digital input module TXM1.16D 1 No
5 TXM1.8D 8 I/O digital input module TXM1.8D 1 No
6 TXM1.8U 8 I/O univ module (DI. AI, AO) TXM1.8U 1 No
7 TXS1.12F10 Power Supply Mod 24VDC. 1.2A TXS1.12F10 1 No
8 TXS1.EF10 Passive Bus Connection Module TXS1.EF10 1 No
9 Address Key TXA1.K12 1 No
10 Modules TXI2.OPEN 2 No
11 Modules TXI2-S.OPEN 2 No
12 Temerature and RH sensor QFA2020 1 No
13 Outdoor T & RH QFA3160 1 No
14 PXA40-RS1 Option Module PXA40-RS1 1 No
15 Hydrogen Sensor MC2-D-P3440-A-0-P 1 No
Page 674 of 709

Handing Over
Document
10
Asbuilt Drawing
Page 675 of 709

3800 6800 844 6800 2360
844
450
2000 ACC-AP 2000 ACC-AP
2000 1200ACC-AP
2000
SYNC PANEL
ACC-AP ACC-AP
890
890
100KVA
1200
1200
(W655xD1050xH550)
SUSPENDED AC-1
1050
1000
STEP STEP
CEILING
HYDROGEN SENSOR - BAT 1

1050
PANEL
PAHU PAHU PAHU PAHU
CSU 1
2840
2195 2352 800
STORE ROOM
760 362
1110
T & RH SENSOR - BAT 1
108.47 SQ FT
1240
920
955 655 2190 1033 1120 2594 1000 1053
PANEL
CSU 2
1000 2400 1120 1280
4270
4510
T & RH
(W900xD1000
100 KVA
(W900xD1000
100 KVA
MAIN INCOMING PANEL-1
UPS-1
UPS-2
xH2000
xH2000
900
900
MAIN INCOMING PANEL-2

2130 650 1020 T & RH SENSOR - STR
BATTERY ROOM-1
100 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
297.36 SQ FT
H2100)
BANK
(W4820xD1120xH2375)
GYPSUM
BOXING
PIPING
CHW
(W4820xD1120xH2375)
(W1540xD560xH2375)
100 KVA UPS O/P
(W1540xD560xH2375)
100 KVA UPS O/P

7270
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
H2100)
BANK
PANEL-1
PANEL-2
1540
1540
T & RH H
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
ELECTRICAL ROOM - 1
H2100)
BANK
4820
1493
3600
4820
CSU 1 CSU 2
450
PANEL PANEL
ELECTRICAL ROOM - 2
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
H2100)
BANK
821.60 SQ FT
(W655xD1050xH550)
SUSPENDED AC-2
T & RH T & RH
8200
GYPSUM
BOXING
CRV & PAHU
PIPING
CRV & PAHU
(W1760xD560xH2375)
(W1760xD560xH2375)
CHW
CEILING
1050
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
821.97 SQ FT
PANEL-2
PANEL-1
T & RH SENSOR - ER 2
11230
11230
2160
H2100)
BANK
T & RH SENSOR - ER 1
1760
1760
(W655xD1050xH550)
SUSPENDED AC-2
(W600xD650x
JUNCTION
480
H2100)
BOX
ACS-AFO
CEILING
895 655 1400
BATTERY RACK
(W1020xD480xH1231)
65AH 18 NOS.
1000 650
BATTERY ROOM - 2
1020
GYPSUM
BOXING
PIPING
100 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS 400 KVA UPS
830
CHW
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
(W1200xD420xH2085)
ACS-AFO
HEATER DB
H2100)
BANK
T & RH SENSOR - BAT 2
492.21 SQ FT
APM UPS-1
250
1200
(W1400xD1000
20 KVA -1
400 KVA
APM UPS-2
T & RH
GXT MT UPS
(W600xD650x
EMDB
BATTERY
(W1400xD1000
xH2000)
H2100)
BANK
400 KVA
ACS-AFO
1400
20 KVA -2
ATS
40A
xH2000)
GXT MT UPS
6720
1400
592
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
H
H2100)
BANK
NOVEC
420 1633
ROOM
SQ FT
HYDROGEN SENSOR - BAT 2
84.23
3600
DDC 05A
DDC 03
2059
1200
ACC-AP
(W600xD650x
DDC
DDC
BATTERY
ACC-AP
2125
H2100)
BANK
(W800xD1260
ISOLATION
FORMER-1
1910
400 KVA
TRANS-
xH1700)
(W800xD1260
T & RH
800
FORMER-2
ISOLATION
400 KVA
TRANS-
xH1700)
800
(W600xD650x
BATTERY
T & RH SENSOR - NOVEC
H2100)
BANK
DDC 05B
893 1260
500
655
DDC
1260
(W655xD1050xH550)
SUSPENDED AC-1
(W600xD650x
JUNCTION
1200
H2100)
BOX
FIRE EXIT
(W2520xD560xH2375) (W2520xD560xH2375)
CEILING
560
560
1050
STEP
DOOR
400 KVA UPS O/P PANEL-1 400 KVA UPS O/P PANEL-2
1680
DDC 01B
1200
GYPSUM
1400
1420
BOXING
PIPING
CHW
DDC 01A
2480 2520 1800 1000 SYMBOL DESCRIPTION QTY
1100 2520 3180
960
DDC
800
800
600
(W1020xD480xH1231)
480
BATTERY RACK
SS RAILING DDC 65AH 18 NOS.

DDC DDC PANEL 05
100 BBT FEEDBOX 7 NOS

T & RH SENSOR 13 - SVR
2050 BBT FEEDBOX 7 NOS 26

4600 T & RH T & RH SENSOR
800
17905

B
1800
170.32 SQ FT
1000 H HYDROGEN SENSOR 02
HUB ROOM

4C X 1.0 SQ. MM. UNSCREENED.
3388
3681
FUTURE
T & RH SERVER
RACK #51
SERVER
RACK #50 T & RH SERVER
RACK #31
SERVER
RACK #30 T & RH SERVER
RACK #11
SERVER
RACK #10 T & RH 4C X 1.0 SQ. MM. SCREENED.
FUTURE
SERVER SERVER SERVER SERVER SERVER 2C X 1.0 SQ. MM. SCREENED.
HOT AISLE CONTAINMENT

SERVER
RACK #49 RACK #32 RACK #29 RACK #12 RACK #09
RACK #52
2C X 1.0 SQ. MM. SCREENED.
FUTURE
SERVER IRC UNIT #15 SERVER IRC UNIT #09 SERVER IRC UNIT #03 (MODBUS INTEGRATION)
RACK #33 RACK #13
RACK #53
FUTURE
IRC UNIT #16 T & RH SERVER
RACK #48
RACK #28
RACK #08
4840
RAMP
FUTURE
SERVER SERVER SERVER SERVER SERVER
SERVER ROOM
SERVER
2078.55 SQ FT
2000
2000
RACK #54

FUTURE

SERVER
10800
RACK #55
FUTURE
7800
IRC UNIT #14 SERVER IRC UNIT #08 SERVER IRC UNIT #02
SERVER
RACK #36 RACK #16
RACK #56
470
FUTURE 1200
MUX ROOM - 1
SERVER IRC UNIT #11 SERVER IRC UNIT #05 SERVER
112.39 SQ FT
IRC UNIT #17 ACC-AP
STEP
RACK #45 RACK #25 RACK #05
1200
PANEL
CSU 1
FUTURE OPEN RACK
1050 T & RH SENSOR - MUX 2
SERVER
T & RH
2270
RACK #44 RACK #37 RACK #24 RACK #17 RACK #04 42U
RACK #57
AS BUILT
1800
(W655xD1050xH550)
FUTURE
SUSPENDED AC-1
T & RH

T & RH T & RH
CEILING
SERVER
1070
OPEN RACK
900
RACK #58
GYPSUM
BOXING
PIPING
42U
CHW
FUTURE
SERVER SERVER
SERVER IRC UNIT #13 IRC UNIT #07 IRC UNIT #01
5120
RACK #39 RACK #19
T & RH RACK #59
T & RH
T & RH
FUTURE
T & RH
580
SERVER SERVER SERVER
A
IRC UNIT #12 IRC UNIT #06
STEP
MUX ROOM - 2
IRC UNIT #18 RACK #42 RACK #22 RACK #02
117.84 SQ FT
1200
A
1200
ACC-AP
PANEL
CSU 1
FUTURE
600
SERVER
RACK #60
RACK #41 RACK #40 RACK #21 RACK #20 RACK #01 OPEN RACK
2380
42U
GYPSUM BOXING
CHW PIPING
1800
1680 1200 1200 1200 1800 1200 1200 1200 1800 1200 1200 1200 1800 (W655xD1050xH550)
SUSPENDED AC-1
T & RH AB AS BUILT DRAWING 25.03.21 SIEMENS
1200
1180
CEILING
OPEN RACK REV.NO. Description Date Issued by

B
ACC-AP
2000 42U T & RH SENSOR - MUX 1
2000
DDC DDC CUP- PERSONAL PERSONAL
SIEMENS TECHNOLOGY &
BOARD
(W380XD450 (W380XD450 (W380XD450
LOCKER 1 LOCKER 2
CHW PIPING DUCT 4600 SERVICES, BANGALORE.
800
DDC DDC 04 XH1800) XH1800) XH1800)
890
890
1140 3602
600
1600
DDC 02A
1200
800 DDC 02B (W655xD1050xH550) CHW

SUSPENDED AC-2 (W655xD1050xH550) PIPING DUCT
PAHU PAHU
655
SUSPENDED AC-2
810 600 2020
BACKUP ROOM
CEILING
CEILING
1280 844 402 844
PANEL
CSU 2
180.31 SQ FT
Netcon Technologies
MONITORING
169.79
SCREEN 1
BMS ROOM
STAGING ROOM
1200
T & RH netcon India Pvt Ltd

209.21 SQ FT
STAGING
2240
800
BACKUP
PANEL
CSU 1
RACK
BMS
SERVER WORKSTATION
RACK
1200
1200
4650
WLDP 3 RRC 3
WLDP 2 RRC 2
WLDP
T & RH SENSOR - NWRM

(W655xD1050xH550)
T & RH
TRAP
SUSPENDED AC-1
SQ
MAN
SIEMENS Ltd.,
(W655xD1050xH550)
CEILING
1 RRC
655
SUSPENDED AC-1
MONITORING
SCREEN 2
SMART INFRASTRUCTURE, RSS

1200
NETWORK ROOM
CEILING
FT
430 600 T & RH SENSOR - STG #49,JYOTHI MAHAL, GROUND FLOOR

1
ST.MARKS ROAD, BANGALORE-560001

(W655xD1050xH550)
282.61 SQ FT
T & RH 1050
655
(W655xD1050xH550) SUSPENDED AC-2

Tel : 080 33299143
PC
BMS
SUSPENDED AC-1 CEILING

T & RH SENSOR - BMS
CEILING
NETWORK
7390
7390
1860
1850
T & RH 750 RACK #01

1550
PANEL
CSU 2
880
PIPING DUCT
1062
ACC-AP
ACC-AP
1820 150
CHW
T & RH SENSOR - BKR ACC-AP

690
PANEL
CSU 1
ACC-AP
NETWORK
1200 GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA
320
BOOK CASE 2 BOOK CASE 1

(W910XD320XH1700) (W910XD320XH1700) 2000 RACK #02
3200
CENTER, BANGALORE.
1200 3602 190
STEP
NETWORK
3392 RACK #03
4180
1200
CORRIDOR
492 SQ FT
BMS LAYOUT
NETWORK
ACC-AP
2500
RACK #04
2000
2000
RAMP
1150 1200 1200

1300
1000
PCB SB PG
25.03.2021 25.03.2021 25.03.2021
ACC-AP
3700 SL/STS/GOLD HILL DC/BMS LAYOUT NTS AB

14095 3545
Page 676 of 709

1000
40 mm x 40 mm
NOTE
40
MCB MCB
TRAN SFORMER
TRAN SFORMER
1. All dimension are in mm
1 50VA
1 50VA
125
2 4V (G) 2 4V (G) 2 4V G,G0
2. All cable entries from bottom through cable
60
60 mm x 40 mm
SIEMENS gland plate
P X C100-E.D
TXS1.12F10 TX M 1 .16D-1 TX M 1 .16D-2 TX M 1 .16D-3 TX M 1 .16D-4 TX M 1 .16D-5 TX M 1 .16D-6 TX M 1 .16D-7 TX M 1 .16D-8 TX M 1 .16D-9
185
3. Panel dimension 1000mm x 1000mm x 300mm
DDC PANEL 60 mm x 40 mm
4. Panel color gray
125
TXS1.EF10 TX M 1 .1 6D-10
T XI2. OPEN-1 T XI2. S. OPEN-2 T XI2. OPEN-3
965
T XM1 .16 D-1
5. Mounting - wall mount
0 60
60 mm x 40 mm
CABLE COLOR
60 mm x 40 mm
125
1000
60 mm x 40 mm
T XM1 .16 D-2 T XM1 .16 D-3 T XM1 .16 D-4 T XM1 .16 D-5 T XM1 .16 D-6
60
60 mm x 40 mm
1. Mains Power- P-Red, N-Black, & E- Green
Earthing stud
2. 24V AC-Blue Color Cable with ferrule" G" for 24V, G0 to be
125
T XM1 .16 D-6 T XM1 .16 D-7 T XM1 .16 D-8 T XM1 .16 D-9 T XM1 .16 D-10
connected to the panel earth
60 mm x 40 mm
3. Network Cable - White with ferrule A&B

1000
4. D.O (Digital Output) Cable - Blue

GLAND PLATE
5. Other Field cables – Gray
0
30
1000
Bill of Materials:
S. No Description Size / Rating Qty

Sheet Steel Enclosure with
1 Mounting Plate (1000 x 1000 x 300)mm 1 No.
2 E & I Core Transformer 230 / 24V AC - 150 VA 2 Nos
3 Terminal Blocks ( 6 mm ) 2.5 Sq.mm 340 Nos.
4 MCB 230 V, 6A SP 2 Nos.
5 MOV 30 V 2 No.
Gland Plate 435 mm x 150 mm 6 24V G,G0 24 V 20 Nos.
PVC Slotted Cable Tray 40 mm x 40 mm 1 Meter.

7 (approximate) 60 mm x 40 mm 10 Meters.
300
240
DIN Rail
8 (approximate) 40 mm 7 Meters.
PXC100-E.D 01 No.
IO MODULES 10 Nos.
935
9 DDC TXI2.OPEN 02 Nos.
TXI2-S.OPEN 01 No.
1000
TXS1.EF10 01 No.
TXS1.12F10 01 No.
10 Wire, Ferrules, Lugs 1 Sq.mm 1 Lot.
11 Mounting Clamps 40 mm 1 Lot.
DATE 25.03.2021 DDC PANEL

PROJECT : GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER, BANGALORE DDC - 01 - MP
SCALE NTS REF:
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 01 - MP

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 01 - MP
AB ASBUILT DRAWING 25.03.2021 PCB CHECKED SB
Siemens Ltd.
Page 677 of 709
Sl.No. Rev DATE NAME LOCATION: 8TH FLOOR, DATA CENTER - ELECTRICAL ROOM 1 Sheet: 1 of 5
AB
Sl.No.
L
L
0V
230V
N
230V A.C
24V A.C 6A SP MCB
50Hz
UPS DB
04
4C
4B
4A
N
X1
24V
TB
2A
2A
2A
5A
150 VA
01 02 03 TB 1
230V/24V
Rev
L
0V
230V
24V A.C 230V A.C 6A SP MCB
50Hz
ASBUILT DRAWING
5C
05
5B
5A
N
MOV 30 V
X2
5B
5A
24V
GND(G0)
150 VA
2A
2A
2A
5A
230V/24V
DATE
25.03.2021
PCB
NAME
MOV 30 V
5D
5C
DATE
SCALE
DRAWN
CHECKED
G (24V)
GND(G0)
GND(G0)
To Sensors
& Actuators
SB
NTS
PCB
25.03.2021
1
24V~
2
3
24V (G)
GND(G0)
PXC100-E.D
Siemens Ltd.
HMI/TOOL
SIEMENS
D D C C O M M U N IC A TION IP PORT
D D C C O M M U N IC A TIO N C A B L E TO NETWORK SWITCH
CS
3
Page 678 of 709

24V~
2
CD
4
B
5
CS
6
CD
TITLE :
TO TXS1.12F10 (2)
PROJECT :
CD
CS
LOCATION:
To TXS1.12F10-2 (0V AC)
To TXS1.12F10 (24V AC)
TXS1.12F10 (1)
Plug to interconnection
between Modules
TB
1
18
A1
A1
(1)
(9)
2
19
CSU-1 On/Off Status - BMS ROOM CSU-1 On/Off Status - BATTERY ROOM 2
A2
A2
3
20
A3
A3
(2)
(10)
4
21
MOD-1
CSU-2 On/Off Status - BMS ROOM CSU-2 On/Off Status - BATTERY ROOM 2
A4
A4
5
22
A5
A5
(3)
(11)
6
23
CSU-1 On/Off Status - BACKUP ROOM CSU-1 On/Off Status - MUX ROOM 1
A6
A6
7
24
A7
A7
(4)
(12)
8
25
CSU-2 On/Off Status - BACKUP ROOM CSU-1 On/Off Status - MUX ROOM 2
A8
A8
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
CSU-1 On/Off Status - STAGGING ROOM Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-1 - On/Off Status
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
CSU-2 On/Off Status - STAGGING ROOM Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-1 - Trip Status
8TH FLOOR, DATA CENTER - ELECTRICAL ROOM 1
13
30
TXM1.16D
GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER, BANGALORE

(7)
(15)
14
31
CSU-1 On/Off Status - BATTERY ROOM 1 Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-2 - On/Off Status
15
32
WIRING DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 01 - MP

(8)
(16)
16
33
CSU-2 On/Off Status - BATTERY ROOM 1 Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-2 - Trip Status
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
TB A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33
A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33
between Modules
TB
1
18
B1
B1
(1)
(9)
2
19
Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-3 - On/Off Status Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-7 - On/Off Status
B2
B2
3
20
B3
B3
REF:
(2)
(10)
4
21
Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-3 - Trip Status

MOD-2

Sheet:
B4
B4
5
22
B5
B5
(3)
(11)
6
23
DDC TAG:
B6
B6
7
24
DDC PANEL
B7
B7
(4)
(12)
8
25
Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-4 - Trip Status Main Incoming Panel-1 : MCCB Breaker-8 - Trip Status
B8
B8
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
11
28
(6)
(14)
2 of 5
12
29
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
15
32
DDC - 01 - MP
DDC - 01 - MP
(8)
(16)
16
33
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
TB B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33
B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33
between Modules
AB
Sl.No.
TB
1
18
C1
C1
(1)
(9)
2
19
C2
C2
3
20
C3
C3
(2)
(10)
4
21
MOD-3
C4
C4
5
22
C5
C5
(3)
(11)
6
23
C6
C6
7
24
C7
C7
(4)
(12)
8
25
C8
C8
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
Rev
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
ASBUILT DRAWING
15
32
(8)
(16)
16
33
C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16

C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16
TB C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33
C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33
between Modules
TB
1
18
D1
D1
(1)
(9)
2
19
UPS Output Panel -1 (400 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-1 - On/Off Status UPS Output Panel -1 (400 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-5 - On/Off Status
D2
D2
DATE
3
20
D3
D3
(2)
(10)
25.03.2021
21
UPS Output Panel -1 (400 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-1 - Trip Status
MOD-4
D4
D4
5
22
D5
D5
(3)
(11)
6
23
D6
D6
7
24
D7
D7
(4)
(12)
PCB
25
UPS Output Panel -1 (400 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-2 - Trip Status UPS Output Panel -1 (400 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-6 - Trip Status
NAME
D8
D8
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
DATE
SCALE
13
30
TXM1.16D
DRAWN
(7)
(15)
14
31
CHECKED
15
32
(8)
(16)
16
33
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16

D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
TB D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33
D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33
SB
NTS
PCB
between Modules
25.03.2021
TB
1
18
E1
E1
(1)
(9)
2
19
E2
E2
3
20
E3
E3
(2)
(10)
4
21

MOD-5
E4
E4
5
22
E5
E5
(3)
(11)
6
23
E6
E6
7
24
E7
E7
(4)
(12)
8
25
E8
E8
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
15
32
Siemens Ltd.
(8)
(16)
16
33
E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16

E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16
TB E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33
E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33
SIEMENS
between Modules
TB
1
18
F1
F1
(1)
(9)
2
19
F2
F2
3
20
F3
F3
(2)
(10)
4
21

MOD-6
Page 679 of 709

F4
F4
5
22
F5
F5
(3)
(11)
6
23
F6
F6
7
24
F7
F7
(4)
(12)
8
25
F8
F8
TITLE :
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
PROJECT :
LOCATION:
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
15
32
(8)
(16)
16
33
F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
TB F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33
F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33
between Modules
TB
1
18
(1)
(9)
2
19
3
20
(2)
(10)
4
21

MOD-7

5
22
(3)
(11)
6
23
7
24
(4)
(12)
8
25
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
15
32

(8)
(16)
16
33
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16
TB G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33
between Modules
TB
1
18
H1
H1
(1)
(9)
2
19
H2
H2
3
20
H3
H3
(2)
(10)
4
21

MOD-8

H4
H4
5
22
H5
H5
(3)
(11)
REF:
6
23
Sheet:
H6
H6
7
24
H7
H7
(4)
(12)
8
25
DDC TAG:
H8
H8
9
26
DDC PANEL
(5)
(13)
10
27
UPS Output Panel -2 (100 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-4 - On/Off Status ACS Door - 1 : Common Critical Alarm
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
UPS Output Panel -2 (100 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-4 - Trip Status ACS Door - 1 : Door Open Too Long Alarm
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
3 of 5
UPS Output Panel -2 (100 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-5 - On/Off Status ACS Door - 2 : Common Critical Alarm
15
32
(8)
(16)
16
33
UPS Output Panel -2 (100 kVA) : MCCB Breaker-5 - Trip Status ACS Door - 2 : Door Open Too Long Alarm
H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16
H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16
TB H18 H19 H20 H21 H22 H23 H24 H25 H26 H27 H28 H29 H30 H31 H32 H33
H18 H19 H20 H21 H22 H23 H24 H25 H26 H27 H28 H29 H30 H31 H32 H33
DDC - 01 - MP
DDC - 01 - MP
AB
Sl.No.
TB
1
18
I1
I1
(1)
(9)
2
19
ACS Door - 3 : Common Critical Alarm ACS Door - 7 : Common Critical Alarm
I2
I2
3
20
I3
I3
(2)
(10)
4
21
ACS Door - 3 : Door Open Too Long Alarm ACS Door - 7 : Door Open Too Long Alarm
MOD-9
I4
I4
5
22
I5
I5
(3)
(11)
6
23
I6
I6
7
24
I7
I7
(4)
(12)
8
25
I8
I8
9
26
I9
I9
(5)
(13)
10
27
11
28
(6)
Rev
(14)
12
29
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
15
32
ASBUILT DRAWING
(8)
(16)
16
33
I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16

I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16
TB I18 I19 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27 I28 I29 I30 I31 I32 I33
I18 I19 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27 I28 I29 I30 I31 I32 I33
DATE
25.03.2021
(0V AC)
(24V AC)
CS
CD
PCB
PCB
3
NAME
24V~
CS CD
5
4
5
CS
From TXS1.12F10 (2)
DATE
CD
SCALE
TXS1.EF10 (3)
DRAWN
1 Run x 4C x 1.0 Sq.mm Cable
CHECKED
between Modules
SB
NTS
PCB
TB
1
18
J1
J1
(1)
(9)
2
19
J2
J2
25.03.2021
3
20
J3
J3
(2)
(10)
4
21
MOD-10
J4
J4
5
22
J5
J5
(3)
(11)
6
23
J6
J6
7
24
J7
J7
(4)
(12)
8
25
J8
J8
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
ACS Door - 13 : Common Critical Alarm CSU-13 On/Off Status

11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
ACS Door - 13 : Door Open Too Long Alarm CSU-14 On/Off Status
13
30
TXM1.16D
(7)
(15)
14
31
ACS Door - 14 : Common Critical Alarm Battery Room-1 Exhaust Fan On/Off Status
15
32
(8)
(16)
16
33
ACS Door - 14 : Door Open Too Long Alarm Battery Room-2 Exhaust Fan On/Off Status
J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16

J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16
TB J18 J19 J20 J21 J22 J23 J24 J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31 J32 J33
J18 J19 J20 J21 J22 J23 J24 J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31 J32 J33
Siemens Ltd.
SIEMENS
between Modules
Page 680 of 709

TITLE :
PROJECT :
LOCATION:
-
RX
GND
TXI2.OPEN (1)


REF:
Sheet:
DDC TAG:
DDC PANEL
4 of 5
DDC - 01 - MP
DDC - 01 - MP
RX GND RX GND
- -
TXI2.S.OPEN (2) TXI2.OPEN (3)

between Modules
between Modules

SCALE NTS REF:
PCB DRAWN PCB SIEMENS WIRING DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 01 - MP
Siemens Ltd.
Page 681 of 709
0
25
25 mm x 40 mm
.4
in
M
NOTE
125
24V G,G0
SIEMENS
40
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
125
40 mm x 40 mm
TXS1.EF10 TXM1.16D-11 TXM1.16D-12 TXM1.6R-13 TXM1.6R-14 TXM1.6R-15
40
40 mm x 40 mm
730
TXM1.6R-13
TXM1.6R-15
DDC PANEL
TXM1.16D-11
TXM1.16D-12
295
TXM1.6R-14
760
Earthing stud CABLE COLOR
40
40 mm x 40 mm
40
40 124 40 124 40 124 40 124 40
696
GLAND PLATE
0
21
760

Gland Plate 530 mm x 150 mm Sheet Steel Enclosure with 1 No.
1 760 x 760 x 210
37,5
Mounting Plate
2 E & I Core Transformer 230 / 24V AC - 80 VA ----

210
150
75
3 Terminal Blocks ( 6 mm ) Phoenix - 2.5 Sq.mm 120 Nos.

37,5
4 MCB 230 V, 6 A SP ----
5 MOV 30 V ---
115 115
6 Fuse TB WAGO - 24 V ---
530 25 mm x 40 mm 0.8 Meters.

PVC Slotted Cable Tray
7 (approximate) 40 mm x 40 mm 2.8 Meters.
760
DIN Rail
8 (approximate) 40 mm 2.2 Meters.
9 DDC PXC-100.ED ---
TXS1.12F10 1 No.
10 Module TXS1.EF 10 ----
Modules 5 Nos.
TXI2.OPEN ---

PROJECT : GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER, BANGALORE DDC - 01 - RP
SCALE NTS REF:
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 01 - RP

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 01 - RP
Siemens Ltd.
Page 682 of 709
K18 K19 K20 K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26 K27 K28 K29 K30 K31 K32 K33 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 L30 L31 L32 L33 M20 M21 M26 M27 M32 M33 N20 N21 N26 N27 N32 N33 O20 O21 O26 O27 O32 O33
CSU-2 On/Off Command - BATTERY ROOM 2

CSU-1 On/Off Command - STAGGING ROOM
CSU-2 On/Off Command - STAGGING ROOM

CSU-2 On/Off Command - BACKUP ROOM
CSU-1 On/Off Command - MUX ROOM 1
CSU-1 On/Off Command - MUX ROOM 2

CD
From TXS1.12F10 (1)
CS
(24V AC)
(0V AC)
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
TB K18 K19 K20 K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26 K27 K28 K29 K30 K31 K32 K33 TB L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 L30 L31 L32 L33 M20 M21 M26 M27 M32 M33 N20 N21 N26 N27 N32 N33 O20 O21 O26 O27 O32 O33
3 4 5 6
24V~ CS CD
20 26 32 20 26 32 20 26 32
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 19 21 25 27 31 33 19 21 25 27 31 33 19 21 25 27 31 33
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (4) (5) (6) (4) (5) (6) (4) (5) (6)
TXS1.12F10 (2) MOD-11 TXM1.16D MOD-12 TXM1.16D MOD-13 TXM1.6R MOD-14 TXM1.6R MOD-15 TXM1.6R
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 8 10 14 16 2 4 8 10 14 16 2 4 8 10 14 16
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
3 9 15 3 9 15 3 9 15
CS CD
4 5
TB K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 TB L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 M2 M3 M8 M9 M14 M16 N2 N3 N8 N9 N14 N16 O2 O3 O8 O9 O14 O16
between Modules
between Modules
between Modules
between Modules
between Modules
CD
TO TXS1.EF10 (3) CS
Door Access Control System - Emergency Evacuation Control


CSU-1 On/Off Command - BACKUP ROOM
CSU-1 On/Off Command - BMS ROOM
CSU-2 On/Off Command - BMS ROOM
CSU-1 On/Off Command
CSU-2 On/Off Command

Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 M2 M3 M8 M9 M14 M16 N2 N3 N8 N9 N14 N16 O2 O3 O8 O9 O14 O16

SCALE NTS REF:
PCB DRAWN PCB SIEMENS WIRING DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 01 - RP
Siemens Ltd.
Page 683 of 709
0
.4
in
M
NOTE
25
25 mm x 40 mm
MCB 24V AC 24V AC
LNE
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
230V/24V - 80VA
230V/24V - 80VA
TXS1.EF10
125
SIEMENS
TXI2.OPEN-1 TXI2.OPEN-2
40
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
PXC-100.ED
125
40 mm x 40 mm
TXS1.12F10 TXM1.16D-1 TXM1.8D-2 TXM1.8U-3 TXM1.8U-4 TXM1.8U-5
40
40 mm x 40 mm
DDC PANEL
730
760
TXM1.8U-3
TXM1.8U-5
TXM1.16D-1
24V G,G0
295
Earthing stud CABLE COLOR
TXM1.8D-2
TXM1.8U-4
40
40 mm x 40 mm
40
GLAND PLATE 40 124 40 124 40 124 40 164 40
0
21
736
760

1 760 x 760 x 210
37,5
Mounting Plate
2 E & I Core Transformer 230 / 24V AC - 80 VA 2 Nos.

210
150
75

37,5
4 MCB 230 V, 6 A SP 2 Nos.
5 MOV 30 V 2 Nos.
115 115
6 Fuse TB WAGO - 24 V 4 Nos.
530 25 mm x 40 mm 0.8 Meters.

PVC Slotted Cable Tray
760
DIN Rail
9 DDC PXC-100.ED 1 No.
TXS1.12F10 1 No.
10 Module TXS1.EF 10 1 No.
Modules 5 Nos.
TXI2.OPEN 2 Nos.

SCALE NTS REF:
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 02 - MP

Siemens Ltd.
Page 684 of 709
Sl.No. Rev DATE NAME LOCATION: 8TH FLOOR, DATA CENTER - BMS ROOM Sheet: 1 of 4
UPS DB
A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33
L N E
01 02 03 TB 1
WLD Panel 2 - Zone 1 Water Leak Alarm

WLD Panel 2 - Common Alarm

WLD Panel 2 - Healthy Status

(SP MCB 230 V)
To TXS1.EF10 (24V AC)
To TXS1.EF10 (0V AC)
DDC COMMUNICATION CABLE TO NETWORK SWITCH

TB A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33
6A SP MCB 230V
230V A.C
230V A.C
DDC COMMUNICATION IP PORT

50Hz
50Hz
1 2 3 3 4 5 6
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
CD
CS
24V~
24V~
L N L N
B 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
X1 X2 (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
TXM1.16D
24V A.C
24V A.C
0V 24V 0V 24V MOD-1

PXC100-E.D HMI/TOOL
TXS1.12F10 (1) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
A 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
CD
CS
TB
1 2
04 5A 4B 5A TB A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
4A 2A 4C 2A
between Modules
CD
TO TXS1.EF10 (2) CS
Rodent Repellant System Panel - 1 Healthy Status

MOV 30 V MOV 30 V
GND(G0) GND(G0)
24V (G)
5A 06 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
To Sensors
5B 06 A
& Actuators GND(G0)

SCALE NTS REF:
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS WIRING DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 02 - MP
Siemens Ltd.
Page 685 of 709
AB
Sl.No.
between Modules
1
18
A1
A1
(1)
(9)
2
19
FIRE ALARM STATUS
Rev
A2
A2
MOD-2
3
20
A3
A3
(2)
(10)
4
21
WLD Panel 3 - Zone 2 Water Leak Alarm Spare
ASBUILT DRAWING
A4
A4
5
22
(3)
6
(11)
23
A5 A6
A5 A6
7
24
A7
A7
(4)
(12)
8
25
TXM1.8D
A8
A8
A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
9
26
DATE
25.03.2021
PCB
NAME
between Modules
DATE
SCALE
24V (G)
24V (G)
DRAWN
CHECKED
GND (G0)
GND (G0)
SB
NTS
PCB
2
C1
C1
19
BMS Room - Temperature Sensor Monitoring (1) Staging Room - Temperature Sensor Monitoring
(5)
C2
C2
C9 C10
C9 C10
4
21
MOD-3
25.03.2021
G
G
6
23
7
BMS Room - RH Sensor Monitoring Staging Room - RH Sensor Monitoring
24
(2)
(6)
C3 C4
C3 C4
G0
G0
C11 C12
C11 C12
8
25
10
27
Backup Room - Temperature Sensor Monitoring Network Room - Temperature Sensor Monitoring
(3)
(7)
C5 C6
C5 C6
C13 C14
C13 C14
12
29
TXM1.8U
G
G
14
31
15
Backup Room - RH Sensor Monitoring Network Room - RH Sensor Monitoring

32
(4)
(8)
C7 C8
C7 C8
G0
G0
C15 C16
C15 C16
16
33
Siemens Ltd.
between Modules
SIEMENS
2
19
Server Room - Temperature Sensor-14 Monitoring Store Room - Temperature Sensor Monitoring
(1)
(5)
D1 D2
D1 D2
D9 D10
D9 D10
4
21
Page 686 of 709

MOD-4
G
G
6
23
Server Room - RH Sensor-14 Monitoring Store Room - RH Sensor Monitoring

24
(2)
(6)
D3 D4
D3 D4
G0
G0
D11 D12
D11 D12
8
25
TITLE :
PROJECT :
10
LOCATION:
27
Mux Room 2 - Temperature Sensor Monitoring Novac Room - Temperature Sensor Monitoring
(3)
(7)
D5 D6
D5 D6
D13 D14
D13 D14
12
TXM1.8U
29
D7
D7
G
G
14
31
15
Mux Room 2 - RH Sensor Monitoring Novac Room - RH Sensor Monitoring

32
(4)
(8)
D8
D8
G0
G0
D15 D16
D15 D16
16
33
between Modules
2
19
Electrical Room 1 - Temperature Sensor Monitoring Battery Room 1 - Temperature Sensor Monitoring
(1)
(5)
E1 E2
E1 E2
E9 E10
E9 E10
4
21
MOD-5
8TH FLOOR, DATA CENTER - BMS ROOM

G
G
6
23
Electrical Room 1 - RH Sensor Monitoring Battery Room 1 - RH Sensor Monitoring

24
(2)
(6)
E3 E4
E3 E4
G0
G0
E11 E12
E11 E12
8
25

10
27
Electrical Room 2 - Temperature Sensor Monitoring Battery Room 2 - Temperature Sensor Monitoring
(3)
(7)
E5 E6
E5 E6
E13 E14
E13 E14
12
29
TXM1.8U

G
G
14
31
15
Electrical Room 2 - RH Sensor Monitoring Battery Room 2 - RH Sensor Monitoring

32
(4)
(8)
E7 E8
E7 E8
G0
G0
E15 E16
E15 E16
16
33
REF:
Sheet:
To MOD-06 (TXM1.8U)
To MOD-06 (TXM1.8U)
To MOD-06 (TXM1.8U)
To MOD-06 (TXM1.8U)
DDC TAG:
DDC PANEL
3 of 4
DDC - 02 - MP
DDC - 02 - MP
CD
From TXS1.12F10 (1)
CS
(24V AC)
(0V AC)
3 4 5 6
24V~ CS CD
RX GND RX GND
- -
TXS1.EF10 (2) TXI2.OPEN (2) TXI2.OPEN (2)
CS CD
4 5
CD
between Modules
between Modules
TO TXS1.12F10 (3) CS

SCALE NTS REF:
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS WIRING DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 02 - MP
Siemens Ltd.
Page 687 of 709
NOTE
40
40 mm x 40 mm
0
.4
in
140
TXS1.EF10
M
TXM1.8U-6 TXM1.8U-7 TXM1.8U-8 TXM1.8U-9 TXM1.8U-10 TXI2.OPEN-3
40 mm x 40 mm
40
SIEMENS
530
TXM1.8U-7
TXM1.8U-9
24V G,G0
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
25 mm x 40 mm
CABLE COLOR
24V G,G0
260
TXM1.8U-10
TXM1.8U-6
TXM1.8U-8
DDC PANEL
40
Earthing stud 40 mm x 40 mm
600
10
40 130 40 90 40 90 40 90 25 115 40
730
GLAND PLATE
0
22
800
Gland Plate 530 mm x 150 mm

37,5
210
150
75

37,5
Sheet Steel Enclosure with 1 No.

1 Mounting Plate 800 x 600 x 220

115 570 115
PVC Slotted Cable Tray 40 mm x 40 mm 3.0 Meters.
3 (approximate)
800 25 mm x 40 mm 0.2 Meters.
DIN Rail
TXS1.EF10 1 No.
5 Module Modules 5 Nos.
TXI2.OPEN 1 No.

SCALE NTS REF:
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 02 - RP

Siemens Ltd.
Page 688 of 709
AB
Sl.No.
(0V AC)
(24V AC)
CS
CD
4
3
24V~
CS CD
Rev
4
5
CS
ASBUILT DRAWING
6
From TXS1.EF10 (2)
CD
TXS1.EF10 (3)
between Modules
DATE
25.03.2021
24V (G)
24V (G)
GND (G0)
GND (G0)
2
19
PCB
Server Room - Temperature Sensor-1 Monitoring Mux Room 1 - Temperature Sensor Monitoring
(1)
(5)
F1 F2
F1 F2
NAME
F9 F10
F9 F10
4
21
MOD-6
G
G
6
23
7
Server Room - RH Sensor-1 Monitoring Mux Room 1 - RH Sensor Monitoring
(2)
(6)
24
F3 F4
F3 F4
G0
G0
F11 F12
F11 F12
8
25
DATE
SCALE
DRAWN
CHECKED
10
27
Server Room - Temperature Sensor-12 Monitoring
(3)
(7)
F5 F6
F5 F6
F13 F14
F13 F14
TXM1.8U
12
29
SB
NTS
PCB
G
G
14
31
Server Room - RH Sensor-13 Monitoring Server Room - RH Sensor-12 Monitoring
15
(4)
(8)
32
F7 F8
F7 F8
G0
G0
F15 F16
F15 F16
16
33
25.03.2021
between Modules
2
19
Server Room - Temperature Sensor-8 Monitoring Server Room - Temperature Sensor-2 Monitoring
(1)
(5)
G1 G2
G1 G2
G9 G10
G9 G10
4
21
MOD-7
G
G
Siemens Ltd.
6
23

(2)
(6)
24
G0
G0
G3 G4
G3 G4
G11 G12
G11 G12
8
25
SIEMENS
10
27
(3)
(7)
G5 G6
G5 G6
G13 G14
G13 G14
TXM1.8U
12
29
G
G
14
31
Server Room - RH Sensor-11 Monitoring

15
(4)
(8)
32
Server Room - RH Sensor-10 Monitoring
G0
G0
G7 G8
G7 G8
G15 G16
G15 G16
16
33
Page 689 of 709

TITLE :
PROJECT :
LOCATION:
between Modules
2
19
(1)
(5)
H1 H2
H1 H2
H9 H10
H9 H10
4
21
MOD-8
G
G
6
23

(2)
(6)
24
H3 H4
H3 H4
G0
G0
H11 H12
H11 H12
8
25
10
27
(3)
(7)
H5 H6
H5 H6
H13 H14
H13 H14
TXM1.8U
12
29
G
G
14
31

15
(4)
(8)
32
H7 H8
H7 H8
G0
G0
H15 H16
H15 H16
16
33
between Modules
WIRING DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 02 - RP

I1
I1
I9
I9
2
G
19
Server Room - Temperature Sensor-4 Monitoring Battery Room 1 - Hydrogen Level Monitoring
(1)
(5)
I2
I2
G0
I10
I10
4
21
MOD-9
I3
I3
G
G
6
23
Server Room - RH Sensor-4 Monitoring Battery Room 2 - Hydrogen Level Monitoring

(2)
(6)
24
I4
I4
G0
G0
I11 I12
I11 I12
8
25
REF:
Sheet:
I5
I5
10
27
Spare
(3)
(7)

I6
I6
I13 I14
I13 I14
TXM1.8U
12
29
DDC TAG:
DDC PANEL
I7
I7
G
14
31
Server Room - RH Sensor-3 Monitoring Spare

15
(4)
(8)
32
I8
I8
G0
I15 I16
I15 I16
16
33
2 of 3
DDC - 02 - RP
DDC - 02 - RP
J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16
Spare
Spare
Spare
J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 Spare

J15 J16
24 32
19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
RX GND
(5) (6) (7) (8) -
MOD-10 TXM1.8U
TXI2.OPEN (3)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
7 15
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8
between Modules
between Modules
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8

SCALE NTS REF:
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS WIRING DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 02 - RP
Siemens Ltd.
Page 690 of 709
709
25 130 25 504 25
0
.4
25 mm x 40 mm
in
25
M
272
TRANSFORMER
193
150
230V/24V- PXC001.ED
150VA
SIEMENS
25 mm x 40 mm
L
25 mm x 40 mm
25
N
E
24 V AC
24V Neutral
25 mm x 40 mm
25 mm x 40 mm
LAN
194
PXC001.ED
730
25 mm x 40 mm
25
760
DDC PANEL
188
PXC001.ED
Earthing stud
40
40 mm x 40 mm
40
Mounting plate
Size - 549 x 730 x 3.0
GLAND PLATE
0
21
760
Bill of Materials:

38
Sheet Steel Enclosure with

1 760 x 760 x 210 1 No.
Gland Plate 370 mm x 150 mm Mounting Plate
210
150
74
2 E & I Core Transformer 230 / 24V AC - 150 VA 1 No.
3 Terminal Blocks ( 6 mm ) 2.5 Sq.mm 16 Nos.

38
4 MCB 230 V, 6A SP 1 No.
5 MOV 30 V 1 No.
6 Fuse TB 24 V 2 Nos.
7 PVC Slotted Cable Tray 25 mm x 40 mm 3.2 Meters.

370
8 DIN Rail 40 mm 0.5 Meters.
600
9 DDC PXC001.ED 3 Nos.
Date 25.03.21 DDC PANEL

Project : GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER, BANGALORE
REF:
DDC-03
Scale 1:1
Drawn PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR
Title : DDC TAG: DDC-03
AB ASBUILT DRAWING 25.03.21 PCB Checked SB PXC001.ED - 3 NOS.
Siemens Ltd.
Page 691 of 709
Sl.No. Rev Date Name Location: 8TH FLOOR, DATA CENTER - ELECTRICAL ROOM 1 Sheet: 1 of 2
UPS DB
L N E
TB 01 02 03
DDC CO MMUNICA TIO N CA B L E TO NETWORK SWITCH DDC CO MMUNICA TIO N CA B L E TO NETWORK SWITCH DDC CO MMUNICA TIO N CA B L E TO NETWORK SWITCH
DDC CO MMUNICA TION IP PORT DDC CO MMUNICA TION IP PORT DDC CO MMUNICA TION IP PORT
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
24V 24V 24V
PXC001.ED (1) PXC001.ED (2) PXC001.ED (3)

6A SP MCB 230V
MMI/TOOL MMI/TOOL MMI/TOOL
RS485 RS485 RS485
CE +
CE +
CE +
CE -
CE -
CE -
+ - - -
+
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
230V A.C
50Hz
L N
In-row Units 7KT Meters 7KT Meters
150 VA X1
24V A.C
0V 24V
TB 6 7 8 TB 6 7 8 TB 6 7 8
TB
04 5A
4A 2A
24V (G)
MODBUS Ne twork MODBUS Ne twork MODBUS Ne twork
MOV 30 V
GND(G0)
5A
5B
Date 25.03.21 DDC PANEL

Project : GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER, BANGALORE
REF:
DDC-03
Scale 1:1
Drawn PCB SIEMENS STANDARD WIRING DIAGRAM FOR
Title : DDC TAG: DDC-03
AB ASBUILT DRAWING 25.03.21 PCB Checked SB PXC001.ED - 3 NOS.
Siemens Ltd.
Page 692 of 709
Sl.No. Rev Date Name Location: 8TH FLOOR, DATA CENTER - ELECTRICAL ROOM 1 Sheet: 2 of 2
NOTE
0
.4
in
M
2. All cable entries from bottom through
40
40 mm x 40 mm
LNE LNLN LN LN M CB
cable gland plate
230V / 24V - 150VA

2 4V AC
T RAN SFO RMER

2 4V Neu tral
TXS1.EF10
140
TXM1.6R-6 TXI2 .S.OPEN TXI2.OPEN
3.Panel dimension 760mm (W)x 760mm(H) x 210mm(D)
SIEMENS
4. Panel color gray
40
40 mm x 40 mm
5. PXC50-E.D
Controller Dimension 296mm x 176mm x 78mm
140
PXC50-E.D TXS1.12F10 TXM1.8X-1 TXM1.8X-2 TXM1.8X-3 TXM1.8X-4 TXM1.16D-5
6. Bulk Indication Lamp
702
40
40 mm x 40 mm
CABLE COLOR
2 4V (G,G0)
TXM1.8X-2
DDC PANEL 1. Mains Power- P-Red, N-Black, & E- Green
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
760
40 mm x 40 mm
2. 24V AC-Blue Color Cable with ferrule" G" for 24V,
40 mm x 40 mm
TXM1.8X-1
262
TXM1.16D-5
TXM1.8X-3
Black color Cable with ferrule "G0" for 0V and
TXM1.8X-4
Earthing stud
TXM1.6R-6
TXM1.8X-2
G0 to be connected to the panel earth
40
40 mm x 40 mm
40 90 40 90 40 90 40 90 40 90 65
4. D.O ( Digital Output ) Cable - Blue
715
5. Other Field cables – Gray
GLAND PLATE
Mounting plate
0
21
Size - 710 x 590 x 2.5
760
Bill of Materials:

1 Mounting Plate 760mm (W)x 760mm(H) x 210mm(D)
38
150
75 GLAND PLATE
210 Terminal Blocks ( 6 mm )
38 3 Phoenix - 2.5 Sq.mm 160 Nos.
(Maximum)
4 MCB 230 V, 6 A SP 2 Nos.

115 115
5 MOV 30 V 2 Nos.
530 6 Fuse TB WAGO - 24 V 10 Nos.

DIN Rail
PXC50-E.D 1 No.
9 DDC TXS1.12F10 1 No.
TXS1.EF10 1 No.
TXI2.OPEN 1 No.
TXI2.S.OPEN 1 No.
10 Modules MODULES 6 Nos.
11 Relays ----
DATE 25.03.2021 DDC PANEL PXC50-E.D

PROJECT : GOLD HILL EXCELSIOR DATA CENTER, BANGALORE
SCALE NTS REF: DDC - 04
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 04

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 04
Siemens Ltd.
Page 693 of 709
AB
Sl.No.
6A SP MCB
L
(230 V)
L
N
230V A.C
50Hz
UPS DB
04
4B
4A
4C
TB 01 02 03
N
X1
MOV 30 V
24V
5B
5A
2A
1A
2A
5A
TB
150 VA
24V (G)
GND(G0)
TRANSFORMER-1 FOR CONTROLLERS
Rev
ASBUILT DRAWING
1
24V~
2
3
DATE
25.03.2021
PXC50-E.D
PCB
NAME
ETHERNET
HMI/TOOL
DATE
SCALE
DRAWN
CHECKED
SB
NTS
PCB
1
CS
3
24V~
2
CD
4
25.03.2021
B
5
2 4V (G)
CS
G ND(G 0)
6
CD
TO TXS1.EF10
CD
CS
TXS1.12F10
between Modules
2
19
A2
G
BYPASS LINE MODULATING VALVE CONTROL CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER SUPPLY TEMP
G0
20
A3
Siemens Ltd.
(1)
(5)
3
21
CHILLER PLANT A CHILLER PLANT B

A4
A19 A20 A21
6
23
SIEMENS
A6
BYPASS LINE MODULATING VALVE FEEDBACK CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER RETURN TEMP
A7
_
(2)
(6)
v~
_
v ~
7
25
CHILLER PLANT A
24
CHILLER PLANT B
A8
A23 A24 A25
10
27
G
BYPASS LINE MODULATING VALVE CONTROL CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER SUPPLY TEMP
G0
(3)
(7)
12
29
Page 694 of 709

CHILLER PLANT B
28
CHILLER PLANT B
11
A10 A11 A12

A27 A28 A29
TXM1.8X-(A-1)
14
31
BYPASS LINE MODULATING VALVE FEEDBACK CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER RETURN TEMP
_
(4)
(8)
v~
_
TITLE :
v ~
16
33
CHILLER PLANT B
15
32
CHILLER PLANT B
A14 A15 A16
A31 A32 A33
PROJECT :
LOCATION:
between Modules
2
19
A2
CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER SUPPLY TEMP EOL -CHW SUPPLY TEMPERATURE
A3
20
(1)
(5)
3
21
CHILLER PLANT A CHILLER PLANT A

A4
A19 A20 A21
6
23
A6
CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER RETURN TEMP EOL -CHW RETURN TEMPERATURE
A7
(2)
(6)
v~
_
_
v ~
7
25
24
CHILLER PLANT A CHILLER PLANT A

A8
A23 A24 A25
10
27
CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER SUPPLY TEMP EOL -CHW SUPPLY TEMPERATURE
(3)
(7)
12
29

28
11
A10 A11 A12

A27 A28 A29
TXM1.8X-(B-2)
14
31
CHILLED WATER COMMON HEADER RETURN TEMP EOL -CHW RETURN TEMPERATURE
(4)
(8)
v~
_
_
v ~
16
33
15
32

A14 A15 A16
A31 A32 A33
GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 04

between Modules
2
19
A2
CHW DIFF PRESSURE MONITORING CHW PRESSURE MONITORING SUPPLY

A3
20
(1)
(5)
3
21
CHILLER PLANT A RISER CHILLER PLANT B

A4
A19 A20 A21
6
23
A6
CHW DIFF PRESSURE MONITORING CHW PRESSURE MONITORING RETURN

REF:
A7
(2)
(6)
v~
_
_
Sheet:
v ~
7
25
24
CHILLER PLANT B RISER CHILLER PLANT B

A8
A23 A24 A25
DDC TAG:
10
27
DDC PANEL
CHW PRESSURE MONITORING SUPPLY SPARE

(3)
(7)
12
29
CHILLER PLANT A
28
11
A10 A11 A12

A27 A28 A29
TXM1.8X-(C-3)
14
31
2 of 3
CHW PRESSURE MONITORING RETURN SPARE

(4)
(8)
_
v~
_
v ~
DDC - 04
DDC - 04
16
33
15
32
CHILLER PLANT A
A14 A15 A16
A31 A32 A33
PXC50-E.D
TO ISOLATION VALVE TO ISOLATION VALVE
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
230VAC Supply 230VAC Supply
P P
230V 230V
ISOLATION VALVE OPEN/CLOSE CONTROL
ISOLATION VALVE OPEN/CLOSE RETURN

BTU METER INTEGRATION PAHU ER01 & ER02
MODBUS/RS 485 MODBUS/RS 485
CHILLER PLANT B
CHILLER PLANT B
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
F19 F20 F21 F25 F26 F27 F31 F32 F33
CONTD.FROM
TXS1.12F10
A19 A20 A21 A23 A24 A25 A27 A28 A29 A31 A32 A33
20 26 32
24 28 32
3 4 5 6
_ _ 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 TX RX GND TX RX GND
20 v ~ v ~
CD
+ - + -
24V~
CS
19 21 25 27 31 33
19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 B
(4) (5) (6)
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
TXM1.8X-(D-4) TXM1.16D-(E-5) TXS1.EF10 TXM1.6R-(F-6) TXI2.S.OPEN TXI2.OPEN

(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) (2) (3)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
2 4 8 10 14 16
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
_ _ A
v~ v~
CS
CD
3 11
7 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 2 3 9 15
A2 A3 A4 A6 A7 A8 A10 A11 A12 A14 A15 A16

between Modules
FEEDBACK CONTROL SUPPLY CHILLER PLANT A
FEEDBACK CONTROL RETURN CHILLER PLANT A
FEEDBACK CONTROL SUPPLY CHILLER PLANT B
FEEDBACK CONTROL RETURN CHILLER PLANT B
F2 F3 F4 F8 F9 F10 F14 F15 F16
between Modules
between Modules
between Modules
ISOLATION VALVE OPEN/CLOSE CONTROL

CHILLER CONDENSOR PUMP TRIP STATUS
ISOLATION VALVE OPEN/CLOSE RETURN

CHILLER PLANT B COMMON RUN STATUS
CHILLER PRIMARY PUMP TRIP STATUS
LINE ISOLATION VALVE OPEN/CLOSE
ENABLE/DISABLE COMMAND
WATER COOLED CHILLERS


CHILLER TRIP STATUS
CHILLER PLANT B
CHILLER PLANT A
CHILLER PLANT A
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
P P
230V 230V
230VAC Supply 230VAC Supply
TO ISOLATION VALVE TO ISOLATION VALVE

ACTUATOR ACTUATOR

SCALE NTS REF: DDC - 04
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR FOR DDC - 04

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 04
Siemens Ltd.
Page 695 of 709
NOTE
cable gland plate
3.Panel dimension 800mm x 600mm x 220mm
4. Panel color gray
40 mm x 40 mm 40 6. PXC100-E.D
Controller Dimension (162 x 74 x 90) mm
SIEMENS
140 7. Bulk Indication Lamp
PXC100-E.D TXS1.12F10 TXM1.8D-1 TXM1.16D-2 TXM1.16D-3 TXM1.16D-4 TXM1.16D-5
40 mm x 40 mm 40
TXM1.16D-3
CABLE COLOR
TXM1.8D-1 24V (G,G0)
TXM1.16D-2
530
40 mm x 40 mm
DDC PANEL 24V Neutral
40 mm x 40 mm
24V AC
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
MCB
600 Earthing stud 260
TXM1.16D-3
TXM1.16D-4
TXM1.16D-5
TXM1.16D-2
TRANSFORMER
230V/24V - 80VA 3. Network Cable - White with ferrule A&B
40 mm x 40 mm 40
10 4. D.O (Digital Output) Cable - Blue
40 130 40 90 40 90 40 90 90 40 5. Other Field cables – Gray
GLAND PLATE 40
730
220
Mounting plate
800 Size - 730 x 530 x 2.5

1 Mounting Plate 800mm x 600mm x 220mm

38 4 MCB 230 V, 6 A SP 2 Nos.
5 MOV 30 V 2 Nos.
210 150 75
6 24V G,GO WAGO - 24 V 10 Nos.
60 mm x 40 mm 0.7 Meters.
DIN Rail
115 570 115
9 DDC PXC100-E.D 1 No.
10 Module 1/O Modules 5 Nos.

800

SCALE NTS REF: DDC - 05A
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 05A

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 05A
Siemens Ltd.
Page 696 of 709
RACK 3 FRONT DOTL STATUS
RACK 3 REAR DOTL STATUS

DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25
UPS DB
1 2 3 3 4 5 6
L N E
24V~
24V~
CS
CD
18 20 22 24 26
ETHERNET B
19 21 23 25
(9) (10) (11) (12)
TB 01 02 03
PXC100-E.D TXS1.12F10
HMI/TOOL
TXM1.8D-(A-1)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
6A SP MCB
A
(230 V)
CS
CD
2 4 6 8
1 2
230V A.C
1 3 5 7 9
50Hz
L N
X1
150 VA CD
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
24V TO TXS1.EF10 CS
between Modules
TB
04 5A
4A 2A


4B 1A
To Sensors
4C 2A
24V (G)
24V (G)
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
MOV 30 V
GND(G0)
5A
To Sensors
5B
& Actuators
GND(G0)
24V (G)
TRANSFORMER-1 FOR CONTROLLERS
GND(G0)

SCALE NTS REF: DDC - 05A
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 05A

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 05A
Siemens Ltd.
Page 697 of 709
AB
Sl.No.
between Modules
1
18
(1)
(9)
2
19
RACK 5 FRONT DOTL STATUS RACK 9 FRONT DOTL STATUS
3
20
DOTL STATUS DOTL STATUS
(2)
(10)
4
21
RACK 5 REAR DOTL STATUS RACK 9 REAR DOTL STATUS
Rev
5
22
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
(3)
(11)
6
23
ASBUILT DRAWING
7
24
(4)
(12)
8
25
9
26
(5)
(13)
10
27
11
28
(6)
(14)
12
29
DATE
13
30
25.03.2021
DOTL STATUS
TXM1.16D-(B-2)
DOTL STATUS
(7)
(15)
14
31
15
32
(8)
PCB
(16)
16
33
NAME
B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16

B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33

DATE
between Modules
SCALE
DRAWN
CHECKED
1
18
(1)
(9)
2
19
SB
NTS
PCB
3
20
DOTL STATUS (2) DOTL STATUS

(10)
4
21
25.03.2021
5
22

(3)
(11)
6
23

7
24

(4)
(12)
8
25

9
26

(5)
(13)
10
27

11
28

(6)
(14)
12
29

13
30
TXM1.16D-(C-3)

(7)
(15)
14
31

15
32
Siemens Ltd.
(8)
(16)
16
33

SIEMENS
between Modules
1
18
(1)
(9)
Page 698 of 709

2
19
RACK 21 FRONT DOTL STATUS SPARE

3
20
DOTL STATUS
(2)
4
(10)
21
RACK 21 REAR DOTL STATUS SPARE
TITLE :
5
22
DOTL STATUS
PROJECT :
(3)
LOCATION:
6
(11)
23

7
24
DOTL STATUS
(4)
(12)
8
25

9
26
DOTL STATUS
(5)
(13)
10
27

11
28
DOTL STATUS
(6)
(14)
12
29

13
30
TXM1.16D-(D-4)
DOTL STATUS
(7)
(15)
14
31

15
32
DOTL STATUS
(8)
(16)
16
33

DOTL STATUS
between Modules
GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 05A
1
18
(1)
(9)
2
19
SPARE SPARE
3

20
(2)
4
(10)
21
SPARE SPARE
5
22
(3)
6
(11)
23
SPARE SPARE
7
24
(4)
(12)
8
25
SPARE SPARE
9
26
(5)
(13)
REF:
10
27
Sheet:
SPARE SPARE
11
28
DDC TAG:
(6)
(14)
12
29
DDC PANEL
SPARE SPARE
13
30
TXM1.16D-(E-5)
(7)
(15)
14
31
SPARE SPARE
15
32
3 of 3
(8)
(16)
16
33
SPARE SPARE
DDC - 05A
DDC - 05A
PXC100-E.D
NOTE
cable gland plate
3.Panel dimension 800mm x 600mm x 220mm
4. Panel color gray
40 mm x 40 mm 40
SIEMENS
TXS1.EF10
TXM1.16D-6 TXM1.16D-7 TXM1.16D-8 TXM1.16D-9 TXI2.OPEN TXI2.OPEN 140
40 mm x 40 mm 40
CABLE COLOR
530
40 mm x 40 mm
DDC PANEL
40 mm x 40 mm
40 mm x 40 mm
TXM1.16D-8
TXM1.16D-9
40 mm x 40 mm
TXM1.16D-6
TXM1.16D-7
40 mm x 40 mm
600 Earthing stud 260
40 mm x 40 mm 40
10 4. D.O (Digital Output) Cable - Blue
40 130 40 90 40 90 40 90 90 40 5. Other Field cables – Gray
GLAND PLATE 40
730
220
Mounting plate
800 Size - 730 x 530 x 2.5

1 Mounting Plate 800mm x 600mm x 220mm
230 / 24V AC - 80 VA --
2 E & I Core Transformer 230 / 24V AC - 150 VA --
38 4 MCB 230 V, 6 A SP --
5 MOV 30 V
210 150 75 --
6 24V G,GO WAGO - 24 V 06 Nos.

60 mm x 40 mm 0.7 Meters.
DIN Rail
115 570 115
9 DDC --
1/O Modules 04 Nos.
800 10 Module 02 Nos.
TXI2.OPEN
DATE 25.03.2021 DDC PANEL --

SCALE NTS REF: DDC - 05B
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 05B

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 05B
Siemens Ltd.
Page 699 of 709
AB
Sl.No.
TXS1.12F10
CONTD.FROM
Rev
ASBUILT DRAWING
1
CS
A
24V~
2
CD
B
5
CS
6
CD
TXS1.EF10
DATE
25.03.2021
between Modules
1
18
PCB
F1
(1)
(9)
NAME
2
19
F2
3
20
F3
(2)
(10)
4
21
DATE
F4
SCALE
5
22
DRAWN
F5
(3)
CHECKED
(11)
6
23
F6
7
24
SB
F7
(4)
NTS
PCB
(12)
8
25
F8
9
26
25.03.2021
(5)
(13)
10
27
RACK 39 FRONT DOTL STATUS 11 RACK 43 FRONT DOTL STATUS

28

(6)
(14)
12
29

13
30
TXM1.16D-(F-6)

(7)
(15)
14
31

15
32

(8)
(16)
16
33

F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33
between Modules
Siemens Ltd.
1
18
SIEMENS
(1)
(9)
2
19

3
20

(2)
(10)
4
21

5
22
Page 700 of 709

(3)
(11)
6
23

7
24

(4)
(12)
8
25
TITLE :
9
PROJECT :
26
LOCATION:
(5)
(13)
10
27

11
28

(6)
(14)
12
29

13
30
TXM1.16D-(G-7)

(7)
(15)
14
31

15
32

(8)
(16)
16
33

between Modules
1
18
(1)
(9)
2
19

GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 05B
3
20

(2)
(10)
4
21

5

22

(3)
(11)
6
23

7
24

(4)
(12)
8
25

9
26

(5)
(13)
10
27

11
28
DOTL STATUS
(6)
REF:
(14)
12
29
Sheet:

13
30
TXM1.16D-(H-8)
DOTL STATUS
DDC TAG:
(7)
(15)
14
31
DDC PANEL

15
32
DOTL STATUS
(8)
(16)
16
33
--

2 of 2
DOTL STATUS
DDC - 05B
DDC - 05B
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM
BATTERY ROOM 1 BATTERY ROOM 2
MODBUS/RS 485 MODBUS/RS 485



DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
TX RX GND TX RX GND
+ - + -
19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
TXM1.16D-(I-9)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
TXI2.OPEN TXI2.OPEN
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

between Modules
between Modules
between Modules


DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DOTL STATUS
DATE 25.03.2021 DDC PANEL --

SCALE NTS REF: DDC - 05B
DRAWN PCB SIEMENS GA DIAGRAM OF DDC PANEL FOR DDC - 05B

TITLE : DDC TAG: DDC - 05B
Siemens Ltd.
Page 701 of 709
Building Automation System Architecture Siemens Technology and Services Pvt. Ltd
IBMS SERVER BMS MONITORING SCREENS
55" LED MONITOR 55" LED MONITOR
Electrical Room-1 & 2

BACnet / IP
BACnet / IP
ACB – Main Incoming ACB – Main Incoming 14 Nos ON/OFF Command BMS Room
BACnet / IP
Panel 1 Panel 1 CSU ON/OFF Status Battery rooms
DDC-3
Staging Room
Server Room Backup Room
BACnet / IP
Electrical Room-1 & 2 DDC-1
15 Nos Electrical Room-1 & 2 MUX rooms
IN ROW UNITS Modbus RTU
6 Nos
UPS Hard Wired
Isolation Transformer 1 Isolation Transformer 2 112 Nos ON/OFF Status Main Incoming Panel (2 Nos)
Breakers Trip Status UPS panel - 400KVA (2 Nos)
Main Incoming Panel 1, 100 KVA Modbus RTU UPS panel - 100KVA (2 Nos)
UPS O/P Panel 1, EMDB Panel,
BACnet / IP
Heater/Humidifer Panel Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU
7KT Meters 16 Nos Modbus RTU
BACnet / IP 16 Nos Common Critical Alarm

Access Control System Door Open Too Long
Alarm
400 KVA UPS O/P Panel – 1 & 2,
SNMP
BBT Feed Boxes
Server Room – 14 Nos

7KT Meters 22 Nos Modbus RTU
Network Room – 1 No
BMS Room Mux Rooms – 2 Nos
Battery room 26 Nos Temperature & RH Room Temperature Staging Room – 1 No
Backup Room Fault Status sensors Room Humidity Backup Room – 1 No
10 Nos Aspiration Smoke
Staging Room Fire-1 Electrical Rooms – 2 Nos
Detection Battery Rooms – 2 Nos
Network Room Fire-2
Server Room Trouble Points taken on BMS via FAS Store Room – 1 No
MUX room Integration Fire Suppression Room – 1 No
Electrical Room BMS Room – 1 No
Server Room
RACK iPDUs 2 Nos

Hydrogen Sensor Hydrogen Level Battery Rooms
100 Nos DDC-2
Server Room
Network Room Hard Wired
Gas Release Status
Mux Rooms 10 Nos
GBFSS Panel Fault
Staging Room Gas Based Fire
Backup Room Fire Input to GBFSS Panel 3 Nos Panel at BMS Room
Suppression System Rodent Repellent System Panel Healthy Status
Electrical Rooms Covers all areas of DC
Battery Rooms Points taken on BMS via FAS
Integration
Network Room
2 Nos
PAHU Modbus RTU
Server Room
3 Nos Panel Healthy Status Network Room
Water Leak Detection Common Alarm Staging Room
Zone Leakage Alarms Backup Room
PAC4200 Modbus RTU Electrical Rooms
14 Nos
DDC-4 Main Incoming Panel – 2 &

100 kVA UPS Output Panel -2
BACnet / IP 7KT Meters 13 Nos Modbus RTU
2 Nos
Hardwired
BTU Meters M-Bus Chiller Parameters
Electrical Room – 1 & 2
4 Nos
PAHU Modbus RTU
BACnet / IP
DDC-5
Battery Room-1 108 Nos

Battery Monitoring Battery Monitoring 2 Nos
System – 400 KVA System – 100 KVA
Modbus RTU
Hardwired Rack DOTL Alarm
Battery Room-2
Battery Monitoring Battery Monitoring 2 Nos
Modbus RTU
System – 400 KVA System – 100 KVA
Page 702 of 709

Handing Over
Document
11
Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Page 703 of 709

Preventive Maintenance Schedule IBMS System – STS DC Bangalore
Siemens Technology & Services Pvt Ltd
Data Center Preventive Maintenance Schedule - IBMS System
System : IBMS installed by Siemens Smart Infrastructure – Regional Solution and Service (SI RSS)
Warranty Period H1 Period H1 PM Month H2 Period H2 PM Month

Sl. No Warranty Year
From To From To From To
1 1 Apr-21 Mar-22 Apr-21 Sep-21 Jul-21 Oct-21 Mar-22 Jan-22
Document No. Document Description : 1/1

SIE/STS-DC Bangalore/EM/002 Valid from Preventive Maintenance Schedule IBMS System
Version No. 01.04.2021 This Supersedes:
1 Nil
Page 704 of 709

Handing Over
Document
12
Escalation Matrix
Page 705 of 709

Service Organization & Escalation Matrix – STS DC Bangalore
Service Organization & Escalation Matrix -STS DC Bangalore
SR.
Name Designation Contact Address Contact No. Number E-Mail ID
No
Siemens Technology and Services Private

Limited
Level 1 Call Center - 18004190995 mailto:rginstsicbtsupport.in@siemens.com
GS BPS BSS IN PSC
Hosur Road,Bengaluru 560068
Siemens Ltd. # 49, Ground Floor Jyothi

Level 2 Mr. Adarsh Service Engineer 8547332642 adarsh.v@siemens.com
Mahal, St.Marks Road Bangalore - 560 001

Level 3 Mr. Swornadhas M R Team Lead 9611949068 swornadhas.mr@siemens.com
Bangalore Regional Siemens Ltd. # 49, Ground Floor Jyothi

Level 4 Mr. Krishna Upadhya 9008839000 Krishna.upadhya@siemens.com
Manager Mahal, St.Marks Road Bangalore - 560 001
South Central
Level 5 Mr. Ashok Kumar G Regional Service 9663007227 ashok.reddy@siemens.com
Manager
South Central
Level 6 Mr. Sri Ram Kumar N Regional Branch 9844114767 sriramkumar.n@siemens.com
Head
Document No. Document Description : 1/1

SIE/STS-DC Bangalore/EM/002 Valid from Service Org & Escalation Matrix
Version No. 01.04.2021 This Supersedes:
1 Nil
Page 706 of 709

Handing Over
Document
13
Warranty Certficate
Page 707 of 709

WARRANTY CERTIFICATE
Under this warranty M/s. Siemens Limited (here after referred to as the
Company) undertakes to provide maintenance and service of the IBMS, Electrical
Panels, Bus Bar Trunking (Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning
of IBMS/Electrical Panels/Bus Bar Trunking) installed by the Company for
M/S Siemens Technology & Services (STS),Gold Hill Excelsior – South
Tower 8th Floor, Electronic City Phase II Bangalore-560100.
(PO Ref:- 4510224458/4510225339 dated :- 27/11/2020) and commissioned on
31st March 2021.
The charges for the services to be provided under this Warranty shall be NIL.
SERVICES/FACILITIES COVERED BY THE WARRANTY:
1. Additional visits for service during the period of warranty in the event of break
down/malfunction of the equipment.
2. Repair/replacement of the system components during the period of the warranty at

no extra charge.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF WARRANTY:
1. The warranty is applicable only for 60 months i.e. Start Date: 1st April 2021
End Date: 31st March 2026 and will apply if and only if all dues to the company
are paid in full by the client.
2. The warranty shall not cover free visits under the following circumstances :
a. Damage done to equipment due to floods, fire, accident, riot, breakages,

pest, misuse, tampering, incorrect operation etc.
b. Failure to observe the operating instructions and precautions.
c. Visits for retraining.
d. Defects/failures resulting from servicing/repairs done by a person

other than the company.
e. Defects in system arising out of structural/environmental changes/

variations.
Page 1 of 2
Page 708 of 709

In any such event the customer shall be billed for the visit carried out as per the
prevailing rates of the Company.
4. Services under warranty exclude painting of body, replacement of decorative

materials, plastic Housings etc.
5. The equipment should be made available for servicing as and when our Service
Technician visits the site as per schedule/prior intimation. Failure to make the
systems available for maintenance will be treated as service rendered and no
refund shall accrue on this account.
6. Every visit by our Service Technician will be made within reasonable time from
receipt of a complaint for break-down of the equipment and will be made only
during working hours of our service department and no calls will be made on
Saturday/Sunday/holidays.
7. The company does not represent that the systems supplied/maintained by it will
not malfunction and consequently the company shall have no liability for any
resulting damage/loss on account of such malfunction. The company’s liability is
restricted to rectification of the system on receipt of such a complaint.
8. The company does not represent that the system supplied/maintained may not be
compromised or circumvented or that the product will prevent personal injury or
property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise or that the product will in all
cases provide adequate warning or protection. CONSEQUENTLY, THE COMPANY
SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR
OTHER LOSS BASED ON A CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING.
9. The warranty is not transferable.
Signature on behalf Signature on behalf

Of the customer of the company
Name : Name :
Designation : Designation:
Signature : Signature :
***********************************
Page 2 of 2
Page 709 of 709

Gold Hill DC HOD - Building Management System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gold Hill DC HOD - Building Management System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gold Hill DC HOD - Building Management System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

s

HANDOVER DOCUMENT – BMS SYSTEM

CLIENT : M/s. SIEMENS TECHNOLOGY & SERVICES.

CONSULTANT : M/s. NETCON TECHNOLOGIES (I) PVT. LTD.

Package : Building Management System

Sl No Description Page Reference

Digitally signed by Dharmaraj C

1 BMS Software Siemens Desigo CC

Unrestricted Page 5 of 709

Answers for infrastructure and cities.

Enhance security now,

Siemens Building Technologies

Siemens Ltd Siemens LLC

Answers for infrastructure and cities.

Automation stations PXC....D

Modular automation station with connected TX-I/O modules

Overview of automation stations – modular series

BACnet/IP PXC00-E.D PXC50-E.D PXC100-E.D PXC200-E.D

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

TXM1.. : The flexible range of TX-I/O modules for signaling, measuring,

TX Open: Flexible platform to integrate third-party systems and devices such

PXX-L11/12.. : Extension modules allow for flexibly connecting LonWorks

PXX-.. devices 2) Type Data sheet

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

PXX-.. device Type Data sheet

TXA1.IBE : Remote IO Islands with Integration

Device Type Data sheet

Device combinations with the automation stations

Desigo Control Point

Operator units for automation stations

Type Data sheet

Adapter for Firmware download PXA-C2

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

The compact construction enables the automation stations to be mounted on a

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

Remaining battery life after a "Low batt" event:

*) Wink command pattern:

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

General device data Operating voltage AC 24 V ± 20% (SELV / PELV) or

Operating data Processor Motorola Power PC MPC885

Communication interfaces PXC....D PXC...-E.D

*) only ONE PXM20 per automation station

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

Protection data Housing protection standard IP 20 to EN 60529

Ambient conditions Normal operation To IEC 60721-3-3

Environmental compatibility Product environmental declaration (contains CM1E9222 *)

Dimensions See “Dimensions”

Weight Excluding packaging With packaging

*) The documents can be downloaded from http://siemens.com/bt/download.

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

Plug (C) Pin description Pin description

Plug (E) 1. LONW ORKS Data A (CLA) 5. Unused

Plug (G) 1. unused 5. Unused

Connecting TX-I/O See Planning and Installation Guide TX-I/O, CM110562.

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

Automation stations, system controllers PXC….D

The device is considered electrical and electronic equipment for disposal in

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

Siemens PXC....D PXC...-E.D + PXA40-… – Automation stations modular series CM1N9222en_15

K2 ) K1 ) K1 *) Pulse on I/O point (4) = Stage 3